Lesson

1
History Of Refrigeration
1

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

Objectives of the lesson:

The objectives of this lesson are to:
1. Define refrigeration and air conditioning (Section 1.1)
2. Introduce aspects of various natural refrigeration methods, namely:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

Use of ice transported from colder regions (Section 1.2)

Use of ice harvested in winter and stored in ice houses (Section 1.2)
Use of ice produced by nocturnal cooling (Section 1.2.1)
Use of evaporative cooling (Section 1.2.2)
Cooling by salt solutions (Section 1.2.3)

3. Introduce historical aspects of various artificial refrigeration methods, namely:

a. Vapour compression refrigeration systems, including
i. Domestic refrigeration systems (Section 1.3.1.1) ii.
Air conditioning systems (Section 1.3.1.2)
b. Vapour absorption refrigeration systems (Section 1.3.2)
c. Solar energy based refrigeration systems (Section 1.3.3)
d. Air cycle refrigeration systems (Section 1.3.4)
e. Steam and vapor jet refrigeration systems (Section 1.3.5)
f. Thermoelectric refrigeration systems (Section 1.3.6), and
g. Vortex tubes (Section 1.3.7)
At the end of the lesson the student should be able to:
3. Identify various natural and artificial methods of refrigeration
4. List salient points of various refrigeration techniques, and
5. Name important landmarks in the history of refrigeration

1.1. Introduction
Refrigeration may be defined as the process of achieving and maintaining a
temperature below that of the surroundings, the aim being to cool some product or space to
the required temperature. One of the most important applications of refrigeration has been the
preservation of perishable food products by storing them at low temperatures. Refrigeration
systems are also used extensively for providing thermal comfort to human beings by means
of air conditioning. Air Conditioning refers to the treatment of air so as to simultaneously
control its temperature, moisture content, cleanliness, odour and circulation, as required by
occupants, a process, or products in the space. The subject of refrigeration and air
conditioning has evolved out of human need for food and comfort, and its history dates back
to centuries. The history of refrigeration is very interesting since every aspect of it, the
availability of refrigerants, the prime movers and the developments in compressors and the
methods of refrigeration all are a part of it. The French scientist Roger Thvenot has written
an excellent book on the history of refrigeration throughout the world. Here we present only a

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

brief history of the subject with special mention of the pioneers in the field and some
important events.
Q: Which of the following can be called as a refrigeration process?
6. Cooling of hot ingot from 1000oC to room temperature
7. Cooling of a pot of water by mixing it with a large block of ice
8. Cooling of human beings using a ceiling fan
9. Cooling of a hot cup of coffee by leaving it on a table
10.
Cooling of hot water by mixing it with tap water
11.
Cooling of water by creating vacuum over it

Ans: b) and f)

1.2. Natural Refrigeration

In olden days refrigeration was achieved by natural means such as the use of ice or
evaporative cooling. In earlier times, ice was either:
12. Transported from colder regions,
13. Harvested in winter and stored in ice houses for summer use or,
14. Made during night by cooling of water by radiation to stratosphere.
In Europe, America and Iran a number of icehouses were built to store ice. Materials
like sawdust or wood shavings were used as insulating materials in these icehouses. Later on,
cork was used as insulating material. Literature reveals that ice has always been available to
aristocracy who could afford it. In India, the Mogul emperors were very fond of ice during
the harsh summer in Delhi and Agra, and it appears that the ice used to be made by nocturnal
cooling.
In 1806, Frederic Tudor, (who was later called as the ice king) began the trade in ice
by cutting it from the Hudson River and ponds of Massachusetts and exporting it to various
countries including India. In India Tudors ice was cheaper than the locally manufactured ice
by nocturnal cooling. The ice trade in North America was a flourishing business. Ice was
transported to southern states of America in train compartments insulated by 0.3m of cork
insulation. Trading in ice was also popular in several other countries such as Great Britain,
Russia, Canada, Norway and France. In these countries ice was either transported from colder
regions or was harvested in winter and stored in icehouses for use in summer. The ice trade
reached its peak in 1872 when America alone exported 225000 tonnes of ice to various
countries as far as China and Australia. However, with the advent of artificial refrigeration the
ice trade gradually declined.
1.2.1. Art of Ice making by Nocturnal Cooling:
The art of making ice by nocturnal cooling was perfected in India. In this method ice
was made by keeping a thin layer of water in a shallow earthen tray, and then exposing the
tray to the night sky. Compacted hay of about 0.3 m thickness was used as insulation. The
water looses heat by radiation to the stratosphere, which is at around -55C and by early
morning hours the water in the trays freezes to ice. This method of ice production was very
popular in India.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

1.2.2. Evaporative Cooling:

As the name indicates, evaporative cooling is the process of reducing the temperature
of a system by evaporation of water. Human beings perspire and dissipate their metabolic
heat by evaporative cooling if the ambient temperature is more than skin temperature.
Animals such as the hippopotamus and buffalo coat themselves with mud for evaporative
cooling. Evaporative cooling has been used in India for centuries to obtain cold water in
summer by storing the water in earthen pots. The water permeates through the pores of
earthen vessel to its outer surface where it evaporates to the surrounding, absorbing its latent
heat in part from the vessel, which cools the water. It is said that Patliputra University
situated on the bank of river Ganges used to induce the evaporative-cooled air from the river.
Suitably located chimneys in the rooms augmented the upward flow of warm air, which was
replaced by cool air. Evaporative cooling by placing wet straw mats on the windows is also
very common in India. The straw mat made from khus adds its inherent perfume also to the
air. Now-a-days desert coolers are being used in hot and dry areas to provide cooling in
summer.
1.2.3. Cooling by Salt Solutions:
Certain substances such as common salt, when added to water dissolve in water and
absorb its heat of solution from water (endothermic process). This reduces the temperature of
the solution (water+salt). Sodium Chloride salt (NaCl) can yield temperatures up to -20C
and Calcium Chloride (CaCl2) up to - 50C in properly insulated containers. However, as it is
this process has limited application, as the dissolved salt has to be recovered from its solution
by heating.
Q. The disadvantages of natural refrigeration methods are:
15.
16.
17.
18.

They are expensive

They are uncertain
They are not environment friendly
They are dependent on local conditions

Ans: b) and d)
Q. Evaporative cooling systems are ideal for:
19.
20.
21.
22.

Hot and dry conditions

Hot and humid conditions
Cold and humid conditions
Moderately hot but humid conditions

Ans: a)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

1.3. Artificial Refrigeration

Refrigeration as it is known these days is produced by artificial means. Though it is
very difficult to make a clear demarcation between natural and artificial refrigeration, it is
generally agreed that the history of artificial refrigeration began in the year 1755, when the
Scottish professor William Cullen made the first refrigerating machine, which could produce
a small quantity of ice in the laboratory. Based on the working principle, refrigeration
systems can be classified as vapour compression systems, vapour absorption systems, gas
cycle systems etc.
1.3.1. Vapour Compression Refrigeration Systems:
The basis of modern refrigeration is the ability of liquids to absorb enormous
quantities of heat as they boil and evaporate. Professor William Cullen of the University of
Edinburgh demonstrated this in 1755 by placing some water in thermal contact with ether
under a receiver of a vacuum pump. The evaporation rate of ether increased due to the
vacuum pump and water could be frozen. This process involves two thermodynamic
concepts, the vapour pressure and the latent heat. A liquid is in thermal equilibrium with its
own vapor at a pressure called the saturation pressure, which depends on the temperature
alone. If the pressure is increased for example in a pressure cooker, the water boils at higher
temperature. The second concept is that the evaporation of liquid requires latent heat during
evaporation. If latent heat is extracted from the liquid, the liquid gets cooled. The temperature
of ether will remain constant as long as the vacuum pump maintains a pressure equal to
saturation pressure at the desired temperature. This requires the removal of all the vapors
formed due to vaporization. If a lower temperature is desired, then a lower saturation pressure
will have to be maintained by the vacuum pump. The component of the modern day
refrigeration system where cooling is produced by this method is called evaporator.
If this process of cooling is to be made continuous the vapors have to be recycled by
condensation to the liquid state. The condensation process requires heat rejection to the
surroundings. It can be condensed at atmospheric temperature by increasing its pressure. The
process of condensation was learned in the second half of eighteenth century. U.F. Clouet and
G. Monge liquefied SO2 in 1780 while van Marum and Van Troostwijk liquefied NH 3 in
1787. Hence, a compressor is required to maintain a high pressure so that the evaporating
vapours can condense at a temperature greater than that of the surroundings.
Oliver Evans in his book Abortion of a young Steam Engineers Guide published in
Philadelphia in 1805 described a closed refrigeration cycle to produce ice by ether under
vacuum. Jacob Perkins, an American living in London actually designed such a system
in1835. The apparatus described by Jacob Perkins in his patent specifications of 1834 is
shown in Fig.1.1. In his patent he stated I am enabled to use volatile fluids for the purpose of
producing the cooling or freezing of fluids, and yet at the same time constantly condensing
such volatile fluids, and bringing them again into operation without waste.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

Fig. 1.1. Apparatus described by Jacob Perkins in his patent specification of 1834.
The refrigerant (ether or other volatile fluid) boils in evaporator B taking heat from
surrounding water in container A. The pump C draws vapour away and compresses it
to higher pressure at which it can condense to liquids in tubes D, giving out heat to
water in vessel E. Condensed liquid flows through the weight loaded valve H, which
maintains the difference of pressure between the condenser and evaporator. The small
pump above H is used for charging the apparatus with refrigerant.
John Hague made Perkinss design into working model with some modifications. This
Perkins machine is shown in Fig.1.2. The earliest vapour compression system used either
sulphuric (ethyl) or methyl ether. The American engineer Alexander Twining (1801-1884)
received a British patent in 1850 for a vapour compression system by use of ether, NH 3 and
CO2.
The man responsible for making a practical vapor compression refrigeration system
was James Harrison who took a patent in 1856 for a vapour compression system using ether,
alcohol or ammonia. Charles Tellier of France patented in 1864, a refrigeration system using
dimethyl ether which has a normal boiling point of -23.6C.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

Fig.1.2. Perkins machine built by John Hague

Carl von Linde in Munich introduced double acting ammonia compressor. It required
pressures of more than 10 atmospheres in the condenser. Since the normal boiling point of
ammonia is -33.3C, vacuum was not required on the low pressure side. Since then ammonia
is used widely in large refrigeration plants.
David Boyle, in fact made the first NH3 system in 1871 in San Francisco. John
Enright had also developed a similar system in 1876 in Buffalo N.Y. Franz Windhausen
developed carbon dioxide (CO2) based vapor compression system in Germany in 1886. The
carbon dioxide compressor requires a pressure of about 80 atmospheres and therefore a very
heavy construction. Linde in 1882 and T.S.C. Lowe in 1887 tried similar systems in USA.
The CO2 system is a very safe system and was used in ship refrigeration until 1960s. Raoul
Pictet used SO2 (NBP -10C) as refrigerant. Its lowest pressure was high enough to prevent
the leakage of air into the system.
Palmer used C2H5Cl in 1890 in a rotary compressor. He mixed it with C2H5Br to
reduce its flammability. Edmund Copeland and Harry Edwards used iso-butane in 1920 in
small refrigerators. It disappeared by 1930 when it was replaced by CH 3Cl. Dichloroethylene
(Dielene or Dieline) was used by Carrier in centrifugal compressors in 1922-26.
1.3.1.1. Domestic refrigeration systems:
The domestic refrigerator using natural ice (domestic ice box) was invented in 1803
and was used for almost 150 years without much alteration. The domestic ice box used to be
made of wood with suitable insulation. Ice used to be kept at the top of the box, and low
temperatures are produced in the box due to heat transfer from ice by natural convection. A
drip pan is used to collect the water formed due to the melting of ice. The box has to be
replenished with fresh ice once all the ice melts. Though the concept is quite simple, the
domestic ice box suffered from several disadvantages. The user has to replenish the ice as
7

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

soon as it is consumed, and the lowest temperatures that could be produced inside the
compartment are limited. In addition, it appears that warm winters caused severe shortage of
natural ice in USA. Hence, efforts, starting from 1887 have been made to develop domestic
refrigerators using mechanical systems. The initial domestic mechanical refrigerators were
costly, not completely automatic and were not very reliable. However, the development of
mechanical household refrigerators on a large scale was made possible by the development of
small compressors, automatic refrigerant controls, better shaft seals, developments in
electrical power systems and induction motors. General Electric Company introduced the first
domestic refrigerator in 1911, followed by Frigidaire in 1915. Kelvinator launched the
domestic mechanical refrigerator in 1918 in USA. In 1925, USA had about 25 million
domestic refrigerators of which only 75000 were mechanical. However, the manufacture of
domestic refrigerators grew very rapidly, and by 1949 about 7 million domestic refrigerators
were produced annually. With the production volumes increasing the price fell sharply (the
price was 600 dollars in 1920 and 155 dollars in 1940). The initial domestic refrigerators used
mainly sulphur dioxide as refrigerant. Some units used methyl chloride and methylene
chloride. These refrigerants were replaced by Freon-12 in 1930s. In the beginning these
refrigerators were equipped with open type compressors driven by belt drive. General
Electric Company introduced the first refrigerator with a hermetic compressor in 1926. Soon
the open type compressors were completely replaced by the hermetic compressors. First
refrigerators used water-cooled condensers, which were soon replaced by air cooledcondensers. Though the development of mechanical domestic refrigerators was very rapid in
USA, it was still rarely used in other countries. In 1930 only rich families used domestic
refrigerators in Europe. The domestic refrigerator based on absorption principle as proposed
by Platen and Munters, was first made by Electrolux Company in 1931 in Sweden. In Japan
the first mechanical domestic refrigerator was made in 1924. The first dual temperature
(freezer-refrigerator) domestic refrigerator was introduced in 1939. The use of mechanical
domestic refrigerators grew rapidly all over the world after the Second World War. Today, a
domestic refrigerator has become an essential kitchen appliance not only in highly developed
countries but also in countries such as India. Except very few almost all the present day
domestic refrigerators are mechanical refrigerators that use a hermetic compressor and an air
cooled condenser. The modern refrigerators use either HFC-134a (hydro-fluoro-carbon) or
iso-butane as refrigerant.
1.3.1.2. Air conditioning systems:
Refrigeration systems are also used for providing cooling and dehumidification in
summer for personal comfort (air conditioning). The first air conditioning systems were used
for industrial as well as comfort air conditioning. Eastman Kodak installed the first air
conditioning system in 1891 in Rochester, New York for the storage of photographic films.
An air conditioning system was installed in a printing press in 1902 and in a telephone
exchange in Hamburg in 1904. Many systems were installed in tobacco and textile factories
around 1900. The first domestic air conditioning system was installed in a house in Frankfurt
in 1894. A private library in St Louis, USA was air conditioned in 1895, and a casino was air
conditioned in Monte Carlo in 1901. Efforts have also been made to air condition passenger
rail coaches using ice. The widespread development of air conditioning is attributed to the
American scientist and industrialist Willis Carrier. Carrier studied the control of humidity in
1902 and designed a central air conditioning plant using air washer in 1904. Due to the
pioneering efforts of Carrier and also due to simultaneous development of different
components and controls, air conditioning quickly became very popular, especially after
1923. At present comfort air conditioning is widely used in residences, offices, commercial
buildings, air ports, hospitals and in mobile applications such as rail coaches, automobiles,

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

aircrafts etc. Industrial air conditioning is largely responsible for the growth of modern
electronic, pharmaceutical, chemical industries etc. Most of the present day air conditioning
systems use either a vapour compression refrigeration system or a vapour absorption
refrigeration system. The capacities vary from few kilowatts to megawatts.
Figure 1.3 shows the basic components of a vapour compression refrigeration system.
As shown in the figure the basic system consists of an evaporator, compressor, condenser and
an expansion valve. The refrigeration effect is obtained in the cold region as heat is extracted
by the vaporization of refrigerant in the evaporator. The refrigerant vapour from the
evaporator is compressed in the compressor to a high pressure at which its saturation
temperature is greater than the ambient or any other heat sink. Hence when the high pressure,
high temperature refrigerant flows through the condenser, condensation of the vapour into
liquid takes place by heat rejection to the heat sink. To complete the cycle, the high pressure
liquid is made to flow through an expansion valve. In the expansion valve the pressure and
temperature of the refrigerant decrease. This low pressure and low temperature refrigerant
vapour evaporates in the evaporator taking heat from the cold region. It should be observed
that the system operates on a closed cycle. The system requires input in the form of
mechanical work. It extracts heat from a cold space and rejects heat to a high temperature
heat sink.

Fig.1.3. Schematic of a basic vapour compression refrigeration system

A refrigeration system can also be used as a heat pump, in which the useful output is
the high temperature heat rejected at the condenser. Alternatively, a refrigeration system can
be used for providing cooling in summer and heating in winter. Such systems have been built
and are available now.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

Q. Compared to natural refrigeration methods, artificial refrigeration methods are:

23.
Continuous
24.
Reliable
25.
Environment friendly
26.
Can work under almost all conditions
Ans. a), b) and d)
Q. In the evaporator of a vapour compression refrigeration system:
27.
A low temperature is maintained so that heat can flow from the external fluid
28.
Refrigeration effect is produced as the refrigerant liquid vaporizes
29.
A low pressure is maintained so that the compressor can run
30.
All of the above
Ans. a) and b)
Q. The function of a compressor in a vapour compression refrigeration system is to:
31.
To maintain the required low-side pressure in the evaporator
32.
To maintain the required high-side pressure in the condenser
33.
To circulate required amount of refrigerant through the system
34.
To safeguard the refrigeration system
Ans. a), b) and c)
Q. In a vapour compression refrigeration system, a condenser is primarily required so that:
35.
A high pressure can be maintained in the system
36.
The refrigerant evaporated in the evaporator can be recycled
37.
Performance of the system can be improved
38.
Low temperatures can be produced
Ans. b)
Q. The function of an expansion valve is to:
39.
Reduce the refrigerant pressure
40.
Maintain high and low side pressures
41.
Protect evaporator
42.
All of the above
Ans. b)
Q. In a domestic icebox type refrigerator, the ice block is kept at the top because:
43.
It is convenient to the user
44.
Disposal of water is easier
45.
Cold air can flow down due to buoyancy effect
46.
None of the
above Ans. c)
Q. An air conditioning system employs a refrigeration system to:
47.
Cool and dehumidify air supplied to the conditioned space
48.
To heat and humidify the air supplied to the conditioned space
49.
To circulate the air through the system
50.
To purify the supply
air Ans. a)

10

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

1.3.2. Vapour Absorption Refrigeration Systems:

John Leslie in 1810 kept H2SO4 and water in two separate jars connected together.
H2SO4 has very high affinity for water. It absorbs water vapour and this becomes the principle
of removing the evaporated water vapour requiring no compressor or pump. H 2SO4 is an
absorbent in this system that has to be recycled by heating to get rid of the absorbed water
vapour, for continuous operation. Windhausen in 1878 used this principle for absorption
refrigeration system, which worked on H 2SO4. Ferdinand Carre invented aqua-ammonia
absorption system in 1860. Water is a strong absorbent of NH 3. If NH3 is kept in a vessel that
is exposed to another vessel containing water, the strong absorption potential of water will
cause evaporation of NH3 requiring no compressor to drive the vapours. A liquid pump is
used to increase the pressure of strong solution. The strong solution is then heated in a
generator and passed through a rectification column to separate the water from ammonia. The
ammonia vapour is then condensed and recycled. The pump power is negligible hence; the
system runs virtually on low- grade energy used for heating the strong solution to separate the
water from ammonia. These systems were initially run on steam. Later on oil and natural gas
based systems were introduced. Figure 1.4 shows the essential components of a vapour
absorption refrigeration system. In 1922, Balzar von Platen and Carl Munters, two students at
Royal Institute of Technology, Stockholm invented a three fluid system that did not require a
pump. A heating based bubble pump was used for circulation of strong and weak solutions
and hydrogen was used as a non-condensable gas to reduce the partial pressure of NH 3 in the
evaporator. Geppert in 1899 gave this original idea but he was not successful since he was
using air as non-condensable gas. The Platen-Munters refrigeration systems are still widely
used in certain niche applications such as hotel rooms etc. Figure 1.5 shows the schematic of
the triple fluid vapour absorption refrigeration system.

Fig.1.4. Essential components of a vapour absorption refrigeration system

11

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

Fig.1.5. Schematic of a triple fluid vapour absorption refrigeration system

Another variation of vapour absorption system is the one based on Lithium Bromide
(LiBr)-water. This system is used for chilled water air-conditioning system. This is a
descendent of Windhausens machine with LiBr replacing H2SO4. In this system LiBr is the
absorbent and water is the refrigerant. This system works at vacuum pressures. The
condenser and the generator are housed in one cylindrical vessel and the evaporator and the
absorber are housed in second vessel. This also runs on low-grade energy requiring a boiler
or process steam.
1.3.3. Solar energy based refrigeration systems:
Attempts have been made to run vapour absorption systems by solar energy with
concentrating and flat plate solar collectors. Several small solar absorption refrigeration
systems have been made around 1950s in several countries. Professor G.O.G. L f of
America is one of the pioneers in the area of solar refrigeration using flat plate collectors. A
solar refrigeration system that could produce 250 kg of ice per day was installed in Tashkent,
USSR in 1953. This system used a parabolic mirror of 10 m 2 area for concentrating the solar
radiation. F. Trombe installed an absorption machine with a cylindro-parabolic mirror of 20
at Montlouis, France, which produced 100 kg of ice per day.
m
Serious consideration to solar refrigeration systems was given since 1965, due to the
scarcity of fossil fuel based energy sources. LiBr-water based systems have been developed
for air conditioning purposes. The first solar air conditioning system was installed in an
experimental solar house in University of Queensland, Australia in 1966. After this several
systems based on solar energy were built in many parts of the world including India. In 1976,
there were about 500 solar absorption systems in USA alone. Almost all these were based on
LiBr-water as these systems do not require very high heating temperatures. These systems
were mainly used for space air conditioning.
Intermittent absorption systems based on solar energy have also been built and
operated successfully. In these systems, the cooling effect is obtained during the nighttime,
while the system gets charged during the day using solar energy. Though the efficiency of
these systems is rather poor requiring solar collector area, they may find applications in
12

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

remote and rural areas where space is not a constraint. In addition, these systems are
environment friendly as they use eco-friendly refrigerants and run on clean and renewable
solar energy.
Solar adsorption refrigeration system with ammoniacates, sodium thiocyanate,
activated charcoal, zeolite as adsorbents and ammonia, alcohols or fluorocarbons as
refrigerants have also been in use since 1950s. These systems also do not require a
compressor. The refrigerant vapour is driven by the adsorption potential of the adsorbent
stored in an adsorbent bed. This bed is connected to an evaporator/condenser, which consists
of the pure refrigerant. In intermittent adsorption systems, during the night the refrigerant
evaporates and is adsorbed in activated charcoal or zeolite providing cooling effect. During
daytime the adsorbent bed absorbs solar radiation and drives off the refrigerant stored in the
bed. This refrigerant vapour condenses in the condenser and stored in a reservoir for
nighttime use. Thus this simple system consists of an adsorbent bed and a heat exchanger,
which acts as a condenser during the nighttime and, as an evaporator during the night. Pairs
of such reactors can be used for obtaining a continuous cooling
Q. Compared to the compression systems, vapour absorption refrigeration systems:
51.
Are environment friendly
52.
Use low-grade thermal energy for operation
53.
Cannot be used for large capacity refrigeration systems
54.
Cannot be used for small capacity refrigeration
systems Ans. a) and b)
Q. In absorption refrigeration systems, the compressor of vapour compression systems is
replaced by:
55.
Absorber
56.
Generator
57.
Pump
58.
All of the above
Ans. d)
Q. In a triple fluid vapour absorption refrigeration system, the hydrogen gas is used to:
59.
Improve system performance
60.
Reduce the partial pressure of refrigerant in evaporator
61.
Circulate the refrigerant
62.
Provide a vapour seal
Ans. b)
Q. Solar energy based refrigeration systems are developed to:
63.
Reduce fossil fuel consumption
64.
Provide refrigeration in remote areas
65.
Produce extremely low temperatures
66.
Eliminate
compressors Ans. a) and b)
Q. Solar energy based refrigeration systems:
67.
Cannot be used for large capacity systems
68.
Cannot be made continuous
69.
Are not environment friendly
70.
None of the
above Ans. d)

13

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

1.3.4. Gas Cycle Refrigeration:

If air at high pressure expands and does work (say moves a piston or rotates a
turbine), its temperature will decrease. This fact is known to man as early as the 18 th century.
Dalton and Gay Lusaac studied this in 1807. Sadi Carnot mentioned this as a well-known
phenomenon in 1824. However, Dr. John Gorrie a physician in Florida developed one such
machine in 1844 to produce ice for the relief of his patients suffering from fever. This
machine used compressed air at 2 atm. pressure and produced brine at a temperature of -7oC,
which was then used to produce ice. Alexander Carnegie Kirk in 1862 made an air cycle
cooling machine. This system used steam engine to run its compressor. Using a compression
ratio of 6 to 8, Kirk could produce temperatures as low as 40oC. Paul Gifford in 1875
perfected the open type of machine. This machine was further improved by T B Lightfoot, A
Haslam, Henry Bell and James Coleman. This was the main method of marine refrigeration
for quite some time. Frank Allen in New York developed a closed cycle machine employing
high pressures to reduce the volume flow rates. This was named dense air machine. These
days air cycle refrigeration is used only in aircrafts whose turbo compressor can handle large
volume flow rates. Figure 1.6 shows the schematic of an open type air cycle refrigeration
system. The basic system shown here consists of a compressor, an expander and a heat
exchanger. Air from the cold room is compressed in the compressor. The hot and high
pressure air rejects heat to the heat sink (cooling water) in the heat exchanger. The warm but
high pressure air expands in the expander. The cold air after expansion is sent to the cold
room for providing cooling. The work of expansion partly compensates the work of
compression; hence both the expander and the compressor are mounted on a common shaft.
| Cooling water
Expander

w////////AW//^^^^^
Coldroorn
Schematic diagram of the cold air system Fig.1.6.
Schematic of a basic, open type air cycle refrigeration system

14

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

1.3.5. Steam Jet Refrigeration System:

If water is sprayed into a chamber where a low pressure is maintained, a part of the
water will evaporate. The enthalpy of evaporation will cool the remaining water to its
saturation temperature at the pressure in the chamber. Obviously lower temperature will
require lower pressure. Water freezes at 0 oC hence temperature lower than 4 oC cannot be
obtained with water. In this system, high velocity steam is used to entrain the evaporating
water vapour. High-pressure motive steam passes through either convergent or convergentdivergent nozzle where it acquires either sonic or supersonic velocity and low pressure of the
order of 0.009 kPa corresponding to an evaporator temperature of 4 oC. The high momentum
of motive steam entrains or carries along with it the water vapour evaporating from the flash
chamber. Because of its high velocity it moves the vapours against the pressure gradient up to
the condenser where the pressure is 5.6-7.4 kPa corresponding to condenser temperature of
35-45oC. The motive vapour and the evaporated vapour both are condensed and recycled.
This system is known as steam jet refrigeration system. Figure 1.7 shows a schematic of the
system. It can be seen that this system requires a good vacuum to be maintained. Sometimes,
booster ejector is used for this purpose. This system is driven by low- grade energy that is
process steam in chemical plants or a boiler.

Makeup
CondeiMotive
water
Nozzle____________
^
-\x\-------<
steam
Chilled water return

To air pump
-----------

Cooling , water
---------K-

_________(^_J Purnp
Chilled water flow

To boiler feed pump

Steam jet refrigeration system

Fig.1.7. Schematic of a steam jet refrigeration system
In 1838, the Frenchman Pelletan was granted a patent for the compression of steam by
means of a jet of motive steam. Around 1900, the Englishman Charles Parsons studied the
possibility of reduction of pressure by an entrainment effect from a steam jet. However, the
credit for constructing the steam jet refrigeration system goes to the French engineer, Maurice
Leblanc who developed the system in 1907-08. In this system, ejectors were used to produce
a high velocity steam jet ( 1200 m/s). Based on Leblancs design the first commercial system
was made by Westinghouse in 1909 in Paris. Even though the efficiency of the steam jet

refrigeration system was low, it was still attractive as water is harmless and the system can run
using exhaust steam from a steam engine. From 1910 onwards, stem jet refrigeration
15

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

systems were used mainly in breweries, chemical factories, warships etc. In 1926, the French
engineer Follain improved the machine by introducing multiple stages of vaporization and
condensation of the suction steam. Between 1928-1930, there was much interest in this type
of systems in USA. In USA they were mainly used for air conditioning of factories, cinema
theatres, ships and even railway wagons. Several companies such as Westinghouse, Ingersoll
Rand and Carrier started commercial production of these systems from 1930. However,
gradually these systems were replaced by more efficient vapour absorption systems using
LiBr-water. Still, some east European countries such as Czechoslovakia and Russia
manufactured these systems as late as 1960s. The ejector principle can also be used to
provide refrigeration using fluids other than water, i.e., refrigerants such as CFC-11, CFC-21,
CFC-22, CFC-113, CFC-114 etc. The credit for first developing these closed vapour jet
refrigeration systems goes to the Russian engineer, I.S. Badylkes around 1955. Using
refrigerants other than water, it is possible to achieve temperatures as low as 100oC with a
single stage of compression. The advantages cited for this type of systems are simplicity and
robustness, while difficult design and economics are its chief disadvantages.
1.3.6. Thermoelectric Refrigeration Systems:
In 1821 the German physicist T.J. Seebeck reported that when two junctions of
dissimilar metals are kept at two different temperatures, an electro motive force (emf) is
developed, resulting in flow of electric current. The emf produced is found to be proportional
to temperature difference. In 1834, a Frenchmen, J. Peltier observed the reverse effect, i.e.,
cooling and heating of two junctions of dissimilar materials when direct current is passed
through them, the heat transfer rate being proportional to the current. In 1838, H.F.E. Lenz
froze a drop of water by the Peltier effect using antimony and bismuth (it was later found that
Lenz could freeze water as the materials used were not pure metals but had some impurities
in them). In 1857, William Thomson (Lord Kelvin) proved by thermodynamic analysis that
Seebeck effect and Peltier effect are related and he discovered another effect called Thomson
effect after his name. According to this when current flows through a conductor of a
thermocouple that has an initial temperature gradient in it, then heat transfer rate per unit
length is proportional to the product of current and the temperature. As the current flow
through thermoelectric material it gets heated due to its electrical resistance. This is called the
Joulean effect, further, conduction heat transfer from the hot junction to the cold junction
transfers heat. Both these heat transfer rates have to be compensated by the Peltier Effect for
some useful cooling to be produced. For a long time, thermoelectric cooling based on the
Peltier effect remained a laboratory curiosity as the temperature difference that could be
obtained using pure metals was too small to be of any practical use. Insulating materials give
poor thermoelectric performance because of their small electrical conductivity while metals
are not good because of their large thermal conductivity. However, with the discovery of
semiconductor materials in 1949-50, the available temperature drop could be increased
considerably, giving rise to commercialization of thermoelectric refrigeration systems. Figure
1.8 shows the schematic of the thermoelectric refrigeration system based on semiconductor
materials. The Russian scientist, A. F. Ioffe is one of the pioneers in the area of thermoelectric
refrigeration systems using semiconductors. Several domestic refrigerators based on
thermoelectric effect were made in USSR as early as 1949. However, since 1960s these
systems are used mainly used for storing medicines, vaccines etc and in electronic cooling.
Development also took place in many other countries. In USA domestic refrigerators, air
conditioners, water coolers, air conditioned diving suits etc. were made

16

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

Heat
absorbed
(cold junction)

Heat in,, Th
e
r
m
o
e
l
e
c
t
r
i
c

Electrical Conductor
Electrical insulator .

e
l
e
m
e
n
t
s

J
Heat
rejected^/
(hot junction)

+1iIiL

j~~ "!
-i i r^jH
eat
Ou
L-DC
So
urc
e
"*
*
*

12
V

Fig. 1.8. Schematic of a thermoelectric

refrigeration
system
using
these
effects.
System
capacities
were
typically
small
due
to
poor
efficiency.
However
some
large refrigeration
capacity systems
such as a 3000
kcal/h
air
conditioner and a
6 tonne capacity
cold storage were
also developed.
By
using
multistaging
temperatures as
low as -145oC
were
obtained.
These
systems
due
to
their
limited
performance
(limited by the
materials)
are
now used only in
certain
niche
applications such
as
electronic
cooling, mobile
coolers
etc.
Efforts have also
been made to club
thermoelectric
systems
with
photovoltaic cells
with a view to
develop
solar
thermoelectric
refrigerators.
1.3.7. Vortex tube
systems:
In

1931,
the
French
engineer Georges
Ranque
(18981973) discovered
an
interesting
phenomenon,
which is called
Ranque effect
or vortex effect.
The
tangential
injection of air

into a
cylindr
ical
tube
induce
s
to
quote
his
words

a
girator
y
expans
ion
with
simulta
neous
produc
tion of
an
escape
of hot
air and
an
escape
of cold
air.
Ranqu
e was
granted
a
French
patent
in
1928
and a
US
patent
in
1934
for this
effect.
Howev
er, the
discov
ery
was
neglect
ed until
after
the
second
world
war,
when
in
1945,
Rudolp
h
Hilsch,
a

German physicist, studied this effect and

published a widely read scientific paper on
this device. Thus, the vortex tube has also
been known as the "Ranque-Hilsch Tube.
Though the efficiency of this system is
quite low, it is very interesting due to its
mechanical simplicity and instant cooling.
It is convenient where there is a supply of
compressed air. The present day vortex
tube uses compressed air as a power
source, it has no moving parts, and
produces hot air from one end and cold air
from the other. The volume and
temperature of these two airstreams are
adjustable with a valve built into the hot
air exhaust. Temperatures as low as -46C
and as high as 127C are possible.
Compressed air is supplied to the vortex
tube and passes through nozzles that are
tangential to an internal counter bore.
These nozzles set the air in a vortex
motion. This spinning stream of air turns
90 and passes down the hot tube in the
form of a spinning shell, similar to a
tornado. A valve at one end of the tube
allows some of the warmed air to escape.
What does not escape, heads back down
the tube as a second vortex inside the lowpressure area of the larger vortex. This
inner vortex loses heat and exhausts
through the other end as cold air. Currently
vortex tube is used for spot cooling of
machine parts, in electronic cooling and
also in cooling jackets for miners, firemen
etc.

17
Ve
rsi
on
1
M
E,
IIT
K
ha
ra
gp
ur

Q. In an air cycle refrigeration system, low temperatures are produced due to:
71.
Evaporation of liquid air
72.
Throttling of air
73.
Expansion of air in turbine
74.
None of the
above Ans. c)
Q. Air cycle refrigeration systems are most commonly used in:
75.
Domestic refrigerators
76.
Aircraft air conditioning systems
77.
Cold storages
78.
Car air conditioning
systems Ans. b)
Q. The required input to the steam jet refrigeration systems is in the form of:
79.
Mechanical energy
80.
Thermal energy
81.
High pressure, motive steam
82.
Both mechanical and thermal energy
Ans. c)
Q. A nozzle is used in steam jet refrigeration systems to:
83.
To convert the high pressure motive steam into high velocity steam
84.
To reduce energy consumption
85.
To improve safety aspects
86.
All of the above
Ans. a)
Q. The materials used in thermoelectric refrigeration systems should have:
87.
High electrical and thermal conductivity
88.
High electrical conductivity and low thermal conductivity
89.
Low electrical conductivity and high thermal
conductivity c) Low electrical and thermal conductivity
Ans. b)
Q. A thermoelectric refrigeration systems requires:
90.
A high voltage AC (alternating current) input
91.
A low voltage AC input
92.
A high voltage DC (direct current) input
93.
A low voltage DC
input Ans. d).

18

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

1.3.8. Summary:
In this lecture the student is introduced to different methods of refrigeration, both
natural and artificial. Then a brief history of artificial refrigeration techniques is presented
with a mention of the pioneers in this field and important events. The working principles of
these systems are also described briefly. In subsequent chapters the most important of these
refrigeration systems will be discussed in detail.
Questions:
Q. Explain why ice making using nocturnal cooling is difficult on nights when the sky is
cloudy?
Ans. In order to make ice from water, water has to be first sensibly cooled from its initial
temperature to its freezing point (0oC) and then latent heat has to be transferred at 0oC. This
requires a heat sink that is at a temperature lower than 0oC. Ice making using nocturnal
cooling relies on radiative heat transfer from the water to the sky (which is at about 55oC)
that acts as a heat sink. When the sky is cloudy, the clouds reflect most of the radiation back
to earth and the effective surface temperature of clouds is also much higher. As a result,
radiative heat transfer from the water becomes very small, making the ice formation difficult.
Q. When you add sufficient amount of glucose to a glass of water, the water becomes cold. Is
it an example of refrigeration, if it is, can this method be used for devising a refrigeration
system?
Ans. Yes, this is an example of refrigeration as the temperature of glucose solution is lower
than the surroundings. However, this method is not viable, as the production of refrigeration
continuously requires an infinite amount of water and glucose or continuous recovery of
glucose from water.
Q. To what do you attribute the rapid growth of refrigeration technology over the last
century?
Ans. The rapid growth of refrigeration technology over the last century can be attributed to
several reasons, some of them are:
i. Growing global population leading to growing demand for food, hence, demand for better
food processing and food preservation methods. Refrigeration is required for both food
processing and food preservation (Food Chain)
ii. Growing demand for refrigeration in almost all industries
iii. Growing demand for comfortable conditions (air conditioned) at residences, workplaces
etc.
iv. Rapid growth of technologies required for manufacturing various refrigeration
components
v. Availability of electricity, and
vi. Growing living standards

19

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

Lesson
2
History Of Refrigeration
Development Of
Refrigerants And
Compressors
1

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

The objectives of the present lesson are to introduce the student to the
history of refrigeration in terms of:
1. Refrigerant development (Section 2.2):
i.
ii.
iii.

Early refrigerants (Section 2.2.1)

Synthetic fluorocarbon based refrigerants (Section 2.2.2)
Non-ozone depleting refrigerants (Section 2.2.3)

2. Compressor development (Section 2.3):

Low-speed steam engine driven compressors (Section 2.3.1)
High-speed electric motor driven compressors (Section 2.3.1)
Rotary vane and rolling piston compressors (Section 2.3.2)
Screw compressors (Section 2.3.2)
Scroll compressors (Section 2.3.2)
Centrifugal compressors (Section 2.3.3)

i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.

At the end of the lesson the student should be able to:

i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.

State the importance of refrigerant selection

List various refrigerants used before the invention of CFCs
List various CFC refrigerants and their impact on refrigeration
State the environmental issues related to the use of CFCs
State the refrigerant development after Montreal protocol
List important compressor types
List important landmarks in the development of compressors

2.1. Introduction:
The development of refrigeration and air conditioning industry depended to a large
extent on the development of refrigerants to suit various applications and the development of
various system components. At present the industry is dominated by the vapour compression
refrigeration systems, even though the vapour absorption systems have also been developed
commercially. The success of vapour compression refrigeration systems owes a lot to the
development of suitable refrigerants and compressors. The theoretical thermodynamic
efficiency of a vapour compression system depends mainly on the operating temperatures.
However, important practical issues such as the system design, size, initial and operating
costs, safety, reliability, and serviceability etc. depend very much on the type of refrigerant
and compressor selected for a given application. This lesson presents a brief history of
refrigerants and compressors. The emphasis here is mainly on vapour compression
refrigeration systems, as these are the most commonly used systems, and also refrigerants and
compressors play a critical role here. The other popular type of refrigeration system, namely
the vapour absorption type has seen fewer changes in terms of refrigerant development, and
relatively less number of problems exist in these systems as far as the refrigerants are
concerned.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

2.2. Refrigerant development a brief history

In general a refrigerant may be defined as any body or substance that acts as a
cooling medium by extracting heat from another body or substance. Under this general
definition, many bodies or substances may be called as refrigerants, e.g. ice, cold water, cold
air etc. In closed cycle vapour compression, absorption systems, air cycle refrigeration
systems the refrigerant is a working fluid that undergoes cyclic changes. In a thermoelectric
system the current carrying electrons may be treated as a refrigerant. However, normally by
refrigerants we mean the working fluids that undergo condensation and evaporation as in
compression and absorption systems. The history that we are talking about essentially refers
to these substances. Since these substances have to evaporate and condense at required
temperatures (which may broadly lie in the range of 100 oC to +100oC) at reasonable
pressures, they have to be essentially volatile. Hence, the development of refrigerants started
with the search for suitable, volatile substances. Historically the development of these
refrigerants can be divided into three distinct phases, namely:
i.
ii.
iii.

Refrigerants prior to the development of CFCs

The synthetic fluorocarbon (FC) based refrigerants
Refrigerants in the aftermath of stratospheric ozone layer depletion

2.2.1. Refrigerants prior to the development of CFCs

Water is one of the earliest substances to be used as a refrigerant, albeit not in a closed
system. Production of cold by evaporation of water dates back to 3000 B.C. Archaeological
findings show pictures of Egyptian slaves waving fans in front of earthenware jars to
accelerate the evaporation of water from the porous surfaces of the pots, thereby producing
cold water. Of course, the use of punkahs for body cooling in hot summer is very well
known in countries like India. Production of ice by nocturnal cooling is also well known.
People also had some knowledge of producing sub-zero temperatures by the use of
refrigerant mixtures. It is believed that as early as 4 th Century AD people in India were
using mixtures of salts (sodium nitrate, sodium chloride etc) and water to produce
temperatures as low as 20oC. However, these natural refrigeration systems working with
water have many limitations and hence were confined to a small number of applications.
Water was the first refrigerant to be used in a continuous refrigeration system by
William Cullen (1710-1790) in 1755. William Cullen is also the first man to have
scientifically observed the production of low temperatures by evaporation of ethyl ether in
1748. Oliver Evans (1755-1819) proposed the use of a volatile fluid in a closed cycle to
produce ice from water. He described a practical system that uses ethyl ether as the
refrigerant. As already mentioned the credit for building the first vapour compression
refrigeration system goes to Jakob Perkins (1766-1849). Perkins used sulphuric (ethyl) ether
obtained from India rubber as refrigerant. Early commercial refrigerating machines
developed by James Harrison (1816-1893) also used ethyl ether as refrigerant. Alexander
Twining (1801-1884) also developed refrigerating machines using ethyl ether. After these
developments, ethyl ether was used as refrigerant for several years for ice making, in
breweries etc. Ether machines were gradually replaced by ammonia and carbon dioxide based
machines, even though they were used for a longer time in tropical countries such as India.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

Ethyl ether appeared to be a good refrigerant in the beginning, as it was easier to handle it
since it exists as a liquid at ordinary temperatures and atmospheric pressure. Ethyl ether has a
normal boiling point (NBP) of 34.5oC, this indicates that in order to obtain low temperatures,
the evaporator pressure must be lower than one atmosphere, i.e., operation in vacuum.
Operation of a system in vacuum may lead to the danger of outside air leaking into the
system resulting in the formation of a potentially explosive mixture. On the other hand a
relatively high normal boiling point indicates lower pressures in the condenser, or for a given
pressure the condenser can be operated at higher condensing temperatures. This is the reason
behind the longer use of ether in tropical countries with high ambient temperatures.
Eventually due to the high NBP, toxicity and flammability problems ethyl ether was replaced
by other refrigerants. Charles Tellier (1828-1913) introduced dimethyl ether (NBP =
23.6oC) in 1864. However, this refrigerant did not become popular, as it is also toxic and
inflammable.
In 1866, the American T.S.C. Lowe (1832-1913) introduced carbon dioxide
compressor. However, it enjoyed commercial success only in 1880s due largely to the efforts
of German scientists Franz Windhausen (1829-1904) and Carl von Linde (1842-1934).
Carbon dioxide has excellent thermodynamic and thermophysical properties, however, it has
a low critical temperature (31.7oC) and very high operating pressures. Since it is nonflammable and non-toxic it found wide applications principally for marine refrigeration. It
was also used for refrigeration applications on land. Carbon dioxide was used successfully for
about sixty years however, it was completely replaced by CFCs. It is ironic to note that ever
since the problem of ozone layer depletion was found, carbon dioxide is steadily making a
comeback by replacing the synthetic CFCs/HCFCs/HFCs etc.
One of the landmark events in the history of refrigerants is the introduction of
ammonia. The American David Boyle (1837-1891) was granted the first patent for ammonia
compressor in 1872. He made the first single acting vertical compressor in 1873. However,
the credit for successfully commercializing ammonia systems goes to Carl von Linde (18421934) of Germany, who introduced these compressors in Munich in 1876. Linde is credited
with perfecting the ammonia refrigeration technology and owing to his pioneering efforts;
ammonia has become one of the most important refrigerants to be developed. Ammonia has a
NBP of
33.3oC, hence, the operating pressures are much higher than atmospheric.
Ammonia has excellent thermodynamic and thermophysical properties. It is easily available
and inexpensive. However, ammonia is toxic and has a strong smell and slight flammability.
In addition, it is not compatible with some of the common materials of construction such as
copper. Though these are considered to be some of its disadvantages, ammonia has stood the
test of time and the onslaught of CFCs due to its excellent properties. At present ammonia is
used in large refrigeration systems (both vapour compression and vapour absorption) and also
in small absorption refrigerators (triple fluid vapour absorption).
In 1874, Raoul Pictet (1846-1929) introduced sulphur dioxide (NBP= 10.0oC).
Sulphur dioxide was an important refrigerant and was widely used in small refrigeration
systems such as domestic refrigerators due to its small refrigerating effect. Sulphur dioxide
has the advantage of being an auto-lubricant. In addition it is not only non-flammable, but
actually acts as a flame extinguisher. However, in the presence of water vapour it produces
sulphuric acid, which is highly corrosive. The problem of corrosion was overcome by an
airtight sealed compressor (both motor and compressor are mounted in the same outer

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

casing). However, after about sixty years of use in appliances such as domestic refrigerators,
sulphur dioxide was replaced by CFCs.
In addition to the above, other fluids such as methyl chloride, ethyl chloride, isobutane, propane, ethyl alcohol, methyl and ethyl amines, carbon tetra chloride, methylene
chloride, gasoline etc. were tried but discarded due to one reason or other.
2.2.2. The synthetic CFCs/HCFCs:
Almost all the refrigerants used in the early stages of refrigeration suffered from one
problem or other. Most of these problems were linked to safety issues such as toxicity,
flammability, high operating pressures etc. As a result large-scale commercialization of
refrigeration systems was hampered. Hence it was felt that refrigeration industry needs a
new refrigerant if they expect to get anywhere. The task of finding a safe refrigerant was
taken up by the American Thomas Midgley, Jr., in 1928. Midgley was already famous for the
invention of tetra ethyl lead, an important anti-knock agent for petrol engines. Midgley along
with his associates Albert L. Henne and Robert R. McNary at the Frigidaire Laboratories
(Dayton, Ohio, USA) began a systematic study of the periodic table. From the periodic table
they quickly eliminated all those substances yielding insufficient volatility. They then
eliminated those elements resulting in unstable and toxic gases as well as the inert gases,
based on their very low boiling points. They were finally left with eight elements: carbon,
nitrogen, oxygen, sulphur, hydrogen, fluorine, chlorine and bromine. These eight elements
clustered at an intersecting row and column of the periodic table, with fluorine at the
intersection. Midgley and his colleagues then made three interesting observations:
i.
ii.

Flammability decreases from left to right for the eight elements

Toxicity generally decreases from the heavy elements at the bottom to the lighter
elements at the top iii.
Every known refrigerant at that time was made from
the combination of those
eight Midgley elements.
A look at the refrigerants discussed above shows that all of them are made up of seven out
of the eight elements identified by Midgley (fluorine was not used till then). Other researchers
have repeated Midgleys search with more modern search methods and databases, but arrived
at the same conclusions (almost all the currently used refrigerants are made up of Midgley
elements, only exception is Iodine, studies are being carried out on refrigerants containing
iodine in addition to some of the Midgley elements). Based on their study, Midgely and his
colleagues have developed a whole range of new refrigerants, which are obtained by partial
replacement of hydrogen atoms in hydrocarbons by fluorine and chlorine. They have shown
how fluorination and chlorination of hydrocarbons can be varied to obtain desired boiling
points (volatility) and also how properties such as toxicity, flammability are influenced by the
composition. The first commercial refrigerant to come out of Midgleys study is Freon-12 in
1931. Freon-12 with a chemical formula CCl2F2, is obtained by replacing the four atoms of
hydrogen in methane (CH4) by two atoms of chlorine and two atoms of
fluorine. Freon-12 has a normal boiling point of 29.8oC, and is one of the most famous and
popular synthetic refrigerants. It was exclusively used in small domestic refrigerators, air
conditioners, water coolers etc for almost sixty years. Freon-11 (CCl 3F) used in large
centrifugal air conditioning systems was introduced in 1932. This is followed by Freon-22
(CHClF2) and a whole series of synthetic refrigerants to suit a wide variety of applications.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

Due to the emergence of a large number of refrigerants in addition to the existence of the
older refrigerants, it has become essential to work out a numbering system for refrigerants.
Thus all refrigerants were indicated with R followed by a unique number (thus Freon-12 is
changed to R12 etc). The numbering of refrigerants was done based on certain guidelines. For
all synthetic refrigerants the number (e.g. 11, 12, 22) denotes the chemical composition. The
number of all inorganic refrigerants begins with 7 followed by their molecular weight. Thus
R-717 denotes ammonia (ammonia is inorganic and its molecular weight is 17), R-718
denotes water etc.. Refrigerant mixtures begin with the number 4 (zeotropic) or 5
(azeotropic), e.g. R-500, R-502 etc.
The introduction of CFCs and related compounds has revolutionized the field of
refrigeration and air conditioning. Most of the problems associated with early refrigerants
such as toxicity, flammability, and material incompatibility were eliminated completely. Also,
Freons are highly stable compounds. In addition, by cleverly manipulating the composition a
whole range of refrigerants best suited for a particular application could be obtained. In
addition to all this, a vigorous promotion of these refrigerants as wonder gases and ideal
refrigerants saw rapid growth of Freons and equally rapid exit of conventional refrigerants
such as carbon dioxide, sulphur dioxide etc. Only ammonia among the older refrigerants
survived the Freon magic. The Freons enjoyed complete domination for about fifty years,
until the Ozone Layer Depletion issue was raised by Rowland and Molina in 1974. Rowland
and Molina in their now famous theory argued that the highly stable chlorofluorocarbons
cause the depletion of stratospheric ozone layer. Subsequent studies and observations
confirmed Rowland and Molina theory on stratospheric ozone depletion by chlorine
containing CFCs. In view of the seriousness of the problem on global scale, several countries
have agreed to ban the harmful Ozone Depleting Substances, ODS (CFCs and others) in a
phase-wise manner under Montreal Protocol. Subsequently almost all countries of the world
have agreed to the plan of CFC phase-out. In addition to the ozone layer depletion, the CFCs
and related substances were also found to contribute significantly to the problem of global
warming. This once again brought the scientists back to the search for safe refrigerants.
The safety now refers to not only the immediate personal safety issues such as
flammability, toxicity etc., but also the long-term environmental issues such as ozone layer
depletion and global warming.
2.2.3. Refrigerants in the aftermath of Ozone Layer Depletion:
The most important requirement for refrigerants in the aftermath of ozone layer
depletion is that it should be a non-Ozone Depleting Substance (non-ODS). Out of this
requirement two alternatives have emerged. The first one is to look for zero ODP synthetic
refrigerants and the second one is to look for natural substances. Introduction of
hydrofluorocarbons (HFCs) and their mixtures belong to the first route, while the reintroduction of carbon dioxide (in a supercritical cycle), water and various hydrocarbons and
their mixtures belong to the second route. The increased use of ammonia and use of other
refrigeration cycles such as air cycle refrigeration systems and absorption systems also come
under the second route. Both these routes have found their proponents and opponents. HFC134a (synthetic substance) and hydrocarbons (natural substances) have emerged as
alternatives to Freon-12. No clear pure fluid alternative has been found as yet for the other
popular refrigerant HCFC-22. However several mixtures consisting of synthetic and natural
refrigerants are being used and suggested for future use. Table 2.1 shows the list of
refrigerants being replaced and their alternatives. Mention must be made here about the other

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

environmental problem, global warming. In general the non-ODS synthetic refrigerants such
as HFC-134a have high global warming potential (GWP), hence they face an uncertain
future. Since the global warming impact of a refrigerant also depends on the energy
efficiency of the system using the refrigerant (indirect effect), the efficiency issue has become
important in the design of new refrigeration systems. Though the issues of ozone layer
depletion and global warming has led to several problems, they have also had beneficial
effects of making people realize the importance of environmental friendliness of
technologies. It is expected that with the greater awareness more responsible designs will
emerge which will ultimately benefit the whole mankind.
Refrigerant

Composition

Normal
Bailing
Point
(XBP)
f*C)*

Ozone
Depletion
Potential
(ODP)
(Rll=l)

23.8
27.9
32.2
15.3
36.19

1.0
0.020
0.110
0
0

3800
90
630
900
0

3.78
-13.2
4.67
-0.45

0.8
0.022
0
0

9300
4S0
1300
V

Both
New
Both

-29.79
-26.1
-33.0/6.3
-34.3/18.5
-31.9/7.9

1
0
0.037
0.048
0

8100
1300
1100
1400
3

New
Both
Both
Both

-40.75
-44.0/7.2
-52.7/<0.1
-43.0/103
-49.3/7.9

0.05.5
0
0
0
0

1700
1600
1900
1600
3

Both
New
New
Both

-45.6 azeo
-46.5,t).S
-46.7 azeo
-49.7.10.9
-49.3/7.9

0
0
0
0

5500
3700
3800
3500
3

Both
Both
Both
Both

Global
Warming
Potential
(&WP)
KO,=l)

Retrofit
or
New

Example Candidate Re pin cements forCFC-El

CFC-11
HCFC-123
HCFC-141b
HJC-245fa
n-pentane
Example Candidate Re nla cements forCFC-114
CFC-114
HCFC-124
HFC-134
R600
Example Candidate Re ula cements &>rCFC-12
CFC-12
HFC-13 4a
R401A
R22/152a/124 (5 3/1354)
R409A
R2 2/124/142b (60/25/15)
prop aoe-ethane
R2 9 0/170 (43.67)
Example Candidate Re ula cements forHCFC-22
HCFC-22
R407C
R3 2/125.134a (23.-2 5.-52)
R410A
R32/125
R23/32/134a
propane-ethane
R2 9 0/170 (95/5)
Example Candidate Replacements for R502
R502
CFC115/HCFC22 f4 5.8/51.2)
R404a
Rl 25/143 a 134a (44/52/4)
R507
Rl 2 5/143 a (50/50)
R3 2/125/143 a (10/45.45)
propane-ethane
R290/170 (95/5)
Other Options -Natural Refrigerants

Air
Water
Ammouia
Carbon dioxide
* or bub' jle point temperature glide for mi

0
0
i
0
0
0
0
1
ttures. Temp erature glide: = T -T
dew

Table 2.1. Candidate refrigerants for replacing CFCs

7

Both
New
New
Both

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

xi tt.

Q. Ethyl ether was the first refrigerant to be used commercially, because:

94.
It exists as liquid at ambient conditions
95.
It is safe
96.
It is inexpensive
97.
All of the
above Ans. a)
Q. Ammonia is one of the oldest refrigerants, which is still used widely, because:
98.
It offers excellent performance
99.
It is a natural refrigerant
100. It is inexpensive
101. All of the
above Ans. d)
Q. In the olden days Carbon dioxide was commonly used in marine applications as:
102. It has low critical temperature
103. Its operating pressures are high
104. It is non-toxic and non-flammable
105. It is
odorless Ans. c)
Q. Sulphur dioxide was mainly used in small refrigeration systems, because:
106. It is non-toxic and non-flammable
107. It has small refrigeration effect
108. It is expensive
109. It was easily available
Ans. b)
Q. Need for synthetic refrigerants was felt, as the available natural refrigerants:
110. Were not environment friendly
111. Suffered from several perceived safety issues
112. Were expensive
113. Were inefficient
Ans. b)
Q. The synthetic CFC based refrigerants were developed by:
114. Partial replacement of hydrogen atoms in hydrocarbons by chlorine, fluorine
etc.
115. Modifying natural refrigerants such as carbon dioxide, ammonia
116. Modifying inorganic compounds by adding carbon, fluorine and chlorine
117. Mixing various
hydrocarbons Ans. a)
Q. The synthetic refrigerants were extremely popular as they are:
118. Environment friendly
119. Mostly non-toxic and non-flammable
120. Chemically stable
121. Inexpensiv
e Ans. b) and c)
Q. CFC based refrigerants are being replaced as they are found to:
8
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 122. Cause ozone layer depletion
123. Consume more energy
124. React with several materials of construction
125. Expe
nsive Ans. a)

2.3. Compressor development a brief history

Compressor may be called as a heart of any vapour compression system. The rapid
development of refrigeration systems is made possible due to the developments in
compressor technologies.
2.3.1. Reciprocating compressors:
The earliest compressor used by Jakob Perkins is a hand-operated compressor, very
much like a hand operated pump used for pumping water. Harrison also used a hand-operated
ether compressor in 1850, but later used steam engine driven compressors in commercial
machines. A small half horsepower (hp) compressor was used as early as 1857 to produce 8
kg of ice per hour. Three other machines with 8 to 10 hp were in use in England in 1858. In
1859, the firm P.N. Russel of Australia undertook the manufacture of Harrisons machines,
the first compressors to be made with two vertical cylinders. The firm of Siebe brothers of
England went on perfecting the design of the early compressors. Their first compressors were
vertical and the later were horizontal. From 1863 to 1870, Ferdinand Carre of France took out
several patents on diaphragm compressors, valves etc.
Charles Tellier used a horizontal single cylinder methyl ether compressor in 1863.
These compressors were initially installed in a chocolate factory near Paris and in a brewery
in USA in 1868. In 1876 the ship Le Frigorifique was equipped with three of Telliers
methyl ether compressors and successfully transported chilled meat from Rouen in France to
Buenos Ayres in Argentina (a distance of 12000 km).
T.S.C. Lowe (1832-1913) started making carbon dioxide compressors in 1865, and
began to use them in the manufacture of ice from 1868. However, the credit for perfecting the
design of carbon dioxide compressor goes to Franz Windhausen of Germany in 1886. The
British firm J&E Hall began the commercial production of carbon dioxide compressors in
1887. They started manufacturing two-stage carbon dioxide compressors since 1889. Soon
the carbon dioxide systems replaced air cycle refrigeration systems in ships. Several firms
started manufacturing these compressors on a large scale. This trend continued upto the
Second World War.
A significant development took place in 1876 by the introduction of a twin cylinder
vertical compressor working with ammonia by Carl von Linde. Similar to his earlier methyl
ether compressor (1875) a bath of liquid mercury was used to make the compressor gas-tight.
This ammonia compressor was installed in a brewery in 1877 and worked there till 1908. In
1877, Linde improved the compressor design by introducing a horizontal, double acting
cylinder with a stuffing box made from two packings separated by glycerine (glycerine was
later replaced by mineral oil). Figure 2.1 shows the schematic of Lindes horizontal, double
acting compressor. This design became very successful, and was a subject of many patents.
Several manufacturers in other countries adopted this design and manufactured several of
these compressors. USA began the production of ammonia compressors on a large scale from
1880.
Raoul Pictet invented the sulphur dioxide compressor in 1874. The machine was
initially built in Geneva, then in Paris and afterwards in some other countries. The
compressor developed by Pictet was horizontal and was not lubricated as sulphur dioxide acts

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

Fig.2.1. Schematic of Lindes horizontal, double acting compressor

as an auto-lubricant. As mentioned before, the sulphur dioxide system was an instant
success and was used for almost sixty years, especially in small systems.
In 1878, methyl chloride system was introduced by Vincent in France. The French
company Crespin & Marteau started manufacturing methyl chloride compressors from 1884.
This continued upto the first world war. Escher Wyss of USA started making these
compressors from 1913 onwards, right upto the Second World War.
At the beginning of 20th century, practically all the compressors in USA, Great Britain
and Germany used either ammonia or carbon dioxide. In France, in addition to these two,
sulphur dioxide and methyl chloride were also used. Compressor capacity comparison tests
have been conducted on different types of compressors as early as 1887 in Munich, Germany.
Stetefeld in 1904 concluded that there was no marked difference in the performance of
ammonia, carbon dioxide and sulphur dioxide compressors.
Due to many similarities, the early compressors resembled steam engines in many
ways. Like early steam engines, they were double acting (compression takes place on both
sides of the piston). Both vertical and horizontal arrangements were used, the former being
popular in Europe while the later was popular in USA. A stuffing box arrangement with oil in
the gap was used to reduce refrigerant leakage. The crosshead, connecting rod, crank and
flywheel were in the open. Initially poppet valves were used, which were later changed to
ring-plate type. The cylinder diameters were very large by the present day standards, typically
around 500 mm with stroke lengths of the order of 1200 mm. The rotational speeds were low
(~ 50 rpm), hence the clearances were small, often less than 0.5 % of the swept volume. Due
to generous valve areas and low speed the early compressors were able to compress mixture
of vapour as well as liquid. Slowly, the speed of compressors have been increased, for
example for a 300 kW cooling capacity system, the mean speed was 40 rpm in 1890, 60 in
1900, 80 in 1910, 150 to 160 in 1915, and went upto 220 in 1916. The term high speed was
introduced in 1915 for compressors with speeds greater than 150 rpm. However, none of the
compressors of this period exceeded speeds of 500 rpm. However, compressors of very large
capacities (upto 7 MW cooling capacity) were successfully built and operated by this time. In
1905 the American engineer G.T. Voorhees introduced a dual effect compressor, which has a
supplementary suction orifice opened during compression so that refrigerant can be taken in
at two different pressures. As mentioned, the first two-stage carbon dioxide compressor was
made in 1889 by J&E Hall of England. Sulzer Company developed the first two-stage
ammonia compressor in 1889. York Company of USA made a two-stage ammonia
compressor in 1892.

10

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

About 1890, attention was focused on reducing the clearance space between the
piston and cylinder head (clearance space) in order to increase the capacity of the
compressors. Attention was also focused on the design of stuffing box and sealing between
piston and cylinder to reduce refrigerant leakage. In 1897 the Belgian manufacturer Bruno
Lebrun introduced a rotary stuffing box, which was much easier to seal than the reciprocating
one. A rotating crankshaft enclosed in a crankcase drove the two opposed horizontal
cylinders. Many studies were also conducted on compressor valves as early as 1900. By
1910, the heavy bell valves were replaced by much lighter, flat valves. By about 1900, the
design of stuffing box for large compressors was almost perfected. However, for smaller
compressors the energy loss due to friction at the stuffing box was quiet high. This fact gave
rise to the idea of sealed or hermetic compressor (both compressor and motor are mounted in
the same enclosure). However, since the early electric motors with brushes and commutator
and primitive insulation delayed the realization of hermetic compressors upto the end of First
World War.
As mentioned, the earliest compressors were hand operated. Later they were driven by
steam engines. However, the steam engines gradually gave way to electric motors. Diesel and
petrol engine driven compressors were developed much later. In USA, 90% of the motive
power was provided by the steam engine in 1914, 71% in 1919, 43% in 1922 and 32% in
1924. This trend continued and slowly the steam engine driven compressors have become
almost obsolete. Between 1914 and 1920, the electric motor was considered to be the first
choice for refrigerant compressors.
About 1920, high-speed compressors (with speeds greater than 500 rpm) began to
appear in the market. The horizontal, double acting compressors were gradually replaced by
multi-cylinder, vertical, uni-flow compressors in V- and W- arrangement, the design being
adopted from automobile engine design. In 1937, an American compressor (Airtemp)
comprised two groups of 7 cylinders arranged radially at both ends of 1750 rpm electric
motor. These changes resulted in a reduction of size and weight of compressor, for example, a
York 300 000 kcal/h compressor had the following characteristics:
Year
1910
1940
1975

Refrigerant
NH3
NH3
R22

No. of cylinders Speed (rpm)

2 cylinders
70
4 cylinders
400
16 cylinders in W- 1750
arrangement

Cooling capacity per unit weight

6.5 kcal/h per kg
42 kcal/h per kg
200 kcal/h per kg

All the compressors developed in the early stages are of open type. In the open type
compressors the compressor and motor are mounted separately. The driving shaft of the
motor and the crankshaft of the compressor are connected either by a belt drive or a gear
drive. With the open type compressors there is always a possibility of refrigerant leakage
from an open type compressor, even though the rotating mechanical seals developed reduced
the leakage rate considerably. Since leakage cannot be eliminated completely, systems
working with open type compressors require periodic servicing and maintenance. Since it is
difficult to provide continuous maintenance on small systems (e.g. domestic refrigerators),
serious thought was given to tackle this problem. A hermetic or sealed compressor was the
outcome of this.

11

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

An Australian Douglas Henry Stokes made the first sealed or hermetic compressor in
1918. Hermetic compressors soon became extremely popular, and the rapid development of
small hermetic compressors has paved the way for taking the refrigeration systems to the
households. With the capacitor starting of the electric motor becoming common in 1930s, the
design of hermetic compressors was perfected. In 1926, General Electric Co. of USA
introduced the domestic refrigerator working with a hermetic compressor. Initially 4-pole
motors were used. After 1940 the 4-pole motors were replaced by 2-pole motors, which
reduced of the compressor unit significantly. Soon the 2-pole hermetic refrigerant compressor
became universal. Gradually, the capacity of hermetic compressors was increased. Now-a
-days hermetic compressors are available for refrigerating capacities starting from a few Watts
to kilowatts. At present, due to higher efficiency and serviceability, the open type
compressors are used in medium to large capacity systems, whereas the hermetic compressors
are exclusively used in small capacity systems on a mass production. The currently available
hermetic compressors are compact and extremely reliable. They are available for a wide
variety of refrigerants and applications. Figure 2.2 shows cut view of a hermetic compressor.

Fig.2.2. Cut view of a hermetic compressor

Other types of compressors:
2.3.2.Positive displacement type (other than reciprocating):
In 1919, the French engineer Henri Corblin (1867-1947) patented a diaphragm
compressor, in which the alternating movement of a diaphragm produced the suction and
compression effects. Initially these compressors were used for liquefying chlorine, but later
were used in small to medium capacity systems working with ammonia, carbon dioxide etc.
Several types of rotary air compressors existed before the First World War, and this
idea has soon been extended to refrigerants. However, they became popular with the
introduction of Freons in 1930s. The first positive displacement, rotary vane compressor
using methyl chloride was installed on an American ship Carnegie. However, a practical

12

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

positive displacement, rotary vane compressor could only be developed in 1920. In Germany,
F.Stamp made an ethyl chloride compressor of 1000 kcal/h capacity. In USA, Sunbeam
Electric made small sulphur dioxide based rotary sliding vane compressors of 150 kcal/h
capacity, rotating at 1750 rpm for domestic refrigerators. In 1922, Sulzer, Switzerland made
Frigorotor of 1000 to 10000 kcal/h using methyl chloride. Sulzer later extended this design
to ammonia for large capacities (Frigocentrale). Escher Wyss, also of Switzerland rotary
sliding vane compressor Rotasco in 1936. These compressors were also made by Lebrun,
Belgium in 1924 and also by Grasso (Netherlands).
A model of the rolling piston type compressor was made in 1919 in France. This
compressor was improved significantly by W.S.F. Rolaff of USA in 1920 and M. Guttner of
Germany in 1922. Rolaffs design was first tried on a sulphur dioxide based domestic
refrigerator. Guttners compressors were used with ammonia and methyl chloride in large
commercial installations. Hermetic, rolling piston type compressors were made in USA by
Frigidaire for refrigerant R114, by General Electric for ethyl formate and by Bosch in
Germany for sulphur dioxide. In 1931, Vilter of USA made large rotary compressors (200000
kcal/h) first for ammonia and then for R12.
At present, positive displacement rotary compressors based on sliding vane and
rolling piston types are used in small to medium capacity applications all over the world.
These compressors offer the advantages of compactness, efficiency, low noise etc. However,
these compressors require very close manufacturing tolerances as compared to reciprocating
compressors. Figure 2.3 shows the schematic of a rolling piston compressor. The low
pressure refrigerant from the evaporator enters into the compressor from the port on the right
hand side, it gets compressed due to the rotation of the rolling piston and leaves the
compressor from the discharge valve on the left hand side.

Fig.2.3. Schematic of a rolling piston type, rotary compressor

The screw compressor is another important type of positive displacement compressor.
The screw compressors entered into refrigeration market in 1958, even though the basic idea
goes back to 1934, by A. Lysholm of Sweden. The screw compressors are of twin-screw

13

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

(two helical rotors) type or a single-screw (single rotor) type. The twin-screw compressor
uses a pair of intermeshing rotors instead of a piston to produce compression. The rotors
comprise of helical lobes fixed to a shaft. One rotor is called the male rotor and it will
typically have four bulbous lobes. The other rotor is the female rotor and this has valleys
machined into it that match the curvature of the male lobes. Typically the female rotor will
have six valleys. This means that for one revolution of the male rotor, the female rotor will
only turn through 240 deg. For the female rotor to complete one cycle, the male rotor will
have to rotate 11/2 times. The single screw type compressor was first made for air in 1967.
Grasso, Netherlands introduced single screw refrigerant compressors in 1974. The screw
compressor (both single and twin screw) became popular since 1960 and its design has
almost been perfected. Presently it is made for medium to large capacity range for ammonia
and fluorocarbon based refrigerants. It competes with the reciprocating compressors at the
lower capacity range and on the higher capacity side it competes with the centrifugal
compressor. Due to the many favorable performance characteristics, screw compressors are
taking larger and larger share of refrigerant compressor market. Figure 2.4 shows the
photograph of a cut, semi-hermetic, single-screw compressor.

Fig.2.4. Cut view of a semi-hermetic, single-screw compressor

The scroll compressor is one of the more recent but important types of positive
displacement compressors. It uses the compression action provided by two intermeshing
scrolls - one fixed and the other orbiting. This orbital movement draws gas into the
compression chamber and moves it through successively smaller pockets formed by the
scrolls rotation, until it reaches maximum pressure at the center of the chamber. There, its
released through a discharge port in the fixed scroll. During each orbit, several pockets are
compressed simultaneously, so operation is virtually continuous. Figure 2.5 shows gas flow
pattern in a scroll compressor and Fig.2.6 shows the photograph of a Copeland1 scroll
compressor. The principle of the scroll compressor was developed during the early 1900's and
was patented for the first time in 1905. Although the theory for the scroll compressor
indicated a machine potentially capable of reasonably good efficiencies, at that time the
technology simply didn't exist to accurately manufacture the scrolls. It was almost 65 years
later that the concept was re-invented by a refrigeration industry keen to exploit the potentials

14

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

of scroll technology. Copeland in USA, Hitachi in Japan introduced the scroll type of
compressors for refrigerants in 1980s. Scroll compressors have been developed for operating
temperatures in the range of 45C to +5C suitable for cold storage and air conditioning
applications. This scroll has also been successfully applied throughout the world in many
freezer applications. Today, scroll compressors are very popular due to the high efficiency,
which results from higher compression achieved at a lower rate of leakage. They are
available in cooling capacities upto 50 kW. They are quiet in operation and compact.
However, the manufacturing of scroll compressors is very complicated due to the extremely
close tolerances to be maintained for proper operation of the compressor.

15
Fig.2.5. Gas flow in a scroll
compressor

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

2.3.3. Dynamic type:

Centrifugal compressors (also known as turbocompressors) belong to the class of
dynamic type of compressors, in which the pressure rise takes place due to the exchange of
angular momentum between the rotating blades and the vapour trapped in between the blades.
Centrifugal were initially used for compressing air. The development of these compressors is
largely due to the efforts of Auguste Rateau of France from 1890. In 1899, Rateau developed
single impeller (rotor) and later multi-impeller fans. Efforts have been made to use similar
compressors for refrigeration. In 1910, two Germans H. Lorenz and E. Elgenfeld proposed
the use of centrifugal compressors for refrigeration at the International Congress of
Refrigeration, Vienna. However, it was Willis H. Carrier, who has really laid the foundation
of centrifugal compressors for air conditioning applications in 1911. The motivation for
developing centrifugal compressors originated from the fact that the reciprocating
compressors were slow and bulky, especially for large capacity systems. Carrier wanted to
develop a more compact system working with non-flammable, non-toxic and odorless
refrigerant. In 1919, he tried a centrifugal compressor with dichloroethylene (C 2H2Cl2) and
then dichloromethane (CCl2H2). In 1926 he used methyl chloride, and in 1927 he had nearly
50 compressors working with dichloroethylene. The centrifugal compressors really took-off
with the introduction of Freons in 1930s. Refrigerant R11 was the refrigerant chosen by
Carrier for his centrifugal compressor based air conditioning systems in 1933. Later his
company developed centrifugal compressors working with R12, propane and other
refrigerants for use in low temperature applications. In Switzerland, Brown Boveri Co.
developed ammonia based centrifugal compressors as early as 1926. Later they also
developed large centrifugal compressors working with Freons. Till 1950, the centrifugal
compressors were used mainly in USA for air conditioning applications. However,
subsequently centrifugal compressors have become industry standard for large refrigeration
and air conditioning applications all over the world. Centrifugal compressors developed
before 1940, had 5 to 6 stages, while they had 2 to 3 stages between 1940 to 1960. After
1960, centrifugal compressors with a single stage were also developed. Subsequently,
compact, hermetic centrifugal compressor developed for medium to large capacity
applications. The large diameter, 3600 rpm machines were replaced by compact 10000 to
12000 rpm compressors. Large centrifugal compressors of cooling capacities in the range of
200000 kcal/h to 2500000 kcal/h were used in places such as World Trade Centre, New York.
Figure 2.7 shows cut-view of a two-stage, semi-hermetic centrifugal compressor.

Fig. 2.7 Cut-view of a two-stage, semi-hermetic centrifugal compressor.

16

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

Q. The early refrigerant compressor design resembled:

126. Automobile engines
127. Steam engines
128. Water pumps
129. None of the
above Ans. b)
Q. The early compressors were able to handle liquid and vapour mixtures as they were:
130. Double acting, reciprocating type
131. Horizontally oriented
132. Low speed machines
133. Steam engine driven
Ans. c)
Q. The speed of the compressors was increased gradually with a view to:
134. Develop compact compressors
135. Reduce weight of compressors
136. Handle refrigerant vapour only
137. All of the
above Ans. a) and b)
Q. Hermetic compressors were developed to:
138. Improve energy efficiency
139. Overcome refrigerant leakage problems
140. Improve serviceability
141. Reduce weight
Ans. b)
Q. Open type compressors are used in:
142. Domestic refrigeration and air conditioning
143. Large industrial and commercial refrigeration systems
144. Only CFC based refrigeration systems
145. Only in natural refrigerant based
systems Ans. b)
Q. At present the reciprocating type compressors are most common as they are:
146. Rugged
147. Comparatively easy to manufacture
148. Offer higher energy efficiency
149. All of the
above Ans. a) and b)
Q. Which of the following are positive displacement type compressors:
150. Reciprocating compressors
151. Scroll compressors
152. Screw compressors
153. Centrifugal
compressors Ans. a), b) and
c)
Q. Centrifugal compressors are used in:
17
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 154.Large refrigerant capacity systems
155.In small refrigerant capacity
systems
156. Domestic refrigeration and air conditioning
157. All of the
above Ans. a)

2.4. Conclusions:
The compressor technology has undergone significant developments in the last
hundred years. Almost all the compressors described so far have reached a high level of
perfection. Today different compressors are available for different applications, starting from
small hermetic reciprocating and rotary compressors for domestic refrigerators to very large
screw and centrifugal compressors for huge industrial and commercial refrigeration and air
conditioning applications. However, development is a never-ending process, and efforts are
going on to develop more efficient compact, reliable and quiet compressors. Also some new
types such as linear compressors, trochoidal compressors, acoustic compressors are being
introduced in refrigeration and air conditioning applications. A brief history of refrigeration
and air conditioning from the refrigerant and compressor development points of view has
been discussed in the present lesson. The actual characteristics and performance aspects of
some important refrigerants and compressors will be discussed in subsequent lessons.
Q. State briefly the impact of Freons (CFCs) on refrigeration and air conditioning
Ans.: Freons have contributed significantly to the widespread use of refrigeration and air
condition systems as the systems using these refrigerants were thought to be safe, reliable and
rugged. The rapid growth of domestic refrigerators and air conditioners all over the world can
be attributed at least partly to the non-toxic, non-flammable and chemically stable nature of
Freons. Of course, Freons are also responsible for the monopoly of few companies in
refrigeration technology. Of late, the biggest impact of Freons could be their contribution to
global environmental hazards such as ozone layer depletion and global warming.
Q. How do the natural refrigerants compare with the synthetic refrigerants?
Ans. Almost all the natural refrigerants are non-ozone depleting substances and they also
have comparatively low global warming potential. Natural refrigerants generally offer good
thermodynamic and thermophysical properties leading to energy efficient systems. They are
also relatively inexpensive, and cannot be monopolized by few companies in the developed
world. However, unlike synthetic refrigerants the natural refrigerants suffer from some
specific problems related to toxicity, flammability, limited operating temperature range etc.
Q. What are the motivations for developing hermetic compressors? Why they are not used for
large capacity systems?
Ans. Hermetic compressors were developed to take care of the problem of refrigerant leakage
associated with the open type of compressors. By eliminating refrigerant leakage, the
hermetic compressor based systems were made relatively maintenance free, which is one of
the main requirement of small systems such as domestic refrigerators, air conditioners etc.
Hermetic compressors are not used in large capacity systems, as they are not completely
serviceable, they offer lower energy efficiency and compressor and motor cooling is difficult.

18

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

Lesson
3
Applications Of Refrigeration &
Air Conditioning
1

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

Objectives of the lesson:

The objectives of this lesson are to introduce the student to: i.
Applications of refrigeration in:
158.
Food processing, preservation and distribution (Section 3.2)
159.
Chemical and process industries (Section 3.3)
160.
Special Applications such as cold treatment of metals, medical,
construction, ice skating etc. (Section 3.4)
161.
Comfort air-conditioning (Section 3.5)
ii. Applications of air conditioning, namely:
162. Industrial, such as in textiles, printing, manufacturing, photographic, computer
rooms, power plants, vehicular etc. (Section 3.5.1)
163. Comfort commercial, residential etc. (Section 3.5.2)
At the end of the lesson, the student should be able to:
164. List various applications of refrigeration and air conditioning
165. List typical conditions required for various food products, processes etc.
166. State pertinent issues such as energy efficiency, Indoor Air Quality etc.

3.1. Introduction
As mentioned in Lesson 1, refrigeration deals with cooling of bodies or fluids to
temperatures lower than those of surroundings. This involves absorption of heat at a
lower temperature and rejection to higher temperature of the surroundings. In olden days,

/ Food preservation
and Industrial
\ Refrigeration

f
i

Cooling and
.
dehumidification

Heating and
humidification

Refrigeration

Air conditioning
Fig.3.1. Relation between refrigeration and air conditioning
2

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

the main purpose of refrigeration was to produce ice, which was used for cooling
beverages, food preservation and refrigerated transport etc. Now-a-days refrigeration and
air conditioning find so many applications that they have become very essential for
mankind, and without refrigeration and air conditioning the basic fabric of the society
will be adversely affected. Refrigeration and air conditioning are generally treated in a
single subject due to the fact that one of the most important applications of refrigeration
is in cooling and dehumidification as required for summer air conditioning. Of course,
refrigeration is required for many applications other than air conditioning, and air
conditioning also involves processes other than cooling and dehumidification. Figure 3.1
shows the relation between refrigeration and air conditioning in a pictorial form.
The temperature range of interest in refrigeration extends down to about 100oC.
At lower temperatures cryogenic systems are more economical. Now-a-days refrigeration
has become an essential part of food chain- from post harvest heat removal to processing,
distribution and storage. Refrigeration has become essential for many chemical and
processing industries to improve the standard, quality, precision and efficiency of many
manufacturing processes. Ever-new applications of refrigeration arise all the time. Some
special applications require small capacities but are technically intriguing and
challenging.
As mentioned before, air-conditioning is one of the major applications of
refrigeration. Air-conditioning has made the living conditions more comfortable, hygienic
and healthy in offices, work places and homes. As mentioned in Lesson 1, airconditioning involves control of temperature, humidity, cleanliness of air and its
distribution to meet the comfort requirements of human beings and/or some industrial
requirements. Air-conditioning involves cooling and dehumidification in summer
months; this is essentially done by refrigeration. It also involves heating and
humidification in cold climates, which is conventionally done by a boiler unless a heat
pump is used.
The major applications of refrigeration can be grouped into following four major
equally important areas.
167.
168.
169.
170.

Food processing, preservation and distribution

Chemical and process industries
Special Applications
Comfort air-conditioning

3.2. Application of refrigeration in Food processing, preservation

and distribution
3.2.1. Storage of Raw Fruits and Vegetables: It is well-known that some bacteria are
responsible for degradation of food, and enzymatic processing cause ripening of the fruits
and vegetables. The growth of bacteria and the rate of enzymatic processes are reduced at
low temperature. This helps in reducing the spoilage and improving the shelf life of the
food. Table 3.1 shows useful storage life of some plant and animal tissues at various
3

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

temperatures. It can be seen that the storage temperature affects the useful storage life
significantly. In general the storage life of most of the food products depends upon water
activity, which essentially depends upon the presence of water in liquid form in the food
product and its temperature. Hence, it is possible to preserve various food products for
much longer periods under frozen conditions.
Food Product
o

0C
Meat
Fish
Poultry
Dry meats and fish
Fruits
Dry fruits
Leafy vegetables
Root crops
Dry seeds

6-10
2-7
5-18
> 1000
2 - 180
> 1000
3 - 20
90 - 300
> 1000

Average useful storage life (days)

22oC
38oC
1
<1
1
<1
1
<1
> 350 & < 1000
> 100 & < 350
1 20
17
> 350 & < 1000
> 100 & < 350
17
13
7 50
2 20
> 350 & < 1000
> 100 & < 350

Table 3.1. Effect of storage temperature on useful storage life of food products
Fig.3.2. Ammonia based refrigeration plant for a large cold storage
4
Version
1 ME,and
IIT Kharagpur
In case
of fruits
vegetables, the use of refrigeration starts right after
harvesting to remove the post-harvest heat, transport in refrigerated transport to the cold
storage or the processing plant. A part of it may be stored in cold storage to maintain its
sensory qualities and a part may be distributed to retail shops, where again refrigeration is
used for short time storage. Depending upon the size, the required capacity of
refrigeration plants for cold storages can be very high. Ammonia is one of the common
refrigerants used in cold storages. Figure 3.2 shows the photograph of ammonia based
refrigerant plant for a cold storage. Figure 3.3 shows the photograph of a typical cold
storage. Household refrigerator is the user end of cold chain for short time storage.

Fig.3.3. Photograph of a typical cold storage

The cold chain has proved to be very effective in reducing spoilage of food and in
food preservation. It is estimated that in India, the post-harvest loss due to inadequate
cold storage facilities is high as 30 percent of the total output. The quality of remaining
70 percent is also affected by inadequate cold chain facilities. This shows the importance
of proper refrigeration facilities in view of the growing food needs of the ever-growing
population. Refrigeration helps in retaining the sensory, nutritional and eating qualities of
the food. The excess crop of fruits and vegetables can be stored for use during peak
demands and off-season; and transported to remote locations by refrigerated transport. In
India, storage of potatoes and apples in large scale and some other fruits and vegetables
in small scale and frozen storage of peas, beans, cabbage, carrots etc. has improved the
standard of living. In general, the shelf life of most of the fruits and vegetables increases
by storage at temperatures between 0 to 10 oC. Table 3.2 shows the typical storage
conditions for some fruits and vegetables as recommended by ASHRAE. Nuts, dried
fruits and pulses that are prone to bacterial deterioration can also be stored for long
periods by this method. The above mentioned fruits, vegetables etc, can be stored in raw
state. Some highly perishable items require initial processing before storage. The fast and
busy modern day life demands ready-to-eat frozen or refrigerated food packages to
eliminate the preparation and cooking time. These items are becoming very popular and
these require refrigeration plants.
3.2.2. Fish: Icing of fish according to ASHRAE Handbook on Applications, started way
back in 1938. In India, iced fish is still transported by rail and road, and retail stores store
it for short periods by this method. Freezing of fish aboard the ship right after catch
results in better quality than freezing it after the ship docks. In some ships, it is frozen
along with seawater since it takes months before the ships return to dock. Long-term
preservation of fish requires cleaning, processing and freezing.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

Storage
Temperature,
o
C
Apples
Beetroot
Cabbage
Carrots
Cauliflower
Cucumber
Eggplant
Lettuce
Melons
Mushrooms
Onions
Oranges
Peas, Green
Pears
Potatoes
Pumpkin
Spinach
Tomatoes

04
0
0
0
0
10 - 13
8 - 12
0
7 - 10
0-4
0
0-4
0
0
4 - 16
10 - 13
0
13 - 21

Relative
Humidity,
%
90 95
95 99
95 99
98 100
95
90 95
90 95
95 100
90 - 95
95
65 - 70
85 - 90
95 - 98
90 - 95
90 - 95
70 75
95
85 - 90

Maximum,
recommended
storage time
2 - 6 months
4 6 months
5 6 months
5 9 months
3 4 weeks
10 14 days
7 days
2 3 weeks
2 weeks
2-5
6 8 months
3 4 months
1 2 weeks
2 5 months
2 8 months
6 8 months
1 2 weeks
1 2 weeks

Storage time in cold

storages for vegetables
in tropical countries
2 months
2 months
1 week

1 day

1 week
1 week

Table 3.2. Recommended storage conditions for fruits and vegetables

171. Meat and poultry: These items also require refrigeration right after slaughter
during processing, packaging. Short-term storage is done at 0 oC. Long-term storage
requires freezing and storage at -25oC.
172. Dairy Products: The important dairy products are milk, butter, buttermilk and ice
cream. To maintain good quality, the milk is cooled in bulk milk coolers immediately
after being taken from cow. Bulk milk cooler is a large refrigerated tank that cools it
between 10 to 15oC. Then it is transported to dairy farms, where it is pasteurized.
Pasteurization involves heating it to 73oC and holding it at this temperature for 20
seconds. Thereafter, it is cooled to 3 to 4 oC. The dairies have to have a very large
cooling capacity, since a large quantity of milk has to be immediately cooled after
arrival. During the lean period, the refrigeration plants of dairies are used to produce
ice that is used during peak periods to provide cooling by melting. This reduces the
required peak capacity of the refrigeration plant.
Ice cream manufacture requires pasteurization, thorough mixing, emulsification
and stabilization and subsequently cooling to 4 to 5oC. Then it is cooled to temperature
of about 5 oC in a freezer where it stiffens but still remains in liquid state. It is
packaged and hardened at 30 to 25oC until it becomes solid; and then it is stored at
same temperature.

6
Version 1 ME, IIT
Kharagpur

Buttermilk, curd and cottage cheese are stored at 4 to 10 oC for increase of shelf
life. Use of refrigeration during manufacture of these items also increases their shelf life.
There are many varieties of cheese available these days. Adding cheese starter like lactic
acid and several substances to the milk makes all of these. The whey is separated and
solid part is cured for a long time at about 10OC to make good quality cheese.
3.2.5. Beverages: Production of beer, wine and concentrated fruit juices require
refrigeration. The taste of many drinks can be improved by serving them cold or by
adding ice to them. This has been one of the favourite past time of aristocracy in all the
countries. Natural or man-made ice for this purpose has been made available since a very
long time. Fruit juice concentrates have been very popular because of low cost, good
taste and nutritional qualities. Juices can be preserved for a longer period of time than the
fruits. Also, fruit juice concentrates when frozen can be more easily shipped and
transported by road. Orange and other citrus juices, apple juice, grape juice and pineapple
juice are very popular. To preserve the taste and flavor of juice, the water is driven out of
it by boiling it at low temperature under reduced pressure. The concentrate is frozen and
transported at 20oC.
Brewing and wine making requires fermentation reaction at controlled
temperature, for example lager-type of beer requires 8 to12oC while wine requires 2730oC. Fermentation is an exothermic process; hence heat has to be rejected at controlled
temperature.
173. Candy: Use of chocolate in candy or its coating with chocolate requires setting at
5-10oC otherwise it becomes sticky. Further, it is recommended that it be stored at low
temperature for best taste.
174. Processing and distribution of frozen food: Many vegetables, meat, fish and
poultry are frozen to sustain the taste, which nearly duplicates that of the fresh product.
Freezing retains the sensory qualities of colour, texture and taste apart from nutritional
qualities. The refrigeration systems for frozen food applications are very liberally
designed, since the food items are frozen in shortest period of time. The sharp freezing
with temperature often below 30oC, is done so that the ice crystals formed during
freezing do not get sufficient time to grow and remain small and do not pierce the cell
boundaries and damage them. Ready-to-eat frozen foods, packed dinners and bakery
items are also frozen by this method and stored at temperatures of 25 to -20 oC for
distribution to retail stores during peak demands or off-season demands.
Vegetables in this list are beans, corn, peas, carrots, cauliflower and many others.
Most of these are blanched before freezing. There are various processes of freezing. Blast
freezers give a blast of high velocity air at 30oC on the food container. In contact
freezing, the food is placed between metal plates and metal surfaces that are cooled to
-30oC or lower. Immersion freezing involves immersion of food in low temperature brine.
Individual quick freezing (IQF) is done by chilled air at very high velocities like 5-10 m/s
that keeps the small vegetable particles or shrimp pieces floating in air without clumping,
so that maximum area is available for heat transfer to individual particles. The

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

frozen particles can be easily packaged and transported. The refrigeration capacities in all
the freezers are very large since freezing of large quantities is done in a very short time.
Liquid nitrogen and carbon dioxide are also used for freezing.
Fig.3.4. Section of a supermarket with refrigerated display cases
8
1 ME, refrigeration
IIT Kharagpur
Of lateVersion
supermarket
is gaining popularity all over the world. At
present this constitutes the largest sector of refrigeration in developed countries. In a
typical supermarket a large variety of products are stored and displayed for sale. Since a
wide variety of products are stored, the required storage conditions vary widely.
Refrigeration at temperatures greater than 0oC and less than 0oC is required, as both
frozen and fresh food products are normally stored in the same supermarket. Figure 3.4
shows the photograph of a section of a typical supermarket. Refrigeration systems used
for supermarkets have to be highly reliable due to the considerable value of the highly
perishable products. To ensure proper refrigeration of all the stored products, a large of
refrigerant tubing is used, leading to large refrigerant inventory.

Q. Food products can be preserved for a longer time at low temperatures because:
175. At low temperatures the bacterial activity is reduced
176. Enzymatic activity is reduced at low temperatures
177. Quality of food products improves at low temperatures
178. All of the above
Ans.: a) and b)
Q. The cold chain is extremely useful as it:
179. Makes seasonal products available throughout the year
180. Reduces food spoilage
181. Balances the prices
182. All of the above
Ans.: d)
Q. The useful storage life of food products depends on:
183. Storage temperature
184. Moisture content in the storage
185. Condition of food products at the time of storage
186. All of the above
Ans.: d)
Q. Cold storages can be used for storing:
187. Live products such as fruits, vegetables only
188. Dead products such as meat, fish only
189. Both live and dead products
190. None of the
above Ans.: c)
Q. Fast freezing of products is done to:
191. Reduce the cell damage due to ice crystal growth
192. Reduce energy consumption of refrigeration systems
193. Reduce bacterial activity
194. All of the above
Ans.: a)
Q. Products involving fermentation reactions require refrigeration because:
195. Fermentation process is exothermic
196. Fermentation process is endothermic
197. Fermentation has to be done at controlled temperatures
198. All of the above
Ans.: a) and c)
Q. Supermarket refrigeration requires:
199. Provision for storing a wide variety of products requiring different conditions
200. Reliable refrigeration systems due to the high value of the perishable products
201. Large refrigerant inventory due to long refrigerant tubing
202. All of the above
Ans.: d)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

3.3. Applications of refrigeration in chemical and process

industries
The industries like petroleum refineries, petrochemical plants and paper pulp
industries etc. require very large cooling capacities. The requirement of each industryprocess wise and equipment-wise is different hence refrigeration system has to be
customized and optimized for individual application. The main applications of
refrigeration in chemical and process industries involve the following categories.
203. Separation of gases: In petrochemical plant, temperatures as low as 150oC with
refrigeration capacities as high as 10,000 Tons of Refrigeration (TR) are used for
separation of gases by fractional distillation. Some gases condense readily at lower
temperatures from the mixtures of hydrocarbon. Propane is used as refrigerant in many of
these plants.
204. Condensation of Gases: some gases that are produced synthetically, are condensed
to liquid state by cooling, so that these can be easily stored and transported in liquid state.
For example, in synthetic ammonia plant, ammonia is condensed at 10 to 10oC before
filling in the cylinders, storage and shipment. This low temperature requires refrigeration.
205. Dehumidification of Air: Low humidity air is required in many pharmaceutical
industries. It is also required for air liquefaction plants. This is also required to prevent
static electricity and prevents short circuits in places where high voltages are used. The
air is cooled below its dew point temperature, so that some water vapour condenses out
and the air gets dehumidified.
206. Solidification of Solute: One of the processes of separation of a substance or
pollutant or impurity from liquid mixture is by its solidification at low temperature.
Lubricating oil is dewaxed in petroleum industry by cooling it below 25oC. Wax
solidifies at about 25oC.
207. Storage as liquid at low pressure: Liquid occupies less space than gases. Most of
the refrigerants are stored at high pressure. This pressure is usually their saturation
pressure at atmospheric temperature. For some gases, saturation pressure at room
temperature is very high hence these are stored at relatively low pressure and low
temperature. For example natural gas is stored at 0.7 bar gauge pressure and 130oC.
Heat gain by the cylinder walls leads to boiling of some gas, which is compressed, cooled
and expanded back to 0.7 bar gauge.
208. Removal of Heat of Reaction: In many chemical reactions, efficiency is better if the
reaction occurs below room temperature. This requires refrigeration. If these reactions are
exothermic in nature, then more refrigeration capacities are required. Production of
viscose rayon, cellular acetate and synthetic rubber are some of the examples.
Fermentation is also one of the examples of this.

10

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

209. Cooling for preservation: Many compounds decompose at room temperature or

these evaporate at a very fast rate. Certain drugs, explosives and natural rubber can be
stored for long periods at lower temperatures.
210. Recovery of Solvents: In many chemical processes solvents are used, which usually
evaporate after reaction. These can be recovered by condensation at low temperature by
refrigeration system. Some of the examples are acetone in film manufacture and carbon
tetrachloride in textile production.

3.4. Special applications of refrigeration

In this category we consider applications other than chemical uses. These are in
manufacturing processes, applications in medicine, construction units etc.
211. Cold Treatment of Metals: The dimensions of precision parts and gauge blocks can
be stabilized by soaking the product at temperature around 90oC. The hardness and
wear resistance of carburized steel can be increased by this process. Keeping the cutting
tool at 100oC for 15 minutes can also increase the life of cutting tool. In deep drawing
process the ductility of metal increases at low temperature. Mercury patterns frozen by
refrigeration can be used for precision casting.
212. Medical: Blood plasma and antibiotics are manufactured by freeze-drying process
where water is made to sublime at low pressure and low temperature. This does not affect
the tissues of blood. Centrifuges refrigerated at 10oC, are used in the manufacture of
drugs. Localized refrigeration by liquid nitrogen can be used as anesthesia also.
213. Ice Skating Rinks: Due to the advent of artificial refrigeration, sports like ice
hockey and skating do not have to depend upon freezing weather. These can be played in
indoor stadium where water is frozen into ice on the floor. Refrigerant or brine carrying
pipes are embedded below the floor, which cools and freezes the water to ice over the
floor.
214. Construction: Setting of concrete is an exothermic process. If the heat of setting is
not removed the concrete will expand and produce cracks in the structure. Concrete may
be cooled by cooling sand, gravel and water before mixing them or by passing chilled
water through the pipes embedded in the concrete. Another application is to freeze the
wet soil by refrigeration to facilitate its excavation.
215. Desalination of Water: In some countries fresh water is scarce and seawater is
desalinated to obtain fresh water. Solar energy is used in some cases for desalination. An
alternative is to freeze the seawater. The ice thus formed will be relatively free of salt.
The ice can be separated and thawed to obtain fresh water.
216. Ice Manufacture: This was the classical application of refrigeration. Ice was
manufactured in plants by dipping water containers in chilled brine and it used to take
about 36 hours to freeze all the water in cans into ice. The ice thus formed was stored in
11

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

ice warehouses. Now that small freezers and icemakers are available. Hotels and
restaurants make their own ice, in a hygienic manner. Household refrigerators also have
the facility to make ice in small quantities. The use of ice warehouses is dwindling
because of this reason. Coastal areas still have ice plants where it is used for transport of
iced fish.
Fig.3.5. Solar energy
system for vaccine storage
12
Versiondriven
1 ME,refrigeration
IIT Kharagpur
Refrigeration systems are also required in remote and rural areas for a wide
variety of applications such as storage of milk, vegetables, fruits, foodgrains etc., and also
for storage of vaccines etc. in health centers. One typical problem with many of the rural
and remote areas is the continuous availability of electricity. Since space is not constraint,
and most of these areas in tropical countries are blessed with alternate energy sources
such as solar energy, biomass etc., it is preferable to use these clean and renewable
energy sources in these areas. Thermal energy driven absorption systems have been used
in some instances. Vapour compression systems that run on photovoltaic (PV) cells have
also been developed for small applications. Figure 3.5 shows the schematic of solar PV
cell driven vapour compression refrigeration system for vaccine storage.

Q. Refrigeration is required in petrochemical industries to:

217. Separate gases by fractional distillation
218. Provide safe environment
219. Carry out chemical reactions
220. All of the
above Ans.: a)
Q. Cold treatment of metals is carried out to:
221. To stabilize precision parts
222. To improve hardness and wear resistance
223. To improve ductility
224. To improve life of cutting tools
225. All of the
above Ans.: e)
Q. Refrigeration is used in construction of dams etc to:
226. Avoid crack development during setting of concrete
227. Avoid water evaporation
228. Reduce cost of construction
229. All of the
above Ans.: a)
Q. Refrigeration is required in remote and rural areas to:
230. Store fresh and farm produce
231. Store vaccines in primary health centres
232. Store milk before it is transported to dairy plants
233. All of the
above Ans.: d)
Q. Compared to urban areas, in rural areas:
234. Continuous availability of grid electricity is not ensured
235. Space is not a constraint
236. Refrigeration is not really required
237. Refrigeration systems cannot be maintained
properly Ans.: a) and b)

13

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

3.5 Application of air conditioning:

Air-conditioning is required for improving processes and materials apart from
comfort air-conditioning required for comfort of persons. The life and efficiency of
electronic devices increases at lower temperatures. Computer and microprocessor-based
equipment also require air-conditioning for their efficient operation. Modern electronic
equipment with Very Large Scale Integrated (VLSI) chips dissipates relatively large
quantities of energy in a small volume. As a result, unless suitable cooling is provided,
the chip temperature can become extremely high. As the computing power of computers
increases, more and more cooling will be required in a small volume. Some
supercomputers required liquid nitrogen for cooling.
Air-conditioning applications can be divided into two categories, namely,
industrial and comfort air-conditioning.
3.5.1. Industrial Air-conditioning: The main purpose of industrial air conditioning
systems is to provide conducive conditions so that the required processes can be carried
out and required products can be produced. Of course, the industrial air conditioning
systems must also provide at least a partial measure of comfort to the people working in
the industries. The applications are very diverse, involving cooling of laboratories down
to 40oC for engine testing to cooling of farm animals. The following are the applications
to name a few.
Laboratories: This may involve precision measurement to performance testing of
materials, equipment and processes at controlled temperature and relative humidity.
Laboratories carrying out research in electronics and biotechnology areas require very
clean atmosphere. Many laboratories using high voltage like in LASERS require very
low humidity to avoid the sparking.
Printing: Some colour printing presses have one press for each colour. The paper passes
from one press to another press. The ink of one colour must get dried before it reaches the
second press, so that the colours do not smudge. And the paper should not shrink, so that
the picture does not get distorted. This requires control over temperature as well
humidity. Improper humidity may cause static electricity, curling and buckling of paper.
Manufacture of Precision Parts: If the metal parts are maintained at uniform temperature
during manufacturing process, these will neither expand nor shrink, maintaining close
tolerances. A lower relative humidity will prevent rust formation also. A speck of dust in
a switch or relay can cause total or partial malfunction in spacecraft. The manufacture of
VLSI chips, microprocessors, computers, aircraft parts, Micro-Electro Mechanical
Systems (MEMS), nanomaterial fabrication and many areas of modern progress require a
very clean atmosphere and proper control over humidity. Any impurity in the atmosphere
will spoil the VLSI chips. The concept of Clean rooms has been introduced for such
industries. In fact, all precision industries that use microprocessors require these clean
rooms.

14

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

Textile Industry: The yarn in the textile industry is spun and it moves over spools at very
high speeds in modern machines. It is very sensitive to humidity. The generation of static
electricity should be avoided. Its flexibility and strength should not change. If it breaks
during the process, the plant will have to be stopped and yarn repaired before restarting
the plant.
Pharmaceutical Industries: In these industries to obtain sterile atmosphere, the airborne
bacteria and dust must be removed in the air-conditioning system by filters. These
industries require clean rooms. If capsules are made or used in the plant, then air has to
be dry otherwise the gelatin of capsules will become sticky.
Photographic Material: The raw material used for filmmaking has to be maintained at low
temperature, since it deteriorates at high temperature and humidity. The film also has to
be stored at low temperature. The room where film is developed requires 100%
replacement by fresh air of the air polluted by chemicals.
Farm Animals: The yield of Jersey cows decreases drastically during summer months.
Low temperature results in more efficient digestion of food and increase in weight of cow
and the milk yield. Animal barns have to be ventilated in any case since their number
density is usually very large. In many countries evaporative cooling is used for creating
comfort conditions in animal houses.
Computer Rooms: These require control of temperature, humidity and cleanliness. The
temperature of around 25 oC and relative humidity of 50% is maintained in these rooms.
The dust spoils the CD drives and printers etc.; hence the rooms have to be kept clean
also by using micro filters in the air-conditioning system.
Power Plants: Most of the modern power plants are microprocessor controlled. In the
earlier designs, the control rooms were very large and were provided with natural
ventilation. These days the control rooms are very compact, hence these require airconditioning for persons and the microprocessors.
Vehicular Air-conditioning: Bus, tram, truck, car, recreational vehicle, crane cabin,
aircraft and ships all require air-conditioning. In bus, tram, aircraft and ship, the
occupancy density is very high and the metabolic heat and water vapour generated by
persons has to be rejected. The cooling load in these is very high and rapidly changes that
provides a challenge for their design.
3.5.2. Comfort Air-Conditioning: Energy of food is converted into chemical energy for
functioning of brain, lungs, heart and other organs and this energy is ultimately rejected
to the surroundings. Also the internal organs require a temperature close to 35 oC for their
efficient operation, and regulatory mechanisms of human body maintain this temperature
by rejecting appropriate amount of heat. Human beings do not feel comfortable if some
extra effort is required by the body to reject this energy. The air temperature, humidity
and velocity at which human body does not have to take any extra action, is called
comfort condition. Comfort condition is also sometimes called as neutral condition.

15

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

The residences, offices, shopping centers, stores, large buildings, theatres,

auditorium etc. all have slightly different requirements and require different design. The
required cooling capacities also vary widely depending upon the application. The factory
assembled room air conditioners are very widely used for small residences, offices etc.
These units are available as window type or split type. The capacity of these systems vary
from a fraction of a ton (TR) to about 2 TR. These systems use a vapour compression
refrigeration system with a sealed compressor and forced convection type evaporators
and condensers. Figure 3.6 shows the schematic of a widow type room air conditioner. In
this type all the components are housed in a single outer casing. In a split type air
conditioner, the compressor and condenser with fan (commonly known as condensing
unit) are housed in a separate casing and is kept away from the indoor unit consisting of
the evaporator, blower, filter etc. The outdoor and indoor units are connected by
refrigerant piping. For medium sized buildings factory assembled package units are

Fig.3.6. Schematic of window type room air conditioner

available, while for very large buildings a central air conditioning system is used.
Hospitals require sterile atmosphere so that bacteria emitted by one patient does
not affect the other persons. This is specially so for the operation theatres and intensive
care units. In these places no part of the room air is re-circulated after conditioning by
A/C system. In other places up to 90% of the cold room air is re-circulated and 10%
outdoor fresh air is taken to meet the ventilation requirement of persons. In hospitals all
the room air is thrown out and 100% fresh air is taken into the A/C system. Since,
outdoor air may be at 45oC compared to 25oC of the room air, the air-conditioning load
becomes very large. The humidity load also increases on this account. Operation theaters
require special attention in prevention of spores, viruses, bacteria and contaminants given

16

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

off by various devices and materials. Special quality construction and filters are used for
this purpose.
Restaurants, theatres and other places of amusement require air-conditioning for
the comfort of patrons. All places where, a large number of people assemble should have
sufficient supply of fresh air to dilute CO2 and body odours emitted by persons. In
addition, people dissipate large quantities of heat that has to be removed by airconditioning for the comfort of persons. These places have wide variation in airconditioning load throughout the day. These have large number of persons, which add a
lot of water vapour by respiration and perspiration. The food cooked and consumed also
adds water vapour. This vapour has to be removed by air-conditioning plant. Hence, these
buildings have large latent heat loads. Infiltration of warm outdoor is also large since the
large number of persons enter and leave the building leading to entry of outdoor air with
every door opening. Ventilation requirement is also very large.
Air-conditioning in stores and supermarkets attracts more customers, induces
longer period of stay and thereby increases the sales. Supermarkets have frozen food
section, refrigerated food section, dairy and brewage section, all of them requiring
different temperatures. The refrigeration system has to cater to different temperatures,
apart from air-conditioning. These places also have a wide variation in daily loads
depending upon busy and lean hours, and holidays.
Large commercial buildings are a world of their own; they have their own
shopping center, recreation center, gymnasium swimming pool etc. Offices have very
high density of persons during office hours and no occupancy during off time. These
buildings require integrated concept with optimum utilization of resources and services.
These have security aspects, fire protection, emergency services, optimum utilization of
energy all built-in. Modern buildings of this type are called intelligent buildings where
air-conditioning requires large amount of energy and hence is the major focus.
Since persons have to spend a major part of their time within the building, without
much exposure to outdoors, the concept of Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) has become very
important. There are a large number of pollutants that are emitted by the materials used in
the construction of buildings and brought into the buildings. IAQ addresses to these
issues and gives recommendation for their reduction to safe limits. Sick building
syndrome is very common in poorly designed air conditioned buildings due to inadequate
ventilation and use of improper materials. The sick building syndrome is characterized by
the feeling of nausea, headache, eye and throat irritation and the general feeling of being
uncomfortable with the indoor environment. In developed countries this is leading to
litigation also.
In the earlier systems little attention was paid to energy conservation, since fuels
were abundant and inexpensive. The energy crisis in early seventies, lead to a review of
basic principles and increased interest in energy optimization. The concept of low initial
cost with no regard to operating cost has become obsolete now. Approaches, concepts and
thermodynamic cycles, which were considered impractical at one time, are receiving

17

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

serious considerations now. Earlier, the index of performance used to be first law
efficiency, now in addition to that; the second law efficiency is considered so that the
available energy utilized and wasted can be clearly seen. Concepts of hybrid cycles, heat
recovery systems, alternate refrigerants and mixtures of refrigerants are being proposed to
optimize energy use. Large-scale applications of air-conditioning in vast office and
industrial complexes and increased awareness of comfort and indoor air quality have lead
to challenges in system design and simulations. Developments in electronics, controls
and computers have made refrigeration and air-conditioning a high-technology industry.
Q. Air conditioning involves:
238. Control of temperature
239. Control of humidity
240. Control of air motion
241. Control of air purity
242. All of the
above Ans.: e)
Q. The purpose of industrial air conditioning is to:
243. Provide suitable conditions for products and processes
244. Provide at least a partial measure of comfort to workers
245. Reduce energy consumption
246. All of the
above Ans.: a) and
b)
Q. Air conditioning is required in the manufacture of precision parts to:
247. Achieve close tolerances
248. Prevent rust formation
249. Provide clean environment
250. All of the
above Ans.: d)
Q. Modern electronic equipment require cooling due to:
251. Dissipation of relatively large amount of heat in small volumes
252. To prevent erratic behaviour
253. To improve life
254. All of the
above Ans.: d)
Q. Human beings need air conditioning as:
255. They continuously dissipate heat due to metabolic activity
256. Body regulatory mechanisms need stable internal temperatures
257. Efficiency improves under controlled conditions
258. All of the
above Ans.: d)
Q. Small residences and offices use:
18
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 259. Window air conditioners
260. Split air conditioners
261. Central air conditioning
262. All of the
above Ans.: a) and
b)

3.6. Conclusions:
The scope of refrigeration is very wide and applications are very diverse and
literally thousands of scientists and engineers have contributed towards its development.
The accomplishments of these unnamed persons are summarized in the ASHRAE
Handbooks. The principles presented in this text follow the information provided in these
handbooks.
Q. What do you understand by a cold chain for food products?
Ans.: Proper food preservation requires the maintenance of a cold chain beginning from
the place of harvest and ending at the place of consumption. A typical cold chain consists
of facilities for pre-treatment at the place of harvest, refrigeration/freezing at food
processing plant, refrigeration during transit, storage in refrigerated warehouses (cold
storages), refrigerated displays at the market, and finally storage in the domestic
freezer/refrigerator. It is very important that suitable conditions be provided for the
perishable products through out the chain.
Q. Explain the importance of cold storages
Ans.: Preservation of perishable products using cold storages equalizes the prices
throughout the year and makes these products available round the year. Without them, the
prices would be very low at the time of harvest and very high during the off-season. With
storage facilities, it would also be possible to make the products available in areas where
they are not grown.
Q. What are the important issues to be considered in the design of refrigeration systems?
Ans.: Refrigeration systems are used in a wide variety of applications. Each application
has specific requirements of temperature, moisture content, capacity, operating duration,
availability of resources etc. Hence, refrigeration system design must be done for each
application based on the specific requirements. Since refrigeration systems are cost and
energy intensive, it is important to design the systems to achieve low initial and running
costs. Reliability of the systems is also very important as the failure of the refrigeration
systems to perform may lead huge financial losses. Of late, issues related to environment
have attracted great attention, hence the refrigeration systems should be as far as possible
environment friendly.
Q. What is the relation between refrigeration and air conditioning?
Ans. Air conditioning involves control of temperature and moisture content. One of the
most common requirement of air conditioning systems is cooling and dehumidification of
air. Refrigeration systems are required for cooling and dehumidification. Refrigeration
systems can also be used for heating of air by utilizing the heat rejected at the condenser,
i.e., by running them as heat pumps.

19

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

Q. What is meant by IAQ and what does it involve?

Ans.: IAQ stands for Indoor Air Quality and it refers to the ways and means of reducing
and maintaining the pollutants inside the occupied space within tolerable levels. IAQ
involves specifying suitable levels of fresh air supply (ventilation), suitable air filters, use
of proper materials of construction, furniture, carpets, draperies etc.

20

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

Lesson
4
Review of fundamental
principles
Thermodynamics : Part I
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 1

2
The main objective of this lesson and the subsequent lesson is to review
fundamental principles of thermodynamics pertinent to refrigeration and
air conditioning. The specific objectives of this part are to:
263.
Introduce and define important thermodynamic concepts such as thermodynamic
system, path and point functions, thermodynamic process, cycle, heat, work etc.
(Sections 4.2 and 4.3)
264.
State the four fundamental laws of thermodynamics (Section 4.4)
265.
Apply first law of thermodynamics to closed and open systems and develop
relevant equations (Section 4.4)
266.
Introduce and define thermodynamic properties such as internal energy and
enthalpy (Section 4.4)
267.
Discuss the importance of second law of thermodynamics and state Carnot
theorems (Section 4.4)
268.
Define and distinguish the differences between heat engine, refrigerator and heat
pump (Section 4.4)
269.
Obtain expressions for Carnot efficiency of heat engine, refrigerator and heat
pump (Section 4.4)
270.
State Clausius inequality and introduce the property entropy (Section 4.4)
At the end of the lesson the student should be able to:
271.
272.
273.
274.
275.
276.
277.
278.
279.

Identify path function and point functions

Define heat and work
Apply first law of thermodynamics to open and closed systems
State second law of thermodynamics
Define heat engine, refrigerator and heat pump
Apply second law of thermodynamics to evaluate efficiencies of reversible cycles
State Clausius inequality and define entropy
Define reversible and irreversible processes
State the principle of increase of entropy

4.1. Introduction
Refrigeration and air conditioning involves various processes such as compression,
expansion, cooling, heating, humidification, de-humidification, air purification, air distribution
etc. In all these processes, there is an exchange of mass, momentum and energy. All these
exchanges are subject to certain fundamental laws. Hence to understand and analyse
refrigeration and air conditioning systems, a basic knowledge of the laws of thermodynamics,
fluid mechanics and heat transfer that govern these processes is essential. It is assumed that the
reader has studied courses in engineering thermodynamics, fluid mechanics and heat transfer.
This chapter reviews some of the fundamental concepts of thermodynamics pertinent to
refrigeration and air-conditioning.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

3
4.2. Definitions
Thermodynamics is the study of energy interactions between systems and the effect of these
interactions on the system properties. Energy transfer between systems takes place in the form
of heat and/or work. Thermodynamics deals with systems in equilibrium.
A thermodynamic system is defined as a quantity of matter of fixed mass and identity upon
which attention is focused for study. In simple terms, a system is whatever we want to study. A
system could be as simple as a gas in a cylinder or as complex as a nuclear power plant.
Everything external to the system is the surroundings. The system is separated from the
surroundings by the system boundaries. Thermodynamic systems can be further classified into
closed systems, open systems and isolated systems.
A control volume, which may be considered as an open system, is defined as a specified region
in space upon which attention is focused. The control volume is separated from the surroundings
by a control surface. Both mass and energy can enter or leave the control volume.
The first and an extremely important step in the study of thermodynamics is to choose and
identify the system properly and show the system boundaries clearly.
A process is defined as the path of thermodynamic states which the system passes through as it
goes from an initial state to a final state. In refrigeration and air conditioning one encounters a
wide variety of processes. Understanding the nature of the process path is very important as heat
and work depend on the path.
A system is said to have undergone a cycle if beginning with an initial state it goes through
different processes and finally arrives at the initial state.
4.2.1. Heat and work:
Heat is energy transferred between a system and its surroundings by virtue of a temperature
difference only. The different modes of heat transfer are: conduction, convection and radiation.
Heat is a way of changing the energy of a system by virtue of a temperature difference only. Any
other means for changing the energy of a system is called work. We can have push-pull work
(e.g. in a piston-cylinder, lifting a weight), electric and magnetic work (e.g. an electric motor),
chemical work, surface tension work, elastic work, etc.
Mechanical modes of work: In mechanics work is said to be done when a force F moves
through a distance dx. When this force is a mechanical force, we call the work done as a
mechanical mode of work. The classical examples of mechanical mode of work are:
280.
281.
282.
283.

Moving system boundary work

Rotating shaft work
Elastic work, and
Surface tension work

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

4
For a moving system boundary work, the work done during a process 1-2 is given by:
2

W2 = p.dV

(4.1)

where p is the pressure acting on the system boundary and dV is the differential volume. It is
assumed that the process is carried out very slowly so that at each instant of time the system is in
equilibrium. Typically such a process is called a quasi-equilibrium process.
For rigid containers, volume is constant, hence moving boundary work is zero in this case. For
other systems, in order to find the work done one needs to know the relation between pressure p
and volume V during the process.
Sign convention for work and heat transfer: Most thermodynamics books consider the work
done by the system to be positive and the work done on the system to be negative. The heat
transfer to the system is considered to be positive and heat rejected by the system is considered
to be negative. The same convention is followed throughout this course.
4.2.2. Thermodynamic Functions:
There are two types of functions defined in thermodynamics, path function and point function.
Fig. 4.1. Difference between point and path Vfuenrcstiions1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

Path function depends on history of the system (or path by which system arrived at a given
state). Examples for path functions are work and heat. Point function does not depend on the
history (or path) of the system. It only depends on the state of the system. Examples of point
functions are: temperature, pressure, density, mass, volume, enthalpy, entropy, internal energy
etc. Path functions are not properties of the system, while point functions are properties of the
system. Change in point function can be obtained by from the initial and final values of the
function, whereas path has to defined in order to evaluate path functions. Figure 4.1 shows the
difference between point and path functions. Processes A and B have same initial and final
states, hence, the change in volume (DV A and DVB) for both these processes is same (3 m 3), as
volume is a point function, whereas the work transferred (W A and WB) for the processes is
different since work is a path function. It should also be noted that the cyclic integrals of all
point functions is zero, while the cyclic integrals of path functions may be or may not be zero.

5
4.3. Thermodynamic properties
A system is specified and analyzed in terms of its properties. A property is any characteristic or
attribute of matter, which can be evaluated quantitatively. The amount of energy transferred in a
given process, work done, energy stored etc. are all evaluated in terms of the changes of the
system properties.
A thermodynamic property depends only on the state of the system and is independent of the
path by which the system arrived at the given state. Hence all thermodynamic properties are
point functions. Thermodynamic properties can be either intensive (independent of size/mass,
e.g. temperature, pressure, density) or extensive (dependent on size/mass, e.g. mass, volume)
Thermodynamic properties relevant to refrigeration and air conditioning systems are
temperature, pressure, volume, density, specific heat, enthalpy, entropy etc.
It is to be noted that heat and work are not properties of a system.
Some of the properties, with which we are already familiar, are: temperature, pressure, density,
specific volume, specific heat etc. Thermodynamics introduces certain new properties such as
internal energy, enthalpy, entropy etc. These properties will be described in due course.
4.3.1. State postulate:
This postulate states that the number of independent intensive thermodynamic properties
required to specify the state of a closed system that is:
284.
285.
286.

Subject to conditions of local equilibrium

Exposed to n different (non-chemical) work modes of energy transport, and
Composed of m different pure substances

is (n+m). For a pure substance (m = 1) subjected to only one work mode (n = 1) two
independent intensive properties are required to fix the state of the system completely (n + m =
2). Such a system is called a simple system. A pure gas or vapour under compression or
expansion is an example of a simple system. Here the work mode is moving system boundary
work.

4.4. Fundamental laws of Thermodynamics

Classical thermodynamics is based upon four empirical principles called zeroth, first, second
and third laws of thermodynamics. These laws define thermodynamic properties, which are of
great importance in understanding of thermodynamic principles. Zeroth law defines temperature;
first law defines internal energy; second law defines entropy and the third law can be used to
obtain absolute entropy values. The above four thermodynamic laws are based on human
observation of natural phenomena; they are not mathematically derived equations. Since no
exceptions to these have been observed; these are accepted as laws.
Conservation of mass is a fundamental concept, which states that mass is neither created nor
destroyed.
The Zeroth law of thermodynamics states that when two systems are in thermal equilibrium with
a third system, then they in turn are in thermal equilibrium with each other. This implies that
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

some property must be same for the three systems. This property is temperature. Thus this law is
the basis for temperature measurement. Equality of temperature is a necessary and sufficient
condition for thermal equilibrium, i.e. no transfer of heat.
The First law of thermodynamics is a statement of law of conservation of energy. Also,
according to this law, heat and work are interchangeable. Any system that violates the first law
(i.e., creates or destroys energy) is known as a Perpetual Motion Machine (PMM) of first kind.
For a system undergoing a cyclic process, the first law of thermodynamics is given by:

Q = W

(4.2)

where Q = net heat transfer during the cycle

W = net work transfer during the cycle
Equation (4.2) can be written as:
(Q-W) = 0

(4.3)

This implies that (Q-W) must be a point function or property of the system. This property is
termed as internal energy, U. Mathematically, internal energy can be written as:
dU = Q-W

(4.4)

The internal energy of a system represents a sum total of all forms of energy viz. thermal,
molecular, lattice, nuclear, rotational, vibrational etc.
4.4.1. First law of thermodynamics for a closed system:
Let the internal energy of a closed system at an equilibrium state 1 be U1. If 1Q2 amount of heat
is transferred across its boundary and 1W2 is the amount of work done by the system and the
system is allowed to come to an equilibrium state 2. Then integration of Eqn. (4.4) yields,
U2-U1= 1Q2 - 1 W2

(4.5)

If m is the mass of the system and u denotes the specific internal energy of the system then,
m(u2-u1)= m(1q2 - 1 w2)
or, u 2 -u 1 = 1q2 - 1 w2

(4.6)
(4.7)

where, 1q2 and 1w2 are heat transfer and work done per unit mass of the system.
Flow Work:
In an open system some matter, usually fluid enters and leaves the system. It requires flow work
for the fluid to enter the system against the system pressure and at the same time flow work is
required to expel the fluid from the system. It can be shown that the specific flow work is given
by the product of pressure, p and specific volume, v, i.e., flow work = pv.
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

Enthalpy:
In the analysis of open systems, it is convenient to combine the specific flow work pv with
internal energy u as both of them increase the energy of the system. The sum of specific
internal energy and specific flow work is an intensive property of the system and is called
specific enthalpy, h. Thus specific enthalpy, h is given by:
h = u + pv

(4.8)

4.4.2. First law of thermodynamics for open system:

For an open system shown in Figure 4.2, m1 and m2 are the mass flow rates at inlet and outlet, h1
and h2 are the specific enthalpies at inlet and outlet, V1 and V2 are the inlet and outlet velocities
and z1 and z2 are the heights at inlet and outlet with reference to a datum; q and w are the rate of
heat and work transfer to the system and E is the total energy of the system.
m1

V1
z1

7
\^
V/
ts'

S\

^
m2
I
h2
*------------- V2

-^

z2

w
Fig. 4.2. First law of thermodynamics for an open system
Then the first law for this open system is given by:
dE
V22
V2
= m2(h2 +^ + gz2)-m1(h1 + 1 + gz1) + W-Q

(4.9)

where (dE/dt) is the rate at which the total energy of the system changes and g is the
acceleration due to gravity.
First law for open system in steady state
In steady state process, the time rate of change of all the quantities is zero, and mass is also
conserved. As a result, the mass and total energy of the system do not change with time, hence,
(dE/dt) is zero and from conservation of mass, m1 = m2 = m. Then the first law becomes:
(h2 + V2 + gz2)-(h1 + V1 + gz1) =q-w

(4.10)

where q and w are specific heat and work transfer rates

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 7

8
Second law of thermodynamics:
The second law of thermodynamics is a limit law. It gives the upper limit of efficiency of a
system. The second law also acknowledges that processes follow in a certain direction but not in
the opposite direction. It also defines the important property called entropy.
It is common sense that heat will not flow spontaneously from a body at lower temperature to a
body at higher temperature. In order to transfer heat from lower temperature to higher
temperature continuously (that is, to maintain the low temperature) a refrigeration system is
needed which requires work input from external source. This is one of the principles of second
law of thermodynamics, which is known as Clausius statement of the second law.
Clausius statement of second law
It is impossible to transfer heat in a cyclic process from low temperature to high temperature
without work from external source.
It is also a fact that all the energy supplied to a system as work can be dissipated as heat transfer.
On the other hand, all the energy supplied as heat transfer cannot be continuously converted into
work giving a thermal efficiency of 100 percent. Only a part of heat transfer at high temperature
in a cyclic process can be converted into work, the remaining part has to be rejected to
surroundings at lower temperature. If it were possible to obtain work continuously by heat
transfer with a single heat source, then automobile will run by deriving energy from atmosphere
at no cost. A hypothetical machine that can achieve it is called Perpetual Motion Machine of
second kind. This fact is embedded in Kelvin-Planck Statement of the Second law.
Kelvin-Planck statement of second law
It is impossible to construct a device (engine) operating in a cycle that will produce no effect
other than extraction of heat from a single reservoir and convert all of it into work.
Mathematically, Kelvin-Planck statement can be written as:
Wcycle 0 (for a single reservoir)

(4.11)

Reversible and Irreversible Processes

A process is reversible with respect to the system and surroundings if the system and the
surroundings can be restored to their respective initial states by reversing the direction of the
process, that is, by reversing the heat transfer and work transfer. The process is irreversible if it
cannot fulfill this criterion.
If work is done in presence of friction, say by movement of piston in a cylinder then a part of the
work is dissipated as heat and it cannot be fully recovered if the direction of process is reversed.
Similarly, if heat is transferred through a temperature difference from higher temperature to a
lower temperature, its direction cannot be reversed since heat transfer from lower temperature to
higher temperature would require external work input. These are two examples of irreversible
processes.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 8

9
Reversible process is a hypothetical process in which work is done in absence of friction and
heat transfer occurs isothermally. Irreversibility leads to loss in work output and loss in
availability and useful work.
4.4.3. Heat engines, Refrigerators, Heat pumps:
A heat engine may be defined as a device that operates in a thermodynamic cycle and does a
certain amount of net positive work through the transfer of heat from a high temperature body to
a low temperature body. A steam power plant is an example of a heat engine.
A refrigerator may be defined as a device that operates in a thermodynamic cycle and transfers a
certain amount of heat from a body at a lower temperature to a body at a higher temperature by
consuming certain amount of external work. Domestic refrigerators and room air conditioners
are the examples. In a refrigerator, the required output is the heat extracted from the low
temperature body.
A heat pump is similar to a refrigerator, however, here the required output is the heat rejected to
the high temperature body.
Carnots theorems for heat engines:
Theorem 1: It is impossible to construct a heat engine that operates between two thermal
reservoirs and is more efficient than a reversible engine operating between the same two
reservoirs.
Theorem 2: All reversible heat engines operating between the same two thermal reservoirs have
the same thermal efficiency.
The two theorems can be proved by carrying out a thought experiment and with the help of
second law. Carnots theorems can also be formed for refrigerators in a manner similar to heat
engines.
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur
Carnot efficiency: The Carnot efficiencies are the efficiencies of completely reversible cycles
operating between two thermal reservoirs. According to Carnots theorems, for any given two
thermal reservoirs, the Carnot efficiency represents the maximum possible efficiency.

Thermal efficiency for a heat engine, T|HE is defined as:

W cycle

r|HE =

QC

= 1-^
QH
QH

(4.12)

where Wcycle is the net work output, QC and QH and are the heat rejected to the low temperature
reservoir and heat added (heat input) from the high temperature reservoir, respectively.
It follows from Carnot s theorems that for a reversible cycle ( QC ) is a function of temperatures
QH
QC ,,
of the two reservoirs only. i.e.
= <f)(TC TH ) .
QH
If we choose the absolute (Kelvin) temperature scale then:
QC = TC
QH TH
QC
TC
hence, r|Carnot HE = 1--------- = 1----

(4.13)

(4.14)

The efficiency of refrigerator and heat pump is called as Coefficient of Performance (COP).
Similarly to heat engines, Carnot coefficient of performance for heat pump and refrigerators
COPHP and COPR can be written as
COPCarnot,HP
QCH
QCH= Wc H = QTTHH_QC = THTC
QC

(4.15)
_

QC

QC

CarnotR " "~

Wcycle

QH-QC

TH ~ TC

where
Wcycle = work input to the reversible heat pump and refrigerator
QH
QC

= heat transferred between the system and the hot reservoir

= heat transferred between the system and cold reservoir

TH
TC

= temperature of the hot reservoir

= temperature of the cold reservoir

Clausius inequality:
The Clausius inequality is a mathematical form of second law of thermodynamics for a closed
system undergoing a cyclic process. It is given by:
r( SQ^\
4> -^H <0
(4.16)
\T J b
In the above equation (4.16), ^represents the heat transfer at a part of the system boundary
during a portion of the cycle, and T is the absolute temperature at that part of the boundary. The
subscript b serves as a reminder that the integrand is evaluated at the boundary of the system
executing the cycle. The equality applies when there are no internal irreversibilities as the

system executes the cycle, and inequality applies when there are internal irreversibilities are
present.
Entropy:
As mentioned before, second law of thermodynamics introduces the property, entropy. It is a
measure of amount of disorder in a system. It is also a measure of the extent to which the energy
of a system is unavailable. From Clausius inequality, i
= 0for a reversible cycle. This
I T b,rev
implies that the quantity

must be a point function, hence a property of the system. This

V T /b,rev

property is named as entropy by Clausius. The entropy change between any two equilibrium
states 1 and 2 of a system is given by:

(2sQ)
1 T

S 2 - S 1 = f

(4.17)
int
rev
Where S2 , S1 are the entropies at states 1 and 2. The subscript int rev is added as a reminder
that the integration is carried out for any internally reversible process between the two states.
In general, for any process 1-2, the entropy change can be written as:
S2-S1 >

(4.18)

The equality applies when there are no internal irreversibilities as the system executes the cycle,
and inequality applies when there are internal irreversibilities are present.
Equation (4.18) can also be written as:
(2
\
S2-S1= \
+<j
1T
V
Jb
where a: <

(4.19)

[ > 0 irreversibilities present within the system

[ = 0 no irreversibilities present within in the system

The above equation may be considered as an entropy balance equation for a closed system. If the
end states are fixed, the entropy change on the left side of Eqn. (4.19) can be evaluated
independently of the details of the process. The two terms on the right side depend explicitly on
the nature of the process and cannot be determines solely from the knowledge of end states. The
first term on the right side of the equation is interpreted as entropy transfer. The direction of
entropy transfer is same as that of heat transfer. The entropy change of a system is not accounted
solely by the entropy transfer. We have to include another term for entropy generation due to
internal irreversibililies in the system. The second term in Eqn. (4.19) accounts for this, and is
interpreted as entropy production. The value of entropy production cannot be negative. It can

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 11

12
have either zero or positive value. But the change in entropy of the system can be positive,
negative, or zero.
S2 ~S1

>0
=0
<0

(4.20)

Principle of increase of entropy:

According the definition of an isolated system one can write:
AEisol = 0

(4.21)

because no energy transfers takes place across its boundary. Thus the energy of the isolated
system remains constant.
An entropy balance for an isolated energy is written as:

(2sQ)
ASisol = \

+o-isol
1

(4.22)

)b

Since there are there are no energy transfers in an isolated system, the first term in the above
equation is zero, hence the above equation reduces to:
ASisol =aisol >0

(4.23)

where oisol is the total amount of entropy produced within the isolated system, since this cannot
be negative, it implies that the entropy of an isolated system can only increase. If we consider a
combined system that includes the system and its surroundings, then the combined system
becomes an isolated system. Then one can write:
ASsystem + ASsurroundings = aisol > 0

(4.24)

since entropy is produced in all actual processes, only processes that can occur are those for
which the entropy of the isolated system increases. Energy of an isolated system is conserved
whereas entropy of an isolated system increases. This is called the principle of increase of
entropy.
Third law of thermodynamics:
This law gives the definition of absolute value of entropy and also states that absolute zero
cannot be achieved. Another version of this law is that the entropy of perfect crystals is zero at
absolute zero. This statement is attributed to Plank. This is in line with the concept that entropy
is a measure of disorder of the system. If o' is the probability of achieving a particular state out
of a large number of states; then entropy of the system is equal to ln(o). The transitional
movement of molecules ceases at absolute zero and position of atoms can be uniquely specified.
In addition, if we have a perfect crystal, then all of its atoms are alike and their positions can be

interchanged without changing the state. The probability of this state is unity, that is = 1 and
ln () = ln (1) = 0
For imperfect crystals however there is some entropy associated with configuration of molecules
and atoms even when all motions cease, hence the entropy in this case does not tend to zero as T
0, but it tends to a constant called the entropy of configuration.
The third law allows absolute entropy to be determined with zero entropy at absolute zero as the
reference state. In refrigeration systems we deal with entropy changes only, the absolute entropy
is not of much use. Therefore entropy may be taken to be zero or a constant at any suitably
chosen reference state.
Another consequence of third law is that absolute zero cannot be achieved. One tries to approach
absolute zero by magnetization to align the molecules. This is followed by cooling and then
demagnetization, which extracts energy from the substance and reduces its temperature. It can
be shown that this process will require infinite number of cycles to achieve absolute zero. In a
later chapter it will be shown that infinitely large amount of work is required to maintain
absolute zero if at all it can be achieved.
Questions:
1. a) Prove the equivalence of Clausius and Kelvin statements. (Solution)
b) Explain briefly about Carnots corollaries? (Solution)
2. Divide the following in to a) point function and path function and b) extensive property and
intensive property.
Pressure, enthalpy, volume, temperature, specific volume, internal energy, work, heat,
entropy, pressure, density, mass, and specific heat. (Solution)
287. Gases enter the adiabatic converging nozzle of an aircraft with velocity V1 from
combustion chamber. Find out the expression for the change in enthalpy between inlet and outlet
of the nozzle, where inlet area A1 and outlet area A2 (A2 < A1) are given and the nozzle is
assumed to be horizontal. (Solution)
288. 10 kW of electrical power input is given to a mechanical pump, which is pumping water
from a well of depth 10 m. Pump is heated up because of frictional losses in the pump. In steady
state, pump temperature is TM = 40oC and the surroundings is at TS = 20oC. The convective heat
transfer between the motor surface area AM (= 0.8 m2) and the surroundings air is governed by
Q = hAM(TM -TS)
2
Where h = 0.15 kW/m -K, is a convective heat transfer coefficient between the motor surface
and the surrounding air. Find out the maximum mass flow rate of the water that mechanical
pump can pump? (Solution)
5. A refrigerator manufactured by one manufacturing company works between 40oC and -5oC.
The manufacturer claims that coefficient of performance of that refrigerator is 7.0. Do you agree
with his statement? Justify your answer. (Solution)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 13

14
6. 2 kg of ice at -10 oC and 3 kg of water at 70 oC are mixed in an insulated container. Find a)
Equilibrium
temperature
of
the
system
b)
Entropy
produced.
(Cice = 2.0934kJ /kg - K, Lfusion = 334.944kJ /kg, Cwater = 4.1868kJ /kg - K) (Solution)
7. Answer the following true or false and justify your answer.
289.
Change in the entropy of a closed system is the same for every process between
two given states. (Answer)
290.
The entropy of a fixed amount of an incompressible substance increases in every
process in which temperature decreases. (Answer)
291.

Entropy change of a system can become negative. (Answer)

292.

Entropy change of an isolated system can become negative. (Answer)

293.
A process which violates second law of thermodynamics also violates the first
law of thermodynamics. (Answer)
294.
When a net amount of work is done on a closed system undergoing an internally
reversible process, a net heat transfer from the system has to occur. (Answer)
g) A closed system can experience an increase in entropy only when irreversibilities are
present within the system during the process. (Answer)
h) In an adiabatic and internally reversible process of a closed system, the entropy remains
constant. (Answer)
i) No process is allowed in which the entropies of both the system and the surroundings
increase. (Answer)
j) During a process the entropy of the system might decrease while the entropy of
surroundings increase and conversely. (Answer)
k) The value of coefficient of performance of heat pump is one greater than that of
refrigerator. (Answer)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 14

Lesson
5
Review of fundamental
principles
Thermodynamics : Part II
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 1

.The specific objectives are to:

1. State principles of evaluating thermodynamic properties of pure substances using:
295.
Equations of State (Section 5.2)
296.
Thermodynamic charts (Section 5.2)
297.
Thermodynamic tables (Section 5.2)
2. Derive expressions for heat and work transfer in important thermodynamic processes
such as:
298.
Isochoric process (Section 5.3)
299.
Isobaric process (Section 5.3)
300.
Isothermal process (Section 5.3)
301.
Isentropic process (Section 5.3)
302.
Isenthalpic process etc. (Section 5.3)
At the end of the lesson the student should be able to:
303.
304.
305.

Evaluate thermodynamic properties using equations of state, tables and charts

Identify various regimes on T-s and P-h charts
Estimate heat and work transferred in various thermodynamic processes

5.1. Thermodynamic relations

There are some general thermodynamic relations, which are useful for determination of several
thermodynamic properties from measured data on a few properties. The following relationships
are generally used for the evaluation of entropy change. These are called T ds equations. They
are obtained by applying first and second laws of thermodynamics
T ds=du+ p dv
T ds=dh-v dP

first T ds equation
second T ds equation

(5.1)

Two more fundamental thermodynamic relations can be obtained by defining two new properties
called Gibbs and Helmholtz functions.

5.2. Evaluation of thermodynamic properties

In order to perform thermodynamic calculations, one has to know various thermodynamic
properties of the system. Properties such as internal energy, enthalpy and entropy cannot be
measured directly. Thermodynamics gives mathematical relations using which one can obtain
properties, which cannot be measured directly in terms of the measurable properties such as
pressure, temperature, volume, specific heat etc.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

3
In general thermodynamic properties can be evaluated from:
306. Thermodynamic equations of state
307. Thermodynamic tables
308. Thermodynamic charts
309. Direct experimental results, and
310. The formulae of statistical thermodynamics
An equation of state (EOS) is a fundamental equation, which expresses the relationship between
pressure, specific volume and temperature. The simplest equation of state is that for an
incompressible substance (e.g. solids and liquids), which states that the specific volume is
constant. The next simplest EOS is that for an ideal gas.
Ideal (perfect) gas equation is a special equation of state, which is applicable to ideal gases. The
molecular forces of attraction between gas molecules are small compared to those in liquids. In
the limit when these forces are zero, a gas is called a perfect gas. In addition the volume of the
molecules should be negligible compared to total volume for a perfect gas. The perfect or ideal
gas equation of state is given by:
Pv = RT

(5.2)

Where P v R T

=
=
=
=

Absolute pressure
Specific volume
Gas constant
Absolute temperature

The gas constant R is given by:

R = Ru /M
Where Ru
=

(5.3)
=
Universal gas constant M
Molecular weight

The ideal gas equation is satisfactory for low molecular mass, real gases at relatively high
temperatures and low pressures. Ideal gas equation can be used for evaluating properties of
moist air used in air conditioning applications without significant error.
For ideal gases, the change in internal energy and enthalpy are sole functions of temperature.
Assuming constant specific heats (cp ,cv ) in the temperature range T1 to T2, for ideal gases one
can write the change in internal energy (u), enthalpy (h) and entropy (s) as:
2R
(T2-T
ln
ln
+R

v11
T
ln
T22
P
T11
P

T) u2 -u1 = h2 -h1 =
s2 -s1 =c
(5.4)

s2 -s1 = cp ln cp -cv =R

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 3

The study of the properties of moist air is known as psychrometry. The psychrometric properties
(temperature, humidity ratio, relative humidity, enthalpy etc.) are normally available in the form
of charts, known as psychrometric charts. The psychrometric properties will be discussed in
later chapters.
For gases with complex molecular structure or for real gases at high pressure and low
temperatures or for gases approaching the saturated vapour region, the use of Ideal gas equation
results in significant errors. Hence more complex but more realistic equations of states have to
be applied. The accuracy of these EOS depend on the nature of the gas. Some of these EOSs are
given below:
van der Waals equation:
(P + )(v - b) = RT
(5.5)
v 2 where a and b are constants that account for the
intermolecular forces and volume of the gas molecules respectively.
Redlich-Kwong equation:
RT

P=-------------1=----------

v-b

(5.6)

VT v(v + b)

A virial equation is more generalized form of equation of state. It is written as:

Pv=RT+

AB C
+
+ + ..........
v v 2
v3

(5.7)

where A,B,C, are all empirically determined functions of temperature and are called as virial
coefficients.
5.2.1. Properties Of Pure Substance
A pure substance is one whose chemical composition does not change during thermodynamic
processes. Water and refrigerants are examples of pure substances. These days emphasis is on
the use mixture of refrigerants. The properties of mixtures also require understanding of the
properties of pure substances.
Water is a substance of prime importance in refrigeration and air-conditioning. It exists in three
states namely, solid ice, liquid water and water vapour and undergoes transformation from one
state to another. Steam and hot water are used for heating of buildings while chilled water is
used for cooling of buildings. Hence, an understanding of its properties is essential for air
conditioning calculations. Substances, which absorb heat from other substances or space, are
called refrigerants. These substances also exist in three states. These also undergo
transformations usually from liquid to vapour and vice-versa during heat absorption and
rejection respectively. Hence, it is important to understand their properties also.
If a liquid (pure substance) is heated at constant pressure, the temperature at which it boils is
called saturation temperature. This temperature will remain constant during heating until all the

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 4

5
liquid boils off. At this temperature, the liquid and the associated vapour at same temperature are
in equilibrium and are called saturated liquid and vapour respectively. The saturation
temperature of a pure substance is a function of pressure only. At atmospheric pressure, the
saturation temperature is called normal boiling point. Similarly, if the vapour of a pure substance
is cooled at constant pressure, the temperature at which the condensation starts, is called dew
point temperature. For a pure substance, dew point and boiling point are same at a given
pressure.
Similarly, when a solid is heated at constant, it melts at a definite temperature called melting
point. Similarly cooling of a liquid causes freezing at the freezing point. The melting point and
freezing point are same at same pressure for a pure substance and the solid and liquid are in
equilibrium at this temperature.
For all pure substances there is a temperature at which all the three phases exist in equilibrium.
This is called triple point.
Fig. 5.1. 1P-h
diagram
for a pure substance
Version
ME,
IIT Kharagpur
The liquid-vapour phase diagram of pure substance is conveniently shown in temperatureentropy diagram or pressure-enthalpy diagram or p-v diagram. Sometimes, three dimensional pv-t diagrams are also drawn to show the phase transformation. In most of the refrigeration
applications except dry ice manufacture, we encounter liquid and vapour phases only.
Thermodynamic properties of various pure substances are available in the form of charts and
tables. Thermodynamic property charts such as Temperature-entropy (T-s) charts, pressureenthalpy (P-h) charts are very useful in evaluating properties of substances and also for
representing the thermodynamic processes and cycles. Figures 5.1 and 5.2 show the P-h and T-s
diagrams for pure substances.

Fig. 5.2. T-s diagram for a pure substance

Critical point :
Figures 5.1 and 5.2 show the critical point. The temperature, pressure and specific volume at
critical point are denoted by Tc, Pc and vc, respectively. A liquid below the critical pressure when
heated first becomes a mixture of liquid and vapour and then becomes saturated vapour and
finally a superheated vapour. At critical point there is no distinction between liquid state and
vapour state; these two merge together. At constant pressure greater than critical pressure, P C
when liquid is heated in supercritical region, there is no distinction between liquid and vapour;
as a result if heating is done in a transparent tube, the meniscus of liquid and vapour does not
appear as transformation from liquid to vapour takes place. At pressures below critical pressure,
when a liquid is heated there is a clear-cut meniscus between liquid and vapour, until all the
liquid evaporates.
For water:

Triple point: 0.1 oC, 0.006112 bar

Critical point: 221.2 bar, 647.3K and 0.00317 m3/kg

For Dry Ice (CO2): Triple point: 5.18 bar, -56.6 oC

Critical point: 73.8 bar, 31oC
T-s and p-h diagrams for liquid-vapour regime
These are of great importance in refrigeration cycle calculations. Figure 5.3 and 5.4 show typical
T-s diagram and p-h (Mollier) diagrams, respectively for a pure refrigerant. The T-s diagram
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

7
Version
Fig.
5.3. 1
T-sME,
diagram
IIT Kharagpur
of a pure substance
7
Fig.
5.4.
P-h
diagram
of
a
pure
substance
shows two constant pressure lines for pressures P 1and P2 where P1 > P2. The constant pressure
line 1-2-3-4 is for pressure P1. The portion 1-2 is in the sub-cooled region, 2-3 is in wet region,
that is mixture of liquid and vapour, and 3-4 is in superheated region. A frequent problem in
refrigeration cycle calculations is to find the properties of sub-cooled liquid at point a shown in
the figure. The liquid at pressure P1and temperature Ta is sub-cooled liquid. The liquid at state a
is saturated liquid at lower pressure Pa, but at the same temperature.

From 1st T ds equation , Eq. (5.1):

Tds = du + Pdv

(5.1a)

If the liquid is assumed to be incompressible then dv = 0 and

Tds = du

(5.8)

For liquids, the internal energy may be assumed to be function of temperature alone, that is,
ua = ua', because Ta = Ta' this implies that sa = sa'
Therefore states a and a' are coincident.
Also from the 2nd T ds equation, Eq. (5.1)
T ds=dh - vdP

(5.1b)

The specific volume v is small for liquids hence v dp is also negligible, therefore ha = ha, That
is, the enthalpy of sub-cooled liquid is equal to the enthalpy of saturated liquid at liquid
temperature. For all practical purposes the constant pressure lines are assumed to be coincident
with saturated liquid line in the sub-cooled region. This is a very useful concept.
T-s diagram gives a lot of information about the refrigeration cycle. It was observed in Chapter 4
that for a reversible process, the heat transfer is related to the change in entropy given by:
I 2 XQ^

12

, this implies that 1Q 2 = fT.ds

S2-S1= f
T

(5.9)
>

The above equation implies that the heat transferred in a reversible process 1-2 is equal to area
under the line 1-2 on the T-s diagram.
Also, from Eq. (5.1b), T ds=dh - vdP , hence for a constant pressure process (dP = 0), therefore,
for a constant pressure process Tds = dh, which means that for an isobaric process the area
under the curve is equal to change in enthalpy on T-s diagram.
Properties at Saturation
The properties of refrigerants and water for saturated states are available in the form of Tables.
The properties along the saturated liquid line are indicated by subscript f for example vf, uf, hf
and sf indicate specific volume, internal energy, enthalpy and entropy of saturated liquid
respectively. The corresponding saturated vapour states are indicated by subscript g for
example vg, ug, hg and sg respectively. All properties with subscript fg are the difference
between saturated vapour and saturated liquid states. For example, hfg = hg - hf , the latent heat of
vaporization.
The specific volume, internal energy, enthalpy and entropy of the mixture in two-phase region
may be found in terms of quality, x of the mixture. The quality of the mixture denotes the mass
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 8

(kg) of the vapour per unit mass (kg) of the mixture. That is there is x kg of vapour and (1-x) kg
of liquid in one kg of the mixture.
Therefore the properties of the liquid-vapour mixture can be obtained by using the following
equations:
v = (1 - x)vf + x.vg = vf + x.vfg
u = (1 - x)uf + x.ug =uf + x.ufg
h = (1-x)hf +x.hg =hf +x.hfg
)
s = (1 - x)sf + x.sg = sf + x.sfg

(5.

The table of properties at saturation is usually temperature based. For each temperature it lists
the values of saturation pressure (Psat), vf, vg, hf, hg, sf and sg. Two reference states or datum or used
in these tables. In ASHRAE reference hf = 0.0 kJ/kg and sf = 1.0 kJ/kg.K at - 40oC. In IIR
reference hf = 200.00 kJ/kg and sf = 1.0 kJ/kg-K at 0oC.
The properties in the superheated region are given in separate tables. The values of v, h and s are
tabulated along constant pressure lines (that is, at saturation pressures corresponding to, say 0oC,
1oC, 2oC etc.) at various values of degree of superheat.
Clapeyron Equation
The Clapeyron equation represents the dependence of saturation pressure on saturation
temperature (boiling point). This is given by,
dP

sf

hf

=g =-----------------g-------

dT

vfg

(5.11)

(vg - vf)T

Some useful relations can be derived using Clapeyron equation. The specific volume of liquid is
very small compared to that of vapour, hence it may be neglected and then perfect gas relation
pvg= RT may be used to yield:
dPsat

dT

(vg -vf)T vgT

h fg

h fg

P sat .h fg

RT

This may be integrated between states 1 to an arbitrary state Psat, T to yield

=---------------= =------p

dPsat
f=f
p1 Psat

hfg TdT
Psat hfgf 1 1
or ln
=-----------------------------R T1T2
P1
R ^T1 T)

(5.12)
(5.13)

If P1 is chosen as standard atmospheric pressure of say 1 atm. (ln (P1) = ln (1) = 0), and P is
measured in atmospheres, then T1= Tnb is the normal boiling point of the substance, then from
Eq. (5.13), we obtain:
hfg f 1
1
ln(P ) = _-------------R ^Tnb T)

(5.14)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 9

10

Therefore if ln (P) is plotted against 1/T, the saturated vapour line will be a straight line. Also, it
has been observed that for a set of similar substances the product of Mhfg/Tnb called Trouton
number is constant. Here M is the molecular weight of the substance (kg/kmole). If we denote
the Trouton number by Ntrouton , then
N trouton =Mhfg
=
h
NN
fg

trouton

Tnb

RTnb

trouton

trouton

, or

(5.15)

MR
R
h fg N trouton

lnp=
RT

For most of the substances, the Trouton number value is found to be about 85 kJ/kmol.K

5.3. Thermodynamic processes

In most of the refrigeration and air conditioning systems, the mass flow rates do not change with
time or the change is very small, in such cases one can assume the flow to be steady. For such
systems, the energy balance equation (1st law of thermodynamics) is known as steady-flow
energy equation.

h1

SXQ

v1

77

z1

!
>\

S\ \

!
/

\ \^
/^^

h2

'

^--------^ v2
----

z2

^"-------''

Fig. 5.5. Steady flow energy balance on a control volume

For the open system shown in Fig. 5.5, it is given by:
m(h1 + 1 + gz1) + Q = m(h2 + 2 + gz2) + W

(5.16)

In many cases, compared to other terms, the changes in kinetic and potential energy terms, i.e.,
(v12-v22)/2 and (gz1-gz2) are negligible.
Heating and cooling: During these processes normally there will be no work done either on the
system or by the system, i.e., W= 0. Hence, the energy equation for cooling/heating becomes:
Q + mh1 =mh2 o r Q = m(h2-h1)

(5.17)

Some of the important thermodynamic processes encountered in refrigeration and air

conditioning are discussed below.
Constant volume (isochoric) process: An example of this process is the heating or cooling of a
gas stored in a rigid cylinder. Since the volume of the gas does not change, no external work is
done, and work transferred AW is zero. Therefore from 1st law of thermodynamics for a constant
volume process:
1W2=0
2

1Q2 =JdU=U2 -U1 =mcvavg(T2 -T1)

(5.18)

ln
1v,avg
v 1J
T

^T2^
S2 -S1 =mc

The above equation implies that for a constant volume process in a closed system, the heat
transferred is equal to the change in internal energy of the system. If m is the mass of the gas,
Cv is its specific heat at constant volume which remains almost constant in the temperature range
AT, and AT is the temperature change during the process, then:
AQ = AU = m.Cv.AT

(5.19)

Constant pressure (isobaric) process: If the temperature of a gas is increased by the addition of
heat while the gas is allowed to expand so that its pressure is kept constant, the volume of the
gas will increase in accordance with Charles law. Since the volume of the gas increases during
the process, work is done by the gas at the same time that its internal energy also changes.
Therefore for constant pressure process, assuming constant specific heats and ideal gas
behaviour,
1Q2 =(U2 -U1)+1W2
2

1W2 = jPdV = P x (V2 - V1)

ln
1p,avg
V
T 1J

1Q2 =m(h2 -h 1 ) = mxCpavg x (T2 -T1)

^T2
S2 -S1 =mc

(5.20)

Constant temperature (isothermal) process: According to Boyles law, when a gas is compressed
or expanded at constant temperature, the pressure will vary inversely with the volume. Since the
gas does work as it expands, if the temperature is to remain constant, energy to do the work
must be supplied from an external source. When a gas is compressed, work is done on the gas
and if the gas is not cooled during the process the internal energy of the gas will increase by an
amount equal to the work of compression. Therefore if the temperature of the gas is to remain
constant during the process gas must reject heat to the surroundings. Since there is no
temperature increase in the system change in internal energy becomes zero. And the amount of
work done will be the amount of heat supplied. So for isothermal process

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 11

12
1Q2 =(U2 -U1)+1W2
2

1W2 = |P.dV

(5.21)
If the
workin
g fluid
behave
s as an
ideal
gas and
there
are no
phase
change
s, then,
the
work
done,
heat
transfe
rred
and
entrop
y
change
during
the
isother
mal
process
are
given
by:

V1 v12y
P
v2y

1QQ2

v1
= mRTln

= mRln
P2

S
vv1y
P2
v

5.
k1W2 = 2 P.dV
Applying first law of k(

Adiabatic process:
An
adiabatic
process is one in
which
no
heat
transfer takes place
to or from the
system during the
process. For a fluid
undergoing
an
adiabatic process,
the pressure and
volume satisfy the
following relation:

I
S1 =S2

where k is the
coefficient of
adiabatic compression
or expansion. For an
ideal gas, it can be
shown that:
y

P c
V

The
followi
ng PV-T
relatio
nships
can be
derive
d for a
compr
essible
fluid
underg
oing
an
adiabat
ic
proces
s:
k-1

(k-1)/k

KP1J
(5.27)
vV2y
If the
adiabat
ic
process
is
reversi
ble,
then
from
the
definiti
on of
entropy
,
the
process
becom
es an
isentro
pic
proces
s or the
entrop
y
of
the
system
does
not
change

k
(k

during a reversible
adiabatic
process.
Hence all reversible,
adiabatic processes
are
isentropic
processes, however,
the converse is not
true,
i.e.,
all
isentropic processes
need
not
be
reversible, adiabatic
processes.

Version 1 ME, IIT

Kharagpur 12

Polytropic process: When a gas undergoes a reversible process in which there is heat transfer,
the process frequently takes place in such a way that a plot of log P vs log V is a straightline,
implying that:
PVn = constant

(5.28)

The value of n can vary from - to +, depending upon the process. For example:
For an isobaric process,
For an isothermal process,
For an isentropic process,
For an isochoric process,

n = 0 and P = constant
n = 1 and T = constant
n = k and s = constant, and
n = - and v = constant

For a polytropic process, expressions for work done, heat transferred can be derived in the same
way as that of a adiabatic process discussed above, i.e.,
1W2 =-----------(P2V2 -P1V1)

(n-1) (U2 - U1) =

mcvavg(T2 - T1)
n
Q
=
(
U
-U
)
+-----------(P2V2-P1V1)
1
2
2
1
2

dU

(5.29)

i:PdV

S2 -S1 = + --------------

1T 1 T
The above expressions are valid for all values of n, except n = 1 (isothermal process)
Throttling (Isenthalpic) process: A throttling process occurs when a fluid flowing through a
passage suddenly encounters a restriction in the passage. The restriction could be due to the
presence of an almost completely closed valve or due to sudden and large reduction in flow area
etc. The result of this restriction is a sudden drop in the pressure of the fluid as it is forced to
flow through the restriction. This is a highly irreversible process and is used to reduce the
pressure and temperature of the refrigerant in a refrigeration system. Since generally throttling
occurs in a small area, it may be considered as an adiabatic process (as area available for heat
transfer is negligibly small) also since no external work is done, we can write the 1 st law of
thermodynamics for this process as:
Q=W=0
h + V12 = h + V22
1 2
2
2

(5.30)

where V1 and V2 are the inlet and exit velocities of the fluid respectively. The areas of inlet and
outlet of a throttling device are designed in such a way that velocities at inlet and outlet become
almost equal. Then the above equation becomes
h1 = h2

(5.31)

Thus throttling process is an isenthalpic process.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 13

14
Though throttling is an expansion process, it is fundamentally different from expansion taking
place in a turbine. The expansion of a fluid in a turbine yields useful work output, and can
approach a reversible process (e.g. isentropic process), whereas expansion by throttling is highly
irreversible. Depending upon the throttling conditions and the nature of the fluid, the exit
temperature may be greater than or equal to or less than the inlet temperature.
Questions:
311.

Prove T dS equations starting from basic laws of thermodynamics? (Solution)

312. An interesting feature of the process of cooling the human body by evaporation is that
the heat extracted by the evaporation of a gram of perspiration from the human skin at body
temperature (37C) is quoted in physiology books as 580 calories/gm rather than the nominal
540 calories/gm at the normal boiling point. Why is it larger at body temperature? (Solution)
313. Find the saturation temperature, the changes in specific volume and entropy during
evaporation, and the latent heat of vaporization of steam at 0.1 MPa ? (Solution)
314. Under what conditions of pressure and temperature does saturated steam have a entropy
of 6.4448 kJ/kg K? State the specific volume and entropy under such conditions. (Solution)
315. Find the enthalpy of steam when the pressure is 2 MPa and the specific volume is 0.09
m3/kg. (Solution)
316. A gas of mass 4 kg is adiabatically expanded in a cylinder from 0.2 m 3 to 0.5 m3 Initial
pressure of the gas is 2 bar, and the gas follows the following pressure-volume relationship
PV1.4 = K (K= constant) Find the decrease in the temperature
of the gas? (CV for the gas = 0.84 kJ/kg-K) (Solution)
1. Sketch1these
Version
ME, two
IIT Kharagpur
processes on14
P-V and T-V diagrams
2. What is the temperature of the air inside the cylinder when the piston reaches the stops?
7. Air is contained in a vertical cylinder that is fitted with a frictionless piston. A set of stops is
provided 0.5 m below the initial position of the piston. The piston cross-sectional area is 0.5 m 2
and the air inside is initially at 100 kPa and 400 K. The air is slowly cooled as a result of heat
transfer to the surroundings.

15
317. After the piston hits the stops, the cooling is continued until the temperature reaches 100
K. What is the pressure at this state?
318. How much work is done by the system in the first cooling process?
319. How much work is done by the system in the second cooling process?
Assume air to be a thermally perfect gas and the first cooling is a quasi-static process. (Solution)
8. Consider a thermodynamic system containing air at V1=1 m3/kg, P1=100 kPa. The system is
compressed to 0.5 m3/kg via anyone of three quasi-static processes: isobaric, isothermal, or
adiabatic. Assume that cv = 0.7165 kJ/kg-K, and R = 0.287 kJ/kg-K.
320. Sketch all three processes on the same P-V diagram.
321. For each process determine the pressure and temperature at the final state.
322. For each process determine the work done by the system and the heat transferred to the
system. (Solution)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 15

Lesson
6
Review of
fundamentals: Fluid
flow
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

The specific objective of this lesson is to conduct a brief review

of the fundamentals of fluid flow and present:
323.
A general equation for conservation of mass and specific equations for
steady and incompressible flows
324.
A general equation for conservation of momentum in integral form and
discuss simplifications
325.
Bernoulli equation and introduce the concepts of total, static and
velocity pressures
326.
Modified Bernoulli equation and introduce expression for head loss
and fan/pump power
327.
Methods for evaluating friction pressure drops with suitable
correlations for friction factor
328.
The concept of minor losses
At the end of the lesson, the student should be able to:
329.
Write the general equation of mass transfer and be able to reduce it for
incompressible and steady flows
330.
Write the general equation of momentum transfer and reduce it
to incompressible, steady flows
331.
Apply equations of conservation of mass and momentum to simple
problems
332.
Write Bernoulli equation and define static, velocity and datum
pressures and heads
333.
Write modified Bernoulli equation to account for frictional losses and
presence of fan/pump
334.
Apply Bernoulli and modified Bernoulli equations to simple fluid flow
problems relevant to refrigeration and air conditioning
335.
Estimate friction pressure drops and minor losses

6.1. Fluid flow

In refrigeration and air-conditioning systems various fluids such as air, water and
refrigerants flow through pipes and ducts. The flow of these fluids is subjected to
certain fundamental laws. The subject of Fluid Mechanics deals with these aspects.
In the present lesson, fundamentals of fluid flow relevant to refrigeration and air
conditioning is discussed. Fluid flow in general can be compressible, i.e., the density
of the fluid may vary along the flow direction. However in most of the refrigeration
and air conditioning applications the density variations may be assumed to be
negligible. Hence, the fluid flow for such systems is treated as incompressible. This
assumption simplifies the fluid flow problem considerably. This assumption is valid
as long as the velocity fluid is considerably less than the velocity of sound (Mach
number, ratio of fluid velocity to sonic velocity less than 0.3). To analyze the fluid
flow problems, in addition to energy conservation (1 st law of thermodynamics), one
has to consider the conservation of mass and momentum.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

6.1.1. Conservation of mass:

As the name implies, this law states that mass is a conserved parameter, i.e., it can
neither be generated nor destroyed; it can only be transferred. Mathematically, the
equation of conservation of mass for a control volume is given by:
\pd\/ + \pVdA = 0
dt J
*
CV

(6.1)

CS

The first term on the left represents the rate of change of mass within the control
volume, while the second term represents the net rate of mass flux through the control
surface. The above equation is also known as continuity equation.
In most of the refrigeration and air conditioning systems, the fluid flow is usually
steady, i.e., the mass of the control volume does not change with time. For such a
steady flow process, Eq. (6.1) becomes:
JpV*dA = 0

(6.2)

CS

If we apply the above steady flow equation to a duct shown in Fig. 6.1, we obtain:

Control Volume

Fig. 6.1. Steady fluid flow through a duct

m1

= p1A1V1 =p2A2V2 =

m2 =m

(6.3)

where m is the mass flow rate of fluid through the control volume, p, A and V are the
density, cross sectional area and velocity of the fluid respectively.
If we assume that the flow is incompressible (p1 = p2 = p), then the above equation
reduces to:
A1V1 = A2V2
(6.4)
The above equation implies that when A1 > A2, then V1 < V2, that is velocity increases in
the direction of flow. Such a section is called a nozzle. On the other hand, if A1 <

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

A2, then V1 > V2 and velocity reduces in the direction of flow, this type of section is
called as diffuser.
6.1.2. Conservation of momentum:
The momentum equation is mathematical expression for the Newtons second law
applied to a control volume. Newtons second law for fluid flow relative to an inertial
coordinate system (control volume) is given as:
dt1
=f JCVvPdV+JCSvpVdA=F)o
^ control volume

JCV
P
JCS
=

P
F ) on control volume

1^F S + Z^F B

JCV vP

dt
In the above equation,

dP
dt

Fon control volume

JCS vP

and

(6.5)

is the rate of change of linear momentum of the

/control volume

control volume, F)on controlvolume is the summation of all the forces acting on the
control volume, X;FS and X;FB are the net surface and body forces acting on the
control volume, Vis the velocity vector with reference to the control volume and v is
the velocity (momentum per unit mass) with reference to an inertial (nonaccelerating) reference frame. When the control volume is not accelerating (i.e., when
it is stationary or moving with a constant velocity), then V and v refer to the same
reference plane.
The above equation states that the sum of all forces (surface and body) acting on a non
accelerating control volume is equal to the sum of the rate of change of momentum
inside the control volume and the net rate of flux of momentum out through the
control surface. For steady state the linear momentum equation reduces to:
F = FS +FB = f VpV dA for steady state
(6.6)
JCS
The surface forces consist of all the forces transmitted across the control surface and
may include pressure forces, force exerted by the physical boundary on the control
surface etc. The most common body force encountered in most of the fluid flow
problems is the gravity force acting on the mass inside the control volume.
The linear momentum equation discussed above is very useful in the solution of many
fluid flow problems. Some of the applications of this equation are: force exerted by
the fluid flow on nozzles, bends in a pipe, motion of rockets, water hammers etc.
Example shows the application of linear momentum equation.
The moment-of-momentum equation is the equation of conservation of angular
momentum. It states that the net moment applied to a system is equal to the rate of

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

change of angular momentum of the system. This equation is applied for hydraulic
machines such as pumps, turbines, compressors etc.
6.1.3. Bernoullis equation:
The Bernoullis equation is one of the most useful equations that is applied in a wide
variety of fluid flow related problems. This equation can be derived in different ways,
e.g. by integrating Eulers equation along a streamline, by applying first and second
laws of thermodynamics to steady, irrotational, inviscid and incompressible flows etc.
In simple form the Bernoullis equation relates the pressure, velocity and elevation
between any two points in the flow field. It is a scalar equation and is given by:
+

=H = constant

+z

g
2g
pressure velocity static
head
head
head

total
head

Each term in the above equation has dimensions of length (i.e., meters in SI units)
hence these terms are called as pressure head, velocity head, static head and total
heads respectively. Bernoullis equation can also be written in terms of pressures (i.e.,
Pascals in SI units) as:
p

static
pressure

V 2 + 2
velocity
pressure

+ gz

=pT

pressure
due to datum total
pressure

(6.8)
Bernoullis equation is valid between any two points in the flow field when the flow is
steady, irrotational, inviscid and incompressible. The equation is valid along a
streamline for rotational, steady and incompressible flows. Between any two points 1
and 2 in the flow field for irrotational flows, the Bernoullis equation is written as:
p1 V12
p2 V22

+
g

+z1 =
2g

+
g

+z2

(6.9)

2g

Bernoullis equation can also be considered to be an alternate statement of

conservation of energy (1st law of thermodynamics). The equation also implies the
possibility of conversion of one form of pressure into other. For example, neglecting
the pressure changes due to datum, it can be concluded from Bernoullis equation that
the static pressure rises in the direction of flow in a diffuser while it drops in the
direction of flow in case of nozzle due to conversion of velocity pressure into static
pressure and vice versa. Figure 6.2 shows the variation of total, static and velocity
pressure for steady, incompressible and inviscid, fluid flow through a pipe of uniform
cross-section.
Since all real fluids have finite viscosity, i.e. in all actual fluid flows, some energy will
be lost in overcoming friction. This is referred to as head loss, i.e. if the fluid

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

were to rise in a vertical pipe it will rise to a lower height than predicted by
Bernoullis equation. The head loss will cause the pressure to decrease in the flow
direction. If the head loss is denoted by Hl, then Bernoullis equation can be modified
to:
p1 V12
p2 V22
+
+z
=
+
+z2 +Hl
1
(6.10)
g 2g
g 2g
Figure 6.2 shows the variation of total, static and velocity pressure for steady,
incompressible fluid flow through a pipe of uniform cross-section without viscous
effects (solid line) and with viscous effects (dashed lines).
_______==___

total___________

Pstatic

P
(0,0)

Pvelocity
x

Fig. 6.2. Application of Bernoulli equation to pipe flow

Since the total pressure reduces in the direction of flow, sometimes it becomes
necessary to use a pump or a fan to maintain the fluid flow as shown in Fig. 6.3.

Fan
Fig. 6.3. Air flow through a duct with a fan
Energy is added to the fluid when fan or pump is used in the fluid flow conduit (Fig.
6.3), then the modified Bernoulli equation is written as:

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

1 + 1 + z1 +Hp = 2 + 2 +z2 +Hl

pg

2g

(6.11)

pg

2g

where Hp is the gain in head due to fan or pump and Hl is the loss in head due to
friction. When fan or pump is used, the power required (W) to drive the fan/pump is
given by:
m

^Ifan

2
2

(p2-p1) (V22-V12)

gHl|

-+
--(6.12)

+ g(z2 -z1)+

W=

where m is the mass flow rate of the fluid and r|fan is the energy efficiency of the
fan/pump. Some of the terms in the above equation can be negligibly small, for
example, for air flow the potential energy term g(z1-z2) is quite small compared to the
other terms. For liquids, the kinetic energy term (v22-v12)/2 is relatively small. If there is
no fan or pump then W is zero.
6.1.4. Pressure loss during fluid flow:
The loss in pressure during fluid flow is due to:
336.
337.
338.

Fluid friction and turbulence

Change in fluid flow cross sectional area, and
Abrupt change in the fluid flow direction

Normally pressure drop due to fluid friction is called as major loss or frictional
pressure drop Apf and pressure drop due to change in flow area and direction is called
as minor loss Apm. The total pressure drop is the summation of frictional pressure drop
and minor loss. In most of the situations, the temperature of the fluid does not change
appreciably along the flow direction due to pressure drop. This is due to the fact that
the temperature tends to rise due to energy dissipation by fluid friction and turbulence,
at the same time temperature tends to drop due to pressure drop. These two opposing
effects more or less cancel each other and hence the temperature remains almost
constant (assuming no heat transfer to or from the surroundings).
Evaluation of frictional pressure drop:
When a fluid flows through a pipe or a duct, the relative velocity of the fluid at the
wall of the pipe/duct will be zero, and this condition is known as a no-slip condition.
The no-slip condition is met in most of the common fluid flow problems (however,
there are special circumstances under which the no-slip condition is not satisfied). As
a result of this a velocity gradient develops inside the pipe/duct beginning with zero at
the wall to a maximum, normally at the axis of the conduit. The velocity profile at any
cross section depends on several factors such as the type of fluid flow (i.e. laminar or

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

turbulent), condition of the walls (e.g. adiabatic or non-adiabatic) etc. This velocity
gradient gives rise to shear stresses ultimately resulting in frictional pressure drop.
The Darcy-Weisbach equation is one of the most commonly used equations for
estimating frictional pressure drops in internal flows. This equation is given by:
Apf =f

pV L
Dl 2

(6.13)

where f is the dimensionless friction factor, L is the length of the pipe/duct and D is the
diameter in case of a circular duct and hydraulic diameter in case of a noncircular
duct. The friction factor is a function of Reynolds number, ReD =-------------

and the

relative surface of the pipe or duct surface in contact with the fluid.
For steady, fully developed, laminar, incompressible flows, the Darcy friction factor f
(which is independent of surface roughness) is given by:
64
ReD
(6.14)
For turbulent flow, the friction factor can be evaluated using the empirical correlation
suggested by Colebrook and White is used, the correlation is given by:
10
k1s D)Vf
2.51
(6.15)
(Re
3.7D
+
= -2log

Vf

Where ks is the average roughness of inner pipe wall expressed in same units as the
diameter D. Evaluation of f from the above equation requires iteration since f occurs on
both the sides of it.
ASHRAE suggests the following form for determination of friction factor,
ks 0.68
(6.16)
+D
f1 = 0.11
Re
D;
If f1 determined from above equation equals or exceeds 0.018 then f is taken
to be same as f1. If it is less than 0.018 then f is given by:
f = 0.85f1 + 0.0028

(6.17)

Another straightforward equation suggested by Haaland (1983) is as follows:

f

1
1/ 2

;-1.8log

6.9 Re
10

D ks /
3.7

1.11

(6.18)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

Evaluation of minor loss, pm:

The process of converting static pressure into kinetic energy is quite efficient.
However, the process of converting kinetic energy into pressure head involves losses.
These losses, which occur in ducts because of bends, elbows, joints, valves etc. are
called minor losses. This term could be a misnomer, since in many cases these are
more significant than the losses due to friction. For almost all the cases, the minor
losses are determined from experimental data. In turbulent flows, the loss is
proportional to square of velocity. Hence these are expressed as:
V2 m =
pm = K
(6.19)
K
2
Experimental values for the constant K are available for various valves, elbows,
diffusers and nozzles and other fittings. These aspects will be discussed in a later
chapter on distribution of air.
Questions:
339. Is the flow incompressible if the velocity field is given by V = 2xi - 6x 2 yj +
tk ? (Answer)
340. Derive the expression of fully developed laminar flow velocity profile through
a circular pipe using control volume approach. (Answer)
341. A Static-pitot (Fig. Q3) is used to measure the flow of an inviscid fluid having
a density of 1000 kg/m3 in a 100 mm diameter pipe. What is the flow rate through the
duct assuming the flow to be steady and incompressible and mercury as the
manometer fluid? (Solution)

2} 1

^
a-

r^
C3

X h
(4 )

h0 = 50 mm
V--

Fig. Q3. Figure of problem 3

4. Calculate the pressure drop in 30 m of a rectangular duct of cross section 12.5 mm
X 25 mm when saturated water at 600C flows at 5 cm/s? (Solution) Hint: Lundgrem

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

determined that for rectangular ducts with ratio of sides 0.5 the product of f.Re=62.19.
342. A fluid is flowing though a pipeline having a diameter of 150 mm at 1 m/s.
The pipe is 50 m long. Calculate the head loss due to friction? (Solution) (Density and
viscosity of fluid are 850 kg/m3 and 0.08 kg/m.s respectively)
343. A fluid flows from point 1 to 2 of a horizontal pipe having a diameter of 150
mm. The distance between the points is 100 m. The pressure at point 1 is 1 MPa and
at point 2 is 0.9 MPa. What is the flow rate? (Solution) (Density and kinematic
viscosity of fluid are 900 kg/m3 and 400 X 10-6 m2/s respectively)
344. Three pipes of 0.5 m, 0.3 m and 0.4 m diameters and having lengths of 100 m,
60 m and 80 m respectively are connected in series between two tanks whose
difference in water levels is 10 m as shown in Fig. Q7. If the friction factor for all the
pipes is equal to 0.05, calculate the flow rate through the pipes. (Solution)

1
10m
2
D = 0.5m

0.4m

r0.3m

Fig. Q7. Figure of problem 7

3m

Fig. Q8. Figure of problem 8

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

345. Two reservoirs 10 kms apart is connected by a pipeline which is 0.25 m in

diameter in the first 4 kms, sloping at 5 m per km, and the remaining by a 0.15 m
diameter sloping at 2 m per km as is shown in Fig. Q8. The levels of water above the
pipe openings are 5 m and 3 m in the upper and lower reservoirs respectively. Taking f
= 0.03 for both pipes and neglecting contraction and exit losses at openings calculate
the rate of discharge through the pipelines. (Solution)
346. A 10 cm hose with 5 cm discharges water at 3 m 3/min to the atmosphere as is
shown in Fig. Q9. Assuming frictionless flow, calculate the force exerted on the
flange bolts. (Solution)

D1 = 10 cm

patm

2) D2 = 5 cm
CV

Fig. Q9. Figure of problem 9

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

Lesson
7
Review of
fundamentals: Heat
and Mass transfer
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

The objective of this lesson is to review fundamentals of heat

and mass transfer and discuss:
347.
Conduction heat transfer with governing equations for heat conduction,
concept of thermal conductivity with typical values, introduce the concept of
heat transfer resistance to conduction
348.
Radiation heat transfer and present Plancks law, Stefan-Boltzmann
equation, expression for radiative exchange between surfaces and the concept
of radiative heat transfer resistance
349.
Convection heat transfer, concept of hydrodynamic and thermal
boundary layers, Newtons law of cooling, convective heat transfer coefficient
with typical values, correlations for heat transfer in forced convection, free
convection and phase change, introduce various non-dimensional numbers
350.
Basics of mass transfer Ficks law and convective mass transfer
351.
Analogy between heat, momentum and mass transfer
352.
Multi-mode heat transfer, multi-layered walls, heat transfer networks,
overall heat transfer coefficients
353.
Fundamentals of heat exchangers
At the end of the lesson the student should be able to:
354.
Write basic equations for heat conduction and derive equations for
simpler cases
355.
Write basic equations for radiation heat transfer, estimate radiative
exchange between surfaces
356.
Write convection heat transfer equations, indicate typical convective
heat transfer coefficients. Use correlations for estimating heat transfer in
forced convection, free convection and phase change
357.
Express conductive, convective and radiative heat transfer rates in
terms of potential and resistance.
358.
Write Ficks law and convective mass transfer equation
359.
State analogy between heat, momentum and mass transfer
360.
Evaluate heat transfer during multi-mode heat transfer, through multilayered walls etc. using heat transfer networks and the concept of overall heat
transfer coefficient
361.
Perform basic calculation on heat exchangers

7.1. Introduction
Heat transfer is defined as energy-in-transit due to temperature difference. Heat
transfer takes place whenever there is a temperature gradient within a system or
whenever two systems at different temperatures are brought into thermal contact.
Heat, which is energy-in-transit cannot be measured or observed directly, but the
effects produced by it can be observed and measured. Since heat transfer involves
transfer and/or conversion of energy, all heat transfer processes must obey the first
and second laws of thermodynamics. However unlike thermodynamics, heat transfer

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

deals with systems not in thermal equilibrium and using the heat transfer laws it is
possible to find the rate at which energy is transferred due to heat transfer. From the
engineers point of view, estimating the rate of heat transfer is a key requirement.
Refrigeration and air conditioning involves heat transfer, hence a good understanding
of the fundamentals of heat transfer is a must for a student of refrigeration and air
conditioning. This section deals with a brief review of heat transfer relevant to
refrigeration and air conditioning.
Generally heat transfer takes place in three different modes: conduction, convection
and radiation. In most of the engineering problems heat transfer takes place by more
than one mode simultaneously, i.e., these heat transfer problems are of multi-mode
type.

7.2. Heat transfer

7.2.1. Conduction heat transfer:
Conduction heat transfer takes place whenever a temperature gradient exists in a
stationary medium. Conduction is one of the basic modes of heat transfer. On a
microscopic level, conduction heat transfer is due to the elastic impact of molecules in
fluids, due to molecular vibration and rotation about their lattice positions and due to
free electron migration in solids.
The fundamental law that governs conduction heat transfer is called Fouriers law of
heat conduction, it is an empirical statement based on experimental observations and
is given by:
Qx =- k.A.

dT
dx

(7.1)

In the above equation, Qx is the rate of heat transfer by conduction in x-direction,

(dT/dx) is the temperature gradient in x-direction, A is the cross-sectional area normal
to the x-direction and k is a proportionality constant and is a property of the
conduction medium, called thermal conductivity. The - sign in the above equation is
a consequence of 2nd law of thermodynamics, which states that in spontaneous process
heat must always flow from a high temperature to a low temperature (i.e., dT/dx must
be negative).
The thermal conductivity is an important property of the medium as it is equal to the
conduction heat transfer per unit cross-sectional area per unit temperature gradient.
Thermal conductivity of materials varies significantly. Generally it is very high for
pure metals and low for non-metals. Thermal conductivity of solids is generally
greater than that of fluids. Table 7.1 shows typical thermal conductivity values at 300
K. Thermal conductivity of solids and liquids vary mainly with temperature, while
thermal conductivity of gases depend on both temperature and pressure. For isotropic
materials the value of thermal conductivity is same in all directions, while for
anisotropic materials such as wood and graphite the value of thermal conductivity is
different in different directions. In refrigeration and air conditioning high thermal
conductivity materials are used in the construction of heat exchangers, while low

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

thermal conductivity materials are required for insulating refrigerant pipelines,

refrigerated cabinets, building walls etc.
Table 7.1. Thermal conductivity values for various materials at 300 K
Material
Copper (pure)
Gold (pure)
Aluminum (pure)
Iron (pure)
Carbon steel (1 %)
Stainless Steel (18/8)
Glass
Plastics
Wood (shredded/cemented)
Cork
Water (liquid)
Ethylene glycol (liquid)
Hydrogen (gas)
Benzene (liquid)
Air

Thermal conductivity
(W/m K)
399
317
237
80.2
43
15.1
0.81
0.2 0.3
0.087
0.039
0.6
0.26
0.18
0.159
0.026

General heat conduction equation:

qg
k Fouriers law of heat conduction shows that to estimate the heat transfer through a
given medium of known thermal conductivity and cross-sectional area, one needs
the spatial variation of temperature. In addition the temperature at any point in the
medium may vary with time also. The spatial and temporal variations are obtained by
solving the heat conduction equation. The heat conduction equation is obtained by
applying first law of thermodynamics and Fouriers law to an elemental control
volume of the conducting medium. In rectangular coordinates, the general heat
conduction equation for a conducting media with constant thermo-physical properties
is given by:
(7.2)
1 dT =
d2T d2T d2T
a dz
dx2 dy2 dz2
k

In the above equation, a =

is a property of the media and is called as

thermal
pcp
diffusivity, qg is the rate of heat generation per unit volume inside the control volume
and T is the time.
The general heat conduction equation given above can be written in a compact form
using the Laplacian operator, V2 as:

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

1 3T w2 qg
------= V T +
(7.3)
a dr
k
If there is no heat generation inside the control volume, then the conduction equation
becomes:
1 dT 2
------= V T
(7.4)
a dz
If the heat transfer is steady and temperature does not vary with time, then the
equation becomes:
V2T =0
(7.5)
The above equation is known as Laplace equation.
The solution of heat conduction equation along with suitable initial and boundary
conditions gives temperature as a function of space and time, from which the
temperature gradient and heat transfer rate can be obtained. For example for a simple
case of one-dimensional, steady heat conduction with no heat generation (Fig. 7.1),
the governing equation is given by:
qx
Tx=0 = T1

qx
Tx=L = T2

Fig. 7.1. Steady 1-D heat conduction

d2T dx2

(7.6)

=0

The solution to the above equation with the specified boundary conditions is given by:
^ ,^ ^ . x T
= T1 +(T2 -T1)
(7.7)
cond
AT and

the heat transfer rate, Qx is given by:

Qx =-kA = kA dx

T1 -T2

J lR

(7.8)

where AT = T1-T2 and resistance to conduction heat transfer, Rcond = (L/kA)

Similarly for one-dimensional, steady heat conduction heat transfer through a
cylindrical wall the temperature profile and heat transfer rate are given by:

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

T = T1 - (T1-T2)

ln(r/r)
1
ln(r2/r1)

dT
, (T -T 2 ) f AT |
Q =-kA = 2 % k L 1 = ---------------dr
ln(r2/r1) I R cyl I
where r1, r2 and L are the inner and outer radii and length of the cylinder and
ln(r2 /r1).......................................................................................
Rcyl =
is the heat transfer resistance for the cylindrical wall.
27rLK

(7.9)

(7.10)

From the above discussion it is clear that the steady heat transfer rate by conduction
can be expressed in terms of a potential for heat transfer (AT) and a resistance for heat
transfer R, analogous to Ohms law for an electrical circuit. This analogy with
electrical circuits is useful in dealing with heat transfer problems involving
multiplayer heat conduction and multimode heat transfer.
Temperature distribution and heat transfer rates by conduction for complicated, multidimensional and transient cases can be obtained by solving the relevant heat
conduction equation either by analytical methods or numerical methods.
7.2.2. Radiation heat transfer:
Radiation is another fundamental mode of heat transfer. Unlike conduction and
convection, radiation heat transfer does not require a medium for transmission as
energy transfer occurs due to the propagation of electromagnetic waves. A body due
to its temperature emits electromagnetic radiation, and it is emitted at all temperatures.
It is propagated with the speed of light (3 x 10 8 m/s) in a straight line in vacuum. Its
speed decreases in a medium but it travels in a straight line in homogenous medium.
The speed of light, c is equal to the product of wavelength X and frequency v, that is,
c = Xv

(7.11)

The wave length is expressed in Angstrom (1 Ao = 10-10 m) or micron (1 |j,m = 10-6m).

Thermal radiation lies in the range of 0.1 to 100 |j,m, while visible light lies in the
range of 0.35 to 0.75 |j,m. Propagation of thermal radiation takes place in the form of
discrete quanta, each quantum having energy of
E = hv
(7.12)
Where, h is Planks constant, h = 6.625 x 10-34 Js. The radiation energy is converted
into heat when it strikes a body.
The radiation energy emitted by a surface is obtained by integrating Plancks equation
over all the wavelengths. For a real surface the radiation energy given by StefanBoltzmanns law is:
Qr=s.o.A.Ts4
(7.13)
where Qr

Rate of thermal energy emission, W

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

A
Ts

=
=
=
=

Emissivity of the surface

Stefan-Boltzmanns constant, 5.669 X 10-8 W/m2.K4
Surface area, m2
Surface Temperature, K

The emissivity is a property of the radiating surface and is defined as the emissive power (energy
radiated by the body per unit area per unit time over all the wavelengths) of the surface to that of an
ideal radiating surface. The ideal radiator is called as a black body, whose emissivity is 1. A black
body is a hypothetical body that absorbs all the incident (all wave lengths) radiation. The term
black has nothing to do with black colour. A white coloured body can also absorb infrared radiation
as much as a black coloured surface. A hollow enclosure with a small hole is an approximation to
black body. Any radiation that enters through the hole is absorbed by multiple reflections within the
cavity. The hole being small very small quantity of it escapes through the hole.
The radiation heat exchange between any two surfaces 1 and 2 at different temperatures T1 and T 2 is
given by:
Q1-2=a.A.FsFA(T14-T4)
(7.14)
where

Q1-2
F
FA
T1,T2

=
=
=
=

Radiation heat transfer between 1 and 2, W

Surface optical property factor
Geometric shape factor
Surface temperatures of 1 and 2, K

Calculation of radiation heat transfer with known surface temperatures involves evaluation of
factors F and FA.
Analogous to Ohms law for conduction, one can introduce the concept of thermal resistance in
radiation heat transfer problem by linearizing the above equation:
(T, -T2)
Q1-2 =

(7.15)

Rrad

where the radiative heat transfer resistance Rrad is given by:

T1-T2
AFFA (T14 -T24 )

(7.16)

R rad

7.2.3. Convection Heat Transfer:

Convection heat transfer takes place between a surface and a moving fluid, when they are at
different temperatures. In a strict sense, convection is not a basic mode of heat transfer as the heat
transfer from the surface to the fluid consists of two mechanisms operating simultaneously. The first
one is energy transfer due to molecular motion (conduction) through a fluid layer adjacent to the
surface, which remains stationary with respect to the solid surface due to no-slip condition.
Superimposed upon this conductive mode is energy transfer by the macroscopic motion of fluid
particles by virtue of an external force, which could be generated by a pump or fan (forced
convection) or generated due to buoyancy, caused by density gradients.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

When fluid flows over a surface, its velocity and temperature adjacent to the surface
are same as that of the surface due to the no-slip condition. The velocity and
temperature far away from the surface may remain unaffected. The region in which
the velocity and temperature vary from that of the surface to that of the free stream are
called as hydrodynamic and thermal boundary layers, respectively. Figure 7.2 show
that fluid with free stream velocity U, flows over a flat plate. In the vicinity of the
surface as shown in Figure 7.2, the velocity tends to vary from zero (when the surface
is stationary) to its free stream value Uoo. This happens in a narrow region whose
thickness is of the order of ReL-0.5 (ReL = UooL/v) where there is a sharp velocity
gradient. This narrow region is called hydrodynamic boundary layer. In the
hydrodynamic boundary layer region the inertial terms are of same order magnitude
as the viscous terms. Similarly to the velocity gradient, there is a sharp temperature
gradient in this vicinity of the surface if the temperature of the surface of the plate is
different from that of the flow stream. This region is called thermal boundary layer, 8t
whose thickness is of the order of (ReLPr)-0 5, where Pr is the Prandtl number, given
by:
(7.17)
Pr= c p,ftf=vf
kf

ocf In the expression for Prandtl number,

all the properties refer to the flowing fluid.

edge of the velocity boundary layer

^M//M/MJto////}///////////////S/////////)/ZM/////j'
Re, laminar

Region of
turbulence development
(transition)

turbulent
u -x

> Rekri,= 5-105

Fig. 7.2. Velocity distribution of flow over a flat plate

In the thermal boundary layer region, the conduction terms are of same order of
magnitude as the convection terms.
The momentum transfer is related to kinematic viscosity v while the diffusion of heat
is related to thermal diffusivity a hence the ratio of thermal boundary layer to viscous
boundary layer is related to the ratio v/a, Prandtl number. From the expressions for
boundary layer thickness it can be seen that the ratio of thermal boundary layer
thickness to the viscous boundary layer thickness depends upon Prandtl number. For
large Prandtl numbers 5t < 5 and for small Prandtl numbers, 8t > 5. It can also be seen
that as the Reynolds number increases, the boundary layers become narrow, the
temperature gradient becomes large and the heat transfer rate increases.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

Since the heat transfer from the surface is by molecular conduction, it depends upon
the temperature gradient in the fluid in the immediate vicinity of the surface, i.e.
(7.18)
Q=
dT dy
y=0
kA
Since temperature difference has been recognized as the potential for heat transfer it is
convenient to express convective heat transfer rate as proportional to it, i.e.
Q
(7.19)
A
= -kf
dT
= hcA(Tw -T)

dy

y=0

The above equation defines the convective heat transfer coefficient h c. This equation
Q = hcA(Tw -T)is also referred to as Newtons law of cooling. From the above
equation it can be seen that the convective heat transfer coefficient hc is given by:
-kf

dT
dy
y=0

hc =

(7.2
0)
(Tw - T )

The above equation suggests that the convective heat transfer coefficient (hence heat
near
the
transfer by convection) depends on the temperature gradient
dT
y=0
surface
in
addition
to
the
thermal
conductivity
of
the
fluid
and
the
temperature
dy
difference. The temperature gradient near the wall depends on the rate at which the
fluid near the wall can transport energy into the mainstream. Thus the temperature
gradient depends on the flow field, with higher velocities able to pressure sharper
temperature gradients and hence higher heat transfer rates. Thus determination of
convection heat transfer requires the application of laws of fluid mechanics in
addition to the laws of heat transfer.
Table 7.2 Typical order-of magnitude values of convective heat transfer coefficients
Type of fluid and flow
Air, free convection
Water, free convection
Air or superheated steam, forced convection
Oil, forced convection
Water, forced convection
Synthetic refrigerants, boiling
Water, boiling
Synthetic refrigerants, condensing
Steam, condensing

Convective heat transfer coefficient

hc, (W/m2 K)
6 30
20 100
30 300
60 1800
300 18000
500 - 3000
3000 60000
1500 - 5000
6000 120000

Traditionally, from the manner in which the convection heat transfer rate is defined,
evaluating the convective heat transfer coefficient has become the main objective of

Version 1 ME, IIT

Kharagpur

the problem. The convective heat transfer coefficient can vary widely depending upon
the type of fluid and flow field and temperature difference. Table 7.2 shows typical
order-of-magnitude values of convective heat transfer coefficients for different
conditions.
Convective heat transfer resistance:
Similar to conduction and radiation, convective heat transfer rate can be written in
terms of a potential and resistance, i.e.,
(Tw - T^ )
Q = hcA(Tw-T00) =-------------(7.21)
Rconv

where the convective heat transfer resistance, Rconv = 1/(hcA)

Determination of convective heat transfer coefficient:
Evaluation of convective heat transfer coefficient is difficult as the physical
phenomenon is quite complex. Analytically, it can be determined by solving the mass,
momentum and energy equations. However, analytical solutions are available only for
very simple situations, hence most of the convection heat transfer data is obtained
through careful experiments, and the equations suggested for convective heat transfer
coefficients are mostly empirical. Since the equations are of empirical nature, each
equation is applicable to specific cases. Generalization has been made possible to
some extent by using several non-dimensional numbers such as Reynolds number,
Prandtl number, Nusselt number, Grashoff number, Rayleigh number etc. Some of the
most important and commonly used correlations are given below:
Heat transfer coefficient inside tubes, ducts etc.:
When a fluid flows through a conduit such as a tube, the fluid flow and heat transfer
characteristics at the entrance region will be different from the rest of the tube. Flow
in the entrance region is called as developing flow as the boundary layers form and
develop in this region. The length of the entrance region depends upon the type of
flow, type of surface, type of fluid etc. The region beyond this entrance region is
known as fully developed region as the boundary layers fill the entire conduit and the
velocity and temperature profiles remains essentially unchanged. In general, the
entrance effects are important only in short tubes and ducts. Correlations are available
in literature for both entrance as well as fully developed regions. In most of the
practical applications the flow will be generally fully developed as the lengths used
are large. The following are some important correlations applicable to fully developed
flows:
a) Fully developed laminar flow inside tubes (internal diameter D):
Nusselt number,NuD = hc =3.66
(7.22)
Constant wall
temperature condition:
kf

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

Constant wall heat flux condition:

D
hc
kf

Nusselt number, NuD = 4.364 (7.23)

where
n = 0.4
for
heating
(Tw >
Tf) and
n = 0.3
for
cooling
(Tw <
Tf).

b)
Fully
develo
ped
turbul
ent
flow
inside
tubes
(intern
al
diamet
er D):
DittusBoelte
r
Equati
on:
N D
0
u f
s
s
e
l
t
n
u
m
b
e
r
,
N
u
D

The
DittusBoelter
equatio
n is
valid
for
smooth
tubes
of
length
L, with
0.7 <
Pr <
160,
ReD >
10000
and
(L/D)
> 60.
Petukh
ov
equati
on:
This
equatio
n is
more
accurat
e than
DittusBoelter
and is
applica
ble to
rough
tubes
also. It
is

given by:
bn

ReD Pr
NuD =-----

where X = 1.07 +
12.7(Pr2/3

1)

(7.
25
)

1/ 2

where n = 0.11 for heating with uniform wall

temperature
n = 0.25 for
cooling with
uniform wall
temperature, and
n = 0 for uniform
wall heat flux or
for gases
f in Petukhov equation is the friction
factor, which needs to be obtained using
suitable correlations for smooth or rough
tubes. b and w are the dynamic viscosities
of the fluid evaluated at bulk fluid
temperature
and
wall
temperatures
respectively. Petukhov equation is valid for
the following conditions:
104 < ReD < 5 X 106
0.5 < Pr < 200

with 5 percent error

0.5 < Pr < 2000

with 10 percent error

0.08 < (b/w) < 40

c) Laminar flow over a horizontal, flat plate

(Rex < 5 X 105):
Constant wall temperature:
LocalNusselt
number, Nux =

hc x
kf 0.33
2Re

0.5

Pr1/
3

(7.
26)

Version
1 ME,
IIT
Kharag
pur

_Pr
Thc
k
hhecxaverage

Nusselt number is obtained by integrating local Nusselt number from 0

L
to L and dividing by L
v fy
d) Turbulent flow over horizontal, flat plate (Rex > 5 X 105):
Constant wall temperature:
Constant wall heat flux:
LocalNusselt number, Nux =
=
NuL

ation is valid
for 105 <
Grx*.Pr <

(
7
.
3
1
)

Average Nusselt number,

(7.27)
0.453Rex 0.5 Pr1/3
1/3

(0.037 ReL0.8 - 850) (7.28)

v
J

e) Free convection over hot, vertical flat

plates and cylinders:
Constant wall temperature:
Average Nusselt
number, NuL =

hc
L
kf

(GrLPr)n
=cRa

Average Grashoff Number

GrL =
w2
(7.30)
where g is the acceleration due to gravity, |
3 is volumetric coefficient of thermal
expansion, Tw and Tw are the plate and the
free stream fluid temperatures, respectively
and v is the kinematic viscosity.
Constant wall heat flux, qW:
w

Local

Nusselt
number,
Nux =

h
c

L
Average Nusselt f
k
number, NuL = V

(7.2
9)

In the above equation, GrL is the average

Grashoff number given by:

kf 2

J
n

where c and n are 0.59 and for laminar

flow (104 < GrL.Pr < 109) and 0.10 and for
turbulent flow (109 < GrL.Pr < 1013)

11
v kfq J x4
hx
g
10

f) Free
convection over
horizontal flat
plates:

a
where b
o
v
Grx* e
e
Th
q
e
u

Version 1 ME, IIT

Kharagpur

The values of c and n are given in Table 7.3 for different orientations and flow regimes.
Table 7.3 Values of c and n
regime
Orientation of plate
Range of GrLPr surface facing down, constant
5
Hot surface facing up or cold 10 to 2 X 107
n
Laminar
Turbulent
Tw 2 X 107 to 3 X
0.14
1/3
10
cFlow
10
0.54
1/4

10

Hot surface facing down or cold

to 53 X
10
10
3 X surface facing up, constant
Tw
Hot surface facing up, constant < 2 X 108
qw
5 X 108 to 1011
to 1011 Hot surface
10
constant qw

facing

0.13
0.16
0.58

1/3
1/3
1/5

down,

In the above free convection equations, the fluid properties have to be evaluated at a
mean temperature defined as Tm = Tw-0.25(Tw-T).
g) Convection heat transfer with phase change:
Filmwise condensation over horizontal tubes of outer diameter Do:
1/4

The heat transfer coefficient for film-wise condensation is given by Nusselts theory
that assumes the vapour to be still and at saturation temperature. The mean
condensation heat transfer coefficient, hm is given by:
3
2
fg
h
f f gh
m
NDof T
0.725
where, subscript f refers to saturated liquid state, N refers to number of tubes
above each other in a column and T = Tr Two , Tr and Two being refrigerant and outside
wall temperatures respectively.
Filmwise condensation over a vertical plate of length L:
The mean condensation heat transfer coefficient, hm is given
by,
3
1/4 k f
h
f2 ghfg
0.943
m
LT
f

Nucleate pool boiling of refrigerants inside a shell:

hr =CT2to3

(7.35)

where T is the temperature difference between surface and boiling fluid and C is a
constant that depends on the nature of refrigerant etc.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

The correlations for convective heat transfer coefficients given above are only few
examples of some of the common situations. A large number of correlations are
available for almost all commonly encountered convection problems. The reader
should refer to standard text books on heat transfer for further details.

7.3. Fundamentals of Mass transfer

When a system contains two or more components whose concentration vary from
point to point, there is a natural tendency for mass to be transferred, minimizing the
concentration differences within the system. The transport of one constituent from a
region of higher concentration to that of lower concentration is called mass transfer. A
common example of mass transfer is drying of a wet surface exposed to unsaturated
air. Refrigeration and air conditioning deal with processes that involve mass transfer.
Some basic laws of mass transfer relevant to refrigeration and air conditioning are
discussed below.
7.3.1. Ficks Law of Diffusion:
This law deals with transfer of mass within a medium due to difference in
concentration between various parts of it. This is very similar to Fouriers law of heat
conduction as the mass transport is also by molecular diffusion processes. According
to this law, rate of diffusion of component A m A(kg/s) is proportional to the
concentration gradient and the area of mass transfer, i.e.
mA = -DABA

(7.36)

dx
where, DAB is called diffusion coefficient for component A through component B, and it
has the units of m2/s just like those of thermal diffusivity a and the kinematic viscosity
of fluid v for momentum transfer.
7.3.2. Convective mass transfer:
Mass transfer due to convection involves transfer of mass between a moving fluid and
a surface or between two relatively immiscible moving fluids. Similar to convective
heat transfer, this mode of mass transfer depends on the transport properties as well as
the dynamic characteristics of the flow field. Similar to Newtons law for convective
heat transfer, he convective mass transfer equation can be written as:
m= hmAAcA

(7.37)

where hm is the convective mass transfer coefficient and Ac A is the difference between
the boundary surface concentration and the average concentration of fluid stream of
the diffusing species A.
Similar to convective heat transfer, convective mass transfer coefficient depends on
the type of flow, i.e., laminar or turbulent and forced or free. In general the mass
transfer coefficient is a function of the system geometry, fluid and flow properties and

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

the concentration difference. Similar to momentum and heat transfers, concentration

boundary layers develop whenever mass transfer takes place between a surface and a
fluid. This suggests analogies between mass, momentum and energy transfers. In
convective mass transfer the non-dimensional numbers corresponding to Prandtl and
Nusselt numbers of convective heat transfer are called as Schmidt and Sherwood
numbers. These are defined as:
Sherwood number, ShL =

(7.38)

Schmidt number, Sc =
D

(7.39)

where hm is the convective mass transfer coefficient, D is the diffusivity and v is the
kinematic viscosity.
The general convective mass transfer correlations relate the Sherwood number to
Reynolds and Schmidt number.

7.4. Analogy between heat, mass and momentum transfer

7.4.1. Reynolds and Colburn Analogies
The boundary layer equations for momentum for a flat plate are exactly same as those
for energy equation if Prandtl number, Pr = 1, pressure gradient is zero and viscous
dissipation is negligible, there are no heat sources and for similar boundary
conditions. Hence, the solution for non-dimensional velocity and temperature are also
same. It can be shown that for such a case,
Re.Pr
f Nu 1 f= hc
Stanton number, St = ------- 1 = f(7.40)
2
PVcpy

where f is the friction factor and St is Stanton Number. The above equation, which
relates heat and momentum transfers is known as Reynolds analogy.
To account for the variation in Prandtl number in the range of 0.6 to 50, the Reynolds
analogy is modified resulting in Colburn analogy, which is stated as follows.
St.Pr2/3 =
2

(7.41)

7.4.2. Analogy between heat, mass and momentum transfer

The role that thermal diffusivity plays in the energy equation is played by diffusivity
D in the mass transfer equation. Therefore, the analogy between momentum and mass
transfer for a flat plate will yield:
Sh
f h L V v VD^I (hm} ff^\
-------= m ----- =
=
(7.42)

Re.Sc ^ D )\VLj\v)

\ V J ^2)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

To account for values of Schmidt number different from one, following correlation is
introduced,
Sh
f
-------Sc 2/ 3 =
(7.43)
Re.Sc
2
Comparing the equations relating heat and momentum transfer with heat and mass
transfer, it can be shown that,
(7.44) D

Pcphm

This analogy is followed in most of the chemical engineering literature and ot/D is
referred to as Lewis number. In air-conditioning calculations, for convenience Lewis
number is defined as:
Lewis number, Le =

(7.45)

The above analogies are very useful as by applying them it is possible to find heat
transfer coefficient if friction factor is known and mass transfer coefficient can be
calculated from the knowledge of heat transfer coefficient.

7.5. Multimode heat transfer

In most of the practical heat transfer problems heat transfer occurs due to more than
one mechanism. Using the concept of thermal resistance developed earlier, it is
possible to analyze steady state, multimode heat transfer problems in a simple manner,
similar to electrical networks. An example of this is transfer of heat from outside to
the interiors of an air conditioned space. Normally, the walls of the air conditioned
rooms are made up of different layers having different heat transfer properties. Once
again the concept of thermal resistance is useful in analyzing the heat transfer through
multilayered walls. The example given below illustrates these principles.
Multimode heat transfer through a building wall:
The schematic of a multimode heat transfer building wall is shown in Fig. 7.3. From
the figure it can be seen that:
Q1-2

(7.46a)
total

(R
R total

conV''+ "d,2
R
conv,2
R rad,2 j
v

+(R w,3 +R w,2 +R w,1 ) +

R conv,1R rad,1
(7.46b)
R conv,1

R total

( R2 ) + ( Rw ) + ( R1 )
Q1-2=UA(T1-T2)

R rad,1 J

(7.46c)
(7.46d)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

where, overall heat transfer coefficient, U =

T1

1
R totalA
2
R
rW

R
rW

T W

R
w
Q--------s/WV---e---------v\A
W\-----W\A
A-------e

T2
R
2
Rw
R1
T1
Fig.
7.3.
Sch
ema
tic
of a
mult
imo
de
heat
tran
sfer
buil
ding
wall
Comp
osite
cylinde
rs:
The
conc
ept
of
resist
ance
netw
orks
is
also

useful in solving problems involving composite cylinders.

A common example of this is steady state heat transfer
through an insulated pipe with a fluid flowing inside.
Since it is not possible to perfectly insulate the pipe, heat
transfer takes place between the surroundings and the
inner fluid when they are at different temperatures. For
such cases the heat transfer rate is given by:
Q=UoAo (Ti -To )

(7.47)

Versi
on 1
ME,
IIT
Khar
agpu
r

where Ao is the outer surface area of the composite cylinder and Uo is the overall heat
transfer coefficient with respect to the outer area given by:
1
(7.48)
UoAo

1
=+
hiAi

ln(r2/r1) ln(r3/r2)
1
+
+
2Lkm 2Lkin hoAo

In the above equation, hi and ho are the inner and outer convective heat transfer
coefficients, Ai and Ao are the inner and outer surface areas of the composite cylinder, km
and kin are the thermal conductivity of tube wall and insulation, L is the length of the
cylinder, r1, r2 and r3 are the inner and outer radii of the tube and outer radius of the
insulation respectively. Additional heat transfer resistance has to be added if there is
any scale formation on the tube wall surface due to fouling.

Fluid in
Fluid
To, ho out

Insulation
'Tube wall
Fig. 7.4. Composite cylindrical tube

7.6. Heat exchangers:

A heat exchanger is a device in which heat is transferred from one fluid stream to
another across a solid surface. Thus a typical heat exchanger involves both conduction
and convection heat transfers. A wide variety of heat exchangers are extensively used
in refrigeration and air conditioning. In most of the cases the heat exchangers operate
in a steady state, hence the concept of thermal resistance and overall heat transfer
coefficients can be used very conveniently. In general, the temperatures of the fluid
streams may vary along the length of the heat exchanger. To take care of the
temperature variation, the concept of Log Mean Temperature Difference (LMTD) is
introduced in the design of heat exchangers. It is defined as:
LMTD=

T1 - T2 ln(T1 / T2 )

(7.49)

where T1 and T2 are the temperature difference between the hot and cold fluid
streams at two inlet and outlet of the heat exchangers.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

If we assume that the overall heat transfer coefficient does not vary along the length,
and specific heats of the fluids remain constant, then the heat transfer rate is given by:
T1 - T2 Q=UoAo (LMTD)= UoAo
ln(T1 / T2 )
also

(7.50)

T1 - T2
ln (T1 / T2 ) Q=Ui Ai (LMTD)=Ui Ai
the above equation is valid for both parallel flow (both the fluids flow in the same
direction) or counterflow (fluids flow in opposite directions) type heat exchangers.
For other types such as cross-flow, the equation is modified by including a
multiplying factor. The design aspects of heat exchangers used in refrigeration and air
conditioning will be discussed in later chapters.
Questions:
362. Obtain an analytical expression for temperature distribution for a plane wall
having uniform surface temperatures of T1 and T2 at x1 and x2 respectively. It may be
mentioned that the thermal conductivity k = k 0 (1+bT), where b is a constant.
(Solution)
363. A cold storage room has walls made of 0.3 m of brick on outside followed by
0.1 m of plastic foam and a final layer of 5 cm of wood. The thermal conductivities of
brick, foam and wood are 1, 0.02 and 0.2 W/mK respectively. The internal and
external heat transfer coefficients are 40 and 20 W/m2K. The outside and inside
temperatures are 400C and -100C. Determine the rate of cooling required to maintain
the temperature of the room at -100C and the temperature of the inside surface of the
brick given that the total wall area is 100 m2. (Solution)
364. A steel pipe of negligible thickness and having a diameter of 20 cm has hot air
at 1000C flowing through it. The pipe is covered with two layers of insulating materials
each having a thickness of 10 cm and having thermal conductivities of 0.2 W/mK and
0.4 W/mK. The inside and outside heat transfer coefficients are 100 and 50 W/m 2K
respectively. The atmosphere is at 350C. Calculate the rate of heat loss from a 100 m
long pipe. (Solution)
365. Water flows inside a pipe having a diameter of 10 cm with a velocity of 1 m/s.
the pipe is 5 m long. Calculate the heat transfer coefficient if the mean water
temperature is at 400C and the wall is isothermal at 800C. (Solution)
366. A long rod having a diameter of 30 mm is to be heated from 400 0C to 6000C.
The material of the rod has a density of 8000 kg/m 3 and specific heat of 400 J/kgK. It
is placed concentrically inside a long cylindrical furnace having an internal diameter
of 150 mm. The inner side of the furnace is at a temperature of 11000C and has an

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

emissivity of 0.7. If the surface of the rod has an emissivity of 0.5, find the time
required to heat the rod. (Solution)
6. Air flows over a flat plate of length 0.3 m at a constant temperature. The velocity of
air at a distance far off from the surface of the plate is 50 m/s. Calculate the average
heat transfer coefficient from the surface considering separate laminar and turbulent
sections and compare it with the result obtained by assuming fully turbulent flow.
(Solution)
Note: The local Nusselt number for laminar and turbulent flows is given by:
laminar : Nux = 0.331Rex1/2Pr1/3
turbulent: Nux = 0.0288Rex0.8Pr1/3 Transition occurs at
Rex.trans = 2 X 105 . The forced convection boundary layer flow begins as laminar and
then becomes turbulent. Take the properties of air to be = 1.1 kg/m3 , = 1.7 X 10-5
kg/m s , k = 0.03 W/mK and Pr = 0.7.
7. A vertical tube having a diameter of 80 mm and 1.5 m in length has a surface
temperature of 800C. Water flows inside the tube while saturated steam at 2 bar
condenses outside. Calculate the heat transfer coefficient. (Solution)
Note: Properties of saturated steam at 2 bar: Tsat = 120.20C , hfg = 2202 kJ/kgK , =
1.129 kg/m3 ; For liquid phase at 100 0C: L = 958 kg/m3 , cp = 4129 J/kgK , L =
0.279X10-3 kg/m s and Pr = 1.73.
367. Air at 300 K and at atmospheric pressure flows at a mean velocity of 50 m/s
over a flat plate 1 m long. Assuming the concentration of vapour in air to be
negligible, calculate the mass transfer coefficient of water vapour from the plate into
the air. The diffusion of water vapour into air is 0.5 X 10 -4 m2/s. The Colburn j-factor
for heat transfer coefficient is given by jH=0.0296 Re -0.2. (Solution)
368. An oil cooler has to cool oil flowing at 20 kg/min from 100 0C to 500C. The
specific heat of the oil is 2000 J/kg K. Water with similar flow rate at an ambient
temperature of 350C is used to cool the oil. Should we use a parallel flow or a counter
flow heat exchanger? Calculate the surface area of the heat exchanger if the external
heat transfer coefficient is 100 W/m2K. (Solution)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

Lesson
8
Methods of producing
Low Temperatures
1

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

The specific objectives of the lesson :

In this lesson the basic concepts applicable to refrigeration is introduced. This chapter
presents the various methods of producing low temperatures, viz. Sensible cooling by cold
medium, Endothermic mixing of substances, Phase change processes, Expansion of liquids,
Expansion of gases, Thermoelectric refrigeration, Adiabatic demagnetization. At the end of
this lesson students should be able to:
369.
Define refrigeration (Section 8.1)
370.
Express clearly the working principles of various methods to produce low
temperatures (Section 8.2)

8.1. Introduction
Refrigeration is defined as the process of cooling of bodies or fluids to temperatures lower
than those available in the surroundings at a particular time and place. It should be kept in
mind that refrigeration is not same as cooling, even though both the terms imply a decrease
in temperature. In general, cooling is a heat transfer process down a temperature gradient, it
can be a natural, spontaneous process or an artificial process. However, refrigeration is not a
spontaneous process, as it requires expenditure of exergy (or availability). Thus cooling of a
hot cup of coffee is a spontaneous cooling process (not a refrigeration process), while
converting a glass of water from room temperature to say, a block of ice, is a refrigeration
process (non-spontaneous). All refrigeration processes involve cooling, but all cooling
processes need not involve refrigeration.
Refrigeration is a much more difficult process than heating, this is in accordance with the
second laws of thermodynamics. This also explains the fact that people knew how to heat,
much earlier than they learned how to refrigerate. All practical refrigeration processes
involve reducing the temperature of a system from its initial value to the required temperature
that is lower than the surroundings, and then maintaining the system at the required low
temperature. The second part is necessary due to the reason that once the temperature of a
system is reduced, a potential for heat transfer is created between the system and
surroundings, and in the absence of a perfect insulation heat transfer from the surroundings
to the system takes place resulting in increase in system temperature. In addition, the system
itself may generate heat (e.g. due to human beings, appliances etc.), which needs to be
extracted continuously. Thus in practice refrigeration systems have to first reduce the system
temperature and then extract heat from the system at such a rate that the temperature of the
system remains low. Theoretically refrigeration can be achieved by several methods. All these
methods involve producing temperatures low enough for heat transfer to take place from the
system being refrigerated to the system that is producing refrigeration.

8.2. Methods of producing low temperatures

8.2.1. Sensible cooling by cold medium
If a substance is available at a temperature lower than the required refrigeration temperature,
then it can be used for sensible cooling by bringing it in thermal contact with the system to be
refrigerated. For example, a building can be cooled to a temperature lower than the
2

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

surroundings by introducing cold air into the building. Cold water or brine is used for cooling
beverages, dairy products and in other industrial processes by absorbing heat from them. The
energy absorbed by the substance providing cooling increases its temperature, and the heat
transferred during this process is given by:
Q = mcp (T)

(8.1)

Where m is the mass of the substance providing cooling, c p is its specific heat and T is the
temperature rise undergone by the substance. Since the temperature of the cold substance
increases during the process, to provide continuous refrigeration, a continuous supply of the
cold substance should be maintained, which may call for an external refrigeration cycle.
8.2.2. Endothermic mixing of substances
This is one of the oldest methods known to mankind. It is very well-known that low
temperatures can be obtained when certain salts are dissolved in water. This is due to the fact
that dissolving of these salts in water is an endothermic process, i.e., heat is absorbed from
the solution leading to its cooling. For example, when salts such as sodium nitrate, sodium
chloride, calcium chloride added to water, its temperature falls. By dissolving sodium
chloride in water, it is possible to achieve temperatures as low as 210C, while with calcium
chloride a temperature of 510C could be obtained. However, producing low temperature by
endothermic mixing has several practical limitations. These are: the refrigeration effect
obtained is very small (the refrigeration effect depends on the heat of solution of the
dissolved substance, which is typically small for most of the commonly used salts), and
recovery of the dissolved salt is often uneconomical as this calls for evaporation of water
from the solution.
8.2.3. Phase change processes
Refrigeration is produced when substances undergo endothermic phase change processes
such as sublimation, melting and evaporation. For example, when ice melts it produces a
refrigeration effect in the surroundings by absorbing heat. The amount of refrigeration
produced and the temperature at which refrigeration is produced depends on the substance
undergoing phase change. It is well-known that pure water ice at 1 atmospheric pressure
melts at a temperature of about 00C and extracts about 335 kJ/kg of heat from the
surroundings. At 1 atmospheric pressure, dry ice (solid carbon dioxide) undergoes
sublimation at a temperature of 78.50C, yielding a refrigeration effect of 573 kJ/kg. Both
water ice and dry ice are widely used to provide refrigeration in several applications.
However, evaporation or vaporization is the most commonly used phase change process in
practical refrigeration systems as it is easier to handle fluids in cyclic devices. In these
systems, the working fluid (refrigerant) provides refrigeration effect as it changes its state
from liquid to vapor in the evaporator.
For all phase change processes, the amount of refrigeration produced is given by:

Q = m(hph )
(8.2)
where Q is the refrigeration produced (heat transferred), m is the mass of the phase change
substance and hph is the latent heat of phase change. If the process is one of evaporation,
3

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

then hph is the latent heat of vaporization (difference between saturated vapour enthalpy and
saturated liquid enthalpy at a given pressure). From the above equation it can be seen that
substances having large latent heats require less amount of substance (m) and vice versa.
Apart from the latent heat, the temperature at which the phase change occurs is also
important. For liquid-to-vapour phase change, the Normal Boiling Point (NBP) is a good
indication of the usefulness of a particular fluid for refrigeration applications. The Normal
Boiling Point is defined as the temperature at which the liquid and vapour are in equilibrium
at a pressure of 1 atm. The latent heat of vaporization and normal boiling point are related by
the Troutons rule, which states that the molar entropy of vaporization is constant for all
fluids at normal boiling point. This can be expressed mathematically as:
Asfg =

hfg Tb

(8.3)

= 85 to 110 J/mol.K

where sfg is the molar entropy of vaporization (J/mol.K), hfg is the molar enthalpy of
vaporization (J/mol) and Tb is the normal boiling point in K. The above equation shows that
higher the NBP, higher will be the molar enthalpy of vaporization. It can also be inferred
from the above equation that low molecular weight fluids have higher specific enthalpy of
vaporization and vice versa.
The fluids used in a refrigeration system should preferably have a low NBP such that they
vaporize at sufficiently low temperatures to produce refrigeration, however, if the NBP is too
low then the operating pressures will be very high. The Clausius-Clayperon equation relates
the vapour pressures with temperature, and is given by:

hfg =

(8.4)
dlnp

dT

sat

RT

The Clausius-Clapeyron equation is based on the assumptions that the specific volume of liquid
is negligible in comparison with the specific volume of the vapour and the vapour obeys ideal gas
law. Clausius-Clapeyron equation is useful in estimating the latent heat of vaporization (or
sublimation) from the saturated pressure-temperature data.
8.2.4. Expansion of Liquids

Porous plug

2 Fig.8.1(a). Expansion
through a turbine

............................... /

......................

'//////////////////A

v//////////////////m$,
Fig.8.1(b). Isenthalpic
Expansion through a
porous plug
4

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

Fig.8.2(a). Expansion of saturated liquid

1-2: Isentropic; 1-2: Isenthalpic

Fig.8.2(b). Expansion of subcooled liquid

3-4: Isentropic; 3-4: Isenthalpic

When a high pressure liquid flows through a turbine delivering a net work output (Fig.8.1(a)),
its pressure and enthalpy fall. In an ideal case, the expansion process can be isentropic, so
that its entropy remains constant and the drop in enthalpy will be equal to the specific work
output (neglecting kinetic and potential energy changes). When a high pressure liquid is
forced to flow through a restriction such as a porous plug (Fig.8.1 (b)), its pressure decreases
due to frictional effects. No net work output is obtained, and if the process is adiabatic and
change in potential and kinetic energies are negligible, then from steady flow energy
equation, it can be easily shown that the enthalpy of the liquid remains constant. However,
since the process is highly irreversible, entropy of liquid increases during the process. This
process is called as a throttling process. Whether or not the temperature of the liquid drops
significantly during the isentropic and isenthalpic expansion processes depends on the inlet
condition of the liquid. If the inlet is a saturated liquid (state 1 in Fig. 8.2(a)), then the outlet
condition lies in the two-phase region, i.e., at the outlet there will be some amount of vapour
in addition to the liquid for both isentropic expansion through the turbine as well as
isenthalpic process through the porous plug. These processes 1-2 and 1-2, respectively are
shown on a T-s diagram in Fig. 8.2 (a). Obviously, from energy balance it can be shown that
in isentropic expansion through a turbine with a net work output, the enthalpy at state 2 will
be less than enthalpy at state 1, and in case of isenthalpic expansion through porous plug
(with no work output), the entropy at state 2 will be greater than the entropy at state 1. For
both the cases the exit temperature will be same, which is equal to the saturation temperature
corresponding to the outlet pressure p2. It can be seen that this temperature is much lower
than the inlet temperature (saturation temperature corresponding to the inlet pressure p1). This
large temperature drop is a result of vapour generation during expansion requiring enthalpy of
vaporization, which in the absence of external heat transfer (adiabatic) has to be supplied by
the fluid itself.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

On the contrary, if the liquid at inlet is subcooled to such an extent that when it expands from
the same inlet pressure p1 to the same outlet pressure p 2, the exit condition is in a liquid state,
we observe that the temperature drop obtained is much smaller, i.e., (T 3-T4,4) << (T1-T2,2) for
both isentropic as well as isenthalpic processes. The temperature drop obtained during
isenthalpic expansion is less than that of isentropic expansion. Thus in refrigeration systems
which use expansion of liquids to produce low temperatures (e.g. vapour compression
refrigeration systems), the inlet state of the liquid is always such that the outlet falls into the
two phase region.
8.2.5. Expansion of gases
a) By throttling:
Similar to liquids, gases can also be expanded from high pressure to low pressure either by
using a turbine (isentropic expansion) or a throttling device (isenthalpic process). Similar to
throttling of liquids, the throttling of gases is also an isenthalpic process. Since the enthalpy
of an ideal gas is a function of temperature only, during an isenthalpic process, the
temperature of the ideal gas remains constant. In case of real gases, whether the temperature
decreases or increases during the isenthalpic throttling process depends on a property of the
gas called Joule-Thomson coefficient, \iJT, given by:
H

cT^
dp

JT

(8.5)
h

from thermodynamic relations it can be shown that the Joule-Thomson coefficient, [iJT, is equal
to:

^=

dv

TIJ -PT J p
p

(8.6)

where v is the specific volume and cp is the specific heat at constant pressure. From the above
expression, it can be easily shown that \iJT is zero for ideal gases (pv = RT). Thus the magnitude
of [iJT is a measure of deviation of real gases from ideal behaviour. From the definition of |JJT,
the temperature of a real gas falls during isenthalpic expansion if [iJT is positive, and it increases
when \iJT is negative. Figure 8.3 shows the process of isenthalpic expansion on temperaturepressure coordinates.
As shown in Fig. 8.3, along a constant enthalpy line (isenthalpic process), beginning with an
initial state i the temperature of the gas increases initially with reduction in pressure upto
dT*]

point f3, and|j,

is negative from point i to point f3. However, further reduction in

JT

dp
pressure from point f3 to f5, results in a reduction of temperature from f3 to f5. Thus point f3
= 0. The temperature at the point of
dp
inflexion is known as inversion temperature for the given enthalpy. Therefore, if the initial
represents a point of inflexion, where [i

JT

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

condition falls on the left of inversion temperature, the gas undergoes a reduction in temperature
during expansion and if the initial condition falls on the right side of inversion point, then temperature
increases during expansion. Figure 8.4 shows several isenthalpic lines on T-p coordinates. Also shown
in the figure is an inversion curve, which is the locus of all the inversion points. The point where the
inversion curve intercepts the temperature axis is called as maximum inversion temperature. For any
gas, the temperature will reduce during throttling only when the initial temperature is lower than the
maximum inversion temperature. For most of the gases (with the exception of neon, helium,
hydrogen) the maximum inversion temperature is much above the room temperature, hence
isenthalpic expansion of these gases can lead to their cooling.
state before throttling
-4---T

-f
]3

states after throttling

JLIJT < 0

|LIJT > 0

f4
f5
i

h=constant
P
Fig.8.3. Isenthalpic expansion of a gas on T-P coordinates

Maximum
invertion
temperature

WT < 0

Inversion curve
Constant enthalpy lines

Heating zone
P Fig.8.4.
T

T-P coordinates

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

Isenthalpic lines on

p1>p
2>p3>p4
Inversion
line, |
JJT=0

/ /
sh=const. /
/
p1
p2
p3
p4

Fig.8.5.
Inversion
temperature
line on T-s
diagram
Figu
re
8.5
sho
ws
the
inve
rsio
n
tem
pera
ture
line
on
T-s
diag
ram.

Several things can be

observed from the
diagram.
At
high
temperatures (greater
than
inversion
temperature), throttling
increases temperature.
Maximum temperature
drop during throttling
occurs when the initial
state lies on the
inversion
curve.
Throttling
at
low
pressures (e.g. p3 to p4)
produces
smaller
reduction
in
temperature compared
to throttling at high
pressures (e.g. p2 to p3).
For a given pressure
drop during throttling,
the drop in temperature
is higher at lower
temperatures compared
to higher temperatures.
Gases
cannot
be
liquefied by throttling
(i.e., exit condition will
not be in two phase
region), unless the
temperature of the gas
is
first
lowered
sufficiently. This fact is
very important in the
liquefaction of gases.
In order to liquefy
these gases, they have

to
be
first
com
pres
sed
to
high
pres
sure
s,
cool
ed
isob
aric
ally
to
low
tem
pera
ture
s
and
then
throt
tled,
so
that
at
the
exit
a
mixt
ure
of
liqui
d
and
vap
our
can
be
prod
uced
.
b)
Expan
sion of
gases
throug
ha

turbine:
Steady flow expansion
of a high pressure gas
through a turbine or an
expansion
engine
results in a net work
output with a resulting
decrease in enthalpy.
This
decrease
in
enthalpy leads to a
decrease
in
temperature. In an ideal
case, the expansion will
be reversible adiabatic,
however, in an actual
case, the expansion can
be
adiabatic
but
irreversibility
exists
due to fluid friction.
Similar to the case of
liquids, it can be shown
from the steady flow
energy equation that
expansion with a net
work output reduces
the exit enthalpy and
hence temperature of
the gas. If the changes
in potential and kinetic
energy are negligible
and the process is
adiabatic, then:
w

(
8
Version 1 ME, IIT
Kharagpur

Since wnet is positive, the outlet enthalpy h2 is less than inlet enthalpy h1; hence the outlet
temperature T2 will also be less than inlet temperature T1. Unlike isenthalpic expansion, an
approximately reversible adiabatic expansion with a net work output always produces a
decrease in temperature irrespective of the initial temperature. However, one disadvantage
with adiabatic expansion through a turbine/expansion engine is that the temperature drop
decreases as the temperature decreases. Hence in practice a combination of adiabatic
expansion followed by isenthalpic expansion is used to liquefy gases. The adiabatic
expansion is used to pre-cool the gas to a temperature lower than the inversion temperature
and then throttling is used to produce liquid. This method was first used by Kapitza to liquefy
helium (maximum inversion temperature: 43 K). In practical systems efficient heat
exchangers are used to cool the incoming gas by the outgoing gas.
8.2.6. Thermoelectric Refrigeration
Thermoelectric refrigeration is a novel method of producing low temperatures and is based on
the reverse Seebeck effect. Figure 8.6 shows the illustration of Seebeck and Peltier effects. As
shown, in Seebeck effect an EMF, E is produced when the junctions of two dissimilar
conductors are maintained at two different temperatures T1 and T2. This principle is used for
measuring temperatures using thermocouples. Experimental studies show that Seebeck effect
is reversible. The electromotive force produced is given by:
E = (T1 -T2)

(8.8)

where is the thermoelectroic power or Seebeck coefficient. For a constant cold junction
temperature (T2),
dE
=
(8.9)
dT

T1 > T2

T1 > T2

Ql
>Qh
T2 T1G

-EB
Seebeck effect

B
Peltier effect

Fig.8.6. Illustration of Seebeck and Peltier effects

If a closed circuit is formed by the conductors, then an electrical current, I flows due to the
emf and this would result in irreversible generation of heat (q ir=I2R) due to the finite
resistance R of the conductors. This effect is known as Joulean Effect.
9

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

Due to different temperatures T1 and T2 (T1>T2), there will be heat transfer by conduction
also. This is also irreversible and is called as conduction effect. The amount of heat transfer
depends on the overall thermal conductance of the circuit.
When a battery is added in between the two conductors A and B whose junctions are initially
at same temperature, and a current is made to flow through the circuit, the junction
temperatures will change, one junction becoming hot (T1) and the other becoming cold (T 2).
This effect is known as Peltier effect. Refrigeration effect is obtained at the cold junction and
heat is rejected to the surroundings at the hot junction. This is the basis for thermoelectric
refrigeration systems. The position of hot and cold junctions can be reversed by reversing the
direction of current flow. The heat transfer rate at each junction is given by:
Q = (j)I

(8.10)

where is the Peltier coefficient in volts and I is the current in amperes.

When current is passed through a conductor in which there is an initial uniform temperature
gradient, then it is observed that the temperature distribution gets distorted as heat transfer
takes place. This effect is known as Thomson effect. The heat transfer rate per unit length
(W/cm) due to Thomson effect is given by:
T

dT

QX=TI

(8.11)

dx
where x is the Thomson coefficient (volts per K), I is the current (amperes) and (dT/dx) is the
temperature gradient in the conductor (K/cm).
It has been shown from thermodynamic analysis that the Seebeck, Peltier and Thomson
coefficients are related by the equations:
^AB =((I)A -(t)B) = aABT = (ocA -ocB)T
*A-3= d("A-B)

(8.12a)
(812b)

-xB = d(aA T
dT
where (|)A, aA and xA are the Peltier, Seebeck and Thomson coefficients for material A and (|)B, aB
and xB are the Peltier, Seebeck and Thomson coefficients for material B, respectively. The
Thomson coefficient becomes zero if the thermoelectric power CXAB remains constant. From
the above equations it is seen that the heat transfer rate due to Peltier effect is;
Q = (j)ABI = aABIT

(8.13)

The above equation shows that in order to have high heat transfer rates at low temperatures,
either aAB should be high and/or high currents should be used. However, high currents lead to
high heat generation due to the Joulean effect.
Since the coefficients are properties of conducting materials, selection of suitable material is
very important in the design of efficient thermoelectric refrigeration systems. Ideal
thermoelectric materials should have high electrical conductivity and low thermal

10

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

conductivity. Pure metals are not good due to their high thermal conductivity, while
insulating materials are not good due to their low electrical conductivity. Thermoelectric
refrigeration systems became commercial with the development of semiconductor materials,
which typically have reasonably high electrical conductivity and low thermal conductivity.
Thermoelectric refrigeration systems based on semiconductors consist of p-type and n-type
materials. The p-type materials have positive thermoelectric power p, while the n-type
materials have negative thermoelectric power, n. By carrying out a simple thermodynamic
analysis it was shown that the temperature difference between hot and cold junctions (T2-T1),
rate of refrigeration Ql and COP of a thermoelectric refrigeration system are given by:
(p -n)T1I-Ql- I 2 R
(T2 - T1) =

Ql = (p -n)T1I-U(T2 -T1)-------------I 2 R

(8.14)

Q (p -n)T1I-U(T2 -T1)-I2R
COP = l =-------------------------------------2
W
(p-n)(T2 - T 1 ) I + I R
where Ql is the rate of refrigeration (W) obtained at temperature T1, W is the power input by
the battery (W) and U is the effective thermal conductance between the two junctions. From
the above expression it can be easily shown that in the absence of the two irreversible effects,
i.e., conduction effect and Joulean effect, the COP of an ideal thermoelectric refrigeration
system is same as that of a Carnot refrigerator. The temperature difference between the
junctions will be maximum when the refrigeration effect is zero.
An optimum current can be obtained by maximizing each of the above performance
parameters, i.e., temperature difference, refrigeration effect and COP. For example,
differentiating the expression for COP with respect to I and equating it zero, we get the
expressions for optimum current and maximum COP as:
( -n)(T2 -T1)
I opt =

/-----=----------

R( 1 + ZTm -1)
(8.15a)
( T1
/--------- T2
-----)(1 + ZT------------)
T2 -T1
T
COPmax =-----------1
(^] + ZTm +1)
where Z is a property parameter called figure of merit and Tm is the mean of T 2 and T1. The
figure of merit Z is given by:
( -n)2
Z=--------------UR
11

(8.15b)
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

It can be shown that for best performance the figure of merit Z should be as high as possible.
It is shown that Z is related to the thermal and electrical conductivities of the materials and
the electrical contact resistance at the junctions. For a special case where both p- and n-type
materials have equal electrical and thermal conductivities ( and k) and equal but opposite
values of thermoelectric power , it is shown that the maximum figure of merit Zmax is given
by:
Zmax

a2a
2r 2r k(1+

(8.16)

) L

where is the electrical resistivity and L is the length of the modules.

8.2.7. Adiabatic demagnetization
To Helium pump
To
Hydrogen
pump
Liquid
hydrogen

To high vacuum
Liquid helium

Fig.8.7. Schematic of a setup depicting magnetic refrigeration

Magnetic refrigeration is based on the magnetocaloric effect, discovered by E. Warburg in
1881. Similar to mechanical compression and expansion of gases, there are some materials
that raise their temperatures when adiabatically magnetised, and drop their temperature when
adiabatically demagnetised. Temperature very near the absolute zero may be obtained by
adiabatic demagnetization of certain paramagnetic salts. Each atom of the paramagnetic salt
may be considered to be a tiny magnet. If the salt is not magnetized then all its atoms or the
magnets are randomly oriented such that the net magnetic force is zero. If it is exposed to a
strong magnetic field, the atoms will align themselves to the direction of magnetic field. This
requires work and the temperature increases during this process. If the salt is kept in a
container surrounded by Helium, the heat will be absorbed by Helium. Now if the magnetic
field is suddenly removed, the atoms will come back to the original random orientation. This
requires work to be done by the atoms. If there is no heat transfer from surroundings, the
internal energy of the salt will decrease as it does work. Consequently the salt will be cooled.
12

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

This process is used to achieve temperature near absolute zero. Paramagnetic salts like
gadolinium sulphate are used. Magnetization involves alignment of electronic spin. Protons
and neutron also have spins called nuclear spins, which can be aligned by magnetic field.
This gives lower temperatures for a brief instant of time. This is however not macroscopic
temperature but temperature associated with nuclear spin.

Questions:
371.

What is refrigeration? How does it differ from cooling? (Answer)

372.

Prove that the latent heat of vaporization (hfg) is equal to

RT2 dT
P
dP

hfg =
assuming ideal gas equation of state for vapour. (Hint: Start from the fundamental derivation
of Clausius- Clapeyron equation) (Solution)
3. The boiling point of a substance at 1 atm is 400K. Estimate the approximate value of the
vapour pressure of the substance at 315 K. Assume:
h fg = 88 kJ/kg-mol K
TB

(Solution)

4. The vapour pressure of solid ammonia is given by:

ln P = 23.03 - 3754 T

while that of liquid ammonia by:

ln P = 19.49 - 3063 T

where P is in mm of mercury. What are the latent heats of sublimation (lsub) vaporization (lvap) ?
(Solution)
5. Prove that Joule-Thompson coefficient, JT, is equal to
=

v T T

JT

CP

from basic laws of thermodynamics. Here v is the specific volume and CP is the specific heat at
constant pressure.
Also show that these will be no change in temperature when ideal gas is made to undergo a
throttling process. (Solution)

13

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

6. Clarify whether the following statements are True or False :

373.

Refrigeration is a spontaneous process. (Answer)

374.

Refrigeration and cooling are the same. (Answer)

375.

It is possible to produce cooling by addition of sodium chloride in water.

(Answer)
376.
Higher the normal boiling point higher is the molar enthalpy of vaporization.
(Answer)
377.
In a phase change system a substance of higher latent heat of phase change
should be selected for compact systems. (Answer)
378.
Sudden expansion of liquids and gases is isenthalpic if a turbine is used and
isentropic if its done with a throttling device. (Answer)
379.
The Joule Thompson coefficient (JT) is the measure of deviation of real gas
from ideal behaviour. (Answer)
380.
Isenthalpic expansion of most gases lead to cooling as maximum inversion
temperature is much above room temperature. (Answer)
381.
Throttling at low pressure produces higher reduction in temperature compared
to its throttling at high temperatures. (Answer)
382.
See beck effect illustrates that if an EMF is connected in between two
dissimilar conductors then one of the junction becomes hot while the other becomes
cold. (Answer)
383.
Temperatures close to absolute zero can be obtained by adiabatic
demagnetization. (Answer)

14

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

Lesson
9
Air cycle refrigeration
systems
1

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

The specific objectives of the lesson:

This lesson discusses various gas cycle refrigeration systems based on air, namely:
384.Reverse Carnot cycle & its limitations (Section 9.4)
385.Reverse Brayton cycle Ideal & Actual (Section 9.5)
386.Aircraft refrigeration cycles, namely Simple system, Bootstrap system,
Regenerative system, etc. (Section 9.6)
At the end of the lesson the student should be able to:
387.Describe various air cycle refrigeration systems (Section 9.1-9.6)
388.State the assumptions made in the analyses of air cycle systems (Section 9.2)
389.Show the cycles on T-s diagrams (Section 9.4-9.6)
390.Perform various cycle calculations (Section 9.3-9.6)
391.State the significance of Dry Air Rated Temperature (Section 9.6)

9.1. Introduction
Air cycle refrigeration systems belong to the general class of gas cycle refrigeration
systems, in which a gas is used as the working fluid. The gas does not undergo any
phase change during the cycle, consequently, all the internal heat transfer processes
are sensible heat transfer processes. Gas cycle refrigeration systems find applications
in air craft cabin cooling and also in the liquefaction of various gases. In the present
chapter gas cycle refrigeration systems based on air are discussed.

9.2. Air Standard Cycle analysis

Air cycle refrigeration system analysis is considerably simplified if one makes the
following assumptions:
i.
ii.

The working fluid is a fixed mass of air that behaves as an ideal gas
The cycle is assumed to be a closed loop cycle with all inlet and exhaust
processes of open loop cycles being replaced by heat transfer processes to
or from the environment iii. All the processes within the cycle are
reversible, i.e., the cycle is internally
reversible iv. The specific heat of air remains constant
throughout the cycle
An analysis with the above assumptions is called as cold Air Standard Cycle (ASC)
analysis. This analysis yields reasonably accurate results for most of the cycles and
processes encountered in air cycle refrigeration systems. However, the analysis fails
when one considers a cycle consisting of a throttling process, as the temperature drop
during throttling is zero for an ideal gas, whereas the actual cycles depend exclusively
on the real gas behavior to produce refrigeration during throttling.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

9.3. Basic concepts

The temperature of an ideal gas can be reduced either by making the gas to do work in
an isentropic process or by sensible heat exchange with a cooler environment. When
the gas does adiabatic work in a closed system by say, expanding against a piston, its
internal energy drops. Since the internal energy of the ideal gas depends only on its
temperature, the temperature of the gas also drops during the process, i.e.,
W = m(u1-u2) = mcv(T1 -T2)

(9.1)

where m is the mass of the gas, u 1 and u2 are the initial and final internal energies of
the gas, T1 and T2 are the initial and final temperatures and c v is the specific heat at
constant volume. If the expansion is reversible and adiabatic, by using the ideal gas
equation Pv=RTand the equation for isentropic process P1v1y=P2v2y the final
temperature (T2) is related to the initial temperature (T1) and initial and final pressures
(P1 and P2) by the equation:
yT
(9.2)
P22=T1 2
y-1

where y is the coefficient of isentropic expansion given by:

y

(9.3)
Vvy

Isentropic expansion of the gas can also be carried out in a steady flow in a turbine
which gives a net work output. Neglecting potential and kinetic energy changes, the
work output of the turbine is given by:
W = m(h1-h2) = mcp(T1-T2)

(9.4)

The final temperature is related to the initial temperature and initial and final
pressures by Eq. (9.2).

9.4. Reversed Carnot cycle employing a gas

Reversed Carnot cycle is an ideal refrigeration cycle for constant temperature
external heat source and heat sinks. Figure 9.1(a) shows the schematic of a reversed
Carnot refrigeration system using a gas as the working fluid along with the cycle
diagram on T-s and P-v coordinates. As shown, the cycle consists of the following
four processes:
Process 1-2: Reversible, adiabatic compression in a compressor
Process 2-3: Reversible, isothermal heat rejection in a compressor
Process 3-4: Reversible, adiabatic expansion in a turbine

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

Process 4-1: Reversible, isothermal heat absorption in a turbine

Qh

w,
w

net

^=F
4v

.1

w,
Fig. 9.1(a). Schematic of a reverse Carnot
refrigeration system

q2-3 =

Fig. 9.1(b). Reverse Carnot refrigeration system

in P-v and T-s coordinates The heat transferred during

isothermal processes 2-3 and 4-1 are given by:

2T.ds=T
(9.5a)
(
(9.5b)
s
(9.6)
3

(9.7)
-

s
2

(
s
1

s
4

)
q4-1

s and s
hence s - s
s -s
Applying first law of thermodynamics to the closed cycle,
q =(q4-1 +q2-3)=w =(w2-3 -w4-1) = -wnet

4
Version
1 ME, IIT
Kharagpur

the work of isentropic expansion, w3-4 exactly matches the work of isentropic
compression w1-2.
the COP of the Carnot system is given by:
COPCarnot =

wnet

( Tl

(9.8)

Thus the COP of the Carnot system depends only on the refrigeration (T l) and heat
rejection (Th) temperatures only.
Limitations of Carnot cycle:
Carnot cycle is an idealization and it suffers from several practical limitations. One of
the main difficulties with Carnot cycle employing a gas is the difficulty of achieving
isothermal heat transfer during processes 2-3 and 4-1. For a gas to have heat transfer
isothermally, it is essential to carry out work transfer from or to the system when heat
is transferred to the system (process 4-1) or from the system (process 2-3). This is
difficult to achieve in practice. In addition, the volumetric refrigeration capacity of the
Carnot system is very small leading to large compressor displacement, which gives
rise to large frictional effects. All actual processes are irreversible, hence completely
reversible cycles are idealizations only.

9.5. Ideal reverse Brayton cycle

^

AAAA/WAAAA
vWWWWV

03-.

HTHX
A

LTHX

w,

Fig. 9.2(a). Schematic of a closed reverse Brayton cycle

This is an important cycle frequently employed in gas cycle refrigeration systems.
This may be thought of as a modification of reversed Carnot cycle, as the two
isothermal processes of Carnot cycle are replaced by two isobaric heat transfer
processes. This cycle is also called as Joule or Bell-Coleman cycle. Figure 9.2(a) and
(b) shows the schematic of a closed, reverse Brayton cycle and also the cycle on T-s

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

diagram. As shown in the figure, the ideal cycle consists of the following four
processes:
Process 1-2: Reversible, adiabatic compression in a compressor
Process 2-3: Reversible, isobaric heat rejection in a heat exchanger
Process 3-4: Reversible, adiabatic expansion in a turbine Process 4-1:
Reversible, isobaric heat absorption in a heat exchanger
P=con5t.

Fig. 9.2(b). Reverse Brayton cycle in T-s plane

Process 1-2: Gas at low pressure is compressed isentropically from state 1 to state 2.
Applying steady flow energy equation and neglecting changes in kinetic and potential
energy, we can write:
1-2
(T
2 -T1)
m(h
mc
-h
2

)
s2= s1

(9.9)
y-1

y-1

and T2 = T1 2

= T1 rp v

P1 ) where rp = (P2/P1) = pressure

ratio
Process 2-3: Hot and high pressure gas flows through a heat exchanger and rejects heat
sensibly and isobarically to a heat sink. The enthalpy and temperature of the gas drop
during the process due to heat exchange, no work transfer takes place and the entropy
of the gas decreases. Again applying steady flow energy equation and second T ds
equation:
Q2-3=m(h2-h3) = mcp(T2-T3)
T2
s2- s3=cpln T3
3
P2=P

(9.10)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

Process 3-4: High pressure gas from the heat exchanger flows through a turbine,
undergoes isentropic expansion and delivers net work output. The temperature of the
gas drops during the process from T3 to T4. From steady flow energy equation:
W3-4=m(h3-h4) =

mc

(T3 -T4)

s3 = s4
y-1
\P4J y-1

(9.11)
and T3 = T4

T4rp J

where rp = (P3/P4) = pressure ratio

Process 4-1: Cold and low pressure gas from turbine flows through the low temperature
heat exchanger and extracts heat sensibly and isobarically from a heat source, providing
a useful refrigeration effect. The enthalpy and temperature of the gas rise during the
process due to heat exchange, no work transfer takes place and the entropy of the gas
increases. Again applying steady flow energy equation and second T ds equation:
Q4-1
mc -T4)
(T1
T4
s4- s1=cpln

m(h1-h4)
(9.12)
P4=P1 From

the above equations, it can be easily shown that:

v4y
T

T2^ fT3

(9.13)

1T V 1 J
4

Applying 1st law of thermodynamics to the entire cycle:

(9.14)

|5q =(q4-1 -q2-3)=f8w =(w3-4 -w1-2) = -wnet The

COP of the reverse Brayton cycle is given by:
COP =

q4-1

(Tl -T4) (T2 -T1)-(T3 -T4)

net w

(9.15)

using the relation between temperatures and pressures, the COP can also be written as:
y-1
T3 2ly-1
(T
-T
-T
-T1)-(T
44)-1
3 -T4)
(r
(T
-T
(9.16)
-1)
p1V-1)
4)(rpV
T4
COP =
From the above expression for COP, the following observations can be made:

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

a) For fixed heat rejection temperature (T3) and fixed refrigeration temperature
(T1), the COP of reverse Brayton cycle is always lower than the COP of
reverse
Carnot
cycle
(Fig.
9.3),
that
is
T4
T1
T3 -T14
< COPCarnot
1-2-3-4: Reversed Brayton cycle 12-3-4": Reversed Carnot cycle

A
-&-

Fig. 9.3. Comparison of reverse Carnot and reverse Brayton cycle in T-s plane
392.
COP of Brayton cycle approaches COP of Carnot cycle as T 1
approaches T4 (thin cycle), however, the specific refrigeration effect [c p(T1T4)] also reduces simultaneously.
393.
COP of reverse Brayton cycle decreases as the pressure ratio rp
increases
Actual reverse Brayton cycle:
The actual reverse Brayton cycle differs from the ideal cycle due to:
i.
Non-isentropic compression and expansion
processes ii.
Pressure drops in cold and hot heat
exchangers

8
Version 1 ME, IIT
Kharagpur

1-2'-3'-4' = Actual
1-2-3-4 = Ideal

Fig.
9.4.
Comp
arison
of
ideal
and
actual
Brayto
n
cycles
T-s
plane
Figure
9.4
shows the ideal
and
actual
cycles on T-s
diagram. Due
to
these
irreversibilities,
the compressor
work
input
increases and
turbine work
output reduces.
The
actual
work transfer
rates
of

compressor
and turbine are
then given by:
1-2,isen
=
W1
1W1
2,
act

where c,isen and

t,isen are the
isentropic
efficiencies of
compressor and
turbine,
respectively. In
the absence of
pressure drops,
these are defined
as:

=
t

,
i(

h
2

h
1
)
=
(
T
2

T
1
)
c
,
i
s
e
n

(
9.
2
0
)
(
9.
2
1
)

Th
e
ac
tu
al
ne
t
w
or
k
in
pu
t,
wn
et,ac

is
gi
ve
n
by
:
t

Wn
et,a
ct

=
W1
2,ac
t

-W
34,ac
t

22

thus the net

work
input
increases due
to increase in
compressor
work input and
reduction
in
turbine work
output.
The
refrigeration
effect
also
reduces due to
the
irreversibilities
. As a result,
the COP of
actual reverse
Brayton cycles
will
be
considerably
lower than the
ideal
cycles.
Design
of
efficient
compressors
and
turbines
plays a major
role
in
improving the
COP of the
system.
In
practice,
reverse
Brayton cycles
can be open or
closed. In open
systems, cold
air at the exit
of the turbine
flows into a
room or cabin
(cold space),
and air to the

9
Version 1 ME, IIT
Kharagpur

compressor is taken from the cold space. In such a case, the low side pressure will be
atmospheric. In closed systems, the same gas (air) flows through the cycle in a closed
manner. In such cases it is possible to have low side pressures greater than
atmospheric. These systems are known as dense air systems. Dense air systems are
advantageous as it is possible to reduce the volume of air handled by the compressor
and turbine at high pressures. Efficiency will also be high due to smaller pressure
ratios. It is also possible to use gases other than air (e.g. helium) in closed systems.

9.6. Aircraft cooling systems

In an aircraft, cooling systems are required to keep the cabin temperatures at a
comfortable level. Even though the outside temperatures are very low at high
altitudes, still cooling of cabin is required due to:
i.
Large internal heat generation due to occupants, equipment etc.
ii.
Heat generation due to skin friction caused by the fast moving aircraft
iii. At high altitudes, the outside pressure will be sub-atmospheric. When air at this
low pressure is compressed and supplied to the cabin at pressures close to
atmospheric, the temperature increases significantly. For example, when
outside air at a pressure of 0.2 bar and temperature of 223 K (at 10000 m
altitude) is compressed to 1 bar, its temperature increases to about 353 K.
If the cabin is maintained at 0.8 bar, the temperature will be about 332 K.
This effect is called as ram effect. This effect adds heat to the cabin, which
needs to be taken out by the cooling system.
iv. Solar radiation
For low speed aircraft flying at low altitudes, cooling system may not be required,
however, for high speed aircraft flying at high altitudes, a cooling system is a
must.
Even though the COP of air cycle refrigeration is very low compared to vapour
compression refrigeration systems, it is still found to be most suitable for aircraft
refrigeration systems as: i.
Air is cheap, safe, non-toxic and non-flammable.
Leakage of air is not a
problem ii.
Cold air can directly be used for cooling thus eliminating
the low
temperature heat exchanger (open systems) leading to lower weight iii.
The aircraft engine already consists of a high speed turbo-compressor,
hence separate compressor for cooling system is not required. This reduces
the weight per kW cooling considerably. Typically, less than 50% of an
equivalent vapour compression system iv. Design of the complete
system is much simpler due to low pressures.
Maintenance required is also less.

10

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

9.6.1. Simple aircraft refrigeration cycle:

Fig. 9.5. Schematic of a simple aircraft refrigeration cycle

Figure 9.5 shows the schematic of a simple aircraft refrigeration system and the
operating cycle on T-s diagram. This is an open system. As shown in the T-s diagram,
the outside low pressure and low temperature air (state 1) is compressed due to ram
effect to ram pressure (state 2). During this process its temperature increases from 1 to
2. This air is compressed in the main compressor to state 3, and is cooled to state 4 in
the air cooler. Its pressure is reduced to cabin pressure in the turbine (state 5), as a
result its temperature drops from 4 to 5. The cold air at state 5 is supplied to the cabin.
It picks up heat as it flows through the cabin providing useful cooling effect. The
power output of the turbine is used to drive the fan, which maintains the required air
flow over the air cooler. This simple system is good for ground cooling (when the
aircraft is not moving) as fan can continue to maintain airflow over the air cooler.
By applying steady flow energy equation to the ramming process, the temperature rise
at the end of the ram effect can be shown to be:
T2' = 1 + !----M
T1

(9.23)

where M is the Mach number, which is the ratio of velocity of the aircraft (C) to the
sonic velocity a (a = A/yRT1 ), i.e.,
C
C
M==
a -^/yRT1

(9.24)

Due to irreversibilities, the actual pressure at the end of ramming will be less than the
pressure resulting from isentropic compression. The ratio of actual pressure rise to the
isentropic pressure rise is called as ram efficiency, r|Ram, i.e.,

11

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

_ (P2 - P1)
T1Ram

(P2'-P1)

(9.25)
.

The
refriger
ation
capacit
y of
the
simple
aircraft
cycle
discuss
ed, Q
is
given
by:
..

Q=mcp (Ti - T5 )
(9.26)
.

where
m is
the
mass
flow
rate of
air
throug
h the
turbine
.
9.6.2.
Bootst
rap
system
:
Figur
e 9.6
show
s the
sche
matic
of a
boots
trap
syste
m,
whic
h is a
modif
icatio

n
of
the
simple
system.
As
shown in the
figure,
this
system
consists
of
two
heat
exchangers
(air cooler and
aftercooler),
in stead of one
air cooler of
the
simple
system. It also
incorporates a
secondary
compressor,
which
is
driven by the
turbine of the
cooling
system. This
system
is
suitable
for
high
speed
aircraft, where
in the velocity
of the aircraft
provides the
necessary
airflow for the
heat
exchangers, as
a result a
separate fan is
not required.
As shown in
the
cycle
diagram,
ambient
air
state 1 is
pressurized to
state 2 due to
the ram effect.
This air is
further
compressed to
state 3 in the
main
compressor.
The air is then
cooled to state
4 in the air

coole
r. The
heat
reject
ed in
the
air
coole
r is
absor
bed
by
the
ram
air at
state
2.
The
air
from
the
air
coole
r is
furthe
r
comp
resse
d
from
state
4 to
state
5 in
the
secon
dary
comp
ressor
. It is
then
coole
d to
state
6 in
the
after
coole
r,
expan
ded
to
cabin
press

ure in the
cooling
turbine and is
supplied to the
cabin at a low
temperature
T7. Since the
system does
not consist of
a separate fan
for driving the
air through the
heat
exchangers, it
is not suitable
for
ground
cooling.
However, in
general
ground
cooling
is
normally done
by an external
air
conditioning
system as it is
not efficient to
run
the
aircraft engine
just to provide
cooling when
it is grounded.
Other
modifications
over
the
simple system
are:
regenerative
system
and
reduced
ambient
system. In a
regenerative
system, a part
of the cold air
from
the
cooling
turbine is used
for precooling
the
air
entering the
turbine. As a
result much

lower
temp
eratur
es are
obtai
ned
at the
exit
of the
cooli
ng
turbin
e,
howe
ver,
this is
at the
expen
se of
additi
onal
weig
ht
and
desig
n
comp
lexity
. The
cooli
ng
turbin
e
drive
s
a
fan
simil
ar to
the
simpl
e
syste
m.
The
regen
erativ
e
syste
m is
good
for
both
groun
d

cooling
as
well as high
speed
aircrafts. The
reduced
ambient
system
is
well-suited for
supersonic
aircrafts and
rockets.
l l

AC2

AC1

R M
a
m

Fig. 9.6. Schematic of a bootstrap system

Dry Air Rated Temperature (DART):
The concept of Dry Air Rated Temperature is used to compare different aircraft
refrigeration cycles. Dry Air Rated Temperature is defined as the temperature of the
air at the exit of the cooling turbine in the absence of moisture condensation. For
condensation not to occur during expansion in turbine, the dew point temperature and
hence moisture content of the air should be very low, i.e., the air should be very dry.
The aircraft refrigeration systems are rated based on the mass flow rate of air at the
design DART. The cooling capacity is then given by:
..

Q=mcp (Ti - TDART)

(9.27)

where m is the mass flow rate of air, T DART and Ti are the dry air rated temperature and
cabin temperature, respectively.
A comparison between different aircraft refrigeration systems based on DART at
different Mach numbers shows that:
i.

DART increases monotonically with Mach number for all the systems
except the reduced ambient system ii.
The simple system is adequate at
low Mach numbers iii. At high Mach numbers either bootstrap system or
regenerative system
should be used iv. Reduced ambient temperature system is best suited
for very high Mach
number, supersonic aircrafts

13

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

Questions:
394. A refrigerator working on Bell-Coleman cycle (Reverse brayton cycle)
operates between 1 bar and 10 bar. Air is drawn from cold chamber at -10C. Air
coming out of compressor is cooled to 50C before entering the expansion cylinder.
Polytropic law P.V1.3 = constant is followed during expansion and compression. Find
theoretical C.O.P of the origin. Take =1.4 and Cp = 1.00 kJ/kg 0C for air. (Solution)
395. An air refrigerator working on the principle of Bell-Coleman cycle. The air
into the compressor is at 1 atm at -10C. It is compressed to 10 atm and cooled to
40C at the same pressure. It is then expanded to 1 atm and discharged to take cooling
load. The air circulation is 1 kg/s.
The isentropic efficiency of the compressor = 80%
The isentropic efficiency of the expander = 90%
Find the following:
i)
Refrigeration capacity of the system
ii)
C.O.P of the system
Take = 1.4, Cp = 1.00 kJ/kg C (Solution)
from a space which is
Find the work required 396. A Carnot refrigerator extracts
150 kJ of heat per minute maintained
at -20C and is discharged to atmosphere at 45C. to run the
unit. (Solution)
397.

A cold storage plant is required to store 50 tons of fish.

The temperature at which fish was supplied = 35C

Storage temperature of fish = -10C
Cp of fish above freezing point = 2.94kJ/kgC
Cp of fish below freezing point = 1.26 kJ/kgC
Freezing point of fish = -5C
Latent heat of fish = 250 kJ/kg
If the cooling is achieved within half of a day, find:
398.
Capacity of the refrigerating plant
399.
Carnot COP
Carnot COP
c) If actual COP =
find the power required to run the plant.
2.5
(Solution)
5. A boot strap cooling system of 10 tons is used in an aeroplane. The temperature
and pressure conditions of atmosphere are 20C and 0.9 atm. The pressure of air is
increased from 0.9 atm to 1.1 atm due to ramming. The pressures of air leaving the
main and auxiliary compressor are 3 atm and 4 atm respectively. Isentropic efficiency
of compressors and turbine are 0.85 and 0.8 respectively. 50% of the total heat of air
leaving the main compressor is removed in the first heat exchanger and 30% of their

14

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

total heat of air leaving the auxiliary compressor is removed in the second heat
exchanger using removed air. Find:
400.
401.

Power required to take cabin load

COP of the system

The cabin pressure is 1.02 atm and temperature of air leaving the cabin should be
greater than 25C. Assume ramming action to be isentropic. (Solution)
6. A simple air cooled system is used for an aeroplane to take a load of 10 tons.
Atmospheric temperature and pressure is 25C and 0.9 atm respectively. Due to
ramming the pressure of air is increased from 0.9 atm, to 1 atm. The pressure of air
leaving the main compressor is 3.5 atm and its 50% heat is removed in the air-cooled
heat exchanger and then it is passed through a evaporator for future cooling. The
temperature of air is reduced by 10C in the evaporator. Lastly the air is passed
through cooling turbine and is supplied to the cooling cabin where the pressure is 1.03
atm. Assuming isentropic efficiency of the compressor and turbine are 75% and 70%,
find
402.

Power required to take the load in the cooling cabin

403.

COP of the system.

The temperature of air leaving the cabin should not exceed 25C. (Solution)
7. True and False
404.
COP of a Carnot system depends only on the refrigeration and heat
rejection temperatures only. (Answer)
405.
As heat transfer from a gas can be done isothermally, Carnot cycle is
easy to implement practically. (Answer)
406.
For a fixed heat rejection and refrigeration temperature, the COP of a
brayton cycle is lower than COP of reverse Carnot cycle. (Answer)
407.
Efficiency of dense air systems are low as operating pressures are
higher (Answer)
408.
DART is the temperature of the air at the exit of the cooling turbine.
(Answer)
409.

A Simple system is adequate to handle high Mach numbers. (Answer)

15

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

Lesson
10
Vapour Compression
Refrigeration Systems
1

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

The specific objectives of the lesson:

This lesson discusses the most commonly used refrigeration system, i.e. Vapour
compression refrigeration system. The following things are emphasized in detail:
410.
The Carnot refrigeration cycle & its practical limitations (Section 10.3)
411.The Standard Vapour compression Refrigeration System (Section 10.4)
412.
Analysis of Standard Vapour compression Refrigeration System (Section
10.5)
At the end of the lesson the student should be able to:
413.Analyze and perform cyclic calculations for Carnot refrigeration cycle (Section
10.3)
414.State the difficulties with Carnot refrigeration cycle (Section 10.3)
415.Analyze and perform cyclic calculations for standard vapour compression
refrigeration systems (Section 10.4)
416.Perform various cycle calculations for different types of refrigerants (Section 10.4)

10.1. Comparison between gas cycles and vapor cycles

Thermodynamic cycles can be categorized into gas cycles and vapour cycles. As
mentioned in the previous chapter, in a typical gas cycle, the working fluid (a gas) does
not undergo phase change, consequently the operating cycle will be away from the
vapour dome. In gas cycles, heat rejection and refrigeration take place as the gas
undergoes sensible cooling and heating. In a vapour cycle the working fluid undergoes
phase change and refrigeration effect is due to the vaporization of refrigerant liquid. If the
refrigerant is a pure substance then its temperature remains constant during the phase
change processes. However, if a zeotropic mixture is used as a refrigerant, then there will
be a temperature glide during vaporization and condensation. Since the refrigeration
effect is produced during phase change, large amount of heat (latent heat) can be
transferred per kilogram of refrigerant at a near constant temperature. Hence, the required
mass flow rates for a given refrigeration capacity will be much smaller compared to a gas
cycle. Vapour cycles can be subdivided into vapour compression systems, vapour
absorption systems, vapour jet systems etc. Among these the vapour compression
refrigeration systems are predominant.

10.2. Vapour Compression Refrigeration Systems

As mentioned, vapour compression refrigeration systems are the most commonly used
among all refrigeration systems. As the name implies, these systems belong to the general
class of vapour cycles, wherein the working fluid (refrigerant) undergoes phase change at
least during one process. In a vapour compression refrigeration system, refrigeration is
obtained as the refrigerant evaporates at low temperatures. The input to the system is in
the form of mechanical energy required to run the compressor. Hence these systems are
also called as mechanical refrigeration systems. Vapour compression refrigeration
2

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

systems are available to suit almost all applications with the refrigeration capacities
ranging from few Watts to few megawatts. A wide variety of refrigerants can be used in
these systems to suit different applications, capacities etc. The actual vapour compression
cycle is based on Evans-Perkins cycle, which is also called as reverse Rankine cycle.
Before the actual cycle is discussed and analysed, it is essential to find the upper limit of
performance of vapour compression cycles. This limit is set by a completely reversible
cycle.

10.3. The Carnot refrigeration cycle

Carnot refrigeration cycle is a completely reversible cycle, hence is used as a model of
perfection for a refrigeration cycle operating between a constant temperature heat source
and sink. It is used as reference against which the real cycles are compared. Figures 10.1
(a) and (b) show the schematic of a Carnot vapour compression refrigeration system and
the operating cycle on T-s diagram.
As shown in Fig.10.1(a), the basic Carnot refrigeration system for pure vapour consists of
four components: compressor, condenser, turbine and evaporator. Refrigeration effect (q4-1
= qe) is obtained at the evaporator as the refrigerant undergoes the process of vaporization
(process 4-1) and extracts the latent heat from the low temperature heat source. The low
temperature, low pressure vapour is then compressed isentropically in the compressor to
the heat sink temperature Tc. The refrigerant pressure increases from P e to Pc during the
compression process (process 1-2) and the exit vapour is saturated. Next the high
pressure, high temperature saturated refrigerant undergoes the process of condensation in
the condenser (process 2-3) as it rejects the heat of condensation (q 2-3 = qc) to an external
heat sink at Tc. The high pressure saturated liquid then flows through the turbine and
undergoes isentropic expansion (process 3-4). During this process, the pressure and
temperature fall from Pc,Tc to Pe, Te. Since a saturated liquid is expanded in the turbine,
some amount of liquid flashes into vapour and the exit condition lies in the two-phase
region. This low temperature and low pressure liquid-vapour mixture then enters the
evaporator completing the cycle. Thus as shown in Fig.10.1(b), the cycle involves two
isothermal heat transfer processes (processes 4-1 and 2-3) and two isentropic work
transfer processes (processes 1-2 and 3-4). Heat is extracted isothermally at evaporator
temperature Te during process 4-1, heat is rejected isothermally at condenser temperature
Tc during process 2-3. Work is supplied to the compressor during the isentropic
compression (1-2) of refrigerant vapour from evaporator pressure Pe to condenser pressure
Pc, and work is produced by the system as refrigerant liquid expands isentropically in the
turbine from condenser pressure Pc to evaporator pressure Pe. All the processes are both
internally as well as externally reversible, i.e., net entropy generation for the system and
environment is zero.
Applying first and second laws of thermodynamics to the Carnot refrigeration cycle,
q = w

q =q4-1 -q2-3 = qe -qc

w =w3-4-w1-2 =wT-wC =-wnet

(10.1)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

=>(qc _qe)=wnet
wnet

3
Fig.10.1(a): Schematic of a Carnot refrigeration system

Pc
Pe

qc

T
^V

wC

y
,

Tc Te

<^w
1

s
gram 1
Fig. 10.1(b): Carnot refrigeration
Version
ME, IIT Kharagpur cycle on T-s diagram

now for the reversible, isothermal heat transfer processes 2-3 and 4-1, we can write:
3

qc =-q2-3 = -T.ds = Tc(s2-s 3 )

(10.3)
qe=q4-1=T.ds = T

(10.2)

(s1 -s4 )
4

where Te and Tc are the evaporator and condenser temperatures, respectively, and,
s1 =s2 and s3 =s4

(10.4)

the Coefficient of Performance (COP) is given by:

=
(10.5)
Tqee(s1 -s4 )

refrigeration
effect COP
=
net
Tc (s2 -s3 )-Te (s1 -s4 ) Tc -T
T
we

Carnot

net work input

thus the COP of Carnot refrigeration cycle is a function of evaporator and condenser
temperatures only and is independent of the nature of the working substance. This is the
reason why exactly the same expression was obtained for air cycle refrigeration systems
operating on Carnot cycle (Lesson 9). The Carnot COP sets an upper limit for
refrigeration systems operating between two constant temperature thermal reservoirs
(heat source and sink). From Carnots theorems, for the same heat source and sink
temperatures, no irreversible cycle can have COP higher than that of Carnot COP.
T
b
a
s
Fig.10.2. Carnot refrigeration cycle represented in T-s plane

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

It can be seen from the above expression that the COP of a Carnot refrigeration system
increases as the evaporator temperature increases and condenser temperature decreases.
This can be explained very easily with the help of the T-s diagram (Fig.10.2). As shown
in the figure, COP is the ratio of area a-1-4-b to the area 1-2-3-4. For a fixed condenser
temperature Tc, as the evaporator temperature Te increases, area a-1-4-b (qe) increases and
area 1-2-3-4 (wnet) decreases as a result, COP increases rapidly. Similarly for a fixed
evaporator temperature Te, as the condensing temperature Tc increases, the net work input
(area 1-2-3-4) increases, even though cooling output remains constant, as a result the
COP falls. Figure 10.3 shows the variation of Carnot COP with evaporator temperature
for different condenser temperatures. It can be seen that the COP increases sharply with
evaporator temperatures, particularly at high condensing temperatures. COP reduces as
the condenser temperature increases, but the effect becomes marginal at low evaporator
temperatures. It will be shown later that actual vapour compression refrigeration systems
also behave in a manner similar to that of Carnot refrigeration systems as far as the
performance trends are concerned.

Fig.10.3. Effects of evaporator and condenser temperatures on Carnot COP

Practical difficulties with Carnot refrigeration system:
It is difficult to build and operate a Carnot refrigeration system due to the following
practical difficulties:
i. During process 1-2, a mixture consisting of liquid and vapour have to be compressed
isentropically in the compressor. Such a compression is known as wet compression due to
the presence of liquid. In practice, wet compression is very difficult especially with
reciprocating compressors. This problem is particularly severe in case of high speed
reciprocating compressors, which get damaged due to the presence of liquid droplets in
the vapour. Even though some types of compressors can tolerate the presence of liquid in

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

vapour, since reciprocating compressors are most widely is refrigeration, traditionally dry
compression (compression of vapour only) is preferred to wet compression.
ii. The second practical difficulty with Carnot cycle is that using a turbine and extracting
work from the system during the isentropic expansion of liquid refrigerant is not
economically feasible, particularly in case of small capacity systems. This is due to the
fact that the specific work output (per kilogram of refrigerant) from the turbine is given
by:
Pc

(10.6)

w3_4 = Jv.dP

since the specific volume of liquid is much smaller compared to the specific volume of a
vapour/gas, the work output from the turbine in case of the liquid will be small. In
addition, if one considers the inefficiencies of the turbine, then the net output will be
further reduced. As a result using a turbine for extracting the work from the high pressure
liquid is not economically justified in most of the cases1.
One way of achieving dry compression in Carnot refrigeration cycle is to have two
compressors one isentropic and one isothermal as shown in Fig.10.4.
w2-3
\qc
Condenser
Evaporator

"I

4
^

Pc
Pc > Pi >
Pe

Pi

Pe

4
Fig.10.4. Carnot refrigeration system with dry compression
As shown in Fig.10.4, the Carnot refrigeration system with dry compression consists of
one isentropic compression process (1-2) from evaporator pressure P e to an intermediate
pressure Pi and temperature Tc, followed by an isothermal compression process (2-3)
from the intermediate pressure Pi to the condenser pressure Pc. Though with this
modification the problem of wet compression can be avoided, still this modified system
is not practical due to the difficulty in achieving true isothermal compression using
highspeed compressors. In addition, use of two compressors in place of one is not
economically justified.
1

However, currently efforts are being made to recover this work of expansion in some refrigeration
systems to improve the system efficiency.

7
Version 1 ME, IIT
Kharagpur

From the above discussion, it is clear that from practical considerations, the Carnot
refrigeration system need to be modified. Dry compression with a single compressor is
possible if the isothermal heat rejection process is replaced by isobaric heat rejection
process. Similarly, the isentropic expansion process can be replaced by an isenthalpic
throttling process. A refrigeration system, which incorporates these two changes is known
as Evans-Perkins or reverse Rankine cycle. This is the theoretical cycle on which the
actual vapour compression refrigeration systems are based.
3

qc

Condenser
2

Evaporator qe

*1

wc

Exp.
Device

3/
T

\2'

P/

Pe

4
Tc Te

S
Fig.10.5. Standard Vapour compression refrigeration system

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

10.4. Standard Vapour Compression Refrigeration System (VCRS)

Figure 10.5 shows the schematic of a standard, saturated, single stage (SSS) vapour
compression refrigeration system and the operating cycle on a T s diagram. As shown in
the figure the standard single stage, saturated vapour compression refrigeration system
consists of the following four processes:
Process 1-2: Isentropic compression of saturated vapour in compressor Process
2-3: Isobaric heat rejection in condenser Process 3-4: Isenthalpic expansion of
saturated liquid in expansion device Process 4-1: Isobaric heat extraction in the
evaporator
By comparing with Carnot cycle, it can be seen that the standard vapour compression
refrigeration cycle introduces two irreversibilities: 1) Irreversibility due to non-isothermal
heat rejection (process 2-3) and 2) Irreversibility due to isenthalpic throttling (process 34). As a result, one would expect the theoretical COP of standard cycle to be smaller than
that of a Carnot system for the same heat source and sink temperatures. Due to these
irreversibilities, the cooling effect reduces and work input increases, thus reducing the
system COP. This can be explained easily with the help of the cycle diagrams on T s
charts. Figure 10.6(a) shows comparison between Carnot and standard VCRS in terms of
refrigeration effect.
T

Tc

Te
c d

Fig.10.6(a). Comparison between Carnot and standard VCRS

The heat extraction (evaporation) process is reversible for both the Carnot cycle and
VCRS cycle. Hence the refrigeration effect is given by:
For Carnot refrigeration cycle (1-2-3-4):
qe,Carnot =q4'-1 =Tds = Te(s1-s 4 ') = area e-1-4-c-e

(10.7)

4'

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

For VCRS cycle (1-2-3-4):

q

=q4-1=

e,VCRS

T.ds=T

(s1 -s4 )=area e -1- 4-d -e

(10.8)

thus there is a reduction in refrigeration effect when the isentropic expansion process of
Carnot cycle is replaced by isenthalpic throttling process of VCRS cycle, this reduction is
equal to the area d-4-4-c-d (area A2) and is known as throttling loss. The throttling loss is
equal to the enthalpy difference between state points 3 and 4, i.e,
q

e,Carnot

-q

VCRS

4'
4'
4

) = area d - 4-4'-c- d =(h3 - h4' ) =(h4 - h4' ) =area 2

A

(10.9)

It is easy to show that the loss in refrigeration effect increases as the evaporator
temperature decreases and/or condenser temperature increases. A practical consequence of
this is a requirement of higher refrigerant mass flow rate.
The heat rejection in case of VCRS cycle also increases when compared to Carnot cycle. A
ec d
T
S
Fig.10.6(b). Comparative evaluation of heat rejection rate of VCRS and Carnot cycle
As shown in Fig.10.6(b), the heat rejection in case of Carnot cycle (1-2-3-4) is given by:
3

(10.10)

qcCarnot =-q2''-3 =- T.ds = Tc(s2'' -s 3 ) = area e-2''-3-c2''

In case of VCRS cycle, the heat rejection rate is given by:

= -
q
T.ds
area e-2-3-c-e
c,VCRS =-q
2-3

(10.11)

Hence the increase in heat rejection rate of VCRS compared to Carnot cycle is equal to the
area 2-2-2 (area A1). This region is known as superheat horn, and is due to the

10

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

replacement of isothermal heat rejection process of Carnot cycle by isobaric heat

rejection in case of VCRS.
Since the heat rejection increases and refrigeration effect reduces when the Carnot cycle
is modified to standard VCRS cycle, the net work input to the VCRS increases compared
to Carnot cycle. The net work input in case of Carnot and VCRS cycles are given by:
wnet,Carnot =(qc -qe )Carnot = area 1- 2''-3- 4'-1

(10.12)

wnet,VCRS =(qc -qe )VCRS = area 1- 2-3- 4'-c -d - 4-1

(10.13)

As shown in Fig.10.6(c), the increase in net work input in VCRS cycle is given by:
wnet,VCRS - wnet,Carnot = area 2''-2- 2'+ area c - 4'-4-d -c=area A1 + area A2 (10.14)

T
c d

S'

Fig.10.6(c). Figure illustrating the increase in net work input in VCRS cycle
(10.15) To summarize the refrigeration effect and net work input of VCRS cycle are given
by:
(10.16)

q e,VCRS = q e,Carnot - area A 2 w net,VCRS

=w net,Carnot + area A1 + area A 2

The COP of VCRS cycle is given by:

COPVCRS =
(10.17)
q e,VCRS

q e,Carnot - area A 2
=

net,VCRS
w
net,Carnot

+ area A1 + area A2

11

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

(10.18)
COP VCRS If we define the cycle efficiency, r\R as the ratio of COP of VCRS cycle to
the COP of Carnot cycle, then:
R COPCarnot
[ areaA2 |
V^ qe,Carnot J

( areaA1 +areaA2 |
V^

w net,Carnot

The cycle efficiency (also called as second law efficiency) is a good indication of the
deviation of the standard VCRS cycle from Carnot cycle. Unlike Carnot COP, the cycle
efficiency depends very much on the shape of T s diagram, which in turn depends on the
nature of the working fluid.
If we assume that the potential and kinetic energy changes during isentropic compression
process 1-2 are negligible, then the work input w1-2 is given by:
w1-2,VCRS =(h2 _h1) = (h2 -hf )-(h1 -hf)

(10.19)

Fig.10.7. Figure showing saturated liquid line 3-f coinciding with the constant pressure
line
Now as shown in Fig.10.7, if we further assume that the saturated liquid line 3-f coincides
with the constant pressure line Pc in the subcooled region (which is a reasonably good
assumption), then from the 2nd Tds relation;
(10.20)
Tds =dh - v dP = dh; when P is constant .\
(h2 -hf ) = f Tds = areae-2-3-f-g-e

12

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

and, (h1 -hf) = Tds = area e-1-f-g-e

(10.21)
1 Substituting these expressions in the expression
for net work input, we obtain the compressor work input to be equal to area 1-2-3-f-1.
Now comparing this with the earlier expression for work input (area 1-2-3-4-c-d-4-1),
we conclude that area A2 is equal to area A3.
As mentioned before, the losses due to superheat (area A1) and throttling (area A2 A3)
depend very much on the shape of the vapor dome (saturation liquid and vapour curves)
on T s diagram. The shape of the saturation curves depends on the nature of refrigerant.
Figure 10.8 shows T s diagrams for three different types of refrigerants.

*~

Fig.10.8. T-s diagrams for three different

types of refrigerants
Refrigerants such as ammonia, carbon di-oxide and water
belong to Type 1. These refrigerants have symmetrical
saturation curves (vapour dome), as a result both the
superheat and throttling losses (areas A1 and A3) are
significant. That means deviation of VCRS cycle from Carnot cycle could be significant
when these refrigerants are used as working fluids. Refrigerants such as CFC11, CFC12,
HFC134a belong to Type 2, these refrigerants have small superheat losses (area A1) but
large throttling losses (area A3). High molecular weight refrigerants such as CFC113,
CFC114, CFC115, iso-butane belonging to Type 3, do not have any superheat losses, i.e.,
when the compression inlet condition is saturated (point 1), then the exit condition will be
in the 2-phase region, as a result it is not necessary to superheat the refrigerant.
However, these refrigerants
13

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

experience significant throttling losses. Since the compressor exit condition of Type 3
refrigerants may fall in the two-phase region, there is a danger of wet compression
leading to compressor damage. Hence for these refrigerants, the compressor inlet
condition is chosen such that the exit condition does not fall in the two-phase region. This
implies that the refrigerant at the inlet to the compressor should be superheated, the
extent of which depends on the refrigerant.
Superheat and throttling losses:
It can be observed from the discussions that the superheat loss is fundamentally different
from the throttling loss. The superheat loss increases only the work input to the
compressor, it does not effect the refrigeration effect. In heat pumps superheat is not a
loss, but a part of the useful heating effect. However, the process of throttling is
inherently irreversible, and it increases the work input and also reduces the refrigeration
effect.

10.5. Analysis of standard vapour compression refrigeration

system
A simple analysis of standard vapour compression refrigeration system can be carried out
by assuming a) Steady flow; b) negligible kinetic and potential energy changes across
each component, and c) no heat transfer in connecting pipe lines. The steady flow energy
equation is applied to each of the four components.
.

Evaporator: Heat transfer rate at evaporator or refrigeration capacity, Qe is given by:

..

Qe =mr (h1 - h4 )

(10.22)

where mr is the refrigerant mass flow rate in kg/s, h 1 and h4 are the specific enthalpies
(kJ/kg) at the exit and inlet to the evaporator, respectively. (h 1 - h4 ) is known as specific
refrigeration effect or simply refrigeration effect, which is equal to the heat transferred at
the evaporator per kilogram of refrigerant. The evaporator pressure P e is the saturation
pressure corresponding to evaporator temperature Te, i.e.,
Pe = Psat (Te )

(10.23)

Compressor: Power input to the compressor, Wc is given by:

..

W c =m r (h2 -h1 )

(10.24)

where h2 and h1 are the specific enthalpies (kJ/kg) at the exit and inlet to the compressor,
respectively. (h2 - h1) is known as specific work of compression or simply work of
compression, which is equal to the work input to the compressor per kilogram of
refrigerant.
.

Condenser: Heat transfer rate at condenser, Qc is given by:

14

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

Qc =mr (h2 -h3 )

(10.25)
where h3 and h2 are the specific enthalpies (kJ/kg) at the exit and inlet to the condenser,
respectively.
The condenser pressure Pc is the saturation pressure corresponding to evaporator
temperature Tc, i.e.,
Pc = Psat (Tc )
(10.26)
Expansion device: For the isenthalpic expansion process, the kinetic energy change
across the expansion device could be considerable, however, if we take the control
volume, well downstream of the expansion device, then the kinetic energy gets dissipated
due to viscous effects, and
h3 = h4
(10.27)
The exit condition of the expansion device lies in the two-phase region, hence applying
the definition of quality (or dryness fraction), we can write:
h4 =(1- x4 )hf ,e + x4hg,e =hf + x4hfg

(10.28)

where x4 is the quality of refrigerant at point 4, h f,e, hg,e, hfg are the saturated liquid
enthalpy, saturated vapour enthalpy and latent heat of vaporization at evaporator pressure,
respectively.
eV

cJ
(h .
At any point in the cycle, the mass flow rate of refrigerant m r can be written in terms of
volumetric flow rate and specific volume at that point, i.e.,
mr (h1 - h4 )
The COP of the system is given by:
(10.29)
. mr (h2 - h1)
Q
(h1 - h4 )
.
-h1 )
COP =
mr = V
(10.30)

applying this equation to the inlet condition of the compressor,

. V1
m=
r

(10.31)
v1

where V1 is the volumetric flow rate at compressor inlet and v1 is the specific volume at
.

compressor inlet. At a given compressor speed, V1 is an indication of the size of the

compressor. We can also write, the refrigeration capacity in terms of volumetric flow rate
as:

15

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

V1

Qe =mr (h1 -h4 )=V

h1 -h4
v1

(10.32)
h1w is
h
e calle
r d as
e volu
metr
ic
refri
gera
tion
effec
t
(kJ/
m3
of
refri
gera
nt).
Genera
lly, the
type of
refrige
rant,
require
d
refrige
ration
capacit
y,
evapor
ator
temper
ature
and
conden
ser
temper
ature
are
known
. Then
from
the
evapor
ator
and
conden
ser
temper

ature one can find the

evaporator
and
condenser pressures
and enthalpies at the
exit of evaporator
and
condenser
(saturated
vapour
enthalpy
at
evaporator pressure
and saturated liquid
enthalpy
at
condenser pressure).
Since
the
exit
condition of the
compressor is in the
superheated region,
two
independent
properties
are
required to fix the

Pc
P
Pe
state of refrigerant at
this point. One of
these
independent
properties could be
the
condenser
pressure, which is
already known. Since
the
compression
process is isentropic,
the entropy at the exit
to the compressor is
same as the entropy
at the inlet, s1 which
is
the
saturated
vapour entropy at
evaporator pressure
(known). Thus from
the known pressure
and entropy the exit
state
of
the
compressor could be
fixed, i.e.,
h
2

=
h

(
The
quality
of
refrige
rant at
the
inlet to
the
evapor
ator
(x4)
could
be
obtain
ed
from
the
known
values
of h3,
hf,e and
hg,e.
Once
all the
state
points
are
known
, then
from
the
require
d
refrige
ration
capacit
y and
various
enthalp
ies one
can
obtain
the
require
d
refrige
rant
mass
flow
rate,

volum
etric
flow
rate at
compr
essor
inlet,
COP,
cycle
efficie
ncy
etc.
Use of
Pressu
reenthal
py (Ph)
charts:
h3 = h4
h1
h2 h
Fig.10
.9.
Standa
rd
vapour
compr
ession
refrige
ration
cycle
on a
P-h
chart
1

V
e
rs
io
n
1
M
E
,
II
T
K

aragpur

Since the various performance parameters are expressed in terms of enthalpies, it is very
convenient to use a pressure enthalpy chart for property evaluation and performance
analysis. The use of these charts was first suggested by Richard Mollier. Figure 10.9
shows the standard vapour compression refrigeration cycle on a P-h chart. As discussed
before, in a typical P-h chart, enthalpy is on the x-axis and pressure is on y-axis. The
isotherms are almost vertical in the subcooled region, horizontal in the two-phase region
(for pure refrigerants) and slightly curved in the superheated region at high pressures, and
again become almost vertical at low pressures. A typical P-h chart also shows constant
specific volume lines (isochors) and constant entropy lines (isentropes) in the superheated
region. Using P-h charts one can easily find various performance parameters from known
values of evaporator and condenser pressures.
In addition to the P-h and T-s charts one can also use thermodynamic property tables
from solving problems related to various refrigeration cycles.

Questions:
417. A Carnot refrigerator using R12 as working fluid operates between 40C and
-30C. Determine the work of compression and cooling effect produced by the cycle.
(Solution)
418. An ideal refrigeration cycle operates with R134a as the working fluid. The
temperature of refrigerant in the condenser and evaporator are 40C and -20C
respectively. The mass flow rate of refrigerant is 0.1 kg/s. Determine the cooling capacity
and COP of the plant. (Solution)
419. A R-12 plant has to produce 10 tons of refrigeration. The condenser and
evaporator temperatures are 40C and -10C respectively. Determine
420.
421.
422.
423.
424.
425.

Refrigerant flow rate

Volume flow rate of the compressor
Operating pressure ratio
Power required to drive the compressor
Flash gas percentage after throtting
COP (Solution)

426. A NH3 refrigerator produces 100 tons of ice from water at 0C in a day. The cycle
operates between 25C and -15C . The vapor is dry saturated at the end of compression.
If the COP is 50% of theoretical COP, calculate the power required to drive the
compressor. (Solution)
427. In a refrigerator the power rating impressed on the compressor is 1.2 kW. The
circulating wire in evaporator is 5 kW and the cooling water took away 10 kW from
condenser coil. The operating temperatures range is 18C and 0C and their
corresponding latent heats are 170 kJ/kg and 230 kJ/kg and the difference between the

17

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

liquid energy is 35 kJ/kg. Find the actual COP of the system (2) relative COP, assuming
the vapour is just dry and saturated at the end of the compression. (Solution)
6. A water cooler using R12 refrigerant works between 30C to 9C. Assuming the
volumetric and mechanical efficiency of the compressor to be 80 and 90% respectively,
and the mechanical efficiency of motor to be 90% , and 20% of useful cooling is lost into
water cooler, find:
428.

The power requirement of the motor

429.

Volumetric displacement of the compressor

Given Cp (saturated vapour at 30C) = 0.7 kJ/kg K (Solution)

The properties of F12 at 30C and 2C are:
Temp C
30
5

Pressure (Bar)
7.45
3.626

Liquid
hf (kJ/kg)
64.6
40.7

18

Sf
(kJ/kg K)
0.2399
0.1587

hg
(kJ/kg)
199.6
189.7

Vapour
Sg
(kJ/kg K)
0.6854
0.6942

vs
m3/kg
0.0235
0.0475

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

Lesson
11
Vapour Compression
Refrigeration Systems:
Performance Aspects
And Cycle Modifications
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 1

The objectives of this lecture are to discuss

430.
Performance aspects of SSS cycle and the effects of evaporator and
condensing temperatures on system performance (Section 11.1)
431.
Modifications to the basic SSS cycle by way of subcooling and
superheating and effects of these modifications on system performance (Section
11.2.1)
432.
Performance aspects of single stage VCRS cycle with Liquid-to-Suction
Heat Exchanger and the concept of Grindleys cycle (Section 11.2.2)
433.
Effect of superheat and criteria for optimum superheat (Section 11.3)
434.
Actual vapour compression refrigeration systems (Section 11.4)
435.
Complete vapour compression refrigeration systems (Section 11.5)
At the end of the lecture the student should be able to:
436.
Show and discuss qualitatively the effects of evaporator and condensing
temperatures on specific and volumic refrigeration effects, on specific and
volumic work of compression and on system COP
437.
Discuss and evaluate the performance of single stage VCRS with
subcooling and superheating from given inputs and known refrigerant property
data
438.
Evaluate the performance of the system with a LSHX
439.
Establish the existence of optimum superheat condition using EwingsGosney criteria
440.
Evaluate the COP of actual VCRS from condensing and evaporator
temperatures, efficiency of motor and compressor
441.
Draw an actual VCRS cycle on T-s and P-h diagrams and discuss the
effects of various irreversibilities due to pressure drops, heat transfer and nonideal compression
442.
Describe briefly a complete vapour compression refrigeration system

11.1. Performance of SSS cycle

The performance of a standard VCRS cycle can be obtained by varying
evaporator and condensing temperatures over the required range. Figure 11.1 shows the
effects of evaporator and condensing temperatures on specific and volumic refrigeration
effects of a standard VCRS cycle. As shown in the figure, for a given condenser
temperature as evaporator temperature increases the specific refrigeration effect increases
marginally. It can be seen that for a given evaporator temperature, the refrigeration effect
decreases as condenser temperature increases. These trends can be explained easily with
the help of the P-h diagram. It can also be observed that the volumetric refrigeration
effect increases rapidly with evaporator temperature due to the increase in specific
refrigeration effect and decrease in specific volume of refrigerant vapour at the inlet to
the compressor. Volumetric refrigeration effect increases marginally as condenser
temperature decreases.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 2

wv, kJ/m3

wc, kJ/kg
____________________________________

Fig.1
1
.
2
:
E
ff
e
c
t
o
f
e
v
a
p
o
r
a
t
o
r
a
n
d
c
o
n
d
e
n
s
e
r
t

em
per
atur
es
on
spe
cifi
c
and
vol
umi
c
wor
ks
of
co
mpr
ess
ion
of a
sta
nda
rd
VC
RS
cyc
le
Figure 11.2
shows that
the specific
work
of
compression
decreases
rapidly
as
the
evaporator
temperature
increases
and
condenser
temperature
decreases.
Once again
these effects
can
be
explained
using a T s
or
P
h
diagram. For
a
given

condenser
temperatu
re,
the
volumic
work of
compressi
on
increases
initially,
reaches a
peak, then
starts
decreasin
g. This is
due to the
fact that
as
evaporato
r
temperatu
re
increases
the
specific
work of
compressi
on
decreases
and the
specific
volume at
the inlet
to
the
compress
or
also
decreases.
As
a
result, an
optimum
evaporato
r
temperatu
re exists
at which
the
volumic
work of
compressi
on
reaches a
maximum

. Physically,
the volumic
work
of
compression
is analogous
to
mean
effective
pressure of
the
compressor,
as
multiplying
this with the
volumetric
flow
rate
gives
the
power input
to
the
compressor.
For a given
power input,
a
high
volumic
work
of
compression
implies
smaller
volumetric
flow
rates
and hence a
smaller
compressor.
Figur
e 11.3 shows
the effect of
evaporator
and
condenser
temperatures
on COP of
the
SSS
cycle.
As
expected, for
a
given
condenser
temperature
the
COP
increases
rapidly with

evaporato
r
temperatu
re,
particularl
y at low
condensin
g
temperatu
res. For a
given
evaporato
r
temperatu
re,
the
COP
decreases
as
condenser
temperatu
re
increases.
However,
the effect
of
condenser
temperatu
re
becomes
marginal
at
low
evaporato
r
temperatu
res.

Version
1 ME, IIT
Kharagp
ur 3

The above results show that at very low evaporator temperatures, the COP
becomes very low and also the size of the compressor becomes large (due to small
volumic refrigeration effect). It can also be shown that the compressor discharge
temperatures also increase as the evaporator temperature decreases. Hence, single stage
vapour compression refrigeration systems are not viable for very low evaporator
temperatures. One has to use multistage or cascade systems for these applications. These
systems will be discussed in the next lecture. One can also observe the similarities in
performance trends between SSS cycle and Carnot cycle, which is to be expected as the
VCRS cycle is obtained by modifying the SSS cycle.

Fig.11.3: Effect of evaporator and condenser temperatures on COP of a

standard VCRS cycle

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 4

11.2. Modifications to SSS cycle

11.2.1. Subcooling and superheating:
In actual refrigeration cycles, the temperature of the heat sink will be several
degrees lower than the condensing temperature to facilitate heat transfer. Hence it is
possible to cool the refrigerant liquid in the condenser to a few degrees lower than the
condensing temperature by adding extra area for heat transfer. In such a case, the exit
condition of the condenser will be in the subcooled liquid region. Hence this process is
known as subcooling. Similarly, the temperature of heat source will be a few degrees
higher than the evaporator temperature, hence the vapour at the exit of the evaporator can
be superheated by a few degrees. If the superheating of refrigerant takes place due to heat
transfer with the refrigerated space (low temperature heat source) then it is called as
useful superheating as it increases the refrigeration effect. On the other hand, it is
possible for the refrigerant vapour to become superheated by exchanging heat with the
surroundings as it flows through the connecting pipelines. Such a superheating is called
as useless superheating as it does not increase refrigeration effect.
Subcooling is beneficial as it increases the refrigeration effect by reducing the
throttling loss at no additional specific work input. Also subcooling ensures that only
liquid enters into the throttling device leading to its efficient operation. Figure 11.4 shows
the VCRS cycle without and with subcooling on P-h and T-s coordinates. It can be seen
from the T-s diagram that without subcooling the throttling loss is equal to the hatched
area b-4-4-c, whereas with subcooling the throttling loss is given by the area a-4-4-b.
Thus the refrigeration effect increases by an amount equal to (h4-h4) = (h3-h3). Another
practical advantage of subcooling is that there is less vapour at the inlet to the evaporator
which leads to lower pressure drop in the evaporator.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 5

(a)
2

P
h

T
AT sub 3

(b)
S

a b c
Fig.11.4: Comparison between a VCRS cycle without and with subcooling (a)
on P-h diagram (b) on T-s diagram

Useful superheating increases both the refrigeration effect as well as the work of
compression. Hence the COP (ratio of refrigeration effect and work of compression) may
or may not increase with superheat, depending mainly upon the nature of the working
fluid. Even though useful superheating may or may not increase the COP of the system, a
minimum amount of superheat is desirable as it prevents the entry of liquid droplets into
the compressor. Figure 11.5 shows the VCRS cycle with superheating on P-h and T-s
coordinates. As shown in the figure, with useful superheating, the refrigeration effect,
specific volume at the inlet to the compressor and work of compression increase.
Whether the volumic refrigeration effect (ratio of refrigeration effect by specific volume
at compressor inlet) and COP increase or not depends upon the relative increase in
refrigeration effect and work of compression, which in turn depends upon the nature of
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 6

the refrigerant used. The temperature of refrigerant at the exit of the compressor increases
with superheat as the isentropes in the vapour region gradually diverge.

(a)

2'

h
Increase in work
of compression
Increase in specific
refrigeration effect

T
Fig.11.5: Effect of superheat on specific refrigeration effect and work of
compression (a) on P-h diagram (b) on T-s diagram

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 7

11.2.2. Use of liquid-suction heat exchanger:

Required degree of subcooling and superheating may not be possible, if one were
to rely only on heat transfer between the refrigerant and external heat source and sink.
Also, if the temperature of refrigerant at the exit of the evaporator is not sufficiently
superheated, then it may get superheated by exchanging heat with the surroundings as it
flows through the connecting pipelines (useless superheating), which is detrimental to
system performance. One way of achieving the required amount of subcooling and
superheating is by the use of a liquid-suction heat exchanger (LSHX). A LSHX is a
counterflow heat exchanger in which the warm refrigerant liquid from the condenser
exchanges heat with the cool refrigerant vapour from the evaporator. Figure 11.6 shows
the schematic of a single stage VCRS with a liquid-suction heat exchanger. Figure 11.7
shows the modified cycle on T-s and P-h diagrams. As shown in the T-s diagram, since
the temperature of the refrigerant liquid at the exit of condenser is considerably higher
than the temperature of refrigerant vapour at the exit of the evaporator, it is possible to
subcool the refrigerant liquid and superheat the refrigerant vapour by exchanging heat
between them.
Qc

Condenser

Compressor

\-----1 Wc

Liquid Suction HX

4 Exp.
device/

Evaporator

|__| Qe
Fig.11.6: A single stage VCRS system with Liquid-to-Suction Heat Exchanger (LSHX)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 8

(a)

(b
)

T
2

h
Fig.1
1.7:
Singl
e
stage
VCR
S
cycle
with
LSH
X (a)
on Ts
diagr
am;
(b)
on Ph
diagr
am

I
we

assume
that
there is
no heat
exchan
ge
betwee
n the
surrou
ndings
and the
LSHX
and
negligi
ble
kinetic
and
potenti
al
energy
change
s
across
the
LSHX,
then,
the
heat
transfe
rred
betwee
n the
refrige
rant
liquid
and
vapour
in the
LSHX,
QLSHX
is
given
by:

Versio
n1
ME,
IIT

Khara
gpur
9

QLSHX =mr(h3 -h4) = mr(h1 -h6)

(11.1)
(h3 -h4) = (h1 -h6)
if we take average values of specific heats for the vapour and liquid, then we can write
the above equation as;
cpl(T3-T4) = cpv(T1-T6)

(11.2)

since the specific heat of liquid (cp,l) is larger than that of vapour (cp,v), i.e., cp,l > cp,l, we can
write:
(T3 -T4 ) < (T1 -T6 )

(11.3)

This means that, the degree of subcooling (T 3-T4) will always be less than the
degree of superheating, (T1-T6). If we define the effectiveness of the LSHX, LSHX as the
ratio of actual heat transfer rate in the LSHX to maximum possible heat transfer rate,
then:
=
LSHX

Qact
Qmax

m cp,v (T1 -T6 )

=
.

(T1 -T6 ) r
=
(T3 -T6)

(11.4)

m r cp,v (T3 -T6 )

The maximum possible heat transfer rate is equal to Qmax =mr cpv(T3 -T6),
because the vapour has a lower thermal capacity, hence only it can attain the maximum
possible temperature difference, which is equal to (T3 - T6). If we have a perfect LSHX
with 100 percent effectiveness (LSHX = 1.0), then from the above discussion it is clear
that the temperature of the refrigerant vapour at the exit of LSHX will be equal to the
condensing temperature, Tc, i.e., (T1 =T3 = Tc). This gives rise to the possibility of an
interesting cycle called as Grindley cycle, wherein the isentropic compression process
can be replaced by an isothermal compression leading to improved COP. The Grindley
cycle on T-s diagram is shown in Fig.11.8. Though theoretically the Grindley cycle offers
higher COP, achieving isothermal compression with modern high-speed reciprocating
and centrifugal compressors is difficult in practice. However, this may be possible with
screw compressor where the lubricating oil provides large heat transfer rates.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 10

A
T
P=Pc
1

S Fig.11.8:
Grindley cycle on T-s coordinates (1-2 is isothermal compression)

11.3 Effect of superheat on system COP

As mentioned before, when the refrigerant is superheated usefully (either in the
LSHX or the evaporator itself), the refrigeration effect increases. However, at the same
time the work of compression also increases, primarily due to increase in specific volume
of the refrigerant due to superheat. As a result, the volumic refrigeration effect and COP
may increase or decrease with superheating depending on the relative increase in
refrigeration effect and specific volume. It is observed that for some refrigerants the COP
is maximum when the inlet to the compressor is inside the two-phase region and
decreases as the suction condition moves into the superheated region. For other
refrigerants the COP does not reach a maximum and increases monotonically with
superheat. It was shown by Ewing and Gosney that a maximum COP occurs inside the
two-phase region if the following criterion is satisfied:
COPsat >

Te
T2,sat -Te

(11.5)

where COPsat is the COP of the system with saturated suction condition, Te is the
evaporator temperature and T2,sat is the compressor discharge temperature when the
vapour at suction condition is saturated (see Fig.11.9). For example, at an evaporator
temperature of 15oC (258 K) and a condenser temperature of 30 oC (303 K), the Table
11.1 shows that for refrigerants such as R11, R22, ammonia the maximum COP occurs
inside the two-phase region and superheating reduces the COP and also volumic
refrigeration effect, whereas for refrigerants such as R12, carbon dioxide and R502, no
maxima exists and the COP and volumic refrigeration effect increase with superheat.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 11

Fig.11.9: Ewing-Gosney criteria for optimum suction condition

Refrigerant
Ammonia
CO2
R11
R12
R22
R502

COPsat
4.77
2.72
5.03
4.70
4.66
4.35

T2,sat

(K)
372
341
317
311
326
310

Te T2,sat
-Te
2.26
3.11
4.38
4.87
3.80
4.96

Maximum
COP
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No

Table 11.1. Existence of maximum COP, Te = 258 K, Tc = 303 K (Gosney)

It should be noted that the above discussion holds under the assumption that the
superheat is a useful superheat. Even though superheat appears to be not desirable for
refrigerants such as ammonia, still a minimum amount of superheat is provided even for
these refrigerants to prevent the entry of refrigerant liquid into the compressor. Also it is
observed experimentally that some amount of superheat is good for the volumetric
efficiency of the compressor, hence in practice almost all the systems operate with some
superheat.

11.4 Actual VCRS systems

The cycles considered so far are internally reversible and no change of refrigerant
state takes place in the connecting pipelines. However, in actual VCRS several
irreversibilities exist. These are due to:
443.
444.
445.
446.

Pressure drops in evaporator, condenser and LSHX

Pressure drop across suction and discharge valves of the compressor
Heat transfer in compressor
Pressure drop and heat transfer in connecting pipe lines
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 12

Figures 11.10 shows the actual VCRS cycle on P-h and T-s diagrams indicating
various irreversibilities. From performance point of view, the pressure drop in the
evaporator, in the suction line and across the suction valve has a significant effect on
system performance. This is due to the reason that as suction side pressure drop increases
the specific volume at suction, compression ratio (hence volumetric efficiency) and
discharge temperature increase. All these effects lead to reduction in system capacity,
increase in power input and also affect the life of the compressor due to higher discharge
temperature. Hence this pressure drop should be as small as possible for good
performance. The pressure drop depends on the refrigerant velocity, length of refrigerant
tubing and layout (bends, joints etc.). Pressure drop can be reduced by reducing
refrigerant velocity (e.g. by increasing the inner diameter of the refrigerant tubes),
however, this affects the heat transfer coefficient in evaporator. More importantly a
certain minimum velocity is required to carry the lubricating oil back to the compressor
for proper operation of the compressor.
Heat transfer in the suction line is detrimental as it reduces the density of refrigerant
vapour and increases the discharge temperature of the compressor. Hence, the suction
lines are normally insulated to minimize heat transfer.
In actual systems the compression process involves frictional effects and heat transfer.
As a result, it cannot be reversible, adiabatic (eventhough it can be isentropic). In many
cases cooling of the compressor is provided deliberately to maintain the maximum
compressor temperature within safe limits. This is particularly true in case of refrigerants
such as ammonia. Pressure drops across the valves of the compressor increase the work
of compression and reduce the volumetric efficiency of the compressor. Hence they
should be as small as possible.
Compared to the vapour lines, the system is less sensitive to pressure drop in the
condenser and liquid lines. However, this also should be kept as low as possible. Heat
transfer in the condenser connecting pipes is not detrimental in case of refrigeration
systems. However, heat transfer in the subcooled liquid lines may affect the performance.
In addition to the above, actual systems are also different from the theoretical cycles
due to the presence of foreign matter such as lubricating oil, water, air, particulate matter
inside the system. The presence of lubricating oil cannot be avoided, however, the system
design must ensure that the lubricating oil is carried over properly to the compressor. This
depends on the miscibility of refrigerant-lubricating oil. Presence of other foreign
materials such as air (non-condensing gas), moisture, particulate matter is detrimental to
system performance. Hence systems are designed and operated such that the
concentration of these materials is as low as possible.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 13

P
2
2c
/?2a
^ 2b

22a

2b

T
S
Fig.11.10: Actual VCRS cycle on P-h and T-s diagrams
Process
Pressure drop in evaporator
Superheat of vapour in evaporator
Useless superheat in suction line
Suction line pressure drop
Pressure drop across suction valve
Non-isentropic compression
Pressure drop across discharge valve
Pressure drop in the delivery line
Desuperheating of vapour in delivery pipe
Pressure drop in the condenser
Subcooling of liquid refrigerant
Heat gain in liquid line

State
4-1d
1d-1c
1c-1b
1b-1a
1a-1
1-2
2-2a
2a-2b
2b-2c
2b-3
3-3a
3a-3b

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 14

The COP of actual refrigeration systems is sometimes written in terms of the COP
of Carnot refrigeration system operating between the condensing and evaporator
temperatures (COPCarnot), cycle efficiency (r|cyc), isentropic efficiency of the compressor (r|is)
and efficiency of the electric motor (r|motor), as given by the equation shown below:
COPact

^cyc^is^motorCOPCarnot

(11.6)

An approximate expression for cycle efficiency (r|cyc) in the evaporator

temperature range of -50oC to +40oC and condensing temperature range of +10oC to
+60oC for refrigerants such as ammonia, R 12 and R 22 is suggested by Linge in 1966.
This expression for a refrigeration cycle operating without (ATsub = 0) and with
subcooling (ATsub = Tc-Tr,exit > 0 K) are given in Eqns. (11.7) and (11.8), respectively:
( Tc - Te ^
^cyc = 1------------

without subcooling

(11.7)

( Tc -T V A T ^
^cyc = 11+ sub with subcooling
e

265

)\

(11.8)

250

In the above equations Tc and Te are condensing and evaporator temperatures,

respectively.
The isentropic efficiency of the compressor (r|is) depends on several factors such
as the compression ratio, design of the compressor, nature of the working fluid etc.
However, in practice its value generally lies between 0.5 to 0.8. The motor efficiency
(lmotor) depends on the size and motor load. Generally the motor efficiency is maximum
at full load. At full load its value lies around 0.7 for small motors and about 0.95 for large
motors.

11.5 Complete vapour compression refrigeration systems

In addition to the basic components, an actual vapour compression refrigeration
consists of several accessories for safe and satisfactory functioning of the system. These
include: compressor controls and safety devices such as overload protectors, high and
low pressure cutouts, oil separators etc., temperature and flow controls, filters, driers,
valves, sight glass etc. Modern refrigeration systems have automatic controls, which do
not require continuous manual supervision.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 15

Questions:
1. For the same condensing temperature and refrigeration capacity, a vapour compression
refrigeration system operating at a lower evaporator temperature is more expensive than a
system operating at a higher evaporator temperature, because at low evaporator
temperature:
447. Volumic refrigeration effect is high, hence the size of the compressor is large
448. Volumic refrigeration effect is small, hence the size of the compressor is large
449. Specific refrigeration effect is high, hence size of evaporator is large
450. All the above
Ans.: b)
2. For a given condensing temperature, the volumic work of compression of a standard
VCRS increases initially with evaporator temperature reaches a maximum and then starts
decreasing, this is because as evaporator increases:
451. Both specific volume of refrigerant and work of compression increase
452. Specific volume of refrigerant increases and work of compression decreases
453. Both specific volume and work of compression decrease
454. Specific volume decreases and specific refrigeration effect increases
Ans.: c)
3. Subcooling is beneficial as it:
455. Increases specific refrigeration effect
456. Decreases work of compression
457. Ensures liquid entry into expansion device
458. All of the above
Ans.: a) and c)
4. Superheating:
459. Always increases specific refrigeration effect
460. Always decreases specific work of compression
461. Always increases specific work of compression
462. Always increases compressor discharge temperature
Ans.: c) and d)
5. Degree of superheating obtained using a LSHX is:
463. Always greater than the degree of subcooling
464. Always less than degree of subcooling
465. Always equal to degree of subcooling
466. Depends on the effectiveness of heat exchanger
Ans.: a)
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 16

6. Whether the maximum COP occurs when the suction condition is in two-phase region
or not depends mainly on:
467. Properties of the refrigerant
468. Effectiveness of LSHX
469. Operating temperatures
470. All of the above
Ans.: a)
7. In actual VCRS, the system performance is affected mainly by:
471. Pressure drop and heat transfer in suction line
472. Pressure drop and heat transfer in discharge line
473. Heat transfer in compressor
474. All of the above
Ans.: a)
8. Pressure drop and heat transfer in suction line:
475. Decrease compression ratio & discharge temperature
476. Increase compression ratio & discharge temperature
477. Decreases specific volume of refrigerant at suction
478. Increases specific volume of refrigerant at suction
Ans.: b) and d)
9. A SSS vapour compression refrigeration system based on refrigerant R 134a operates
between an evaporator temperature of 25oC and a condenser temperature of 50oC.
Assuming isentropic compression, find:
479.
480.
481.

COP of the system

Work input to compressor
Area of superheat horn (additional work required due to superheat)

Throttling loss (additional work input due to throttling in place of isentropic expansion)
assuming the isobar at condenser pressure to coincide with saturated liquid line.
Ans.: Given: Refrigerant
Te
Tc

:
=
=

R 134a
-25oC
50oC

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 17

T A1

50oC

-25.0

1.064

50.0

13.18

50.0

10.2

-25.0

1.064

-25oC
482.
COP
= (h1h4)/
(h2h1) =
2.117
4

483.
Work
input
to
comp
ressor
, Wc =
(h2h1) =
52.8
kJ/kg

Using
refrig
erant
R134
a
prope
rty
data,
requir
ed
prope
rties
at
vario
us
state
points
are:
State
Point

Versio
n1
ME,
IIT
Khara
gpur
18
(

-25.0

60.7

50.0

-25.0

c) Superheat horn area, area A1:

Area A1 = Area under 2-2 - Area under 2-2
Area under 2-2: D Tds = D (dh-vdP) = D dh = h2-h2 (D dp = 0)
=> Area under 2-2 = h2-h2 = 12.8 kJ/kg
Area under 2-2 = D Tds = Tc (s2-s2) = 12.6 kJ/kg
D Superheat horn area = Area A1 = (12.8 - 12.6) = 0.2 kJ/kg
d) Throttling loss, Area A2 (assuming the saturated liquid line to coincide with isobar at
condenser pressure):
Area A2 = Area under 3-1-Area under 4-1 = (h3-h1) - Te(s3-s1) ( s3 = s4)
Throttling area = (271.6-167.2) - 248.15(1.237-0.8746) = 14.47 kJ/kg
Alternatively:
Throttling area = Area under 4-4 = Te(s4-s4) = 248.15(1.295-1.237) = 14.4 kJ/kg
Check:
Wsss = WCarnot+Area A1+Area A2
WCarnot = (Tc-Te)(s1-s4) = 75(1.746-1.237) = 38.2 kJ/kg
DWsss = 38.2+14.4+0.2 = 52.8 kJ/kg
10. In a R22 based refrigeration system, a liquid-to-suction heat exchanger (LSHX) with
an effectiveness of 0.65 is used. The evaporating and condensing temperatures are 7.2oC
and 54.4oC respectively. Assuming the compression process to be isentropic, find:
484.
485.
486.
487.
488.

Specific refrigeration effect

Volumic refrigeration effect
Specific work of compression
COP of the system
Temperature of vapour at the exit of the compressor

Comment on the use of LSHX by comparing the performance of the system with a SSS
cycle operating between the same evaporator and condensing temperatures.
Ans.:
Given:

Refrigerant
Te
Tc
Effectiveness of LSHX,sX

=
=
=

R 22
7.2oC
54.4oC
0.65

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 19

JQc
4

Condenser

Compressor
LSHX

Wc

5
Exp. device

Evaporator

Qe

P
3

Effectiveness of LSHX, sX

= (Qact/Qmax) = [(mCp)minATact,min]/ [(mCp)minATmax]

= (T2-T1)/(T4-T1); D Cp,vapour < Cp,liquid
(T2-T1)/(T4-T1) = 0.65 => T2 = T1+0.65(T4-T1) = 37.88oC From energy
balance across LSHX: (h2-h1) = (h4-h5) => h5 = h4 - (h2-h1)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 20

From the above data and using refrigerant property values for R 22 at various state
points are:
T
v m3/kg
State
P
h
s
Quality
o
(
C)
Point
(bar)
(kJ/kg)
(kJ/kg.K)
1
7.2
6.254
407.6
1.741
0.03773
1.0
2

37.88

6.254

430.7

1.819

0.04385

Superheated

104.9

21.46

466.8

1.819

Superheated

54.4

21.46

269.5

1.227

0.0

37.65

21.46

246.4

1.154

Subcooled

7.2

6.254

246.4

1.166

0.1903

7.2

6.254

269.5

1.248

0.3063

74.23

21.46

438.6

1.741

Superheated

7.2

6.254

208.5

1.030

0.0

With LSHX:
489. Refrigeration effect = (h1-h6) = 161.2 kJ/kg
490. Volumic refrigeration effect = (h1-h6)/v2 = 3676.2 kJ/m3
491. Work of compression = (h3-h2) = 36.1 kJ/kg
492. COP = (h1-h6)/ (h3-h2) = 4.465
493. Temperature at compressor exit (from Pc and s3=s2) = 104.9oC
Without LSHX:
494. Refrigeration effect = (h1-h6) = 138.1 kJ/kg
495. Volumic refrigeration effect = (h1-h6)/v1 = 3660.2 kJ/m3
496. Work of compression = (h3-h1) = 31.0 kJ/kg
497. COP = (h1-h6)/ (h3-h1) = 4.455
498. Temperature at compressor exit (from Pc and s1=s3) = 74.23oC

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 21

Parameter

With LSHX

Without LSHX

Refrigeration effect, kJ/kg

161.2

138.1

Ref. quality at evaporator inlet

0.1903

0.3063

3676.2

3660.2

Work of compression, kJ/kg

36.1

31.0

COP

4.465

4.455

104.9

74.23

Vol. Refrigeration effect, kJ/m3

Compressor exit temperature, oC

Comments:
499.
There is no appreciable change in COP with the addition of LSHX
500.
Quality of refrigerant at evaporator inlet is significantly lower with LSHX
501.
Discharge temperature is significantly high with LSHX
502.
For refrigerant R-22, use of LSHX does not improve the performance of the
system significantly, however, the evaporator with LSHX performs better due to
the lower vapour fraction at its inlet

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 22

Lesson
12
Multi-Stage Vapour
Compression
Refrigeration Systems
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 1

The objectives of this lesson are to:

503.
Discuss limitations of single stage vapour compression refrigeration systems
(Section 12.1)
504.
Classify multi-stage systems (Section 12.1)
505.
Discuss the concept of flash gas removal using flash tank (Section 12.2)
506.
Discuss the concept of intercooling in multi-stage vapour compression
refrigeration systems (Section 12.3)
507.
Discuss multi-stage vapour compression refrigeration systems with flash gas
removal and intercooling (Section 12.4)
508.
Discuss the use of flash tank for flash gas removal only (Section 12.5)
509.
Discuss the use of flash tank for intercooling only (Section 12.6)
At the end of the lesson, the student should be able to:
510.
Justify the selection of single or multi-stage systems based on operating
temperature range
511.
Classify multi-stage systems
512.
Applying mass and energy balance equations, evaluate the performance of
multi-stage vapour compression refrigeration systems with:
513.
Flash gas removal
514.
Intercooling
515.
Flash gas removal using flash tank and intercooling using flash tank
and/or external intercooler
516.
Flash tank for flash gas removal only
517.
Flash tank for intercooling only, and
518.
A combination of any of the above

12.1. Introduction
A single stage vapour compression refrigeration system has one low side pressure
(evaporator pressure) and one high side pressure (condenser pressure). The performance of
single stage systems shows that these systems are adequate as long as the temperature
difference between evaporator and condenser (temperature lift) is small. However, there are
many applications where the temperature lift can be quite high. The temperature lift can
become large either due to the requirement of very low evaporator temperatures and/or due to
the requirement of very high condensing temperatures. For example, in frozen food industries
the required evaporator can be as low as 40oC, while in chemical industries temperatures as
low as 150oC may be required for liquefaction of gases. On the high temperature side the
required condensing temperatures can be very high if the refrigeration system is used as a
heat pump for heating applications such as process heating, drying etc. However, as the
temperature lift increases the single stage systems become inefficient and impractical. For
example, Fig. 12.1 shows the effect of decreasing evaporator temperatures on T s and P h
diagrams. It can be seen from the T s diagrams that for a given condenser temperature, as
evaporator temperature decreases:

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 2

i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.

Throttling losses increase

Superheat losses increase
Compressor discharge temperature increases
Quality of the vapour at the inlet to the evaporator increases
Specific volume at the inlet to the compressor increases

As a result of this, the refrigeration effect decreases and work of compression increases as
shown in the P h diagram. The volumic refrigeration effect also decreases rapidly as the
specific volume increases with decreasing evaporator temperature. Similar effects will occur,
though not in the same proportion when the condenser temperature increases for a given
evaporator temperature. Due to these drawbacks, single stage systems are not recommended
when the evaporator temperature becomes very low and/or when the condenser temperature
becomes high. In such cases multi-stage systems are used in practice. Generally, for
fluorocarbon and ammonia based refrigeration systems a single stage system is used upto an
evaporator temperature of 30oC. A two-stage system is used upto 60 oC and a three-stage
system is used for temperatures below 60oC.
Apart from high temperature lift applications, multi-stage systems are also used in
applications requiring refrigeration at different temperatures. For example, in a dairy plant
refrigeration may be required at 30oC for making ice cream and at 2 oC for chilling milk. In
such cases it may be advantageous to use a multi-evaporator system with the low temperature
evaporator operating at 30oC and the high temperature evaporator operating at 2oC

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 3

2
T

Fig.12.
1(a):
Effect
of
evapor
ator
temper
ature
on
cycle
perfor
mance
(T-s
diagra
m)

P
2
2
h

Fi
g.
12
.1(
b)
:
Ef
fe
ct
of
ev
ap
or
at
or
te
m
pe
ra
tu
re
on

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 4

A multi-stage system is a refrigeration system with two or more low-side pressures. Multistage systems can be classified into:
519.
520.
521.

Multi-compression systems
Multi-evaporator systems
Cascade systems, etc.

Two concepts which are normally integral to multi-pressure systems are, i) flash gas
removal, and ii) intercooling. Hence these concepts will be discussed first.

12.2. Flash gas removal using flash tank

It is mentioned above that one of the problems with high temperature lift applications
is the high quality of vapour at the inlet to the evaporator. This vapour called as flash gas
develops during the throttling process. The flash gas has to be compressed to condenser
pressure, it does not contribute to the refrigeration effect as it is already in the form of vapour,
and it increases the pressure drop in the evaporator. It is possible to improve the COP of the
system if the flash gas is removed as soon as it is formed and recompressed to condenser
pressure. However, continuous removal of flash gas as soon as it is formed and
recompressing it immediately is difficult in practice. One way of improving the performance
of the system is to remove the flash gas at an intermediate pressure using a flash tank. Figure
12.2 shows the schematic of a flash tank and Fig.12.3 shows the expansion process
employing flash tank. A flash tank is a pressure vessel, wherein the refrigerant liquid and
vapour are separated at an intermediate pressure. The refrigerant from condenser is first
expanded to an intermediate pressure corresponding to the pressure of flash tank, P i using a
low side float valve (process 6-7). The float valve also maintains a constant liquid level in the
flash tank. In the flash tank, the refrigerant liquid and vapour are separated. The saturated
liquid at point 8 is fed to the evaporator after throttling it to the required evaporator pressure,
Pe (point 9) using an expansion valve. Depending upon the type of the system, the saturated
vapour in the flash tank (point 3) is either compressed to the condenser pressure or throttled
to the evaporator pressure. In the absence of flash tank, the refrigerant condition at the inlet to
the evaporator would have been point 9, which has a considerably high vapour quality
compared to point 9. As mentioned, the refrigerant liquid and vapour must get separated in
the flash tank. This is possible when the upward velocity of the refrigerant vapour in the flash
tank is low enough ( < 1 m/s) for the refrigerant liquid droplets to fall back into the flash tank
due to gravity. Thus the surface area of liquid in the flash tank can be obtained from the
volumetric flow rate of refrigerant vapour and the required low refrigerant velocity.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 5

3
From
condens
er

To
compressor
Flash
tank

8
_9_ To
evaporat
or
Expansion valve
Fig.12.2(a):
Working
principle of a
flash tank

P Pi

h
^

Fig.
12.
3:
Exp
ansi
on

process
using a
flash tankVersion 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur
on P-h
diagram

12.3.
Inter
cooli
ng
in
mult
istag
e
com
pres
sion
he
specifi
c work
input,
w in
reversi
ble,
polytr
opic
compr
ession
of
refrige
rant
vapour
is
given
by:
2

w n'

where P1 and P2 are the inlet and exit pressures of the compressor, v 1 is the specific volume of
the refrigerant vapour at the inlet to the compressor and n is the polytropic exponent. From the
above expression, it can be seen that specific work input reduces as specific volume, v 1 is
reduced. At a given pressure, the specific volume can be reduced by reducing the
temperature. This is the principle behind intercooling in multi-stage compression. Figures
12.4 (a) and (b) show the process of intercooling in two-stage compression on Pressurespecific volume (P-v) and P-h diagrams.

Savings in
sp. work
2

P
h

v
Fig.12.4(a) & (b): Intercooling in two-stage compression

As shown in the figures, in stead of compressing the vapour in a single stage from state 1 to
state 2, if the refrigerant is compressed from state 1 to an intermediate pressure, state 2,
intercooled from 2 to 3 and then compressed to the required pressure (state 4), reduction in
work input results. If the processes are reversible, then the savings in specific work is given
by the shaded area 2-3-4-2 on P-v diagram. The savings in work input can also be verified
from the P-h diagram. On P-h diagram, lines 1-2-2 and 3-4 represent isentropes. Since the
slope of isentropes on P-h diagram reduces (lines become flatter) as they move away from the
saturated vapour line,

(h4-h3) < (h2-h2) (h2-h1)+(h4-h3) < (h2-h1)

(12.2)

Intercooling of the vapour may be achieved by using either a water-cooled heat

exchanger or by the refrigerant in the flash tank. Figures 12.5(a) and (b) show these two
systems. Intercooling may not be always possible using water-cooled heat exchangers as it
depends on the availability of sufficiently cold water to which the refrigerant from low stage
compressor can reject heat. Moreover, with water cooling the refrigerant at the inlet to the
high stage compressor may not be saturated. Water cooling is commonly used in air
compressors. Intercooling not only reduces the work input but also reduces the compressor
discharge temperature leading to better lubrication and longer compressor life.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 7

Refrigerant
liquid from
condenser

High-stage
compressor

Low-stage
compressor

>

Flash tank

Fig.12.5(a): Intercooling using liquid refrigerant in flash tank

Water out
>2

Water in
Water-cooled heat
exchanger
3

High-stage
Compressor
1

Low-stage Compressor

Fig.12.5(b): Intercooling using external water cooled heat exchanger

Intercooling using liquid refrigerant from condenser in the flash tank may or may not
reduce the power input to the system, as it depends upon the nature of the refrigerant. This is
due to the fact that the heat rejected by the refrigerant during intercooling generates
additional vapour in the flash tank, which has to be compressed by the high stage compressor.
Thus the mass flow rate of refrigerant through the high stage compressor will be more than
that of the low stage compressor. Whether total power input to the system decreases or not
depends on whether the increased power consumption due to higher mass flow rate is
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 8

compensated by reduction in specific work of compression or not. For ammonia, the power
input usually decreases with intercooling by liquid refrigerant, however, for refrigerants such
as R12, R22, the power input marginally increases. Thus intercooling using liquid refrigerant
is not effective for R12 and R22. However, as mentioned one benefit of intercooling is the
reduction in compressor discharge temperature, which leads to better compressor lubrication
and its longer life.
It is also possible to intercool the refrigerant vapour by a combination of water-cooled
heat exchanger and the refrigerant liquid in the flash tank. As a result of using both watercooling and flash-tank, the amount of refrigerant vapour handled by the high-stage
compressor reduces leading to lower power consumption. However, the possibility of this
again depends on the availability of cooling water at required temperature.
One of the design issues in multi-stage compression is the selection of suitable
intermediate pressure. For air compressors with intercooling to the initial temperature, the
theoretical work input to the system will be minimum when the pressure ratios are equal for
all stages. This also results in equal compressor discharge temperatures for all compressors.
Thus for a two-stage air compressor with intercooling, the optimum intermediate pressure,
Pi,opt is:
i,opt -^ Plow Phigh

(123)

where Plow and Phigh are the inlet pressure to the low-stage compressor and exit pressure from
the high-stage compressor, respectively. The above relation is found to hold good for ideal
gases. For refrigerants, correction factors to the above equation are suggested, for example
one such relation for refrigerants is given by:
Pi,opt =
(12.4) where Pe and Pc are
the evaporator and
condenser pressures,

Tc
Pe .Pc
Te
and Tc and Te are condenser and evaporator temperatures (in K).

Several combinations of multi-stage systems are used in practice. Some of them are
discussed below.

12.4. Multi-stage system with flash gas removal and intercooling

Figures 12.6(a) and (b) show a two-stage vapour compression refrigeration system
with flash gas removal using a flash tank, and intercooling of refrigerant vapour by a watercooled heat exchanger and flash tank. The superheated vapour from the water cooled heat
exchanger bubbles through the refrigerant liquid in the flash tank. It is assumed that in this
process the superheated refrigerant vapour gets completely de-superheated and emerges out
as a saturated vapour at state 4. However, in practice complete de-superheating may not be
possible. As mentioned the use of combination of water cooling with flash tank for
intercooling reduces the vapour generated in the flash tank. The performance of this system
can be obtained easily by applying mass and energy balance equations to the individual
components. It is assumed that the flash tank is perfectly insulated and the potential and
kinetic energy changes of refrigerant across each component are negligible.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 9

JQc
6

Condenser

5 -4

^v
7

Compressor - II

WII

3
Flash chamber

Water intercooler
Qi
2

-8

Compressor - I

^V

Evaporator

WI

Qe

Fig.126(a): Two-stage vapour compression refrigeration system with flash gas removal using a
flash tank and intercooling
5Pc
P
Pi
Pe
h Fig.126(b): Two-stage
vapour compression refrigeration system with flash gas removal using a
flash tank and intercooling - P-h diagram
From mass and energy balance of the flash tank:
..
m7
.
m7

..

+ m3 =m8 + m4
h7 +

..
m3 h3

=m8 h8 + m4 h4

(12.5)
(12.6)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 10

From mass and energy balance across expansion valve,

..
m8

=m9
h8 = h9
From mass and energy balance across evaporator:
..
m9

(12.7)
(12.8)

= m1

(12.9)

Qe =m1(h1 - h9 )

(12.10)

From mass and energy balance across low-stage compressor, Compressor-I:

.

..

m9 = m1 =m I

(12.11)

WI =mI (h2 - h1)

(12.12)

where mI is the mass flow rate of refrigerant through Compressor-I.

From mass and energy balance across water-cooled intercooler:
.

..

m 2 = m3 =mI

(12.13)

QI =mI (h2 - h3 )

(12.14)

where QI is the heat transferred by the refrigerant to the cooling water in the intercooler.
From mass and energy balance across high-stage compressor, Compressor-II:
.
m4

..

= m5 =mII

(12.15)

WII =mII (h5 -h4 )

(12.16)

where mII is the mass flow rate of refrigerant through Compressor-II.

Finally, from mass and energy balance across condenser:
.
m5

..
m6

=mII

(12.17)

Qc =mII (h5 -h6)

Finally, from mass and energy balance across the float valve:
.

(12.19)
(12.20)

..

= m7 =mII
h6 =h7
m6

From the above set of equations, it can be easily shown that for the flash tank:
(12.21)
(12.22)

...

=m4
=mII

m7

... m3

=m8
=mI
(12.23)
h3 -h8
m II =m
4 -h7

Version 1 ME, IIT

(12.18)

Kharagpur 11

It can be seen from the above expression that the refrigerant flow through the high.
stage compression mII can be reduced by reducing the enthalpy of refrigerant vapour entering
into the flash tank, h3 from the water-cooled intercooler.
The amount of additional vapour generated due to de-superheating of the refrigerant
vapour from the water-cooled intercooler is given by:
mgen

=mI

3
4

-h4
-h8

(12.24)
.

Thus the vapour generated mgen will be zero, if the refrigerant vapour is completely desuperheated in the water-cooled intercooler itself. However, this may not be possible in
practice.
For the above system, the COP is given by:
Qe
m (h1 -h9 )
I
COP=
=
.
WI +WII.
mI (h2 - h1 ) + mII (h5 - h4 )

(12.25)

The above system offers several advantages,

.

Qe
mI (h1 - h9 )
522.
Quality of refrigerant entering the evaporator reduces thus giving rise to
higher refrigerating effect, lower pressure drop and better heat transfer in the
evaporator
523.
Throttling losses are reduced as vapour generated during throttling from Pc to
Pi is separated in the flash tank and recompressed by Compressor-II.
524.
Volumetric efficiency of compressors will be high due to reduced pressure
ratios
525.
Compressor discharge temperature is reduced considerably.
However, one disadvantage of the above system is that since refrigerant liquid in the flash
tank is saturated, there is a possibility of liquid flashing ahead of the expansion valve due to
pressure drop or heat transfer in the pipelines connecting the flash tank to the expansion
device. Sometimes this problem is tackled by using a system with a liquid subcooler. As
shown in Fig.12.7, in a liquid subcooler the refrigerant liquid from the condenser is subcooled
by exchanging heat with the refrigerant liquid in the flash tank. As a result, a small amount of
refrigerant vapour is generated in the flash tank, which needs to be compressed in the highstage compressor. Compared to the earlier system, the temperature of refrigerant liquid from
the subcooler will be higher than the saturated refrigerant temperature in the flash tank due to
indirect contact heat transfer. However, since the refrigerant at the inlet to the expansion
valve is at high pressure and is subcooled, there is less chance of flashing of liquid ahead of
expansion valve.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 12

From
condenser

3
-------1

> To high-stage
compressor
^-

L
i
q
u
i
d
s
u
b
c
o
o
l
e
r

T
o
Expansion
evaporator
v
a
l
v
e
F
i
g
.
1
2
.
7
:
R

e
in
efrigeration
systems
system
using with
refrigeran
liquid
ts such as
subcooler
R 12 or R
134a due
to
their
low
12.5. discharge
Use temperatu
of res. In
flash these
systems,
tank in stead of
for passing
flash the
refrigeran
gas t vapour
remo from the
low-stage
val compress
or
Int
through
ercooli
the flash
ng of
tank,
refrige
vapour
rant
from the
vapour
flash tank
using
is mixed
waterwith the
cooled
vapour
heat
coming
exchan
from the
gers is
low-stage
possibl
compress
e
in
or. As a
ammo
result, the
nia
inlet
system
condition
s due
to
the
to high
high-stage
dischar
compress
ge
or will be
temper
slightly
ature
superheat
of
ed. A twoammo
stage
nia.
compressi
Howev
on system
er, this
with flash
is
tank for
general
flash gas
ly not
removal
possibl
for

refrigerants such as R
134a is shown in Fig.
12.8 (a). Figure 12.8
(b)
shows
the
corresponding
P-h
diagram.

Version 1 ME, IIT

Kharagpur 13

3
6
7

Condense
r

5
-4

Compressor II
8 1

Flash
chambe
r
2

om
9
E
v
a
p
o
r
a
t
o
r

y
s
t
e
m
w
i
t
h

f
l
a
s
h

a
l
o
n
l
y
(
a
)
S
y
s
t
e

o
n
P
h
d
i
a
g
r
a
m

ooling
of the
refrige
rant
vapou
r
betwe
en the
low
and
highstage
compr
essors.
It is
not
used
for

h
Fig.12.8: A twos
t
a
g
e
c
o
m
p
r
e
s
s
i
o
n
s

t^
a
n
k
f
o
r
f
l
a
s
h
g
a
s
r
e
m
o
v

m
s
c
h
e
m
a
t
i
c
;
(
b
)
C
y
c
l
e

12.6. flash
gas
Use remov
of al.
flash Figure
s 12.9
tank (a)
for and
inter (b)
show
cooli the
ng syste
only m
schem
atic
ometi and Pmes h
diagra
the
flash m of a
tank istwoused stage
compr
for
interc ession

system where
the flash tank
is used for
intercooling
only.
Version 1
ME, IIT
Kharagpur
14

Condenser

43

Compressor - II

F
l
a
s
h
c
h
a
m
b
e
r

2
1

C
o
m
pr
es
so
rI
7

E
v
a
p
o
r
a
t
o
r
P

2'
h
Fig.12.9: A two-stage
compr
ession
system
with
the
flash
tank
used
for
interco
oling
only
(a)
System
schem
atic
(b)
Cycle
on P-h
diagra
m

Versio
n1
ME,

IIT
Kharagp
ur 15

Questions:
1. When the temperature lift of a single stage vapour compression refrigeration system
increases:
526.
527.
528.
529.

Refrigeration effect increases

Work of compression increases
Compressor discharge temperature decreases
Volumetric efficiency of compressor increases

Ans.: b)
2. Multi-stage vapour compression refrigeration systems are used when:
530.
531.
532.
533.

Required temperature lift increases

Required temperature lift decreases
Refrigeration is required at different temperatures
Required refrigeration capacity is large

Ans.: a) and c)
3. Using a flash tank:
534. Flash gas formed during expansion can be removed at an intermediate pressure
535. Quality of refrigerant at the evaporator inlet can be increased
536. Temperature of refrigerant vapour at the inlet to higher stage compressor can be
reduced
537. Pressure drop in evaporator can be reduced
Ans.: a) , c) and d)
4. Using intercooling in multi-stage compression systems:
538.
539.
540.
541.

Refrigeration effect can be increased

Work of compression in higher stage compressor can be reduced
Maximum cycle temperature can be increased
All of the above

Ans.: b)
5. External intercooling of refrigerant vapour:
542.
543.
544.
545.

Is feasible for ammonia based systems

Commonly used in air compressors
Commonly used for halocarbon refrigerants
Depends on availability of cold external water

Ans.: a) and b)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 16

6. Assuming the refrigerant vapour to behave as an ideal gas and with perfect intercooling,
the optimum intermediate pressure of a refrigeration system that operates between 4 bar and
16 bar is equal to:
546.
547.
548.
549.

10 bar
8 bar
6 bar
12 bar

Ans.: b)
7. Refrigeration system with liquid subcooler is used to:
550.
551.
552.
553.

Prevent the entry of liquid into compressor

Prevent flashing of refrigerant liquid ahead of low stage expansion device
Reduce work of compression
All of the above

Ans. b)
8. In two-stage compression system with flash gas removal:
554. Refrigerant mass flow rates in both low and high stage compressors are equal
555. Refrigerant mass flow rates in high stage compressors is greater than that in low stage
compressor
556. Refrigerant mass flow rates in high stage compressors is smaller than that in low stage
compressor
557. Mass flow rates in low and high stage compressors are equal if the pressure ratios are
equal
Ans.: b)
9. Use of flash tank for intercooling:
558.
559.
560.
561.

Always improves system COP

COP increases or decreases depends on the refrigerant used
Maximum compressor discharge temperature always decreases
Power input to the system always decreases

Ans.: b) and c)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 17

10. The required refrigeration capacity of a vapour compression refrigeration system (with R22 as refrigerant) is 100 kW at 30oC evaporator temperature. Initially the system was
single-stage with a single compressor compressing the refrigerant vapour from evaporator to
a condenser operating at 1500 kPa pressure. Later the system was modified to a two-stage
system operating on the cycle shown below. At the intermediate pressure of 600 kPa there is
intercooling but no removal of flash gas. Find a) Power requirement of the original singlestage system; b) Total power requirement of the two compressors in the revised two-stage
system. Assume that the state of refrigerant at the exit of evaporator, condenser and
intercooler is saturated, and the compression processes are isentropic.
condenser
stage compressor

1500 kPa

600 kPa

fern

intercooler
Wa-

1st stage compressor

-18oC
evaporator (100 kW)
Ans.:
From refrigerant property data, the following values are obtained for R 22:
Point

Temp.,oC

Pressure,kPa

Dryness
fraction

Density,kg/m3

Enthalpy,
kJ/kg

Entropy,
kJ/kg.K

-30

163.9

1.0

7.379

392.7

1.802

39.1

1500

0.0

248.4

76.93

1500

449.9

1.802

53.55

1500

429.6

1.742

5.86

600

1.0

407.2

1.742

28.94

600

424.4

1.802

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 18

a) Single stage system:

4
h
Required refrigerant mass flow rate, mr is given by:
mr = Qe/(h1 - h4) = 100/(392.7 - 248.4) = 0.693 kg/s
Power input to compressor, Wc is given by:
Wc = mr(h2 - h1) = 0.693(449.9 - 392.7) = 39.64 kW COP
of the single stage system is given by:
COP = Qe/Wc = 100/39.64 = 2.523 Compressor
discharge temperature = 76.93 oC (from property data)
Two-stage system with flash tank for intercooling only:
P

Required refrigerant mass flow rate through evaporator and 1 st stage compressor
(mr,1) is same as that of single stage system, i.e.,

mr,1 = 0.693 kg/s

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 19

Power input to 1st stage compressor, Wc,1 is given by:

Wc,1 = mr,1(h2 - h1) = 0.693(424.4 - 392.7) = 21.97 kW The mass flow
rate of refrigerant vapour through 2nd stage compressor (mr,2) is obtained from
energy balance across intercooler:
mr,2.h2

= mr,1.h2 + (mr,2 - mr,1).h4

Substituting the values of enthalpy and mass flow rate through 1st stage compressor:
mr,2 = 0.768 kg/s
Power input to 2nd stage compressor, Wc,2 is given by:
Wc,2 = mr,2(h2 - h2) = 0.768(429.6 - 407.2) = 17.2 kW
Therefore, total power input, Wc is given by:
Wc = Wc,1+Wc,2 = 21.97+17.2 = 39.17 kW
COP of the two-stage system is given by:
COP = Qe/(Wc,1+Wc,2) = 100/39.17 = 2.553
From property data, the discharge temperatures at the exit of 1 st and 2nd stage
compressors are given, respectively by:
T2 = 28.94oC
T2 = 53.55oC

Comments:
It is observed from the above example that for the given input data, though
the use of a two-stage system with intercooling in place of a single stage system
does not increase the COP significantly ( 1.2 %), there is a significant reduction in
the maximum compressor discharge temperature ( 24oC). The results would be
different if the operating conditions and/or the refrigerant used is different.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 20

Lesson

13
Multi-Evaporator And
Cascade Systems

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 1

The objectives of this lesson are to:

562.
Discuss the advantages and applications of multi-evaporator
systems compared to single stage systems (Section 13.1)
563.
Describe multi-evaporator systems using single compressor and a
pressure reducing valve with:
564.
Individual expansion valves (Section 13.2.1)
565.
Multiple expansion valves (Section 13.2.2)
566.
Describe multi-evaporator systems with multi-compression,
intercooling and flash gas removal (Section 13.3)
567.
Describe multi-evaporator systems with individual compressors and
multiple expansion valves (Section 13.4)
568.
Discuss limitations of multi-stage systems (Section 13.5)
569.
Describe briefly cascade systems (Section 13.6)
570.
Describe briefly the working principle of auto-cascade cycle (Section
13.7)
At the end of the lecture, the student should be able to:
571.
572.

Explain the need for multi-evaporator systems

Evaluate the performance of:
573.
Multi-evaporator systems with single compressor and
individual expansion valves
574.
Multi-evaporator systems with single compressor and
multiple expansion valves
575.
Evaluate the performance of multi-evaporator systems with
multi-compression, intercooling and flash gas removal
576.
Evaluate the performance of multi-evaporator systems with individual
compressors and multiple or individual expansion valves
577.
Evaluate the performance of cascade systems
578.
Describe the working principle of auto-cascade systems

13.1. Introduction
As mentioned in Chapter 12, there are many applications where refrigeration
is required at different temperatures. For example, in a typical food processing plant,
cold air may be required at 30oC for freezing and at +7oC for cooling of food
products or space cooling. One simple alternative is to use different refrigeration
systems to cater to these different loads. However, this may not be economically
viable due to the high total initial cost. Another alternative is to use a single
refrigeration system with one compressor and two evaporators both operating at
-30oC. The schematic of such a system and corresponding operating cycle on P-h
diagram are shown in Figs. 13.1(a) and (b). As shown in the figure the system consists
of a single compressor and a single condenser but two evaporators. Both evaporators-I
and II operate at same evaporator temperature (-30oC) one evaporator (say
Evaporator-I) caters to freezing while the other (Evaporator-II) caters to product
cooling/space conditioning at 7oC. It can be seen that operating the evaporator at
30oC when refrigeration is required at +7oC is thermodynamically inefficient as the
system irreversibilities increase with increasing temperature difference for heat
transfer.
The COP of this simple system is given by:
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 2

1
4
COP = Qe,I +Qe,II = (h-h)
Wc
(h2 -h1)

(13.1)

In addition to this there will also be other difficulties such as: evaporator
catering to space cooling (7oC) may collect frost leading to blockage of air-flow
passages, if a liquid is to chilled then it may freeze on the evaporator and the moisture
content of air may become too low leading to water losses in the food products. In
such cases multi-stage systems with multiple evaporators can be used. Several multievaporator combinations are possible in practice. Some of the most common ones are
discussed below.

13.2. Individual evaporators and a single compressor with a

pressure-reducing valve
13.2.1. Individual expansion valves:
Figures 13.2 (a) and (b) show system schematic and P-h diagram of a multievaporator system that uses two evaporators at two different temperatures and a single
compressor. This system also uses individual expansion valves and a pressure
regulating valve (PRV) for reducing the pressure from that corresponding to the high
temperature evaporator to the compressor suction pressure. The PRV also maintains
the required pressure in high temperature evaporator (Evaporator-II). Compared to the
earlier system, this system offers the advantage of higher refrigeration effect at the
high temperature evaporator [(h6-h4) against (h7-h5)]. However, this advantage is
counterbalanced by higher specific work input due to the operation of compressor in

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 3

Condenser
3

2
!
l

Evaporator-I
(-30oC)
Refrigeration
at -30oC

<="

1.

Compressor

O Evaporator-II at -30oC

------>-

Refrigeration
at +7oC

Fig.13.1(a) & (b): A single stage system with two evaporators

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 4

superheated region. Thus ultimately there may not be any improvement in system
COP due to this arrangement. It is easy to see that this modification does not result in
significant improvement in performance due to the fact that the refrigerant vapour at
the intermediate pressure is reduced first using the PRV and again increased using
compressor. Obviously this is inefficient. However, this system is still preferred to the
earlier system due to proper operation of high temperature evaporator.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 5

Heat
rejection
Compressor

>

-30 o C

7/1 8

Fig.13.2(a) & (b): Multi-evaporator system with single compressor and individual
expansion valves

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 6

The COP of the above system is given by:

.. Qe,I

(h6 -h4 )
=

COP=

+Qe,II

mI (h7 -h5 )+ mII

(13.2)

..

Wc
(m I + m II )(h2 -h1 )
..

where m I and m II are the refrigerant mass flow rates through evaporator I and II
respectively. They are given by:
.
Q
e,I
mI=
(13.3)
m.
Q
e,II
m II =
(13.4)
(h6 - h4 )
(h7 - h5 )
Enthalpy at point 2 (inlet to compressor) is obtained by applying mass and
energy balance to the mixing of two refrigerant streams, i.e.,
..

h2 =I m h7 +m IIh8
(13.5)
m
I +m II
If the expansion across PRV is isenthalpic, then specific enthalpy h8 will be
equal to h6.
13.2.2. Multiple expansion valves:
Figures 13.3 (a) and (b) show system schematic and P-h diagram of a multievaporator with a single compressor and multiple expansion valves. It can be seen
from the P-h diagram that the advantage of this system compared to the system with
individual expansion valves is that the refrigeration effect of the low temperature
evaporator increases as saturated liquid enters the low stage expansion valve. Since
the flash gas is removed at state 4, the low temperature evaporator operates more
efficiently.
The COP of this system is given by:
.. Qe,I

mII (h7 -h4 )

=

COP=

+Qe,II

mI (h8 -h6 )+
(13.6)

..

Wc
(mI

+ mII )(h2 -h1)

..

where m I and m II are the refrigerant mass flow rates through evaporator I and II
respectively. They are given by:
.
Q
e,I
mI=
(13.7)
(h8 - h6 )
.
m II =

Q
e,II

(13.8)

(h7 - h4 )
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 7

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 8

Condenser
3
-2

4
Evaporator - II

|_7

9
1

-5

Compressor - I
PRV

6
Eva
por
ator
-I

P
2

h
Fig.13.3(a)
& (b):
Multievaporator
system with
single
compressor
and
multiple
expansion valves
Enthalpy at
point 2 (inlet to
compressor) is

obtaine
d by
applyin
g mass
and
energy
balanc
e to the
mixing
of two
refriger
ant
stream
s, i.e.,
h2 =
(13.9)

mI

I
f the
expans
ion
across
PRV is
isentha
lpic,
then
specifi
c
enthalp
y
h7
will be
equal
to h9.
C
OP
obtaine
d using
the
above
multievapor
ator
system
s is not
much
higher
compa
red to
single
stage
system
as
refrige
rant
vapour
at
interm

ediate pressure is first

Version 1 ME, IIT
Kharagpur 9

throttled then compressed, and compressor inlet is in superheated region. Performance

can be improved significantly if multiple compressors are used in place of a single
compressor.

13.3. Multi-evaporator system

intercooling and flash gas removal

with

multi-compression,

Figures 13.4(a) and (b) show the schematic and P-h diagram of a multievaporator system which employs multiple compressors, a flash tank for flash gas
removal and intercooling. This system is good for low temperature lift applications
with different refrigeration loads. For example one evaporator operating at say 40oC
for quick freezing of food products and other evaporator operating at 25oC for
storage of frozen food. As shown in the system schematic, the pressure in the high
temperature evaporator (Evaporator-II) is same as that of flash tank. Superheated
vapour from the low-stage compressor is cooled to the saturation temperature in the
flash tank. The low temperature evaporator operates efficiently as flash gas is
removed in the flash tank. In addition the high-stage compressor (Compressor-II)
operates efficiently as the suction vapour is saturated. Even though the high stage
compressor has to handle higher mass flow rate due to de-superheating of refrigerant
in the flash tank, still the total power input to the system can be reduced substantially,
especially with refrigerants such as ammonia.
The COP of this system is given by:
W +W e,I
mI(h1 -h8)+ me,II(h3 - h6)
e,II
COP=
=
.
2 -h1 ) + m II (h4 - h3 )

+me,II (h3 -h6 )

.. Qe,I

+Qe,II

c,I

(13.10)

c,II

mI(h2
-h1) +
mII(h4 h3)

mI (h1 -h8 )

..

where m I and m e,II are the refrigerant mass flow rates through evaporator I and II
respectively. They are given by:
.
Q
e,I
m=
(13.11)
I
(h8 - h6 )
m
Qe,II
e,II =
(13.12)
(h3 - h6 )
m II is the mass flow rate of refrigerant through the high-stage compressor which can
be obtained by taking a control volume which includes the flash tank and high
temperature evaporator (as shown by dashed line in the schematic) and applying mass
and energy balance:
mass balance:
..
m5

+m2 =m7 +m3; m5 = mII =m3 & m2 =mI =m7

(13.13)

energy balance:
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 10

m5 h5 +m2 h2 +Qe,II =m7 h7 +m3h3

(13.14)
fro
m
kno
wn
oper
atin
g
tem
pera
ture
s
and
eva
pora
tor
load
s
(Qe,I
and
Qe,II)
one
can
get
the
mas
s
flow
rate
thro
ugh
the
high
stag
e
com
pres
sor
and
syst
em
CO
P
fro
m
the
abo
ve
equ
atio
ns.

Compressor - III

Evaporator - I

Qe,I

h
Fig.13.4(a) & (b): Multi-evaporator
system with multiple compressors
and a flash tank
for flash gas removal and
intercooling

Version 1
ME, IIT
Kharagpur
11

13.4. Multi-evaporator system with individual compressors and

multiple expansion valves
Figures 13.5(a) and (b) show the schematic and P-h diagram of a multievaporator system which employs individual compressors and multiple expansion
valves.
The COP of this combined system is given by:
.. Qe,I

mII (h1 - h7 )
COP=

+ Qe,II

mI (h3 - h9 ) +
(13.15)

W +W
c,I

c,II

mI(h4 - h3)+ mII(h2 - h1)

..

Q e,IQ e,I m

(13.16) where m I and

(h3 - h9 )
m II are the
refrigerant
mass flow rates through evaporator I and II respectively. They are
given by:
.
Q
e,II
m II =
(13.17)
(h1 - h7 )
I==

The inlet to the condenser (state 5) is obtained by applying mass and energy
balance to the process of mixing of refrigerant vapours from Compressors I and II.

13.5. Limitations of multi-stage systems

Though multi-stage systems have been very successful, they have certain
limitations. These are:
579. Since only one refrigerant is used throughout the system, the refrigerant used
should have high critical temperature and low freezing point.
580. The operating pressures with a single refrigerant may become too high or too
low. Generally only R12, R22 and NH3 systems have been used in multi-stage
systems as other conventional working fluids may operate in vacuum at very low
evaporator temperatures. Operation in vacuum leads to leakages into the system and
large compressor displacement due to high specific volume.
581. Possibility of migration of lubricating oil from one compressor to other
leading to compressor break-down.
The above limitations can be overcome by using cascade systems.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 12

Condenser

5
6
W
c
,
I
I

4
8

C
Compressor - I

9
E

W
c
,I
Qe,I

2 5
P

4
h

Fig.13.5(a)
& (b):
Multievaporator
system with
individual
compressor
s and
multiple
expans
ion
valves

Versio
n1
ME,
IIT
Khara
gpur
13

13.6. Cascade Systems

In a cascade system a series of refrigerants with progressively lower boiling
points are used in a series of single stage units. The condenser of lower stage system is
coupled to the evaporator of the next higher stage system and so on. The component
where heat of condensation of lower stage refrigerant is supplied for vaporization of
next level refrigerant is called as cascade condenser. Figures 13.6(a) and (b) show the
schematic and P-h diagrams of a two-stage cascade refrigeration system. As shown,
this system employs two different refrigerants operating in two individual cycles.
They are thermally coupled in the cascade condenser. The refrigerants selected should
have suitable pressure-temperature characteristics. An example of refrigerant
combination is the use of carbon dioxide (NBP = -78.4oC, Tcr = 31.06oC) in low
temperature cascade and ammonia (NBP = -33.33oC, Tcr = 132.25oC) in high
temperature cascade. It is possible to use more than two cascade stages, and it is also
possible to combine multi-stage systems with cascade systems.
Applications of cascade systems:
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.

Liquefaction of petroleum vapours

Liquefaction of industrial gases
Manufacturing of dry ice
Deep freezing etc.

Advantages of cascade systems:

i.
ii.

Since each cascade uses a different refrigerant, it is possible to select a

refrigerant that is best suited for that particular temperature range. Very
high or very low pressures can be avoided
Migration of lubricating oil from one compressor to the other is prevented

In practice, matching of loads in the cascade condenser is difficult, especially

during the system pull-down. Hence the cascade condensers are normally oversized.
In addition, in actual systems a temperature difference between the condensing and
evaporating refrigerants has to be provided in the cascade condenser, which leads to
loss of efficiency. In addition, it is found that at low temperatures, superheating
(useful or useless) is detrimental from volumetric refrigeration effect point-of-view,
hence in cascade systems, the superheat should be just enough to prevent the entry of
liquid into compressor, and no more for all refrigerants.
Optimum cascade temperature:
For a two-stage cascade system working on Carnot cycle, the optimum
cascade temperature at which the COP will be maximum, Tcc,opt is given by:

Tcc,opt=VTe.Tc

(13.18)

where Te and Tc are the evaporator temperature of low temperature cascade and
condenser temperature of high temperature cascade, respectively.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 14

Condenser

t
(X)

High temperature
cascade

f~

2
1

Cascade condenser

34

Low temperature
cascade

High temp.
compressor

E
Low temp
compressor

2
h

Fig.13.6(a) & (b): A two-stage cascade refrigeration system

For cascade systems employing vapour compression refrigeration cycle, the
optimum cascade temperature assuming equal pressure ratios between the stages is
given by:
Tcc,opt
(13.19)

b1 +b2 b2
b1
V Tc

b
T

Te J

where b1 and b2 are the constants in Clausius-Clayperon equation: ln P =a and high temperature refrigerants, respectively.

for low

13.7. Auto-cascade systems

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 15

An auto-cascade system may be considered as a variation of cascade system,

in which a single compressor is used. The concept of auto-cascade system was first
proposed by Ruhemann in 1946. Figure 13.7(a) shows the schematic of a two-stage
auto-cascade cycle and Fig.137(b) shows the vapour pressure curves of the two
Qc,out

Compressor

.Partial condenser

i
Condenser

Evaporator
Qe,in

Fig.13.7(a): Schematic of a two-stage auto-cascade system

refrigerants used in the cycle on Dhring plot.
In a two-stage auto-cascade system two different working fluids; a low boiling point
(low temperature) refrigerant and a high boiling point (high temperature) refrigerant
are used. The vapour mixture consisting of both these refrigerants is compressed in
the compressor to a discharge pressure (Pdischarge). When this high pressure mixture flows
through the partial condenser, the high temperature refrigerant
Te

T e,h

T c,l

Pdischarge

Tc

Low temp. refrigerant

High temp. refrigerant

Fig.13.7(b): Schematic illustrating principle of two-stage autoVersion 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 16

cascade system on Dhring plot

can condense by rejecting heat (Qc,out) to the external heat sink, if its partial
pressure in the mixture is such that the saturation temperature corresponding to the
partial pressure is higher than the external heat sink temperature. Since the saturation
temperature of the low temperature refrigerant is much lower than the external heat
sink temperature at its partial pressure, it cannot condense in the partial condenser,
hence, remains as vapour. Thus it is possible theoretically to separate the high
temperature refrigerant in liquid form from the partial condenser. Next this high
temperature, high pressure liquid is expanded through the expansion valve into the
condenser operating at a pressure Psuction. Due to the expansion of the high temperature
refrigerant liquid from Pdischarge to Psuction, its temperature drops to a sufficiently low value
(Te,h) so that when the low temperature, high pressure refrigerant vapour comes in
contact with the high temperature, low pressure refrigerant in the condenser it can
condense at a temperature Tc,l. This condensed, high pressure, low temperature
refrigerant is then throttled to the suction pressure and is then made to flow through
the evaporator, where it can provide the required refrigeration effect at a very low
temperature Te. Both the high temperature refrigerant from condenser and low
temperature refrigerant vapour from evaporator can be mixed as they are at the same
pressure. This mixture is then compressed in the compressor to complete the cycle.
Thus using a single compressor, it is possible to obtain refrigeration at very low
temperatures using the auto-cascade system. In practice, more than two stages with
more than two refrigerants can be used to achieve very high temperature lifts.
However, in actual systems, it is not possible to separate pure refrigerants in the
partial condenser as some amount of low temperature refrigerant condenses in the
partial condenser and some amount of high temperature refrigerant leaves the partial
condenser in vapour form. Thus everywhere in the system, one encounters refrigerant
mixtures of varying composition. These systems are widely used in the liquefaction of
natural gas.

Questions:
1. Multi-evaporator systems are:
582.
583.
584.
585.

Widely used when refrigeration is required at different temperatures

When humidity control in the refrigerated space is required
When the required temperature lift is small
All of the above

Ans.: a) and b)
2. Multi-evaporator systems with a single compressor and a pressure reducing valve:
586. Yield very high COPs compared to multi-evaporator, single stage systems
587. Yield lower compressor discharge temperature compared to single stage
systems
588. Yield slightly higher refrigeration effect in the low temperature evaporator
compared to single stage systems
589. Yield slightly higher refrigeration effect in the high temperature evaporator
compared to single stage systems
Ans.: d)
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 17

3. Compared to individual expansion valves, multiple expansion valves:

590.
591.
592.
593.

Yield higher refrigeration effect in the low temperature evaporator

Yield higher refrigeration effect in the high temperature evaporator
Yield lower compressor discharge temperature
Decrease the quality of refrigerant at the inlet to low temperature evaporator

Ans.: a) and d)
4. Compared to multi-evaporator and single compressor systems, multi-evaporator
systems with multiple compressors:
594.
595.
596.
597.

Yield higher COP

Decrease maximum cycle temperature
Yield higher refrigeration effect
All of the above

Ans.: a) and b)
5. In multi-stage systems:
598.

The refrigerant used should have high critical temperature and high freezing

point
599. The refrigerant used should have high critical temperature and low freezing
point
600. There is a possibility of migration of lubricating oil from one compressor to
other
601. Operating pressures can be too high or too low
Ans.: b), c) and d)
6. In cascade systems:
602.
603.
604.
605.

Different refrigerants are used in individual cascade cycles

There is no mixing of refrigerants and no migration of lubricating oil
Higher COPs compared to multi-stage systems can be obtained
Operating pressures need not be too high or too low

Ans.: a), b) and d)

7. Cascade systems are widely used for:
606.
607.
608.
609.

Large refrigeration capacity systems

Applications requiring large temperature lifts
Applications requiring very high efficiencies
All of the above

Ans.: b)
8. For a two-stage cascade system working on Carnot cycle and between low and high
temperatures of 90oC and 50oC, the optimum cascade temperature at which the COP
will be maximum is given by:
610.

20oC

611.

30oC
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 18

612.
613.

67oC
0oC

Ans.: b)
9. In a two stage, auto-cascade system:
614.
615.
616.
617.

Two compressors and two refrigerants are used

A single compressor and a single refrigerant are used
A single compressor and two refrigerants are used
Two compressors and a single refrigerant are used

Ans.: c)
10. In a two stage, auto-cascade system:
618. Compressor compresses refrigerant mixture
619. Refrigerants are separated in partial condenser
620. Condensing temperature of low temperature refrigerant at discharge pressure
is higher than the boiling temperature of high temperature refrigerant at suction
pressure
621. Condensing temperature of low temperature refrigerant at discharge pressure
is lower than the boiling temperature of high temperature refrigerant at suction
pressure
Ans.: a), b) and c)
11. The figure given below shows a multi-evaporator, vapour compression
refrigeration system working with ammonia. The refrigeration capacity of the high
temperature evaporator operating at 6.7oC is 5 TR, while it is 10 TR for the low
temperature evaporator operating at 34.4oC. The condenser pressure is 10.8 bar.
Assuming saturated conditions at the exit of evaporators and condenser, ammonia
vapour to behave as an ideal gas with a gas constant of 0.4882 kJ/kg.K and isentropic
index (cp/cv) of 1.29, and isentropic compression:
622.
Find the required power input to compressor in kW
623.
Find the required power input if instead of using a single compressor,
individual compressors are used for low and high temperature evaporators.
Use the data given in the table:

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 19

10.8 bar

-6.7oC J

5 TR

1
c

-34.4oC

A
J 10 TR

95.98

hf (kJ/kg)
(sat.liquid)
44.0

hg( kJ/kg) sat.

vapour
1417

-6.7

331.8

169.1

1455

27.7

1080.0

330.4

1485

T,oC

Psat

-34.4

(kPa)

Data for Problem 11

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 20

Ans.:
a) Single compressor: The P-h diagram for the above system is shown below:

The required mass flow rate through the low temperature evaporator (mr,l) is given by:
mr,l = Qe,l/(h7 - h5) = (10 X 3.517)/(1417 - 330.4) = 0.03237 kg/s
The required mass flow rate through the high temperature evaporator (m r,h) is given
by:
mr,h = Qe,h/(h6 - h4) = (5 X 3.517)/(1455 - 330.4) = 0.01564 kg/s
Assuming the refrigerant vapour to behave as an ideal gas, and assuming the variation
in specific heat of the vapour to be negligible, the temperature of the refrigerant after
mixing, i.e., at point 1 is given by:
T1 = (mr,l.T7 + mr,h.T6)/(mr,l + mr,h) = 247.6 K
Assuming isentropic compression and ideal gas behaviour, the power input to the
compressor,Wc is given by:
k Wc = mr .R.

k-1y

vPey

k-1 k

-1
where mr is the refrigerant flow rate through the compressor (mr = mr,l + mr,h), R is the
gas constant (0.4882 kJ/kg.K), Pc and Pe are the discharge and suction pressures and k
is the isentropic index of compression ( = 1.29).
Substituting these values, the power input to the compressor is found to be:
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 21

Wc = 18.67 kW

(Ans.)
Since
the
refriger
ant
vapour
is
assume
d
to
behave
as an
ideal
gas
with
consta
nt
specifi
c heat,
and the
compre
ssion
process
is
assume
d to be
isentro
pic, the
dischar
ge
temper
ature
T2 can
be
obtaine
d using
the
equatio
n:
Wc =
mr.Cp(
T2
T1) =
18.67
kW
Substit
uting
the
values
of mr,
Cp
(=2.17

16 kJ/kg.K) and
T1,
the
discharge
temperature is
found to be:
T

b
)

I
=

n
d

4
2
7
.
6
7

i
v
i
d
u
a
l

K
c
=

o
m

1
5
3
.
5
o

p
r
e
s
s
o
r

22

s
:
The P-h
diagram with
individual
compressors is
shown below:

2 5 4
P
The mass flow
rates through
evaporators
will be same as
before.
The power
input to low
temperature
compressor
(process 3 to 4),
Wc,l is given by:
P
k
VPey
k-1y
V

k-1
k -1

Wc l =
mr
l.R.T

substituting the
values, we
obtain:
Wc,l = 12.13
kW
Similarly, for
the high
temperature
compressor
(process 1-2),
the power input
Wc,h is given
by:

Version 1 ME,
IIT Kharagpur

Wc,h =
mr,h.R.

k
- k -1

k-1 k
Pe,h

-1

= 2.75
kW
Therefor
e total
power
input is
given
by:
Wc =
Wc,l
+
Wc,h
=
12.13
+
2.75
=
14.88
kW
(Ans
.)
The
compres
sor
discharg
e
temperat
ures for
the low
temperat
ure and
high
temperat
ure
compres
sor are
found to
be:
T4 = 411.16 K =
138.0oC T2 = 347.27
K = 74.10oC
Comme
nts:
624. U
sing
individu
al

regul encie refrig both syste

compressors
erated CO2 m
ating s.
in place of a
space and (COP
valve
single
and a4. A at o NH3 act)
compressor,
singl cascad36 C, cycles can
the
power
when and be
e
e
input to the
refrigethe find a)estim
comp
ration ambie Total ated
system could
resso syste nt
power using
be reduced
r.
tempe
input
m
considerably
How shown rature to the
( 20.3%).
ever, in the(heat syste
625. In
in
figure sink) m; b)
addition, the
actua given is o atPower
maximum
below 43 C. input
l
compressor
if the
syste uses A
discharge
tempe
casca
ms CO2
temperature
rature
de
these as
also could be
differe
syste
refrige
benef rant nce ofm is
reduced by
its for 7 K isreplac
about 15oC.
will the requir ed
626. In
CO2 evaporator
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

addition to
this, the high
temperature
compressor
operates at
much lower
compression
ratio, leading
to
low
discharge
temperatures
and
high
volumetric
efficiency.
These
are
the
advantages
one
could
get by using
individual
compressors,
instead of a
pressure

be low- ed forwith a
some stage heat single
what and transf stage
reduc NH3 er inNH3
ed as thethe syste
refrig evapo m
since erant rator, operat
small for theconde ing
er
high- nser betwe
indiv stage. and en
idual The the same
comp syste cascadrefrig
erated
resso m hase
to
conde space
rs
provid
nser. and
gener
e
a
Assu heat
ally
refrig me sink.
have eratio the The
lowern
tempe actual
isentr capaci rature COP
opic ty oflift of the
and 10 TR(Tcond- vapo
volu and Tevap) ur
metri maint to becomp
ain same ressio
c
effici the for n

the equation:
COPact =0.85COPCarnot
where
COPCarnot = Carnot COP Tc
=Condensing
Temp.,
Te= Evaporator Temp.

Tc -Te
265

Ans.:
Since a
temper
ature
differe
nce of
& K is
require
d for
heat
transfe
r, the
CO2
evapor
ator
and
NH3
conden
ser
temper
atures
are
given
by:
Te,CO2 = -36 -7 =
-43oC = 230 K
Tc,NH3 = 43 + 7 =
50oC = 323 K
In the
cascad
e
conden
ser,
Tc,CO2 =
Te,NH3 +
7
S
i
n
c
e
t
h
e

and COPNH3 = 3.77

temperature lifts of CO2 and

NH3 cycles are same, (Tc,CO2 Te,CO2) = (Tc,NH3 - Te,NH3)
From the above 4 equations, we obtain:
T
c
,
C
O
2

=
2
8
0
K
T
e
,
N
H
3

=
2
7
3
K
Substituting the values of temperatures in the
expression for actual COP, we obtain:
C
O
P
C
O
2

=
3
.
1
7
,

The
power
input
to CO2
compre
ssor is
given
by,
Wc,CO2
=
Qe,CO2/C
OPCO2
= 10 X
3.517 /
3.17 =
11.1
kW
Since
the
heat
rejecte
d by
the
conden
ser of
CO2
system
is the
refrige
ration
load
for the
evapor
ator of
NH3
system
,
the
require
d
refrige
ration
capacit
y
of
NH3
system
is
given
by:
Qe,NH3

= Qc,CO2 = Qe,CO2 + Wc,CO2 = 46.27 kW

Hence power input to NH3 compressor is given by:
Wc,NH3 = Qe,NH3/COPNH3 = 46.27 /3.77 = 12.27 kW
Therefore, the total power input to the system is
given by:
Wc.total = Wc,CO2 + Wc,NH3 = 23.37 kW

(Ans.)

b) If instead of a cascade system, a single stage

NH3 is used then, the actual COP of the system is:
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 24

COPNH3,1st = 1.363
Power input to single stage ammonia system is given by:
Wc,NH3,1st = Qe/ COPNH3,1st = 35.17/1.363 = 25.8 kW

(Ans.)

Comments:
627. Using a cascade system the power consumption could be reduced by about 9.5
%.
628. More importantly, in actual systems, the compared to the single stage system,
the compressors of cascade systems will be operating at much smaller pressure ratios,
yielding high volumetric and isentropic efficiencies and lower discharge temperatures.
Thus cascade systems are obviously beneficial compared to single stage systems for
large temperature lift applications.
3. The performance of the cascade system can be improved by reducing the
temperature difference for heat transfer in the evaporator, condenser and cascade
condenser, compared to larger compressors.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 25

Lesson
14
Vapour Absorption
Refrigeration Systems
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 1

The objectives of this lesson are to:

629.
Introduce vapour absorption refrigeration systems (Section 14.1)
630.
Explain the basic principle of a vapour absorption refrigeration system
(Section 14.2)
631.
Compare vapour compression refrigeration systems with continuous
vapour absorption refrigeration systems (Section 14.2)
632.
Obtain expression for maximum COP of ideal absorption refrigeration
system (Section 14.3)
633.
Discuss properties of ideal and real refrigerant-absorbent mixtures
(Section 14.4)
634.
Describe a single stage vapour absorption refrigeration system with
solution heat exchanger (Section 14.5)
635.
Discuss the desirable properties of refrigerant-absorbent pairs for
vapour absorption refrigeration systems and list the commonly used working
fluids (Section 14.6)
At the end of the lecture, the student should be able to:
636.
List salient features of vapour absorption refrigeration systems and
compare them with vapour compression refrigeration systems
637.
Explain the basic principle of absorption refrigeration systems and
describe intermittent and continuous vapour absorption refrigeration systems
638.
Find the maximum possible COP of vapour absorption refrigeration
systems
639.
Explain the differences between ideal and real mixtures using pressurecomposition and enthalpy-composition diagrams
640.
Draw the schematic of a complete, single stage vapour absorption
refrigeration system and explain the function of solution heat exchanger
641.
List the desirable properties of working fluids for absorption
refrigeration systems and list some commonly used fluid pairs

14.1. Introduction
Vapour Absorption Refrigeration Systems (VARS) belong to the class of
vapour cycles similar to vapour compression refrigeration systems. However, unlike
vapour compression refrigeration systems, the required input to absorption systems is
in the form of heat. Hence these systems are also called as heat operated or thermal
energy driven systems. Since conventional absorption systems use liquids for
absorption of refrigerant, these are also sometimes called as wet absorption systems.
Similar to vapour compression refrigeration systems, vapour absorption refrigeration
systems have also been commercialized and are widely used in various refrigeration
and air conditioning applications. Since these systems run on low-grade thermal
energy, they are preferred when low-grade energy such as waste heat or solar energy
is available. Since conventional absorption systems use natural refrigerants such as
water or ammonia they are environment friendly.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 2

In this lesson, the basic working principle of absorption systems, the maximum
COP of ideal absorption refrigeration systems, basics of properties of mixtures and
simple absorption refrigeration systems will be discussed.

14.2. Basic principle

When a solute such as lithium bromide salt is dissolved in a solvent such as
water, the boiling point of the solvent (water) is elevated. On the other hand, if the
temperature of the solution (solvent + solute) is held constant, then the effect of
dissolving the solute is to reduce the vapour pressure of the solvent below that of the
saturation pressure of pure solvent at that temperature. If the solute itself has some
vapour pressure (i.e., volatile solute) then the total pressure exerted over the solution
is the sum total of the partial pressures of solute and solvent. If the solute is nonvolatile (e.g. lithium bromide salt) or if the boiling point difference between the
solution and solvent is large ( 300oC), then the total pressure exerted over the
solution will be almost equal to the vapour pressure of the solvent only. In the
simplest absorption refrigeration system, refrigeration is obtained by connecting two
vessels, with one vessel containing pure solvent and the other containing a solution.
Since the pressure is almost equal in both the vessels at equilibrium, the temperature
of the solution will be higher than that of the pure solvent. This means that if the
solution is at ambient temperature, then the pure solvent will be at a temperature
lower than the ambient. Hence refrigeration effect is produced at the vessel containing
pure solvent due to this temperature difference. The solvent evaporates due to heat
transfer from the surroundings, flows to the vessel containing solution and is absorbed
by the solution. This process is continued as long as the composition and temperature
of the solution are maintained and liquid solvent is available in the container.
For example, Fig.14.1 shows an arrangement, which consists of two vessels A
and B connected to each other through a connecting pipe and a valve. Vessel A is
filled with pure water, while vessel B is filled with a solution containing on mass basis
50 percent of water and 50 percent lithium bromide (LiBr salt). Initially the valve
connecting these two vessels is closed, and both vessels are at thermal equilibrium
with the surroundings, which is at 30oC. At 30oC, the saturation pressure of water is
4.24 kPa, and the equilibrium vapour pressure of water-lithium bromide solution (50 :
50 by mass) at 30oC is 1.22 kPa.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 3

a) Initial condition

Valve closed
4.24 kPa

1.22 kPa

Water at 30oC

50% LiBr soln. at 30oC

Water vapour
o

30 C

Valve open

b) Refrigeration

30oC

1.22 kPa
I

1.22 kPa

Water at 10oC

50% LiBr soln. at 30oC

A
B

Qe\/

VQc

Water vapour

c) Regeneration
Valve open
4.24 kPa
Water at 30oC

Qg
Qc

4.24 kPa

Weak LiBr soln. at Tg

Tg > To > Te
Fig.14.1: Basic principle of vapour absorption systems
Thus at initial equilibrium condition, the pressure in vessel A is 4.24 kPa,
while it is 1.22 kPa in vessel B. Now the valve between vessels A and B is opened.
Initially due to pressure difference water vapour will flow from vessel A to vessel B,
and this vapour will be absorbed by the solution in vessel B. Since absorption in this
case is exothermic, heat will be released in vessel B. Now suppose by some means the
concentration and temperature of vessel B are maintained constant at 50 % and 30 oC,
respectively. Then at equilibrium, the pressure in the entire system (vessels A and B)
will be 1.22 kPa (equilibrium pressure of 50 % LiBr solution at 30oC). The

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 4

temperature of water in vessel A will be the saturation temperature corresponding to

1.22 kPa, which is equal to about 10oC, as shown in the figure. Since the water
temperature in A is lower than the surroundings, a refrigeration effect (Q e) can
produced by transferring heat from the surroundings to water at 10oC. Due to this heat
transfer, water vaporizes in A, flows to B and is absorbed by the solution in B. The
exothermic heat of absorption (Qa) is rejected to the surroundings.
Now for the above process to continue, there should always be pure water in
vessel A, and vessel B must be maintained always at 50 percent concentration and
30oC. This is not possible in a closed system such as the one shown in Fig.14.1. In a
closed system with finite sized reservoirs, gradually the amount of water in A
decreases and the solution in B becomes diluted with water. As a result, the system
pressure and temperature of water in A increase with time. Hence the refrigeration
effect at A reduces gradually due to the reduced temperature difference between the
surroundings and water. Thus refrigeration produced by systems using only two
vessels is intermittent in nature. In these systems, after a period, the refrigeration
process has to be stopped and both the vessels A and B have to be brought back to
their original condition. This requires removal of water absorbed in B and adding it
back to vessel A in liquid form, i.e., a process of regeneration as shown in Fig.14.1(c).
Assume that before regeneration is carried out, the valve between A and B is
closed and both A and B are brought in thermal equilibrium with the surroundings
(30oC), then during the regeneration process, heat at high temperature T g is supplied to
the dilute LiBr solution in B, as a result water vapour is generated in B. The vapour
generated in B is condensed into pure water in A by rejecting heat of condensation to
the surroundings. This process has to be continued till all the water absorbed during
the refrigeration process (14.1(b)) is transferred back to A. Then to bring the system
back to its original condition, the valve has to be closed and solution in vessel B has
to be cooled to 30oC. If we assume a steady-flow process of regeneration and neglect
temperature difference for heat transfer, then the temperature of water in A will be
30oC and pressure inside the system will be 4.24 kPa. Then the temperature in vessel
B, Tg depends on the concentration of solution in B. The amount of heat transferred
during refrigeration and regeneration depends on the properties of solution and the
operating conditions. It can be seen that the output from this system is the
refrigeration obtained Qe and the input is heat supplied to vessel B during vapour
regeneration process, Qg.
The system described may be called as an Intermittent Absorption
Refrigeration System. The solvent is the refrigerant and the solute is called as
absorbent. These simple systems can be used to provide refrigeration using renewable
energy such as solar energy in remote and rural areas. As already explained, these
systems provided refrigeration intermittently, if solar energy is used for regenerating
the refrigerant, then regeneration process can be carried out during the day and
refrigeration can be produced during the night.
Though the intermittent absorption refrigeration systems discussed above are
simple in design and inexpensive, they are not useful in applications that require
continuous refrigeration. Continuous refrigeration can be obtained by having a
modified system with two pairs of vessels A and B and additional expansion valves
and a solution pump.
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 5

Mechanical
I Condenser
*Q
W
ce at Te
compression

Pe
^Evaporator

|Qc at To
/vQc at To ^
Qg at
Tg
Generator
C
o
n
d
e
ns
er
1

Exp.devic
e

Pc

H,
Exp.dev
ice Pe
Pum
(
p/ '
*
/Exp.de
vice/

p
Ev
ap
ora
tor
^^
Ab
sor
ber
Qa at To Ther
mal
comp
ressio
n
a

Figs.14.2: a) Vapour
compressi
on
refrigerati
on system
(VCRS) b)
Vapour
Absorptio
n
Refrigerat
ion System
(VARS)

Figure 14.2(a) and (b) show

a continuous output vapour
compression refrigeration system
and a continuous output vapour
absorption refrigeration system. As
shown in the figure in a continuous
absorption system, low temperature
and low pressure refrigerant with
low quality enters the evaporator
and vaporizes by producing useful
refrigeration
Qe.
From
the
evaporator, the low temperature,
low pressure refrigerant vapour
enters the absorber where it comes
in contact with a solution that is
weak in refrigerant. The weak
solution absorbs the refrigerant and
becomes strong in refrigerant. The
heat of absorption is rejected to the
external heat sink at To. The
solution that is now rich in
refrigerant is pumped to high
pressure using a solution pump and
fed to the generator. In the
generator heat at high temperature
Tg is supplied, as a result
refrigerant vapour is generated at
high pressure. This high pressure
vapour is then condensed in the
condenser by rejecting heat of
condensation to the external heat
sink at To. The condensed
refrigerant liquid is then throttled in
the expansion device and is then
fed to the evaporator to complete
the refrigerant cycle. On the
solution side, the hot, high-pressure
solution that is weak in refrigerant
is throttled to the absorber pressure
in the solution expansion valve and
fed to the absorber where it comes
in contact with the refrigerant
vapour from evaporator. Thus
continuous
refrigeration
is
produced at evaporator, while heat
at high temperature is continuously
supplied to the generator. Heat
rejection to the external heat sink
takes place at absorber and
condenser. A small amount of
mechanical energy is required to
run the solution pump. If we
neglect pressure drops, then the
absorption
system
operates
between the condenser and

e
v
a
p
o
r
a
t
o
r
p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
s
.
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
i
n
a
b
s
o
r
b
e
r
i
s
s
a
m
e
a
s
t

h
e
p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
i
n
e
v
a
p
o
r
a
t
o
r
a
n
d
p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
i
n
g
e
n
e
r
a
t
o
r
i
s

s
a
m
e
a
s
t
h
e
p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
i
n
c
o
n
d
e
n
s
e
r
.
I
t
c
a
n
b
e
s
e
e
n
f
r
o
m

Fig.14.2, that as far as the

condenser, expansion valve and
evaporators are concerned both
compression
and
absorption
systems are identical. However, the
difference lies in the way the
refrigerant is compressed to
condenser pressure. In vapour
compression refrigeration systems
the
vapour
is
compressed
mechanically using the compressor,
where as in absorption system the
vapour is first
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 6

converted into a liquid and then the liquid is pumped to condenser pressure using the
solution pump. Since for the same pressure difference, work input required to pump a
liquid (solution) is much less than the work required for compressing a vapour due to
Pc

very small specific volume of liquid (w = - v.dP ), the mechanical energy required to
Pe

operate vapour absorption refrigeration system is much less than that required to
operate a compression system. However, the absorption system requires a relatively
large amount of low-grade thermal energy at generator temperature to generate
refrigerant vapour from the solution in generator. Thus while the energy input is in the
form of mechanical energy in vapour compression refrigeration systems, it is mainly
in the form of thermal energy in case of absorption systems. The solution pump work
is often negligible compared to the generator heat input. Thus the COPs for
compression and absorption systems are given by:
Qe
COPVCRS =
Wc

(14.1)

Qe
Qe
COPVARS =--------------^
Qg+Wp Qg

(14.2)

Thus absorption systems are advantageous where a large quantity of low-grade

thermal energy is available freely at required temperature. However, it will be seen
that for the refrigeration and heat rejection temperatures, the COP of vapour
compression refrigeration system will be much higher than the COP of an absorption
system as a high grade mechanical energy is used in the former, while a low-grade
thermal energy is used in the latter. However, comparing these systems based on
COPs is not fully justified, as mechanical energy is more expensive than thermal
energy. Hence, sometimes the second law (or exergetic) efficiency is used to compare
different refrigeration systems. It is seen that the second law (or exergetic) efficiency
of absorption system is of the same order as that of a compression system.

14.3. Maximum COP of ideal absorption refrigeration system

In case of a single stage compression refrigeration system operating between
constant evaporator and condenser temperatures, the maximum possible COP is given
by Carnot COP:
Te
COPCarnot=--------Tc -Te

(14.3)

If we assume that heat rejection at the absorber and condenser takes place at
same external heat sink temperature To, then a vapour absorption refrigeration system
operates between three temperature levels, Tg, To and Te. The maximum possible COP of
a refrigeration system operating between three temperature levels can be obtained by
applying first and second laws of thermodynamics to the system. Figure 14.3 shows
the various energy transfers and the corresponding temperatures in an absorption
refrigeration system.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 7

Fig.14.3: Various energy transfers in a vapour absorption refrigeration system

From first law of thermodynamics,
(14.4)

Qe+Qg-Qc+a+Wp=0

where Qe is the heat transferred to the absorption system at evaporator temperature Te,
Qg is the heat transferred to the generator of the absorption system at temperature Tg,
Qa+c is the heat transferred from the absorber and condenser of the absorption system at
temperature To and Wp is the work input to the solution pump.
From second law of thermodynamics,
Stotal = Ssys + Ssurr 0

(14.5)

where Stotal is the total entropy change which is equal to the sum of entropy change
of the system Ssys and entropy change of the surroundings S surr. Since the
refrigeration system operates in a closed cycle, the entropy change of the working
fluid of the system undergoing the cycle is zero, i.e., Ssys =0 . The entropy change
of the surroundings is given by:
Ssurr=- Q - Qg + Q
0
Te Tg
To
Qg

Qe

Tg

(14.6)
Substituting the expression for first law of
thermodynamics in the above equation

To -Te Te

Wp

(14.7)

Neglecting solution pump work, Wp; the COP of VARS is given by:
COPVARS =

Te To -Te

Tg -To Tg

(14.8)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 8

An ideal vapour absorption refrigeration system is totally reversible (i.e., both

internally and externally reversible). For a completely reversible system the total
entropy change (system+surroundings) is zero according to second law, hence for an
ideal VARS AStotal rev = 0 => ASsurr rev = 0. Hence:

Hence combining first and second laws and neglecting pump work, the maximum
possible COP of an ideal VARS system is given by:

Qe
Tg
(14.10)

COPideal VARS =

Te
e

YTg-To

To -T
Thus the ideal COP is only a function of operating temperatures similar to Carnot
system. It can be seen from the above expression that the ideal COP of VARS system
is equal to the product of efficiency of a Carnot heat engine operating between T g and
To and COP of a Carnot refrigeration system operating between To and Te, i.e.,
COPideal

Qe
VARS = =

Te To -Te

Tg -T
Tg

COPCarnot.r| Carnot

(14.11)

Thus an ideal vapour absorption refrigeration system can be considered to be a

combined system consisting of a Carnot heat engine and a Carnot refrigerator as
shown in Fig.14.4. Thus the COP of an ideal VARS increases as generator
temperature (Tg) and evaporator temperature (Te) increase and heat rejection
temperature (To) decreases. However, the COP of actual VARS will be much less than
that of an ideal VARS due to various internal and external irreversibilities present in
actual systems.
Qg
Tg
WE

Qc
Q
e

WE

Fig.14.4: Vapour absorption refrigeration system as a combination of a heat

engine and a refrigerator

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 9

14.4. Properties of refrigerant-absorbent mixtures

The solution used in absorption refrigeration systems may be considered as a
homogeneous binary mixture of refrigerant and absorbent. Depending upon the
boiling point difference between refrigerant and absorbent and the operating
temperatures, one may encounter a pure refrigerant vapour or a mixture of refrigerant
and absorbent vapour in generator of the absorption system. Unlike pure substances,
the thermodynamic state of a binary mixture (in liquid or vapour phase) cannot be
fixed by pressure and temperature alone. According to Gibbs phase rule, one more
parameter in addition to temperature and pressure is required to completely fix the
thermodynamic state. Generally, the composition of the mixture is taken as the third
independent parameter. The composition of a mixture can be expressed either in mass
fraction or in mole fraction. The mass fraction of components 1 and 2 in a binary
mixture are given by:
1 =

; 2=
m1+m2

n1
x1 =

(14.12)
m1+m2

n2
; x2 =

n1 +n2

(14.13)
n1 +n2

where m1 and m2 are the mass of components 1 and 2, respectively

The mole fraction of components 1 and 2 in a binary mixture are given by:
n1

n
1 +n2 ;

n1 +

where n1 and n2 are the number of moles of components 1 and 2, respectively

An important property of a mixture is its miscibility. A mixture is said to be
completely miscible if a homogeneous mixture can be formed through any arbitrary
range of concentration values. Miscibility of mixtures is influenced by the
temperature at which they are mixed. Some mixtures are miscible under certain
conditions and immiscible at other conditions. The refrigerant-absorbent mixtures
used in absorption refrigeration systems must be completely miscible under all
conditions both in liquid and vapour phases.
14.4.1. Ideal, homogeneous binary mixtures
A binary mixture of components 1 and 2 is called as an ideal mixture, when it
satisfies the following conditions.
Condition 1: The volume of the mixture is equal to the sum of the volumes of its
constituents, i.e., upon mixing there is neither contraction nor expansion. Thus the
specific volume of the mixture, v is given by:
v = 1.v1+2.v2

(14.14)

where 1 and 2 are the mass fractions of components 1 and 2. For a binary mixture,
1 and 2 are related by:
1+2=1 2=1-1

(14.15)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 10

Condition 2: Neither heat is generated nor absorbed upon mixing, i.e., the heat of
solution is zero. Then the specific enthalpy of the mixture, h is given by:
h = ^1.h1 + ^2.h2 =^1.h1 +(1-^1)h2

(14.16)

Condition 3: The mixture obeys Raoults law in liquid phase, i.e., the vapour pressure
exerted by components 1 and 2 (Pv,1 and Pv,2) at a temperature T are given by:
Pv1 =x1.P1sat

(14.17)

where x1 and x2 are the mole fractions of components 1 and 2 in solution, and P1,sat
and P2, sat are the saturation pressures of pure components 1 and 2 at temperature T.
The mole fractions x1 and x2 are related by:
x1 +x2 =1^>x2 =1-x1

(14.19)

Condition 4: The mixture obeys Daltons law in vapour phase; i.e., the vapour
pressure exerted by components 1 and 2 (Pv,1 and Pv,2) in vapour phase at a
temperature T are given by:
Pv1 =y1.Ptotal

(14.20)

Pv,2=y2.Ptotal

(14.21)

where y1 and y2 are the vapour phase mole fractions of components 1 and 2 and P total
is the total pressure exerted at temperature T. The vapour phase mole fractions y1 and
y2 are related by:
y1 +y2 =1^>y2 =1-y1

(14.22)

and the total pressure Ptotal is given by:

Ptotal =Pv,1+Pv,2

(14.23)

If one of the components, say component 2 is non-volatile compared to component

1(e.g. component 1 is water and component 2 is lithium bromide salt), then y1 1 and
y2 0, Pv2 0, then from Raoults and to Daltons laws:
Ptotal * Pv,1 = x1 .P1,sat

(14.24)

14.4.2. Real mixtures

Real mixtures deviate from ideal mixtures since: 1. A real
solution either contracts or expands upon mixing, i.e.,
v^1.v1 +^2.v2

(14.25)
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 11

2. Either heat is evolved (exothermic) or heat is absorbed upon mixing;

h= 1.h1+(1-1)h2+hmix

(14.26)

where hmix is the heat of mixing, which is taken as negative when heat is evolved and
positive when heat is absorbed.
The above two differences between ideal and real mixtures can be attributed to
the deviation of real mixtures from Raoults law. Real mixtures approach ideal
mixtures as the mole fraction of the component contributing to vapour pressure
approaches unity, i.e., for very dilute solutions. Figure 14.5 shows the equilibrium
pressure variation with liquid phase mole fraction (x) of ideal and real binary mixtures
with positive (+ve) and negative deviations (-ve) from Raoults law at a constant
temperature. It can be seen that when the deviation from Raoults law is positive
(+ve), the equilibrium vapour pressure will be higher than that predicted by Raoults
law, consequently at a given pressure and composition, the equilibrium temperature of
solution will be lower than that predicted by Raoults law. The converse is true for
solutions with -ve deviation from Raoults law, i.e., the equilibrium temperature at a
given pressure and composition will be higher than that predicted by Raoults law for
solution with negative deviation. This behaviour can also be shown on specific
enthalpy-composition diagram as shown in Fig. 14.6 for a solution with negative
deviation from Raoults law. Refrigerant-absorbent mixtures used in vapour
absorption refrigeration systems exhibit a negative deviation from Raoults law, i.e.,
the process of absorption is exothermic with a negative heat of mixing.

T = Constant

-ve
P1,sat

P2,sat

1
x2"

Fig.14.5: Pressure-concentration behaviour of ideal and real mixtures at a constant

temperature

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 12

Real
solution

h1

T=

Constant Ideal

solution
h2

Fig.1
4.6:
Entha
lpyconce
ntrati
on
behav
iour
of an
ideal
mixtu
re and
a real
mixtu
re
with
negat
ive
deviat
ion
from
Raoul
ts
law

14.
5.
Ba
sic
Va
po
ur
Ab
sor
pti
on
Re

frig
era
tio
n
Sys
te
m
igur
e
14.7
sho
ws a
basi
c
vapo
ur
abso
rptio
n
refri
gera
tion
syst
em
with
a
solut
ion
heat
exch
ange
r on
a
pres
sure
vs
tem
pera
ture
diag
ram.
As
sho
wn
in
the
figur
e,
low
tem
pera
ture
and
low
pres
sure

refri
gera
nt
vapo
ur
from
evap
orat
or at
state
1
ente
rs
the
abso
rber
and
is
abso
rbed
by
solut
ion
wea
k in
refri
gera
nt
(stat
e 8).
The
heat
of
abso
rptio
n
(Qa)
is
rejec
ted
to
an
exte
rnal
heat
sink
at
T.
The
solut
ion,
rich
in
refri
gera
nt
(stat
e 2)
is
pum

ped to the
generator
pressure
(Pg)
by
the
solution
pump
(state 3).
The
pressurize
d solution
gets
heated up
sensibly
as it flows
through
the
solution
heat
exchanger
by
extracting
heat from
hot
solution
coming
from
generator
(state 4).
Heat
is
supplied
to
this
solution
from an
external
heat
source in
the
generator
(Qg at Tg),
as a result
refrigeran
t vapour
is
generated
(absorben
t may also
boil
to
give off
vapour in
case
of
ammoniawater
systems)
at state 5.
This
highpressure
refrigeran
t vapour

condenses in
the condenser
by
rejecting
heat
of
condensation to
the
external
heat sink (Qc at
T) and leaves
the condenser
as
a
high
pressure liquid
(state 9). This
high pressure
refrigerant
liquid
is
throttled in the
expansion
device
to
evaporator
pressure
Pe
(state 10) from
where it enters
the evaporator,
extracts heat
from
low
temperature
heat source (Qe
at Te) and
leaves
the
evaporator as
vapour at state
1, completing a
cycle. The hot
solution that is
weak
in
refrigerant
(state 6) leaves
the generator at
high
temperature
and is cooled
sensibly
by
rejecting heat
to the solution
going to the
generator
in
the
solution
heat exchanger
(state 7). Then
it is throttled to
the evaporator
pressure in the
throttle valve
(state 8), from
where it enters
the absorber to
complete the
cycle. It can be
seen
that
though not an

Versi
on 1
ME,
IIT
Khar
agpur
13

result of this heat exchange, less heat input is required in the generator and less heat is
rejected in the absorber, thus improving the system performance significantly.

Solution pump
P

Pg
Too

Tg T
Fig.14.7: Basic vapour absorption refrigeration system with a solution heat exchanger on a
pressure vs temperature diagram
The thermodynamic performance of the above system can be evaluated by
applying mass and energy balance to each component assuming a steady flow process.
In simple theoretical analyses, internal irreversibilities such as pressure drops between
the components are generally neglected. To find the performance from the mass and
energy balance equations one needs to know inputs such as the type of refrigerantabsorbent mixtures used in the system, operating temperatures, composition of
solution at the entry and exit of absorber, effectiveness of solution heat exchanger etc.
A simple steady flow analysis of the system will be presented in later sections.

14.6. Refrigerant-absorbent combinations for VARS

The desirable properties of refrigerant-absorbent mixtures for VARS are:
i. The refrigerant should exhibit high solubility with solution in the absorber. This
is to say that it should exhibit negative deviation from Raoults law at
absorber.
ii. There should be large difference in the boiling points of refrigerant and
absorbent (greater than 200oC), so that only refrigerant is boiled-off in the
generator. This ensures that only pure refrigerant circulates through
refrigerant circuit (condenser-expansion valve-evaporator) leading to
isothermal heat transfer in evaporator and condenser.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 14

iii.

It should exhibit small heat of mixing so that a high COP can be achieved.
However, this requirement contradicts the first requirement. Hence, in
practice a trade-off is required between solubility and heat of mixing. iv.
The refrigerant-absorbent mixture should have high thermal conductivity
and low viscosity for high performance. v.
It should not undergo
crystallization or solidification inside the system. vi. The mixture should be
safe, chemically stable, non-corrosive, inexpensive
and should be available easily.
The most commonly used refrigerant-absorbent pairs in commercial systems are:
642.
Water-Lithium Bromide (H2O-LiBr) system for above 0oC applications
such as air conditioning. Here water is the refrigerant and lithium bromide is
the absorbent.
643.
Ammonia-Water (NH3-H2O) system for refrigeration applications with
ammonia as refrigerant and water as absorbent.
Of late efforts are being made to develop other refrigerant-absorbent systems
using both natural and synthetic refrigerants to overcome some of the limitations of
(H2O-LiBr) and (NH3-H2O) systems.
Currently, large water-lithium bromide (H2O-LiBr) systems are extensively
used in air conditioning applications, where as large ammonia-water (NH 3-H2O)
systems are used in refrigeration applications, while small ammonia-water systems
with a third inert gas are used in a pumpless form in small domestic refrigerators
(triple fluid vapour absorption systems).

Questions:
1. Compared to compression systems, absorption systems offer the benefits of:
644.
645.
646.
647.

Higher COPs
Lower refrigeration temperatures
Possibility of using low-grade energy sources
All of the above

Ans.: c)
2. Absorption of the refrigerant by the absorbent in a vapour absorption refrigeration
system is accompanied by:
648.
649.
650.
651.

Absorption of heat
Release of heat
No thermal effects
Reduction in volume

Ans. b)
3. An absorption system consisting of only two closed vessels:

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 15

652.
653.
654.
655.

Can provide continuous refrigeration

Provides refrigeration intermittently
Can work on solar energy alone
Has no practical application

Ans. b) and c)
4. The conventional, continuously operating single stage vapour absorption
refrigeration system:
656.
657.
658.
659.

Requires only thermal energy as input

Uses a thermal compressor in place of a mechanical compressor
Does not require a condenser
Consists of two expansion valves

Ans. b) and d)
5. For an ideal refrigerant-absorbent mixture:
660.
661.
662.
663.

There is neither expansion nor contraction upon mixing

The mixing process is exothermic
The mixing process is endothermic
Obeys Raoults law in liquid phase and Daltons law in vapour phase

Ans. a) and d)
6. For a refrigerant-absorbent mixture with a negative deviation from Raoults law:
664.
665.
666.
law
667.
law

The mixing process is exothermic

The mixing process is endothermic
The actual equilibrium temperature will be less than that predicted by Raoults
The actual equilibrium temperature will be less more that predicted by Raoults

Ans. a) and d)
7. Refrigerant-absorbent pairs used in vapour absorption refrigeration systems should:
668.
669.
670.
671.

Exhibit negative deviation from Raoults law at absorber

Exhibit positive deviation from Raoults law at absorber
Have large heat of mixing
Have large boiling point difference between refrigerant and absorbent

Ans. a) and d)
8. Which of the following statements are true:
672. Water-lithium bromide systems are used for refrigeration applications above
0oC only
673. Ammonia-water systems can be used for refrigeration applications below 0oC
only
674. Small ammonia-water systems are used in domestic refrigerators
675. Small water-lithium bromide systems are used in room air conditioners

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 16

Ans. a) and c)
9. The operating temperatures of a single stage vapour absorption refrigeration system
are: generator: 90oC; condenser and absorber: 40oC; evaporator: 0oC. The system has a
refrigeration capacity of 100 kW and the heat input to the system is 160 kW. The
solution pump work is negligible.
676.

Find the COP of the system and the total heat rejection rate from the system.

677. An inventor claims that by improving the design of all the components of the
system he could reduce the heat input to the system to 80 kW while keeping the
refrigeration capacity and operating temperatures same as before. Examine the
validity of the claim.
Ans.:
a)

COP = Qe/Qg = 100/160 = 0.625

(Ans.)

Total heat rejection rate = Qa+Qc = Qe+Qg = 100 + 160 = 260 kW (Ans.)
b) According to the inventors claim, the COPclaim is given by:
COPclaim = Qe/Qg = 100/80 = 1.25 However, for the
given temperatures, the maximum possible COP is given by:
=
Tee i
Q
COP
Q
max
g

Tg -To Tg

^To -Te

Substituting the values of operating temperatures, we find that:

273 COPmax =

Te To
-Te

Tg - To ^|

f Tg

273
313-

Since COPclaim > COPmax => Inventors claim is FALSE

50 363

= 0.94
(Ans.)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 17

1. The following figure shows a pair of containers A & B. Container B contains an

aqueous solution of (LiBr+H2O) at a mass fraction (xi) of 0.6. Container A and
connecting pipe are filled with pure water vapor. Initially the system (A+B) is at an
equilibrium temperature of 90oC, at which the pressure is found to be 9.0 kPa. Now
water vapour starts condensing in A as cooling water starts flowing through the coil
kept in A.

678.
What is the temperature of the coil at which steam starts condensing in
A?
679.
Does the System pressure remain constant during condensation? If not,
how to maintain the pressure constant at 9.0 kPa? What happens to the
temperature of solution in B?
680.
As water vapour condenses in A there will be transfer of water vapour
from B to A resulting in change of mass fraction of solution (x) in B. Find a
relation between x and/ where/is the ratio of initial mass of solution in B to
the mass of water vapour transferred from B to A.
681.
What is the amount of solution required initially in B so that a mass of 1
kg of water is transferred from B to A with a corresponding change of mass
fraction(x) by 0.05?
682.
Neglecting the contribution of temperature changes, what is the amount
of heat transferred at A and B during the transfer of 1 kg of water from B to A?
Is energy balanced?
683.
What is required to reverse the process so that initial conditions are
restored?
684.
Show the forward and reverse process on D ring plot.
Use the following data:
Initial enthalpy of solution = 220 kJ/kg; Final enthalpy of solution = 270 kJ/kg
Assume that the average latent heat of vaporization of water and enthalpy of water
vapour = 2500 kJ/kg
Saturation pressure of water vapour (in kPa) is given by the Antoines equation:
ln(p t) = c-------------

; where T is temperature in K, co=16.54, c1=3985, c2=-39.0

T + c2
Ans.:
a) Steam in vessel A starts condensing when the surface temperature of the coil falls
below the saturation temperature of water at 9.0 kPa. Using Antoines equation:
l

3985o
n(9) = 16.54----------- T = 316.84K = 43.7 C

T-39

(Ans.)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 18

b) System pressure falls as condensation of water vapour takes place in A. To keep

the system pressure constant, vapour has to be generated in B by supplying heat to
solution in B. Since the solution in B becomes richer in LiBr (i.e., concentration
increases), at the same pressure of 9.0 kPa, the solution temperature in B increases.
(Ans.)
c) From the definition of concentration for H2O-LiBr solution;

-M
,f)LMW,i)
(M
W
+
,i-MW

( ML +

W,i).( ML +

W,i) Ax = xf -xi =

ML

ML + MWf

Amount of water transferred from B to A = (MW,i - MW,f) The factor f is defined as:
f

ML+MW,i

Substituting the above in the expression for Ax and using the definition of
concentration, we find that:
i Ax = xf -xi =

^xf ^

(Ans.)

fJ

d) Mass of water transferred is 1.0 kg and change in concentration is 0.05. Hence the
final concentration is:
xf = xi + 0.05 = 0.60 + 0.05 = 0.65
Substituting this value in the expression for Ax, we find that
f

^xf ^
VAxy

^0.65N ^0.05,

= 13

Hence the initial mass of solution is given by:

(ML + MW,i) = f.(mass of water transferred) = 13X1.0 = 13kgs

(Ans.)

e) From energy balance of vessel B, the amount of energy transferred to B is given by:
QB,in=(MB,f.hf-MB,i.hi) + (MW,i-MW,f)hW

Substituting the values of enthalpies and initial and final mass of solution (13 kg and
12 kg, respectively), we find that the heat transferred to B is:
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 19

QB,in = 2880 kJ
(Ans.)
Neglecting the heat transferred during initial sensible cooling of vapour, the total heat
transferred at Vessel A is:
QA,out = Amount of water vapour condensed X latent heat of vapourization = 2500 kJ
(Ans.)
The difference in energy transferred at A and B is stored in the form of heat of
solution.
(Ans.)
685.
To reverse the
process and arrive at initial condition, the condensed water in vessel A has to be
vapourized by supplying heat to vessel A. The vapour generated is absorbed by strong
solution in B. Since this is an exothermic process, heat has to be rejected from B.
(Ans.)
686.

Dhring plot of forward and reverse processese is shown below:

x = 0>

Forward process

P
---------

Reverse process

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 20

Lesson
15 Vapour Absorption
Refrigeration Systems
Based On Water-Lithium
Bromide Pair
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 1

The objectives of this lesson are to:

1. Introduce vapour absorption refrigeration systems based on water-lithium bromide
(Section 15.1)
2. Discuss properties of water-lithium bromide solution and describe pressuretemperature-concentration (p-T-) and enthalpytemperature-concentration (h-T-)
charts (Section 15.2)
3. Present steady-flow analysis of a single stage, water-lithium bromide system
(Section 15.3)
687. Discuss practical problems in actual water-lithium bromide systems (Section
15.4)
688. Describe commercial water-lithium bromide systems (Section 15.5)
689. Discuss heat sources for water-lithium bromide systems (Section 15.6)
690. Discuss typical application data for water-lithium bromide systems (Section
15.7)
691. Discuss briefly the methods of capacity control in water-lithium bromide
systems (Section 15.8)
At the end of the lecture, the student should be able to:
692. Draw the schematic of the water-lithium bromide system and explain its
working principle
693. Evaluate the properties of water-lithium bromide solution using p-T- and h-T charts
694. Evaluate the steady-state performance of a single stage water-lithium bromide
system using the input data and fluid properties
695. Describe commercial water-lithium bromide systems and list practical
problems in these systems
696. List typical operating temperatures and performance aspects of water-lithium
bromide systems
697. Compare various capacity control methods in water-lithium bromide systems

15.1. Introduction
Vapour absorption refrigeration systems using water-lithium bromide pair are
extensively used in large capacity air conditioning systems. In these systems water is
used as refrigerant and a solution of lithium bromide in water is used as absorbent.
Since water is used as refrigerant, using these systems it is not possible to provide
refrigeration at sub-zero temperatures. Hence it is used only in applications requiring
refrigeration at temperatures above 0oC. Hence these systems are used for air
conditioning applications. The analysis of this system is relatively easy as the vapour
generated in the generator is almost pure refrigerant (water), unlike ammonia-water
systems where both ammonia and water vapour are generated in the generator.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 2

15.2. Properties of water-lithium bromide solutions

15.2.1. Composition:
The composition of water-lithium bromide solutions can be expressed either in
mass fraction () or mole fraction (x). For water-lithium bromide solutions, the mass
fraction is defined as the ratio of mass of anhydrous lithium bromide to the total
mass of solution, i.e.,
=

(15.1)
mL +mW

where mL and mW are the mass of anhydrous lithium bromide and water in solution,
respectively.
The composition can also be expressed in terms of mole fraction of lithium
bromide as:
x=

nL nL
+n

(15.2)
W

where nL and nW are the number of moles of anhydrous lithium bromide and water in
solution, respectively. The number moles of lithium bromide and water can easily be
obtained from their respective masses in solution and molecular weights, thus;
mL

mW

; and nW =
ML

mL mW
nL =
; and nW =
(15.3)
MW where ML (= 86.8 kg/kmol) and MW (= 18.0 kg/kmol) are the
molecular weights of anhydrous lithium bromide and water

respectively.
15.2.2. Vapour pressure of water-lithium bromide solutions
Applying Raoults law, the vapour pressure of water-lithium bromide solution
with the vapour pressure exerted by lithium bromide being negligibly small is given
by:
P = (1-x)PW
(15.4)
where PW is the saturation pressure of pure water at the same temperature as that of the
solution and x is the mole fraction of lithium bromide in solution. It is observed that
Raoults law is only approximately correct for very dilute solutions of water lithium
bromide (i.e., as x 0). Strong aqueous solutions of water-lithium bromide are found
to deviate strongly from Raoults law in a negative manner.
For example, at 50 percent mass fraction of lithium bromide and 25oC, Raoults law
predicts a vapour pressure of 26.2 mbar, whereas actual measurements show that it is
only 8.5 mbar.
The ratio of actual vapour pressure to that predicted by Raoults law is known as
activity coefficient. For the above example, the activity coefficient is 0.324.
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 3

The vapour pressure data of water-lithium bromide solutions can be very

conveniently represented in a Dhring plot. In a Dhring plot, the temperature of the
solution is plotted as abscissa on a linear scale, the saturation temperature of pure
water is plotted as ordinate on the right hand side (linear scale) and the pressure on a
logarithmic scale is plotted as ordinate on the left hand side. The plot shows the
pressure-temperature values for various constant concentration lines (isosters), which
are linear on Dhring plot. Figures 15.1 shows the Dhring plot. The Dhring plot can
be used for finding the vapour pressure data and also for plotting the operating cycle.
Figure 15.2 shows the water-lithium bromide based absorption refrigeration system on
Dhring plot. Other types of charts showing vapour pressure data for water-lithum
bromide systems are also available in literature. Figure 15.3 shows another chart
wherein the mass fraction of lithium bromide is plotted on abscissa, while saturation
temperature of pure water and vapour pressure are plotted as ordinates. Also shown
are lines of constant solution temperature on the chart. Pressure-temperaturecomposition data are also available in the form of empirical equations.

P (mbar)

V. t
k -----------------------

Tsat (oC)

Solution Temperature, oC
Fig.15.1.: A typical Dhring plot

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 4

increas
es
consid
erably.
This
indicat
es that
the
mixing
is an
exothe
rmic
proces
s with
a
negati
ve heat
of
mixing
.
Hence
the
specifi
c
enthal
py of
the
solutio
n
is
given
by:

5
P
Pg

Qg

Te
T
Tg T

-c

C
o
n
d
e
n
s
e
r
Q
H>-----1
Absorb
er

1
^^
=2

Fig.15.2: H2OLiBr system

with a solution
heat exchanger
on Dhring
plot
6
7
6
B
40
SO
55
59 60
Lithium
bromide tn
solution, % by
mass

Qa
6Heat exchanger
G
e
n
e
r
a
t
o
r

Solutio
n pump

6
9
7
0

Fig.15.3:
PressureTemperatureConcentration
diagram for H2OLiBr solution
15.2.3. Enthalpy of
water-lithium
bromide solutions
Since
strong
waterlithium bromide
solution deviates
from
ideal
solution
behaviour, it is
observed
that
when water and
anhydrous
lithium bromide
at
same
temperature are
mixed
adiabatically, the
temperature of
the
solution

W h=

.hL
+(1)hW
+h

5. 5

Version 1 ME, IIT Kh

where hL and hW are the specific enthalpies of pure lithium bromide and water,
respectively at the same temperature. Figure 15.4 shows a chart giving the specific
enthalpy-temperature-mass fraction data for water-lithium bromide solutions. The
chart is drawn by taking reference enthalpy of 0 kJ/kg for liquid water at 0oC and solid
anhydrous lithium bromide salt at 25oC.

Percent lithium bromide. % by mass Fig.15.4: Enthalpy

-Temperature - Concentration diagram for H2O-LiBr solution 15.2.4. Enthalpy
values for pure water (liquid and superheated vapour)
The enthalpy of pure water vapour and liquid at different temperatures and
pressures can be obtained from pure water property data. For all practical purposes,
liquid water enthalpy, hW,liquid at any temperature T can be obtained from the equation:
hW,liquid = 4.19(T -Tref )kJ / kg where Tref is
the reference temperature, 0oC.

(15.6)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 6

The water vapour generated in the generator of water-lithium bromide system

is in super heated condition as the generator temperature is much higher than the
saturation water temperature at that pressure. The enthalpy of superheated water
vapour, hW,sup at low pressures and temperature T can be obtained approximately by the
equation:
hW,sup = 2501+1.88(T -Tref )

(15.7)

15.2.5. Crystallization
The pressure-temperature-mass fraction and enthalpy-temperature-mass
fraction charts (Figs. 15.3 and 15.4) show lines marked as crystallization in the lower
right section. The region to the right and below these crystallization lines indicates
solidification of LiBr salt. In the crystallization region a two-phase mixture (slush) of
water-lithium bromide solution and crystals of pure LiBr exist in equilibrium. The
water-lithium bromide system should operate away from the crystallization region as
the formation of solid crystals can block the pipes and valves. Crystallization can
occur when the hot solution rich in LiBr salt is cooled in the solution heat exchanger
to low temperatures. To avoid this the condenser pressure reduction below a certain
value due to say, low cooling water temperature in the condenser should be avoided.
Hence in commercial systems, the condenser pressure is artificially maintained high
even though the temperature of the available heat sink is low. This actually reduces
the performance of the system, but is necessary for proper operation of the system.
It should be noted from the property charts that the entire water-lithium
bromide system operates under vacuum.

15.3. Steady flow analysis of Water-Lithium Bromide Systems

Figure 15.5 shows the schematic of the system indicating various state points.
A steady flow analysis of the system is carried out with the following assumptions:
i. Steady state and steady flow
ii. Changes in potential and kinetic energies across each component are negligible
iii. No pressure drops due to friction
iv. Only pure refrigerant boils in the generator.
m
.
The nomenclature followed is: mass flow rate of
ms
.

refrigerant, kg/s = mass flow rate of strong solution (rich in

LiBr), kg/s s = mass flow rate of weak solution (weak in
LiBr), kg/s

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 7

'I*
I \\ A

---------

Qc
Qe

2
ER

9 10
Fig.1
5.5:
Sche
matic
of a
H2OLiBr
syste
m
A:
Absor
ber;
C:
Cond
enser
; E:
Evap
orato
r; G:
Gene
rator;
P:
Soluti
on
Pump
SHX:
Soluti
on
HX;
ER:
Refri
geran
t
Expa
nsion
valve;
ES:
Soluti
on
Expa
nsion
valve
The
circula
tion
ratio
() is
define
d as
the
ratio
of
strong
solutio
n flow

rate
to
refrig
erant
flow
rate.
It is
given
by:
m
=
m

15
this

m ss =m
The
anal
ysis
is
carri
ed
out
by
appl
ying
mass
and
ener
gy
bala
nce
acros
s
each
com
pone
nt.
C
o.
.m
1.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

Expansion valve (refrigerant):

m m2 =m3 h2

(15.12)
(15.13)

=h3 Evaporator:
m3 =m4 =m

(15.14)

Qe=m(h4-h3) Pe =
Psat (Te)

(15.15)
(15.16)

where Te is the evaporator temperature

Absorber:
From total mass balance: m +
mss = mws mss=m mws=(1 +
)m

(15.17)
From mass balance for pure water:

mss
mws
m+

= (1-ws)

ws

(1-ss)

(15.18)

=
ws
5m
hQ +m
4a

ss-
mh10 -(1 + )mh

(15.19)

or, Qa =m[(h4 -h5) + (h10 -h5)]

(15.20)

The first term in the above equation m(h4 -h5) represents the enthalpy change of
water as changes its state from vapour at state 4 to liquid at state 5. The second term
m(h10 -h5) represents the sensible heat transferred as solution at state 10 is cooled to
solution at state 5.
Solution pump:
m5 = m6 = mws

(15.21)

WP =mws(h6 -h5) = (1 + )m(h6 -h5)

(15.22)

however, if we assume the solution to be incompressible, then:

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 9

WP = (1 + )mvsol(P6 -P5)=(1 + )mvsol(Pc -Pe)

(15.23)

where vsol is the specific volume of the solution which can be taken to be
approximately equal to 0.00055 m3/kg. Even though the solution pump work is small
it is still required in the selection of suitable pump.
Solution heat exchanger:
m6 = m 7 = m ws

(15.24)

m8=m9=mss
heat transfer rate in the solution heat exchanger, QHX is given by:
QHX = (1 + )m(h7 -h6) = m(h8 -h9)

(15.25)

Generator:
m7=m8+m1 Heat input to the

(15.26)

generator is given by:

Qg = mh1 +mh8 -(1 + )mh7

(15.27)

or, Qg =m[(h1-h7) + (h8-h7)]

(15.28)

in the above equation the 1st term on the RHS m(h1 - h7) represents energy required to
generate water vapour at state 1 from solution at state 7 and the 2nd term
m(h8 - h7) represents the sensible heat required to heat the solution from state 7 to
state 8.
Solution expansion vave:
m9=m10=mws
h9 =h10

(15.29)
(15.30)

The COP of the system is given by:

COP =

Qg+WP

(15.31)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 10

The second law (exergetic) efficiency of the system r|II is given by:
COP fQe Y Tg YTc- II COPmax |Qg lTg-Tcl Te

Te
(15.32)
In order to find the steady-state performance of the system from the above set
of equations, one needs to know the operating temperatures, weak and strong solution
concentrations, effectiveness of solution heat exchanger and the refrigeration capacity.
It is generally assumed that the solution at the exit of absorber and generator is at
equilibrium so that the equilibrium P-T-E, and h-T-E, charts can be used for evaluating
solution property data. The effectiveness of solution heat exchanger, sHX is given by:
(T7 - T )
S

HX =

(15.33)

(T8 - T6 )
From the above equation the temperature of the weak solution entering the
generator (T7) can be obtained since T6 is almost equal to T5 and T8 is equal to the
generator temperature Tg. The temperature of superheated water vapour at state 1 may
be assumed to be equal to the strong solution temperature T8.

15.4. Practical problems in water-lithium bromide systems

Practical problems typical to water-lithium bromide systems are:
698.
699.
700.

Crystallization
Air leakage, and
Pressure drops

As mentioned before to prevent crystallization the condenser pressure has to be

maintained at certain level, irrespective of cooling water temperature. This can be
done by regulating the flow rate of cooling water to the condenser. Additives are also
added in practical systems to inhibit crystallization. Since the entire system operates
under vacuum, outside air leaks into the system. Hence an air purging system is used
in practical systems. Normally a two-stage ejector type purging system is used to
remove air from the system. Since the operating pressures are very small and specific
volume of vapour is very high, pressure drops due to friction should be minimized.
This is done by using twin- and single-drum arrangements in commercial systems.

15.5. Commercial systems

Commercial water-lithium bromide systems can be:
701.
702.

Single stage or single-effect systems, and

Multi stage or multi-effect systems

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 11

Single stage systems operate under two pressures one corresponding to the
condenser-generator (high pressure side) and the other corresponding to evaporatorabsorber. Single stage systems can be either:
703.
704.

Twin drum type, or

Single drum type

Since evaporator and absorber operate at the same pressure they can be housed in
a single vessel, similarly generator and condenser can be placed in another vessel as
these two components operate under a single pressure. Thus a twin drum system
consists of two vessels operating at high and low pressures. Figure 15.6 shows a
commercial, single stage, twin drum system.
Heal
Chille
S'.eam
exchanger
d
water
Solulicr
rump

R&frigerarit p^mp

Fig.15.6: A commercial, twin-drum type, water-lithium bromide system

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 12

As shown in the figure, the cooling water (which acts as heat sink) flows first to
absorber, extracts heat from absorber and then flows to the condenser for condenser
heat extraction. This is known as series arrangement. This arrangement is
advantageous as the required cooling water flow rate will be small and also by
sending the cooling water first to the absorber, the condenser can be operated at a
higher pressure to prevent crystallization. It is also possible to have cooling water
flowing parallelly to condenser and absorber, however, the cooling water requirement
in this case will be high. A refrigerant pump circulates liquid water in evaporator and
the water is sprayed onto evaporator tubes for good heat and mass transfer. Heater
tubes (steam or hot water or hot oil) are immersed in the strong solution pool of
generator for vapour generation. Pressure drops between evaporator and absorber and
between generator and condenser are minimized, large sized vapour lines are
eliminated and air leakages can also be reduced due to less number of joints.
Fig.15.7: A commercial, single-drum type, water-lithium bromide system
Version
ME, shows
IIT Kharagpur
13 system of single drum type in which all the four
Figure1 15.7
a single stage
components are housed in the same vessel. The vessel is divided into high and low
pressure sides by using a diaphragm.

In multi-effect systems a series of generators operating at progressively

reducing pressures are used. Heat is supplied to the highest stage generator operating
at the highest pressure. The enthalpy of the steam generated from this generator is
used to generate some more refrigerant vapour in the lower stage generator and so on.
In this manner the heat input to the system is used efficiently by generating more
refrigerant vapour leading to higher COPs. However, these systems are more complex
in construction and require a much higher heat source temperatures in the highest
stage generator. Figures 15.8 and 15.9 show commercial double-effect systems.
Figure 15.10 shows the double effect cycle on Dhring plot.
Cooling
Water tonoMgerartUquU

Refrigerant Vapcf
Solution Pump

tfaurout

Kah-ctag*
Solution Heal Eaehiftflor
Solution Hoot Excbng r

Refrigerant liquid
AbsoriMflt sotiriton

Fig.15.8: A commercial, double-effect, water-lithium bromide system

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 14

Fig.15.9: A commercial, double-effect, water-lithium bromide system

Ph,g

Qg,in

Pc=Pl,g

Pe=Pa
Te

Tc

= Ta

Tl,g

Th,g

Fig.15.10: Double effect VARS on Dhring plot

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 15

15.6. Heat sources for water-lithium bromide systems

Water-lithium bromide systems can be driven using a wide variety of heat
sources. Large capacity systems are usually driven by steam or hot water. Small
capacity systems are usually driven directly by oil or gas. A typical single effect
system requires a heat source at a temperature of about 120oC to produce chilled
water at 7oC when the condenser operates at about 46oC and the absorber operates at
about 40oC. The COPs obtained aor in the range of 0.6 to 0.8 for single effect systems
while it can be as high as 1.2 to 1.4 for multi-effect systems.

15.7. Minimum heat source temperatures for LiBr-Water

systems
Application data for a single-stage water-lithium bromide vapour absorption
system with an output chilled water temperature of 6.7 oC (for air conditioning
applications) is shown in Table 15.1.
Cooling water temperature
(inlet to absorber &
condenser)
23.9oC
26.7oC
29.4oC
32.2oC

Minimum Heat source

temperature
(Inlet to generator)
65oC
75 oC
85 oC
95 oC

COP
0.75
0.74
0.72
0.71

Table 15.1. Application data for a single-stage water-lithium bromide system

The above values are simulated values, which were validated on actual
commercial systems with very efficient heat and mass transfer design. If the heat and
mass transfer is not very efficient, then the actual required heat source temperatures
will be higher than the reported values. For a given cooling water temperature, if the
heat source temperature drops below the minimum temperature given above, then the
COP drops significantly. For a given cooling water temperature, if the heat source
temperature drops below a certain temperature (minimum generation temperature),
then the system will not function. Minimum generation temperature is typically 10 to
15oC lower than the minimum heat source temperature. If air cooled condensers and
absorbers are used, then the required minimum heat source temperatures will be much
higher ( 150oC). The COP of the system can be increased significantly by multieffect (or mult-stage) systems. However, addition of each stage increases the required
heat source temperature by approximately 50oC.

15.7 Capacity control

Capacity control means capacity reduction depending upon load as the
capacity will be maximum without any control. Normally under both full as well as
part loads the outlet temperature of chilled water is maintained at a near constant
value. The refrigeration capacity is then regulated by either:

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 16

705.
Regulating the flow rate of weak solution pumped to the generator
through the solution pump
706.
Reducing the generator temperature by throttling the supply steam, or
by reducing the flow rate of hot water
707.
Increasing the condenser temperature by bypassing some of the
cooling water supplied to the condenser
Method 1 does not affect the COP significantly as the required heat input reduces
with reduction in weak solution flow rate, however, since this may lead to the problem
of crystallization, many a time a combination of the above three methods are used in
commercial systems to control the capacity.

Questions:
1. Vapour absorption refrigeration systems using water-lithium bromide:
708. Are used in large air conditioning systems
709. Are used in large frozen food storage applications
710. Operate under
vacuum c) All of the above
Ans. a) and c)
2. For a required refrigeration capacity, the solution heat exchanger used in waterlithium bromide systems:
711.
712.
713.
714.

Reduces the required heat input to generator

Reduces the heat rejection rate at absorber
Reduces heat rejection rate at condenser
Reduces the required heat source temperature

Ans. a) and b)
3. In water-lithium bromide systems:
715.
716.
717.
718.

Crystallization of solution is likely to occur in absorber

Crystallization of solution is likely to occur in solution heat exchanger
Crystallization is likely to occur when generator temperature falls
Crystallization is likely to occur when condenser pressure falls

Ans. a) and d)
4. In commercial water-lithium bromide systems
719.
720.
721.
722.

Crystallization is avoided by regulating cooling water flow rate to condenser

Crystallization is avoided by adding additives
An air purging system is used to maintain vacuum
All of the above

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 17

Ans. d)
5. Commercial multi-effect absorption systems:
723.
724.
725.
726.

Yield higher COPs

Yield higher refrigeration temperatures
Require lower heat source temperatures
Require higher heat source temperatures

Ans. a) and d)
6. In water-lithium bromide systems:
727. The required heat source temperature should be higher than minimum heat
generation temperature
728. The required heat source temperature decreases as cooling water temperature
increases
729. The required heat source temperature is higher for air cooled condensers,
compared to water cooled condensers
730. All of the above
Ans. a) and c)
7. In commercial water-lithium bromide systems, the system capacity is regulated by:
731.
732.
733.
734.

Controlling the weak solution flow rate to generator

Controlling the flow rate of chilled water to evaporator
Controlling the temperature of heating fluid to generator
All of the above

Ans. a) and c)
8. A single stage vapour absorption refrigeration system based on H 2O-LiBr has a
refrigeration capacity of 300 kW. The system operates at an evaporator temperature of
5oC (Psat=8.72 mbar) and a condensing temperature of 50 oC (Psat=123.3 mbar). The
exit temperatures of absorber and generator are 40oC and 110oC respectively. The
concentration of solution at the exit of absorber and generator are 0.578 and 0.66,
respectively. Assume 100 percent effectiveness for the solution heat exchanger, exit
condition of refrigerant at evaporator and condenser to be saturated and the condition
of the solution at the exit of absorber and generator to be at equilibrium. Enthalpy of
strong solution at the inlet to the absorber may be obtained from the equilibrium
solution data.
Find:
735.

The mass flow rates of refrigerant, weak and strong solutions

736. Heat transfer rates at the absorber, evaporator, condenser, generator and
solution heat exchanger
737.

System COP and second law efficiency, and

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 18

d) Solution pump work (density of solution = 1200 kg/m3).

Given:
Refrigeration capacity

300 kW

Evaporator temperature

5oC

Condenser temperature

50oC

Absorber temperature

40oC

Generator temperature

110oC

Weak solution concentration,WS

0.578

Strong solution concentration, ^SS

0.66

Effectiveness of solution HX, SHX

1.0
1200 kg/m3

Density of solution,psol
Refrigerant exit at evaporator & condenser
Solution at the exit of absorber & generator :

Saturated
Equilibrium

Referring to Fig.15.5;
Assuming the refrigerant vapour at the exit of generator to be in equilibrium with the
strong solution leaving the generator
=> Temperature of vapour at generator exit = 110oC
=> enthalpy of vapour = 2501+1.88 X 110 = 2708 kJ/kg
From the definition of effectiveness of solution HX;
SHX = [mSSCp,SS(T8-T9)]/[mSSCp,SS(T8-T6)] = 1.0 (v mSS < mWS)
=> T9 = T6 = 40oC
From the above equation, the following property data at various points are obtained
using refrigerant property charts and water - LiBr solution property charts

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 19

State
point

Temperature
(oC)

Pressure
(mbar)

Mass
fraction,

Enthalpy
(kJ/kg)

110

123.3

2708

50

123.3

209

8.72

209

8.72

2510

40

8.72

0.578

-154

40

123.3

0.578

-154

123.3

0.578

-37.5

110

123.3

0.66

-13

40

123.3

0.66

-146

10

40

8.72

0.66

-146

The enthalpy of superheated water vapour (hv) may be obtained by using the equation:
hv = 2501 + 1.88 t, where hv is in kJ/kg and t is in oC.
Enthalpy of weak solution at the exit of solution HX is obtained from the energy
balance equation:mWS(h7-h6) = mSS(h8-h9) => h7 = h6+mSS(h8-h9)/mWS = -37.5 kJ/kg
a) Required mass flow rate of refrigerant, m = Qe/(h4-h3) = 0.1304 kg/s

(Ans.)

Circulation ratio, X = mSS/m = WS/(SS-WS) = 7.05

.-. mass flow rate of strong solution, mSS = Xm = 0.9193 kg/s
mass flow rate of weak solution, mWS = (A,+1)m = 1.05 kg/s

(Ans.)
(Ans.)

b) Heat transfer rates at various components:

Evaporator:

Qe = 300 kW (input data)

Absorber: From energy balance:

Qa = mh4+mSSh10-mWSh5 = 354.74 kW

(Ans.)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 20

Generator: From energy balance:

Qg = mh1+mSSh8-mWSh7 = 380.54 kW

(Ans.)

Condenser: From energy balance:

Qc = m(h1-h2) = 325.9 kW

(Ans.)

Solution heat exchanger: From energy balance:

QSHX = mX,(h8-h9) = m(X+1)(h7-h6) = 122.3 kW
c)

System COP (neglecting pump work) = Qe/Qg = 0.7884

(Ans.)
(Ans.)

Second law efficiency = COP/COPCarnot

COPCarnot = [Te/(Tc-Te)][(Tg-Ta)/Tg] = 1.129

.-. Second law efficiency = 0.6983

(Ans.)

d) Solution pump work (assuming the solution to be incompressible)

WP = vsol(P6-P5) = (P6-P5)/Psol = (123.3-8.72)*10 1/1200 = 0.0095 kW

(Ans.)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 21

Lesson
16 Vapour Absorption
Refrigeration Systems
Based On AmmoniaWater Pair
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 1

The specific objectives of this lesson are to:

738.
Introduce ammonia-water based vapour absorption refrigeration systems
(Section 16.1)
739.
Discuss the properties of ammonia-water mixtures and introduce pressuretemperature-concentration (p-T-) and enthalpy-temperature-concentration (h-T-)
charts (Section 16.2)
740.
Analyze some basic steady flow processes using ammonia-water mixtures
such as adiabatic and non-adiabatic mixing, throttling of solution streams and the
concept of rectification (Section 16.3)
At the end of the lecture, the student should be able to:
741.
Differentiate between water-lithium bromide and ammonia-water systems
vis--vis their properties
742.
Explain the concepts of bubble point and dew point temperatures
743.
Obtain thermodynamic properties of ammonia-water mixtures using p-T-
and h-T- charts
744.
Analyze important steady flow processes involving binary mixtures

16.1. Introduction
In vapour absorption refrigeration systems based on ammonia-water pair,
ammonia is the refrigerant and water is the absorbent. These systems are more versatile
than systems based on water-lithium bromide as they can be used for both sub-zero
(refrigeration) as well above 0oC (air conditioning) applications. However, these systems
are more complex in design and operation due to the smaller boiling point temperature
difference between the refrigerant and absorbent (about 133oC). Due to the smaller
boiling point temperature difference the vapour generated in the generator consists of
both ammonia as well as water. If water is allowed to circulate with ammonia in the
refrigerant circuit, then:
i. Heat transfer in condenser and evaporator becomes non-isothermal
ii. Evaporator temperature increases
iii. Evaporation will not be complete
iv. Water may get accumulated in the evaporator leading to malfunctioning of the plant
iv. Circulation ratio increases
Since all the above effects are detrimental to the performance of the system, it is
necessary to minimize the concentration of water vapour in ammonia at the inlet to the
condenser. This requires additional components, namely a rectification column and a
dephlegmator between generator and absorber, which increases the design complexity
and cost and also reduces the system COP compared to water-lithium bromide system.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 2

16.2. Properties of ammonia-water solutions

16.2.1. Composition
Similar to water-lithium bromide solutions, the composition of ammonia-water
solution is also expressed either in mass fraction () or mole fraction (x). However, for
ammonia-water solutions, the mass and mole fractions are defined in terms of ammonia.
For example the mass fraction is defined as the ratio of mass of ammonia to the total
mass of solution, i.e.,
mA
=

(16.1)
mA +mW

where mA and mW are the mass of ammonia and water in solution, respectively. Similarly,
the mole fraction of ammonia-water solution is defined as:
x=

nA
nA +nW

(16.2)

where nA and nW are the number of moles of ammonia and water in solution, respectively.
The number of moles of ammonia and water can easily be obtained from their respective
masses in solution and molecular weights, thus;
mA
nA =

mW
;and nW =

MA

(16.3)
MW

where MA (= 17.0 kg/kmol) and MW (= 18.0 kg/kmol) are the molecular weights of
ammonia and water respectively.
16.2.2. Vapour pressure of ammonia-water solutions
Liquid ammonia and water are completely miscible in all proportions, hence can
form solutions of all concentrations from 0 to 1, at normal temperatures. The effect of
ammonia in water is to lower the vapour pressure of water, similarly the effect of water in
ammonia is to lower ammonias vapour pressure. Thus the total pressure over ammoniawater solutions is made up of partial pressure of ammonia and partial pressure of water
vapour, and is always in between the saturation pressures of pure ammonia and water.
If Raoults law is applied to ammonia-water mixtures, then the total pressure at
any temperature, Ptotal is given by:
Ptotal = xPA +(1- x)PW

(16.4)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 3

where x is the liquid phase mole fraction of ammonia, P A and PW are the saturation
pressures of pure ammonia and pure water at that temperature.
However, similar to water-lithium bromide solutions, ammonia-water solutions also
deviate from ideal solution behaviour predicted by Raoults law in a negative manner,
i.e., at a given temperature of the solution the actual vapour pressure will be less than that
predicted by Raoults law (activity coefficient is much smaller than 1.0).
For example, at a mass fraction of 0.4 and temperature of 40 oC, Raoults law
predicts a vapour pressure of 6.47 bar, whereas the measured vapour pressure is 3.029
bar.
The vapour pressure data of ammonia-water solutions is also available in the form
of Dhring and other P-T- plots.
16.2.3. Composition of ammonia-water vapour
Since the vapour above ammonia-water liquid consists of both ammonia and
water vapour, it is essential to distinguish between the composition in liquid phase and
composition in vapour phase. The superscripts L and V will be used to distinguish
between liquid and vapour phase compositions. Thus L stands for liquid phase mass
fraction and V stands for vapour phase mass fraction. Though the vapour phase
composition, can be obtained by assuming ideal solution behaviour, it is observed that the
actual vapour composition deviates from that predicted by ideal mixture equations. Based
on experimental measurements, charts have been developed for obtaining composition of
ammonia-water mixture in vapour phase in equilibrium with a solution of ammonia and
water at different temperatures. Figure 16.1 shows the construction of such a chart using
which one can obtain the composition of mixture in vapour phase from known values of
liquid phase mass fraction (L) and saturated temperature of pure ammonia or pressure.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 4

Tsat,NH3

Mass
fraction
of
ammoni
a in
vapour,
^V
---------------

Fig.
16.1.
Vapo
urliqui
d
equil
ibriu
m
char
t for
amm
onia
wate
r
solut
ion
16.2.4.
Bubble
point
and
dew
point
for
ammon
iawater

mixtu
res
F
igure
16.2
shows
a
cylinde
r
contain
ing
mixtur
e
of
ammon
ia and
water.
The
pressur
e
on
the
mixtur
e
is
maintai
ned
consta
nt with
the
help of
a freefloatin
g
piston
with
fixed
weight
s.
Initiall
y
(State
1) the
cylinde
r
consist
s
of
subcoo
led
solutio
n
of
ammon
ia-

water
mixture.
Now
heat is
supplie
d to the
system
and the
tempera
ture of
the
solution
is
increase
d
steadily,
the
mass
fraction
of the
solution
remains
constant
at
1
initially.
At
a
certain
tempera
ture the
first
vapour
bubble
appears.
The
tempera
ture at
which
the first
bubble
appears
is called
as
bubble
point
(=Tbubbl
e) of the
solution
at that
concentr
ation
and

pressure. Further heating results

in increase in temperature and
formation of more vapour as
shown in the figure (State 2). If
heating is continued further, then
the temperature

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

5

increases continuously, as more liquid is converted into vapour, and finally at a particular
temperature the last liquid droplet vaporizes. The temperature at which the last liquid
droplet evaporates is called as dew point temperature (Tdew). When heating is continued
further the mixture enters into superheated vapour state (State 3). It should be noted that
unlike pure fluids, the temperature of the ammonia-water mixture increases continuously
as the liquid undergoes vaporization. This is to say that the phase change process is
characterized by a temperature glide, which is the difference between the dew point and
bubble point temperatures. If this process is repeated with different initial concentrations
starting from 0 (pure water) to 1 (pure ammonia) and at the same pressure, different
values of bubble and dew points will be obtained. Of course when the concentration is 0
(pure water) or 1 (pure ammonia) the bubble and dew points coincide. Now if we plot the
temperatures (bubble point and dew point) against concentration and join all the bubble
points by a curve and all the dew points by another curve, then we would get the
equilibrium Temperature vs concentration curve for ammonia-water mixtures at that
pressure as shown in Fig.16.3. The loci of all the bubble points is called as bubble point
line and the loci of all the dew points is known as the dew point line. The bubble point
line is the saturated liquid line and the dew point line is the saturated vapour line for the
mixture at that pressure. The region between the bubble and dew point lines is the twophase region where both liquid and vapour coexist in equilibrium. Different bubble point
and dew point lines will be obtained if the experiment is carried out with different
pressures. For example, Figure 16.4 shows the bubble and dew point lines for two
different pressures, P1 and P2. The same results can also be obtained if one starts the
experiment initially with superheated vapour and then start cooling it. In this case, the
dew point is the temperature at which the first liquid droplet forms from the vapour and
the bubble point is the temperature at which the last vapour bubble condenses.

1P
1P
JP
V

Heat
Heat

Heat

(1)

(2)

(3)

Fig.16.2: A simple experiment illustrating the principle of bubble and dew points

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 6

P=

Subcooled
Dew
Point line
liquid
Superheated
T W,Sat
vapour
Bubble Point line
Tdew

T bubble

Constant

t~

0LL VI
1
V

1
Fig.1
6.3:
Equili
brium
tempe
rature
conce
ntrati
on
curve
for
NH3H2O
at a
consta
nt
pressu
re

0
1 (p
ur
e
H
2

)
(pure
NH3)
Fig.16.4: Bubble
point and dew
point curves at
two different
pressures

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

Now since the process is carried out in a closed system, the mass of both ammonia and
water will be conserved. The concentration of subcooled liquid will be same as the
concentration of superheated vapour. However, in the two-phase region in which the
saturated liquid exists in equilibrium with saturated vapour, the concentration of liquid
and vapour will be different. For example, at point 2 in Fig.16.3, the temperature of
saturated liquid and vapour will be same as they are in equilibrium, hence, the
concentration of liquid will be "t2L (intersection of constant temperature line with
bubble point line) and that of vapour will be c,2 (intersection of constant temperature
line with dew point line) as shown in the figure. Obviously the vapour formed initially
will be richer in the low boiling point substance (ammonia) and the liquid remaining will
be rich in high boiling point substance (water). For example, as shown in
Fig.16.3, the concentration of the first vapour bubble will be ,1 and the concentration of
the last liquid droplet will be 1L.Since the total mass as well as mass of individual
components is always conserved, we can write mass balance for total mass (m total) and
ammonia (mA) mass at state 2 as:
mtotal =m2L +m2V

(16.5)

mA=^2Lm2L+^2Vm2V=^1mtotal

(16.6)

where m2 L and m2 V are the mass of liquid and vapour at state 2, respectively.
From the above equations it can be easily shown that:
m2L f2V-1
L
1-^2

V
2

or

(16.7)

U1-S

m2L(^ -^2L)=m2V(^2V -1)

(16.8)

The above equation is called as the mixing rule or lever rule for the binary
mixtures such as ammonia and water. It implies that the fraction of liquid and vapour in
the two-phase mixture is inversely proportional to the distance between the mixture
condition 2 and the saturated liquid and vapour states 2Land 2V, respectively.
16.2.5. Enthalpy of ammonia-water mixtures
Liquid phase:
The enthalpy of ammonia-water solution in liquid phase, hL is calculated in a
manner similar to that of water-lithium bromide solutions, i.e., by the equation:
hL = ^.LhAL+(1-^L)hWL+Ahmix

(16.9)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 8

where Lis the liquid phase mass fraction of ammonia, hAL and hWLare liquid phase
enthalpies of pure ammonia and water respectively. hmix is the heat of mixing, which is
negative (exothermic) similar to water-lithium bromide mixtures.
Using the above equation one can calculate the specific enthalpy of ammoniawater solutions at any concentration and temperature provided the heat of mixing is
known from measurements. Thus enthalpy charts for solution are plotted as a field of
isotherms against mass fraction by taking suitable reference values for enthalpy of
ammonia and water. Since pressure does not have a significant effect on liquid enthalpy
(except at critical point), normally pressure lines are not shown on typical solution
enthalpy charts Also enthalpy of subcooled liquid is generally assumed to be equal to
the saturated enthalpy at that temperature without loss of much accuracy
Vapour phase:
Evaluation of enthalpy of a mixture of vapours of ammonia and water is more
complicated compared to liquid phase enthalpy. This is due to the dependence of vapour
enthalpy on both temperature and pressure. However, to simplify the problem, it is
generally assumed that ammonia and water vapour mix without any heat of mixing. Then
the enthalpy of the vapour mixture, hV is given by:
hV = .VhAV +(1-V)hWV

(16.10)

where .Vis the vapour phase mass fraction of ammonia and hAV and hWVare the
specific enthalpies of ammonia vapour and water vapour respectively at the temperature
of the mixture. However, since vapour enthalpies depend on temperature as well as
pressure, one has to evaluate the vapour enthalpy at suitable pressure, which is not equal
to the total pressure. An approximate, but practically useful method is to evaluate the
vapour enthalpies of ammonia and water at pressures, PA and PW given by:
PA=yPtotal

(16.11) PW
= (1 - y)Ptotal
where y is the vapour phase mole fraction of ammonia and Ptotal is the total pressure. It
should be noted that PA and PW are equal to the partial pressures of ammonia and water
only if they behave as ideal gases. However since ammonia and water vapour may not
approach the ideal gas behaviour at all temperatures and pressures, in general PA and PW
are not equal to the partial pressures. Using this method enthalpies of ammonia-water
mixtures in vapour phase have been obtained as functions of temperature and mass
fraction.

16.2.6. The complete enthalpy-composition diagram for ammonia-water mixtures:

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 9

Normally, charts of enthalpy-temperature-mass fraction are available which give

both liquid phase as well as vapour enthalpy of mixtures. Figure 16.5 shows one such
chart. Figure 16.6 shows the enthalpy-composition diagram at a constant pressure P. In
the figure point a represents the condition of saturated liquid mixture at a temperature T
with a liquid phase mass fraction of L. The liquid phase enthalpy corresponding to this
condition is given by hL. The composition and enthalpy of vapour mixture in equilibrium
with the liquid mixture at temperature T and pressure P are obtained by drawing a vertical
line from a upto the auxiliary line and then drawing a horizontal line to the right from the
intersection of the vertical line with the auxiliary line. The intersection of this horizontal
line with the dew point line a gives the vapour phase mass fraction V and the vapour
phase enthalpy hV as shown in the figure. The isotherm T in the two-phase region is
obtained by joining points a and a as shown in the figure. Point b in the figure lies in the
two-phase region. The specific enthalpy of this point hb is given by:
hb =(1-b)hL+bhV

(16.12)

where b is the quality or dryness fraction of the two-phase mixture at b. Since points a,
a and b are co-linear, the dryness fraction b is given by:
L

b -

V-L

(16.13)

In actual enthalpy-composition diagrams the isotherms are not shown in two-phase

region as a different set of them exist for each pressure.
It is important to note that it is not possible to fix the state of the mixture
(subcooled, saturated, two-phase or superheated) just from temperature and mass fraction
alone, though one can calculate enthalpy of the mixture from temperature and mass
fraction. This is due to the reason that at a given mass fraction and temperature,
depending upon the pressure the point can be subcooled or saturated or superheated.
For example, a liquid mixture with a mass fraction of 0.4 and temperature of 80 oC has an
enthalpy of 210 kJ/kg, and it will be in subcooled condition if the pressure is 4.29 bar and
saturated if the pressure is 8.75 bar.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 10

Fig.16.5: h-T- chart for ammonia-water solution

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 11

Dew point line

hfg,W
Auxiliary
hfg,A

line

h
Bubble point line

a
P = Constant

1
b

F
ig.16.6:
Enthalp
ycomposi
tion
diagram
of NH3H2O at
a
constant
pressure
P
Determi
nation
of
temper
ature of
mixture
in twophase
region:
A
trialanderror
method
has to be
used to
determi

ne
the
temperatu
re of a
point in
twophase
region if
its
enthalpy,
liquid
phase
mass
fraction
and
pressure
are
known.
The trialand-error
method
can
be
graphical
or
numerical
. Figure
16.7
shows a
graphical
method
for
finding
the
temperatu
re
of
point x in
the twophase
region
which is
at
a
known
pressure
Px, liquid
phase
mass
fraction
x
and
enthalpy
hx.
To
start with,
point a is
obtained
as shown

in
the
figure
by
drawing
a
vertical
line
from
point x
upto the
auxiliar
y
line
and then
drawing
a
horizont
al line
from the
intersect
ion
point a
upto the
dew
point
line, the
intersect
ion of
which
gives a.
Then a
straight
line ax-a
is
drawn
as
shown.
Next
point b
is
obtained
by
drawing
a
vertical
line
upto the
auxiliar
y
line
and then
drawing
a
horizont
al line

from b
upto the
dew point
line to get
b. Then
line b-xb
is
drawn
passing
through
x.
This
procedure
is
repeated
until
converge
nce
is
obtained.
N
umericall
y
the
temperatu
re can be
obtained
from the
equation,
which
needs to
be
satisfied
for each
end of the
isotherm
passing
through
x, i.e.,

L
x

To start
with
guess
values of
hL and L
are
assumed
by taking
some
point on
the
bubble
point line.
Then
saturated
vapour
properties
hV and V
are
obtained
from the
enthalpycompositi
on charts
using the
guess
values of
hL and L.
Then
using the
above
equation,
Version 1 ME,
IIT Kharagpur
12

new values of hL and L are obtained. Then these new values are used to obtain next set of
hV and V. This procedure is repeated till the values converge. Once the converged values
of hL and L are obtained then the temperature is read from the enthalpy-composition
chart.

Px = Constant

0
h

hx
Fig.16.7: A graphical method for finding temperature of liquid-vapour mixture

16.3. Basic steady-flow processes with binary mixtures

a) Adiabatic mixing of two streams: When two streams of ammonia-water solutions are
mixed adiabatically as shown in Fig.16.8, one can write mass and energy balance
equations as:
m1 +m2 =m3
m1 1 +m22 =m33
m1h1 +m2h2 =m3h3

(16.15)
(16.16)
(16.17)

From the above equations, the mass fraction and enthalpy of the mixture at 3 are given
by:

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 13

(2-1)

3 = 1+ m2
h3 =h1 +2 (h2-h1) m3

(16.18)
(16.19)

1
Fig.16.8:
Adiabatic
mixing of two
solution
streams
F
igure
16.9
show
s the
adiab
atic
mixin
g
proce
ss
with
the
mixtu
re
state
3
lying
in
twophase
regio
n on
the
enthal
pycomp
ositio
n
diagr
am.
The
mixtu
re
state
in
twophase
regio
n
impli
es
that

so
me
vap
ori
zati
on
has
occ
urr
ed
dur
ing
adi
aba
tic
mi
xin
g
of
the
two
inle
t
stre
am
s 1
and
2.
Th
e
ent
hal
py
and
co
mp
osit
ion
of
the
two
pha
se
mi
xtu
re
at 3
can
be
obt
ain

m3

ed by
using
the
equati
ons
given
above
.
Howe
ver,
since
this is
in
twophase
regio
n, the
mixtu
re
consi
sts of
satura
ted
liquid
and
vapou
r. The
dryne
ss
fracti
on
and
tempe
rature
of the
mixtu
re
(T3)
have
to be
obtai
ned
by
trialanderror
meth
od by
apply
ing
mixin
g

rul
es.
Th
e
fra
ctio
n
of
the
vap
our
in
the
mi
xtu
re
at 3
is
the
n
giv
en
by:
V
=
3
33L
L
=
m

b)
Mixin
g of
two
strea
ms
with
heat
transf
er:
The
proce
ss of
mixin
g of
two
strea
ms
with
heat
transf
er
takes
place
in
absor
ber
and
gener
ator
of
absor
ption
refrig
eratio
n
syste
ms.
For
exam
ple,
Fig.1
6.10
show
s the
mixin
g of
satura
ted
refrig
erant
vapou

r
(sta
te
1)
wit
h
sat
ura
ted
sol
uti
on
of
refr
ige
ran
tabs
orb
ent
(sta
te
2)
in
the
abs
orb
er.
Th
e
res
ulti
ng
mi
xtu
re
is a
sol
uti
on
that
is
ric
h in
refr
ige
ran
t
(sta
te
3).
Sin

Version 1 ME,
IIT Kharagpur
14

h
h

5:
5

h
1

1
F
i
g
.
1
6
.
9
:
A
d
i
a
b
a
t
i
c
m
i
x
i
n
g
o
f
t
w
o

s
t
r
e
a
m
s
o
n
h
T

d
i
a
g
r
a
m

Versi
on 1
ME,
IIT
Khar
agpur

15

m1 +m2 =m3
m1 1 +m22 =m33
m1h1 +m2h2 =m3h3 +Q

(16.21)
(16.22)
(16.23)
From
the
above
equati
ons,
the
enthal
py of
the
mixtur
e at 3
is
given
by:

h3=h1+2( h 2 h1)-
(16.24)
T
hus
with
heat
transfe
r from
the
mixing
chamb
er, the
exit
state
lies at
a
vertica
l
distanc
e
of
(Q/m3)
below
the
state
which
would
result
withou
t heat
transfe
r (point

3). The exit point would

lie above the state
without heat transfer if
heat is transferred to the
mixing chamber.
c) Throttling process:
Throttling or isenthalpic
expansion of ammoniawater solution takes place
in the solution expansion
valve of the absorption
refrigeration
system.
Figure 16.11 shows the
throttling process on
enthalpy-composition
diagram. Since both mass
and energy are conserved
during this process, and
there is neither work nor
heat transfer, we obtain:
1 =2
h1=h2

(16.25) (16.26)

Fig.16.10: Mixing of two

streams with heat
transfer
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

Hence the inlet and outlet states, points 1 and 2 are identical on enthalpy-composition diagram as
shown in the figure. However, as there is possibility of vapour generation due to flashing, the
exit condition may be a mixture of saturated liquid and vapour at the outlet pressure P 2 then the
exit temperature T2 will be much lower than the inlet temperature T 1. Taking point 2 as in the
two-phase region corresponding to the outlet pressure P 2, one can get the vapour fraction and exit
temperature T2 by trial-end-error method as discussed earlier.

P2, Dew point line

P2, Bubble point line

h1=h2

1
2
1 =4:

4
Fig.16.11: Throttling of ammonia-water solution
d) Heating and cooling process concept of rectification: Figure 16.12 shows an
arrangement wherein an initially subcooled solution (state 1) is heated in a heat
exchanger A (HX A) in such a way that the exit condition 2 lies in the two-phase region.
This two-phase mixture then flows into an adiabatic separator (SEP A) where the
saturated liquid (state 3) and saturated vapour (state 4) are separated. The saturated
vapour at state 4 is then cooled to state 5 in another heat exchanger B (HX B) by rejecting
heat 4Q5. The resulting two-phase mixture is then fed to another adiabatic separator B
(SEP B), where again the saturated liquid (state 6) and saturated vapour (state 7) are
separated. It is assumed that the entire process takes place at a constant pressure and is a
steady-flow process.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 17

Q2/m1 Vapour, 7

HX (B)

V
L

<5

4Q5

SEP (B)
4

Saturated liquid,
6

HX (A)
1

Q5/m4

Fig.
12:
Hea
g an
cool
of
NH3
H2O
solu
n
conc
t of
recti
ation

1Q2

|SEP (A)

Saturated liquid,
3

Now mass

Heat excha

Mass balan

m1
=2 Energy
balance:
Q2

Separator

Mass balan

m2 =

m2
Energy bal

V
e

rsion 1
ME, IIT
Kharagp
ur 18

m2h2 =m3h3 +m4h4

from the above equations:

(16.32)

m3
4-2
h4-h2
length 4-2 m2
4-3
h4-h3
length 4-3
m4 = 2-3 = h 2 - h 3 = length 2-3 m2
4-3
h4-h3
length 4-3
Similar equations can be obtained for heat exchanger B and separator B. The entire
process is also shown on enthalpy-composition diagram in Fig.16.12.
It may be noted that from the above arrangement consisting of heating, cooling
and separation, one finally obtains a vapour at state 7 that is rich in ammonia. That is the
combination of heat exchangers with separators is equivalent to the process of
rectification. Heat exchanger A plays the role of generator, while heat exchanger B plays
the role of dephlegmator. To improve the process of rectification in actual vapour
absorption refrigeration systems, a rectifying column is introduced between the generator
and dephlegmator. In the rectifying column, the vapour from the separator A comes in
contact with the saturated liquid coming from separator B. As a result, there will be heat
and mass transfer between the vapour and liquid and finally the vapour comes out at a
much higher concentration of ammonia.
The practical ammonia-water based vapour absorption refrigeration system
incorporating rectifying column and dephlegmator in addition to the basic components
will be discussed in the next lesson.

Questions and Answers:

1. Presence of water vapour in the refrigerant circuit of a NH3-H2O system:
745.
746.
747.
748.

Decreases evaporator temperature

Increases evaporator temperature
Increases circulation ratio
Leads to non-isothermal heat transfer in evaporator and condenser

Ans. b), c) and d)

2. Compared to H2O-LiBr systems, a NH3-H2O system:
749.
750.
751.
752.

Requires additional components due to the requirement of rectification

Yields higher COP
Yields lower COP
Increases design complexity and system cost
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 19

Ans. a), c) and d)

3. Which of the following statements regarding the definition of concentration are TRUE:
753.
754.
755.
756.

A strong solution of H2O-LiBr implies a solution rich in refrigerant

A strong solution of H2O-LiBr implies a solution weak in refrigerant
A strong solution of NH3-H2O implies a solution rich in refrigerant
A strong solution of NH3-H2O implies a solution weak in refrigerant

Ans. b) and c)
4. Which of the following statements regarding NH3-H2O solution are TRUE:
757. The bubble point temperature is always higher than dew point temperature
758. The bubble point temperature is always lower than dew point temperature
759. At a given pressure, the bubble point and dew point temperatures are higher than
the saturation temperature of NH3 but lower than the saturation temperature of H2O
760. At a given pressure, the bubble point and dew point temperatures are lower than
the saturation temperature of NH3 but higher than the saturation temperature of H2O
Ans.: b) and c)
5. For NH3-H2O solution at equilibrium, which of the following statements are FALSE:
761. The concentration of liquid phase is lower than the concentration of vapour phase
762. The enthalpy of subcooled solution is a function of temperature and pressure
763. The enthalpy of superheated vapour is a function of temperature only
764. The state of the mixture can be uniquely determined by temperature and
concentration
Ans.: b) and d)
6. When a binary solution of NH3-H2O is throttled adiabatically:
765.
766.
767.
768.

Temperature always remains constant

Temperature may decrease
Temperature may increase
Enthalpy always remains constant

Ans.: b) and d)
7. A binary mixture of NH3 - H2O is at a temperature of 40oC and a liquid phase mole
fraction x of 0.5. Find the vapour pressure of the solution, if the activity coefficient of the
solution is 0.65. The saturation pressures of ammonia and water at 40oC are 1557 kPa and
7.375 kPa, respectively.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 20

Ans.: From Raoults law, the vapour pressure is given by:

Pv,Raoult =x.Psat,NH3 + (1 - x).Psat,H2O = 782.19 kPa

Using the definition of activity coefficient, a; the actual vapour pressure Pv is given by:
Pv,act =a.Pv,Raoult = 0.65X782.19 = 508.42 kPa

(Ans.)

8. A binary vapour mixture consisting of ammonia and water is at a mole fraction of 0.9
and 10oC. If the partial pressures of ammonia and water vapour in the mixture are 616.25
kPa and 1.227 kPa, respectively; and the specific vapour enthalpies of ammonia and
water are 1471.57 kJ/kg and 2519.9 kJ/kg, respectively, find a) the vapour pressure of the
mixture, and b) the specific enthalpy of the mixture.
Ans.:
a) Assume the vapour mixture to behave as a mixture of ideal gases, then the total
pressure of the mixture Pv is given by:
Pv = y.PNH + (1 - y).PH O = 554.75 kPa
b) The mass fraction of the mixture V is given by:
V
mA
nA.MA
mA+mW nA.MA +nW.MW

(Ans.)

17nA
17nA+18nW

Since the mole fraction of the vapour mixture is 0.9 nA = 9 nW

Substituting this in the expression for mass fraction, we find that V = 0.895
Again assuming the vapour mixture to behave as a mixture of ideal gases; the enthalpy of
the mixture is given by:
hV = V.hA + (1- V)hW = 1581.64 kJ/kg

(Ans.)

9. Find the dryness fraction (quality) and specific enthalpy of the two-phase (liquid &
vapour) of ammonia-water mixture using the following data:
Liquid phase mass fraction, L
Vapour phase mass fraction, V
Mass fraction of 2-phase mixture,
Specific enthalpy of saturated liquid, hL
Specific enthalpy of saturated vapour, hV

= 0.30
= 0.87
= 0.50
= 340 kJ/kg
= 1640 kJ/kg

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 21

Ans.:
Dryness fraction, \i/ =----------- =
=0.351
V
L
mV+mL ^ - ^

(Ans.)

Enthalpy of the two-phase mixture is given by:

h = (1-v|/)h +v|/h = 796.3 kJ/ kg

(Ans.)

9. Two solution streams are mixed in a steady flow device. A heat transfer rate of 24 kW
takes place from the device. Find the exit concentration and enthalpy using the data given
below:
Stream 1:

Mass flow rate, m1

Concentration, 1
Enthalpy, h1

= 0.1 kg/s
= 0.7
= 110 kJ/kg

Stream 2:

Mass flow rate, m2

Concentration, ^2
Enthalpy, h2

= 0.3 kg/s
= 0.4
= 250 kJ/kg

Ans.:
From mass balance of solution and ammonia, the exit concentration is given by ^3 :
3=

=0.475

(Ans.)

(m1 +m2)
From energy balance of solution and ammonia, the exit concentration is given by h3:
h3=^11

-------------------- = 155 kJ/kg

(m1 +m2)

22

(Ans.)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 22

Lesson
17 Vapour Absorption
Refrigeration Systems
Based On AmmoniaWater Pair
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 1

The specific objectives of this lesson are to:

769.
Introduce ammonia-water systems (Section 17.1)
770.
Explain the working principle of vapour absorption refrigeration
systems based on ammonia-water (Section 17.2)
771.
Explain the principle of rectification column and dephlegmator (Section
17.3)
772.
Present the steady flow analysis of ammonia-water systems (Section
17.4)
773.
Discuss the working principle of pumpless absorption refrigeration
systems (Section 17.5)
774.
Discuss briefly solar energy based sorption refrigeration systems
(Section 17.6)
775.
Compare compression systems with absorption systems (Section 17.7)
At the end of the lecture, the student should be able to:
776.
Draw the schematic of a ammonia-water based vapour
absorption refrigeration system and explain its working principle
777.
Explain the principle of rectification column and dephlegmator
using temperature-concentration diagrams
778.
Carry out steady flow analysis of absorption systems based on
ammonia-water
779.
Explain the working principle of Platen-Munters system
780.
List solar energy driven sorption refrigeration systems
781.
Compare vapour compression systems with vapour absorption
systems

17.1. Introduction
Vapour absorption refrigeration system based on ammonia-water is one of the
oldest refrigeration systems. As mentioned earlier, in this system ammonia is used
as refrigerant and water is used as absorbent. Since the boiling point temperature
difference between ammonia and water is not very high, both ammonia and water
are generated from the solution in the generator. Since presence of large amount of
water in refrigerant circuit is detrimental to system performance, rectification of the
generated vapour is carried out using a rectification column and a dephlegmator.
Since ammonia is used as the refrigerant, these systems can be used for both
refrigeration and air conditioning applications. They are available in very small (as
pumpless systems) to large refrigeration capacities in applications ranging from
domestic refrigerators to large cold storages. Since ammonia is not compatible with
materials such as copper or brass, normally the entire system is fabricated out of
steel. Another important difference between this system and water-lithium bromide
systems is in the operating pressures. While water-lithium bromide systems operate
under very low (high vacuum) pressures, the ammonia-water system is operated at
pressures much higher than atmospheric. As a result, problem of air leakage into the
system is eliminated. Also this system does not suffer from the problem of
crystallization encountered in water-lithium bromide systems. However, unlike water,
ammonia is both toxic and flammable. Hence, these systems need safety
precautions.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 2

Dephlegmator

Qd
Qg
10
6

Rectification column
Condenser
11

Qc
Heat Exchanger-I

Heat Exchanger-II
-7 -8

1
"14
133Absorber

Evaporator
2

Qe

\f Qa

Solution pump

Wp
Fig.17.1: Schematic of NH3-H2O based vapour absorption refrigeration system

17.2. Working principle

Figure 17.1 shows the schematic of an ammonia-water absorption
refrigeration system. Compared to water-lithium bromide systems, this system uses
three additional components: a rectification column, a dephlegmator and a
subcooling heat exchanger (Heat Exchanger-I). As mentioned before, the function
of rectification column and dephlegmator is to reduce the concentration of water
vapour at the exit of the generator. Without these the vapour leaving the generator
may consist of five to ten percent of water. However, with rectification column and
dephlegmator the concentration of water is reduced to less than one percent. The
rectification column could be in the form of a packed bed or a spray column or a
perforated plate column in which the vapour and solution exchange heat and mass.
It is designed to provide a large residence time for the fluids so that high heat and
mass transfer rates could be obtained. The subcooling heat exchanger, which is
normally of counterflow type is used to increase the refrigeration effect and to ensure
liquid entry into the refrigerant expansion valve.

As shown in the figure, low temperature and low pressure vapour (almost
pure ammonia) at state 14 leaves the evaporator, exchanges heat with the
condensed liquid in Heat Exchanger-I and enters the absorber at state 1. This
refrigerant is absorbed by the weak solution (weak in ammonia) coming from the
solution expansion valve, state 8. The heat of absorption, Q a is rejected to an
external heat sink. Next the strong solution that is now rich in ammonia leaves the
absorber at state 2 and is pumped by the solution pump to generator pressure, state
3. This high pressure solution is then pre-heated in the solution heat exchanger
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 3

(Heat Exchanger-II) to state 4. The preheated solution at state 4 enters the generator
and exchanges heat and mass with the hot vapour flowing out of the generator in the
rectification column. In the generator, heat is supplied to the solution (Qg). As a result
vapour of ammonia and water are generated in the generator. As mentioned, this hot
vapour with five to ten percent of water exchanges heat and mass with the rich
solution descending from the top. During this process, the temperature of the vapour
and its water content are reduced. This vapour at state 5 then enters the
dephlegmator, where most of the water vapour in the mixture is removed by cooling
and condensation. Since this process is exothermic, heat (Q d) is rejected to an
external heat sink in the dephlegmator. The resulting vapour at state 10, which is
almost pure ammonia (mass fraction greater than 99 percent) then enters the
condenser and is condensed by rejecting heat of condensation, Q c to an external
heat sink. The condensed liquid at state 11 is subcooled to state 12 in the subcooling
heat exchanger by rejecting heat to the low temperature, low pressure vapour
coming from the evaporator. The subcooled, high pressure liquid is then throttled in
the refrigerant expansion valve to state 13. The low temperature, low pressure and
low quality refrigerant then enters the evaporator, extracts heat from the refrigerated
space (Qe) and leaves the evaporator at state 14. From here it enters the subcooling
heat exchanger to complete the refrigerant cycle. Now, the condensed water in the
dephlegmator at state 9 flows down into the rectifying column along with rich solution
and exchanges heat and mass with the vapour moving upwards. The hot solution
that is now weak in refrigerant at state 6 flows into the solution heat exchanger
where it is cooled to state 7 by preheating the rich solution. The weak, but high
pressure solution at state 7 is then throttled in the solution expansion valve to state
8, from where it enters the absorber to complete its cycle.
As far as various energy flows out of the system are concerned, heat is
supplied to the system at generator and evaporator, heat rejection takes place at
absorber, condenser and dephlegmator and a small amount of work is supplied to
the solution pump.

17.3. Principle of rectification column and dephlegmator

Figure 17.2 shows the schematic of the rectification system consisting of the
generator, rectifying column and dephlegmator. As shown in the figure, strong
solution from absorber enters at the rectification column, vapour rich in ammonia
leaves at the top of the dephlegmator and weak solution leaves from the bottom of
the generator. A heating medium supplies the required heat input Q g to the generator
and heat Qd is rejected to the cooling water in the dephlegmator.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 4

Vapour to condenser

Strong
solution
Dephlegmator
Generator
from Heating
absorber
____ medium

igure

Cooling water

IB

I"
"il
-,w

7
?

Weak solution
to absorber
Enrichment of vapour
~Fig.17.2: Schematic of the rectification column used in NH3-H2 O systems
i

W1

&
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 5
Fig.17.3: Rectification process in the generator

17.3 shows the schematic of the generator with lower portion of the rectification
column and the process that takes place in this column on temperature-composition
diagram. As shown, in this column the ascending vapour generated in the generator
and initially at a mass fraction of WV is enriched in ammonia to SV as it exchanges
heat and mass with the descending rich solution, which had an initial concentration
of SL. During this process the solution becomes weak as ammonia is transferred
from liquid to vapour and water is transferred from vapour to liquid. In the limit with
infinite residence time, the vapour leaves at mass fraction SV that is in equilibrium
with the strong solution. It can also be seen that during this process, due to heat
transfer from the hot vapour to the liquid, the solution entering the generator section
is preheated. This is beneficial as it reduces the required heat input in the generator.
Figure 17.4 shows the principle of dephlegmator (or reflux condenser) in
which the ascending vapour is further enriched. At the top of the dephlegmator, heat
is removed from the vapour so that a part of the vapour condenses (reflux). This
reflux that is cooler, exchanges heat with the hotter vapour ascending in the column.
During this process water vapour is transferred from the vapour to the liquid and
ammonia is transferred from liquid to the vapour as shown in Fig. 17.4. As a result
the vapour leaves the rectification column in almost pure ammonia form with a
concentration of V.

Fig.17.4: Principle of dephlegmator

17.4. Steady-flow analysis of the system

The analysis is carried out in a manner similar to water-lithium bromide system,
i.e., by applying steady flow mass and energy balance to each component.
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 6

However, since the composition is defined on the basis of ammonia in the solution,
the terms weak and strong solution concentrations have different meanings. In
ammonia-water systems, strong solution means solution that is rich in ammonia,
consequently, weak solution refers to solution that is weak in ammonia.
The circulation ratio is defined as the ratio of weak solution to refrigerant
flow rate, i.e.,
=

mWS =m and mSS =(1 + )m

(17.1)

m
By applying mass balance across the absorber and assuming the amount of
water vapour in the refrigerant vapour at the exit of evaporator as negligible, the
circulation ratio can be shown to be:
1-S

where S and W are the mass fractions of the strong and weak solutions leaving the
absorber and entering the absorber, respectively.
Mass and energy balance equations for all the components are same as
those of water-lithium bromide system, however, the thermal energy input to the
generator will be different due to the heat transfer at the dephlegmator. Taking a
control volume that includes entire rectifying column (generator + rectification column
+ dephlegmator) as shown in Fig.17.5, we can write the energy equation as:
Qg -Qd =m10 h10 +m6 h6 -m4 h4

(17.3)

writing the mass flow rates of strong (point 4) and weak (point 6) solutions in terms of
refrigerant flow rate and mass fractions, we can write the above equation as:
Qg -Qd =m[(h10 -h 4 ) + (h6 -h4)]

(17.4)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 7

-i

"x ::::::::::::::::::::] /
hlegmator

Fig.17.6

Q,

Fig.17.5: Control volume for calculating heat input to the

system
From the above expression Qg-Qd can be calculated,
however, to find COP we need to know Q g. This requires estimation
of heat transferred in the dephlegmator, Q d. This can be obtained by
applying mass and energy balance across the dephlegmator section
as shown in Fig.17.6. From these equations it can be shown that for
ideal rectification with the exit vapour being pure ammonia, the
heat transferred in the dephlegmator is given by:
Qd
V
my
iH
(1-
17.6)
L =

h iV - h
10

+
1-
V

](hiVUiV-u heL)

i
L

= (hi -h10) +
HL(17.5)

^iV-4eL
The above equation is applicable at any section across the
upper rectification column. If the process is plotted on enthalpycomposition diagram as shown in Fig.17.6, it can be easily seen that
the ordinate of point R (called as Pole of the
(rectifier)
).
h i V - h e is equal to
h10 as HL is equal to HL
V

my

^-C

It should be noted that the line joining points L and V on

enthalpy-composition diagram need not be an isotherm. In other
words, points V and L need not be in equilibrium with each other, but
they have to satisfy the mass and energy balance across the control
volume.
For rectification to proceed in the column, it is essential that at
every cross-section, the temperature of the vapour should be higher
than that of the liquid. This is

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 8

possible only if the slope of the line passing through pole R is always steeper than
the isotherm in the two-phase region passing through h eL and eL. This can be
ensured by placing the pole R at a sufficiently high level on the = 1 axis. This in turn
fixes the minimum amount of reflux and the heat rejected at the dephlegmator. It is
observed that for ammonia-water mixtures the condition that the vapour must always
be warmer than the liquid is satisfied by drawing a straight line through R steeper
than the isotherm passing through the strong solution feed point (point 4). This way
the position of R is fixed and from this, the minimum amount of dephlegmator heat
Qd,min is determined. However, the actual dephlegmator heat Q d,act will be larger than
the minimum amount, and the ratio of minimum dephlegmator heat to actual
dephlegmator heat is called as rectifier efficiency, R given by:
IIR

--

Q d,min

(17.7)

Qd,act

The rectifier efficiency depends on the design of contact surface used for the
rectification column.
Sometimes, in the absence of required data, the COP is calculated by
assuming that the dephlegmator heat is a certain percentage of generator heat
(usually 10 to 20 percent).

17.5: Pumpless vapour absorption refrigeration systems

Conventional absorption refrigeration systems use a mechanical pump for
pumping the solution from absorber pressure to generator pressure. However, there
are also absorption refrigeration systems that do not require a mechanical pump.
These systems offer several advantages over conventional systems such as:
i. High reliability due to absence of moving parts
ii. Very little maintenance
iii. Systems require only low grade thermal energy, hence no need for any grid power
iv. Silent operation
Due to the above advantages the pumpless systems find applications such as
refrigerators for remote and rural areas, portable refrigerators, refrigerators for luxury
hotel rooms etc.
Several pumpless systems using both water-lithium bromide and ammoniawater have been developed over the last many decades. However, among these the
most popular and widely used system is the one known as Platen-Munters system or
Triple Fluid Vapour Absorption Refrigeration System (TFVARS). As mentioned in the
introduction, this system was developed by Platen and Munters of Sweden in 1930s.
It uses ammonia as refrigerant and water as absorbent and hydrogen as an inert
gas. Unlike conventional systems, the total pressure is constant throughout the
Platen-Munters system, thus eliminating the need for mechanical pump or
compressor. To allow the refrigerant (ammonia) to evaporate at low temperatures
in the evaporator, a third inert gas (hydrogen) is introduced into the evaporatorabsorber of the system. Thus even though the total pressure is constant throughout
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 9

the system, the partial pressure of ammonia in evaporator is much smaller than the
total pressure due to the presence of hydrogen.
For example: if the total pressure of the system is 15 bar, then the condenser
temperature will be 38.7oC (saturation temperature at 15 bar). If contribution of
hydrogen to total pressure in the evaporator is 14 bar, then the partial pressure of
ammonia in evaporator is 1 bar, hence ammonia can evaporate at 33oC (saturation
temperature at 1 bar), thus providing refrigeration effect at very low temperatures.
The liquid ammonia in the evaporator cannot boil in the evaporator as its
partial pressure is lower than the total pressure (no vapour bubbles form). The
ammonia simply evaporates into the hydrogen gas (just as liquid water evaporates
into the atmosphere) as long as hydrogen gas is not saturated with ammonia. The
ammonia vapour generated is carried away by the process of diffusion, hence
Platen-Munters systems are also called as diffusion-absorption systems.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 10

Fig.17.8: Working principle of Platen-Munters system

Figure 17.8 shows the schematic of a triple-fluid Platen-Munters system.
Starting with the strong solution at the exit of the absorber (state 5), heat is supplied
in the generator; ammonia vapour is generated as a result. The vapour generated
moves up through the bubble pump due to buoyancy. As the vapour moves up it
carries the weak solution to the top of the bubble pump. At the top, the weak solution
and vapour are separated. The refrigerant vapour at state 1 flows into the condenser,
where it condenses by rejecting heat to the heat sink (condensation takes place at
high temperature as ammonia pressure is equal to the total pressure). The
condensed liquid at state 2 flows into evaporator. As it enters into the evaporator its
pressure is reduced to its partial pressure at evaporator temperature due to the
presence of hydrogen gas in the evaporator. Due to the reduction in pressure, the
ammonia evaporates by taking heat from the refrigerated space. The ammonia
vapour diffuses into the hydrogen gas. Since the mixture of ammonia and hydrogen
are cooler, it flows down into the absorber due to buoyancy. In the absorber, the
ammonia vapour is absorbed by the weak solution coming from the bubble pump.
Heat of absorption is rejected to the heat sink. Due to this, the temperature of
hydrogen gas increases and it flows back into the evaporator due to buoyancy. Thus
the circulation of fluids throughout the system is maintained due to buoyancy effects
and gravity.
Due to the evaporation process (as against boiling in conventional systems)
the temperature of the evaporating liquid changes along the length of the evaporator.
The coldest part is obtained at the end where hydrogen enters the evaporator
as the partial of ammonia is least at this portion. This effect can be used to
provide two temperature sections in the evaporator for example: one for frozen food
storage and the other for fresh food storage etc.
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 11

A liquid seal is required at the end of the condenser to prevent the entry of
hydrogen gas into the condenser. Commercial Platen-Munters systems are made of
all steel with welded joints. Additives are added to minimize corrosion and rust
formation and also to improve absorption. Since there are no flared joints and if the
quality of the welding is good, then these systems become extremely rugged and
reliable. The Platen-Munters systems offer low COPs (of the order of 0.2) due to
energy requirement in the bubble pump and also due to losses in the evaporator
because of the presence of hydrogen gas. In addition, since the circulation of fluids
inside the system is due to buoyancy and gravity, the heat and mass transfer
coefficients are relatively small, further reducing the efficiency. However, these
systems are available with a wide variety of heat sources such as electrical heaters
(in small hotel room systems), natural gas or LPG gas, hot oils etc. Figure 17.9
shows the schematic of the refrigeration system of a small commercial PlatenMunters system.
<,. .. -. .-;- - ..,

^
u auC

.Condenser
*I^k
,,w^
Separtor
i \?i i oigWfiEtr"i-^

Evaporator

Qe
Qa

Ammonia Vapor
I Hvdroqen

Absorber
Water
Dissolved ammonia
Generator
Qg

Fig.17.9: Refrigeration circuit of a small diffusion-absorption (Platen-Munters) system

It is interesting to know that Albert Einstein along with Leo Szilard had
obtained a US patent for a pumpless absorption refrigeration system in 1930. The
principle of operation of this system is entirely different from that of Platen-Munters
system. In Einsteins system, butane is used as the refrigerant, while ammonia is
used as pressure equalizing fluid in evaporator. Water is used as the absorbent for
the pressure equalizing fluid. However, unlike Platen-Munters system, Einsteins
system has not been commercialized. Recently attempts have been made to revive
Einsteins cycle.

17.6: Solar energy driven sorption systems

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 12

In principle, solar energy can be used to drive any type of refrigeration

system: compression or absorption. However, in most of the cases, the direct
utilization of solar thermal energy for running refrigeration systems is more efficient.
Thus solar energy based heat operated systems are attractive. Again solar energy
can be used to run a conventional absorption system with solution pump or a
pumpless absorption or adsorption system.
Solar energy driven adsorption systems that use a solid adsorbent in place of
a liquid absorbent offer certain advantages. The solid sorption systems also known
as dry absorption systems do not have a solution circuit as the vapour/gas is directly
absorbed and desorbed by a solid. Notable among the dry absorption types are the
systems based on water-zeolites/silica gel, methanol-activated carbon,
ammonia-calcium chloride, sulphur dioxide-sulphites, carbon dioxidecarbonates and hydrogen-metal hydrides. However, some practical design
problems such as: smaller specific power outputs, poor heat and mass transfer
characteristics of the solid absorbents, unwanted side reactions, undesired
decomposition of reacting materials, swelling of solid material and corrosion of the
structural materials due to the nature of the reacting materials/reactions hamper the
development of solid sorption systems on commercial scale. Several successful
attempts have been made to build refrigeration systems that run on solar energy
only. However, several practical problems related to their cost, performance and
reliability hamper the wide-spread use of solar energy driven refrigeration systems.

17.7: Comparison between compression and absorption

refrigeration systems
Table 17.1 shows a comparison between compression and absorption
refrigeration systems.
Compression systems
Work operated
High COP
Performance (COP and capacity) very
sensitive to evaporator temperatures
System COP reduces considerably at
part loads
Liquid at the exit of evaporator may
damage compressor
Performance is sensitive to evaporator
superheat
Many moving parts
Regular maintenance required
Higher noise and vibration
Small systems are compact and large
systems are bulky
Economical when electricity is available

Absorption systems
Heat operated
Low COP (currently maximum 1.4)
Performance not very sensitive to
evaporator temperatures
COP does not reduce significantly with
load
Presence of liquid at evaporator exit is
not a serious problem
Evaporator superheat is not very
important
Very few moving parts
Very low maintenance required
Less noise and vibration
Small systems are bulky and large
systems are compact
Economical where low-cost fuels or
waste heat is available

Table 17.1: Comparison between compression and absorption systems

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 13

Questions and answers:

1. In an ammonia-water system a rectification column is used mainly to:
782.
783.
784.
785.

To improve the COP of the system

To reduce the operating pressures
To minimize the concentration of water in refrigeration circuit
All of the above

Ans.: c)
2. In a reflux condenser:
786.
787.
788.
789.

Heat is extracted so that the vapour leaving is rich in ammonia

Heat is supplied so that the vapour leaving is rich in ammonia
Heat is extracted so that the vapour leaving is rich in water
Heat is supplied so that the vapour leaving is rich in ammonia

Ans.: a)
3. Due to the requirement of rectification:
790.
791.
792.
793.

The required generator pressure increases

The required generator temperature increases
The required generator heat input increases
All of the above

Ans.: c)
4. In pumpless vapour absorption refrigeration systems:
794.
795.
796.
797.

The evaporation process is non-isothermal

The system pressure is almost same everywhere
A pressure equalizing fluid is required to increase condenser pressure
A pressure equalizing fluid is required to increase evaporator pressure

Ans.: a), b) and d)

5. Which of the following statements regarding pumpless systems are TRUE:
798.
799.
800.
801.

Pumpless systems can use a wide variety of heat sources

Pumpless systems are silent, reliable and rugged
Pumpless systems offer high COPs
Pumpless systems operate at very low pressures

Ans.: a) and b)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 14

6. Compared to compression systems, the performance of absorption systems:

Is very sensitive to evaporator temperature
Is not sensitive to load variations
Does not depend very much on evaporator superheat
All of the above

802.
803.
804.
805.

Ans.: b) and c)
7. Compared to compression systems, absorption systems:
Contain very few moving parts
Require regular maintenance
Offer less noise and vibration
Are compact for large capacities

806.
807.
808.
809.

Ans.: a), c) and d)

8. A vapour absorption refrigeration system based on ammonia-water (Figure 17.1)
has refrigeration capacity of 100 TR. The various state properties of the system
shown below are given in the table. Taking the heat rejection rate in the reflux
condenser (Qd) as 88 kW, find a) The mass flow rates of solution through the
evaporator, strong solution and weak solution; b) Enthalpy values not specified in the
table and c) Heat transfer rates at condenser, absorber and generator and solution
pump work d) System COP
State point

P, bar

T, oC

1
2
3
4
6
7
8
10
11
12
13
14

2.04
2.04
13.61
13.61
13.61
13.61
2.04
13.61
13.61
13.61
2.04
2.04

13.9
26.1
26.1
93.3
115.6
36.1
36.1
54.4
36.1
30.0
-17.8
4.4

Concentration (X), kg
of NH3/kg of solution
0.996
0.408
0.408
0.408
0.298
0.298
0.298
0.996
0.996
0.996
0.996
0.996

Enthalpy, kJ/kg

-58.2
-56.8
253.6
369.9

1512.1
344.3
318.7
1442.3

Ans.:
a) Mass flow rate through evaporator, m1 is given by:
h14 m
1

Qe
-h13

Qe
-h12

3.517X100
1442.3 - 318.7

0.313 kg/ s

(Ans.)

Circulation ratio is given by:

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 15

mX

ws ^

m1

S10
s7
^
8

5.34
5
Ther
efore
,
mas
s
flow
rate
of
weak
soluti
on,
mws
= m1
X X,
=
1.67
3
kg/s
(Ans
.)
mas
s
flow
rate
of

stron ss
g

mss(h

(Ans.
(Ans

Heat 4 - h3)

soluti Exch =
on,

h12 Heat
=

ange mws(h

mss = r -I;

.)

h13 trans
=

- h 7)

fer
318.7

m1 X (h11 - => h7

rate
kJ/kg

(1+X) h12) =

at
(Ans.

= (h1

1.986 - h14)
kg/s => h1
(Ans. = h14
)

+ (h11

b)

- h12)
=

State 1467.
point 9
s 1, kJ/kg
7,8

1.43

kJ/kg c)

rber,

(Ans.

Qa =

From

m1h

Sinc energ

1+m

8h8-

expa balan

m2h2

nsion ce:

throu Heat

577.

gh

4 kW

transf

expa er

(Ans

nsion rate at

.)

(Ans.

and )

valve conde
From
ener s is nser,
From gy
balan isent Qc =
ener ce
acros halpi m10(h
gy s
soluti c,
10
bala on
hh11) =
heat
nce exch
=365.5
1.43
ange
acro r:
kJ/kg
kW

13:

abso

Heat
trans
fer
rate
at
gene
rator,
Qg =

m10 p

h10+ u

m6h m

6+Q p
d-

m4h4
)

k
W

=W

676.5 p

kW

(Ans. =

)
(Ans.)

n
p

i
v

e
n

o
2

Ans.)

Co
mm
ent
s:

CQ 35
OQ 1.
7
Pg 7
8
6
=+7
6
W.
p5

=
(+
2
.

810.
It
c
a
n
b
e
s
e
e
n
th
at
c
o
m
p
a
r
e
d
to
h
e
at
in
p
ut
to
th
e
s
y
st
e
m
at
th
e
g
e
n
e
r
at
or
,

th
e
w
or
k
in
p
ut
to
th
e
s
y
st
e
m
is
al
m
o
st
n
e
gl
ig
ib
le
(l
e
s
s
th
a
n
0.
5
p
er
c
e
nt
)
811.
The
s
y
st
e
m
C
O
P
is
re

d
u
c
e
d
a
s
th
e
re
q
ui
re
d
h
e
at
in
p
ut
to
th
e
g
e
n
er
at
or
in
cr
e
a
s
e
s
d
u
e
to
h
e
at
re
je
ct
io
n
at
d
e
p
hl
e

g
ver
m
, it
at
is
or
po
.
ssi
H
ble
o
to
w
an
e
aly
v
ze
er
th
,
e
th
re
is
ctif
c
ica
a
tio
n
n
n
pr
ot
oc
b
es
e
s
a
to
v
mi
oi
ni
d
mi
e
ze
d
th
a
e
s
he
re
at
ct
rej
ifi
ect
c
ion
at
at
io
th
n
e
of
de
th
phl
e
eg
v
m
a
at
p
or
o
ur
is
re
q Versio
n1
ui
ME,
re
IIT
d.
Khara
H
o gpur
16
w
e

Lesson

18
Refrigeration System
Components:
Compressors

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 1

The objectives of this lesson are to:

812.
Discuss basic components of a vapour compression refrigeration
system (Section 18.1)
813.
Present classification of refrigerant compressors based on working
principle and based on the arrangement of compressor motor or external
drive (Section 18.2.1)
814.
Describe the working principle of reciprocating compressors
(Section 18.3)
815.
Discuss the performance aspects of ideal reciprocating compressors
with and without clearance (Section 18.3.1)
At the end of the lesson, the student should be able to:
816.
List important components of a vapour compression refrigeration
system
817.
Classify refrigerant compressors based on their working principle
and based on the arrangement of compressor motor/external drive
818.
Enumerate salient features of positive displacement type
compressors, dynamic compressors, open and hermetic compressors
819.
Draw the schematic of a reciprocating compressor and explain its
working principle
820.
Define an ideal reciprocating compressor without
clearance using pressure-volume and pressure-crank angle
diagrams
821.
Calculate the required displacement rate and power input of an
ideal compressor without clearance
822.
Define an ideal reciprocating compressor with clearance using
pressure-volume and pressure-crank angle diagrams
823.
Calculate the volumetric efficiency and power input of an ideal
compressor with clearance, and
824.
Discuss the effects of compression ratio and index of compression
on the volumetric efficiency of a reciprocating compressor with clearance

18.1. Introduction
A typical refrigeration system consists of several basic components such
as compressors, condensers, expansion devices, evaporators, in addition to
several accessories such as controls, filters, driers, oil separators etc. For
efficient operation of the refrigeration system, it is essential that there be a proper
matching between various components. Before analyzing the balanced
performance of the complete system, it is essential to study the design and
performance characteristics of individual components. Except in special
applications, the refrigeration system components are standard components
manufactured by industries specializing in individual components. Generally for
large systems, depending upon the design specifications, components are
selected from the manufacturers catalogs and are assembled at site. Even
though most of the components are standard off-the-shelf items, sometimes
components such as evaporator may be made to order. Small capacity
refrigeration systems such as refrigerators, room and package air conditioners,

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 2

water coolers are available as complete systems. In this case the manufacturer
himself designs or selects the system components, assembles them at the
factory, tests them for performance and then sells the complete system as a unit.

18.2. Compressors
A compressor is the most important and often the costliest component
(typically 30 to 40 percent of total cost) of any vapour compression refrigeration
system (VCRS). The function of a compressor in a VCRS is to continuously draw
the refrigerant vapour from the evaporator, so that a low pressure and low
temperature can be maintained in the evaporator at which the refrigerant can boil
extracting heat from the refrigerated space. The compressor then has to raise the
pressure of the refrigerant to a level at which it can condense by rejecting heat to
the cooling medium in the condenser.
18.2.1. Classification of compressors
Compressors used in refrigeration systems can be classified in several
ways:
a) Based on the working principle:
i.
ii.

Positive displacement type

Roto-dynamic type

In positive displacement type compressors, compression is achieved by

trapping a refrigerant vapour into an enclosed space and then reducing its
volume. Since a fixed amount of refrigerant is trapped each time, its pressure
rises as its volume is reduced. When the pressure rises to a level that is slightly
higher than the condensing pressure, then it is expelled from the enclosed space
and a fresh charge of low-pressure refrigerant is drawn in and the cycle
continues. Since the flow of refrigerant to the compressor is not steady, the
positive displacement type compressor is a pulsating flow device. However, since
the operating speeds are normally very high the flow appears to be almost steady
on macroscopic time scale. Since the flow is pulsating on a microscopic time
scale, positive displacement type compressors are prone to high wear, vibration
and noise level. Depending upon the construction, positive displacement type
compressors used in refrigeration and air conditioning can be classified into:
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.

Reciprocating type
Rotary type with sliding vanes (rolling piston type or multiple vane type)
Rotary screw type (single screw or twin-screw type)
Orbital compressors, and
Acoustic compressors

In roto-dynamic compressors, the pressure rise of refrigerant is achieved

by imparting kinetic energy to a steadily flowing stream of refrigerant by a rotating
mechanical element and then converting into pressure as the refrigerant flows
through a diverging passage. Unlike positive displacement type, the roto-dynamic
type compressors are steady flow devices, hence are subjected to less wear and
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 3

vibration. Depending upon the construction, roto-dynamic type compressors can

be classified into:
i.
ii.

Radial flow type, or

Axial flow type

Centrifugal compressors (also known as turbo-compressors) are radial flow

type, roto-dynamic compressors. These compressors are widely used in large
capacity refrigeration and air conditioning systems. Axial flow compressors are
normally used in gas liquefaction applications.
b) Based on arrangement of compressor motor or external drive:
i.
ii.
iii.

Open type
Hermetic (or sealed) type
Semi-hermetic (or semi-sealed) type

In open type compressors the rotating shaft of the compressor extends

through a seal in the crankcase for an external drive. The external drive may be
an electrical motor or an engine (e.g. diesel engine). The compressor may be belt
driven or gear driven. Open type compressors are normally used in medium to
large capacity refrigeration system for all refrigerants and for ammonia (due to its
incompatibility with hermetic motor materials). Open type compressors are
characterized by high efficiency, flexibility, better compressor cooling and
serviceability. However, since the shaft has to extend through the seal, refrigerant
leakage from the system cannot be eliminated completely. Hence refrigeration
systems using open type compressors require a refrigerant reservoir to take care
of the refrigerant leakage for some time, and then regular maintenance for
charging the system with refrigerant, changing of seals, gaskets etc.
In hermetic compressors, the motor and the compressor are enclosed in
the same housing to prevent refrigerant leakage. The housing has welded
connections for refrigerant inlet and outlet and for power input socket. As a result
of this, there is virtually no possibility of refrigerant leakage from the compressor.
All motors reject a part of the power supplied to it due to eddy currents and
friction, that is, inefficiencies. Similarly the compressor also gets heated-up due to
friction and also due to temperature rise of the vapor during compression. In
Open type, both the compressor and the motor normally reject heat to the
surrounding air for efficient operation. In hermetic compressors heat cannot be
rejected to the surrounding air since both are enclosed in a shell. Hence, the cold
suction gas is made to flow over the motor and the compressor before entering
the compressor. This keeps the motor cool. The motor winding is in direct contact
with the refrigerant hence only those refrigerants, which have high dielectric
strength, can be used in hermetic compressors. The cooling rate depends upon
the flow rate of the refrigerant, its temperature and the thermal properties of the
refrigerant. If flow rate is not sufficient and/or if the temperature is not low enough
the insulation on the winding of the motor can burn out and short-circuiting may
occur. Hence, hermetically sealed compressors give satisfactory and safe
performance over a very narrow range of design temperature and should not be
used for off-design conditions.
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 4

The COP of the hermetic compressor based systems is lower than that of the
open compressor based systems since a part of the refrigeration effect is lost in
cooling the motor and the compressor. However, hermetic compressors are
almost universally used in small systems such as domestic refrigerators, water
coolers, air conditioners etc, where efficiency is not as important as customer
convenience (due to absence of continuous maintenance). In addition to this, the
use of hermetic compressors is ideal in systems, which use capillary tubes as
expansion devices and are critically charged systems. Hermetic compressors are
normally not serviceable. They are not very flexible as it is difficult to vary their
speed to control the cooling capacity.
In some (usually larger) hermetic units, the cylinder head is usually removable
so that the valves and the piston can be serviced. This type of unit is called a
semi-hermetic (or semi-sealed) compressor.

18.3. Reciprocating compressors

Reciprocating compressor is the workhorse of the refrigeration and air
conditioning industry. It is the most widely used compressor with cooling
capacities ranging from a few Watts to hundreds of kilowatts. Modern day
reciprocating compressors are high speed ( 3000 to 3600 rpm), single acting,
single or multi-cylinder (upto 16 cylinders) type.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 5

Figure 18.1 shows the schematic of a reciprocating compressor. Reciprocating

compressors consist of a piston moving back and forth in a cylinder, with suction
and discharge valves to achieve suction and compression of the refrigerant
vapor. Its construction and working are somewhat similar to a two-stroke engine,
as suction and compression of the refrigerant vapor are completed in one
revolution of the crank. The suction side of the compressor is connected to the
exit of the evaporator, while the discharge side of the compressor is connected to

Fig 18.1: Schematic of a reciprocating compressor

the condenser inlet. The suction (inlet) and the discharge (outlet) valves open
and close due to pressure differences between the cylinder and inlet or outlet
manifolds respectively. The pressure in the inlet manifold is equal to or slightly
less than the evaporator pressure. Similarly the pressure in the outlet manifold is
equal to or slightly greater than the condenser pressure. The purpose of the
manifolds is to provide stable inlet and outlet pressures for the smooth operation
of the valves and also provide a space for mounting the valves.
The valves used are of reed or plate type, which are either floating or
clamped. Usually, backstops are provided to limit the valve displacement and
springs may be provided for smooth return after opening or closing. The piston
speed is decided by valve type. Too high a speed will give excessive vapor
velocities that will decrease the volumetric efficiency and the throttling loss will
decrease the compression efficiency.
18.3.1. Performance of reciprocating compressors
For a given evaporator and condenser pressures, the important
performance parameters of a refrigerant compressor are:
825.
826.
827.
828.

The mass flow rate (m) of the compressor for a given displacement rate
Power consumption of the compressor (Wc)
Temperature of the refrigerant at compressor exit, Td, and
Performance under part load conditions

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 6

The mass flow rate decides the refrigeration capacity of the system and for
a given compressor inlet condition, it depends on the volumetric efficiency of the
compressor. The volumetric efficiency, V is defined as the ratio of volumetric flow
rate of refrigerant to the maximum possible volumetric flow rate, which is equal to
the compressor displacement rate, i.e.,

Volumetric flow rate

m .ve

r|V =---------------------------------------------=----------

Compressor Displacement rate

(18.1)

where m and VSW are the mass flow rate of refrigerant (kg/s) and compressor
displacement rate (m3/s) respectively, and vi is the specific volume (m3/kg) of the
refrigerant at compressor inlet.
For a given evaporator and condenser temperatures, one can also use the
volumetric refrigeration capacity (kW/m 3) to indicate the volumetric efficiency of
the compressor. The actual volumetric efficiency (or volumetric capacity) of the
compressor depends on the operating conditions and the design of the
compressor.
The power consumption (kW) or alternately the power input per unit
refrigeration capacity (kW/kW) depends on the compressor efficiency (r|C),
efficiency of the mechanical drive (r|mech) and the motor efficiency (r|motor). For a
refrigerant compressor, the power input (W c) is given by:
WC= -------W---------

(18.2)

'IC "lmech "Imotor

where Wideal is the power input to an ideal compressor.

The temperature at the exit of the compressor (discharge compressor)
depends on the type of refrigerant used and the type of compressor cooling. This
parameter has a bearing on the life of the compressor.
The performance of the compressor under part load conditions depends
on the type and design of the compressor.
a) Ideal reciprocating compressor:
An ideal reciprocating compressor is one in which:
i.

The clearance volume is zero, i.e., at the end of discharge process, the
volume of refrigerant inside the cylinder is zero. ii.
No pressure
drops during suction and compression iii.
Suction, compression and
discharge are reversible and adiabatic
Figure 180.2 shows the schematic of an ideal compression process on
pressure-volume and pressure-crank angle (9) diagrams. As shown in the figures,
the cycle of operations consists of:
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 7

Process D-A: This is an isobaric suction process, during which the piston moves
from the Inner Dead Centre (IDC) to the Outer Dead Centre (ODC). The suction
valve remains open during this process and refrigerant at a constant pressure P e
flows into the cylinder.
Process A-B: This is an isentropic compression process. During this process, the
piston moves from ODC towards IDC. Both the suction and discharge valves
remain closed during the process and the pressure of refrigerant increases from
Pe to Pc.
Process B-C: This is an isobaric discharge process. During this process, the
suction valve remains closed and the discharge valve opens. Refrigerant at a
constant Pc is expelled from the compressor as the piston moves to IDC.
B_____>____
Pc
B
Pc
P
D
(0,0)

IDC

ODC

Fig.18.2. Ideal reciprocating compressor on P-V and P-9 diagrams

Since the clearance volume is zero for an ideal compressor, no gas is left
in the compressor at the end of the discharge stroke, as a result the suction
process D-A starts as soon as the piston starts moving again towards ODC. The
volumetric flow rate of refrigerant at suction conditions is equal to the compressor
displacement rate hence, the volumetric efficiency of the ideal compressor is 100
percent. The mass flow rate of refrigerant of an ideal compressor is given by:

m=
SW
V

ve

(18.3)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 8

Thus for a given refrigeration capacity, the required size of the compressor
will be minimum if the compressor behaves as an ideal compressor.
The swept volume VSW of the compressor is given by:
7rD2

(18.4)

VSW=nN------L
where n = Number of cylinders
N = Rotational speed of compressor, revolutions per second
D = Bore of the cylinder, m L = Stroke length, m
Work input to the ideal compressor:
The total work input to the compressor in one cycle is given by:
W id

W D-A

W A-B

WB-C

( 1 8.5)

Where,
WD-A = Work done by the refrigerant on the piston during process D-A
= Area under line D-A on P-V diagram = -PeVA WA-B = Work
done by the piston on refrigerant during compression A-B
V = Area
under the curve A-B on P-V diagram = jP.dV
B

VA

WB-C = Work done by the piston on the refrigerant during discharge B-C =
Area under line B-C = Pc.VB
VB

Pc

.-. Wid = -PeVA + JP.dV + PcVB = Area A-B-C-D on P-V diagram = j V.dP
VA

Pe

Thus the work input to the ideal compressor per cycle is equal to the area
of the cycle on P-V diagram.
The specific work input, wid (kJ/kg) to the ideal compressor is given by:

wid= W = Pc v.dP
Mr

(18.6)

Pe

where Mr is the mass of refrigerant compressed in one cycle and v is the specific
volume of the refrigerant.
The power input to the compressor Wc is given by:
.

Wc =mwid =

V
SW

Pc

v.dP

ve

(18.7)
Pe

The mean effective pressure (mep) for the ideal compressor is given by:

Version
1 ME, IIT

Kharagpur 9

Wid
mep==

1 Pc_______________________________________________
Pe v.dP
(18.8)

The concept of mean effective pressure is useful for real compressors as

the power input to the compressor is a product of mep and the swept volume
rate.
Thus the power input to the compressor and its mean effective pressure
can be obtained from the above equation if the relation between v and P during
the compression process A-B is known. The above equation is valid for both
isentropic and non-isentropic compression processes, however, the compression
process must be reversible, as the path of the process should be known for the
integration to be performed.
For the isentropic process, Pvk = constant, hence the specific work of
compression wid can be obtained by integration, and it can be shown to be equal
to:

wid = Pc v.dP =
P ev
Pe

k-1

k
k v1y

(18.9)

Pey

In the above equation, k is the index of isentropic compression. If the

refrigerant behaves as an ideal gas, then k = y. In general, the value of k for
refrigerants varies from point to point, and if its value is not known, then an
approximate value of it can be obtained from the values of pressure and specific
volume at the suction and discharge states as kc

ln(P /P )
e

ln(ve/vc)

The work of compression for the ideal compressor can also be obtained by
applying energy balance across the compressor, Fig.18.3. Since the process is
assumed to be reversible and adiabatic and if we assume changes in potential
and kinetic energy to be negligible, then from energy balance across the
compressor:

wid=c=(hc-hj
m

(18.10)

The above expression can also be obtained from the thermodynamic relation: Tds

= dh-vdP ^> dh= vdP (vds = 0 for isentropic process)

Pc

(18.11)

Pc

.".wid = jvdP= jdh = (hd-he)

Pe

Pe

The above expression is valid only for reversible, adiabatic compression.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 10

m, Pec, T
Ted,, hhed,-, sde
Wc

Qc
F
i
g
.
1
8
.
3
.
E
n
e
r
g
y
b
a
l
a
n
c
e
a
c
r
o
s
s
a
s
t
e
a
d
y
f
l
o
w
c
o
m
p

r
e
s
s
o
r
b)
Ideal
compr
essor
with
cleara
nce:
I
n
actual
compr
essors
,
a
small
cleara
nce is
left
betwe
en the
cylind
er
head
and
piston
to
accom
modat
e the
valves
and to
take
care
of
therm
al
expan
sion
and
machi
ning
tolera
nces.
As a
thumb

rule,
the
cleara
nce C
in
millim
etres
is
given
by:
(
This
space
along
with
all
other
space
s
betwe
en the
closed
valves
and
the
piston
at the
inner
dead
center
(IDC)
is
called
as
Cleara
nce
volum
e, Vc.
The
ratio
of the
cleara
nce
volum
e to
the
swept
volum
e is
called
as

Cleara
nce
ratio,
, i.e.,
(18.13)
V

V
c

S
W

T
he
cleara
nce
ratio s
depen
ds on
the
arrang
ement
of the
valves
in the
cylind
er and
the
mean
piston
velocit
y.
Norm
ally s
is less
than 5
perce
nt for
well
desig
ned
compr
essor
s with
moder
ate
piston
velocit
ies (
3
m/s),

howev
er, it
can
be
higher
for
higher
piston
speed
s.
D
ue to
the
prese
nce of
the
cleara
nce
volum
e, at
the
end of
the
discha
rge
stroke,
some
amou
nt of
refrige
rant at
the
discha
rge
pressu
re Pc
will be
left in
the
cleara
nce
volum
e. As
a
result,
suctio
n does
not
begin
as

soon
as the
piston
starts
movin
g
away
from
the
IDC,
since
the
press
ure
inside
the
cylind
er is
higher
than
the
suctio
n
press
ure
(Pc >
Pe). As
shown
in Fig.
18.4,
suctio
n
starts
only
when
the
press
ure
inside
the
cylind
er falls
to the
suctio
n
press
ure in
an
ideal
compr
essor
with

cleara
nce.
This
implie
s that
even
thoug
h the
compr
essor
swept
volum
e,
VSW =
VA-VC,
the
actual
volum
e
of
the
refrige
rant
that
entere
d the
cylind
er
during
suctio
n
stroke
is VAVD. As
a
result,
the
volum
etric
efficie
ncy of
the
compr
essor
with
cleara
nce,
rjV,cl is
less
than
100
perce
nt, i.e.,

Versio
n1
ME,
IIT
Khara
gpur
11

VA - VC Actual volume of refrigerant compressed f VA - VD

IV,cl

Swept volume of the compressor

<

(18.14
)

t
Fig.18.4.
Ideal
reciprocating
compressor
with
clearance

Fr
o
m
Fi
g.
18
.4,
th
e
cl
ea
ra
nc
e
vo
lu
m
etr
ic
eff
ici
en
cy
ca
n
be
wr
itt
en
as
:
lc
Vl
,

-V

(
(

( 1 5 18.16)
Substituting the above equation in the expression for
S V
V Vclearance volumetric efficiency; we can show that:
S
in = ^ (18.17)
(VC_VD)1
(VC_VD)
V
c
c > lV,cl
vVCy
V(VA-VC)J~ +
VC
e A(
th V
e V
S A
cl WV
e C
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 12
a
r
a V
n C
c )
e
r
=
at
io
,
s
=

Since the mass of refrigerant in the cylinder at points C and D are same,
we can express the ratio of cylinder volumes at points D and C in terms of ratio of
specific volumes of refrigerant at D and C, i.e.,
Dv

VC j

(18.18)

vC

Hence, the clearance volumetric efficiency is given

by:
r|Vcl= 1 + 6-

(18.19)

VC V = 1 + 6- v vvC;
Cy

If we assume the re-expansion process also to follow the equation

Pvk=constant, then:
PC v vvCy
Pc
DV D
P D
VPey
J

1/k

1/k

(18.20
)

Hence the clearance volumetric efficiency is given by:

1/ k

Pc
1/ k
llVcl=
1
+
S

(18.21)
=
Pe 1Vey
where rp is the pressure ratio, Pc/Pe.
The above expression holds good for any reversible compression process
with clearance. If the process is not reversible, adiabatic (i.e., non-isentropic) but
a reversible polytropic process with an index of compression and expansion
equal to n, then k in the above equation has to be replaced by n, i.e., in general
for any reversible compression process;

Pc llVcl= 1 +

1/ n

S-

= 1-

1/ n

22)

-1

(18.

V e

The above expression shows that r| V,cl ^ as rpt and st as shown in Fig.18.5. It can
also be seen that for a given compressor with fixed clearance ratio s, there is a
limiting pressure ratio at which the clearance volumetric efficiency becomes zero.
This limiting pressure ratio is obtained from the equation:
S

[rp1 n _1j=

V,cl

0
_s

ilVcl= 1 [rp
1+6

p,max

(18.23)

L B J

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 13

The mass flow rate of refrigerant compressed with clearance mcl is given by:
mcl =V,cl SW
(18.24)
.

VS
W

ve
Thus the mass flow rate and hence the refrigeration capacity of the
system decreases as the volumetric efficiency reduces, in other words, the
required size of the compressor increases as the volumetric efficiency
decreases.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 14

V,cl

rp

0,1
Fig.18.5. Effect of pressure ratio (rp) and index of compression (n) on
clearance volumetric efficiency (rjvri)

Work input to the compressor with clearance:

If we assume that both compression and expansion follow the same
equation Pvn = constant (i.e., the index of compression is equal to the index of

expansion), then the extra work required to compress the vapour that is left in the
clearance volume will be exactly equal to the work output obtained during the reexpansion process. Hence, the clearance for this special case does not impose
any penalty on work input to the compressor. The total work input to the
compressor during one cycle will then be equal to the area A-B-C-D-A on P-V
diagram.
The specific work with and without clearance will be given by the same
expression:

Pv

Pee e

Pr

n-1
n

wid = c v.dP
n- Vn1
= P ev
y

Pey

-1

(18.2
5)

However, since the mass of refrigerant compressed during one cycle is different
with and without clearance, the power input to the compressor will be different
with and without clearance. The power input to the compressor and mean
effective pressure (mep) with clearance are given by:

Wc

mw

VS w

id

W
Tl

V,cl ~e

id

(18.
26)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 15

mep=r|

id

(18.27)

ve

V,cl

T
hus
the
power
input
to the
compr
essor
and
mep
decrea
se with
cleara
nce
due to
decrea
se in
mass
flow
rate
with
cleara
nce.
I
f the
proces
s is
reversi
ble
and
adiaba
tic
(i.e., n
= k),
then
the
power
input
to the
compr
essor
with
cleara
nce is
given
by:

SW
V

=
W
=
c

. .

SW
B
V,cl

(h -hA) = V
V
r|
r) ve \
B
A
\ V,cl

v
V

A
J hc
s

(1
8. Rotary
2
8) vane

where
Ahc,s is
the
isentrop
ic work
of
compre
ssion
(kJ/kg)

Quest
ions
and
answ
ers:
1.

type
compr

compr

essor:

essor
b.

a.

Rotary
screw
type
compr
essor
c.
Centrif
ugal
compr
essor
d.
Acous
tic
compr
essor
Ans.:

Which

c)

of the

2.

Offers
higher
efficie
ncy
b.
Offers
lower
noise
c.
Offers
better
compr
essor
coolin
g
d.

positive ared

Offers
servic
eability
and
flexibili
ty

displace to a

Ans.:

followin
g is not Comp

ment

herme

a), c)

type

tic

and d)

compre compr

3.

ssor?

essor,

a.

an

Herme

open

tic

compre
ssors
are
used
mainly
in
smaller
systems
as they:
a. Yield
higher
COP
b. Do
not
require
frequen
t
servicin
g
c. Offer
the
flexibilit
y of
using
any
refriger
ant
d. Can
be used
under
different
load
conditio
ns
efficient
ly
Ans.:
b)

Versio
n1
ME,
IIT
Khara
gpur
16

4. In reciprocating compressors, clearance is provided:

a. To improve the volumetric efficiency of the compressor
b. To accommodate valves
c. To account for thermal expansion due to temperature variation
d. To reduce power consumption of the compressor
Ans.: b) and c)
5. The clearance volumetric efficiency of a reciprocating compressor depends on:
a.
b.
c.
d.

Properties of the refrigerant

Operating temperatures
Clearance volume
All of the above

Ans.: d)
6. A spacer is used in reciprocating compressors to introduce clearance volume.
A refrigerant manufacturer wishes to standardize the components of a
reciprocating compressor for refrigeration systems of capacities of 2 kW and 2.5
kW by varying only the spacer. Both the systems use the same refrigerant, which
has an isentropic index of compression of 1.116 and operate over a pressure
ratio of 5. The operating temperatures are also same for both the systems. If the
required clearance factor for the 2.5 kW system is 0.03, what should be the
clearance factor for the 2.0 kW system?
Ans.: Given:
Pressure ratio, rp = 5 and index of compression y = 1.116 for both the
compressors. The clearance factor for the 2.5 kW compressor S2.5 = 0.03
When all other parameters are same except the capacity, then:
(Qe,2.5/Qe,2.0) = 2.5/2.0 = 1.25 = (mr,2.5/mr,2.0) = (r|v,2.5/r|v,2.0)
where Qe is the refrigeration capacity, mr is the refrigerant mass flow rate and r|v is
the clearance volumetric efficiency of the compressor.
Substituting the expression for volumetric efficiency;
?1V,2.5 = = 1-S 2.5(rp 1/y -1) =1 25
TlV,2.0

1 - S2.0(rp

substituting the values of pressure ratio, index of compression and the clearance
factor of 2.5 kW compressor in the above expression, we obtain:
62.0 = 0.086 (Ans.)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 17

7. Water is used in a Standard Single Stage (SSS) vapour compression

refrigeration system. The system operates at an evaporator temperature of 4.5oC
(pressure = 0.8424 kPa) and a condenser temperature of 38oC (pressure = 6.624
kPa). Assume that the water vapour behaves as an ideal gas with c p/cv = 1.322
and calculate the discharge temperature if compression is isentropic. Also
calculate COP and volumic refrigeration effect if the refrigeration effect is 2355
kJ/kg. Molecular weight of water = 18 kg/kmol, Universal gas constant = 8.314
kJ/kmol.K
Ans.: Given:
Evaporator temperature, Te = 4.5oC = 277.5 K
Evaporator pressure, Pe = 0.8424 kPa Condenser
temperature, Te = 38oC = 311 K Condenser
pressure, Pc = 6.624 kPa Isentropic index of
compression, y = cp/cv = 1.322 Refrigeration effect, qe
= 2355 kJ/kg
Gas constant, R = 8.314/18 = 0.462 kJ/kg.K
Pe152.19m
RT
=
/kg
e
Specific volume of refrigerant at compressor inlet, ve =
V

e j

a) Discharge temperature, Td:

c
-1
Y 1

Td =

= 458.6 K

VPey

b) Work of compression, wc:

RT

U-

VPey y-1

wc =

y-1

= 343.45 kJ/kg
c) COP:
COP =

wc

= 6.86

d) Volumic refrigeration effect, qv:

qv =

^v

= 15.4 kJ/m

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 18

8. An ammonia based refrigeration system with a refrigeration capacity of 100TR

(1TR=3.5167 kW) operates at an evaporating temperature of -36oC (saturation
pressure = 0.8845 bar) and a condensing temperature of 30oC (saturation
pressure = 11.67 bar). Assume the system to operate on a single stage saturated
(SSS) cycle. The compression process may be assumed to be isentropic. Under
these conditions, the following property data are available:
Enthalpy of saturated vapour at the exit of evaporator, h1 = 1414 kJ/kg
Enthalpy of saturated liquid at the exit of condenser,h4 = 341.8 kJ/kg
Isentropic index of compression, y = 1.304
The compressor is an 8-cylinder, reciprocating type with a clearance ratio of 0.05
and speed of 1750 RPM. The stroke-to-bore ratio is 0.8. In the absence of
superheat data, the refrigerant vapour may be assumed to behave as a perfect
gas. The molecular weight of ammonia is 17.03 kg/kmol. Fnd:
829.
830.
831.
832.

Power input to the compressor

COP and cycle (second law) efficiency
Compressor discharge temperature, and
Compressor dimensions (diameter and stroke length)

Ans.: Given:
Refrigeration capacity, Qe = 100 TR = 351.67 kW
Evaporator temperature, Te = -36oC = 237 K
Evaporator pressure, Pe = 0.8845 bar = 88.45 kPa
Condenser temperature, Te = -36oC = 237 K
Condenser pressure, Pc = 11.67 bar = 1167 kPa
Molecular weight , M = 17.04 kg/kmol Gas constant,
R = 8.314/17.04 = 0.4882 kJ/kg.K Speed of
compressor, N = 1750 RPM Clearance factor, s =
0.05 No. of cylinders, n = 8 Stroke-to-bore (L/D)
ratio,9 = 0.8
a) Power input to compressor, Wc:
Wc = mr.wc
where the mass flow rate mr is given by:
r

Qe ^________
mr =--------=0.328 kg /s
^h1 -h4 J
work of compression, wc is given by:

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 19

a-1y
wc = RT

y-1

Pc
Pe>

-1

= 409.6
kJ/kg
Substitutin
g these
values, we
find that
the power
input to the
compresso
r is given
by:
Wc =
134.35 kW
b) COP
and
second
law
efficiency
Qe

COP =
= 2.618
Wc
Second
law
efficiency,
rm:
Tl =----------------------II

COP

Carnot

CO
P
c)
Dis
cha
rge
tem
per
atur
e,
Td:

2
o

T y-1 n
d P
c

v
P
e
y

=s
4
3,
2.
7
K
L

0
.
6
8
8
5

i
s

C
o

RT

m
p

=mr. = 0.4293m /s
P

Subs

r
e
s

tituti

ng

e
s
D L.N.np =
o
t
r

d
i
m
e
n
s
i

The
actu me
al
volu Vsw,
metri
we
c
flow
rate obtai
of
refrig n:
erant
at
com
pres
sor
inlet,
Ve is
give
n by:

v
o
l
u
m
e
,

:
4D .
0.N.
n=
e

4
T(v

es in

The
volu
metri
c
effici
ency
riv is
give
n by:
r
(
v

Versi
thes on 1
ME,
IIT
e
Khar
agpu
valu
r 20

P
c-

V1
P
e
y

the
expr
essi
on
for
swe
pt
volu

Lesson
19
Performance Of
Reciprocating
Compressors
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 1

The specific objectives of this lecture are to:

1. Discuss the performance aspects of ideal reciprocating compressors with
clearance, specifically:
833.
Effect of evaporator temperature on system performance at a
fixed condenser temperature (Section 19.1.1)
834.
Effect of condenser temperature on system performance at a
fixed evaporator temperature (Section 19.1.1)
835.
Effects of pressure ratio and type of refrigerant on
compressor discharge temperature (Section 19.1.3)
2. Discuss the performance aspects of actual compressor processes by
considering:
836.
Effect of heat transfer in the suction line and compressor
(Section 19.2.1)
837.
Effects of pressure drops in the suction and discharge lines and
across suction and discharge valves of compressor (Section 19.2.2)
838.
Effect of refrigerant leakage (Section 19.2.3)
839.

Describe various methods of capacity control (Section 19.3)

840.

Discuss methods of compressor lubrication (Section 19.4)

At the end of the lesson, the student should be able to:

1. Describe qualitatively the effects of evaporator and condenser
temperatures on performance of reciprocating compressors
2. Discuss the effects of heat transfer, pressure drops and refrigerant leakage
on performance of actual compressors
3. Explain various methods of regulating the capacity of reciprocating
compressors, and
4. Discuss aspects of compressor lubrication

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 2

19.1. Ideal compressor with clearance:

19.1.1. Effect of evaporator temperature:
The effect of evaporator temperature on performance of the system is
obtained by keeping the condenser temperature (pressure) and compressor
displacement rate and clearance ratio fixed. To simplify the discussions, it is
further assumed that the refrigeration cycle is an SSS cycle.
a) On Volumetric efficiency and refrigerant mass flow rate:
The volumetric of the compressor with clearance is given by:
1/n
Pc 1+6V,cl
=
(19.1)

= 1-8rp

-1|

For a given condensing temperature (or pressure), the pressure ratio

rp increases as the evaporator temperature (or evaporator pressure)
decreases. Hence, from the expression for clearance volumetric efficiency, it
is obvious that the volumetric efficiency decreases as evaporator temperature
decreases. This is also explained with the help of Fig.19.1, which shows the
P-V diagram for different evaporator pressures. As shown, as the evaporator
pressure decreases, the volume of refrigerant compressed decreases
significantly, since the compressor displacement remains same the clearance
volumetric efficiency decreases as evaporator temperature decreases. In fact,
as explained in the earlier lecture, at a limiting pressure ratio, the volumetric
efficiency becomes zero.
vPey
T

P
Pc
1
1 1

Pe,1

Pe,2 Pe,3

VC

V4

V4

V4 VA

Fig.19.1. P-V diagram for different evaporator pressures and a fixed

condenser pressure
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 3

The mass flow rate of refrigerant m is given by:

. VSW
ve
(19.2)
m=V,cl
As the evaporator temperature decreases the clearance volumetric
efficiency decreases and the specific volume of refrigerant at compressor inlet
ve increases. As a result of these two effects, the mass flow rate of refrigerant
through the compressor decreases rapidly as the evaporator temperature
decreases as shown in Fig.19.2.

V,cl

Te---------
Fig.19.2. Effect of evaporator temperature on clearance volumetric
efficiency and refrigerant mass flow rate
b) On refrigeration effect and refrigeration capacity:
A compressor alone cannot provide refrigeration capacity. By
refrigeration capacity of compressor what we mean is the capacity of a
refrigeration system that uses the compressor under discussion. Figure 19.3
(a) shows the SSS cycle on P-h diagram at different evaporator temperatures.
It can be seen from the figure that the refrigeration effect, q e (qe = h1-h4)
increases marginally as the evaporator temperature is increased. This is due
to the shape of the saturation vapour curve on P-h diagram. The effect of T e
on refrigerant effect is also shown in Fig.19.3(b).
The refrigeration capacity of the compressor Qe is given by:
Qe =m.qe

(19.3)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 4

2
P
&s-

h
Fig.19.3(a): Effect of evaporator temperature on refrigeration effect on
P-h diagram
Since mass flow rate of refrigerant increases rapidly and
refrigerant effect also increases, though marginally with increase in
evaporator temperature, the refrigeration capacity increases sharply
with increase in evaporator temperature as shown in Fig.19.3(b).

Qe

qe

Te
Fig.19.3(b): Effect of evaporator temperature on refrigeration
effect and
refrigeration capacity

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 5

c) On work of compression and power requirement:

At a constant condenser temperature as evaporator temperature
increases the work of compression, hc (= h2-h1) decreases as shown in
Fig.19.3(a). This is due to the divergent nature of isentropes in the
superheated region. The work of compression becomes zero when the
evaporator temperature becomes equal to the condenser temperature (T e=Tc)
as shown in Fig. 19.4.
The power input to the compressor is given by:
Wc =

m.h

(19.4)

As discussed before, for a given clearance ratio and condenser temperature,

the volumetric efficiency and hence the mass flow rate becomes zero at a
lower limiting value of evaporator temperature (Te = Te,lim). Since the work of
compression becomes zero when the evaporator temperature equals the
condenser temperature, the power input to the compressor, which is a product
of mass flow rate and work of compression is zero at a low evaporator
temperature (at which the mass flow rate is zero). And the power input also
becomes zero when evaporator temperature equals condenser temperature
(at which the work of compression becomes zero). This implies that as
evaporator temperature is increased from the limiting value, the power curve
increases from zero, reaches a peak and then becomes zero as shown in
Fig.19.4.

Tc = Constant

hc

Te=Te,lim

Te

Wc
Te=Tc

Fig.19.4: Effect of evaporator temperature on work of compression (hc)

and power input to compressor (W c)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 6

The variation of compressor power input with evaporator temperature

has a major practical significance. As a mentioned before, there is an
evaporator temperature at which the power reaches a maximum value. If the
design evaporator temperature of the refrigeration system is less than the
evaporator temperature at which the power is maximum, then the design
power requirement is lower than the peak power input. However, during the
initial pull-down period, the initial evaporator temperature may lie to the left of
the power peak. Then as the system runs steadily the evaporator temperature
reduces and the power requirement passes through the peak point. If the
motor is designed to suit the design power input then the motor gets
overloaded during every pull-down period as the peak power is greater than
the design power input. Selecting an oversized motor to meet the power peak
is not an energy efficient solution, as the motor will be underutilized during the
normal operation. One way of overcoming the problem is to throttle the
suction gas during the pull-down so that the refrigerant mass flow rate is
reduced and the motor does not pass through the power peak. In multicylinder compressors, some of the cylinders can be unloaded during the pulldown so as to reduce the power requirement.
d) On COP and volume flow rate per unit capacity:
The COP of the system is defined as:
COP= e = e
(19.5) Wc
Ahc
As discussed before, as the evaporator temperature increases the
refrigeration effect, qe increases marginally and the work of compression, Ah c
reduces sharply. As a result the COP of the system increases rapidly as the
evaporator temperature increases as shown in Fig.19.5.
The volume flow rate per unit capacity, V is given by:

V=

TlVcl.VSW
,

=
Qe

ve

qe

(19.6)

As evaporator temperature increases the specific volume of the

refrigerant at compressor inlet reduces rapidly and the refrigerant effect
increases marginally. Due to the combined effect of these two, the volume
flow rate of refrigerant per unit capacity reduces sharply with evaporator
temperature as shown in Fig. 19.5. This implies that for a given refrigeration
capacity, the required volumetric flow rate and hence the size of the
compressor becomes very large at very low evaporator temperatures.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 7

Tc = Constant

i.

COP

\V

V (m3/kW.s)
COP

Te

Fig.19.5: Effect of evaporator temperature on COP and volume flow rate per
unit capacity (V)
19.1.2. Effect of condenser temperature:
Atmospheric air is the cooling medium for most of the refrigeration
systems. Since the ambient temperature at a location can vary over a wide
range, the heat rejection temperature (i.e., the condensing temperature) may
also vary widely. This affects the performance of the compressor and hence
the refrigeration system. The effect of condensing temperature on compressor
performance can be studied by keeping evaporator temperature constant.
a) On volumetric efficiency and refrigerant mass flow rate:
Figure 19.6 shows the effect of condensing temperature on clearance
volumetric efficiency and mass flow rate of refrigerant. At a constant
evaporator temperature as the condensing temperature increases, the
pressure ratio increases, hence, both the volumetric efficiency and mass flow
rate decrease as shown in the figure. However, the effect of condensing
temperature on mass flow rate is not as significant as the evaporator
temperature as the specific volume of refrigerant at compressor inlet is
independent of condensing temperature.
b) On refrigeration effect and refrigeration capacity:
At a constant evaporator temperature as the condensing temperature
increases, then the enthalpy of refrigerant at the inlet to the evaporator
increases. Since the evaporator enthalpy remains constant at a constant
evaporator temperature, the refrigeration effect decreases with increase in
condensing temperature as shown in Fig. 19.7. The refrigeration capacity (Qe)
also reduces with increase in condensing temperature as both the mass flow
rate and refrigeration effect decrease as shown in Fig.19.7.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 8

___

^
^^-^^
^-\

^\

Te = Constant
\

^N.

\
\

V,cl

\
\

N.

\
\

\
\

\
\

Tc
Fig.19.6. Effect of condenser temperature on clearance volumetric efficiency
and mass flow rate of refrigerant

Qe

qe

Tc

Fig.19.7. Effect of condenser temperature on refrigeration effect and

refrigeration capacity

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 9

c) On work of compression and power requirement:

The work of compression is zero when the condenser temperature is
equal to the evaporator temperature, on the other hand at a limiting
condensing temperature the mass flow rate of refrigerant becomes zero as
the clearance volumetric efficiency becomes zero as explained before. Hence,
similar to the effect of evaporator temperature on power curve, the
compressor power input increases from zero (work of compression is zero),
reaches a peak and then again becomes zero at a high value of condensing
temperature as shown in Fig.19.8. However, the peak power in this case is
not as critical as with evaporator temperature since the chances of condenser
operating at such a high temperatures are rare.
d) On COP and volume flow rate per unit capacity:
As condensing temperature increases the refrigeration effect reduces
marginally and work of compression increases, as a result the COP reduces
as shown in Fig.19.9. Even though the specific volume at compressor inlet is
independent of condensing temperature, since the refrigeration effect
decreases with increase in condensing temperature, the volume flow rate of
refrigerant per unit capacity increases as condenser temperature increases as
shown in Fig.19.9.

Te =
W
c Constant
h

J
Tc
Fig.19.8: Effect of condenser temperature on work of compression and
power input to compressor

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 10

!

Te = Constant

//

V s'

Tc

----------

COP

Fig.19.9: Effect of condensing temperature on COP and volume flow rate

per unit capacity (V)
The above discussion shows that the performance of the system
degrades as the evaporator temperature decreases and condensing
temperature increases, i.e., the temperature lift increases. This is in line with
the effect of these temperatures on reverse Carnot refrigeration system. It is
seen that compared to the condensing temperature, the effect of evaporator
temperature is quiet significant. When the heat sink temperature does not
vary too much then the effect of condensing temperature may not be
significant.
19.1.3. Compressor discharge temperature:
If the compressor discharge temperature is very high then it may result
in breakdown of the lubricating oil, causing excessive wear and reduced life of
the compressor valves (mainly the discharge valve). In hermetic compressors,
the high discharge temperature adversely affects the motor insulation (unless
the insulation is designed for high temperatures). When the temperature is
high, undesirable chemical reactions may take place inside the compressor,
especially in the presence of water. This may ultimately damage the
compressor.
If the compression process is assumed to be isentropic and the
refrigerant vapour is assumed to be have as a perfect gas, then the following
equations apply:
Pvy=constant andPv = RT
Then the discharge temperature, Td is given by:
Y
y-1
(P19.8)
c
VPe J
Td = Te

(19.7)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 11

Thus for a given compressor inlet temperature, T e, the discharge

temperature Td increases as the pressure ratio (Pc/Pe) and specific heat ratio
increase. Even though refrigerant vapour may not exactly behave as a perfect
gas, the trends remain same. Figure 19.10 shows the variation of discharge
temperature as a function of pressure ratio for three commonly used
refrigerants, ammonia, R 22 and R 12. As shown in the figure since specific
heat ratio of ammonia is greater than R 22, which in turn is greater than R 12,
at a given pressure ratio, the discharge temperature of ammonia is higher
than R 22, which in turn is higher than R 12. Since the high discharge
temperature of ammonia may damage the lubricating oil, normally ammonia
compressors are cooled externally using water jackets.

/
/

NH3
/ /

R 22 R 12

Td
(Pc/Pe)
Fig.19.10: Variation of compressor discharge temperature with pressure ratio
for different refrigerants

19.2. Actual compression process

Actual compression processes deviate from ideal compression
processes due to:
i.

Heat transfer between the refrigerant and surroundings during

compression and expansion, which makes these processes nonadiabatic
ii. Frictional pressure drops in connecting lines and across suction and
discharge valves
iii.
Losses due to leakage

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 12

19.2.1. Effect of heat transfer:

Heat transfer from the cylinder walls and piston to the refrigerant vapour
takes place during the suction stroke and heat transfer from the refrigerant to
the surroundings takes place at the end of the compression. In hermetic
compressors additional heat transfer from the motor winding to refrigerant
takes place. The effect of this heat transfer is to increase the temperature of
refrigerant, thereby increasing the specific volume. This in general results in
reduced volumetric efficiency and hence reduced refrigerant mass flow rate
and refrigeration capacity. The extent of reduction in mass flow rate and
refrigeration capacity depends on the pressure ratio, compressor speed and
compressor design. As seen before, the discharge temperature and hence the
temperature of the cylinder and piston walls increase with pressure ratio. As
the compressor speed increases the heat transfer rate from the compressor to
the surroundings reduces, which may result in higher refrigerant temperature.
Finally, the type of external cooling provided and compressor design also
affects the performance as it influences the temperature of the compressor.
Since the compression and expansion processes are accompanied by
heat transfer, these processes are not adiabatic in actual compressors.
Hence, the index of compression is not isentropic index but a polytropic index.
However, depending upon the type of the compressor and the amount of
external cooling provided, the compression process may approach an
adiabatic process (as in centrifugal compressors) or a reversible polytropic
process (as in reciprocating compressors with external cooling). The index of
compression may be greater than isentropic index (in case of irreversible
adiabatic compression). When the process is not reversible, adiabatic, then
the polytropic index of compression n depends on the process and is not a
property of the refrigerant. Also the polytropic index of compression may not
be equal to the polytropic index of expansion. Since the compression process
in general is irreversible, the actual power input to the compressor will be
greater than the ideal compression work. Sometimes the isentropic efficiency
is used to estimate the actual work of compression. The isentropic efficiency r|
is for the compressor is defined as:
ZAh c,is

riis =--------

(19.9)

Ahc,act

where Ahc,is is the isentropic work of compression and Ah c,act is the actual
work of compression. It is observed that for a given compressor the isentropic
efficiency of the compressor is mainly a function of the pressure ratio.
Normally the function varies from compressor to compressor, and is obtained
by conducting experimental studies on compressors. The actual work of
compression and actual power input can be obtained if the isentropic
efficiency of the compressor is known as the isentropic work of compression
can be calculated from the operating temperatures.
19.2.2. Effect of pressure drops:
In actual reciprocating compressors, pressure drop takes place due to
resistance to fluid flow. Pressure drop across the suction valve is called as

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 13

wire drawing. This pressure drop can have adverse effect on compressor
performance as the suction pressure at the inlet to the compressor P s will be
lower than the evaporator pressure as shown in Fig.19.11. As a result, the
pressure ratio and discharge temperature increases and density of refrigerant
decreases. This in turn reduces the volumetric efficiency, refrigerant mass
flow rate and increases work of compression. This pressure drop depends on
the speed of the compressor and design of the suction valve. The pressure
drop increases as piston speed increases.
Even though the pressure drop across the discharge valve is not as
critical as the pressure drop across suction valve, it still affects the
compressor performance in a negative manner.
The net effect of pressure drops across the valves is to reduce the
refrigeration capacity of the system and increase power input. The pressure
drops also affect the discharge temperature and compressor cooling in an
adverse manner.

Ps
V

Fig.19.11: Effects of suction and discharge side pressure drops on P-V

diagram of a reciprocating compressor
19.2.3. Effect of leakage:
In actual compressors, refrigerant leakage losses take place between
the cylinder walls and piston, across the suction and discharge valves and
across the oil seal in open type of compressors. The magnitude of these
losses depends upon the design of the compressor valves, pressure ratio,
compressor speed and the life and condition of the compressor. Leakage
losses increase as the pressure ratio increases, compressor speed decreases
and the life of compressor increases. Due to the leakage, some amount of
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 14

refrigerant flows out of the suction valves at the beginning of compression

stroke and some amount of refrigerant enters the cylinder through the
discharge valves at the beginning of suction stroke. The net effect is to reduce
the mass flow rate of refrigerant. Even though it is possibly to minimize
refrigerant leakage across cylinder walls, eliminating leakages across valves
is not possible as it is not possible to close the valves completely during the
running of the compressor.
As a result of the above deviations, the actual volumetric efficiency of
refrigerant compressors will be lower than the clearance volumetric efficiency.
It is difficult to estimate the actual efficiency from theory alone. Normally
empirical equations are developed to estimate this parameter. The actual
volumetric efficiency can be defined either in terms of volumetric flow rates or
in terms of mass flow rates, i.e.,

actualvolumetric flow rate

=
V,act

actual mass flow rate

=
Compressor displacement rate maximum possible mass flow rate

In general,
where v,th
Ts
Tsc
L

V,act=V,th Ts -L

(1910) T sc

= Theoretical volumetric efficiency obtained from P-V diagram

= Temperature of vapour at suction flange, K
= Temperature of vapour at the beginning of compression, K
= Leakage loss (fraction or percentage)

Several tests on compressors show that the actual volumetric of a

given compressor is mainly a function of pressure ratio, and for a given
pressure ratio it remains practically constant, irrespective of other operating
conditions. Also, compressors with same design characteristics will have
approximately the same volumetric efficiency, irrespective of the size. It is
shown that for a given compressor, the actual volumetric efficiency can be
obtained from the empirical equation:
V,act =A-B(rp)C (19.11)
where A, B and C are empirical constants to be obtained from actual test data
and rp is the pressure ratio.
Depending upon the compressor and operating conditions, the
difference between actual and theoretical volumetric efficiency could be
anywhere between 4 to 20 percent.
Since heat transfer rate and leakage losses reduce and pressure drops
increase with increase in refrigerant velocity, the actual volumetric efficiency
reaches a maximum at a certain optimum speed. An approximate relation for
optimum speed as suggested by Prof. Gustav Lorentzen is:

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 15

opt

// 420 m/s (19.12) /M

where Vopt is the optimum velocity of the refrigerant through the valve port in
m/s and M is the molecular weight of the refrigerant in kg/kmol. This relation
suggests that higher the molecular weight of the refrigerant lower is the
optimum refrigerant velocity.

19.3. Capacity control of reciprocating compressors:

Normally refrigerant compressors are designed to take care of the most
severe operating conditions, which normally occurs when the cooling load is
high and/or the condenser operates at high temperatures due to high heat
sink temperatures. However, when the operating conditions are not so severe,
i.e., when the cooling load is low and/or the heat sink temperature is low, then
the compressor designed for peak load conditions becomes oversized. If no
control action is taken, then the compressor adjusts itself by operating at
lower evaporator temperature, which may affect the refrigerated space
temperature. The temperature of the evaporator during part load conditions
reduces as the rate at which the compressor removes refrigerant vapour from
the evaporator exceeds the rate of vaporization in the evaporator. As a result
the evaporator pressure, and hence the evaporator temperature reduces.
Operating at low evaporator temperature may lead to other problems such as
low air humidity, frosting of evaporator coils and freezing of the external fluid.
To avoid these problems, the capacity of the compressor has to be regulated
depending upon the load. Various methods available in practice for controlling
the capacity of compressors are:
841.
842.
843.
844.
845.

Cycling or on-off control

Back pressure regulation by throttling of suction gas
Hot gas by-pass
Unloading of cylinders in multi-cylinder compressors, and
Compressor speed control

The cycling or on-off control is normally used in very small capacity

refrigeration systems such as domestic refrigerators, room air conditioners,
water coolers etc. The on-off control is achieved with the help of a thermostat,
which normally senses the temperature inside the refrigerated space or
evaporator temperature. As long as the temperature is greater than a set
temperature (cut-out point) the compressor runs, and when the temperature
falls below the cut-out temperature the thermostat switches-off the
compressor. The temperature at which the compressor is switched-on again is
known as cut-in temperature. The difference between the cut-in and cut-out
temperatures is called as differential of the thermostat, which can be adjusted
internally. The level of temperature at which the thermostat operates is called
as the range of the thermostat, which can also be adjusted by the customer
by turning a knob. For example, a thermostat may have a cut-in temperature
of 10oC and a cut-out temperature of 9oC, in which case the differential is 1oC.
By turning the thermostat knob, the same thermostat can be made to operate,

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 16

say at 7oC of cut-in temperature and 6oC of cut-out temperature. In this

example, the differential has been kept fixed at 1oC, while the range has been
varied. As mentioned, it is also possible to vary the differential so that the
thermostat can operate at a cut-in temperature of 10 oC and a cut-out
temperature of 8oC, with a differential of 2oC. Thus the temperature in the
refrigerated space varies between the cut-out and cut-in values. In stead of a
thermostat which takes control action based on temperatures, it is also
possible to use a pressure sensing device to initiate on-off control. This type
of device is called a pressostat, and is designed to take control action by
sensing the evaporator pressure. The on-off control is satisfactory in
applications where the fluctuation in product temperatures due to on-off
control is acceptable. Thus it is suitable when the thermal capacity of the
product or the refrigerated space is large so that small variation in it can give
sufficient variation in evaporator temperature. On-off control is not good when
the temperature has to be regulated within a small range, in which case the
compressor has to start and stop very frequently. Small compressor motors
can be cycled for about 10 cycles per hour, whereas large compressor motors
are normally not allowed to start and stop for more than one or two times in an
hour.
Back-pressure regulation by throttling the suction gas reduces the
refrigeration capacity of the compressor. However, this method is not normally
used for regular capacity control as it does not reduce the compressor power
input proportionately, consequently it is energy inefficient. This method is
normally used during the pull-down period so as to avoid the power peak.
Hot gas bypass to suction side is an effective method of controlling the
capacity. In this method, when the evaporator pressure falls below a
predetermined value, a hot gas bypass valve is opened and hot refrigerant
from the discharge side flows back into the suction side of the compressor. A
constant pressure expansion valve can be used as a hot gas bypass valve.
Though by this method the capacity of the compressor can be regulated quite
closely, this method suffers from some disadvantages such as little or no
reduction in compressor power consumption at reduced refrigeration
capacities, excessive superheating of the suction gas resulting in overheating
of the compressors. Hence, this method is normally used in small
compressors. However, in conjunction with other efficient methods, hot gas
bypass is used when it is required to regulate the capacity down to 0 percent
or for unloaded starting. Overheating of the compressor can be reduced by
sending the hot bypass gas to the evaporator inlet. This also maintains
sufficiently high refrigerant velocity in the evaporator so that oil return to the
compressor can be improved during low cooling loads. Figure 19.12 shows
the schematic of a refrigeration system with a hot gas bypass arrangement. In
the figure, the solid line is for the system in which the by-passed hot gas
enters the inlet of the compressor, while the dashed line is for the system in
which the by-passed hot gas enters at the inlet to the evaporator.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 17

Condenser
Compressor
V"~<-

Hot gas bypass

Exp. device

Evaporator

Fig.19.12: A vapour compression refrigeration system with hot gas

bypass arrangement
Unloading of cylinders in multi-cylinder compressors is another effective
method of regulating compressor capacity. This is achieved usually by
keeping the suction valves of some of the cylinders open during the
compression stroke. As a result, the suction vapour drawn into these cylinders
during suction stroke is returned to the suction line during the compression
stroke. This is done with the help of pressure sensing switch, which senses
the low pressure in the evaporator and opens some of the suction valves. In
addition to capacity regulation, this method is also used during pull-down so
that the peak power point can be skipped. This method is efficient as the
required power input reduces with reduced cooling load, though not in the
same proportion. Hence, this is one of the methods commonly employed in
large systems.
Controlling the capacity of the compressor by regulating its speed is one of
the most efficient methods as the required power input reduces almost in the
same proportion with cooling load. However, for complete control a variable
frequency drive may be required, which increases the cost of the system. In
addition, reducing the speed too much may effect the compressor cooling and
oil return.

19.4. Compressor lubrication:

Reciprocating compressors require lubrication to reduce wear between
several parts, which rub against each other during the operation. Normally
lubricating oil is used to lubricate the compressors. The lubricating oil usually
comes in contact with the refrigerant and mixes with it, hence, it is essential to
select a suitable oil in refrigerant compressors. The important properties that
must be considered while selecting lubricating oil in refrigerant compressors
are:

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 18

846.
847.
848.
849.

Chemical stability
Pour and/or floc points
Dielectric strength, and
Viscosity

In addition to the above, the nature of the refrigerant used, type and
design of the compressor, evaporator and compressor discharge
temperatures have to be considered while selecting suitable lubricating oils.
The oil should not undergo any chemical changes for many years of
operation. This aspect is especially critical in hermetic compressor where, oil
is not supposed to be changed for ten years or more. Since the discharge
temperature is normally high in these compressors, the oil should not
decompose even under very high temperatures. The chemical stability of the
oil is inversely proportional to the number of unsaturated hydrocarbons
present in the oil. For refrigerant compressors, oils with low percentage of
unsaturated hydrocarbons are desirable.
The pour point of the oil may be defined as the lowest temperature at
which the oil can flow or pour, when tested under specific conditions. The pour
point is important for systems working at low evaporator temperatures. The
pour point depends upon the wax content, higher the wax content, higher will
be the pour point. Hence, for low temperature applications oils with low wax
content should be used, otherwise the oil may solidify inside the evaporator
tubes affecting the system performance and life of the compressor. The
temperature at which the wax in the oil begins to precipitate is called as the
cloud point. The floc point of the oil is the temperature at which wax will start
to precipitate from a mixture of 90% R 12 and 10% oil by volume. In case of
refrigerants such as R 12, viscosity of oil is reduced, as the refrigerant is
soluble in oil. The floc point of the oil is a measure of the tendency of the oil to
separate wax when mixed with an oil-soluble refrigerant. Hence it is an
important parameter to be considered while selecting lubricating oils for these
refrigerants. Since the tendency for wax to separate increases with amount of
oil in refrigerant, the concentration of oil in refrigerant should normally be kept
below 10 percent with these refrigerants. Floc point is not important in case of
refrigerants that are not soluble in oil (e.g. ammonia).
Dielectric strength of the oil is a measure of its resistance to the flow of
electric current. It is normally expressed in terms of the voltage required to
cause an electric arc across a gap of 0.1 inch between two poles immersed in
oil. Since impurities such as moisture, dissolved solids (metallic) reduce the
dielectric strength of oil, a high dielectric strength is an indication of the purity
of the oil. This parameter is very important in case of hermetic compressors
as an oil with low dielectric strength may lead to shorting of the motor
windings.
The viscosity of the oil is an important parameter in any lubricating system.
The viscosity of the oil should be maintained within certain range for the
lubrication system to operate effectively. If the viscosity is too low then the
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 19

wear between the rubbing surfaces will be excessive, in addition to this it may
not act as a good sealing agent to prevent refrigerant leakage. However, if the
viscosity is too high then fluid friction will be very high and the oil may not fill
the small gaps between the rubbing surfaces, again leading to excessive
wear. The problem is complicated in refrigerant compressors as the viscosity
of the oil varies considerably with temperature and refrigerant concentration.
The oil viscosity increases as temperature and concentration of refrigerant
decrease and vice versa.
Both mineral oils as well as synthetic oils have been used as lubricating
oils in refrigeration. The mineral oils have to be refined to improve their
chemical stability and reduce their pour and/or floc points. Synthetic oils have
been developed to provide high chemical stability, good lubricity, good
refrigerant solubility, lower pour/floc points and required viscosity.
19.4.1. Methods of lubrication:
Lubrication can be either splash type or force feed type. Normally small
compressors (upto 10 kW input) are splash lubricated. Larger compressors
use forced feed type lubrication. In splash type lubrication, the compressor
crankcase which acts as an oil sump is filled with oil to a certain level. As the
crankshaft rotates, the connecting rod and crankshaft dip into the oil sump
causing the oil to be splashed on the rubbing surfaces. In some compressors,
small scoops or dippers are attached to the connecting rod, which pick the oil
and throws it onto the rubbing surfaces. In small, high-speed compressors,
flooded type splash lubrication is used. In these modified type, slinger rings
are screws are used for lifting the oil above crankshaft or main bearings, from
where the oil floods over the rubbing surfaces. This prevents excessive oil
carryover due to violent splashing in high-speed compressors.
In the forced feed method of lubrication an oil pump is used to circulate
the oil to various rubbing surfaces under pressure. The oil drains back into the
oil sump due to gravity and is circulated again.
If the refrigerants are not soluble in lubricating oil, then there is
possibility of oil being carried away from the compressor and deposited
elsewhere in the system. To prevent this, oil separators are used on the
discharge side of the compressor, from where the oil is separated from the
refrigerant vapour and is sent back to the compressor.

Questions and answers:

1. The refrigeration capacity of a reciprocating compressor increases:
850.
As the evaporator temperature increases and condenser
temperature decreases
851.
As the evaporator temperature decreases and condenser
temperature increases
852.
As the evaporator and condenser temperatures increase
853.
As the evaporator and condenser temperatures decrease
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 20

Ans. a)
2. For a given refrigeration capacity, the required size of the compressor
increases as:
854.
As the evaporator temperature increases and condenser
temperature decreases
855.
As the evaporator temperature decreases and condenser
temperature increases
856.
As the evaporator and condenser temperatures increase
857.
As the evaporator and condenser temperatures decrease
Ans. b)
3. During every pull-down, the reciprocating compressor is likely to be
overloaded as:
858.
The initial refrigerant mass flow rate is high and work of
compression is low
859.
The initial refrigerant mass flow rate is low and work of
compression is high
860.
Both the mass flow rate and work of compression are high in the
initial period
861.
None of the above
Ans. a)
4. Ammonia compressors normally have water jackets for cooling as:
862.

The latent heat of ammonia is high compared to synthetic

refrigerants
863.
The boiling point of ammonia is high
864.
The critical temperature of ammonia is high
865.
The index of compression of ammonia is high
Ans. d)

5. The actual volumetric efficiency of a reciprocating compressor is smaller

than the clearance volumetric efficiency due to:
866.
867.
868.
869.
870.

Pressure drop across suction line and suction valve

Pressure drop across discharge line and discharge valve
Heat transfer in suction line
Leakage of refrigerant across valves
All of the above

Ans. e)
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 21

6. When the compression process is reversible, polytropic with heat transfer

from compressor, then:
871.
The index of compression will be smaller than the isentropic
index of compression
872.
The index of compression will be higher than the isentropic
index of compression
873.
Power input will be smaller than that of a reversible, isentropic
process
874.
Discharge temperature will be higher than isentropic
discharge temperature
Ans. a) and c)
7. As the speed of the compressor increases:
875.
876.
877.
878.

Heat transfer rate from compressor increases

Heat transfer rate from compressor decreases
Pressure drops increase and leakage losses decrease
Pressure drops decrease and leakage losses increase

Ans. b) and c)
8. On-off control is generally used only in small refrigeration capacity systems
as:
879.
Variation in refrigerated space temperature may be acceptable
in smaller systems
880.
Frequent start-and-stops can be avoided in small systems
881.
It is simple and inexpensive
882.
All of the above
Ans. a) and c)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 22

9. Hot gas bypass to compressor inlet:

883.
884.
885.
886.

Provides an effective means of capacity control

Is an energy efficient method
Leads to increased discharge temperature
Provides effective cooling in hermetic compressor

Ans. a) and c)
3. A reciprocating compressor is to be designed for a domestic refrigerator of
100 W cooling capacity. The refrigerator operates at an evaporator
temperature of 23.3oC and a condensing temperature of 54.4 oC. The
refrigeration effect at these conditions is 87.4 kJ/kg. At the suction flange the
temperature of the refrigerant is 32 oC and specific volume is 0.15463 m 3/kg.
Due to heat transfer within the compressor the temperature of the refrigerant
increases by 15oC. The indicated volumetric efficiency of the compressor is
0.85 and the leakage loss factor is 0.04. The rotational speed of the
compressor is 2900 RPM. Find a) The diameter and stroke of the compressor
in cms; b) Find the COP of the system if the actual mean effective pressure of
the compressor is 5.224 bar.
Given:

Cooling capacity, Qe
Evaporator Temperature, Te
Refrigeration effect, qe
Temperature at suction flange, Ts
Sp. vol. of vapour at flange, vs
Temperature rise in compressor
Indicated volumetric efficiency, V,th
Leakage losses, L
Mean effective pressure, mep
Rotational speed of compressor, N

= 100 W = 0.1 kW
= -23.3oC
= 87.4 kJ/kg
= 32oC
= 0.15463 m3/kg
= 15oC
= 0.85
= 0.04
= 5.224 bar
= 2900 rpm

Find:

a) Diameter and stroke length of compressor

b) COP

Ans:
a) The mass flow rate of refrigerant, m
m

= refrigeration capacity/refrigeration effect =

(0.1/87.4) = 1.1442 X 10-3 kg/s

Volumetric flow rate at suction flange, Vr

Vr = m X vs = 1.7693 X 10-4 m3/s
Required compressor displacement rate, VSW = Vr/V,act

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 23

Actual volumetric efficiency, r|V,act:

Ts ,. (273.15 + 32)
r|V act =r|V thL =0.85
--------------------0.04 = 0.77
(273.15 + 32 + 15)

V,act =TlV,th T sc

-4

m3/s
Required compressor displacement rate, VSW = Vr/riV,act =
1.7693 X 10-4/0.77
=
2.29
8X
10

The compressor displacement rate is equal to:

VSW=n

*D2L
4

=n

60y

N^
V60,

where n is the number of cylinders and 9 is the stroke-tobore ratio (L/D)

Since the refrigeration capacity is small, we can assume a
single cylinder compressor, i.e., n = 1
Assuming a stroke-to-bore ratio 0 of 0.8 and substituting the
input values in the above expression, we obtain:
Diameter of cylinder, D
Stroke length, L

= 0.01963 m = 1.963 cm, and

= 0.8D
= 1.5704 cm

b) COP:
Actual power input to the compressor, Wc
Wc = mep X displacement rate

= 5.224X100X2.298X10-4 =

0.12 kW
Hence, COP = (0.1/0.12) = 0.833

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 24

Lesson
20
Rotary, Positive
Displacement Type
Compressors
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 1

The specific objectives of this lecture are to:

887.
Discuss working principle and characteristics of a fixed vane, rolling
piston type compressor (Section 20.1)
888.
Discuss working principle and characteristics of a multiple vane, rotary
compressor (Section 20.2, 20.3)
889.
Discuss working principle and characteristics of a twin-screw type
compressor (Section 20.4.1)
890.
Discuss working principle and characteristics of a single-screw type
compressor (Section 20.4.2)
891.
Discuss working principle, characteristics and specific advantages of a
scroll compressor (Section 20.5)
At the end of the lecture, the student should be able to
892.
Explain with schematics the working principles of rotary fixed and
multiple vane type compressors, single- and twin-screw type compressors
and scroll compressors.
893.
Explain the performance characteristics, advantages and applications
of rotary, positive displacement type compressors.

20.1. Rolling piston (fixed vane) type compressors:

Rolling piston or fixed vane type compressors are used in small refrigeration
systems (upto 2 kW capacity) such as domestic refrigerators or air conditioners.
These compressors belong to the class of positive displacement type as
compression is achieved by reducing the volume of the refrigerant. In this type of
compressors, the rotating shaft of the roller has its axis of rotation that matches with
the centerline of the cylinder, however, it is eccentric with respect to the roller (Figure
20.1). This eccentricity of the shaft with respect to the roller creates suction and
compression of the refrigerant as shown in Fig.20.1. A single vane or blade is
positioned in the non-rotating cylindrical block. The rotating motion of the roller
causes a reciprocating motion of the single vane.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 2

Discharge
discharge
valve

Fixed vane
suction
Cylinder
block

Roller
F
i
g
.2
0.
1:
W
o
rk
in
g
p
ri
n
ci
pl
e
of
a
r
ol
li
n

g
pi
st
o
n
ty
p
e
c
o
m
p
r
e
s
s
o
r
As
shown in
Fig.20.1,
this type
of
compres
sor does
not
require a
suction
valve but
requires
a
discharg
e valve.
The
sealing
between
the high
and low
pressure
sides has
to
be
provided:
- Al
ong
the
line of
conta
ct
betwe
en

roller
and
cylind
er
block
- Al
ong
the
line of
conta
ct
betwe
en
vane
and
roller,
and
- be
tween
the
roller
and
endpates
The
leakage
is
controlle
d
through
hydrodyn
amic
sealing
and
matching
between
the
mating
compone
nts. The
effective
ness of
the
sealing
depends
on
the
clearanc
e,
compres
sor
speed,
surface

finish
and
oil
viscosity.
Close
tolerance
s
and
good
surface
finishing
is
required
to
minimize
internal
leakage.
U
nlike in
reciproca
ting
compres
sors, the
small
clearanc
e volume
filled with
highpressure
refrigera
nt does
not
expand,
but
simply
mixes
with the
suction
refrigera
nt in the
suction
space.
As
a
result,
the
volumetri
c
efficiency
does not
reduce
drasticall
y
with
increasin
g

pressure
ratio,
indicatin
g small
reexpansio
n losses.
The
compres
sor runs
smoothly
and
is
relatively
quiet as
the
refrigera
nt flow is
continuo
us.

Version 1
ME, IIT
Kharagpur
3

The mass flow rate of refrigerant through the compressor is given by:
7t__V

N
Vve
j
V60y

m=TiV

VSW ve

(A -B )L

(20.1)

where A = Inner diameter of the cylinder B =

Diameter of the roller L = Length of the
cylinder block N = Rotation speed, RPM r|V
= Volumetric efficiency ve = specific volume
of refrigerant at suction

20.2. Multiple vane type compressors:

As shown in Fig.20.2, in multiple vane type compressor, the axis of rotation
coincides with the center of the roller (O), however, it is eccentric with respect to the
center of the cylinder (O). The rotor consists of a number of slots with sliding vanes.
During the running of the compressor, the sliding vanes, which are normally made of
non-metallic materials, are held against the cylinder due to centrifugal forces. The
number of compression strokes produced in one revolution of the rotor is equal to
the number of sliding vanes, thus a 4-vane compressor produces 4 compression
strokes in one rotation.
In these compressors, sealing is required between the vanes and cylinder,
between the vanes and the slots on the rotor and between the rotor and the end
plate. However, since pressure difference across each slot is only a fraction of the
total pressure difference, the sealing is not as critical as in fixed vane type
compressor.
This type of compressor does not require suction or discharge valves,
however, as shown in Fig.20.3, check valves are used on discharge side to prevent
reverse rotation during off-time due to pressure difference. Since there are no
discharge valves, the compressed refrigerant is opened to the discharge port when it
has been compressed through a fixed volume ratio, depending upon the geometry.
This implies that these compressors have a fixed built-in volume ratio. The built-in
volume ratio is defined as the ratio of a cell as it is closed off from the suction port to
its volume before it opens to the discharge port. Since the volume ratio is fixed, the
pressure ratio, rp is given by:
=V
rPpdk
(20.2)
VPsy
Vb
where Pd and Ps are the discharge and suction pressures, Vb is the built-in volume
ratio and k is the index of compression.
Since no centrifugal force is present when the compressor is off, the multiple
vanes will not be pressed against the cylinder walls during the off-period. As a result,
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 4

Fig.20.3: Sectional view of a multiple vane, rotary compressor

high pressure refrigerant from the discharge side can flow back into the side and
pressure equalization between high and low pressure sides take place. This is
beneficial from the compressor motor point-of-view as it reduces the required starting
torque. However, this introduces cycling loss due to the entry of high pressure and
hot refrigerant liquid into the evaporator. Hence, normally a non-return check valve is
used on the discharge side which prevents the entry of refrigerant liquid from high
pressure side into evaporator through the compressor during off-time, at the same
time there will be pressure equalization across the vanes of the compressor.

20.3. Characteristics of rotary, vane type compressors:

Rotary vane type compressors have low mass-to-displacement ratio, which in
combination with compact size makes them ideal for transport applications. The

Cylinder
Suction
Discharge
block
Sliding vanes
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 5 Fig.20.2: Working
principle of a multiple vane, rotary compressor

compressors are normally oil-flooded type, hence, oil separators are required. Both
single-stage (upto 40oC evaporator temperature and 60oC condensing temperature)
and two-stage (upto 50oC evaporator temperature) compressors with the cooling
capacity in the range of 2 to 40 kW are available commercially. The cooling capacity
is normally controlled either by compressor speed regulation or suction gas throttling.
Currently, these compressors are available for a wide range of refrigerants such as R
22, ammonia, R 404a etc.

20.4. Rotary, screw compressors:

The rotary screw compressors can be either twin-screw type or single-screw
type.
20.4.1. Twin-screw compressor:
The twin-screw type compressor consists of two mating helically grooved
rotors, one male and the other female. Generally the male rotor drives the female
rotor. The male rotor has lobes, while the female rotor has flutes or gullies. The
frequently used lobe-gully combinations are [4,6], [5,6] and [5,7]. Figure 20.4 shows
the [4,6] combination. For this [4,6] combination, when the male rotor rotates at 3600
RPM, the female rotor rotates at 2400 RPM.
As shown in Fig.20.5, the flow is mainly in the axial direction. Suction and
compression take place as the rotors unmesh and mesh. When one lobe-gully
combination begins to unmesh the opposite lobe-gully combination begins to mesh.
With 4 male lobes rotating at 3600 RPM, 4 interlobe volumes are per revolution, thus
giving 4 X 3600 = 14400 discharges per minute.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 6

Fig.20.4: Twin-screw compressor with 4 male lobes and 6 female gullies

Fig.20.5: Direction of refrigerant flow in a twin-screw compressor

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 7

Discharge takes place at a point decided by the designed built-in volume ratio, which
depends entirely on the location of the delivery port and geometry of the compressor.
Since the built-in volume ratio is fixed by the geometry, a particular compressor is
designed for a particular built-in pressure ratio. However, different built-in ratios can
be obtained by changing the position of the discharge port. The built-in pressure
ratio, rp given by:
P

rp = d =Vb

(20.3)

Where Pd and Ps are the discharge and suction pressures, Vb is the built-in
volume ratio and k is the index of compression.
If the built-in pressure at the end of compression is less than the condensing
pressure, high pressure refrigerant from discharge manifold flows back into the
interlobe space when the discharge port is uncovered. This is called as undercompression. On the other hand, if the built-in pressure at the end of compression is
higher than the condensing pressure, then the compressed refrigerant rushes out in
an unrestrained expansion as soon as the port is uncovered (over-compression).
Both under-compression and over-compression are undesirable as they lead to loss
in efficiency.
Lubrication and sealing between the rotors is obtained by injecting lubricating
oil between the rotors. The oil also helps in cooling the compressor, as a result very
high pressure ratios (upto 20:1) are possible without overheating the compressor.
The capacity of the screw compressor is normally controlled with the help of a
slide valve. As the slide valve is opened, some amount of suction refrigerant escapes
to the suction side without being compressed. This yields a smooth capacity control
from 100 percent down to 10 percent of full load. It is observed that the power input is
approximately proportional to refrigeration capacity upto about 30 percent, however,
the efficiency decreases rapidly, there after.
Figure 20.6 shows the compression efficiency of a twin-screw compressor as
a function of pressure ratio and built-in volume ratio. It can be seen that for a given
built-in volume ratio, the efficiency reaches a peak at a particular optimum pressure
ratio. The value of this optimum pressure ratio increases with built-in volume ratio as
shown in the figure. If the design condition corresponds to the optimum pressure
ratio, then the compression efficiency drops as the system operates at off-design
conditions. However, when operated at the optimum pressure ratio, the efficiency is
much higher than other types of compressors.
As the rotor normally rotates at high speeds, screw compressors can handle
fairly large amounts of refrigerant flow rates compared to other positive displacement
type compressors. Screw compressors are available in the capacity range of 70 to
4600 kW. They generally compete with high capacity reciprocating compressors and
low capacity centrifugal compressors. They are available for a wide variety of
refrigerants and applications. Compared to reciprocating compressors, screw
compressors are balanced and hence do not suffer from vibration problems.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 8

Vb

(Pd/Ps)

Fig.20.6: Variation of compression efficiency of a twin-screw compressor with

pressure ratio and built-in volume ratio
Twin-screw compressors are rugged and are shown to be more reliable than
reciprocating compressors; they are shown to run for 30000 - 40000 hours between
major overhauls. They are compact compared to reciprocating compressors in the
high capacity range.
20.4.2. Single-screw compressors:
As the name implies, single screw compressors consist of a single helical
screw and two planet wheels or gate rotors. The helical screw is housed in a
cylindrical casing with suction port at one end and discharge port at the other end as
shown in Fig. 20.7. Suction and compression are obtained as the screw and gate
rotors unmesh and mesh. The high and low pressure regions in the cylinder casing
are separated by the gate rotors.
The single screw is normally driven by an electric motor. The gate rotors are
normally made of plastic materials. Very small power is required to rotate the gate
rotors as the frictional losses between the metallic screw and the plastic gate rotors
is very small. It is also possible to design the compressors with a single gate rotor.
Similar to twin-screw, lubrication, sealing and compressor cooling is achieved by
injecting lubricating oil into the compressor. An oil separator, oil cooler and pump are
required to circulate the lubricating oil. It is also possible to achieve this by injecting
liquid refrigerant, in which case there is no need for an oil separator.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 9

Gate rotors
Helica
l
screw

Discharge

F
i
g
.
2
0
.
7
:
W
o
r
k
i
n
g
p
r
i
n
c
i
p
l
e
o
f
a
s
i
n
g
l
e
s
c
r
e
w
c
o
m
p
r
e
s
s
o
r

20.5.
Scroll
comp
resso
rs:
S
croll
compre
ssors
are
orbital
motion,
positive
displac
ement
type
compre
ssors,
in
which
suction
and
compre
ssion is
obtaine
d
by
using
two
mating,
spiral
shaped,
scroll
membe
rs, one
fixed
and the
other
orbiting.
Figure
20.8
shows
the
working
principl
e
of
scroll
compre
ssors.
Figures
20.9
and
20.10
show
the
constru
ctional
details
of scroll

compressor
s. As shown
in Fig.20.8,
the
compressio
n
process
involves
three orbits
of
the
orbiting
scroll. In the
first
orbit,
the scrolls
ingest and
trap
two
pockets of
suction gas.
During the
second
orbit,
the
two pockets
of gas are
compressed
to
an
intermediate
pressure. In
the
final
orbit,
the
two pockets
reach
discharge
pressure
and
are
simultaneou
sly opened
to
the
discharge
port.
This
simultaneou
s process of
suction,
intermediate
compressio
n,
and
discharge
leads to the
smooth
continuous
compressio
n process of
the
scroll
compressor.
One
part
that is not
shown
in
this diagram
but
is
essential to
the
operation of

the
scroll is
the
antirotation
couplin
g. This
device
maintai
ns
a
fixed
angular
relation
of 180
degree
s
betwee
n
the
fixed
and
orbiting
scrolls.
This
fixed
angular
relation,
coupled
with the
movem
ent of
the
orbiting
scroll,
is the
basis
for the
formati
on
of
gas
compre
ssion
pockets
.
A
s
shown
in
Figs.20.
9 and
20.10,
each
scroll
membe
r
is
open at
one
end
and
bound

by a base
plate at the
other end.
They
are
fitted to form
pockets of
refrigerant
between
their
respective
base plates
and various
lines
of
contacts
between the
scroll walls.
Compressor
capacity is
normally
controlled
by variable
speed
inverter
drives.

Version 1
ME, IIT
Kharagpur
10

Fig.20.8: Working principle of a scroll compressor

Fig.20.9: Main parts of a scroll compressor

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 11

This graphic shows the two spiral-shaped intermeshmg scrolls.

The graphic shown above shows a side view of the interior

components of the scroll compressor.
Fig.20.10: Different views of a scroll compressor
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 12

Currently, the scroll compressors are used in small capacity (3 to 50 kW)

refrigeration, air conditioning and heat pump applications. They are normally of
hermetic type. Scroll compressors offer several advantages such as:
894.
Large suction and discharge ports reduce pressure losses during
suction and discharge
895.
Physical separation of suction and compression reduce heat transfer to
suction gas, leading to high volumetric efficiency
896.
Volumetric efficiency is also high due to very low re-expansion losses
and continuous flow over a wide range of operating conditions
897.

Flatter capacity versus outdoor temperature curves

898.
High compression efficiency, low noise and vibration
compared to reciprocating compressors
899.

Compact with minimum number of moving parts

Questions and Answers:

1. Which of the following statements concerning fixed vane, rotary compressors are
true?
900. These compressors are used in small capacity systems (less than 2 kW)
901. They require suction valve, but do not require discharge valve
902. Refrigerant leakage is minimized by hydrodynamic lubrication
d) Compared to reciprocating compressors, the re-expansion losses are high in
rotary vane compressor
Ans.: a) and c)
2. Which of the following statements concerning multiple vane, rotary compressors
are true?
903. Compared to fixed vane compressors, the leakage losses are less in multiple
vane compressors
904. Multiple vane compressors do not require suction and discharge valves
905. A non-return, check valve is used on suction side of the compressor to
minimize cycling losses
906. All of the above
Ans.: d)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 13

3. Which of the following statements concerning rotary vane type compressors are
not true?
907.
908.
909.
910.

They are compact due to high volumetric efficiency

They are ideal for transport applications due to low mass-to-capacity ratio
They are easier to manufacture compared to reciprocating compressors
They are better balanced, and hence, offer lower noise levels

Ans.: c)
4. For a twin-screw type compressors with 5 male lobes and a rotational speed of
3000 RPM, the number of discharges per minute are:
911.
912.
913.
914.

600
15000
1200
3000

Ans.: b)
5. Twin-screw compressors can be operated at high pressure ratios because:
915.
916.
917.
918.

These compressors are designed to withstand high discharge temperatures

Lubricating oil, which also acts as a coolant is injected between the rotors
The cold suction gas cools the rotors during suction stroke
All of the above

Ans.: b)
6. Which of the following statements concerning screw compressors are true?
919. Compared to reciprocating compressors, screw compressors are rugged and
are more reliable
920. Screw compressors are easier to manufacture and are cheaper compared to
reciprocating compressors
921. The compression efficiency of a screw compressor increases with built-in
volume ratio
922. Screw compressors are available in refrigeration capacity ranging from
fractional kilowatts to megawatts
Ans.: a)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 14

7. Which of the following statements concerning screw compressors are true?

923. The capacity of a screw compressor can be varied over a large range by using
the slide valve
924. Compared to reciprocating compressors, screw compressors are compact for
small capacities and bulky for large capacities
925. An oil separator and an oil cooler are required in a screw compressor
irrespective of the type of refrigerant used
926. Vibration is one of the practical problems in operating screw compressors
Ans.: a) and c)
8. Which of the following statements concerning scroll compressors are true:
927.
928.
929.
930.

Currently available scroll compressors are of open type

Currently scroll compressors are available for large capacities only
The possibility of suction gas heating is less in scroll compressors
Scroll compressors are easier to manufacture

Ans.: c)
9. The advantages of scroll compressors are:
931.
932.
933.
934.
935.

High volumetric efficiency

Capacity is less sensitive to outdoor conditions
Compactness
Low noise and vibration
All of the above

Ans.: e)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 15

Lesson

21
Centrifugal
Compressors
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 1

The specific objectives of this lesson are to:

936.
Explain the working principle of a centrifugal compressor (Section
21.1)
937.
Present the analysis of centrifugal compressors (Section 21.2)
938.
Discuss the selection of impeller diameter and speed of a
centrifugal compressor using velocity diagrams (Section 21.3)
939.
Discuss the effect of blade width on the capacity of centrifugal
compressor (Section 21.4)
940.
Discuss the methods of capacity control of a centrifugal
compressor (Section 21.5)
941.
Discuss the performance aspects and the phenomenon of surging
in centrifugal compressors (Section 21.6)
942.
Compare the performance of a centrifugal compressor with a
reciprocating compressor vis--vis condensing and evaporator
temperatures and compressor speed (Section 21.6)
943.
Describe commercial refrigeration systems using centrifugal
compressors (Section 21.7)
At the end of the lecture, the student should be able to:
944.
Explain the working principle of a centrifugal compressor with
suitable diagrams
945.
Analyse the performance of a centrifugal compressor using steady
flow energy equation and velocity diagrams
946.
Calculate the required impeller diameter and/or speed of a
centrifugal compressor
947.
Explain the limitations on minimum refrigeration capacity of
centrifugal compressors using velocity diagrams
948.
Explain the methods of capacity control of centrifugal compressor
949.
Explain the phenomenon of surging
950.
Compare the performance aspects of centrifugal and reciprocating
compressors

21.1. Introduction:
Centrifugal compressors; also known as turbo-compressors belong to the
roto-dynamic type of compressors. In these compressors the required pressure
rise takes place due to the continuous conversion of angular momentum
imparted to the refrigerant vapour by a high-speed impeller into static pressure.
Unlike reciprocating compressors, centrifugal compressors are steady-flow
devices hence they are subjected to less vibration and noise.
Figure 21.1 shows the working principle of a centrifugal compressor. As
shown in the figure, low-pressure refrigerant enters the compressor through the
eye of the impeller (1). The impeller (2) consists of a number of blades, which
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 2

form flow passages (3) for refrigerant. From the eye, the refrigerant enters the
flow passages formed by the impeller blades, which rotate at very high speed. As
the refrigerant flows through the blade passages towards the tip of the impeller, it
gains momentum and its static pressure also increases. From the tip of the
impeller, the refrigerant flows into a stationary diffuser (4). In the diffuser, the
refrigerant is decelerated and as a result the dynamic pressure drop is converted
into static pressure rise, thus increasing the static pressure further. The vapour
from the diffuser enters the volute casing (5) where further conversion of velocity
into static pressure takes place due to the divergent shape of the volute. Finally,
the pressurized refrigerant leaves the compressor from the volute casing (6).
The gain in momentum is due to the transfer of momentum from the highspeed impeller blades to the refrigerant confined between the blade passages.
The increase in static pressure is due to the self-compression caused by the
centrifugal action. This is analogous to the gravitational effect, which causes the
fluid at a higher level to press the fluid below it due to gravity (or its weight). The
static pressure produced in the impeller is equal to the static head, which would
be produced by an equivalent gravitational column. If we assume the impeller
blades to be radial and the inlet diameter of the impeller to be small, then the
static head, h developed in the impeller passage for a single stage is given by:
h=V

(21.1)

g
where h = static head developed, m
V = peripheral velocity of the impeller wheel or tip speed, m/s g =
acceleration due to gravity, m/s2
Hence increase in total pressure, AP as the refrigerant flows through the passage
is given by:
AP = pgh = pV

(21.2)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 3

21.1. Centrifugal Compressor

1: Refrigerant inlet (eye); 2: Impeller; 3: Refrigerant passages
4: Vaneless diffuser; 5: Volute casing; 6: Refrigerant discharge
Thus it can be seen that for a given refrigerant with a fixed density, the
pressure rise depends only on the peripheral velocity or tip speed of the blade.
The tip speed of the blade is proportional to the rotational speed (RPM) of the
impeller and the impeller diameter. The maximum permissible tip speed is limited
by the strength of the structural materials of the blade (usually made of high
speed chrome-nickel steel) and the sonic velocity of the refrigerant. Under these
limitations, the maximum achievable pressure rise (hence maximum achievable
temperature lift) of single stage centrifugal compressor is limited for a given
refrigerant. Hence, multistage centrifugal compressors are used for large
temperature lift applications. In multistage centrifugal compressors, the discharge
of the lower stage compressor is fed to the inlet of the next stage compressor
and so on. In multistage centrifugal compressors, the impeller diameter of all
stages remains same, but the width of the impeller becomes progressively
narrower in the direction of flow as refrigerant density increases progressively.
The blades of the compressor or either forward curved or backward
curved or radial. Backward curved blades were used in the older compressors,
whereas the modern centrifugal compressors use mostly radial blades.
The stationary diffuser can be vaned or vaneless. As the name implies, in
vaned diffuser vanes are used in the diffuser to form flow passages. The vanes
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 4

can be fixed or adjustable. Vaned diffusers are compact compared to the

vaneless diffusers and are commonly used for high discharge pressure
applications. However, the presence of vanes in the diffusers can give rise to
shocks, as the refrigerant velocities at the tip of the impeller blade could reach
sonic velocities in large, high-speed centrifugal compressors. In vaneless
diffusers the velocity of refrigerant in the diffuser decreases and static pressure
increases as the radius increases. As a result, for a required pressure rise, the
required size of the vaneless diffuser could be large compared to vaned diffuser.
However, the problem of shock due to supersonic velocities at the tip does not
arise with vaneless diffusers as the velocity can be diffused smoothly.
Generally adjustable guide vanes or pre-rotation vanes are added at the
inlet (eye) of the impeller for capacity control.

21.2. Analysis of centrifugal compressors:

Applying energy balance to the compressor (Fig.24.2), we obtain from
steady flow energy equation:
-Q+m(hi +
where Q
W
m
Vi,Ve
Zi,Ze

Vi 2
+gZi)=-Wc +m(he +
22

Ve2

+gZe )

(21.3)

= heat transfer rate from the compressor

= work transfer rate to the compressor
= mass flow rate of the refrigerant
= Inlet and outlet velocities of the refrigerant
= Height above a datum in gravitational force field at inlet and outlet

Neglecting changes in kinetic and potential energy, the above equation becomes:
-Q+mhi =- Wc +mhe

(21.4)

In a centrifugal compressor, the heat transfer rate Q is normally negligible

(as the area available for heat transfer is small) compared to the other energy
terms, hence the rate of compressor work input for adiabatic compression is
given by:
Wc =m(he -hi)

(21.5)

The above equation is valid for both reversible as well as irreversible

adiabatic compression, provided the actual enthalpy is used at the exit in case of
irreversible compression. In case of reversible, adiabatic compression, the power
input to the compressor is given by:
Wc,isen =m(he -hi)isen

(21.6)
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 5

then using the thermodynamic relation, Tds=dh-vdp; the isentropic work of

compression is given by:
Pe
wc,isen = (he - hi )isen = vdp| isen

(21.7)

Thus the expression for reversible, isentropic work of compression is same for
both reciprocating as well as centrifugal compressors. However, the basic
difference between actual reciprocating compressors and actual centrifugal
compressors lies in the source of irreversibility.

Q
Wc
Fig.21.2. Energy balance across a compressor
In case of reciprocating compressors, the irreversibility is mainly due to
heat transfer and pressure drops across valves and connecting pipelines.
However, in case of centrifugal compressors, since the refrigerant has to flow at
very high velocities through the impeller blade passages for a finite pressure rise,
the major source of irreversibility is due to the viscous shear stresses at the
interface between the refrigerant and the impeller blade surface.
In reciprocating compressors, the work is required to overcome the normal
forces acting against the piston, while in centrifugal compressors, work is
required to overcome both normal pressure forces as well as viscous shear
forces. The specific work is higher than the area of P-v diagram in case of
centrifugal compressors due to irreversibilities and also due to the continuous
increase of specific volume of refrigerant due to fluid friction.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 6

To account for the irreversibilities in centrifugal compressors, a polytropic

efficiency r|pol is defined. It is given by:
Pe
Pi

(21.8)

vdp _ w

pol _
wact

(he "hi)

where wpol and wact are the polytropic and actual works of compression,
respectively.
The polytropic work of compression is usually obtained by the expression:
n
Pivi

Pe
wpol = J vdP = f
Pi

n-1y

rPe

n-1 n

_1

(21.9)

^ Pi

where n is the index of compression, f is a correction factor which takes into

account the variation of n during compression. Normally the value of f is close to
1 (from 1.00 to 1.02), hence it may be neglected in calculations, without
significant errors.
If the refrigerant vapour is assumed to behave as an ideal gas, then it can be
shown that the polytropic efficiency is equal to:

7 ^Ipol

vn-1y

(21.10)

where y = specific heat ratio, cp/cv (assumed to be constant).

Though refrigerant vapours do not strictly behave as ideal gases, the above
simple equation is often used to obtain the polytropic efficiency of the centrifugal
compressors by replacing y by isentropic index of compression, k, i.e., for actual
refrigerants the polytropic efficiency is estimated from the equation:
k-1 Tlpol
n

^n-1y

(21.11)

For actual centrifugal compressors, the polytropic efficiency is found to lie

in the range of 0.7 to 0.85. The index of compression n is obtained from actual
measurements of pressures and specific volumes at the inlet and exit of the
compressor and then using the equation Pvn = constant. This procedure usually
gives fairly accurate results for refrigerants made of simple molecules such as
water, ammonia. The deviation between actual efficiency and polytropic

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 7

efficiency evaluated using the above equations can be significant in case of

heavier molecules such as R 22, R 134a.
When the refrigerant velocities are high, then the change in kinetic energy
across the compressor can be considerable. In such cases, these terms have to
be included in the steady flow energy equation. If the heat transfer rate is
negligible and change in kinetic energy is considerable, then the rate of work
input to the compressor is given by:
Wc =m(ht,e -ht,i )

(21.12)

where ht,e and ht,i are the total or stagnation enthalpies at the exit and inlet to the
compressor, respectively. The stagnation enthalpy of the refrigerant h t is given
by:
ht =h+

V2

(21.13)

where h is the specific enthalpy of the refrigerant and V is its velocity. Similar to
stagnation enthalpy, one can also define stagnation temperature and stagnation
pressure. The stagnation pressure Pt is defined as the pressure developed as the
refrigerant is decelerated reversibly and adiabatically from velocity V to rest.
Then from energy balance,
V2 Pt
2 vdp isen =ht-h =

(21.14)

Stagnation pressure and temperature of moving fluids can be measured

by pressure and temperature sensors moving with the fluid at the same velocity.
For an ideal gas:
V2 (ht -h)=
=Cp(Tt -T) (21.15)
2
where Tt is the total or stagnation temperature given by:
Tt = T+

V2

(21.16)

2Cp

where T is the static temperature and Cp is the specific heat at constant

pressure.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 8

For an incompressible fluid (density constant):

vdpl isen =
v(Pt-P)
(21.17)
P
2
hence the stagnation pressure of an incompressible fluid is given by:
1
Pt=P +-------2 v

V
(21.18)

21.3. Selection of impeller speed and impeller diameter:

As the refrigerant vapour flows from the suction flange to the inlet to the
impeller, its stagnation enthalpy remains constant as no work is done during this
section. However, the velocity of the refrigerant may increase due to reduction in
flow area. Depending upon the presence or absence of inlet guide vanes in the
eye of the impeller, the refrigerant enters the impeller with a pre-rotation or
axially. Then the direction of the refrigerant changes by 90o as it enters the flow
passages between the impeller blades from the inlet. As the refrigerant flows
through the blade passages its stagnation enthalpy rises as work of compression
is supplied to the refrigerant through the impeller blades. Simultaneously its
velocity and static pressure rise due to the momentum transfer and selfcompression. However, the relative velocity between refrigerant and impeller
blades usually reduces as the refrigerant flows towards the tip. From the tip of the
impeller the refrigerant enters the diffuser, where its static pressure increases
further due to deceleration, however, its total enthalpy remains constant as no
energy transfer takes place to the refrigerant. From the diffuser the refrigerant
enters the volute casing where further pressure rise takes place due to
conversion of velocity into static pressure, while the total enthalpy remains
constant as no energy is added to the refrigerant in the volute casing. Thus the
total enthalpy of the refrigerant remains constant everywhere except across the
impeller. To establish a relation between the power input and the impeller speed
and diameter, it is essential to find the torque required to rotate the impeller. This
calls for application of conservation of angular momentum equation to the
refrigerant across the impeller.
Figure 21.3 shows the velocity diagram at the outlet of the impeller. The
torque required to rotate the impeller is equal to the rate of change of the angular
momentum of the refrigerant. Assuming the refrigerant to enter the impeller blade
passage radially with no tangential component at inlet, the torque is given by:
= mr2Vt,2

(21.19)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 9

where m is the mass flow rate of the refrigerant, r 2 is the outer radius of the
impeller blade and Vt,2 is the tangential component of the absolute refrigerant
velocity V2 at impeller exit. The power input to the impeller W is given by:
P = T. = mr2<oVt 2 =mu2Vt,2

(21.20)

where u2 is the tip speed of the impeller blade = .r2. is the rotational speed in
radians/s and r2 is the impeller blade radius.

u2
co
V2
Vr2
Vt,2
Vn,2

= co.r2 = Tip speed of the impeller

= Rotational speed of impeller
= Absolute velocity of fluid
= Relative velocity of fluid w.r.t to the impeller
= Tangential component of V2
= Normal component of V2
21.3: Velocity diagram at the outlet of the impeller of a centrifugal
compressor

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 10

The velocity diagram also shows the normal component of refrigerant velocity,
Vn,2 at the impeller outlet. The volume flow rate from the impeller is proportional
to the normal component of velocity. From the velocity diagram the tangential
component Vt,2 can be written in terms of the tip speed u2, normal component
Vn,2 and the outlet blade angle p as:
1
n,2 2
cotp
cotp=u
u
2

Vt,2 = u2

(21.21)

Vn,2

Hence the power input to the impeller, W is given by:

2
1
n,2
mu
cotp
u
(21.22)
2 2

W = mu2Vt 2 =
Thus the power input to the compressor depends on the blade angle p.
The blade angle will be less than 90o for backward curved blade, equal to 90o
for radial blades and greater than 90o for forward curved blade. Thus for a given
impeller tip speed, the power input increases with the blade angle p.
If the blades are radial, then the power input is given by:

If the compression process is reversible and adiabatic, then power input can also
cotp
be written as:
W=

mu2

n,2

u2

mu2

; for p = 90o

Wc,isen=m(he-hi)isen=m Jvdp|
Pi
Comparing the above two equations:

(21.23)

(21.24)

isen

(he -hi)isen = Pe vdP| isen = u2 =(G)r2) Pi

The above equation can also be written as:

(21.25)

k-1

k e^
P
ik
=
V
Piy
Psen
j"vdP|
k-1
ivi

Pe

= (cor2)2
(21.26)

Thus from the above equation, the pressure ratio, rp = (Pe/Pi) can be written as:
vk/

rp =

Pe
vPiy

k 1+

k-1Y 1
Piviy

(r2)2

k-1

(21.27)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 11

Thus it can be seen from the above expression that for a given refrigerant
at a given suction conditions (i.e., fixed k, Pi and vi), pressure ratio is proportional
to the rotational speed of the compressor and the impeller blade diameter.
Hence, larger the required temperature lift (i.e., larger pressure ratio) larger
should be the rotational speed and/or impeller diameter.
Generally from material strength considerations the tip speed, u2 (=cor2) is
limited to about 300 m/s. This puts an upper limit on the temperature lift with a
single stage centrifugal compressor. Hence, for larger temperature lifts require
multi-stage compression. For a given impeller rotational speed and impeller
diameter, the pressure rise also depends on the type of the refrigerant used.
For example, for a single stage saturated cycle operating between an evaporator
temperature of 0oC and a condensing temperature of 32oC, the required tip
speed [Vt,2 = (he-hi)isen1/2) will be 145.6 m/s in case of R134a and 386 m/s in
case of ammonia. If the impeller rotates at 50 rps, then the required impeller
radius would be 0.4635m in case of R 134a and 1.229m in case of ammonia. In
general smaller tip speeds and impeller size could be obtained with higher
normal boiling point refrigerants. This is the reason behind the wide spread use
of R 11 (NBP = 23.7oC) in centrifugal compressors prior to its ban.
Similar type of analyses can be carried out for other types of blades (i.e.,
forward or backward) and also with a pre-rotation at impeller inlet (i.e., Vt,1 ^ 0).
However, the actual analyses can be quite complicated if one includes the prerotation guide vanes, slip between the refrigerant and impeller blades etc.
In actual compressors, the angle at which fluid leaves the impeller P will
be different from the blade angle p. This is attributed to the internal circulation of
refrigerant in the flow passages between the impeller blades. As the refrigerant
flows outwards along a rotating radius, a pressure gradient is developed across
the flow passage due to the Coriolis component of acceleration. Due to this
pressure difference, eddies form in the flow channels as shown in Fig.21.4. As
shown, these eddies rotate in a direction opposite to that of the impeller, as a
result the actual angle P at which the refrigerant leaves the impeller will be less
than the blade angle p. Due to this, the tangential component of velocity Vt,2
reduces, which in turn reduces the pressure rise and also the volumetric flow rate
of refrigerant. The ratio of actual tangential velocity component (Vt, act) to the
tangential component without eddy formation (V t,2) is known as slip factor. The
slip factor can be increased by increasing the number of blades (i.e., by
decreasing the area of individual flow passages), however, after a certain number
of blades, the efficiency drops due increased frictional losses. Hence, the number
of blades are normally optimized considering the slip factor and frictional losses.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 12

eddies
Fig.
21.4
:
For
mati
on
of
eddi
es
in a
bac
kwa
rd
curv
ed
cent
rifug
al
com
pres
sor

21.4.
Refri
gera
nt

capa
city
of
centr
ifuga
l
com
pres
sors:
T
he
refrige
rant
capaci
ty of a
centrif
ugal
compr
essor
depen
ds
primari
ly on
the tip
speed
and
width
of the
impell
er. For
a
given
set of
conde
nser
and
evapor
ator
tempe
rature
s the
requir
ed
pressu
re rise
across
the
compr
essor

remain
s
same
for all
capaci
ties,
large
and
small.
Since
the
pressu
re rise
depen
ds on
the
impell
er
diamet
er,
numbe
r
of
impell
ers
and
rotatio
nal
speed
of the
impell
er,
these
param
eters
must
remain
same
for all
compr
essors
of all
capaci
ties
operati
ng
betwe
en the
same
conde
nser
and
evapor
ator

tempe
rature
s.
The mass flow rate through a centrifugal compressor can be written as:
(21.28)
v2
where
V
n
,
2

=
N
o
r
m
a
l
c
o
m
p
o
n
e
n
t
o
f
v
e
l
o
c
i
t
y
a
t
t
h
e

Vn,2Af,p m=

e
x
i
t
A
f
,
p

=
F
l
o
w
a
r
e
a
a
t
t
h
e
p
e
r
i
p
h
e
r
y
v
2

=
S
p
e
c
i
f
i
c

v
o
l
u
m
e
o
f
t
h
e
r
e
f
r
i
g
e
r
a
n
t
a
t
t
h
e
p
e
r
i
p
h
e
r
y
F
a

or
given
blade
diamet
er, the
flow
area
at the
periph

ery
depen
ds on
the
numbe
r
of
blades
and
the
width
of the
blade.
If the
numbe
r
of
blades
is
fixed,
then
the
flow
area
depen
ds
only
on the
width
of the
impell
er.
Versio
n1
ME,
IIT
Khara
gpur
13

Hence, one way to design the compressors for different refrigerant

capacities is by controlling the width of the impeller (Fig.21.5). To design the
compressor for smaller refrigerant capacity, one has to reduce the width of the
impeller. However, as the width of the impeller is reduced frictional losses
between the refrigerant and impeller blades increase leading to lower efficiency.
Of course another alternative is to reduce both diameter and width of the impeller
simultaneously, thereby the frictional losses can be reduced. However, since this
reduces the pressure rise across a single impeller, one has to increase the
number of stages, which leads to higher manufacturing costs. This puts a lower
limit on the refrigerant capacity of centrifugal compressors. In practice, the lower
volumetric flow rate is limited to about 0.7 m 3/s and the minimum refrigeration
capacities are around 300 kW for air conditioning applications. Since the
compressor works more efficiently at higher volumetric flow rates, refrigerants
having lower densities (i.e., higher normal boiling points) such as R 11, water are
ideal refrigerants for centrifugal compressors. However, centrifugal compressors
in larger capacities are available for a wide range of refrigerants, both synthetic
and natural.

Impeller blades

impeller

Fig.21.5: Impeller of a centrifugal compressor with width w

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 14

21.5. Capacity control:

The capacity of a centrifugal compressor is normally controlled by
adjusting inlet guide vanes (pre-rotation vanes). Adjusting the inlet guide vanes
provide a swirl at the impeller inlet and thereby introduces a tangential velocity at
the inlet to the impeller, which gives rise to different refrigerant flow rates. Figure
21.6 shows the performance of the compressor at different settings of the inlet
guide vanes. Use of inlet guide vanes for capacity control is an efficient method
as long as the angle of rotation is high, i.e., the vanes are near the fully open
condition. When the angle is reduced very much, then this method becomes
inefficient as the inlet guide vanes then act as throttling devices.

60o
(Pd/Ps)

Surge line 15o

30o

/
0o (closed)

90o
(open)
Flow rate
Fig.21.6: Effect of angle of pre-rotation vanes on capacity of a centrifugal
compressor
In addition to the inlet guide vanes, the capacity control is also possible by
adjusting the width of a vaneless diffuser or by adjusting the guide vanes of
vaned diffusers. Using a combination of the inlet guide vanes and diffuser, the
capacities can be varied from 10 percent to 100 percent of full load capacity.
Capacity can also be controlled by varying the compressor speed using
gear drives. For the same pressure rise, operating at lower speeds reduces the
flow rate, thereby reducing the refrigeration capacity.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 15

21.6. Performance aspects of centrifugal compressor:

Figure 21.7 shows the pressure-volume characteristics of a centrifugal
compressor running at certain speed. As shown in the figure, the relation
between pressure and volume is a straight line in the absence of any losses.
However, in actual compressors losses occur due to eddy formation in the flow
passages, frictional losses and shock losses at the inlet to the impeller. As a
result the net head developed reduces as shown in the figure. The entry losses
are due to change of direction of refrigerant at the inlet and also due to prerotation. These losses can be controlled to some extent using the inlet guide
vanes. Due to these losses the net performance curve falls below the ideal
characteristic curve without losses, and it also shows an optimum point. The
optimum point at which the losses are minimum is selected as the design point
for the compressor.

Performance
''without losses
Net performa curve

Design
Eddy losses
point
frictional losses

"shock losses at
inlet

Pressure

Volume

Fig.21.7: Pressure-volume characteristics of a centrifugal compressor running

at certain speed
Surging:
A centrifugal compressor is designed to operate between a given
evaporator and condenser pressures. Due to variations either in the heat sink or
refrigerated space, the actual evaporator and condenser pressures can be
different from their design values. For example, the condenser pressure may

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 16

increase if the heat sink temperature increases or the cooling water flow rate
reduces. If the resulting pressure difference exceeds the design pressure
difference of the compressor, then refrigerant flow reduces and finally stops.
Further increase in condenser pressure causes a reverse flow of refrigerant from
condenser to evaporator through the compressor. As a result the evaporator
pressure increases, the pressure difference reduces and the compressor once
again starts pumping the refrigerant in the normal direction. Once the refrigerant
starts flowing in the normal direction, the pressure difference increases and again
the reversal of flow takes place, as the pressure at the exit of compressor is less
than the condenser pressure. This oscillation of refrigerant flow and the resulting
rapid variation in pressure difference gives rise to the phenomenon called
surging. Surging produces noise and imposes severe stresses on the bearings
of the compressor and motor, ultimately leading to their damage. Hence,
continuous surging is highly undesirable, even though it may be tolerated if it
occurs occasionally. Surging is most likely to occur when the refrigeration load is
low (i.e. evaporator pressure is low) and/or the condensing temperature is high.
In some centrifugal compressors, surging is taken care of by bypassing a part of
the refrigerant from the discharge side to the evaporator, thereby increasing the
load artificially. Thus a centrifugal compressor cannot pump the refrigerant when
the condensing pressure exceeds a certain value and/or when the evaporator
pressure falls below a certain point. This is unlike reciprocating compressors,
which continue to pump refrigerant, albeit at lower flow rates when the condenser
temperature increases and/or the evaporator pressure falls.
Figures 21.8(a) and (b) show the effect of condensing and evaporating
temperatures on the performance of centrifugal compressors and reciprocating
compressors. It can be seen from these figures that beyond a certain condenser
pressure and below a certain evaporator pressure, the refrigerant capacity of
centrifugal compressor decreases rapidly unlike reciprocating compressors
where the capacity drop under these conditions is more gradual. However, one
advantage with centrifugal compressor is that when operated away from the
surge point, the reduction in evaporator temperature with refrigeration load is
smaller compared to the reciprocating compressor. This implies that the
evaporator temperature of the refrigeration system using a centrifugal
compressor remains almost constant over wide variation of refrigeration loads.
Figure 21.9 shows the effect of condensing temperature on power input
for both reciprocating as well as centrifugal compressors at a particular
evaporator temperature and compressor speed. It can be seen that while the
power input increases with condensing temperature for a reciprocating
compressor, it decreases with condensing temperature for a centrifugal
compressor. This is due to the rapid drop in refrigerant mass flow rate of
centrifugal compressor with condensing temperature. This characteristic implies
that the problem of compressor overloading at high condensing temperatures
does not exist in case of centrifugal compressors.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 17

Design point

Centrifugal
Reciprocating

Load

Reciprocating
Centrifugal

Condensing temperature

Design point

Evaporator temperature

Fig.21.8(a) and (b): Effects of condensing and evaporator temperatures on the

performance of reciprocating and centrifugal compressors

Reciprocating

Compressor power

Condensing Temperature
Fig.21.9: Effect of condensing temperature on power input for both
reciprocating as well as centrifugal compressors at a particular evaporator
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 18
temperature and compressor speed

Figure 21.10 shows the effect of compressor speed on the performance of

reciprocating and centrifugal compressors. It can be seen from the figure that the
performance of centrifugal compressor is more sensitive to compressor speed
compared to reciprocating compressors.

Reciprocating
Centrifugal

% Qe

% speed

Centrifugal

% Wc

% speed
Fig. 21.10: Effect of compressor speed on the performance of reciprocating and
centrifugal compressors at a given condensing and evaporator temperatures
Figure 21.11 shows the performance characteristics of a centrifugal
compressor with backward curved blades. The figure shows the performance at
various iso-efficiency values and at different speeds. Such figures are very useful
as by using these one can find out, for example the efficiency, flow rate at a given
pressure ratio and compressor speed or vice versa. Figure 21.12 shows the
sectional view of an actual centrifugal compressor.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 19

(Pd/Ps)
Flow rate

Fi
g.
21.
11:
Pe
rfo
rm
an
ce
ch
ara
cte
rist
ics
of
a
ce
ntri
fug
al
co
mp
res
sor
wit

h
ba
ck
wa
rd
cur
ve
d
bla
de
s

Discharge
Eye
Wearof the Shaft
Impeller
impeller
rings
Gland
Diffuser
plates
Casing
Volute

Fig.2
1.12:
Secti
onal
view
of a
com
merci
al,
singl
estage
centri
fugal
comp
resso
r

21.7: Commercial refrigeration systems with centrifugal

compressors:
Commercially centrifugal compressors are available for a wide variety of
refrigeration and air conditioning applications with a wide variety of refrigerants.
These machines are available for the following ranges:
Evaporator temperatures Evaporator
pressures Discharge pressure
Rotational speeds Refrigeration
capacity

-100oC to +10oC 14 kPa to 700

kPa upto 2000 kPa 1800 to
90,000 RPM 300 kW to 30000
kW

As mentioned before, on the lower side the capacity is limited by the

impeller width and tip speeds and on the higher side the capacity is limited by the
physical size (currently the maximum impeller diameter is around 2 m).
Since the performance of centrifugal compressor is more sensitive to
evaporator and condensing temperatures compared to a reciprocating
compressor, it is essential to reduce the pressure drops when a centrifugal
compressor is used in commercial systems. Commercial refrigeration systems
using centrifugal compressors normally incorporate flash intercoolers to improve
the system performance. Since the compressor is normally multi-staged, use of
flash intercooler is relatively easy in case of centrifugal compressors.
Centrifugal compressors are normally lubricated using an oil pump (force
feed) which can be driven either directly by the compressor rotor or by an
external motor. The lubrication system consists of the oil pump, oil reservoir and
an oil cooler. The components requiring lubrication are the main bearings, a
thrust bearing (for the balancing disc) and the shaft seals. Compared to
reciprocating compressors, the lubrication for centrifugal compressors is
simplified as very little lubricating oil comes in direct contact with the refrigerant.
Normally labyrinth type oil seals are used on the rotor shaft to minimize the
leakage of lubricating oil to the refrigerant side. Sometimes oil heaters may be
required to avoid excessive dilution of lubricating oil during the plant shutdown.
Commercially both hermetic as well as open type centrifugal compressors
are available. Open type compressors are driven by electric motors, internal
combustion engines (using a wide variety of fuels) or even steam turbines.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 21

Questions & answers:

1. Which of the following statements concerning centrifugal compressors are
true?
951. Centrifugal compressors are subjected to less vibration and noise as they
rotate at very high speeds
952. Pressure rise in centrifugal compressor is due to the continuous
conversion of angular momentum into static pressure
953. The stagnation enthalpy of refrigerant vapour remains constant
everywhere, except across the impeller blades
954. Conversion of dynamic pressure into static pressure takes place in the
volute casing due to its convergent shape
Ans.: b) and c)
2. Which of the following statements concerning centrifugal compressors are
true?
955. Centrifugal compressors with vaneless diffusers are compact compared to
vaned diffusers
956. In multi-stage centrifugal compressors, the width of the blades reduces
progressively in the direction of flow
957. In multi-stage centrifugal compressors, the width of the blades increases
progressively in the direction of flow
958. Multi-staging in centrifugal compressors is commonly used for high
refrigerant capacity applications
Ans.: b)
3. The polytropic efficiency of a centrifugal compressor is found to be 0.85. The
isentropic index of compression of the refrigerant, which behaves as an ideal
gas, is 1.17. The polytropic index of compression, n is then equal to:
959.
960.
961.
962.

1.206
0.829
0.854
1.141

Ans.: a)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 22

4. Which of the following statements are true:

963. In reciprocating compressors, the irreversibility is mainly due to heat
transfer and viscous shear stresses
964. In reciprocating compressors, the irreversibility is mainly due to heat
transfer and pressure drops across valves and connecting pipelines
965. In centrifugal compressors, the irreversibility is mainly due to heat transfer
and viscous shear stresses
966. In centrifugal compressors, the irreversibility is mainly due to viscous
shear stresses
Ans.: b) and d)
5. Which of the following statements are true:
967. Due to slip, the actual pressure rise and volumetric flow rate of a
centrifugal compressor is less than that of an ideal compressor
968. For a given impeller diameter, the slip factor decreases as the number of
blades increases
969. For a given impeller diameter, the slip factor decreases as the number of
blades decreases
970. For a given flow rate, the frictional losses decrease as the number of
blades increase
Ans.: a) and c)
6. Which of the following statements are true:
971. The capacity of a centrifugal compressor can be controlled by using inlet
guide vanes and by changing the width of the diffuser
972. Surging in centrifugal compressors takes place as evaporator and
condenser pressures increase
973. Surging in centrifugal compressors takes place as evaporator pressure
increases and condenser pressure decreases
974. Surging in centrifugal compressors takes place as evaporator pressure
decreases and condenser pressure increases
Ans.: a) and d)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 23

7. Which of the following statements are true:

975. When operated away from the surge point, the reduction in evaporator
temperature with refrigeration load is smaller for centrifugal compressors
compared to the reciprocating compressors
976. When operated away from the surge point, the reduction in evaporator
temperature with refrigeration load is much larger compared to the reciprocating
compressor
977. The problem of compressor motor overloading due to high condenser
temperature does not take place in a centrifugal compressor
978. Compared to reciprocating compressor, the performance of centrifugal
compressor is less sensitive to speed
Ans.: a) and c)
8. Saturated R134a vapour is compressed isentropically from 18oC (Psat=144.6
kPa) to a pressure of 433.8 kPa in a single stage centrifugal compressor.
Calculate the speed of the compressor at the tip of the impeller assuming that the
vapour enters the impeller radially.
Ans.:
From the refrigerant property data, the enthalpy and entropy of ammonia
vapour at the inlet to the impeller are 387.8 kJ/kg and 1.740 kJ/kg.K, respectively.
At an exit pressure of 433.8 kPa and an entropy of 1.740 kJ/kg.K
(isentropic compression), the exit enthalpy of the vapour is found to be 410.4
kJ/kg.
For radial entry, the velocity of ammonia vapour at the tip of the impeller
(u2) is given by:
u22 = (hexit-hinlet) = 410.4-387.8 = 22.6 kJ/kg = 22600 J/kg
u2 = 150.3 m/s (Ans.)
9. A 2-stage centrifugal compressor operating at 3000 RPM is to compress
refrigerant R 134a from an evaporator temperature of 0 oC to a condensing
temperature of 32oC. If the impeller diameters of both stages have to be same,
what is the diameter of the impeller? Assume the suction condition to be dry
saturated, compression process to be isentropic, the impeller blades to be radial
and refrigerant enters the impeller axially.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 24

Given:
Refrigerant
Evaporator temperature
Condensing temperature
Inlet condition
Compression process
Number of stages
Rotational speed
Impeller blades
Tangential velocity at inlet
Diameter of impeller

= R 134a
= 0oC
= 32oC
= Dry saturated
= Isentropic (reversible, adiabatic)
=2
= 3000 RPM
= Radial
= 0 m/s
= Same for both stages

Ans.:
From refrigerant property data:
Enthalpy of refrigerant at compressor inlet, hi = 398.6 kJ/kg
Enthalpy of refrigerant at compressor exit, he = 419.8 kJ/kg
Since the blades are radial with no tangential velocity component at inlet, the
enthalpy rise across each stage,
Ah1 = Ah2 = u22 = Ahstage

=> enthalpy rise across the compressor, (he-hi) = Ah1+Ah2 = 2Ahstage =>
Ahstage = (he-hi)/2 = (419.8-398.6)/2 = 10.6 kJ/kg
/. u2 = (Ahstage)12 = (10.6 X 1000)1/2 = 103 m/s

u2 = co.r2 = 2TT X 3000/60 =

100TC rad/s
.. r2 = .'. u2/ = 0.3279 m => impeller diameter = 2r2 = 0.6558 m (Ans.)
10. A backward curved centrifugal compressor is to compress refrigerant R134a.
The diameter of the impeller is 0.6 m and the blade angle is 60o. The peripheral
area is 0.002 m2 and the flow coefficient (ratio of normal component of velocity to
tip speed) is 0.5. If the pressure and temperature of refrigerant at the exit of the
impeller are found to be 7.702 bar and 40oC, find the specific work and power
input to the compressor. The impeller rotates at 9000 RPM. The tangential
component of velocity at the inlet to the impeller may be assumed to be
negligible.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 25

Ans.: Given:
Refrigerant
Diameter of impeller
Blade angle,
Peripheral flow area,Af,p
Flow coefficient (Vn,2/u2)
Impeller speed
Exit pressure
Exit temperature
To find:

:
=
=
=
=
=
=
=

R134a
0.6 m
60o
0.002 m2
0.5
9000 RPM
7.702 bar
40oC

Specific work input (w) and power input (W)

When the tangential component of velocity at the impeller inlet is negligible and
the slip factor is unity, then the power input to the compressor is given by:
Vn,2
mu
cot
1-

W=mu2Vt,2
u2

The tip speed, u2 is obtained from the RPM (N) and the impeller diameter (d) as:
u2 =2(N/60)(d/2)=2(9000/60)(0.6/2)=282.74m/s
Since the flow coefficient is given as 0.5, the normal component of velocity
at the exit of the impeller, Vn,2 is given by:
Vn,2 =0.5u2 =141.37m/s
The mass flow rate of refrigerant is obtained from the normal component
at the tip (Vn,2), peripheral area (Af,p) and the specific volume of refrigerant at the
exit (v2; obtained from exit pressure and temperature) as:
m=

Vn,2Af,p
v2

141.37X0.002
=
0.1846

=1.532kg/s

Substituting the values of mass flow rate, tip velocity, normal component of
velocity at the impeller exit and the blade angle in the expression for power input,
we obtain:
Power input to the compressor, W = 87117 W = 87.117 kW
(Ans.)
Specific work = W/m = 56.865 kJ/kg

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 26

Lesson

22
Condensers &
Evaporators

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 1

The specific objectives of this lesson are to:

979. Discuss general aspects of evaporators and condensers used in
refrigeration systems (Section 22.1)
980. Introduce refrigerant condensers (Section 22.2)
981. Classify refrigerant condensers based on the external fluid used, based on
constructional details etc. (Section 22.3)
982. Compare air cooled condensers with water cooled condensers (Section
22.3.4)
983. Present analysis and design aspects of refrigerant condensers, estimation
of heat transfer coefficients on external fluid side on refrigerant side for different
configurations (Section 22.4)
984. Discuss briefly the effect of presence of air and other non-condensible
gases in refrigerant condensers (Section 22.5)
985. Discuss briefly the concept of optimum condensing pressure for lowest
running cost of a refrigeration system (Section 22.6)
At the end of the lecture, the student should be able to:
986. Classify and describe refrigerant condensers based on the external fluid
used, based on the external fluid flow and based on constructional aspects
987. Compare air-cooled condensers with water-cooled condensers
988. Perform condenser design calculations using various correlations
presented for estimating heat transfer coefficients on external fluid and
refrigerant side and estimate the required condenser area for a given
refrigeration system
4. Explain the effect of presence of non-condensible gases on condenser
performance
5. Explain the concept of optimum condenser pressure

22.1. Introduction:
Condensers and evaporators are basically heat exchangers in which the
refrigerant undergoes a phase change. Next to compressors, proper design and
selection of condensers and evaporators is very important for satisfactory
performance of any refrigeration system. Since both condensers and evaporators
are essentially heat exchangers, they have many things in common as far as the
design of these components is concerned. However, differences exists as far as
the heat transfer phenomena is concerned. In condensers the refrigerant vapour
condenses by rejecting heat to an external fluid, which acts as a heat sink.
Normally, the external fluid does not undergo any phase change, except in some
special cases such as in cascade condensers, where the external fluid (another
refrigerant) evaporates. In evaporators, the liquid refrigerant evaporates by
extracting heat from an external fluid (low temperature heat source). The external
fluid may not undergo phase change, for example if the system is used for
sensibly cooling water, air or some other fluid. There are many refrigeration and
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 2

air conditioning applications, where the external fluid also undergoes phase
change. For example, in a typical summer air conditioning system, the moist air
is dehumidified by condensing water vapour and then, removing the condensed
liquid water. In many low temperature refrigeration applications freezing or
frosting of evaporators takes place. These aspects have to be considered while
designing condensers and evaporators.

22.2. Condensers:
As already mentioned, condenser is an important component of any
refrigeration system. In a typical refrigerant condenser, the refrigerant enters the
condenser in a superheated state. It is first de-superheated and then condensed
by rejecting heat to an external medium. The refrigerant may leave the
condenser as a saturated or a sub-cooled liquid, depending upon the
temperature of the external medium and design of the condenser. Figure 22.1
shows the variation of refrigeration cycle on T-s diagram. In the figure, the heat
rejection process is represented by 2-3-3-4. The temperature profile of the
external fluid, which is assumed to undergo only sensible heat transfer, is shown
by dashed line. It can be seen that process 2-3 is a de-superheating process,
during which the refrigerant is cooled sensibly from a temperature T 2 to the
saturation temperature corresponding condensing pressure, T 3. Process 3-3 is
the condensation process, during which the temperature of the refrigerant
remains constant as it undergoes a phase change process. In actual refrigeration
systems with a finite pressure drop in the condenser or in a system using a
zeotropic refrigerant mixture, the temperature of the refrigerant changes during
the condensation process also. However, at present for simplicity, it is assumed
that the refrigerant used is a pure refrigerant (or an azeotropic mixture) and the
condenser pressure remains constant during the condensation process. Process
3-4 is a sensible, sub cooling process, during which the refrigerant temperature
drops from T3 to T4.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 3

21

1
T
Fig.22.1:
Refrigerat
ion cycle
on T-s
diagram

22.3.
Clas
sific
ation
of
cond
ense
rs:
B
a
s
e
d

o
n

t
h

e
x
t
e
r
n
a
l

f
l
u
i
d
,

c
o
n
d
e
n
s

e
r
s

c
a
n

b
e

c
l
a
s
s
i
f
i
e
d

a
s
:

989
.
Air
co
ole
d
co
nd
en
ser
s
990
.
Wa
ter
co
ole
d
co
nd
en
ser
s,
an
d
991
.
Ev
ap
ora
tiv
e
co
nd
en
ser
s
22.3.1
. Air-

coole
d
conde
nsers
:
As
the
name
implie
s, in
aircooled
conde
nsers
air is
the
extern
al
fluid,
i.e.,
the
refrige
rant
rejects
heat
to air
flowin
g over
the
conde
nser.
Aircooled
conde
nsers
can
be
further
classif
ied
into
natura
l
conve
ction
type
or
forced
conve
ction
type.

Natur
al
conve
ction
type:
I
n
natura
l
conve
ction
type,
heat
transf
er
from
the
conde
nser is
by
buoya
ncy
induce
d
natura
l
conve
ction
and
radiati
on.
Since
the
flow
rate of
air is
small
and
the
radiati
on
heat
transf
er is
also
not
very
high,
the
combi
ned

heat
transf
er
coeffic
ient in
these
conde
nsers
is
small.
As a
result
a
relativ
ely
large
conde
nsing
surfac
e
is
requir
ed to
reject
a
given
amou
nt of
heat.
Hence
these
conde
nsers
are
used
for
small
capaci
ty
refrige
ration
syste
ms
like
house
hold
refrige
rators
and
freeze
rs.
The
natura

l
conve
ction
type
conde
nsers
are
either
plate
surfac
e type
or
finned
tube
type.
In
plate
surfac
e type
conde
nsers
used
in
small
refrige
rators
and
freeze
rs, the
refrige
rant
carryi
ng
tubes
are
attach
ed to
the
outer
walls
of the
refrige
rator.
The
whole
body
of the
refrige
rator
(exce
pt the

Versio
n1
ME,
IIT
Khara
gpur
4

door) acts like a fin. Insulation is provided between the outer cover that acts like
fin and the inner plastic cover of the refrigerator. It is for this reason that outer
body of the refrigerator is always warm. Since the surface is warm, the problem
of moisture condensation on the walls of the refrigerator does not arise in these
systems. These condensers are sometimes called as flat back condensers.
The finned type condensers are mounted either below the refrigerator at
an angle or on the backside of the refrigerator. In case, it is mounted below, then
the warm air rises up and to assist it an air envelope is formed by providing a
jacket on backside of the refrigerator. The fin spacing is kept large to minimize
the effect of fouling by dust and to allow air to flow freely with little resistance.
In the older designs, the condenser tube (in serpentine form) was attached to
a plate and the plate was mounted on the backside of the refrigerator. The plate
acted like a fin and warm air rose up along it. In another common design, thin
wires are welded to the serpentine tube coil. The wires act like fins for increased
heat transfer area. Figure 22.2 shows the schematic of a wire-and-tube type
condenser commonly used in domestic refrigerators. Regardless of the type,
refrigerators employing natural convection condenser should be located in such a
way that air can flow freely over the condenser surface.

Refrigerant
out
Refrigeran
t in

g
Fig.22.2: Schematic of a wire-and-tube type condenser used in small
refrigeration systems

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 5

Forced convection type:

In forced convection type condensers, the circulation of air over the
condenser surface is maintained by using a fan or a blower. These condensers
normally use fins on air-side for good heat transfer. The fins can be either plate
type or annular type. Figure 22.3 shows the schematic of a plate-fin type
condenser. Forced convection type condensers are commonly used in window
air conditioners, water coolers and packaged air conditioning plants. These are
either chassis mounted or remote mounted. In chassis mounted type, the
compressor, induction motor, condenser with condenser fan, accumulator, HP/LP
cut- out switch and pressure gauges are mounted on a single chassis. It is called
condensing unit of rated capacity. The components are matched to condense the
required mass flow rate of refrigerant to meet the rated cooling capacity. The
remote mounted type, is either vertical or roof mounted horizontal type. Typically
the air velocity varies between 2 m/s to 3.5 m/s for economic design with airflow
rates of 12 to 20 cmm per ton of refrigeration (TR). The air specific heat is 1.005
kJ/kg-K and density is 1.2 kg/m 3. Therefore for 1 TR the temperature rise ta =
3.5167/(1.2x1.005 x 16/60) = 10.9 oC for average air flow rate of 16 cmm. Hence,
the air temperature rises by 10 to 15oC as compared to 3 to 6oC for water in
water cooled condensers.

Refrigerant out

/^Z-

(C
v__
/^~~

(C
Refrigerant in

v^__
Plate fins^

Fig.22.3: Forced convection, plate fin-and-tube type condenser

The area of the condenser seen from outside in the airflow direction is
called face area. The velocity at the face is called face velocity. This is given by
the volume flow rate divided by the face area. The face velocity is usually around
2m/s to 3.5 m/s to limit the pressure drop due to frictional resistance. The coils of
the tube in the flow direction are called rows. A condenser may have two to eight
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 6

rows of the tubes carrying the refrigerant. The moist air flows over the fins while
the refrigerant flows inside the tubes. The fins are usually of aluminum and tubes
are made of copper. Holes of diameter slightly less than the tube diameter are
punched in the plates and plates are slid over the tube bank. Then the copper
tubes are pressurized which expands the tubes and makes a good thermal
contact between the tube and fins. This process is also known as bulleting. For
ammonia condensers mild steel tubes with mild steel fins are used. In this case
the fins are either welded or galvanizing is done to make a good thermal contact
between fin and tube. In case of ammonia, annular crimpled spiral fins are also
used over individual tubes instead of flat-plate fins. In finned tube heat
exchangers the fin spacing may vary from 3 to 7 fins per cm. The secondary
surface area is 10 to 30 times the bare pipe area hence; the finned coils are very
compact and have smaller weight.
22.3.2. Water Cooled Condensers:
In water cooled condensers water is the external fluid. Depending upon the
construction, water cooled condensers can be further classified into:
992.
993.
994.

Double pipe or tube-in-tube type

Shell-and-coil type
Shell-and-tube type

Double Pipe or tube-in-tube type:

Double pipe condensers are normally used up to 10 TR capacity. Figure
22.4 shows the schematic of a double pipe type condenser. As shown in the
figure, in these condensers the cold water flows through the inner tube, while the
refrigerant flows through the annulus in counter flow. Headers are used at both
the ends to make the length of the condenser small and reduce pressure drop.
The refrigerant in the annulus rejects a part of its heat to the surroundings by free
convection and radiation. The heat transfer coefficient is usually low because of
poor liquid refrigerant drainage if the tubes are long.
Shell-and-coil type:
These condensers are used in systems up to 50 TR capacity. The water
flows through multiple coils, which may have fins to increase the heat transfer
coefficient. The refrigerant flows through the shell. In smaller capacity
condensers, refrigerant flows through coils while water flows through the shell.
Figure 22.5 shows a shell-and-coil type condenser. When water flows through
the coils, cleaning is done by circulating suitable chemicals through the coils.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 7

Refrigerant in

Coolant in
out

<

m--

Refrigerant out Fig.22.4: Double pipe (tube-in-tube) type

condenser

Refrigerant in

Coolant in

Coolant out
Refrigerant out
Fig.22.5: Shell-and-coil type condenser
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 8

Shell-and-tube type:
This is the most common type of condenser used in systems from 2 TR
upto thousands of TR capacity. In these condensers the refrigerant flows through
the shell while water flows through the tubes in single to four passes. The
condensed refrigerant collects at the bottom of the shell. The coldest water
contacts the liquid refrigerant so that some subcooling can also be obtained. The
liquid refrigerant is drained from the bottom to the receiver. There might be a vent
connecting the receiver to the condenser for smooth drainage of liquid
refrigerant. The shell also acts as a receiver. Further the refrigerant also rejects
heat to the surroundings from the shell. The most common type is horizontal
shell type. A schematic diagram of horizontal shell-and-tube type condenser is
shown in Fig. 22.6.
Vertical shell-and-tube type condensers are usually used with ammonia in
large capacity systems so that cleaning of the tubes is possible from top while
the plant is running.
Coolant tubes
Refrigerant
in
Coolant in

Refrigerant out

Outer shell

Fig.22.6: A two-pass, shell-and-tube type condenser

22.3.3. Evaporative condensers:
In evaporative condensers, both air and water are used to extract heat
from the condensing refrigerant. Figure 22.7 shows the schematic of an
evaporative condenser. Evaporative condensers combine the features of a
cooling tower and water-cooled condenser in a single unit. In these condensers,
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 9

the water is sprayed from top part on a bank of tubes carrying the refrigerant and
air is induced upwards. There is a thin water film around the condenser tubes
from which evaporative cooling takes place. The heat transfer coefficient for
evaporative cooling is very large. Hence, the refrigeration system can be
operated at low condensing temperatures (about 11 to 13 K above the wet bulb
temperature of air). The water spray countercurrent to the airflow acts as cooling
tower. The role of air is primarily to increase the rate of evaporation of water. The
required air flow rates are in the range of 350 to 500 m 3/h per TR of refrigeration
capacity.
Drift
Refrigeran
eliminator
t

Refrigeran
t

Air out

Air out

Make-up
water
Water pump
Fig.22.7: Schematic of an evaporative condenser

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 10

Evaporative condensers are used in medium to large capacity systems.

These are normally cheaper compared to water cooled condensers, which
require a separate cooling tower. Evaporative condensers are used in places
where water is scarce. Since water is used in a closed loop, only a small part of
the water evaporates. Make-up water is supplied to take care of the evaporative
loss. The water consumption is typically very low, about 5 percent of an
equivalent water cooled condenser with a cooling tower. However, since
condenser has to be kept outside, this type of condenser requires a longer length
of refrigerant tubing, which calls for larger refrigerant inventory and higher
pressure drops. Since the condenser is kept outside, to prevent the water from
freezing, when outside temperatures are very low, a heater is placed in the water
tank. When outside temperatures are very low it is possible to switch-off the
water pump and run only the blowers, so that the condenser acts as an air
cooled condenser.
Another simple form of condenser used normally in older type cold
storages is called as atmospheric condenser. The principle of the atmospheric
condenser is similar to evaporative condenser, with a difference that the air flow
over the condenser takes place by natural means as no fans or blowers are
used. A spray system sprays water over condenser tubes. Heat transfer outside
the tubes takes by both sensible cooling and evaporation, as a result the external
heat transfer coefficient is relatively large. The condenser pipes are normally
large, and they can be either horizontal or vertical. Though these condensers are
effective and economical they are being replaced with other types of condensers
due to the problems such as algae formation on condenser tubes, uncertainity
due to external air circulation etc.
22.3.4. Air cooled vs water cooled condensers:
The Salient features of air cooled and water cooled condensers are shown
below in Table 22.1. The advantages and disadvantages of each type are
discussed below.
Parameter
Temperature difference, TC Tcoolant
Volume flow rate of coolant per TR
Heat transfer area per TR
Face Velocity
Fan or pump power per TR

Air cooled
6 to 22o C
12 to 20 m3/min
10 to 15 m2
2.5 to 6 m/s
75 to 100 W

Water cooled
6 to 12o C
0.007 to 0.02 m3/min
0.5 to 1.0 m2
2 to 3 m/s
negligible

Table 22.1: Comparison between air cooled and water cooled condensers
Advantages and disadvantages:
Air-cooled condensers are simple in construction since no pipes are
required for air. Further, the disposal of warm air is not a problem and it is

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 11

available in plenty. The fouling of condenser is small and maintenance cost is

low. However, since the specific heat of air is one fourth of that of water and
density is one thousandth of that of water, volume flow rates required are very
large. The thermal conductivity is small; hence heat transfer coefficient is also
very small. Also, air is available at dry-bulb temperature while water is available
at a lower temperature, which is 2 to 3 oC above the wet-bulb temperature. The
temperature rise of air is much larger than that of water, therefore the condenser
temperature becomes large and COP reduces. Its use is normally restricted to 10
TR although blower power goes up beyond 5 TR. In systems up to 3 TR with
open compressors it is mounted on the same chassis as the compressor and the
compressor motor drives the condenser fan also. In middle-east countries where
is shortage of fresh water these are used up to 100 TR or more.
The air-cooled condensers cost two to three times more than water-cooled
condensers. The water-cooled condenser requires cooling tower since water is
scarce in municipality areas and has to be recycled. Water from lakes and rivers
cannot be thrown back in warm state since it affects the marine life adversely.
Increased first cost and maintenance cost of cooling tower offsets the cost
advantage of water-cooled condenser. Fouling of heat exchange surface is a big
problem in use of water.

22.4. Analysis of condensers:

From Fig.22.1, the total heat rejected in the condenser, Qc is given by:
Qc = m(h2 h4) = mext Cp,ext( Text,o Text,i)

(22.1)

where m is the mass flow rate of refrigerant

h2,h4 are the inlet and exit enthalpies of refrigerant
mext is the mass flow rate of the external fluid
Cp,ext is an average specific heat of the external fluid, and
Text,i and Text,o are the inlet and exit temperatures of the external fluid
The required condenser area is then given by the equation:
Qc=U.A.ATm

(22.2)

where U is the overall heat transfer coefficient

A is the heat transfer area of the condenser, and
ATm is mean temperature difference between refrigerant and external fluid

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 12

In a typical design problem, the final objective is to find the heat transfer
area A required from given input. From the above equation it can be seen that to
find heat transfer area, one should know the amount of heat transfer rate across
the condenser (Qc), the overall heat transfer coefficient (U) and the mean
temperature difference. The heat transfer rate in the condenser depends on the
refrigeration capacity of the system and system COP. The overall heat transfer
coefficient depends on the type and design of condenser. The mean temperature
difference depends on the operating temperature of the refrigeration system, type
of the condenser and the external fluid. In a typical rating problem, the objective
is to find the rate of heat transfer when other parameters are fixed.
22.4.1. Condenser Heat Rejection Ratio (HRR):
The heat rejection ratio (HRR) is the ratio of heat rejected to the heat
absorbed (refrigeration capacity), that is,
Qc
(22.3)

HRR=

Qe +Wc
=

Qe

1
=1+

Qe

COP

For a fixed condenser temperature, as the evaporator temperature

decreases the COP decreases and heat rejection ratio increases. For fixed
evaporator temperature as the condenser temperature increases the COP
decreases hence the heat rejection ratio increases. At a given evaporator and
condenser temperatures, the HRR of refrigeration systems using hermetic
compressors is higher than that of open compressor systems. As discussed in
earlier chapters, this is due to the additional heat rejected by motor and
compressor in hermetic systems. These characteristics are shown in Fig.22.8.
Such curves can be drawn for all refrigerants so that the condenser heat
rejection can be determined for given Te, Tc and TR.

Open type Hermetic

Te = -10oC
T
HRR
e = 0oC
Te = 10oC
Tc

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 13

Fig.22.8: Variation of heat rejection ratio (HRR) with evaporator and
condenser temperatures

22.4.2. Mean temperature difference:

In a refrigerant condenser, the mean temperature difference Tm, between
the refrigerant and the external fluid varies continuously along the length as
shown in Fig.22.9. However, the heat transfer coefficient on the refrigerant side,
hr is small during de-superheating (2-3) in vapour phase but temperature
difference between refrigerant and coolant T is large, while during condensation
(3-3) the heat transfer coefficient on refrigerant side is large and the temperature
difference is small. As a result, the product hrT is approximately same in both
the regions; hence as an approximation one may design the condenser by
assuming that condensation occurs throughout the condenser. This implies that
the refrigerant temperature is assumed to remain constant at condensing
temperature throughout the length of the condenser. As mentioned, this is an
approximation, and is considered to be adequate for rough estimation of
condenser area. However, for accurate design of condenser, one has to consider
the de-superheating, condensation and subcooling regions separately and
evaluate the area required for each region, and finally find the total area.

Refrigerant External fluid

<----------------

it/ 4

^-^ 7.7-r

3
" ~~~

T ext,i

Length
Fig.22.9: Variation of refrigerant and external fluid temperature in a condenser
If we assume condensation throughout the length of the condenser and
also assume the pressure drop to be negligible, then the mean temperature
difference is given by the Log Mean Temperature Difference (LMTD):

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 14

(Text,o Text i)
----------------------
Tc ~ Text,i

(T ext,o

LMTD =?
-------(22.4)

T ext,i )

ln

Tc ~ Text,o

In the above equation, Text,i and Text,o are

the inlet and outlet temperatures of the external fluid, and Tc
is the condensing temperature.
22.4.3. Overall heat transfer coefficient:
Evaluation of overall heat transfer coefficient, U is an
important step in the design of a condenser. The overall
heat transfer coefficient can be based on either internal
area (A) or external area (Ao) of the condenser. In general
we can write:
1
UA = UiAi =UoAo =
(22.5)
i=1

where Ri is the heat transfer resistance of i th component

A general expression for overall heat transfer coefficient is
given by:
1
R"f,o

UiAi
Ao
Ai

1
R"f,i
=
UoAo

=
+
[h(Af r(f + Ab )]o

Ax

+
+
kwAm

+
[h(AfT|f + Ab)]i

(22.6)
In the above expression, h is the convective heat
transfer coefficient, Af and Ab are the finned and bare tube
areas of the heat exchanger, respectively, rjf is the fin
efficiency. Subscripts i and o stand for inner and outer
sides, Ax is the thickness of the wall separating the
refrigerant from external fluid, kw and Am are the thermal
conductivity and mean area of the wall. Rf is the
resistance due to fouling.
The fouling due to deposition of scale on the fin side
of an air cooled condenser usually has little effect since
1/hco is rather large. In some cases an allowance may be

made for imperfect contact between the fins and the tubes,
however it is difficult to evaluate. It is negligible for good
construction. The fouling resistance for the inside of the
tube is not negligible and must be included. For an
externally finned tube condenser, the overall heat transfer
coefficient based on the external area, U o is given by:

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 15

1
Uo =-----------"-----------------------------------------------------------Ao R f,i Ao Ao ri ln(ro / r i )
Ao
hi Ai
Ai
Ai
kw
[ho(Aff + Ab)]o

(22.7)

In the above expression Ao is the total external area (Af+Ab), hi and ho are
the inner and outer convective heat transfer coefficients, respectively and r i, ro are
the inner and outer radii of the tube, respectively.
For water-cooled condensers without fins, the expression for overall heat
transfer coefficient simplifies to:
Uo =-----------"------------------------------------------Ao
R f,i Ao Ao ri ln(do/di )
1
hi Ai
Ai
Ai
kw
ho

(22.8)

The condensation heat transfer coefficient is of the order of 7000 W/m 2-K
for ammonia. However it is of the order of 1700 W/m 2-K for synthetic refrigerants
such as R 12 and R 22, whereas the waterside heat transfer coefficient is high in
both the cases for turbulent flow. Hence it is advisable to add fins on the side
where the heat transfer coefficient is low. In case of R 12 and R 22 condensers
the tubes have integral external fins to augment the heat transfer rate. This is
easily seen if the overall heat transfer coefficient is written in terms of inside area
as follows.
1
1
r= ln(do /di)
1 Ai
"
= + ----------+--------+ R f i
(22.9)
Ui hi
kw
ho Ao
It can be observed that by increasing the area ratio Ao/A ,that is the
outside surface area the overall heat transfer coefficient can be increased.
Fin efficiency:
In finned tube condensers, the fin efficiency depends on the type and
material of the fin and on fluid flow characteristics. Expressions for fin efficiency
can be derived analytically for simple geometries, however, for complex
geometries, the fin efficiency has to be obtained from actual measurements and
manufacturers catalogs. The most commonly used fin configuration is the platefin type as shown in Fig. 22.3. The plate-fin is often approximated with an
equivalent annular fin as shown in Fig.22.10. This is done as analytical
expressions and charts for the efficiency of annular fin have been obtained.
Figure 22.11 shows a typical efficiency chart for annular fins. In the figure, r o and
ri are the outer and inner radii of the annular fin, h o is the external heat transfer
coefficient, k is the thermal conductivity of fin material and t is the thickness of the
fin.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 16

Rectangular plate-fin segment

Equivalent annular fin

Fig.22.10: Approximating a plate-fin with an equivalent annular fin

1.0

Tlf

^ N

ro

vN.
V \ \

/ ro/ri
^

0,0

(ro-ri)(ho/kt)1/2

Fig.22.11: Fin efficiency curves for an annular fin

As shown in Fig.22.3, if the spacing between the tubes is B units within a
row and C units between rows. Then the area of the fin is given by (B x C - r12).
Now the outer radius (r2) of an equivalent annular fin is obtained by equating the
fin areas, i.e.,
B x C - 7ir12 = 7u( r22 - r12) .-. r2 = V( B x C/rc)

(22.10)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 17

Then the efficiency of the rectangular plate-fin is obtained from the

efficiency of an equivalent annular fin having an inner radius of r 1 and outer
radius of r2 ( = ( B x C/)).
22.4.4. Heat transfer areas in finned tube condensers:
Figures 22.3 shows the schematic diagram of a condenser or a cooling coil
with tubes and fins. The air flows through the passages formed by the fins.
Figure 22.12 shows a section of the plate fin-and-tube condenser and its side
view.

1.^ ~If

o
KJ

o oo
{

X^J

n
\J LJ

o o xJ

Fig.22.12: A portion of a plate fin-and-tube type condenser and its side view
The heat transfer takes place from the fins and the exposed part of the tube.
Hence heat transfer occurs from following areas
ii.
Bare tube area between the consecutive fins, Ab b)
Area of the fins,Af
1.

These areas are expressed in terms per m 2 of face area and per row. Face
area Aface is the area of condenser seen from outside, the actual flow area is less
than the face area since fins have finite thickness. Further, as air flows through it,
it has to pass between the narrow passage between the tubes. The flow area is
minimum at these locations. This will be denoted by Ac. To find these areas we
consider condenser of 1.0 m height and 1.0 m width as shown in Fig.22.12, so
that the face area is 1 m2. All the dimensions are in mm. Following nomenclature
is used.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 18

B:
C:
t:
D:
do:
di :

Vertical spacing between the tubes in a row, mm

Spacing between the tube in different rows, mm
Thickness of the fins, mm
Centre-to center spacing between the fins, mm
Outer diameter of the tubes, mm
Inner diameter of the tubes, mm

No. of tubes per m height = (1000/B) (tubes per m2 face area per row) No. of fin
passages per m width = (1000/D) (no. of passages per m2 face area) No. of fins
per m2 face area = 1 + 1000/D 1000/D Width of each passage = (D - t) /1000
(in meters)
Then the various areas are as follows:
Bare tube area, Ab = (tube perimeter) x (number of fin passages) x (number of
tubes) x (width of each passage) = (% do/1000) (1000/D) (1000/B) (D t)/1000
D-t
DB

Ab =----------7ido

m2 per

m2 face area per row

(22.11)

Fin Area, Af = (number of fins) (two sides of fins){width of fin per row - number of
tubes x area of cross section of each tube)} = (1000/D)(2){1 x C/1000 - (1000/B)
7r(do/1000)2/4]
2 C- *d2o
Af =
4B
D

m2 per

m2 face area per row

(22.12)

Minimum flow area, Ac = (number of fin passages) x (width of each passage) x

(height number of tubes per row x diameter of tube) = (1000/D){(D t)/1000}{1
(1000/B)(do/1000)}
2
(22.13)
m
per
2
D-tT
m face area per
row do
Ac =-------- 1D [
B

Total heat transfer area Ao = Bare tube area + Fin area

Ao = Ab+ Af

m2 per m2 face area per row

(22.14)

Wetted Perimeter, P = total heat transfer area/length in flow direction

P = Ao/(C/1000)

(22.15)

Hydraulic diameter, Dh = 4 Ac/wetted perimeter

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 19

Dh =

4CAc
1000
Ao

(22.16
)
The
Reyn
olds
numb
er
and
the
Nuss
elt
numb
ers
are
based
upon
hydra
ulic
diame
ter.
Inside
heat
transf
er
area,
A=
(TTd
i/1000
)x
(Num
ber of
tubes
)=
nd/B
A
i
=
r
c
d
i
/
B
(
2
2

.
1
7
)

co

fa

effi

ce

22.4.5

cie

s:

nts

Estim

in

ation

air

of

co

heat

ole

transf

er

co

coeffi

nd

cients

en

ser
1.

s:

1.

Ai

Flo

si

de

ov

he

er

at

fin

tra

ne

ns

fer

sur

A
s
discu
ssed
befor
e, in
these
conde
nsers,
the
refrig
erant
flows
throu
gh the
tubes,
while
air
flows
over
the
finned
tubes.
The
forced
conve
ction
heat
transf
er
coeffi
cient
for
the
airside
depen
ds
upon,
the
type
of
fins,
fin
spaci

ng, finof
thickn Colbur
ess n
jtube factor
diame (St.Pr2/
ters 3) vs.
etc. ItReynol
can ds
be
numbe
evalu r (Re)
ated for
experi various
menta geome
lly fortries.
partic On the
ular averag
fin
e,
and followi
tube ng
arrang correla
ement tion is
. Kaysa good
and fit
to
Londo their
n
data
(1955) for
have various
carrie geome
d outtries.
exten
sive
Nu =
meas
0.117
ureme
Re065
nts on
Pr1/3
differe
(22.17
nt
)
types
of fin
T
and he
tube Nussel
arrang t
ement numbe
s.
r and
They Reynol
have ds
prese numbe
nted rs are
the
based
data upon
in the hydrau
forms lic
of plot diamet

er
define
d
earlie
r
in
Eqn.
(22.1
6).
A
nothe
r
simpl
e
expre
ssion
has
been
propo
sed
Air
condit
ioning
and
Refrig
eratio
n
Institu
te,
Arling
ton
Va.
(1972
)
,
which
is as
follow
s
ho = 38
Vf 0.5
(22.18)
Wher
e, Vf
is the

pressu
re drop
plots. A
velocit correla
tion
y in fitted to
his
m/s data is
given
and ho in
Table
is in 22.2
for
W/m2. various
fin
K
spacin
g
for
b)
pressu
re drop
Corre in Pa
per
lation row.
The
s for velocit
y is the
Press face
velocit
ure y
in
m/s
drop
face

ich
(1974) Versio
n1
has
ME,
IIT
carrie
d out Kharag
exten pur 20
sive
meas
ureme
nts
over
the
fintube
heat
excha
ngers
and
has
given

315 Number
p
of
fins/m
(Pa per row)

7.15 V

394

472

531

8.5V1.56

9.63 V1.56

11 V1.56

1.56

T
a
b
l
e
2
2
.
2
:
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
d
r
o
p
c
o

rrelations for

xJ

various fin

r\

spacings
(Rich,1974)
ii. Flow over tube
banks:

W
r\

xJ

\J

{ j

a) Heat transfer
Grimson has
T
given correlations for
average heat transfer
Fig.22.13:
coefficient for forced
convection from tube
banks in cross flow
for staggered as well
as
in-line
arrangement of tubes
as shown in Fig.
22.13. As mentioned
earlier, face area Af
of
the
heat
exchanger is the
area seen from the
flow direction and Qf
is the volume flow
rate of flow then face
velocity Vf is given
by:

Sch
em
atic
dia
gra
m
of
plat
e
find
and
tub
e
con
den
ser
wit
h
Tub
esinline
and
tub
es
sta
gge
red

T
h

e
ma
xim
um
vel
ocit
y
occ
urs
bet
we
en
the
tub
es
sin
ce
the
tub
es
blo
ck
a
part
of
the
flo
w
pas
sag
e. If
B is
the
spa
cin
g
bet
we
en
tub
es
in
the
fac
e
and
C is
the
tub
e
spa
cin

Versio
n1
ME, IIT
Kharag
pur 21

Vmax = Vf B/(B do)

(22.20)

The Reynolds and Nusselt number are defined as follows for this case:
P Vma d
h do
Re =
and Nu =
x o
(22.21)
\i
k
k
Nu = C Re

Pr

The Grimsons correlation is as follows

(22.22)

1/3

Where the constants C and n are dependent upon Reynolds number

and are given in Table 22.3.
Reynolds number,
Re
0.4 to 4
4 to 40 40 to
4000
4000 to 40000
40000 to 400000

Constant
C
0.989
0.911
0.683
0.193
0.0266

Constant
0.33 n
0.385
0.466
0.618
0.805

Table 22.3: Values of constants C and n used in Eqn. (22.22)

b) Pressure drop
O.L. Pierson and E.C. Huge have given the correlation for pressure
drop for flow over tube banks as follows:
Ap = fNV 2/2
(22.23)
Where, f is the friction factor and N is the number of rows. The friction
factor is given by

0.32b-------1
--------------in-line

-0.15

0.176
f = (a-1)
Re+ 043+1.13/b
0,47 (a1.0
+and b
108
f1)= Re-016
=
where, a =
B/d
C/d

for tubes

for staggered tubes

(22.24)
o

and b

C/do iii. Free

convection over hot, vertical flat plates and cylinders:

Constant wall temperature:
L

numbe ,NuL
AverageNusse
r
=
lt

L
kf

=c(Gr Pr)n = cRaLn

(22.25
)

Version 1 ME, IIT

Kharagpur 22

where c and n are 0.59 and for laminar flow (104 < GrL.Pr < 109) and 0.10 and
Vz for turbulent flow (109 < GrL.Pr < 1013)
In the above equation, GrL is the average Grashoff number given by:
g(3 (Tw-Tm) L 3____________
Average Grashoff Number GrL =
------(22.26)
v
where g is the acceleration due to gravity, p is volumetric coefficient of thermal
expansion, Tw and T^ are the plate and the free stream fluid temperatures,
respectively and v is the kinematic viscosity. Correlations for other conditions are
presented in Chapter 7.
b) Water side heat transfer coefficients in water cooled condensers:
In water cooled condensers, the water flows through the tubes. The water
flow is normally turbulent, hence one can use Dittus-Boelter equation given by:
Nud = 0.023 Red0.8 Pr0.4

(22 27)

If the viscosity variation is considerable, then one can use Seider-Tate equation given by:
Nud = 0.036 Red08 Pr1/3 (/J//IW)014

(22 28)

If the Reynolds number on water side is less than 2300, then the flow will be
laminar, hence one has to use the correlations for laminar flow. For example, if
the flow is laminar and not fully developed, then one can use Hausens
correlation given by:

0.0668(Di /L)Pe________________
Nud =3.66 +-------------------------(22.29)
2/

1 + 0.04[(Di /L)Pe ] 3
where Pe is the Peclet number = Red.Pr
1. . Condensation heat transfer coefficient:
When refrigerant vapour comes in contact with the surface whose
temperature is lower than the saturation temperature of refrigerant at condenser
pressure, the refrigerant condenses. Depending upon the type of the surface,
condensation can be filmwise or dropwise. Even though dropwise condensation
yields higher heat transfer coefficients compared to filmwise condensation,
normally design calculations are based on filmwise condensation. This is due to
the reason that it is difficult to maintain dropwise condensation continuously as
the surface characteristics may undergo change with time. In filmwise
condensation, the condensed refrigerant liquid forms a film over the condensing

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 23

surface. This liquid film resists heat transfer, hence, for high condensation heat
transfer rates, the thickness of the liquid film should be kept as small as possible.
This requires continuous draining of condensed liquid so that the vapour has
better contact with the heat transfer surface of the condenser. Since the rate at
which condensed liquid is drained depends among other factors on the
orientation of the surface, the condensation heat transfer coefficients vary widely
with orientation.
Outside Horizontal Tubes
A typical correlation known as Nusselts correlation for film-wise
condensation outside a bank of horizontal tubes is as follows:
3
025
h0 =0.725
(22.30)
k f Pf(Pf -Pg)ghfg
ND0HfAt
The density of liquid is much more than that of vapour hence this may be
approximated by
1/4
ho = 0.
(22.31)
725
k3f 2f ghfg
NDoft
This expression is exactly valid for still vapour. In this expression subscript
f refers to the properties of saturated liquid, which are evaluated at mean film
temperature of (two + tr )/2. D0 is the outer diameter of the tube and N is the
average number of tubes per column.
Some of the features of this correlation are as follows:
i.

As thermal conductivity kf increases, the heat transfer coefficient

increases since conduction thermal resistance of the condensate film
decreases. ii.
Similarly a decrease in viscosity or increase in
density will offer less
frictional resistance and cause rapid draining of the condensate,
thereby causing an increase in heat transfer coefficient. iii.
A high
value of latent heat hfg means that for each kW of heat transfer
there will be smaller condensate thickness and higher heat transfer
coefficient. iv.
An increase in diameter means larger condensate
thickness at the
bottom and hence a smaller heat transfer coefficient. v.
A large
value of temperature difference will lead to more condensation
and larger condensate thickness and will lead to a smaller heat
transfer coefficient vi.
An increase in number of tubes will lead
to larger condensate
thickness in the lower tubes leading to smaller heat transfer coefficient

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 24

In actual practice the vapour will not be still but it will move with some velocity
and the condensate will splash and ripples will be caused which may lead to larger value
of heat transfer coefficient. Hence the above equation gives a very conservative
estimate of condensation heat transfer coefficient.
Outside Vertical Tube :
For laminar flow the average heat transfer coefficient by Nusselts Correlation for
condensation over a vertical tube is as follows
3
025
kfPf(Pf ~Pg)ghfg
h0
1.13
where L is the tube length (22.32)
Lpif At
/Hf This may be used in laminar flow up to Ref = 1800, where Ref = 4m/(Ti\if D) Kirkbride
3 has rearranged this in terms of condensation number Co, which is defined as follows:
0 3fP2=gh
Co
(22.33)
k

Co= h0

= 1.514Ref
= 1.514 Ref 1 / 3
For turbulent flow : Ref > 1800 , the Kirkbride Correlation is as follows:
Hf
kf3pf2g

= 0.0077 Ref04

(22.34)

Condensation Inside Tubes

Condensation heat transfer inside tube causes a reduction in the area of
condensation due to liquid collecting in the bottom of the tubes. The draining of the
condensate may retard or accelerate the vapour flow depending upon whether it flows in
same direction as the vapour or in opposite direction. Here flow rate of vapour
considerable influences the heat transfer coefficient.
1. . Chaddock and Chatos Correlation
Chaddock and Chato suggested that condensation heat transfer coefficient inside
tubes is 0.77 times that of Nusselts heat transfer coefficient outside the tubes
particularly if the vapour Reynolds number Reg = 4m/(Tz/ug Di) < 35000. This gives the
average value of heat transfer coefficient over the length of the tube.
HTP = 0.77 h0
(22.35)
025
3
I
hTP =0.555
kfPf(Pf -Pg)ghfg
DiUfAt
J

(22.36)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 25

Where the modified enthalpy of evaporation is defined as h'fg = hfg + 3 CpfAt/8, At is

the difference between the temperature of condensing refrigerant and
temperature of the surface.
(b) Cavallini Zecchin Correlation
This correlation represents the condensation heat transfer coefficient in a
manner similar to Dittus-Boelter equation for turbulent flow heat transfer inside
tubes. The constant is different from that equation and an equivalent Reynolds
number is used to take care of two-phase flow and incomplete condensation. The
local values of heat transfer coefficient can also be found if the quality distribution
is known.
hTP=0.05Re0eq8Prf0.33kf/Di
0.5
fRfg
V
g
v
eJjeq

Re g
WAA =Re f (1- x) + x g f
4m
Where,
Reg =---------and
4m
Ref =

P,
(22.37)

Traviss et al. Correlation

This correlation uses Lockhart-Martinelli parameter, which takes into account
incomplete condensation. This can also be used for evaluation of local heat
transfer coefficient if the quality of mixture is known. The correlation covers a
wide range of Reynolds numbers defined as Rel = (1- x) Ref, where Ref is the
Reynolds number if all the refrigerant flows in liquid phase.
Prf Re0.9
Nu =
--------

tt

: for 0.15 <Ftt <15

(22.38)

Ftt =0.15 [Xt - t1 +2.85X- tt0

] and
F2 = 0.707 Prf Rel for Re l<50 where, Rel =(1-x)Ref
F2 = 5 Prf + 5ln [1 + Prf (0.09636 Rel0

-1)]

F2 =5Prf +5ln[1 + 5Prf ] + 2.5ln[0.00313Rel0

Xtt =[(1 -x)/x ] 0 9 (pg /pf )0.5 (Hf /^g) 0 . 1

: 50 <Rel < 1125

] :Rel >1125

= Lockhart-Martinelli parameter

1. . Shahs Correlation
This correlation takes into account the pressure of the refrigerant also in
addition to the quality of the mixture. This can also be used to find the local
condensation heat transfer coefficient. The heat transfer coefficient is a product

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 26

of heat transfer coefficient given by Dittus-Boelter equation and an additional

term.
h

=h

(1 x) 08 + 3.8x0. 7 6 (1-x) 0 0 4

where,pr =p/pcritical = reduced pressure

hL = 0.023 Re0f P r f k f / D i
(22.40)
hTP =hTP[ 0.55+2.09/p r 0 ] : avg value of h. t. coeff. at x =0.5
1. . Akers, Dean and Crosser Correlation
Akers, Dean and Crosser have proposed following correlation when the rate
of condensation or the length is very large. This is very similar to Dittus-Boelter
correlation for turbulent heat transfer in tubes, except the constant is different.
hDi kf

11

= 5.03 Rem3 Prf3

= 0.0265 Re0m. 8 Prf

where Rem = Ref [1 + ( f / g) ]

: Reg < 5x10

: Reg > 5x10
(22.41)

In this correlation the heat transfer coefficient is independent of temperature

difference and it increases with the increase in liquid Reynolds number, Ref.
Sometimes, it overestimates the heat transfer coefficient.
Fouling Factor
The condenser tubes are clean when it is assembled with new tubes.
However with usage some scale formation takes place in all the tubes and the
value of overall heat transfer coefficient decreases. It is a standard practice to
control the hardness of water used in the condenser. Even then it is good
maintenance practice to de-scale the condenser once a year with 2% HCl or
muric acid solution. Stoecker suggests the following values of deposit
coefficients.
Rf. = 0.00009 m2.K/W for R12 and R-22 with copper tubes
Rf. = 0.000178 m2.K/W for steel tubes with ammonia

22.5. Effect of air and non-condensables:

This is usually a problem with high boiling point refrigerants such as R 11, R
113 and R718 (water), which operate under vacuum leading to air leakage into
the system. In addition, some air may be left behind before the system is

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 27

evacuated and charged with refrigerant. If some non-condensable gases or air

enters the system, it will collect in the condenser where they affect performance
in two ways:
995.
Condensation takes place at saturation pressure corresponding to
condenser pressure, which will be the partial pressure of refrigerant in
mixture of refrigerant and air in this case. The air will have its partial
pressure proportional to its amount in the condenser. The total pressure
will be the sum of these two partial pressures, which will be high and the
compressor has to work against this pressure ratio hence the work
requirement will increase.
996.
Non-condensable gases do not diffuse throughout the condenser
as the refrigerant condenses. They cling to the tubes and reduce the
precious heat transfer area. The reduction in heat transfer area causes the
temperature difference between cold water and refrigerant to increase.
This raises the condenser temperature and the corresponding pressure
thereby reducing the COP.

22.6. Optimum condenser pressure for lowest running cost

The total running cost of a refrigeration system is the sum of costs of
compressor power and the cost of water. The cost of water can be the cost of
municipal water or the cost of running a cooling tower. The compressor power
increases as the condenser temperature or the pressure increases for fixed
evaporator temperature. The water from a cooling tower is usually available at a
fixed temperature equal to wet-bulb temperature of air plus the approach of the
cooling tower. As the condenser temperature increases the overall log mean
temperature difference increases, as a result lower mass flow rate of cooling
water is required. This reduces the cost of water at higher condenser
temperatures. Figure 22.14 shows the general trend of the total running cost of a
refrigeration system. It is observed that there is a condenser pressure at which
the running cost is minimum and it is recommended that the system should be
run at this pressure. A complete analysis of the cost should actually be carried
out which should include the first cost of the whole system, the interest on
capital, the depreciation, the maintenance cost the operator cost etc. The final
selection of the system and operating conditions should be such that the cost is
the least over the running life of the system.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 28

Total per
running
Cost
TR-h
cost
^_______Running cost of
compressor

------------\

Total running cost

Compressor cost
Water cost
Running
cost of
'water

Condens
ing
pressure----------------------------------
Fig.22.14: Variation
of total running cost
of a refrigeration
system with
condensing pressure

Questions &
answers:
1. Which of the following
statements are TRUE?
997. Natural convective
type condensers are used
in small capacity systems
as the overall heat
transfer coefficient
obtained is small
998. Compared to
natural convection type,
forced convection type
condensers have smaller
weight per unit capacity
999. Evaporative
condensers are normally
used in small capacity
systems
d) Compared to watercooled condensers, the
water consumption is high

in
evaporative condensers
Ans.: a) and b)
2. Which of the following
statements are TRUE?
1000. Compared to water
cooled condensers, the
maintenance cost is low in
air cooled condensers
1001. Normally, systems
with water cooled
condensers operate at
lower condensing
temperature as compared
to systems with air cooled
condensers
1002. The initial cost of
water cooled condenser is
high compared to air
cooled condenser
1
0
0
3
.
A
l
l
o
f
t
h
e
a
b
o
v
e
A
n
s
.
:
d
)

Version 1 ME, IIT

Kharagpur 29

3. Which of the following statements are TRUE?

1004. Heat Rejection Ratio increases as evaporator temperature increases and
condenser temperature decreases
1005. Heat Rejection Ratio increases as evaporator temperature decreases and
condenser temperature increases
1006. For the same evaporator and condenser temperatures, Heat Rejection
Ratio of open type compressors is small compared to hermetic compressors
1007. The required size of condenser increases as Heat Rejection Ratio
decreases
Ans.: b) and c)
4. The approximation of constant temperature in a condenser generally holds
good as:
1008. The heat transfer coefficient in de-superheating zone is larger than that in
condensing zone
1009. The heat transfer coefficient in de-superheating zone is smaller than that
in condensing zone
1010. The temperature difference between refrigerant and external fluid in desuperheating zone is large compared to condensing zone
1011. The temperature difference between refrigerant and external fluid in desuperheating zone is small compared to condensing zone
Ans.: b) and c)
5. Which of the following statements is TRUE?
1012. In water-cooled condensers using ammonia, fins are used on refrigerant
side due to low condensing heat transfer coefficient
1013. In water-cooled condensers using synthetic refrigerants, fins are used on
refrigerant side due to low condensing heat transfer coefficient
c) Fouling resistance on external fluid side is negligible in water-cooled
condensers
d) Fouling resistance on external fluid side is negligible in air-cooled condensers
Ans.: b) and d)
6. Presence of non-condensible gases in a condenser:
1014.
1015.
1016.
1017.

Increases the condenser pressure

Decreases condenser pressure
Increases resistance to heat transfer
Decreases COP

Ans.: a), b) and d)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 30

7. The average condensing heat transfer coefficient for a refrigerant condensing

on a single horizontal tube is found to be 4000 W/m 2.K. Now another tube is
added directly below the first tube. Assuming everything else to remain constant,
what will be the new average condensing heat transfer coefficient?
Ans.: From Nusselts correlation for condensation heat transfer coefficient on the
outside of a horizontal tube, we find that when everything else remains constant:

Ml1/4
ho oc 1

where N is the number of tubes in a vertical row.

From the above equation, the ratio of condensing heat transfer coefficient with 1
tube and 2 tubes is given by:
1

1/4

= 0.8409
ho,1

=> ho,2 = ho,1 x 0.8409 = 3363.6 W/m2.K

(Ans.)

8. A refrigeration system of 55 kW cooling capacity that uses a water-cooled

condenser has a COP of 5.0. The overall heat transfer coefficient of the
condenser is 450 W/m2.K and a heat transfer area of 18 m 2. If cooling water at a
flow rate of 3.2 kg/s enters the condenser at a temperature of 30 oC, what is the
condensing temperature? Take the specific heat of water as 4.18kJ/kg.K.
Ans.:
The Heat Rejection Ratio of the system is equal to:
HRR = 1 + 1/COP = 1.2
Hence condenser heat rejection rate, Qc
Qc = Refrigeration capacity x HRR = 66 kW
Hence the LMTD of the condenser is equal to:
LMTD = Qc/(U.A) = 8.148oC The exit temperature of water,
Tw,e = Tw,i + Qc/(mwxcp) = 34.93oC From the expression for LMTD; LMTD =
(Tw,e-Tw,i)/[ln(Tc-Tw,i)/(Tc-Tw,e)] We find condensing temperature, Tc =
40.86oC

(Ans.)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 31

9. Find the length of tubes in a two pass 10 TR Shell-and-Tube R-22 based,

water-cooled condenser with 52 tubes arranged in 13 columns. The Heat
Rejection Ratio (HRR) is 1.2747. The condensing temperature is 45oC. Water
inlet and outlet temperature are 30oC and 35oC respectively. The tube outer and
inner diameters are 14.0 and 16.0 mm respectively.
Ans.: Average properties of R 22 and water are:
Water
juw = 7.73 x 10-4 kg/m-s
kw = 0.617 W/m-K
pw = 995.0 kg/m3
Cpw = 4.19 kJ/kg-K
Prw = 5.25

R 22
juf = 1.8 x 10-4 kg/m-s
kf = 0.0779 W/m-K
pf = 1118.9 kg/m3
hfg = 160.9 kJ/kg

The fouling resistance on water side and thermal conductivity of copper are:
Rfi = 0.000176 m2-K/W

kcu = 390 W/m-K

Heat transfer rate in condenser, Qc

Qc = HRR.Qe = 1.2747 X 10 X 3.5167 = 44.83 kW
Required mass flow rate of water, mw
Qc = mwCp,w(Tw,o-Tw,i) mw=Qc/Cp,w(Tw,o-Tw,i) =
44.83/4.19X5 = 2.14 kg/s
Since it is a 2-pass condenser with 52 tubes, water flow through each tube is
given by:
mw,i = mw/26 = 0.0823 kg/s
Reynolds number for water side, Rew
Rew = 4mw,i/(7tdi//w) = 4682.6 (=>Turbulent flow)
Heat transfer coefficient on water side, hi

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 32

From Dittus-Boelter Equation:

Nuw = (hidi/kw) = 0.023Rew0.8Prw0.4 = 68.96
hi = Nuw X kw/di = 3039 W/m2.K
Condensation heat transfer coefficient, ho
Nusselts correlation will be used to estimate ho:
Number of tubes per row, N = 52/13 = 4
Substituting the above and other property values in Nusselts correlation, we
obtain:
ho = 2175/ T0.25
T = Tref-Ts is not known a priori, hence, a trial-and-error method has to be used
For water-cooled condensers without fins; the overall heat transfer coefficient is
given by:
1
Uo =-----------"------------------------------------------Ao
R f,i Ao Ao ri ln(do/di )
1
hi Ai
Ai
Ai
kw
ho

Substituting the values of various parameters, we obtain:

1
1
----= 0.0005781 +
Uo
ho
First trial: Assume T = 5oC
Then condensation heat transfer coefficient,
ho = 2175/T0.25 = 1454.5 W/m2.K
Then the overall heat transfer coefficient is given by:
(1/Uo) = 0.0005781+(1/ho) = 0.0012656 m2K/W
Hence, Uo = 790.2 W/m2.K

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 33

Qc = UoAoLMTD = 44.83 kW
LMTD = (Tw,o-Tw,i)/[ln(Tc-Tw,i)/(Tc-Tw,o)] = 12.33 K
Therefore, Ao = 4.6 m2
Now we have cross-check for the initially assumed value of T = 5oC:
T = Qc/(ho.Ao) Substituting the
value; Tcalc = 6.7 K
Since the calculated value is not equal to the assumed value, we have to repeat
the calculation with T = 7 K (Second trial)
Repeating the above calculations with T of 7K, we obtain Tcalc = 6.96 K
Since, this value is sufficiently close to the 2nd guess value of 7K, it is not
necessary to repeat the calculations.
For 7 K temperature difference, we obtain the value of Uo to be 754 W/m2.K
From the values of Uo, LMTD and Qc, we obtain;
Ao = 4.82 m2
Now, Ao = 56doL

Hence, length of each tube, L = 1.713 m (Ans.)

10. Determine the required face area of an R 12 condenser for 5 TR
plant. The condensing temperature is 40oC, the system COP
refrigeration effect is 110.8 kJ/kg. Air at an inlet temperature of
through the condenser with a face velocity of 2.5 m/s. The inside
diameters of the tubes are 11.26 and 12.68 mm, respectively. Fin
0.73. Other dimensions with reference to Fig. 22.12 are:

refrigeration
is 4.9 and
27oC flows
and outside
efficiency is

B = 43 mm; C = 38 mm, D = 3.175 mm, t = 0.254 mm

Ans.: Various heat transfer areas are:
1.Bare area, Ab: (m2 per row per m2 face area)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 34

D-t
3.175-0.254
Ab =-------7udo =--------------------3.14159(12.68) = 0.8523
BD
43x3.175
2. Fin area, Af: (m2 per row per m2 face area)
2 C nd2o
Af =
4B
D

= 22.087

3. Min.flow area, Ac:(m2 /row per m2 face area)

D-tr

Ac =--------- 1D [

dol
B

=0.6487

Total area, Ao: (m2/row/m2 face area)

Ao = Ab+Af = 22.94

Internal area, Ai: (m2/row/m2 face area)

Ai = 7idi/B = 0.82266
Hydraulic diameter, Dh: (m)
4CAc
4(38)0.6487
-3
Dh =--------- =--------------------= 4.2984X10 m
1000 Ao 1000(22.9393)
Area ratios:
Ao /Ai =27.885
Ab/Af =0.03859
Condenser heat rejection rate, Qc:
Qc = HRR.Qe = (1+1/COP).Qe = 21.17 kW
Mass flow rate of refrigerant, mr:
mr = Qe/refrigeration effect = 0.15869 kg/s
Condensation Heat Transfer Coefficient:
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 35

From the properties of R12 at 40oC:

We find:
Prandtl number, Prf = 3.264
Reynolds number of vapour, Reg = 1385X103
Reynolds number of liquid, Ref = 74.8X103
To find condensation heat transfer coefficient inside tubes, we use Dean, Ackers
and Crossers correlation, which assumes complete condensation and uses a
modified Reynolds number Rem
Substituting various property values and Ref,
We obtain:
Reynolds number, Rem = 431383

The Nusselt number is found to be, Nu = 1265.9

Then the Condensation heat transfer coefficient, hi is
hi = 8206.7 W/m2.K
Air side heat transfer coefficient, ho:
umax = 2.5/Ac = 3.854 m/s Reynolds
number, Re = UmaxDh/ = 983.6 Nu = ho Dh/k
= 0.117 Re0.65 Pr1/3 = 7.835
Heat transfer coefficient, ho = 51.77 W/m2-K
Overall heat transfer coefficient, Uo:
1
Uo =------------------------------------------------------------------Ao R f,i A o Ao ri ln(ro / r i )
Ao
hi Ai
Ai
Ai
kw
[ho(Aff + Ab)]o
Substituting the values; Uo = 31.229 W/m2-K

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 36

Since outlet temperature of air is not given, assume this value to be 35oC;
then
(T ext,o - T ext,i )
(35-27)
o
LMTD =;-----------------^ =^------------^ = 8.3725 C
n Tc - Text,i ] ln 40-27
T -T
140-35,
^ c
ext,o J
Hence, total heat transfer area, Aot is
Aot = Qc/(Uo.LMTD) = 21.17 X 1000/(31.229 X 8.3725) = 80.967 m2
Taking the number of rows to be 4;
Aot = Aface x number of rows x Ao
Aface = 80.967/(22.94 x 4) = 0.882 m2
Mass flow rate of air is given by:
mair = pAface.V = 1.1774 x 0.8824 x 2.5 = 2.5973 kg/s
Check for guess value of air outlet temperature (35oC):
Qc = mairCp AT => AT = 21.17/
(2.5973x1.005) = 8.11 oC
=>Tair,out = 35.11oC
Since the guess value (35oC) is close to the calculated value (35.11oC),
we may stop here. For better accuracy, calculations may be repeated with 2nd
guess value of 5.1oC (say). The values obtained will be slightly different if other
correlations are used for hi.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 37

Lesson

23
Condensers &
Evaporators

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 1

The specific objectives of this lesson are to:

1018. Classify refrigerant evaporators as natural convection or forced convection
type, flooded or dry type, refrigerant flow inside the tubes or outside the tubes
(Section 23.1)
1019. Discuss salient features of natural convection coils (Section 23.2)
1020. Discuss salient features of flooded evaporators (Section 23.3)
1021. Discuss salient features of shell-and-tube type evaporators (Section 23.4)
1022. Discuss salient features of shell-and-coil evaporator (Section 23.5)
1023. Discuss salient features of double pipe evaporators (Section 23.6)
1024. Discuss salient features of Baudelot evaporators (Section 23.7)
1025. Discuss salient features of direct expansion fin-and-tube type evaporators
(Section 23.8)
1026. Discuss salient features of plate surface evaporators (Section 23.9)
1027. Discuss salient features of plate type evaporators (Section 23.10)
1028. Discuss thermal design aspects of refrigerant evaporators (Section 23.11)
1029. Discuss enhancement of boiling heat transfer (Section 23.12)
1030. Discuss the concept of Wilsons plot (Section 23.13)
At the end of the lecture, the student should be able to:
1031. Classify refrigerant evaporators and discuss the salient features of
different types of evaporators
1032. Perform thermal design calculations on refrigerant evaporators using
various heat transfer correlations presented in the lecture
3. Use Wilsons plots and determine external and internal heat transfer
coefficients from given experimental data and specifications of evaporators and
condensers

Introduction:
An evaporator, like condenser is also a heat exchanger. In an evaporator,
the refrigerant boils or evaporates and in doing so absorbs heat from the
substance being refrigerated. The name evaporator refers to the evaporation
process occurring in the heat exchanger.

23.1. Classification
There are several ways of classifying the evaporators depending upon the
heat transfer process or refrigerant flow or condition of heat transfer surface.
23.1.1. Natural and Forced Convection Type
The evaporator may be classified as natural convection type or forced
convection type. In forced convection type, a fan or a pump is used to circulate

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 2

the fluid being refrigerated and make it flow over the heat transfer surface, which
is cooled by evaporation of refrigerant. In natural convection type, the fluid being
cooled flows due to natural convection currents arising out of density difference
caused by temperature difference. The refrigerant boils inside tubes and
evaporator is located at the top. The temperature of fluid, which is cooled by it,
decreases and its density increases. It moves downwards due to its higher
density and the warm fluid rises up to replace it.
23.1.2. Refrigerant Flow Inside or Outside Tubes
The heat transfer phenomenon during boiling inside and outside tubes is
very different; hence, evaporators are classified as those with flow inside and
outside tubes.
In natural convection type evaporators and some other evaporators, the
refrigerant is confined and boils inside the tubes while the fluid being refrigerated
flows over the tubes. The direct expansion coil where the air is directly cooled in
contact with the tubes cooled by refrigerant boiling inside is an example of forced
convection type of evaporator where refrigerant is confined inside the tubes.
In many forced convection type evaporators, the refrigerant is kept in a
shell and the fluid being chilled is carried in tubes, which are immersed in
refrigerant. Shell and tube type brine and water chillers are mainly of this kind.
23.1.3. Flooded and Dry Type
The third classification is flooded type and dry type. Evaporator is said to
be flooded type if liquid refrigerant covers the entire heat transfer surface. This
type of evaporator uses a float type of expansion valve. An evaporator is called
dry type when a portion of the evaporator is used for superheating the refrigerant
vapour after its evaporation.

23.2. Natural Convection type evaporator coils

These are mainly used in domestic refrigerators and cold storages. When
used in cold storages, long lengths of bare or finned pipes are mounted near the
ceiling or along the high sidewalls of the cold storages. The refrigerant from
expansion valve is fed to these tubes. The liquid refrigerant evaporates inside the
tubes and cools the air whose density increases. The high-density air flows
downwards through the product in the cold storage. The air becomes warm by
the time it reaches the floor as heat is transferred from the product to air. Some
free area like a passage is provided for warm air to rise up. The same passage is
used for loading and unloading the product into the cold storage.
The advantages of such natural convection coils are that the coil takes no
floor space and it also requires low maintenance cost. It can operate for long
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 3

periods without defrosting the ice formed on it and it does not require special skill
to fabricate it. Defrosting can be done easily (e.g. by scraping) even when the
plant is running. These are usually welded at site. However, the disadvantage is
that natural convection heat transfer coefficient is very small hence very long
lengths are required which may cause excessive refrigerant side pressure drops
unless parallel paths are used. The large length requires a larger quantity of
refrigerant than the forced convection coils. The large quantity of refrigerant
increases the time required for defrosting, since before the defrosting can start all
the liquid refrigerant has to be pumped out of the evaporator tubes. The pressure
balancing also takes long time if the system trips or is to be restarted after load
shedding. Natural convection coils are very useful when low air velocities and
minimum dehumidification of the product is required. Household refrigerators,
display cases, walk-in-coolers, reach-in refrigerators and obviously large cold
storages are few of its applications. Sufficient space should be provided between
the evaporator and ceiling to permit the air circulation over the top of the coil.
Baffles are provided to separate the warm air and cold air plumes. Single ceiling
mounted is used for rooms of width less than 2.5 m. For rooms with larger widths
more evaporator coils are used. The refrigerant tubes are made of steel or
copper. Steel tubes are used for ammonia and in large capacity systems.

23.3. Flooded Evaporator

This is typically used in large ammonia systems. The refrigerant enters a
surge drum through a float type expansion valve. The compressor directly draws
the flash vapour formed during expansion. This vapour does not take part in
refrigeration hence its removal makes the evaporator more compact and
pressured drop due to this is also avoided. The liquid refrigerant enters the
evaporator from the bottom of the surge drum. This boils inside the tubes as heat
is absorbed. The mixture of liquid and vapour bubbles rises up along the
evaporator tubes. The vapour is separated as it enters the surge drum. The
remaining unevaporated liquid circulates again in the tubes along with the
constant supply of liquid refrigerant from the expansion valve. The mass flow rate
in the evaporator tubes is f.m where mis the mass flow rate through the
expansion valve and to the compressor. The term f is called recirculation factor.
Let x4 be the quality of mixture after the expansion valve and x be the quality of
mixture after boiling in the tubes as shown in Figure 23.1. In steady state mass
flow rate from expansion valve is same as the mass flow rate to the compressor
hence mass conservation gives
x4.m + x.f.m = m
f= (1-x4)

(23.1)
(23 2)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 4

For x4 = x = 0.25, for example, the circulation factor is 3, that is mass flow
rate through the evaporator is three times that through the compressor. Since,
liquid refrigerant is in contact with whole of evaporator surface, the refrigerant
side heat transfer coefficient will be very high. Sometimes a liquid refrigerant
pump may also be used to further increase the heat transfer coefficient. The
lubricating oil tends to accumulate in the flooded evaporator hence an effective
oil separator must be used immediately after the compressor.
To compressor
Float valve
Surge
tank

m
Flooded type evaporator
Fig.23.1. Schematic of a flooded evaporator

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 5

23.4. Shell-and-Tube Liquid Chillers

The shell-and-tube type evaporators are very efficient and require
minimum floor space and headspace. These are easy to maintain, hence they
are very widely used in medium to large capacity refrigeration systems. The
shell-and-tube evaporators can be either dry type or flooded type. As the name
implies, a shell-and-tube evaporator consists of a shell and a large number of
straight tubes arranged parallel to each other. In dry expansion type, the
refrigerant flows through the tubes while in flooded type the refrigerant is in the
shell. A pump circulates the chilled water or brine. The shell diameters range
from 150 mm to 1.5 m. The number of tubes may be less than 50 to several
thousands and length may be between 1.5 m to 6 m. Steel tubes are used with
ammonia while copper tubes are used with freons. Ammonia has a very high
heat transfer coefficient while freons have rather poor heat transfer coefficient
hence fins are used on the refrigerant side. Dry expansion type uses fins inside
the tubes while flooded type uses fins outside the tube. Dry-expansion type
require less charge of refrigerant and have positive lubricating oil return. These
are used for small and medium capacity refrigeration plants with capacity ranging
from 2 TR to 350 TR. The flooded type evaporators are available in larger
capacities ranging from 10 TR to thousands of TR.
23.4.1 Flooded Type Shell-and-Tube Evaporator
Figure 23.2 shows a flooded type of shell and tube type liquid chiller
where the liquid (usually brine or water) to be chilled flows through the tubes in
double pass just like that in shell and tube condenser. The refrigerant is fed
through a float valve, which maintains a constant level of liquid refrigerant in the
shell. The shell is not filled entirely with tubes as shown in the end view of Fig.
27.2. This is done to maintain liquid refrigerant level below the top of the shell so
that liquid droplets settle down due to gravity and are not carried by the vapour
leaving the shell. If the shell is completely filled with tubes, then a surge drum is
provided after the evaporator to collect the liquid refrigerant.
Shell-and-tube evaporators can be either single pass type or multipass
type. In multipass type, the chilled liquid changes direction in the heads. Shelland-tube evaporators are available in vertical design also. Compared to
horizontal type, vertical shell-and-tube type evaporators require less floor area.
The chilled water enters from the top and flows downwards due to gravity and is
then taken to a pump, which circulates it to the refrigeration load. At the inlet to
tubes at the top a special arrangement introduces swirling action to increase the
heat transfer coefficient.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 6

Refrigerant out

Refrigerant in

VIE
/////////////////////////T7
M2^

///////////////////

Water

Lxv

Fig.23.2: Schematic
of a flooded type shell-andK^

Water
in

tube evaporator 23.4.2.

Direct expansion type,
Shell-and-Tube
Evaporator
Figure 23.3 shows a liquid
chiller with refrigerant flowing through
the tubes and water flowing through
the shell. A thermostatic expansion
valve feeds the refrigerant into the
tubes through the cover on the left. It
may flow in several passes through
the dividers in the covers of the shell
on either side. The liquid to be chilled
flows through the shell around the
baffles. The presence of baffles turns
the flow around creating some
turbulence thereby increasing the
heat transfer coefficient. Baffles also
prevent the short-circuiting of the fluid
flowing in the shell. This evaporator is
of dry type since some of the tubes
superheat the vapour. To maintain
the chilled liquid velocity so as to
obtain good heat transfer coefficient,

th
e
len
gt
h
an
d
th
e
sp
aci
ng
of
se
g
m
en
tal
ba
ffle
s
is
va
rie
d.
Wi
del
y
sp
ac
ed
ba
ffle
s
ar
e
us
ed
wh
en
th
e
flo
w
rat
e
is
hig
h
or
th

e liquid viscosity is high. The number

of passes on the refrigerant side are
decided by the partitions on the
heads on the two sides of the heat
exchanger. Some times more than
one circuit is also provided. Changing
the heads can change the number of
passes. It depends upon the chiller
load and the refrigerant velocity to be
maintained in the heat exchanger.

23.5. Shell-and-Coil type

evaporator
These are of smaller capacity
than the shell and tube chillers.
These are made of one or more
spiral shaped bare tube coils
enclosed in a welded steel shell. It is
usually dry-expansion type with the
refrigerant flowing in the tube and
chilled liquid in the shell. In some
cases the chiller operates in flooded
mode also with refrigerant in the shell
and chilled water flowing thorough the
spiral tube. The water in the shell
gives a large amount of thermal
storage capacity called hold-up
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 7

capacity. This type is good for small but highly infrequent peak loads. It is used
for cooling drinking water in stainless steel tanks to maintain sanitary conditions.
It is also used in bakeries and photographic laboratories.
When the refrigerant is in the shell that is in flooded mode it is called
instantaneous liquid chiller. This type does not have thermal storage capacity, the
liquid must be instantaneously chilled whenever required. In the event of freeze
up the water freezes in the tube, which causes bursting of the tubes since water
expands upon freezing. When water is in the shell there is enough space for
expansion of water if the freezing occurs. The flooded types are not
recommended for any application where the temperature of chilled liquid may be
below 3oC.

Water inlet

Water outlet

Baffles
Fig.23.3: Schematic of a direct expansion type, Shell-and-Tube evaporator

23.6. Double pipe type evaporator

This consists of two concentric tubes, the refrigerant flows through the
annular passage while the liquid being chilled flows through the inner tube in
counter flow. One design is shown in Fig. 23.4 in which the outer horizontal tubes
are welded to vertical header tubes on either side. The inner tubes pass through
the headers and are connected together by 180 o bends. The refrigerant side is
welded hence there is minimum possibility of leakage of refrigerant. These may
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 8

be used in flooded as well as dry mode. This requires more space than other
designs. Shorter tubes and counter flow gives good heat transfer coefficient. It
has to be insulated from outside since the refrigerant flows in the outer annulus
which may be exposed to surroundings if insulation is not provided.
Refrigerant
inlet
Water J\l inlet

f C

Refrigerant
outlet

Water "C^
outlet \
Fig.23.4: Schematic of a double pipe type evaporator

23.7. Baudelot type evaporators

This type of evaporator consists of a large number of horizontal pipes
stacked one on top of other and connected together to by headers to make single
or multiple circuits. The refrigerant is circulated inside the tubes either in flooded
or dry mode. The liquid to be chilled flows in a thin layer over the outer surface of
the tubes. The liquid flows down by gravity from distributor pipe located on top of
the horizontal tubes as shown in Figure 23.5. The liquid to be chilled is open to
atmosphere, that is, it is at atmospheric pressure and its aeration may take place
during cooling. This is widely used for cooling milk, wine and for chilling water for
carbonation in bottling plants. The liquid can be chilled very close to its freezing
temperature since freezing outside the tubes will not damage the tubes. Another
advantage is that the refrigerant circuit can be split into several parts, which

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 9

permit a part of the cooling done by cold water and then chilling by the refrigerant.

outlet
Fig.23.5: Schematic of a Baudelot type evaporator for chilling of milk

23.8. Direct expansion fin-and-tube type

These evaporators are used for cooling and dehumidifying the air directly
by the refrigerant flowing in the tubes. Similar to fin-and-tube type condensers,
these evaporator consists of coils placed in a number of rows with fins mounted
on it to increase the heat transfer area. Various fin arrangements are used.
Tubes with individual spiral straight fins or crimpled fins welded to it are used in
some applications like ammonia. Plate fins accommodating a number of rows are
used in air conditioning applications with ammonia as well as synthetic
refrigerants such as fluorocarbon based refrigerants.
The liquid refrigerant enters from top through a thermostatic expansion
valve as shown in Fig. 23.6. This arrangement makes the oil return to
compressor better rather than feeding refrigerant from the bottom of the coil.
When evaporator is close to the compressor, a direct expansion coil is used

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 10

since the refrigerant lines are short, refrigerant leakage will be less and pressure
drop is small. If the air-cooling is required away from the compressor, it is
preferable to chill water and pump it to air-cooling coil to reduce the possibility of
refrigerant leakage and excessive refrigerant pressure drop, which reduces the
COP.
norcinf

fcrdni

inlet

/^Z<:
v__
x"~~~

(C
V^__
Refrigerant A
outlet

Fig.23.6: Schematic of a direct expansion fin-and-tube type

The fin spacing is kept large for larger tubes and small for smaller tubes. 50 to
500 fins per meter length of the tube are used in heat exchangers. In
evaporators, the atmospheric water vapour condenses on the fins and tubes
when the metal temperature is lower than dew point temperature. On the other
hand frost may form on the tubes if the surface temperature is less than 0 oC.
Hence for low temperature coils a wide spacing with about 80 to 200 fins per m is
used to avoid restriction of flow passage due to frost formation. In air-conditioning
applications a typical fin spacing of 1.8 mm is used. Addition of fins beyond a
certain value will not increase the capacity of evaporator by restricting the airflow.
The frost layer has a poor thermal conductivity hence it decreases the overall
heat transfer coefficient apart from restricting the flow. Therefore, for applications
in freezers below 0oC, frequent defrosting of the evaporator is required.

23.9. Plate Surface Evaporators

These are also called bonded plate or roll-bond type evaporators. Two flat
sheets of metal (usually aluminum) are embossed in such a manner that when
these are welded together, the embossed portion of the two plates makes a
passage for refrigerant to flow. This type is used in household refrigerators.
Figure 23.7 shows the schematic of a roll-bond type evaporator.
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 11

In another type of plate surface evaporator, a serpentine tube is placed

between two metal plates such that plates press on to the tube. The edges of the
plates are welded together. The space between the plates is either filled with a
eutectic solution or evacuated. The vacuum between the plates and atmospheric
pressure outside, presses the plates on to the refrigerant carrying tubes making a
very good contact between them. If eutectic solution is filled into the void space,
this also makes a good thermal contact between refrigerant carrying tubes and
the plates. Further, it provides an additional thermal storage capacity during offcycle and load shedding to maintain a uniform temperature. These evaporators
are commonly used in refrigerated trucks. Figure 23.8 shows an embedded tube,
plate surface evaporator.

<--------------------

Refrigerant out

)\

|A

)l

----------------------

Refrigerant in

/^^^w
Section A A

rr_^

rzs^\

rzsr^\

t-

\|:
Refrigerant
in

Refrigerant out

Kim^mimm^mKim^mmim^mmmKimi
Section A-A

\
Version 1 E M u E t e , cI t IiT c Kharagpur 12
solution

Fig.23.8: Schematic of an embedded tube, plate surface evaporator

23.10. Plate type evaporators:

Fig.23.9:1 Schematic
Version
ME, IIT Kharagpur
of a plate13
type evaporator

Plate type evaporators are used when a close temperature approach (0.5
K or less) between the boiling refrigerant and the fluid being chilled is required.
These evaporators are widely used in dairy plants for chilling milk, in breweries
for chilling beer. These evaporators consist of a series of plates (normally made
of stainless steel) between which alternately the milk or beer to be cooled and
refrigerant flow in counterflow direction. The overall heat transfer coefficient of
these plate type evaporators is very high (as high as 4500 W/m 2K in case of
ammonia/water and 3000 W/m2.K in case of R 22/water). In addition they also
require very less refrigerant inventory for the same capacity (about 10 percent or
even less than that of shell-and-tube type evaporators). Another important
advantage when used in dairy plants and breweries is that, it is very easy to
clean the evaporator and assemble it back as and when required. The capacity
can be increased or decreased very easily by adding or removing plates. Hence
these evaporators are finding widespread use in a variety of applications. Figure
23.9 shows the schematic of a plate type evaporator.

23.11. Thermal design of evaporators:

Compared to the design of refrigerant condensers, the design of
refrigerant evaporators is more complex. The complexity arises due to the
following factors:
1033.
On the refrigerant side, the heat transfer coefficient varies widely
when evaporation takes place in tubes due to changing flow regimes.
Accurate estimation of heat transfer coefficient is thus difficult
1034.
On the external fluid side, if the external fluid is air (as in air
conditioning and cold storage applications), in addition to sensible heat
transfer, latent heat transfer also takes place as moisture in air may
condense or even freeze on the evaporator surface. The evaporator
surface may be partly dry and partly wet, depending upon the operating
conditions. Hence, mass transfer has to be considered in the design. If
frost formation due to freezing of moisture takes place, then heat transfer
resistance varies continuously with time.
1035.
The lubricating oil gets separated in the evaporator tubes due to
low miscibility of oil at evaporator temperature and pressure. The
separation of oil affects both heat transfer and pressure drop
characteristics. A minimum refrigerant velocity must be provided for oil
carry over in direct expansion type evaporators.
1036.
Compared to condenser, refrigerant pressure drop in evaporator is
more critical as it has significant influence on the performance of the
refrigeration system. Hence, multiple circuits may have to be used in large
systems to reduce pressure drops. Refrigerant velocity has to be
optimized taking pressure drop and oil return characteristics into account.
1037.
Under part-load applications, there is a possibility of evaporator
flooding and compressor slugging. This aspect has to be considered at the
time of evaporator design.
Estimation of heat transfer area and overall heat transfer coefficients
For plate fin type evaporators, the expressions of various heat transfer
areas are similar to those given for the air-cooled condensers. The expression for
overall heat transfer coefficient is also similar to that of condenser as long as no
phase change (e.g. moisture condensation or freezing) takes place. However, as
mentioned in air-cooled evaporators the
possibility of moisture
condensing/freezing on the evaporator surface must be considered unlike in
condensers where the heat transfer on airside is only sensible. This requires
simultaneous solution of heat and mass transfer equations on the airside to
arrive at expressions for overall heat transfer coefficient and mean temperature
difference. The efficiency of the fins will also be affected by the presence of
condensed layer of water or a frozen layer of ice. Expressions have been derived
for overall heat transfer coefficient, mean temperature difference and fin
efficiency of fin-and-tube type evaporators in which air undergoes cooling and
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 14

dehumidification. The analysis of cooling and dehumidification coils requires

knowledge of psychrometry and is obviously much more complicated compared
to evaporators in which the external fluid does not undergo phase change. In this
lecture, only the evaporators wherein the external fluid does not undergo any
phase change are considered. Readers should refer to advanced books on
refrigeration for the design aspects of cooling and dehumidifying coils.
Estimation of heat transfer coefficients:
a) Air side heat transfer coefficients in fin-and-tube type evaporators:
If air undergoes only sensible cooling as it flows over the evaporator
surface (i.e., dry evaporator), then the correlations presented for air cooled
condensers for heat transfer coefficients on finned (e.g. Kays & London
correlation) and bare tube surface (e.g. Grimsons correlation) can be used for air
cooled evaporator also. However, if air undergoes cooling and dehumidification,
then analysis will be different and correlations will also be different. These
aspects will be discussed in a later chapter.
b) Liquid side heat transfer coefficients:
Liquid flowing in tubes:
When liquids such as water, brine, milk etc. flow through tubes without
undergoing any phase changes, the correlations presented earlier for
condensers (e.g. Dittus-Boelter, Sieder-Tate) can be used for evaporator also.
Liquid flowing in a shell:
In direct expansion type, shell-and-tube evaporators refrigerant flows
through the tubes, while water or other liquids flow through the shell. Analytical
prediction of single phase heat transfer coefficient on shell side is very complex
due to the complex fluid flow pattern in the presence of tubes and baffles. The
heat transfer coefficient and pressure drop depends not only on the fluid flow rate
and its properties, but also on the arrangement of tubes and baffles in the shell.
Several correlations have been suggested to estimate heat transfer coefficients
and pressure drops on shell side. A typical correlation suggested by Emerson is
given below:
hd

06

03( n

0.14

Nu = = CRed Pr

(23.3)
kf
^w
where constant C depends on the geometry, i.e, on the arrangement of the
tubes, baffles etc.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 15

In the above expression the Reynolds number Red is defined as:

Red =

Gd

(23.4)

where G is the mass velocity which is equal to the mass flow rate divided by the
characteristic flow area (kg/m2.s). From the expression for Nusselt number, it can
be seen that the heat transfer coefficient is proportional to the 0.6 power of the
flow rate as compared to 0.8 power for flow through tubes.
The pressure drop of liquid flowing through the shell is also difficult to
predict analytically. Normally the pressure drop on shell side is obtained from
experimental measurements and is provided in the form of tables and charts for a
particular type of shell-and-tube heat exchanger.
c) Boiling Heat Transfer Coefficients:
Pool boiling vs flow boiling:
In evaporators boiling of refrigerant may take place outside tubes or inside
tubes. When boiling takes place outside the tubes it is called as pool boiling. In
pool boiling it is assumed that the tube or the heat transfer surface is immersed
in a pool of liquid, which is at its saturation temperature. Figure 23.10 shows a
typical boiling curve, which shows the variation of surface heat flux with
temperature difference between the surface and the saturation temperature for
different regimes. For a small temperature difference, the heat transfer from the
surface is by free convection (regime 1). As the temperature difference
increases, bubbles start to form at selected nucleation sites. The bubbles grow in
size as heat is transferred and the evaporation of liquid occurs. After achieving a
critical diameter depending upon the surface tension and other factors, the
bubbles get detached from the surface and rise to the free surface where the
vapour inside the bubbles is released. During the detachment process, the
surrounding liquid rushes towards the void created and also during the bubble
motion upwards convection heat transfer increases from its free convection value
at smaller temperature differences. This region is known as individual bubble
regime (regime 2). As the temperature difference increase further, more and
more bubbles are formed and it is the columns of bubbles, which rise up
increasing the heat transfer drastically. This regime is known as column bubble
regime (regime 3).
As the temperature difference increases further, more and more bubbles
are formed, and columns of bubbles rise to the free surface. The heat transfer
rate increases rapidly. As the bubble columns move upwards they entrain some
liquid also that rises upwards to the free surface. The vapour in the bubbles
escapes at the free surface but the liquid returns to the bottom because of its
lower temperature and higher density. A given surface can accommodate only a
few such rising columns of bubbles and descending columns of relatively colder
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 16

liquid. Hence, the heat transfer rate cannot increase beyond a certain value. It
becomes maximum at some temperature difference. The maximum heat transfer
rate is called critical heat transfer rate.
If temperature difference is increased beyond this value, then a blanket of
film forms around the heat transfer surface. This vapour film offers conduction
thermal resistance; as a result the heat transfer rate decreases. The film however
is unstable and may break at times. This regime is called unstable film regime
(regime 4).
If temperature difference is increased further it becomes so high that
radiation heat transfer becomes very important and heat transfer rate increases
because of radiation component. This regime is called stable film boiling regime
(regime 5). After this, due to the high surface temperature, radiation effects
become important (regime 6).
As the temperature difference is increased, the temperature of the surface
tw continues to increase since conduction thermal resistance of the film becomes
larger as the film thickness increases. All the heat from the surface cannot be
transferred across the film and surface temperature increases. Ultimately the
temperature may approach the melting point of the metal and severe accident
may occur (if these are the tubes of nuclear power plant). This point is referred to
as burnout point.

Critical
heat flux

(Ts-Tf) Fig.23.10: A typical pool

boiling curve showing different regimes, 1 to 6

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 17

Boiling inside tubes is called as flow boiling. Flow boiling consists of nucleate
boiling as well as convective heat transfer. As the liquid evaporates, more vapour
is formed which increases the average velocity and the convective heat transfer
rate. The flow pattern changes continuously as boiling takes place along the
tube. For example in a horizontal tube, the flow can be stratified flow, wavy flow,
slug flow, annular flow, mist flow etc. The flow pattern will be different if it takes
place in an inclined or vertical tube. The heat transfer coefficient depends upon
fraction of vapour present and parameters of forced convection heat transfer. In
general, prediction of boiling heat transfer coefficients during flow boiling is much
more complex than pool boiling. However, a large number of empirical
correlations have been developed over the years to predict boiling heat transfer
coefficients for both pool as well as flow boiling conditions. The following are
some of the well-known correlations:
Nucleate Pool Boiling
Normally evaporators are designed to operate in nucleate pool boiling
regime as the heat transfer coefficients obtained in this regime are stable and are
very high. Various studies show that in nucleate pool boiling region, the heat
transfer coefficient is proportional to the 2 or 3 power of temperature difference
between the surface and the boiling fluid, i.e.,
to 3

hnb =C(Ts -Tf)

(23.5)

the value of C depends upon type of the surface etc. The exponent can be as
high as 25 on specially treated surfaces for enhancement of boiling.
Rohsenows Correlation for nucleate pool boiling: This correlation is
applicable to clean surfaces and is relatively independent of shape and
orientation of the surface.

T
Q/A
Pr
s
f

Hf
g(Pf -pg)
fg \

0.33

(23.6)

Cf ATx =
fg

where:
Cf = Specific heat of liquid
ATx = Temperature difference between surface and fluid
hfg = Latent heat of vaporization
a = Surface Tension
Csf = constant which depends on the surface-fluid combination, e.g. 0.013 for
halocarbons boiling on copper surface
Q/A = heat flux
^ = Viscosity of fluid
Pf, pg = Density of saturated liquid and saturated vapour, respectively
Prf = Prandtl number of saturated liquid
s = constant, 1 for water and 1.7 for halocarbons

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 18

All the fluid properties are calculated at saturation temperature corresponding

to the local pressure.
Forced Convection Boiling inside tubes:
Rohsenow and Griffith suggested that flow boiling in tubes be analyzed as
a combination of pool boiling and forced convection. The total heat flux (q total) is
the sum of heat flux due to nucleate pool boiling (q nb) and forced convection (qfc),
i.e.,
qtotal = qnb + qfc

(23.7)

Heat flux due to nucleate pool boiling (q nb) is calculated by using nucleate
pool boiling correlations and heat flux due to forced convection (qf c) can be
calculated by using standard forced convection correlations, such as DittusBoelter correlation.
Some of the other correlations suggested for flow boiling are given below:
(a) Bo Pierres Correlation : This correlation gives average heat transfer
coefficients and is valid for inlet quality xinlet -0.1 to 0.16.
Nuf =0.0009 ( Re2f Kf Y2

: for incomplete evaporation and xexit <0.9

Nuf =0.0082 ( Re2f Kf | 2

:forcomplete evaporation

(23.8)

In the above equations, Ref and Nuf are liquid Reynolds and Nusselt
numbers, respectively. Kf is the load factor, defined as:
Kf =
(23.9)

Axhfg
L
where L is the length of the tube.

(b) Chaddock-Brunemanns Correlation:

hTP =1.91hL [Bo. 104 +1.5(1/X tt ) 067 \
Q/A
Bo = Boiling Number =-------------hfg(m/A)
Xtt = -------I, x J

(Pg/Pf)

(M'f/M-g)

(23.10)

Lockhart- MartinelliParameter

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 19

(c) Jung and Radermacher Correlation:

hTP =N1hsa+F1hL

(23.11)
where
hL is
the
single
phase
(liquid)
heat
transfe
r
coeffici
ent as
predict
ed by
DittusBoelte
r
equati
on,
and hsa
is
given
by:

0.5

0.7 13
45

hsa = 207
kN 0
bd
.
1

.
= 2
bdl,k
2 9
T.
0 +
2a
bd
0 1
=
. /
0.0
1 X
14
X t
6
t
t
B------------------------------0
)
t
[g(Pf-Pg)
B
N1 o
= F
40 1
48 =
Xt1t 2
- .
22
B3
o1. 7

0.581
Pr 0.533

Uf

: for
Xtt <1 :

:p = 35o

for 1 <
Xtt < 5

(23.
12)

In nucleate boiling, the heat

transfer
coefficient
is
mainly
dependent on the heat flux and is a
very weak function of mass flux.
However, in flow boiling the heat
transfer coefficient depends mainly on
mass flux and is a weak function of
heat flux. Studies show that for boiling
inside tubes, initially when the vapour
fraction (quality) is low, then nucleate
boiling is dominant and the heat
transfer coefficient depends on heat
flux. However, as the fluid flows
through the tubes, the vapour fraction
increases progressively due to heat
transfer and when it exceeds a critical
vapour fraction, convective boiling
becomes dominant. As mentioned, in
this region, the heat transfer
coefficient depends mainly on the
mass flux and is almost independent
of heat flux. As a whole, the heat
transfer coefficient due to boiling
increases initially reaches a peak and
then drops towards the end of the
tube. Thus accurate modeling of
evaporators requires estimation of
heat transfer coefficient along the
length taking into account the complex
physics.
Horizontal vs Vertical tubes: As
mentioned before, boiling heat transfer
coefficients in vertical columns will be
different from that in a horizontal tube.
In a vertical tube, due to hydrostatic
head, the evaporation temperature
increases, which in turn reduces the
driving temperature difference, and
hence, the heat transfer rate.
Effect of oil in evaporator: Studies on
R 12 evaporators show that the boiling
heat transfer coefficient inside tubes

increa
ses
initially
with oil
conce
ntratio
n upto
a
value
of
about
4
percen
t and
then
decrea
ses.
The
initial
increa
se is
attribut
ed to
the
greate
r
wettin
g
of
the
tube
surfac
e due
to the
presen
ce of
oil.
The
subse
quent
reducti
on is
due to
the
rapid
increa
se in
viscosi
ty
of
the
refriger
ant-oil
mixtur

e as oil is more viscous than

refrigerant. For the estimation of heat
transfer
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 20

coefficient, the presence of oil may be neglected as long as its concentration is

low (less than 10 percent).

23.12. Enhancement of heat transfer coefficients:

The overall heat transfer coefficient of a heat exchanger depends mainly
on the component having the largest resistance to heat transfer. When air is used
an external fluid, the heat transfer coefficient on air side is small, hence to obtain
high overall heat transfer coefficient, the air side heat transfer is augmented by
adding fins. When liquid water is used as the external fluid, then the heat transfer
coefficient on water side will be high, when the flow is turbulent (which normally
is the case). Hence to further improve overall heat transfer coefficient, it may
become necessary to enhance heat transfer on the refrigerant side. This is
especially the case with synthetic refrigerants. The enhancement of boiling heat
transfer coefficient can be achieved in several ways such as: increasing the
refrigerant velocity by using an external pump in flooded evaporators, by using
integrally finned tubes, by using treated surfaces, by using turbulence promoters
etc. These methods improve the refrigerant side heat transfer coefficient and
hence the overall heat transfer coefficient significantly leading to compact and
lightweight evaporators. However, it should be kept in mind that normally any
heat transfer enhancement technique imposes penalty by means of increased
pressure drop, hence it is essential to optimize the design so that the total cost is
minimized.

23.13.

Wilsons plot:

The concept of Wilsons plot was introduced way back in 1915 by Wilson
to determine individual heat transfer coefficients from the experimental data on
heat transfer characteristics of heat exchangers. This is sometimes applied to
determine the condensing or boiling heat transfer coefficients of condensers and
evaporators respectively.
For example, in a water-cooled condenser a number of tests are
conducted by varying the flow rate of water and measuring the inlet and outlet
water temperatures. The total heat transfer rate is determined from
Q = mwCpw (two -twi) = UoAo(LMTD)

(23.13)

From measured temperatures, LMTD is calculated. From the heat transfer rate
Q, area of the heat exchanger (A o) and LMTD, the overall heat transfer coefficient
for a given flow rate is calculated using Eqn.(23.13).

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 21

Then the overall heat transfer coefficient Uo is equated to the following

equation (for clean tubes are clean with negligible scale formation)
1
Uo

Ao
=+
hi Ai

Ao ri ln(do /di)
Ai

kw

1
+

(23.14)
ho

If the water temperature does not vary very significantly during these tests,
then properties of water remain nearly constant. Since during these tests no
changes are made on the refrigerant side, it can be assumed that the heat
transfer resistance offered by the wall separating the two fluids and the heat
transfer coefficient on refrigerant side (ho) remains constant for all values of water
flow rates. Hence, the above equation can be written as:
1

C
=C1 +

Uo

(23.15)
hi

where C1 and C2 are empirical constants that depend on the specifications of the
heat exchangers and operating conditions, and the expressions for these can be
obtained by equating Eqns.(23.14) and (23.15).
If flow on water side is turbulent and the variation in thermal properties are
negligible, then the waterside heat transfer coefficient can be written as:
hi = C3.V0.8

(23.16)

Substituting the expression in Eqn.(23.15), we obtain:

1C4
=C1 +
Uo

0.8

(23.17)

Then a plot of 1/Uo vs 1/V0.8 will be a straight line as shown in Fig. 23.11.
This plot is extrapolated to infinitely high velocity, i.e., where 1/V0.8 tends to zero.
When 1/V0.8 tends to zero, from Eqn.(23.16) 1/hi also tends to zero. Hence, the
intercept on the ordinate is C 1 (=1/ho + Aori ln (d0/di)/(Ai kw)). The thermal
conduction resistance of the tube can be calculated and then the condensation
heat transfer coefficient ho can be calculated. As shown in the figure the term Ao/
(Aihi) can also be obtained from the figure at any value of velocity.
0.65

It should be kept in mind that it is an approximation since drawing a

straight line and extending it to meet y-axis means that condensation heat
transfer remains constant as the velocity tends to infinity. Wilson plot can be
applied to air-cooled condensers also. In this case as the heat transfer coefficient
for air over finned surface varies as V 0.65, hence in this case 1/Uo will have to be
plotted versus V

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 22

1/Uo
(1/ho)+
(do/di)ril
n(do/di)/k
w

1/V0.8
Fig.
23.1
1:
Con
cept
of
Wils
ons
plot

Que
stion
s
and
ans
wers
:
1.
Which
of the

followi
ng
state
ments
are
TRUE
?
1038.
In
conve
ntional
refrige
rators,
the
evapo
rators
are
kept
at the
top as
these
are
natura
l
conve
ction
type
1039.
Natur
al
conve
ction
type
coils
are
useful

when
the
latent
loads
are
very
high
1040.
Defros
ting of
evapo
rators
has to
be
done
more
freque
ntly in
natura
l
conve
ction
type
coils
comp
ared
to
forced
conve
ction
evapo
rator
coils
1041.

Provis
ion of
suffici
ent
free
space
is very
import
ant in
natura
l
conve
ction
type
evapo
rator
coils
Ans.:
a) and
d)

Versio
n1
ME,
IIT
Khara
gpur
23

2. Which of the following statements are TRUE?

1042. Flooded type evaporators are very efficient as the heat transfer coefficient
on refrigerant side is very large
1043. In flooded type evaporators, the refrigerant evaporation rate is equal to the
refrigerant mass flow rate
1044. An oil separator is always required in flooded evaporators as refrigerant
tends to get collected in the evaporator
1045. All of the above
Ans.: a) and c)
3. Which of the following statements are TRUE?
1046. Shell-and-tube evaporators are available in small to very large capacities
1047. In dry expansion type evaporator, refrigerant flows through the shell while
the external fluid flows through the tubes
1048. Normally float valves are used expansion devices for flooded type
evaporators
1049. In shell-and-coil type evaporators, thermal storage can be obtained by
having refrigerant on the shell side
Ans.: a) and c)
4. Which of the following statements are TRUE?
1050. In direct expansion, fin-and-tube type evaporators, the oil return to
compressor is better if refrigerant enters at the bottom of the evaporator and
leaves from the top
1051. For low temperature applications, the fin spacing of evaporator is kept
larger to take care of the frost formation
1052. Double pipe type evaporators are used when close temperature approach
is required
1053. Plate type evaporators are used when close temperature approach is
required
Ans.: b) and d)
5. Thermal design of evaporators is very complex due to:
1054.
1055.
1056.
1057.

Continuous variation of heat transfer coefficient along the length

Possibility of latent heat transfer on the external fluid side also
Presence of lubricating oil affects heat transfer and pressure drop
All of the above

Ans.: d)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 24

6. Which of the following statements are TRUE?

1058. In evaporators using air as an external fluid, fins are frequently required on
the refrigerant side
1059. In evaporators using water as an external fluid, fins may be required on
the refrigerant side to enhance heat transfer
1060. Flooded type evaporators yield higher heat transfer coefficients compared
to direct expansion type evaporators
1061. In general heat transfer enhancement techniques yield more compact heat
exchangers, but may also increase pressure drop
Ans.: b), c) and d)
7. Air enters a direct expansion type, fin-and-tube evaporator at a temperature of
17oC and leaves the evaporator at 11oC. The evaporator operates at a constant
temperature of 7oC and has total refrigerant side area of 12 m 2, while the bare
tube and finned areas on airside are 10 m 2 and 212 m2, respectively. Find the
refrigeration capacity of the evaporator assuming only sensible heat transfer on
airside and counterflow type arrangement. Neglect fouling and resistance offered
by the tube wall. The fin effectiveness for airside is 0.75. The average heat
transfer coefficient on refrigerant and airside are 1700 W/m 2.K and 34 W/m2.K,
respectively.
Ans.: Neglecting fouling and resistance of the tube wall, the value of UA of
evaporator is given by:
1 =

UA

[h(Aff +Ab)]o

1
+
hiAi

Substituting the values of airside and refrigerant heat transfer coefficients (h o and
hi), bare tube (Ab), finned surface (Af) and refrigerant side areas and fin efficiency
(f = 0.75) in the above expression, we obtain:
UA = 4483 W/K
From the values of airside and evaporator temperatures, the LMTD of the
evaporator is given by:

-ln

(17-11)
o
LMTD =------------ = 6.55 C
17 - 7
11- 7 Hence, refrigeration capacity, Qe =

UA.LMTD = 29364 W = 29.364 kW

(Ans.)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 25

8. The following are the values measured on a shell-and-tube ammonia

condenser:
Velocity of water flowing through the tubes, V (m/s)
Overall heat transfer coefficient, Uo (W/m2.K)

1.22
2300

0.61
1570

Water flowed inside the tubes while refrigerant condensed outside the tubes. The
tubes were 51 mm OD and 46 mm ID and had a conductivity of 60 W/m.K. Using
the concept of Wilsons plot, determine the condensing heat transfer coefficient.
What is the value of overall heat transfer coefficient when the velocity of water is
0.244 m/s?
Ans.:
From the data given in the table, the following straight line equation can be
obtained:
1
C
=C1 +
Uo

4
0.8

The values of C1 and C4 for the given data are found to be:
C1 = 1.605 x 10-4 m2.K/W and C4 = 3.223 x 10-4 m1.2.K/W
The constant C1 is equal to:
ro ln(ro /ri )
C1 =

1
+

kw

-4

=1.605x10
ho

Substituting the values of internal and external radii (r i and ro) and the value of
thermal conductivity of the tube kW, we obtain the value of external heat transfer
coefficient (condensation heat transfer coefficient, h o) as:
ho = 8572.9 W/m2.K

(Ans.)

The value of overall heat transfer coefficient Uo when the velocity of water is
0.244 m/s is given by:
1
Uo

=C1 +

C4
V

0.8

=1.605x10

= C1 +C4 = 1.605x10

-4

3.223x10-4

3.223x10
+

0.244

-4

0.8

-3
= 1.1567x10

0.244 Uo = 864.5 W/m2.K

(Ans.)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 26

Lesson
24
Expansion Devices
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 1

The specific objectives of this lecture are to:

1062. Discuss the basic functions of expansion devices used in refrigeration
systems and their classification (Section 24.1)
1063. Discuss the operating principle, concept of balance point, the effect of load
variation, selection of capillary tubes using analytical and graphical methods and
the advantages and disadvantages of capillary tubes (Section 24.2)
1064. Explain the working principle of an automatic expansion valve, its
performance under varying loads and its applications (Section 24.3)
1065. Present a simple analysis for fluid through orifices (Section 24.4)
5. Explain the working principle of a thermostatic expansion valve, its
performance under varying loads, variations available such as cross-charging,
external equalizer and limit charging, advantages and disadvantages of TEVs
(Section 24.5)
1066. Explain the working principle of low-side and high-side float valves
(Section 24.6)
1067. Explain the working principle of an electronic expansion valve (Section
24.7)
1068. Discuss briefly some of the practical problems with expansion devices
(Section 24.8)
At the end of the lecture, the student should be able to:
1069. Explain the basic functions of expansion devices in refrigeration systems
1070. Explain the working principle and salient features of capillary tube,
automatic expansion valve, thermostatic expansion valve, float type expansion
valve and electronic expansion valve
1071. Estimate the required length of capillary tubes using analytical and
graphical methods
1072. Describe advantages, disadvantages and applications of different types of
expansion valves, and
5. Discuss some of the practical problems encountered in the operation of
various types of expansion devices in refrigeration systems

24.1. Introduction
An expansion device is another basic component of a refrigeration
system. The basic functions of an expansion device used in refrigeration systems
are to:
1. Reduce pressure from condenser pressure to evaporator pressure, and
2. Regulate the refrigerant flow from the high-pressure liquid line into the
evaporator at a rate equal to the evaporation rate in the evaporator
Under ideal conditions, the mass flow rate of refrigerant in the system should
be proportional to the cooling load. Sometimes, the product to be cooled is such
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 2

that a constant evaporator temperature has to be maintained. In other cases, it is

desirable that liquid refrigerant should not enter the compressor. In such a case,
the mass flow rate has to be controlled in such a manner that only superheated
vapour leaves the evaporator. Again, an ideal refrigeration system should have
the facility to control it in such a way that the energy requirement is minimum and
the required criterion of temperature and cooling load are satisfied. Some
additional controls to control the capacity of compressor and the space
temperature may be required in addition, so as to minimize the energy
consumption.
The expansion devices used in refrigeration systems can be divided into
fixed opening type or variable opening type. As the name implies, in fixed
opening type the flow area remains fixed, while in variable opening type the flow
area changes with changing mass flow rates. There are basically seven types of
refrigerant expansion devices. These are:
Hand (manual) expansion valves
Capillary Tubes
Orifice
Constant pressure or Automatic Expansion Valve (AEV)
Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TEV)
Float type Expansion Valve
1079.
High Side Float Valve
1080.
Low Side Float Valve
7. Electronic Expansion Valve
1073.
1074.
1075.
1076.
1077.
1078.

Of the above seven types, Capillary tube and orifice belong to the fixed
opening type, while the rest belong to the variable opening type. Of the above
seven types, the hand operated expansion valve is not used when an automatic
control is required. The orifice type expansion is used only in some special
applications. Hence these two are not discussed here.

24.2 Capillary Tube

A capillary tube is a long, narrow tube of constant diameter. The word
capillary is a misnomer since surface tension is not important in refrigeration
application of capillary tubes. Typical tube diameters of refrigerant capillary tubes
range from 0.5 mm to 3 mm and the length ranges from 1.0 m to 6 m.
The pressure reduction in a capillary tube occurs due to the following two
factors:
1. The refrigerant has to overcome the frictional resistance offered by tube
walls. This leads to some pressure drop, and
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 3

2. The liquid refrigerant flashes (evaporates) into mixture of liquid and vapour
as its pressure reduces. The density of vapour is less than that of the
liquid. Hence, the average density of refrigerant decreases as it flows in
the tube. The mass flow rate and tube diameter (hence area) being
constant, the velocity of refrigerant increases since m = pVA. The increase
in velocity or acceleration of the refrigerant also requires pressure drop.
Several combinations of length and bore are available for the same mass flow
rate and pressure drop. However, once a capillary tube of some diameter and
length has been installed in a refrigeration system, the mass flow rate through it
will vary in such a manner that the total pressure drop through it matches with the
pressure difference between condenser and the evaporator. Its mass flow rate is
totally dependent upon the pressure difference across it; it cannot adjust itself to
variation of load effectively.
24.2.1. Balance Point of Compressor and Capillary Tube
The compressor and the capillary tube, under steady state must arrive at
some suction and discharge pressures, which allows the same mass flow rate
through the compressor and the capillary tube. This state is called the balance
point. Condenser and evaporator pressures are saturation pressures at
corresponding condenser and evaporator temperatures. Figure 24.1 shows the
variation of mass flow rate with evaporator pressure through the compressor and
the capillary tube for three values of condenser temperatures namely, 30, 40 and
50oC.
The mass flow rate through the compressor decreases if the pressure ratio
increases since the volumetric efficiency of the compressor decreases with the
increase of pressure ratio. The pressure ratio increases when either the
evaporator pressure decreases or the condenser pressure increases. Hence, the
mass flow rate through the compressor decreases with increase in condenser
pressure and/or with decrease in evaporator pressure.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 4

Tc=50oC

Tc=40oC
Tc=30oC

mr

Compressor
Capillary

Tc=30oC

Tc=40oC
Tc=50oC

Fig.24.
1:
Va
riat
ion
of
ref
rig
er
ant
ma
ss
flo
w
rat
e
thr
ou
gh
co
mp
res
sor
an
d
ca
pill
ary
tub
e
wit
h
ev
ap
or
ato
r
an
d
co
nd
en
ser
te

a
p
il
l
a
r
y

m
p
er
at
ur
e
s
(A
,B
&
C
ar
e
th
e
b
al
a
n
c
e
p
oi
nt
s)

t
u
b
e
i
s
t
h
e
d
r
i
v
i
n
g
h
e
p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
di
ff
e
r
e
n
c
e
a
cr
o
s
s
th
e
c

f
o
r
c
e
f
o
r
t
h
e
r
e
f
r
i
g
e
r
a
n
t
t
o

flow
thro
ugh
it,
hen
ce
mas
s
flow
rate
thro
ugh
the
capil
lary
tube
incr
eas
es
with
incr
eas
e in
pres
sure
diffe
renc
e
acro
ss it.
Thu
s
the
mas
s
flow
rate
thro
ugh
the
capil
lary
tube
incr
eas
es
as
the
con
den
ser
pres
sure
incr
eas

e
s
a
n
d
/
o
r
t
h
e
e
v
a
p
o
r
a
t
o
r
p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
d
e
c
r
e
a
s
e
s
.
T
h
e
v
a
r
i
a
t
i
o
n

o
f
m
a
s
s
fl
o
w
r
at
e
th
r
o
u
g
h
c
a
pi
ll
a
ry
tu
b
e
is
s
h
o
w
n
fo
r
th
r
e
e
c
o
n
d
e
n
s
e
r
te
m
p
e
r
at
u

r
e
s
,
n
a
m
e
l
y
,
3
0
,
4
0
a
n
d
5
0
o

C
i
n
F
i
g
u
r
e
2
4
.
1
.
T
h
i
s
i
s
t
h
e
o
p

posit
e of
the
effec
t of
pres
sure
s on
the
com
pres
sor
mas
s
flow
rate.
Hen
ce,
for a
give
n
valu
e of
con
den
ser
pres
sure
,
ther
e is
a
defi
nite
valu
e of
eva
pora
tor
pres
sure
at
whic
h
the
mas
s
flow
rate
s
thro
ugh
the
com
pres

s
o
r
a
n
d
t
h
e
e
v
a
p
o
r
a
t
o
r
a
r
e
t
h
e
s
a
m
e
.
T
h
i
s
p
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
i
s
t
h
e

b
al
a
n
c
e
p
oi
nt
th
at
th
e
s
y
st
e
m
w
ill
a
c
q
ui
r
e
in
st
e
a
d
y
st
at
e.
H
e
n
c
e,
fo
r
a
gi
v
e
n
c
o
n
d
e
n
s
e

r
t
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e
,
t
h
e
r
e
i
s
a
d
e
f
i
n
i
t
e
v
a
l
u
e
o
f
e
v
a
p
o
r
a
t
o
r
t
e
m
p

erat
ure
at
whic
h
the
bala
nce
poin
t will
occu
r.
Figu
re
28.1
sho
ws a
set
of
thre
e
bala
nce
poin
ts A,
B
and
C
for
the
thre
e
con
den
ser
tem
pera
ture
s.
The
se
bala
nce
poin
ts
occu
r at
evap
orat
or
tem
pera
ture
s of
Te,A ,

T
e
,
B

a
n
d
T
e
,
C

.
I
t
i
s
o
b
s
e
r
v
e
d
t
h
a
t
t
h
e
e
v
a
p
o
r
a
t
o
r
t
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u

r
e
at
b
al
a
n
c
e
p
oi
nt
in
cr
e
a
s
e
s
w
it
h
in
cr
e
a
s
e
of
c
o
n
d
e
n
s
e
r
te
m
p
e
r
at
u
r
e.
2
4.
2.
2.
E
ff
e

c
t
O
f
l
o
a
d
v
a
r
i
a
t
i
o
n
T
h
e
s
i
t
u
a
t
i
o
n
d
e
s
c
r
i
b
e
d
a
b
o
v
e
i
s
i
n

stea
dy
stat
e.
How
ever
, in
prac
tice
the
refri
gera
tion
load
may
vary
due
to
seve
ral
reas
ons,
such
as
the
vari
atio
n of
ambi
ent
tem
pera
ture
s
etc.
It is
poss
ible
for
the
load
to
incre
ase
or
decr
ease
.
This
vari
atio
n of
load
affec
ts

t
h
e
o
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
o
f
c
o
m
p
r
e
s
s
o
r
a
n
d
c
a
p
il
l
a
r
y
t
u
b
e
a
n
d
a
f
f
e
c
t
s

t
h
e
b
al
a
n
c
e
p
oi
nt
b
et
w
e
e
n
th
e
m
.

Versio
n1
ME,
IIT
Khara
gpur
5

Increase in refrigeration Load:

If the refrigeration load increases, there is a tendency for the evaporator
temperature to increase due to higher rate of evaporation. This situation is shown
in Figure 24.2 for a condenser temperature of 40 oC. The balance point for design
load is shown by point B. As the load increases, the evaporator temperature rises
to C. At point C the mass flow rate through compressor is more than the mass
flow rate through the capillary tube. In such a situation, the compressor will draw
more refrigerant through the evaporator than the capillary tube can supply to it.
This will lead to starving of the evaporator. However, emptying of evaporator
cannot continue indefinitely. The system will take some corrective action since
changes are occurring in the condenser also. Since the capillary tube feeds less
refrigerant to the evaporator, the refrigerant accumulates in the condenser. The
accumulation of refrigerant in the condenser reduces the effective area of the
condenser that is available for heat transfer. The condenser heat transfer rate is
given by, Qc = Uc Ac ( Tc-T ). If heat transfer coefficient Uc and T are constant,
then for same heat transfer rate a decrease in area Ac will lead to a higher
condenser temperature Tc. It is observed from Figure 24.1 that an increase in
condenser temperature leads to a decrease in compressor mass flow rate and an
increase in capillary mass flow rate. Hence, the system will find a new balance
point at higher condenser temperature.
The second possibility is that at lower evaporator mass flow rate, the
Reynolds number decreases and as a result, the heat transfer coefficient of
evaporator decreases. Or in a flooded evaporator, the reduction in mass flow rate
reduces the wetted surface area and the heat transfer coefficient. Therefore,
larger temperature difference is required in the evaporator for the same amount
of heat transfer. This decreases the evaporator temperature and corresponding
pressure to the previous values.
Decrease In refrigeration Load
If the refrigeration load decreases, there is a tendency for the evaporator
temperature to decrease, say to state A as shown in Figure 28.2. In this condition
the capillary tube feeds more refrigerant to the evaporator than the compressor
can remove. This leads to accumulation of liquid refrigerant in the evaporator
causing flooding of the evaporator. This may lead to dangerous consequences if
the liquid refrigerant overflows to the compressor causing slugging of the
compressor. This has to be avoided at all costs; hence the capillary tube based
refrigeration systems use critical charge as a safety measure. Critical charge is a
definite amount of refrigerant that is put into the refrigeration system so that in
the eventuality of all of it accumulating in the evaporator, it will just fill the
evaporator up to its brim and never overflow from the evaporator to compressor.
The flooding of the evaporator is also a transient phenomenon, it cannot continue
indefinitely. The system has to take some corrective action. Since the capillary
tube feeds more refrigerant from the condenser, the liquid seal at the condenser-

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 6

exit breaks and some vapour enters the capillary tube. The vapour has a very
small density compared to the liquid; as a result the mass flow rate through the
capillary tube decreases drastically. This situation is shown in Figure 28.2. This is
not desirable since the refrigeration effect decreases and the COP also
decreases. Hence, attempts are made in all the refrigeration plants to subcool
the refrigerant before entry to the expansion device. A vapour to liquid subcooling
heat exchanger is usually employed, wherein the low temperature refrigerant
vapour leaving the evaporator subcools the liquid leaving the condenser.

Compressor
Capillary

Fig.24.2: Effect of load variation on capillary tube based refrigeration

systems. B: Design point; A: At low load; C: At high load
24.2.3. Selection of Capillary Tube
For any new system, the diameter and the length of capillary tube have to
be selected by the designer such that the compressor and the capillary tube
achieve the balanced point at the desired evaporator temperature. There are
analytical and graphical methods to select the capillary tube. The fine-tuning of
the length is finally done by cut-and-try method. A tube longer than the design
(calculated) value is installed with the expected result that evaporating
temperature will be lower than expected. The tube is shortened until the desired
balance point is achieved. This is done for mass production. If a single system is
to be designed then tube of slightly shorter length than the design length is
chosen. The tube will usually result in higher temperature than the design value.
The tube is pinched at a few spots to obtain the required pressure and
temperature.
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 7

Analytical Method
The analysis of flow through a capillary tube is one of the interesting
problems that illustrate how a simple one-dimensional analysis yields good
results. In a capillary tube the flow is actually compressible, three-dimensional
and two-phase flow with heat transfer and thermodynamic meta-stable state at
the inlet of the tube. However, in the simplified analysis, the flow is assumed to
be steady, one-dimensional and in single phase or a homogenous mixture. Onedimensional flow means that the velocity does not change in the radial direction
of the tube. Homogeneous means annular flow or plug flow model etc. or not
considered for the two-phase flow. Figure 28.3 shows a small section of a vertical
capillary tube with momentum and pressure at two ends of an elemental control
volume.

P+ (3P/3Y)Ay

pV.V+pV(5V/5Y)Ay

Ay
g

w X-

X.

pV.V

Fig.24.3: A small section of a capillary tube considered for analysis

Applying mass and momentum conservation for a control volume shown in
Fig. 24.3, we get:
Mass Conservation:
3(pV) . pVA+AyA -pVA = 0
<3y

(24.1)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 8

5(pV)
dy

.
=0.0 .'. pV = constant

Momentum Conservation:
The momentum theorem is applied to the control volume. According to this,
[Momentum]out - [Momentum]in = Total forces on control volume
r.

*dV .

, .

dp A

R.

nR [pVV + pV Ay] - %R [pVV ] = - %R Ay - pavggftRAy - 27t/?Jyzw (24.2)

dy
dy
At the face y + zly, Taylor series expansion has been used for pressure and
momentum and only the first order terms have been retained. The second order
terms with second derivatives and higher order terms have been neglected. If the
above equation is divided by %R2Ay and limit Ay^> 0 is taken; then all the higher
order terms will tend to zero if these were included since these will have Ay or its
higher power of Ay multiplying them. Also, /^avg will tend to p since the control
volume will shrink to the bottom face of the control volume where p is defined.
Further, neglecting the effect of gravity, which is very small, we obtain:
dp
Tw
1<9V
pV = - 2
(24.3)
dy
dy
R
The wall shear stress may be written in terms of friction factor. In fluid flow
through pipes the pressure decreases due to shear stress. This will be referred to
as frictional pressure drop and a subscript f will be used with it and it will be
written in terms of friction factor. The Darcys friction factor is for fully developed
flow in a pipe. In fully developed flow the velocity does not change in the flow
direction. In case of a capillary tube it increases along the length. Still it is good
approximation to approximate the shear stress term by friction factor. For fully
developed flow the left hand side of Equation (28.3) is zero, hence the frictional
pressure drop Apf may be obtained from the following equation:
Tw =

R Apf /( 2Ay )

(24.4)

The friction factor is defined as

f Ay V
Apf = p' -------D 2

(24.5)

Substituting Eqn.(28.5) in Eqn.(28.4) we get

Tw

= pf V2 / 8

(24.6)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 9

Substituting for %in Eqn.(28.3) we have:

VdV
dp pfV2
p = - ---------------dy
dy
2D

(24.7)

Mass conservation Eqn.(28.1) indicates that the product pV is constant in the

tube. In fact it is called mass velocity and is denoted by G,
G = pV
We have mass flow rate m = [7rD2/4] pV
.-.pV = m/ A = G = constant

(24.8)

Hence Eqn.(28.7) is rewritten as follows

SV
3p fVG
G = --------------dy
dy
2D

(24.9)

In this equation the term on the left hand side is the acceleration of fluid. The
first term on the right hand side is the pressure drop required to accelerate the
fluid and to overcome the frictional resistance. The second term on the right hand
side is the frictional force acting on the tube wall. The friction factor depends
upon the flow Reynolds number and the wall roughness for the fully developed
flow. For the developing flow it is function of distance along the tube also in
addition to Reynolds number. The flow accelerates along the tube due to vapour
formation, as a result, the Reynolds number increases along the tube. The
velocity and Reynolds number vary in a complex manner along the tube and
these are coupled together. Hence, an exact solution of Eqn.(24.9) is not
possible. To a good approximation the integral of product f V, that is, If V dy can
be calculated by assuming average value of the product f V over a small length
AL of the capillary tube.
Accordingly, integrating Equation (24.9) over a small length AL of the capillary
tube we obtain
G AV = -Ap -[fV]mean GAL/2D
(24.10)
Ap = G AV + [G / 2D] [f V]mean AL

(24.11)

Where, AV = Vi+1 - Vi and Ap = pi+1 - pi Ap is

negative since pi > pi+1.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 10

Equation (24.11) may be expressed as follows

Ap = Apaccln + Apf

This means that total pressure drop over a length AL is the sum of that required
for acceleration and that required to overcome frictional resistance.
For laminar flow the effect of wall roughness in negligible and friction factor is
given by
f = 64/Re
(24.12)
For turbulent flow the friction factor increases with increase in roughness
ratio. Moodys chart gives the variation of friction factor with Reynolds numbers
for various roughness ratios. A number of empirical expressions are also
available for friction factor in standard books on Fluid Mechanics. One such
expression for the smooth pipe, known as Blasius Correlation is as follows:
f = 0.3164 Re 0 2 5 0.32 Re 0 2 5 : for Re < 10 5

(24.13)

The solution procedure for Eqn.(24.11) as suggested by Hopkins and Copper

and Brisken is as follows:
The condenser and evaporator temperatures Tc and Te, the refrigerant and its
mass flow rate are usually specified and the length and bore of capillary tube are
required. Eqn.(24.11) is valid for a small length of the tube. Hence, the tube is
divided into small lengths ALi such that across each incremental length a
temperature drop Ati of say 1 or 2 degrees takes place depending upon the
accuracy of calculation required. The length of the tube ALi for temperature to
drop by say, 1oC is found from Eqn.(24.11). The temperature base is taken for
calculations instead of pressure base since the refrigerant properties are
available on basis of temperature.
1. Assume an appropriate diameter D for the tube. At condenser exit and inlet to
capillary tube point 0 shown in Figure 24.4, say the state is saturated liquid
state hence,
v0 = vf, h0 = hf , juo = jUf and

m is known from thermodynamic cycle calculation for the given cooling capacity.
.-.Re = 4m/(TiDju),
G = m/A = pV = V/v
The constants in Eqn.(24.11) G, G/(2D) and 4m /nD required for solution are then
calculated.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 11

0
1
2
3

h
Fi
g.
2
4.
4:
St
e
pwi
s
e
c
al
c
ul
at
io
n
pr
o
c
e
d
ur
e
fo
r
c
a
pil
la
ry
tu
b
e
le

n
gt
h
o
n
ph
diagra
m
2. At a
inlet 0n
i = 0 .2d
:
5V
Re0 0
=
=
4m/
(izD v
jUo) 0
, f0 G
=
0.32
Re
1081.
At i =
1
in
Figure
10.6: t
1 = tc At1 ,
find
the
satura
tion
press
ure p1
at t 1.
The
satura
tion
proper
ties v1
f , v1g,
h1
f,
h1g
and /
u1
f
and /

W1g
are
obtain
ed at t
1. It is
assu
med
that
the
enthal
py
remai
ns
const
ant
during
expan
sion
as
shown
in
Figure
28.5.
1082.
If x 1 is
the
dryne
ss
fractio
n at i
= 1,
then
h 0 = h 1 = x1h1g
+ (1 - x1) h1f
(24.14)
5.
Find v
1 = x 1
v 1g +
(1 x1)
v1f
Assu
ming

that
viscos
ity of
mixtur
e can
be
taken
as
weight
ed
sum
of
viscos
ity of
satura
ted
liquid
and
vapou
r we
get,
/W1
=x
1H1
g +
(1 x 1)
/W1
f

(
T
z
D
/
w
1

)
,

f
1

R
e
1

0
.
3

4
m
/

R
e

V
0

p
=
p0

p1

V
1

v
1
G

A
V

Versio
n1
ME,
IIT
Khara
gpur
12

[fV]mean = [ f0 V0 + f1 V1 ]/2

Hence, from Eqn.(24.11) the incremental length of capillary tube for the first step,
AL1 is,
-Ap-GAV
AL1 ------------------------(G/2D) (fV)mean
1083. For the next section i = 2 : t2 = t 1 - At2 , find the saturation pressure p2 at t2.
The saturation properties v2f, v2g, h2f, h2g and /u2f and /u2g are obtained at
temperature t2.
1084. Assuming the enthalpy to remain constant, that is h2 = h1 = h0, the quality x2
is found and steps 4 and 5 are repeated to find the incremental length AL2.
Steps 4 and 5 are repeated for all the intervals up to evaporator
temperature and all the incremental lengths are summed up to find the total
length of the capillary tube.
It is observed from Eqn.(24.11) that the total pressure drop is the sum of
pressure drops due to acceleration that is, Apaccln = G AV and the pressure drop
due to friction, that is, Apf = [G/2D] [fV]mean AL. It may so happen under some
conditions that after a few steps of calculation, the total pressure drop required
for a segment may become less than the pressure drop required for acceleration
alone, Ap < Apaccln. The increment length AL for this segment will turn out to be
negative which has no meaning. This condition occurs when the velocity of
refrigerant has reached the velocity of sound (sonic velocity). This condition is
called choked flow condition. The velocity of fluid cannot exceed the velocity of
sound in a tube of constant diameter, hence the calculation cannot proceed any
further. The flow is said to be choked-flow and the mass flow rate through the
tube has reached its maximum value for the selected tube diameter. For a
capillary tube of constant diameter, choked flow condition represents the
minimum suction pressure that can be achieved. If further pressure drop is
required a tube of larger diameter should be chosen in which the velocity of
sound occurs at larger length.
Figure 24.5 shows the variation mass flow rate with suction pressure for
fixed condenser pressure. The mass flow rate through the capillary tube
increases as the evaporator pressure decreases. However at a pressure of p* the
flow is choked. If the choking occurs at some interior point of the tube, the length
of the tube from this point to the exit will offer frictional resistance to the flow and
the pressure must decrease to overcome this. The pressure however cannot
decrease since the flow is choked. Hence, adjustment in the inlet conditions
occurs and the mass flow rate is reduced so that the flow will (always) be choked
at the exit of the tube with reduced mass flow rate. This is typical of compressible
sonic flow where upstream influence occurs; otherwise the downstream pressure
decides the mass flow rate.
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 13

At fixed Tc
Choked flow
mr
Pe

Te or Pe

Fig.24.5: Variation mass flow rate with suction pressure for fixed condenser
pressure
Shortcomings of the above analysis
It is assumed in the above analysis that the expansion is a constant
enthalpy process. This is strictly not true inside a capillary tube since there is a
large change in kinetic energy due to change in velocity along the length due to
flashing of refrigerant liquid. In fact kinetic energy increases at a very fast rate as
the velocity becomes sonic and the flow becomes choked. First law of
thermodynamics indicates that in absence of heat transfer, work done and
change in potential energy for a system in steady state, the sum of enthalpy and
the kinetic energy must remain constant. Hence, if the kinetic energy increases
the enthalpy must decrease, as a result the quality of the refrigerant will be lower
than calculated by assuming constant enthalpy. The actual state of refrigerant in
a constant diameter adiabatic tube is represented by Fanno line, which is shown
in Fig.24.6 on h-s diagram along with the saturation curve. Fanno line is the
solution of steady, compressible adiabatic flow with friction through a tube of
constant diameter.
It is observed that in the early part of the capillary tube, the constant
enthalpy line does not deviate very much from the Fanno line. In the latter part,
the deviation from the Fanno line increases. Most of the length of the capillary
tube happens to be in the latter portion where quality and velocity changes are
very significant; hence constant enthalpy approximation may introduce significant
error.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 14

Fanno Line

Saturation
curve

*
Fi
g.
24
.6:
Fa
nn
o
lin
e
for
ca
pil
lar
y
tu
be
on
hs
di
ag
ra
m

Poi
nt A on the
Fanno line
is the point
where the
entropy is
maximum.
This point
correspon
ds
to
choked
flow
condition.
Pressure
cannot
drop
below this
value

since
it will
requir
e
a
decre
ase in
entrop
y
under
adiab
atic
conditi
on,
which
is not
possib
le in a
real
syste
m.
This
would
mean
violati
on of
secon
d law
of
therm
odyna
mics.
Modifi
ed
Proce
dure
I
t
is
obser
ved
that
the
Kineti
c
energ
y
chang
es
signifi
cantly

in
the
latter part
of
the
capillary
tube.
In
step 4 of
the
calculation
procedure
enthalpy
was
assumed
to
be
constant.
To
improve
upon
it,
the quality
is
calculated
by
considerin
g energy
balance,
that is, the
sum
of
enthalpy
and
kinetic
energy is
assumed
to remain
constant.
The
quality of
the
mixture is
not found
from Eqn.
(24.14).
Instead,
sum
of
enthalpy
and
kinetic
energy is
taken as
constant.
For
the
first
segment

we
get
h

2
(

Substitutin
g for h1
and v1 in
terms of
quality x1
and
properties
at
saturation,
we get
x1h
1g +
(1

x1)
h1f
+
G2
[x1
v1g
+
(1

x1)
v1f ]
2
/2
=
h0
+
Vo2/
2,
or
h
1f

x1h1fg +
G2 [v1f
+ x1v1fg
]2 /2 =
h0 +
Vo2/2,
or x12
[v1fg2
G2/2] +

x1[
G2
v1f
v1fg
+
h1fg
]+
(h1f

h0)
+
(G2
/2)
v1f2
Vo2
/2
=0

Versio
n1
ME,
IIT
Khara
gpur
15

This is a quadratic equation for x1 that can be solved to find x1. The
positive root of this equation is taken as the value of x1. The enthalpy is usually
given in kJ/kg and velocity in m/s, hence to make the equation dimensionally
consistent, the enthalpy is multiplied by 1000, that is,
x12[v1fg2 G2/2]+x1[G2v1f v1fg+1000h1fg]+1000(h1f h0)+(G2/2)v1f2-Vo2/2 =0 (24.16)
The remaining part of the procedure from step 5 to 6 remains the same.
For all subsequent steps, the quality is calculated from Eqn.(24.1).
If the entry state of refrigerant to the capillary tube is subcooled, then
length required for the pressure to drop from the condenser pressure to the
saturated state (which occurs at an intermediate pressure) is calculated and is
added to the length required to reduce the pressure from the intermediate
saturated pressure to the final evaporator pressure. Calculation of the length for
the first part (i.e., in the subcooled liquid region) can be done in a single step as
there is no change of phase. For this single phase region, the enthalpy can be
assumed to be constant as the change in kinetic energy is negligible. Thus from
the known inlet enthalpy corresponding to the subcooled state at condenser
pressure, drawing an isenthalpic line, gives the intermediate saturation pressure.
For the two-phase region, the above procedure has to be used with the inlet
conditions corresponding to the saturated intermediate pressure.
Graphical Procedure
A graphical procedure for capillary tube selection has been presented in
ASHRAE Handbook. A representative Figure 24.7 gives the mass flow rate of
refrigerant through capillary tube at various inlet pressures, sub-cooling and
dryness fraction through a capillary tube of 1.63 mm diameter and 2.03 m length.
The companion Figure 24.8 gives the flow correction factor for diameters and
lengths different from that used in Fig.24.8. The mass flow rate for any diameter
di and length Lc is given by:
mdi,Lc

= m1.63 mm, 2.03 m.

(24.17)

These plots are for choked flow conditions. Corrections for non-choked
flow conditions are given in ASHRAE Handbook.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 16

xi = 0.05 xi
= 0.10
di = 1.63 mm
Lc= 2.03 m
10oC subcooling

mr

5oC subcooling
Pinlet
= Pc
*

Fig.24.7: Variation of
refrigerant mass flow rate
with inlet state for the
standard
capillary tube (Choked
flow condition)
di=3 mm
di=2.5Nmm

10
*
0.2
Lcapillary

Fig.24.8: Variation of flow

correction factor with
capillary tube length and
dia
met
er
(Ch
oke
d
flow
con
ditio
n)

Versio
n1
ME,
IIT
Khara
gpur
17

24.2.4. Advantages and disadvantages of capillary tubes

Some of the advantages of a capillary tube are:
1085.
It is inexpensive.
1086.
It does not have any moving parts hence it does not require
maintenance
1087.
Capillary tube provides an open connection between condenser
and the evaporator hence during off-cycle, pressure equalization occurs
between condenser and evaporator. This reduces the starting torque
requirement of the motor since the motor starts with same pressure on the
two sides of the compressor. Hence, a motor with low starting torque
(squirrel cage Induction motor) can be used.
1088.
Ideal for hermetic compressor based systems, which are critically
charged and factory assembled.
Some of the disadvantages of the capillary tube are:
1089.
It cannot adjust itself to changing flow conditions in response to
daily and seasonal variation in ambient temperature and load. Hence,
COP is usually low under off design conditions.
1090.
It is susceptible to clogging because of narrow bore of the tube,
hence, utmost care is required at the time of assembly. A filter-drier should
be used ahead of the capillary to prevent entry of moisture or any solid
particles
1091.
During off-cycle liquid refrigerant flows to evaporator because of
pressure difference between condenser and evaporator. The evaporator
may get flooded and the liquid refrigerant may flow to compressor and
damage it when it starts. Therefore critical charge is used in capillary tube
based systems. Further, it is used only with hermetically sealed
compressors where refrigerant does not leak so that critical charge can be
used. Normally an accumulator is provided after the evaporator to prevent
slugging of compressor

24.3. Automatic Expansion Valve (AEV)

An Automatic Expansion Valve (AEV) also known as a constant pressure
expansion valve acts in such a manner so as to maintain a constant pressure
and thereby a constant temperature in the evaporator. The schematic diagram of
the valve is shown in Fig. 24.9. As shown in the figure, the valve consists of an
adjustment spring that can be adjusted to maintain the required temperature in
the evaporator. This exerts force Fs on the top of the diaphragm. The atmospheric
pressure, Po also acts on top of the diaphragm and exerts a force of Fo = Po Ad, Ad
being the area of the diaphragm. The evaporator pressure Pe acts below the
diaphragm. The force due to evaporator pressure is Fe = Pe Ad. The net
downward force Fs + Fo - Fe is fed to the needle by the diaphragm. This net
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 18

force along with the force due to follow-up spring Ffs controls the location of the
needle with respect to the orifice and thereby controls the orifice opening.
Needle
Strainer
i

From condenser

Adjustable screw
Adjustable spring
Diaphragm
To evaporator
orifice Follow-up spring
Fig.24.9: Schematic of an Automatic Expansion Valve
If Fe + Ffs > Fs + Fo the needle will be pushed against the orifice and the valve
will be fully closed.
On the other hand if Fe + Ffs < Fs + Fo, the needle will be away from the orifice
and the valve will be open. Hence the relative magnitude of these forces controls
the mass flow rate through the expansion valve.
The adjustment spring is usually set such that during off-cycle the valve is
closed, that is, the needle is pushed against the orifice. Hence,
Feo

+ Ffso > Fso + Fo

Where, subscript o refers to forces during off cycle. During the off-cycle, the
refrigerant remaining in the evaporator will vaporize but will not be taken out by
the compressor, as a result the evaporator pressure rises during the off-cycle as
shown in Fig.24.10.
When the compressor is started after the off-cycle period, the evaporator
pressure Pe starts decreasing at a very fast rate since valve is closed; refrigerant
is not fed to evaporator while the compressor removes the refrigerant from the
evaporator. This is shown in Fig.24.10. As Pe decreases the force Fe decreases
from Feo to (Feo - Fe). At one stage, the sum Fe + Ffs becomes less than Fs + Fo,

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 19

as a result the needle stand moves downwards (away from the needle stand)
and the valve opens. Under this condition,
(Feo - Fe) + Ffso < Fso + Fo

Pe

Time

Fig.24.10: Variation of evaporator pressure during on- and off-cycles of an

AEV based refrigeration system
When the refrigerant starts to enter the evaporator, the evaporator pressure
does not decrease at the same fast rate as at starting time. Thus, the movement
of the needle stand will slow down as the refrigerant starts entering. As the
needle moves downwards, the adjustment spring elongates, therefore the force
Fs decreases from its off-cycle value of Fs0, the decrease being proportional to
the movement of the needle.
As the needle moves downwards, the follow-up spring is compressed; as a
result, Ffs increases from its off-cycle value. Hence, the final equation may be
written as,
(Feo - AFe) + (Ffso + AFfs) = (Fso - AFs ) + Fo or
Fe + Ffs = Fs + Fo

= constant

(24.18)

The constant is sum of force due to spring force and the atmospheric
pressure, hence it depends upon position of adjustment spring. This will be the

equilibrium position. Then onwards, the valve acts in such a manner that the

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 20

evaporator pressure remains constant as long as the refrigeration load is

constant. At this point, the mass flow rate through the valve is the same as that
through the compressor.
24.3.1. Effect of Load Variation
The mass flow rate through the valve is directly proportional to the
pressure drop through the orifice (PcPe) and the area of the orifice opening
(needle position). At constant condenser pressure the mass flow rate will
decrease if the evaporator pressure pe increases or as the orifice opening
becomes narrower.
Decrease In Load
If the refrigeration load decreases, there is a tendency in the evaporator
for the evaporator temperature to decrease and thereby the evaporator pressure
(saturation pressure) also decreases. This decreases the force Fe. The sum
Fe+Ffs will become less than the sum on right hand side of Equation (28.18) and
the needle stand will be pushed downwards opening the orifice wider. This will
increase the mass flow rate through the valve. This is opposite of the
requirement since at lower load, a lower mass flow rate of the refrigerant is
required. This is the drawback of this valve that it counteracts in an opposite
manner since it tries to keep the evaporator pressure at a constant value. In
Figure 24.11, point A is the normal position of the value and B is the position at
reduced load and wider opening. It is observed that both these are at same
evaporator pressure. The compressor capacity remains the same as at A. The
valve feeds more refrigerant to the evaporator than the compressor can remove
from the evaporator. This causes accumulation of liquid refrigerant in the
evaporator. This is called flooding of the evaporator. The liquid refrigerant may
fill the evaporator and it may overflow to the compressor causing damage to it.
Increase In Load
On the other hand if the refrigeration load increases or the evaporator heat
transfer rate increases, the evaporator temperature and pressure will increase for
a flooded evaporator. This will increase Fe. A look at the schematic diagram
reveals that this will tend to move the needle stand upwards, consequently
making the orifice opening narrower and decreasing the mass flow rate. Again
the valve counteracts in a manner opposite to what is required. This shifts the
operating point from A to point C where the compressor draws out more
refrigerant than that fed by the expansion valve leading to starving of the
evaporator.
The adjustment of evaporator pressure and temperature is carried out by
adjustment spring. An increase in the tension of adjustment spring increases F s

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 21

so that the evaporator pressure at which balance occurs, increases. That is, the
regulated temperature increases.
Compressor -\
\

Flooding
^-Balancedx\
^\Starving\

\^
\% /

mr

/
/

/"'^
Wider opening

\
X

\^HSIormal opening
X

J^Narrow opening

Te

Fig.24.11: Effect of load variation on balance point of the system using AEV
24.3.2. Applications of automatic expansion valve
The automatic expansion valves are used wherever constant temperature is
required, for example, milk chilling units and water coolers where freezing is
disastrous. In air-conditioning systems it is used when humidity control is by DX
coil temperature. Automatic expansion valves are simple in design and are
economical. These are also used in home freezers and small commercial
refrigeration systems where hermetic compressors are used. Normally the usage
is limited to systems of less than 10 TR capacities with critical charge. Critical
charge has to be used since the system using AEV is prone to flooding. Hence,
no receivers are used in these systems. In some valves a diaphragm is used in
place of bellows.

24.4. Flow Rate through orifice

In variable area type expansion devices, such as automatic and
thermostatic expansion valves, the pressure reduction takes place as the fluid
flows through an orifice of varying area. Let A1 and A2 be the areas at the inlet
and the outlet of the orifice where, A1> A2. Let V1 and V2 be the velocities, P1 and
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 22

P2 are the pressures and 1 and 2 be the densities at the inlet and outlet
respectively of the orifice as shown in Figure 24.12.

A1

___i
P2,V2,2
P1,V1,

Fig.24.12: Fluid flow through an orifice

Then assuming steady, incompressible, inviscid flow and neglecting
gravity, Bernoullis equation may be used to write the flow rate through the orifice
as follows.
Mass Conservation:
1V1A1 = 2V2A2
Assuming 1 = 2 we get

(24.19)
V1/ V2 = A2/ A1

Bernoullis Equation:
P1 + V1 = P2 + V2
2 Therefore,

(24.20)
V 1.0 -

P1 - P2 = V2

V
2
=

V
2

1.0 -

A22
1

(24.21
)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 23

Ideal Flow Rate :

2 3

Qideal = A2V2 = A2

Qide
al =
M=
MA2

Defining
1.0
2(P1 -P2)
1

(24.22)

/10-(A2/ A1)

1.0
2
we

get
^1.0- (A2 / A1)

Th
e
actual
flow
throug
h the
orifice
is less
than
ideal
flow
becau
se
viscou
s
effects
are not
includ
ed in
the
above
treatm
ent. An
empiri
cal
coeffici
ent
CD,
called
discha
rge
coeffic
ient is
introdu
ced to
accou
nt for
the
viscou
s
effects
.
J2(P1 -P2)
1
(24.24)
Qa
ctua

=
CD
Qid
l

eal

= CDMA2

4. 25)

Introducing flow coefficient K =

The area of the orifice
CD M
opening
is
usually
2(P1 -P2)
Q controlled to control the
1
a mass flow rate through the
ct expansion
valve. It is
u
observed
that
the mass
al
= flow rate depends upon
K the difference between the
A condenser and evaporator
pressures also. It is
2
curious that single phase
To account for
relations have been given
compressibility another
above while it was shown
empirical constant Y is
that during expansion of
introduced for actual mass
high pressure liquid, the
flow rate. Hence, the mass
refrigerant flashes into a
flow rate is expressed as,
low pressure mixture of
liquid and vapour as it
m
2
=K
flows
through
the
1Y
expansion valve. Actually,
A2
studies show that the
refrigerant remains in a
thermodynamic
metastable liquid state as
it flows through the orifice
of the expansion valve.
That is, it remains a liquid
at a lower pressure and
temperature during its
passage
through
the
orifice. It flashes into a
mixture of liquid and
vapour as soon as it
emerges out of the orifice
of the valve. This kind of
phenomenon has been
observed in the initial
sections of transparent
capillary tubes also.

Version 1 ME, IIT

Kharagpur 24

24.5. Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TEV)

Thermostatic expansion valve is the most versatile expansion valve and is
most commonly used in refrigeration systems. A thermostatic expansion valve
maintains a constant degree of superheat at the exit of evaporator; hence it is
most effective for dry evaporators in preventing the slugging of the compressors
since it does not allow the liquid refrigerant to enter the compressor. The
schematic diagram of the valve is given in Figure 24.13. This consists of a feeler
bulb that is attached to the evaporator exit tube so that it senses the temperature
at the exit of evaporator. The feeler bulb is connected to the top of the bellows by
a capillary tube. The feeler bulb and the narrow tube contain some fluid that is
called power fluid. The power fluid may be the same as the refrigerant in the
refrigeration system, or it may be different. In case it is different from the
refrigerant, then the TEV is called TEV with cross charge. The pressure of the
power fluid Pp is the saturation pressure corresponding to the temperature at the
evaporator exit. If the evaporator temperature is Te and the corresponding
saturation evaporator pressure is Pe, then the purpose of TEV is to maintain a
temperature Te+Ts at the evaporator exit, where Ts is the degree of superheat
required from the TEV. The power fluid senses this temperature Te+Ts by the
feeler bulb and its pressure Pp is the saturation pressure at this temperature. The
force Fp exerted on top of bellows of area Ab due to this pressure is given by:
Fp = Ab Pp

(24.26)

The evaporator pressure is exerted below the bellows. In case the evaporator is
large and has a significant pressure drop, the pressure from evaporator exit is
fed directly to the bottom of the bellows by a narrow tube. This is called pressureequalizing connection. Such a TEV is called TEV with external equalizer,
otherwise it is known as TEV with internal equalizer. The force Fe exerted due to
this pressure Pe on the bottom of the bellows is given by
Fe = Ab Pe

(24.27)

The difference of the two forces Fp and Fe is exerted on top of the needle
stand. There is an adjustment spring below the needle stand that exerts an
upward spring force Fs on the needle stand. In steady state there will be a force
balance on the needle stand, that is,
Fs = Fp - Fe

(24.28)

During off-cycle, the evaporator temperature is same as room temperature

throughout, that is, degree of superheat Ts is zero. If the power fluid is the same
as the refrigerant, then Pp = Pe and Fp = Fe. Therefore any arbitrarily small spring
force Fs acting upwards will push the needle stand against the orifice and keep
the TEV closed. If it is TEV with cross charge or if there is a little degree of

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 25

superheat during off-cycle then for TEV to remain closed during off-cycle, Fs
should be slightly greater than (Fp - Fe).

Capillary tube
Bellows
Screw
Needle
High
Adjustable
pressure^
stand
liquid
spring

Superheated
refrigerant to
compressor
"Suction line
Evaporator

Fig.24.13: Schematic of a Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TEV)

As the compressor is started, the evaporator pressure decreases at a very
fast rate hence the force Fe decreases at a very fast rate. This happens since
TEV is closed and no refrigerant is fed to evaporator while compressors draws
out refrigerant at a very fast rate and tries to evacuate the evaporator. The force
Fp does not change during this period since the evaporator temperature does not
change. Hence, the difference Fp-Fe, increases as the compressor runs for some
time after starting. At one point this difference becomes greater than the spring
force Fs and pushes the needle stand downwards opening the orifice. The valve
is said to open up. Since a finite downward force is required to open the valve, a
minimum degree of superheat is required for a finite mass flow rate.
As the refrigerant enters the evaporator it arrests the fast rate of decrease of
evaporator pressure. The movement of needle stand also slows down. The
spring, however gets compressed as the needle stand moves downward to open
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 26

the orifice. If Fs0 is the spring force in the rest position, that is, off-cycle, then
during open valve position
Fs = Fs0 + Fs
Eventually, the needle stand reaches a position such that,
Fs = Fp - Fe = Ab ( Pp Pe)

(24.29)

That is, Fp is greater than Fe or Pp is greater than Pe. The pressure Pp and Pe
are saturation pressures at temperature (Te + Ts) and Te respectively. Hence, for
a given setting force Fs of the spring, TEV maintains the difference between Fp
and Fe or the degree of superheat Ts constant.
Ts (Fp - Fe)
Fs

(24.30)

This is irrespective of the level of Pe, that is, evaporator pressure or

temperature, although degree of superheat may be slightly different at different
evaporator temperatures for same spring force, Fs. It will be an ideal case if the
degree of superheat is same at all evaporator temperatures for a given spring
force.
24.5.1. Effect of Load Variation
If the load on the plant increases, the evaporation rate of liquid refrigerant
increases, the area available for superheating the vapour increases. As the
degree of superheat increases, pressure of power fluid Pp increases, the needle
stand is pushed down and the mass flow rate of refrigerant increases. This is the
ideal case. The evaporation rate of refrigerant is proportional to the load and the
mass flow rate supplied through the expansion valve is also proportional to the
load.
On the other hand, if the load on the plant decreases, the evaporation rate
of refrigerant decreases, as a result the degree of superheat decreases. The
thermostatic expansion valve reacts in such a way so as to reduce the mass flow
rate through it. The flow rate of refrigerant in this valve is proportional to the
evaporation rate of refrigerant in the evaporator. Hence, this valve always
establishes balanced flow condition of flow between compressor and itself.
24.5.2. TEV with cross charge
Figure 24.14 shows the saturated vapour line with pressure along the
ordinate. The difference between Pp and Pe is proportional to the spring force, Fs
and their corresponding projection from the saturated vapour line is the degree of
superheat given by a set of Pp and Pe. The figure shows three sets of Pp and Pe
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 27

for the same spring force at three evaporator temperatures say 40oC, -20oC and
5oC. It is observed that at location A, the degree of superheat is very large
whereas at location C the degree of superheat is very small for the same spring
force setting proportional to (PpPe). This would not have been the case if the
saturated vapour line was a straight line. It is observed that if the spring is set for
say a superheat of 10oC at 40oC evaporator temperature, the degree of
superheat will become almost zero at higher temperature (Fig.24.14). As a result;
when the plant is started at warm temperature, there is a possibility of flooding of
evaporator. If degree of superheat is set to avoid flooding at say 5 oC, then at the
design point of say 40 oC, the superheat will be very large and it will starve the
evaporator. This can be corrected if a fluid different from refrigerant is used in the
feeler bulb as power fluid. Such a TEV is called TEV with cross charge. Figure
24.15 shows the saturated vapour line for the power fluid as well as the
refrigerant in the system. The projection for Pp is taken from the saturation line for
power fluid and it shows the temperature at the exit of the evaporator. The power
fluid is such that at any temperature it has lower saturation pressure than that of
the refrigerant in the system, so that as the evaporator temperature increases the
degree of superheat increases. The projection for Pe is taken from the saturation
line of refrigerant and it indicates the evaporator temperature. It is observed that
for the two different locations A and B, the degree of superheat is almost same
for all evaporator temperatures. Hence cross charge helps in maintaining the
same degree of superheat at all evaporator temperatures. Cross-charged valves
perform satisfactorily in a narrow range of temperatures that must be specified
while ordering a valve.

P
Pp
bar
0.3

Pp
Pe
Pe
Pp

bar
0.3
3K
bar
0.3

A -40oC

Te

"

B
-20oC

C 5oC

Fig.24.14: Vapour pressure curve of refrigerant and power fluid

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 28

 ATs,
A

Power fluid

Refrigerant

Ps

Ps
A
T

24.15: Vapour pressure

c
u
r
v
e
s
o
f
r
e
f
r
i
g
e
r
a
n
t

a
n
d
p
o
w
e
r
f
l
u
i
d
(
c
r
o
s
s
c
h
a
r
g
e
d
T
E
V
)
24.5.3
. TEV
with
Exter
nal
Press
ure
Equal
izer
Th
e
press
ure

drop
of the
refrige
rant is
quite
signifi
cant in
large
evapo
rators,
for
exam
ple in
direct
expan
sion
coils
with a
single
long
tube.
Therm
ostatic
expan
sion
valve
maint
ains
Fp
Fe =
Ab(Pp
P e)
at
a
consta
nt
value
equal
to
spring
force.
The
pressu
re Pp
is the
satura
tion
pressu
re at
(Te +
Ts)

while
Pe is
satura
tion
press
ure at
Te. In
a
large
evapo
rator,
due to
press
ure
drop
Pe,
the
pressu
re at
exit is
say,
Pe
Pe
and
corres
pondin
g
satura
tion
tempe
rature
at exit
of
evapo
rator
is TeTe.
The
super
heat
Ts
corres
ponds
to
evapo
rator
press
ure Pe
and
tempe

rature
TE.
Theref
ore,
effecti
ve
super
heat
at
evapo
rator
exit is
Ts +
Te.
This
may
beco
me
very
large
and
may
result
in low
COP
and
lower
volum
etric
efficie
ncy of
compr
essor.
To
correc
t
for
this,
TEV is
provid
ed
with a
tappin
g,
which
feeds
the
press
ure Pe
- Pe
from

evapo
rator
exit to
the
botto
m of
bellow
s. This
will
result
in
a
degre
e
of
super
heat
equal
to the
set
value
Ts. A
TEV
with
this
provisi
on is
called
TEV
with
Extern
al
Press
ure
Equali
zer. In
this
TEV a
stuffin
g box
is
provid
ed
betwe
en
pushpi
ns
and
the
valve
body
so

that
evapo
rator
inlet
press
ure is
not
comm
unicat
ed to
the
botto
m of
bellow
s.
Figure
24.16
shows
a TEV
with
an
extern
al
equali
zer
arrang
ement
with
press
ure
tappin
g.

Versio
n1
ME,
IIT
Khara
gpur
29

Pressure tapping

TEV

3
J

C
C

j
Evaporator
'

Feeler
bulb
--------------

Fig.24.16: A Thermostatic Expansion Valve with an external equalizer

In any case a large evaporator pressure drop leads to a lower COP; hence a
number of parallel paths or circuits are provided in the evaporator. The refrigerant
is fed to these paths by a single TEV fitted with a distributor. In such a case, it is
recommended that external pressure equalizer be used and care taken to ensure
that all the paths are symmetric and have the same length.
24.5.4. Fade-out point and pressure limiting characteristics of TEV:
The volume of power fluid in the feeler bulb and the connecting tube is
constant, therefore heating and cooling of power fluid is a constant specific
volume process. Figure 24.17 shows the pressure-temperature variation of the
power fluid. The bulb usually has a mixture of liquid and vapour and the pressure
exerted by power fluid corresponds to its saturation pressure. The pressure of the
power fluid increases rather rapidly as its temperature increases since the liquid
evaporates and it has to be accommodated in fixed volume. This sharp rise in
pressure with temperature continues until point B on the saturation curve, where
no liquid is left. Since the pressure of the power fluid does not increase
significantly beyond B, the valve does not open any wider, pp constant, hence
for a fixed spring setting pe remains almost constant and thereby limits the
pressure in the evaporator to Maximum Operating pressure. It was observed in
an earlier lecture on reciprocating compressors that the power requirement of a
reciprocating compressor is maximum at a certain evaporator pressure. The airconditioning systems usually operate near the peak while the refrigeration
systems such as those for ice cream or frozen food operate on the left side of the
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 30

peak power. It was shown that during pull-down, the power requirement would
pass through the power peak if the evaporator were kept fully supplied with
liquid. It is however uneconomical to provide a large electric motor to meet the
power requirement of the peak for small times during pull-down. The power
requirement at the design point on the left leg is small. A motor capable of
providing normal power can be used if the TEV makes the evaporator starve
(reduces mass flow rate to it) and limits the pressure during pull-down when the
load is high. Charging the bulb with limited mass of power fluid so that it is
entirely vapour above a maximum evaporating pressure and temperature
achieves this purpose. If rapid cooling is required from the refrigeration system
then this cannot be used.
The limit charged valve is prone to failure known as reversal. The feeler bulb
has vapour only. The head of the feeler bulb is usually colder than the rest of it,
as a result a small amount of vapor can condense in this region. This colder
region will have lower saturation pressure that will decide the pressure of the
feeler bulb and this low pressure may be insufficient to open the valve. This is
avoided by keeping the head of the valve warm by internal circulation.
i

AP2 T

------------------------7
------------

AP1 .

ATe

^^

ATe

T
Fig.24.17: Variation of power fluid pressure with temperature in a limit
charged TEV

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 31

24.4.5. Advantages, disadvantages and applications of TEV

The advantages of TEV compared to other types of expansion devices are:
1092.
It provides excellent control of refrigeration capacity as the supply
of refrigerant to the evaporator matches the demand
1093.
It ensures that the evaporator operates efficiently by preventing
starving under high load conditions
1094.
It protects the compressor from slugging by ensuring a minimum
degree of superheat under all conditions of load, if properly selected.
However, compared to capillary tubes and AEVs, a TEV is more
expensive and proper precautions should be taken at the installation. For
example, the feeler bulb must always be in good thermal contact with the
refrigerant tube. The feeler bulb should preferably be insulated to reduce the
influence of the ambient air. The bulb should be mounted such that the liquid is
always in contact with the refrigerant tubing for proper control.
The use of TEV depends upon degree of superheat. Hence, in
applications where a close approach between the fluid to be cooled and
evaporator temperature is desired, TEV cannot be used since very small extent
of superheating is available for operation. A counter flow arrangement can be
used to achieve the desired superheat in such a case. Alternately, a subcooling
HEX may be used and the feeler bulb mounted on the vapour exit line of the
HEX. The valves with bellows have longer stroke of the needle, which gives extra
sensitivity compared to diaphragm type of valve. But valves with bellows are
more expensive.
Thermostatic Expansion Valves are normally selected from manufacturers
catalogs. The selection is based on the refrigeration capacity, type of the working
fluid, operating temperature range etc. In practice, the design is different to suit
different requirements such as single evaporators, multi-evaporators etc.

24.6. Float type expansion valves:

Float type expansion valves are normally used with flooded evaporators in
large capacity refrigeration systems. A float type valve opens or closes
depending upon the liquid level as sensed by a buoyant member, called as float.
The float could take the form of a hollow metal or plastic ball, a hollow cylinder or
a pan. Thus the float valve always maintains a constant liquid level in a chamber
called as float chamber. Depending upon the location of the float chamber, a float
type expansion valve can be either a low-side float valve or a high-side float
valve.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 32

24.6.1. Low-side float valves:

A low-side float valve maintains a constant liquid level in a flooded
evaporator or a float chamber attached to the evaporator. When the load on the
system increases, more amount of refrigerant evaporates from the evaporator. As
a result, the refrigerant liquid level in the evaporator or the low-side float chamber
drops momentarily. The float then moves in such a way that the valve opening is
increased and more amount of refrigerant flows into the evaporator to take care
of the increased load and the liquid level is restored. The reverse process occurs
when the load falls, i.e., the float reduces the opening of the valve and less
amount of refrigerant flows into the evaporator to match the reduced load. As
mentioned, these valves are normally used in large capacity systems and
normally a by-pass line with a hand-operated expansion is installed to ensure
system operation in the event of float failure.
24.6.2. High-side float valves:
Figure 24.18 shows the schematic of a high-side float valve. As shown in
the figure, a high-side float valve maintains the liquid level constant in a float
chamber that is connected to the condenser on the high pressure side. When the
load increases, more amount of refrigerant evaporates and condenses. As a
result, the liquid level in the float chamber rises momentarily. The float then
opens the valve more to allow a higher amount of refrigerant flow to cater to the
increased load, as a result the liquid level drops back to the original level. The
reverse happens when the load drops. Since a high-side float valve allows only a
fixed amount of refrigerant on the high pressure side, the bulk of the refrigerant is
stored in the low-pressure side (evaporator). Hence there is a possibility of
flooding of evaporator followed by compressor slugging. However, unlike lowside float valves, a high-side float valve can be used with both flooded as well as
direct expansion type evaporators.
To
evaporator
Float valve

From condenser
High side float
chamber

Fig.24.18: Schematic of a high-side float valve

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 33

24.7. Electronic Type Expansion Valve

The schematic diagram of an electric expansion valve is shown in Fig.24.19.
As shown in the figure, an electronic expansion valve consists of an orifice and a
needle in front it. The needle moves up and down in response to magnitude of
current in the heating element. A small resistance allows more current to flow
through the heater of the expansion valve, as a result the valve opens wider. A
small negative coefficient thermistor is used if superheat control is desired. The
thermistor is placed in series with the heater of the expansion valve. The heater
current depends upon the thermistor resistance that depends upon the
refrigerant condition. Exposure of thermistor to superheated vapour permits
thermistor to selfheat thereby lowering its resistance and increasing the heater
current. This opens the valve wider and increases the mass flow rate of
refrigerant. This process continues until the vapour becomes saturated and some
liquid refrigerant droplets appear. The liquid refrigerant will cool the thermistor
and increase its resistance. Hence in presence of liquid droplets the thermistor
offers a large resistance, which allows a small current to flow through the heater
making the valve opening narrower. The control of this valve is independent of
refrigerant and refrigerant pressure; hence it works in reverse flow direction also.
It is convenient to use it in year-round-air-conditioning systems, which serve as
heat pumps in winter with reverse flow. In another version of it the heater is
replaced by stepper motor, which opens and closes the valve with a great
precision giving a proportional control in response to temperature sensed by an
element.

Refrigerant
EEV
Liquid sensing
out
thermistor

Applied voltage

Needle

Refrigerant
in

Fig.24.19: Schematic of an electronic expansion valve

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 34

24.8. Practical problems in operation of Expansion valves

Certain practical problems are encountered with expansion devices if
either the selection and/or its operation are not proper. An oversized expansion
device will overfeed the refrigerant or hunt (too frequent closing and opening)
and not achieve the balance point. It may allow more refrigerant to flow to the
evaporator and cause flooding and consequent slugging of the compressor with
disastrous results.
A small valve on the other hand passes insufficient quantity of the
refrigerant so that balance point may occur at a lower temperature. The mass
flow rate through the expansion valve depends upon the pressure difference
between condenser and evaporator. The condenser temperature and
consequently the pressure decrease during winter for air-cooled as well as watercooled condensers. As a result, the pressure difference is not sufficient for
balance of flow between compressor and the expansion valve. Hence, the
evaporator temperature and pressure decrease during winter months. This
decreases the volumetric efficiency of the compressor and results in lower mass
flow rate and lower cooling capacity. This may lead to disastrous results for
hermetic compressors, which rely upon refrigerant flow rate for cooling of motor.
At lower mass flow rates hermetic compressor may not be cooled sufficiently and
may burn out. Hence, sometimes the condenser pressure must be kept artificially
high so that adequate supply of refrigerant is achieved. Thus the natural
advantage of lower condenser pressure is lost due to the need for maintaining
the condenser pressure artificially high for proper functioning of the expansion
device.
During summer months, the mass low rate through expansion valve is
large because of large pressure difference. The corrective action taken by the
system is to pass vapour through the expansion valve. This problem can occur if
there is insufficient charge of refrigerant in the system so that the liquid seal at
condenser exit is broken and vapour enters the expansion valve. It can occur
because of higher elevation of expansion valve over the condenser so that there
is static pressure drop to overcome gravitational force to reach the expansion
valve, which causes flashing of refrigerant into a mixture of liquid and vapour.
This is however not advisable since it leads to lower COP. Hence, it is advisable
to use a liquid to vapour subcooling heat exchanger so that the liquid is
subcooled and will not flash before entry into expansion valve.
Since the area available for refrigerant flow in the expansion device is
normally very small, there is a danger of valve blockage due to some impurities
present in the system. Hence, it is essential to use a filter/strainer before the
expansion device, so that only refrigerant flows through the valve and solid
particles, if any, are blocked by the filter/strainer. Normally, the automatic
expansion valve and thermostatic expansion valves consist of in-built
filter/strainers. However, when a capillary tube is used, it is essential to use a
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 35

filter/dryer ahead of the capillary to prevent entry of any solid impurities and/or
unbound water vapour into the capillary tube.

Questions and answers:

1. Which of the following statements are TRUE?
1095. A capillary tube is a variable opening area type expansion device
1096. In a capillary tube pressure drop takes place due to fluid friction
1097. In a capillary tube pressure drop takes place due to fluid acceleration
d) In a capillary tube pressure drop takes place due to fluid friction and
acceleration
Ans.: d)
2. Which of the following statements are TRUE?
1098. The refrigerant mass flow rate through a capillary tube increases as
condenser pressure decreases and evaporator pressure increases
1099. The refrigerant mass flow rate through a capillary tube increases as
condenser pressure increases and evaporator pressure decreases
1100. A capillary tube tends to supply more mass flow rate as refrigeration load
increases
c) A capillary tube tends to supply more mass flow rate as refrigeration load
decreases
Ans.: b) and d)
3. Which of the following statements are TRUE?
1101. A capillary tube based refrigeration system is a critically charged system
1102. A capillary tube based refrigeration system does not use a receiver
1103. Capillary tube based refrigeration systems employ open type compressors
d) In capillary tube based systems, pressure equalization takes place when
compressor is off
Ans.: a), b) and d)
4. Which of the following statements are TRUE?
1104. The mass flow rate through a capillary is maximum under choked flow
conditions
1105. The mass flow rate through a capillary is minimum under choked flow
conditions
1106. The enthalpy of refrigerant remains constant as it flows through a capillary
tube
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 36

d) The enthalpy of refrigerant in a capillary tube decreases in the flow direction

Ans.: a) and d)
5. For a given refrigerant mass flow rate, the required length of a capillary tube
increases as:
1107.
1108.
1109.
1110.

The degree of subcooling at the inlet decreases

The diameter of the capillary tube increases
The diameter of capillary tube decreases
Inlet pressure increases

Ans.: b) and d)
6. Which of the following statements are TRUE?
1111. An automatic expansion valve maintains a constant pressure in the
condenser
1112. An automatic expansion valve maintains a constant pressure in the
evaporator
1113. In an automatic expansion valve, the mass flow rate of refrigerant
increases as the refrigeration load increases
1114. Automatic expansion valve based systems are critically charged
Ans.: b) and d)
7. A thermostatic expansion valve:
1115. Maintains constant evaporator temperature
1116. Maintains a constant degree of superheat
1117. Increases the mass flow rate of refrigerant as the refrigeration load
increases
1118. Prevents slugging of compressor
Ans.: b), c) and d)
8. Which of the following statements are TRUE?
1119. Cross-charging is used in TEV when the pressure difference across the
evaporator is large
1120. Cross-charging is used in TEV when the evaporator has to operate over a
large temperature range
1121. An external equalizer is used when pressure drop in evaporator is large
1122. By limiting the amount of power fluid, the power peak during pull-down
period can be avoided
Ans.: b), c) and d)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 37

9. Which of the following statements are TRUE?

1123.
1124.
1125.
1126.

A float valve maintains a constant level of liquid in the float chamber

A float valve maintains a constant pressure in the float chamber
Low-side float valves are used with direct expansion type evaporators
High-side float valves are used in flooded type evaporators

Ans.: a)
10. Which of the following statements are TRUE?
1127. An electronic expansion valve is bi-directional
1128. In an electronic expansion valve, the refrigerant mass flow rate increases
as the amount of liquid at evaporator exit increases
1129. In an electronic expansion valve, the refrigerant mass flow rate increases
as the temperature of refrigerant at evaporator exit increases
1130. Electronic expansion valves are used in all-year air conditioning systems
Ans.: a), c) and d)
11. A thermostatic expansion valve uses R12 as the power fluid, and is used in a
R12 based system operating at an evaporator temperature of 4 oC. The
adjustable spring is set to offer a resistance equivalent to a pressure of 60 kPa.
What is the degree of superheat?
Ans.: From the properties of R12, at 4oC, the saturation pressure Pe is 350 kPa.
Hence the pressure acting on the bellows/diaphragm due to the power fluid Pp is:
Pp = Pe+Ps = 350 + 60 = 410 kPa The saturation
temperature corresponding to a pressure of 410 kPa is 9oC
Hence the degree of superheat = 9 4 = 5oC (Ans.)
12. For the above thermostat, what is the actual degree of superheat if there is a
pressure drop of 22 kPa in the evaporator?
Ans.: The pressure of refrigerant at the exit of evaporator, Pe,exit is:
Pe,exit = Pe,inlet - Pe = 350 22 = 328 kPa

The saturation temperature corresponding to 328 kPa is: 1.9oC

Hence the actual degree of superheat = 9 1.9 = 7.1oC

(Ans.)

This implies that a TEV with external equalizer is preferable to reduce the
superheat

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 38

13. A straight-charged Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TEV) is designed to

operate at an evaporator temperature of 7oC with a degree of superheat of 5 K. R
134a is the refrigerant used in the refrigeration system as well as the bulb. Find a)
The required spring pressure at the design condition; b) Assuming the spring
pressure to remain constant, find the degree of superheat, if the same TEV
operates at an evaporator temperature of 23oC. The saturation pressure of
R134a can be estimated using Antoines equation given by:
2094

14.41

psat=exp

T 3306

'

where psat is in kPa and T is in K

Ans.: At the design conditions the evaporator temperature is 7oC and degree of
superheat is 5 K.
Hence the required adjustable spring pressure, Ps is:
Ps = Psat(12oC) - Psat(7oC)

Using Antoines equation given above, we find that:

Psat(12oC) = 445.2 kPa, and
Psat(7oC) = 376.2 kPa
Hence, Ps = 445.2 - 376.2 = 69 kPa
If the above TEV is operated at -23oC evaporator temperature, then the pressure
exerted by the power fluid is:
Pp = Psat(-23oC) + Ps = 116.5 + 69 = 185.5 kPa
The corresponding saturation temperature is Tsat(189.5 kPa) = 261 K = -12oC
Hence the degree of superheat at -23oC = -12 - (-23) = 13 K

(Ans.)

This example shows that when the same TEV operates at a lower
evaporator temperature, then the required degree of superheat increases
implying improper utilization of evaporator area. Hence, it is better to use crosscharging (power fluid is another fluid with a higher boiling point than refrigerant).

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 39

Lesson
25
Analysis Of Complete
Vapour Compression
Refrigeration Systems
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 1

The specific objectives of this lecture are to:

1131. Importance of complete vapour compression refrigeration system analysis
and the methods used (Section 25.1)
1132. Performance characteristics of reciprocating compressors (Section 25.2)
1133. Performance characteristics of reciprocating condensers (Section 25.3)
1134. Performance characteristics of evaporators (Section 25.4)
1135. Performance characteristics of expansion valves (Section 25.5)
1136. Performance characteristics of condensing unit (Section 25.6)
1137. Performance characteristics of complete system by matching
characteristics of evaporator and condensing unit (Section 25.7)
1138. Effect of expansion valve on complete system performance (Section 25.8)
1139. Meaning of sensitivity analysis (Section 25.9)
At the end of the lecture, the student should be able to:
1140. Explain the concept of complete system analysis and the characteristics of
graphical and analytical methods
1141. Express or plot the performance characteristics of individual components
such as compressors, condensers and evaporators and enumerate the influence
of operating parameters such as cooling water and brine flow rates, inlet
temperatures etc.
1142. Obtain balance point for a condensing unit by matching the characteristics
of compressors and condensers
1143. Obtain the balance point and characteristics curves for a complete system
assuming an ideal expansion valve
1144. Explain the effect of expansion device on system performance
1145. Explain the meaning of sensitivity analysis and its importance in system
design and optimization

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 2

25.1. Introduction
A basic vapour compression refrigeration system consists of four essential
components, namely compressor, condenser, expansion valve and evaporator.
The individual performance characteristics of these components have been
discussed in earlier lectures. However, in an actual system these components
work in unison. The performance of a complete system is a result of the balance
between these four components. For example, when the heat sink temperature
varies, it affects the performance of the condenser, which in turn, affects the
performance of the expansion device, evaporator and the compressor.
It is seen in Chapter 24 that expansion valve and compressor work in such
a manner that the mass flow rate through the two components is the same at
steady state. The balance point at steady state was obtained by equating the
mass flow rates through these components. This is an example of balancing two
components. Similar procedure can be extended to include the other two
components also, so that a balance point for the entire system can be obtained
by taking into account the individual characteristics. In principle, the balance
point for the system can be obtained either by a graphical method or by an
analytical method.
In graphical method, the performance of two interdependent components
is plotted for the same two variables of common interest. For example, mass flow
rate and evaporator temperature (or pressure) are plotted along y and x axes
respectively for combination of compressor expansion device at constant
condenser temperature. The point of intersection of the two resulting curves will
indicate the conditions at which the mass flow rate and evaporator temperature
will be same for the two components. This point is called the balance point and in
steady-state the combination will achieve these conditions.
In analytical method, the mass flow rate through expansion valve can be
represented by an algebraic equation in terms of evaporator and condenser
temperatures. Similarly, the mass flow rate through a given compressor can also
be represented by an algebraic equation in terms of evaporator and condenser
temperatures by regression analysis of experimental or analytical data. The
balance point of the two components can be obtained by simultaneous solution
of the two algebraic equations.
Since the graphical method uses two-dimensional plots, it considers only
two components at a time while the system analysis by mathematical means can
consider more than two components simultaneously. Further, considering time
variation of parameters in form of differential equations can simulate the dynamic
performance also. Steadystate system analysis will involve simultaneous
solution of algebraic equations.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 3

In this chapter, balance points of condensing unit, compressor-evaporator

combination have been considered for illustration. As a first step the performance
data of industrial components is presented in the form of plots or equations. The
raw data for this purpose can be obtained from the catalogues of manufacturers.
These are plotted either directly or after processing in terms of required
variables.

25.2. Reciprocating compressor performance characteristics:

The power requirement and mass flow rate as function of evaporator
temperature with condenser temperature as a parameter were presented in the
chapter on compressors. For the purpose of balancing, the refrigeration capacity
is required as a function of evaporator and condenser temperatures. This can be
easily determined by considering the refrigeration cycle or from the catalogue
data of the manufacturer. Figure 25.1 shows a theoretical single stage saturated
cycle on T-s chart.

>

Pe

Tc Te

S Fig.25.1: A single

stage, saturated vapour compression refrigeration cycle

For the above cycle, the refrigeration capacity and power input to
compressor are given by:
h1 =m
h4
(25.1)
Q
^

v1

>

(h1 - h4 )=V
.

.
..

where Qe is the refrigeration capacity, mr and V1 are the refrigerant mass

flow rate and volumetric flow rate of refrigerant at compressor inlet, respectively,

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 4

v1 is the specific volume of refrigerant at compressor inlet, and h1 and h4 are the
enthalpies of refrigerant at the exit and inlet of evaporator.
The volumetric flow rate of a reciprocating compressor is given by:
V1

V = n.ry

71D L V N N

(25.2)

where n is the number of cylinders, r| V is the volumetric efficiency, D, L and N are

the bore, stroke and speed (in RPM) of the compressor, respectively.
It is seen in Chapter 19 that at a given condenser temperature the cooling
capacity associated with mass flow rate given by a compressor increases as the
evaporator temperature increases. On the other hand, for a given evaporator
temperature, the cooling capacity decreases with increase in condenser
temperature. These characteristics are shown graphically in Fig.25.2.
Tc = 30oC
Tc = 35oC

Capacity, Qe

Evaporator temperature, Te
Fig.25.2. Variation of refrigeration capacity of a reciprocating compressor with
evaporator and condenser temperatures at a fixed RPM

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 5

The following equation may represent the above trends:

Qe=a1+a2Te+a3Te2+a4Tc+a5Tc2+a6TeTc+a7Te2Tc+a8TeTc2+a9Te2Tc2

(25.3)

where Te and Tc are evaporator and condenser temperatures, respectively. The

a1 to a9 are constants which can be determined by curve fitting the experimental
or manufacturers data using least square method, or by solving nine
simultaneous equations of the type (25.3) for the nine constants ai using nine
values of Qe from given catalogue data for various values of Te and Tc. Similar
expression can be obtained for power input to the compressor.
25.3. Condenser performance characteristics:
Actual representation of condenser performance can be quite complex as
it consists of a de-superheating zone followed by condensing and subcooling
zones. The heat transfer coefficient varies continuously along the length of the
condenser due to the continuously changing state of the refrigerant. Hence a
detailed analysis should include these aspects. However, as discussed in an
earlier chapter on condensers, most of the time a simplified procedure is adopted
by assuming the temperature to remain constant at a saturated temperature
corresponding to the condensing pressure and a constant average condensing
heat transfer coefficient is assumed.
For air-cooled condensers, it is possible to represent the total heat
rejection rate from the condenser as a function of temperature difference and the
overall heat transfer coefficient as follows:
Qc = UcAc(Tc - T)

(25.4)

where, T is the ambient temperature and Tc is the condensing temperature of

refrigerant.
For water-cooled condenser, one has to consider the water flow rate and
inlet water temperature as additional parameters. In this case also a single region
with constant condenser temperature Tc is considered. The heat transfer rate for
a water-cooled condenser is expressed as follows:
Qc = UcAcLMTD = mwCpw(Tw,o ~Tw i)

(25.5)

where mw is the water flow rate, Uc is overall heat transfer coefficient, Tw, and Tw,o
are the inlet and outlet water temperatures respectively. The log mean
temperature difference of condenser LMTDc is expressed as follows:

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 6

LMTDc= T w,o T w,i

J Tc - Tw,i I
lT-Tw,o|

(25.6)

From Eqns.(25.5) and (25.6) it can easily be shown that:

-

U c Ac

Two = Tc -(Tc -Tw ,i)e ^

mw pw

-Tc-(Tc-Tw ,i)e

(25.6)

NTU

f NTU is the Number

of Transfer Units equal to UcAc /mw Cpw
v
The matching or the determination of balance point requires that its
characteristics be represented in the same form as done for compressor, that is,
cooling capacity vs. evaporator temperature. The condenser by itself does not
give cooling capacity. One finds out the condensation rate of liquid refrigerant
from the heat rejection capacity of condenser. The condensate rate multiplied by
refrigeration capacity gives the cooling capacity. Hence from the given heat
rejection capacity Qc, one finds the condensate rate mreffor the SSS cycle as
follows:
mr = Qc/( h2 - h3)

(25.7)

The corresponding refrigeration of the condenser is given by,

Qe = mr (h 1 - h4)

(25.8)

The condenser characteristics are shown in Fig.25.3 for a fixed value of

mw and Tw,i. It is observed that for a fixed evaporator temperature the capacity is
higher at higher condenser temperature. A higher condenser temperature leads
to a larger value of LMTDc, which in turn gives a larger heat transfer rate and a
larger condensate rate.
Further it is observed that at fixed condenser temperature, the cooling
capacity increases with increase in evaporator temperature. The heat rejection
ratio decreases with increase in evaporator temperature hence less heat
rejection Qc is required per unit cooling capacity, therefore the condensate rate of
condenser can give larger cooling capacity. Figure 25.4 shows the effect of
entering water temperature Tw,i on cooling capacity for various condenser
temperatures. The cooling capacity is zero when the entering water temperature

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 7

is equal to condenser temperature. As the inlet water temperature increases for a

fixed condenser temperature, the LMTD c decreases, which decreases the cooling
capacity. The following algebraic equation representing the curves of Fig. 25.3 at
constant inlet temperature and flow rate of water can represent these
characteristics.
Qe=b1+b2Te+b3Te2+b4Tc+b5Tc2+b6TeTc+b7Te2Tc+b8TeTc2+b9Te2Tc2 (25.9)
Tc = 40oC

Capacity, Qe
Evaporator temperature, Te
Fig.25.3. Condenser performance at fixed water inlet temperature and flow rate

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 8

following equation with a constant G.

Tc= 35oC
Tc= 30oC

Qe =
G(Tc Tw,i )

(
2
5
.
1
0
)

Capacity, Qe

0
25 C
30 C
35oC
40oC
Water inlet
temperature,
o
C
Fig.25.4.
Condenser
performance
with water
inlet
temperature
at fixed flow
rate
o

The
characteristi
cs in Fig.
25.4
are
straight
lines
with
almost
same slope
for all the
condenser
temperature
s.
These
may
be
represented
by
the

Version 1
ME, IIT
Kharagpur
9

25.4. Evaporator Performance

Evaporator is also a heat exchanger just like condenser. For the sake of
illustration, consider an evaporator that is used for chilling a brine. The cooling
capacity of brine chiller is shown in Fig. 25.5 as a function of brine flow rate for
different values of LMTD of evaporator. The brine side heat transfer coefficient h b
increases as the brine flow rate increases as a result, the overall heat transfer
coefficient of the evaporator increases. Figure 25.5 shows that the cooling
capacity increases with flow rate for fixed LMTDe for this reason.

LMTDe = 7oC
LMTDe = 6oC
_^--
Capacity, Qe

^^"^

_____-----------LMTDe = 5oC
^
LMTDe = 4oC

Brine flow rate

Fig.25.5: Evaporator performance with brine flow rate and LMTDe
One can obtain the data for cooling capacity at various brine inlet
temperatures from the characteristics of evaporator as shown in Fig.25.5. For
example, if a plot for brine inlet temperature Tb,i of 10oC is required, then we may
choose an LMTDe of 5oC and read the capacity Qe for the chosen brine flow rate
m b. Then the brine outlet temperature Tb,o is obtained from the equation:
Qe = mb Cpb (Tb,i - Tb,o)

(25.11)

Then the evaporator temperature Te is obtained from the expression for LMTDe:

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 10

LMTDe =

Tb,i

Tb,o

ln[Tb,i -Te
Tb ,o - Te

(25.12)
T
h
e
c
a
p
a
ci
t
y
Q
e

a
n
d
e
v
a
p
o
r
a
t
o
r
t
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e
T
e

a
r
e
d
e
t
e
r
m
i
n
e

d
for
diffe
rent
valu
es
of
LM
TDe
for
a
fixe
d
brin
e
flow
rate
and
brin
e
inlet
tem
per
atur
e of
10o
C.
Fig
ure
25.
6
sho
ws
a
plot
obt
aine
d by
this
met
hod
. In
this
plot
the
brin
e
flow
rate
is
con
stan

t
hence
the
brine
side
heat
transf
er
coeffic
ient is
const
ant. If
the
evapo
ration
heat
transf
er
coeffic
ient
was
also
const
ant
then
overal
l heat
transf
er
coeffic
ient
will
also
be
const
ant
and
these
lines
will be
straig
ht
lines.
The
evapo
ration
heat
transf
er
coeffic
ient
increa

s
e
s
w
it
h
i
n
c
r
e
a
s
e
s
i
n
e
v
a
p
o
r
a
t
o
r
t
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e
h
e
n
c
e
t
h
e
s
e
li
n
e
s

ha
ra
ct
eri
sti
cs
of
ev
ap
or
at

o
10oC inlet temp.,Tb,i
C
Brine
temp. ,Tb,i = 10
15oC
C
o
Brine inlet temp. ,Tb,i = 5 C

Evaporator
or
temperature,
at T
fix
ed
F
bri
i
ne
g
flo
.
w
2
rat
5
e
.
6
:
P
e
r
f
o Version 1
ME, IIT
r
Kharagpur
m
11
a
n
c
e
c

25.5.Expansion valve Characteristics:

The characteristics of expansion valve play an important role in deciding
the conditions achieved by the refrigeration system. It was shown in Chapter 24
that compressor and expansion valve seek an evaporator temperature such that
under steady state conditions, the mass flow rate is same through the
compressor and expansion valve. This was the result under the constraint that
the condenser and evaporator have sufficiently large heat transfer areas and do
not influence the performance of expansion device and compressor. In this
chapter it is assumed that the expansion valve is capable of providing sufficient
mass flow rate at all condenser and evaporator temperatures. This is assumed to
simplify the matching problem. A float type of expansion valve or thermostatic
expansion valve will meet this requirement. If the analysis is being done by
computational method then the valve performance may also be included with
some additional computational effort.

25.6.Condensing unit:
As mentioned before, if graphical procedure is used to find performance
evaluation of various components, then only two components can be considered
at a time. In view of this the first sub-system considered is the condensing unit.
Condensing unit is a combination of compressor and condenser. This unit draws
refrigerant from the evaporator, compresses it in the compressor, condenses it in
the condenser and then feeds the condensed liquid refrigerant to the expansion
valve. It is available off-the-shelf as a packaged unit from the manufacturer with
matched set of compressor, compressor motor and condenser along with
reservoir and controls. This may be air-cooled or water-cooled unit which may be
installed as an outdoor unit.
The performance of condensing unit as function of evaporator temperature
is obtained by combining the cooling capacity versus evaporator temperature
characteristics of compressor and condenser. First we consider cooling capacity
versus evaporator temperature assuming the compressor sped, the temperature
and mass flow rate and entering water to condenser to be constant. This
matching is obtained by superimposing the compressor performance curve given
in Fig.25.2 on the condenser performance given in Fig.25.3 as shown in Fig.25.7.
The intersection of compressor and condenser characteristics is at point A for
30oC condenser temperature. The combination of compressor and condenser will
achieve a cooling capacity and evaporator temperature corresponding to this
point at a condensing temperature of 30 oC. Similarly, points B and C are the
intersections at condenser temperatures of 35 and 40 oC, respectively. These
points are called balance points and the line A-B-C is called the performance
characteristics of the condensing unit.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 12

T
Compressor
Cc=40oC
Condenser
Balance line

Capacity, Qe

Tc=30oC

At fixed compressor speed,

condenser water flow rate and
water inlet temperature

E
v
a
p
o
r
a
t
o
r
t
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e
,
T
e

Fig.25.7: Performance
character
istics of a
condensi
ng unit
as a
function
of
evaporat
or and
condensi
ng
temperat
ures
It is observed that as
the evaporator temperature
decreases, the condensing
temperature
for
the
combination also decreases.
This is explained as follows:
at
lower
evaporator

temperatures
,
the
volumetric
efficiency
and
the
mass
flow
rate through
the
compressor
decreases.
This
decreases
the load on
the
condenser. A
large
condenser
heat transfer
area
is
available for
small mass
flow
rate,
hence
condensatio
n can occur
at
lower
condenser
temperature.
It is also
seen that as
the
evaporator
temperature
decreases,
the
refrigeration
capacity of
the
condensing
unit
also
decreases.
This is due
to the lower
mass
flow
rate through
the
compressor
due to lower
volumetric
efficiency
and
lower
vapour
density
at

compre
ssor
inlet.
F
igure
25.8
shows
the
variatio
n
of
refriger
ation
capacit
y of the
conden
sing
unit with
variatio
n
in
inlet
water
tempera
ture to
the
conden
ser.
This is
obtaine
d
by
superim
position
of
compre
ssor
charact
eristics
of
Fig.25.2
on the
variatio
n
of
conden
ser
perform
ance
with
inlet
water
temper
ature
given in
Fig.25.4

. The two figures are shown

side-by-side. At constant
evaporator temperature of
say, 5oC and condenser
temperature of 30oC, the inlet
water
temperature
corresponding to point D is
required to match the two
components. Points E and F
are the balance points at
condenser temperatures of
35 and 40oC respectively.
Line
DEF
is
the
characteristics
of
the
condensing unit at an
evaporator temperature of
5oC. It is observed that the
cooling capacity decreases
as the inlet water
temperature to condenser
increases.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

13

Tc=30oC
Tc=35oC
Tc=40oC

Qe
T
F
i
g
.
2
5
.
8
:
P
e
r
f
o
r
m
a
n
c
e
o
f
t
h
e
c
o
n
d
e
n
s
i

n
g
u
n
i
t
a
s
a
f
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
o
f
w
a
t
e
r
t
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e
a
t
c
o
n
d
e

n
s
e
r
i
n
l
e
t
T
hese
charact
eristics
can
also be
obtaine
d
by
simulta
neous
solutio
n
of
Eqns.
(25.3)
and
(25.9)
for
consta
nt
water
temper
ature
at
conden
ser
inlet
and
consta
nt
water
flow
rate.
For
exampl
e, we
wish to
find the
conden
ser
temper
ature
and

capacit
y for a
given
evapor
ator
temper
ature
of say
10oC.
An
iterativ
e
proced
ure
may be
devise
d
as
follows:
(
i
)
F
o
r
T
e

=
1
0
o

C
a
s
s
u
m
e
a
c
o
n
d
e

n
s
i
n
g
t
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e
T
c

=
3
5
o

C
(ii)
Find
Qe from Eqn.
(25.3)
(iii)
Substit
ution of
Te
=
o
10 C
and Qe
in Eqn.
(25.9)
will
yield a
quadra
tic
equatio
n
for
Tc. The
value
of Tc is
found
and
checke
d
against

the
assum
ed
value
of
Tc
o
(35 C
being
the first
iterate)
and
iteratio
n
is
continu
ed until
the
calcula
ted
value
matche
s with
the
assum
ed
value
of
conden
ser
temper
ature.

25.7.
Perfor
manc
e of
compl
ete
syste
m conde
nsing
unit
and
evapo
rator:
I
n
steady
state, a

balanc
e
conditi
on
must
prevail
betwee
n
all
the
compo
nents,
that is,
betwee
n
conden
sing
unit
and
evapor
ator
assumi
ng that
the
expans
ion
valve
will
provide
approp
riate
mass
flow
rate.
This
conflue
nce will
repres
ent the
perfor
mance
of
comple
te
singlestage
vapour
compre
ssion
refriger
ation
system

. The
combin
ed
curves
will
also
give
insight
into the
offVersion 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 14

design performance of the system and operational problems. Superimposing

Fig.25.6 for the evaporator characteristics and Fig.25.7 for condensing unit
characteristics yields the balance point of the system. This is shown in Fig.25.9.
The characteristic curve shown in Fig.25.9 is for constant water temperature at
condenser inlet, constant flow rate to the condenser, constant compressor speed
and constant brine temperature at the inlet to the evaporator. The point of
intersection of the two curves gives the refrigeration capacity and the evaporator
Condensing unit

Capacity, Qe
Excess capacity
Evaporator (Brine inlet =
10oC)
Evaporator temperature, Te

Fig.25.9: Performance of the complete system as an intersection of evaporator

and condensing unit characteristics at a brine inlet temperature of 10oC
temperature that the system will achieve.
One can study the response of the system in transient state also by this
figure. In a transient state, say the evaporator temperature is 5 oC. The figure
shows that at this point the condensing unit has a capacity corresponding to point
B while the evaporator has capacity corresponding to a lower value at C. Hence
the condensing unit has excess capacity. The excess capacity will reduce the
temperature of refrigerant and the metallic wall of the evaporator. This will
continue until the balance point of 3oC is reached at point A.
Figure 25.10 shows the effect of brine mass flow rate compared to that at
the balance point. If the brine flow rate is increased, it is observed that cooling
capacity increases to point D. At higher flow rate the overall heat transfer
coefficient increases while (Tb,i-Tb,o) decreases permitting a larger mean
temperature difference between refrigerant and brine. Therefore with increase in
mass flow rate of brine, the cooling capacity increases. The pump power also
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 15

increases for the increased brine mass flow rate. Hence one has to make a
compromise between increased capacity and increased cost of pump power.
Figure 25.10 shows the condition for lower brine flow rate when the heat transfer
coefficient on brine side decreases and temperature difference (T b,i-Tb,o)
increases. This is referred to as starving of evaporator.
Condensing unit
Increased brine flow rate
Design flow rate
Evaporator starving
Capacity, Qe
----------------w

Evaporator temperature,Te Fig.25.10: Influence of

brine flow rate on system cooling capacity

25.8. Effect of expansion valve:

So far we have considered the balance between compressor, condenser
and evaporator assuming that expansion valve can feed sufficient refrigerant to
the evaporator so that heat transfer surface of the evaporator is wetted with
refrigerant. Thermostatic expansion valve meets this requirement. Automatic
expansion valve and capillary tube as observed in Chapter 24, result in a
condition where sufficient quantity of refrigerant could not be supplied to
evaporator. This condition was referred to as starving of evaporator. Starving
reduces the heat transfer coefficient in evaporator since there is not sufficient
refrigerant to wet the heat transfer surface consequently the cooling capacity
reduces. There are other conditions also which may lead to this situation. These
are as follows:

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 16

(i)

Expansion valve is too small,

(ii)

Some vapour is present in the liquid entering the expansion valve, and

(iii)

Pressure difference across the expansion valve is small

If the refrigerant charge in the system is small then condition (ii) is likely to
occur. Also if the frictional pressure drop in the liquid line is large or the valve is
located at higher elevation than condenser then this condition may occur. During
winter months the ambient temperature is low hence in air-cooled condenser the
condenser pressure is low and the difference between evaporator and condenser
pressure is small, as a result the starving condition (iii) is likely to occur. In this
condition the expansion valve does not feed sufficient refrigerant to the
evaporator since the driving force; the pressure difference across the expansion
valve is small. The evaporator pressure also decreases in response to drop in
condenser pressure. The evaporator pressure may become so low that mass
flow rate through compressor may decrease due to lower volumetric efficiency.
Hermetic compressor depends upon the mass flow rate of refrigerant for cooling
on motor and compressor. This may be adversely affected under starved
condition.

25.9. Conclusion:
The methods presented in this chapter are useful when compressor,
condenser, evaporator and expansion valve have been selected and the
performance of combined system is desired. This analysis may not be useful in
selecting the initial equipment. The techniques presented in this chapter are
useful in predicting system performance for off-design conditions like a change in
ambient temperature, condenser inlet water temperature and brine inlet
temperature etc. The power requirement of the compressor has not been given
due emphasis in the analysis. In fact, an equation similar to Eqn. (25.3) may be
written for this also. This can also be found from known values of condenser and
evaporator loads.
An important aspect of refrigeration system performance is the sensitivity
analysis which deals with % change in, say cooling capacity with % change in
capacity of individual components like the compressor size, heat transfer area of
evaporator and condenser etc. This can easily be done by mathematical
simulation using the performance characteristics of the components given by
empirical equations. It has been shown in Stoecker and Jones that compressor
capacity has the dominant effect on system capacity and evaporator is next in
importance. An increase in compressor capacity by 10% has the effect of 6.3%
increase in system capacity. A 10% increase in evaporator gives 2.1% increase
in system capacity, while 10% increase in condenser gives 1.3 % increase in
system capacity. Such a data along with the relative costs of the components can
be used for optimization of the first cost of the system. Table 25.1 taken from
Stoecker and Jones illustrates the results of sensitivity analysis.

Compressor

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 17

Ratio of component capacity to base capacity
Refrigeration % increase
Condenser
Evaporator
capacity, TR

1.0
1.1
1.0
1.0
1.1

1.0
1.0
1.1
1.0
1.1

1.0
1.0
1.0
1.1
1.1

95.6
101.6
96.8
97.6
1.1

6.3
1.3
2.1
10.0

Table 25.1: Results of sensitivity analysis of a vapour compression refrigeration

system (Stoecker and Jones, 1982)

Questions and answers:

1. Which of the following statements are TRUE?
1146. A graphical method generally considers two components at a time for
system analysis
1147. An analytical method can consider more than two components at a time
for system analysis
1148. Use of analytical method requires simultaneous solution of algebraic
equations
1149. All of the above
Ans.: d)
2. Which of the following statements are TRUE?
1150. At a fixed RPM, the cooling capacity of a reciprocating compressor
decreases as the evaporator temperature decreases and condensing
temperature increases
1151. At fixed water inlet temperature and flow rate, the capacity of a condenser
increases as the condensing temperature and evaporator temperature increase
1152. At fixed water flow rate and condensing temperature, the capacity of a
condenser increases as the water inlet temperature increases
1153. At fixed water flow rate and cooling capacity, the condensing temperature
increases as the water inlet temperature increases
Ans.: a), b) and d)
3. Which of the following statements are TRUE?
a) At a fixed evaporator LMTD, the cooling capacity of a brine chilling evaporator
increases with brine flow rate
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur
18

1154. At a constant brine flow rate and a given evaporator temperature, the
cooling capacity of the evaporator increases as the brine temperature at
evaporator inlet increases
1155. At a constant brine flow rate and a given evaporator temperature, the
cooling capacity of the evaporator increases as the brine temperature at
evaporator inlet decreases
1156. For constant cooling capacity and brine flow rate, the evaporator
temperature has to decrease as the brine temperature at the inlet decreases
Ans.: a), b) and d)
4. Which of the following statements are TRUE?
The performance characteristics of a
are obtained by 1157.
condensing unit matching the characteristics of
are obtained by compressor and condenser
1158.
The performance characteristics of a
are obtained by condensing unit matching the characteristics of
evaporator and condenser
The performance characteristics of a
are obtained by 1159.
condensing unit matching the characteristics of
expansion valve and condenser
1160. The performance characteristics of a condensing unit
matching the characteristics of compressor and evaporator
Ans.: a)
5. Which of the following statements are TRUE?
1161. At constant RPM, cooling water flow rate and inlet temperature, the
balance point condensing temperature increases as evaporator temperature
increases
1162. At constant RPM, cooling water flow rate and inlet temperature, the
balance point condensing temperature increases as evaporator temperature
decreases
1163. At constant RPM, cooling water flow rate and inlet temperature, the
cooling capacity at balance point increases as evaporator temperature increases
1164. At constant RPM, cooling water flow rate and inlet temperature, the
cooling capacity at balance point increases as evaporator temperature decreases
Ans.: a) and c)
6. Starving of evaporator followed by reduction cooling capacity occurs when:
1165. The capacity of expansion valve is larger than required
1166. The inlet to the expansion valve is in two-phase region
1167. The expansion valve is located at a higher elevation compared to
condenser
1168. There is a refrigerant leakage in the system
Ans.: b), c) and d)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 19

Lesson
26
Refrigerants
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 1

The specific objectives of this lecture are to:

1169. Discuss the importance of selection of suitable refrigerant in a refrigeration
system (Section 26.1)
1170. Classify refrigerants into primary and secondary, and discuss the important
differences between primary and secondary refrigerants (Section 26.2)
1171. Discuss refrigerant selection criteria based on thermodynamic,
thermophysical, environmental and economic properties (Section 26.3)
1172. Describe the numbering system used for designating refrigerants (Section
26.4)
1173. Present a comparison between different refrigerants (Section 26.5)
At the end of the lecture, the student should be able to:
1174. Explain the importance of refrigerant selection
1175. Differentiate between primary and secondary refrigerants
1176. List the criteria used in selecting refrigerants
4. List important thermodynamic and environmental properties influencing
refrigerant selection
5. Write the chemical formula of a refrigerant from its number
6. Compare different refrigerants and suggest replacements for CFCs and
HCFCs

26.1. Introduction:
The thermodynamic efficiency of a refrigeration system depends mainly on
its operating temperatures. However, important practical issues such as the
system design, size, initial and operating costs, safety, reliability, and
serviceability etc. depend very much on the type of refrigerant selected for a
given application. Due to several environmental issues such as ozone layer
depletion and global warming and their relation to the various refrigerants used,
the selection of suitable refrigerant has become one of the most important issues
in recent times. Replacement of an existing refrigerant by a completely new
refrigerant, for whatever reason, is an expensive proposition as it may call for
several changes in the design and manufacturing of refrigeration systems. Hence
it is very important to understand the issues related to the selection and use of
refrigerants. In principle, any fluid can be used as a refrigerant. Air used in an air
cycle refrigeration system can also be considered as a refrigerant. However, in
this lecture the attention is mainly focused on those fluids that can be used as
refrigerants in vapour compression refrigeration systems only.

26.2. Primary and secondary refrigerants:

Fluids suitable for refrigeration purposes can be classified into primary and
secondary refrigerants. Primary refrigerants are those fluids, which are used
directly as working fluids, for example in vapour compression and vapour
absorption refrigeration systems. When used in compression or absorption
systems, these fluids provide refrigeration by undergoing a phase change
process in the evaporator. As the name implies, secondary refrigerants are those
liquids, which are used for transporting thermal energy from one location to other.
Secondary refrigerants are also known under the name brines or antifreezes. Of
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 2

course, if the operating temperatures are above 0oC, then pure water can also be
used as secondary refrigerant, for example in large air conditioning systems.
Antifreezes or brines are used when refrigeration is required at sub-zero
temperatures. Unlike primary refrigerants, the secondary refrigerants do not
undergo phase change as they transport energy from one location to other. An
important property of a secondary refrigerant is its freezing point. Generally, the
freezing point of a brine will be lower than the freezing point of its constituents.
The temperature at which freezing of a brine takes place its depends on its
concentration. The concentration at which a lowest temperature can be reached
without solidification is called as eutectic point. The commonly used secondary
refrigerants are the solutions of water and ethylene glycol, propylene glycol or
calcium chloride. These solutions are known under the general name of brines.
In this lecture attention is focused on primary refrigerants used mainly in
vapour compression refrigeration systems. As discussed earlier, in an absorption
refrigeration system, a refrigerant and absorbent combination is used as the
working fluid.

26.3. Refrigerant selection criteria:

Selection of refrigerant for a particular application is based on the following
requirements:
i.
ii.
iii.

Thermodynamic and thermo-physical properties

Environmental and safety properties, and
Economics

26.3.1. Thermodynamic and thermo-physical properties:

The requirements are:
a) Suction pressure: At a given evaporator temperature, the saturation pressure
should be above atmospheric for prevention of air or moisture ingress into the
system and ease of leak detection. Higher suction pressure is better as it leads to
smaller compressor displacement
b) Discharge pressure: At a given condenser temperature, the discharge
pressure should be as small as possible to allow light-weight construction of
compressor, condenser etc.
1177. Pressure ratio: Should be as small as possible for high volumetric
efficiency and low power consumption
1178. Latent heat of vaporization: Should be as large as possible so that the
required mass flow rate per unit cooling capacity will be small
The above requirements are somewhat contradictory, as the operating
pressures, temperatures and latent heat of vaporization are related by ClausiusClapeyron Equation:
ln(Psat )=-

hs
+
RT

fg

fg

(26.1)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 3

In the above equation, Psat is the saturation pressure (in atm.) at a temperature
T(in Kelvin), hfg and sfg are enthalpy and entropy of vaporization and R is the gas
constant. Since the change in entropy of vaporization is relatively small, from the
above equation it can be shown that:
hfg
Pc
exp

1
Pe

R ^Te

1
Tcy

(26.2)

In the above equation, Pc and Pe are the condenser and evaporator

pressures, Tc and Te are condenser and evaporator temperatures. From the
above equation, it can be seen that for given condenser and evaporator
temperatures as the latent heat of vaporization increases, the pressure ratio also
increases. Hence a trade-off is required between the latent heat of vaporization
and pressure ratio.
In addition to the above properties; the following properties are also
important:
e) Isentropic index of compression: Should be as small as possible so that the
temperature rise during compression will be small
f) Liquid specific heat: Should be small so that degree of subcooling will be large
leading to smaller amount of flash gas at evaporator inlet
g) Vapour specific heat: Should be large so that the degree of superheating will
be small
h) Thermal conductivity: Thermal conductivity in both liquid as well as vapour
phase should be high for higher heat transfer coefficients
i) Viscosity: Viscosity should be small in both liquid and vapour phases for smaller
frictional pressure drops
The thermodynamic properties are interrelated and mainly depend on
normal boiling point, critical temperature, molecular weight and structure.
The normal boiling point indicates the useful temperature levels as it is
directly related to the operating pressures. A high critical temperature yields
higher COP due to smaller compressor superheat and smaller flash gas losses.
On the other hand since the vapour pressure will be low when critical temperature
is high, the volumetric capacity will be lower for refrigerants with high critical
temperatures. This once again shows a need for trade-off between high COP and
high volumetric capacity. It is observed that for most of the refrigerants the ratio of
normal boiling point to critical temperature is in the range of 0.6 to 0.7. Thus the
normal boiling point is a good indicator of the critical temperature of the
refrigerant.
The important properties such as latent heat of vaporization and specific
heat depend on the molecular weight and structure of the molecule. Troutons
rule shows that the latent heat of vaporization will be high for refrigerants having
lower molecular weight. The specific heat of refrigerant is related to the structure
of the molecule. If specific heat of refrigerant vapour is low then the shape of the
vapour dome will be such that the compression process starting with a saturated
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 4

point terminates in the superheated zone (i.e, compression process will be

dry). However, a small value of vapour specific heat indicates higher degree of
superheat. Since vapour and liquid specific heats are also related, a large value
of vapour specific heat results in a higher value of liquid specific heat, leading to
higher flash gas losses. Studies show that in general the optimum value of molar
vapour specific heat lies in the range of 40 to 100 kJ/kmol.K.
The freezing point of the refrigerant should be lower than the lowest
operating temperature of the cycle to prevent blockage of refrigerant pipelines.
26.3.2. Environmental and safety properties:
Next to thermodynamic and thermophysical properties, the environmental
and safety properties are very important. In fact, at present the environment
friendliness of the refrigerant is a major factor in deciding the usefulness of a
particular refrigerant. The important environmental and safety properties are:
1179. Ozone Depletion Potential (ODP): According to the Montreal protocol, the
ODP of refrigerants should be zero, i.e., they should be non-ozone depleting
substances. Refrigerants having non-zero ODP have either already been
phased-out (e.g. R 11, R 12) or will be phased-out in near-future(e.g. R22). Since
ODP depends mainly on the presence of chlorine or bromine in the molecules,
refrigerants having either chlorine (i.e., CFCs and HCFCs) or bromine cannot be
used under the new regulations
1180. Global Warming Potential (GWP): Refrigerants should have as low a GWP
value as possible to minimize the problem of global warming. Refrigerants with
zero ODP but a high value of GWP (e.g. R134a) are likely to be regulated in
future.
1181. Total Equivalent Warming Index (TEWI): The factor TEWI considers both
direct (due to release into atmosphere) and indirect (through energy
consumption) contributions of refrigerants to global warming. Naturally,
refrigerants with as a low a value of TEWI are preferable from global warming
point of view.
1182. Toxicity: Ideally, refrigerants used in a refrigeration system should be nontoxic. However, all fluids other than air can be called as toxic as they will cause
suffocation when their concentration is large enough. Thus toxicity is a relative
term, which becomes meaningful only when the degree of concentration and time
of exposure required to produce harmful effects are specified. Some fluids are
toxic even in small concentrations. Some fluids are mildly toxic, i.e., they are
dangerous only when the concentration is large and duration of exposure is long.
Some refrigerants such as CFCs and HCFCs are non-toxic when mixed with air
in normal condition. However, when they come in contact with an open flame or
an electrical heating element, they decompose forming highly toxic elements (e.g.
phosgene-COCl2). In general the degree of hazard depends on:
-

Amount of refrigerant used vs total space

Type of occupancy
Presence of open flames
Odor of refrigerant, and
Maintenance condition
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 5

Thus from toxicity point-of-view, the usefulness of a particular refrigerant

depends on the specific application.
e) Flammability: The refrigerants should preferably be non-flammable and nonexplosive. For flammable refrigerants special precautions should be taken to
avoid accidents.
Based on the above criteria, ASHRAE has divided refrigerants into six safety
groups (A1 to A3 and B1 to B3). Refrigerants belonging to Group A1 (e.g. R11,
R12, R22, R134a, R744, R718) are least hazardous, while refrigerants belonging
to Group B3 (e.g. R1140) are most hazardous.
Other important properties are:
f) Chemical stability: The refrigerants should be chemically stable as long as they
are inside the refrigeration system.
g) Compatibility with common materials of construction (both metals and nonmetals)
h) Miscibility with lubricating oils: Oil separators have to be used if the refrigerant
is not miscible with lubricating oil (e.g. ammonia). Refrigerants that are
completely miscible with oils are easier to handle (e.g. R12). However, for
refrigerants with limited solubility (e.g. R 22) special precautions should be taken
while designing the system to ensure oil return to the compressor i) Dilelectric
strength: This is an important property for systems using hermetic compressors.
For these systems the refrigerants should have as high a dielectric strength as
possible
j) Ease of leak detection: In the event of leakage of refrigerant from the system, it
should be easy to detect the leaks.
26.3.3. Economic properties:
The refrigerant used should preferably be inexpensive and easily
available.

26.4. Designation of refrigerants:

Figure 26.1 shows the classification of fluids used as refrigerants in vapour
compression refrigeration systems. Since a large number of refrigerants have
been developed over the years for a wide variety of applications, a numbering
system has been adopted to designate various refrigerants. From the number
one can get some useful information about the type of refrigerant, its chemical
composition, molecular weight etc. All the refrigerants are designated by R
followed by a unique number.
i) Fully saturated, halogenated compounds: These refrigerants are derivatives
of alkanes (CnH2n+2) such as methane (CH4), ethane (C2H6). These refrigerants are
designated by R XYZ, where:
X+1 indicates the number of Carbon (C) atoms Y-1
indicates number of Hydrogen (H) atoms, and
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 6

indicates number of Fluorine (F) atoms

The balance indicates the number of Chlorine atoms. Only 2 digits indicates that
the value of X is zero.
Ex: R 22
X = 0 No. of Carbon atoms = 0+1 = 1 derivative of methane (CH 4)
Y = 2 No. of Hydrogen atoms = 2-1 = 1 Z = 2 No. of Fluorine atoms = 2 The
balance = 4 no. of (H+F) atoms = 4-1-2 = 1 No. of Chlorine atoms = 1 The
chemical formula of R 22 = CHClF2
Similarly it can be shown that the chemical formula of:
R12

CCl2F2

R134a

C2H2F4 (derivative of ethane)

(letter a stands for isomer, e.g. molecules having same chemical composition but
different atomic arrangement, e.g. R134 and R134a)
ii) Inorganic refrigerants: These are designated by number 7 followed by the
molecular weight of the refrigerant (rounded-off).
Ex.:

Ammonia:

Molecular weight is 17, the designation is R 717

Carbon dioxide:

Molecular weight is 44, the designation is R 744

Water:

Molecular weight is 18, the designation is R 718

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 7

Refrigerants

Pure fluids

Mixtures
- Azeotropic
- Zeotropic

Natural Organic (HCs)

Synthetic
- CFCs
- HCFCs
- HFCs

Inorganic
o
NH3
CO2
o
H2O
Fig.26.1: Classification of fluids used as refrigerants

iii) Mixtures: Azeotropic mixtures are designated by 500 series, where as

zeotropic refrigerants (e.g. non-azeotropic mixtures) are designated by 400
series.
Azeotropic mixtures:
R 500: Mixture of R 12 (73.8 %) and R 152a (26.2%) R
502: Mixture of R 22 (48.8 %) and R 115 (51.2%) R503:
Mixture of R 23 (40.1 %) and R 13 (59.9%) R507A:
Mixture of R 125 (50%) and R 143a (50%)

Zeotropic mixtures:
R404A : Mixture of R 125 (44%), R 143a (52%) and R 134a (4%)
R407A : Mixture of R 32 (20%), R 125 (40%) and R 134a (40%)
R407B : Mixture of R 32 (10%), R 125 (70%) and R 134a (20%)
R410A : Mixture of R 32 (50%) and R 125 (50%)
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 8

iv) Hydrocarbons:
Propane (C3H8)

R 290

n-butane (C4H10)

R 600

iso-butane (C4H10) :

R 600a

Unsaturated Hydrocarbons:

R1150 (C2H4)
R1270 (C3H6)

26.5. Comparison between different refrigerants:

Synthetic refrigerants that were commonly used for refrigeration, cold storage
and air conditioning applications are: R 11 (CFC 11), R 12 (CFC 12), R 22 (HCFC
22), R 502 (CFC 12+HCFC 22) etc. However, these refrigerants have to be
phased out due to their Ozone Depletion Potential (ODP). The synthetic
replacements for the older refrigerants are: R-134a (HFC-134a) and blends of
HFCs. Generally, synthetic refrigerants are non-toxic and non-flammable.
However, compared to the natural refrigerants the synthetic refrigerants offer
lower performance and they also have higher Global Warming Potential (GWP).
As a result, the synthetic refrigerants face an uncertain future. The most
commonly used natural refrigerant is ammonia. This is also one of the oldest
known refrigerants. Ammonia has good thermodynamic, thermophysical and
environmental properties. However, it is toxic and is not compatible with some of
the common materials of construction such as copper, which somewhat restricts
its application. Other natural refrigerants that are being suggested are
hydrocarbons (HCs) and carbon di-oxide (R-744). Though these refrigerants have
some specific problems owing to their eco-friendliness, they are being studied
widely and are likely to play a prominent role in future.
Prior to the environmental issues of ozone layer depletion and global
warming, the most widely used refrigerants were: R 11, R 12, R 22, R 502 and
ammonia. Of these, R 11 was primarily used with centrifugal compressors in air
conditioning applications. R 12 was used primarily in small capacity refrigeration
and cold storage applications, while the other refrigerants were used in large
systems such as large air conditioning plants or cold storages. Among the
refrigerants used, except ammonia, all the other refrigerants are synthetic
refrigerants and are non-toxic and non-flammable. Though ammonia is toxic, it
has been very widely used due to its excellent thermodynamic and
thermophysical properties. The scenario changed completely after the discovery
of ozone layer depletion in 1974. The depletion of stratospheric ozone layer was
attributed to chlorine and bromine containing chemicals such as Halons, CFCs,
HCFCs etc. Since ozone layer depletion could lead to catastrophe on a global
level, it has been agreed by the global community to phase out the ozone
depleting substances (ODS). As a result except ammonia, all the other
refrigerants used in cold storages had to be phased-out and a search for suitable
replacements began in earnest. At the same time, it was also observed that in
addition to ozone layer depletion, most of the conventional synthetic refrigerants
also cause significant global warming. In view of the environmental problems
caused by the synthetic refrigerants, opinions differed on replacements for
conventional refrigerants. The alternate refrigerants can be classified into two
broad groups:
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 9

i)

Non-ODS, synthetic refrigerants based on Hydro-Fluoro-Carbons

(HFCs) and their blends ii)
Natural refrigerants including ammonia,
carbon dioxide, hydrocarbons
and their blends
It should be noted that the use of natural refrigerants such as carbon dioxide,
hydrocarbons is not a new phenomena, but is a revival of the once-used-anddiscarded technologies in a much better form. Since the natural refrigerants are
essentially making a comeback, one advantage of using them is that they are
familiar in terms of their strengths and weaknesses. Another important advantage
is that they are completely environment friendly, unlike the HFC based
refrigerants, which do have considerable global warming potential. The alternate
synthetic refrigerants are normally non-toxic and non-flammable. It is also
possible to use blends of various HFCs to obtain new refrigerant mixtures with
required properties to suit specific applications. However, most of these blends
are non-azeotropic in nature, as a result there could be significant temperature
glides during evaporation and condensation, and it is also important take
precautions to prevent leakage, as this will change the composition of the
mixture. Table 26.1 shows a list of refrigerants being replaced and their
replacements.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 10

R 744 (CO2)
NBP = -78.4oC
hfg at 40oC=321.3 kJ/kg
Tcr =31.1oC
Cp/Cv = 1.3
ODP = 0.0
GWP = 1.0
Table 26.1: Refrigerants, their applications and substitutes
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 11
Refrigerant
R 11(CFC)
NBP = 23.7oC
hfg at NBP=182.5 kJ/kg
Tcr =197.98oC
Cp/Cv = 1.13
ODP = 1.0
GWP = 3500
R 12 (CFC)
NBP = -29.8oC
hfg at NBP=165.8 kJ/kg
Tcr =112.04oC
Cp/Cv = 1.126
ODP = 1.0
GWP = 7300
R 22 (HCFC)
NBP = -40.8oC
hfg at NBP=233.2 kJ/kg
Tcr =96.02oC
Cp/Cv = 1.166
ODP = 0.05
GWP = 1500
R 134a (HFC)
NBP = -26.15oC
hfg at NBP=222.5 kJ/kg
Tcr =101.06oC
Cp/Cv = 1.102
ODP = 0.0
GWP = 1200
R 717 (NH3)
NBP = -33.35oC
hfg at NBP=1368.9 kJ/kg
Tcr =133.0oC
Cp/Cv = 1.31
ODP = 0.0
GWP = 0.0

Application
Large air conditioning systems
Industrial heat pumps As foam
blowing agent

Substitute suggested
Retrofit(R)/New (N)
R 123 (R,N)
R 141b (N)
R 245fa (N)
n-pentane (R,N)

Domestic refrigerators
Small air conditioners
Water coolers Small
cold storages

Air conditioning systems

Cold storages

R 22 (R,N)
R 134a (R,N)
R 227ea (N)
R 401A,R 401B (R,N)
R 411A,R 411B (R,N)
R 717 (N)
R 410A, R 410B (N)
R 417A (R,N)
R 407C (R,N)
R 507,R 507A (R,N)
R 404A (R,N)
R 717 (N)
No replacement required

- Immiscible in mineral oils

Used as replacement for R 12 in - Highly hygroscopic
domestic
refrigerators,
water
coolers, automobile A/Cs etc
Cold storages Air conditioning
systems Simultaneous cooling
No replacement required
and heating (Transcritical cycle)

Cold storages Ice plants

Food processing Frozen
food cabinets

Toxic and flammable

Incompatible with copper
Highly efficient
Inexpensive and available

No replacement required
- Very low critical temperature
- Eco-friendly

- Inexpensive and
available

Refrigerant
R718 (H2O)
NBP = 100.oC
hfg at NBP=2257.9 kJ/kg Tcr
=374.15oC Cp/Cv = 1.33
ODP = 0.0 GWP = 1.0

R600a (iso-butane)
NBP = -11.73oC
hfg at NBP=367.7 kJ/kg
Tcr =135.0oC
Cp/Cv = 1.086 ODP =
0.0 GWP = 3.0

cycle
1185.
The freezing
point of a brine is
generally lower than
the freezing point of
its constituents
1186.
The freezing
point of a brine is
generally higher than
the freezing point of
its constituents
Ans.: b) and c)
2. Which of the following
statements are TRUE?
1187.

The suction

pressure of a refrigerant
Table 26.1:
Refrigerants, their
applications and
substitutes (contd.)

Questions
and
answers:

should be as high as
possible
1188.

pressure of a refrigerant
should be as low as
possible
1189.

1. Which of the
following
statements are
TRUE?
1183.
A
primary
refrigerant does
not undergo
phase change in
a refrigeration
cycle
1184.
A
secondary
refrigerant
does not
undergo
phase
change in a
refrigeration

The suction

The discharge

pressure of a refrigerant
should be as high as
possible
1190.

The discharge

pressure of a refrigerant
should be as low as
possible
Ans.: a) and d)

Version 1 ME, IIT

Kharagpur

3. Which of the following statements are TRUE?

1191. At a given temperature, as the latent heat of vaporization increases, the
saturation pressure decreases
1192. For given evaporator and condenser temperatures, as the latent heat of
vaporization increases, the pressure ratio decreases
1193. As the latent heat of vaporization increases, the required mass flow rate of
refrigerant, becomes smaller for a given capacity
1194. For a given pressure ratio, as the isentropic index of compression
increases, the compressor discharge temperature increases
Ans.: a), c) and d)
4. Which of the following statements are TRUE?
1195. A refrigerant having high critical temperature yields high COP and high
volumetric capacity
1196. A refrigerant having high critical temperature yields low COP and high
volumetric capacity
1197. A refrigerant having high critical temperature yields low COP and low
volumetric capacity
1198. A refrigerant having high critical temperature yields high COP and low
volumetric capacity
Ans.: d)
5. Which of the following statements are TRUE?
1199. Low molecular weight refrigerants have high latent heat of vaporization
1200. Low molecular weight refrigerants have low latent heat of vaporization
1201. For saturated state at the inlet to the compressor, a refrigerant having high
vapour specific heat may give rise to wet compression
1202. For saturated state at the inlet to the compressor, a refrigerant having low
vapour specific heat may give rise to wet compression
Ans.: a) and c)
6. The chemical formula of refrigerant R11 is:
1203. CCl3F
1204. CClF3
1205. CCl
HF d)CHF
Ans.: a)
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 13

7. The chemical formula of R141 is:

1206.
1207.
1208.
1209.

C2H3ClF3
C2H2Cl3F
C2H3Cl2F
C2H2ClF3

Ans.: c)
8. Which of the following statements is TRUE?
1210. Evaporation process is non-isothermal for zeotropic mixtures
1211. Evaporation process is non-isothermal for azeotropic mixtures
1212. Composition of azeotropic mixture changes in the event of a leak
1213. Composition of zeotropic mixture changes in the event of a leak
Ans.: a) and d)
9. Which of the following refrigerants are phased-out due to Montreal protocol on
ozone layer depletion
1214.
1215.
1216.
1217.

R11
R21
R12
R32

Ans.: a), b) and c)

10. Which of the following refrigerants replace R12 in domestic refrigerators?
1218. R22
1219. R11
1220. R134a
1221. R141b
Ans.: c)
11. Which of the following refrigerants are suggested as replacements for R22 in
large air conditioning and cold storage systems?
1222.
1223.
1224.
1225.

R134a
R21
R410A
R407C

Ans.: c) and d)
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 14

Lesson
27
Psychrometry
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 1

2
The specific objectives of this lecture are to:
1226. Define psychrometry and the composition of moist air (Section 27.1)
1227. Discuss the methods used for estimating properties of moist air (Section 27.2)
1228. Present perfect gas law model for moist air (Section 27.2.1)
1229. Define important psychrometric properties (Section 27.2.2)
1230. Present graphical representation of psychrometric properties on a
psychrometric chart (Section 27.2.3)
1231. Discuss measurement of psychrometric properties (Section 27.3)
1232. Discuss straight-line law as applied to air-water mixtures (Section 27.3.1)
8. Discuss the concept of adiabatic saturation and thermodynamic wet bulb
temperature (Section 27.3.2)
9. Describe a wet-bulb thermometer (Section 27.3.3)
10. Discuss the procedure for calculating psychrometric properties from measured
values of barometric pressure, dry bulb and wet bulb temperatures (Section 27.4)
11. Describe a psychrometer and the precautions to be taken while using
psychrometers (Section 27.5)
At the end of the lecture, the student should be able to:
1233. Define psychrometry and atmospheric air
1234. Use perfect gas law model and find the total pressure of air from partial
pressures of dry air and water vapour
1235. Define and estimate psychrometric properties
1236. Draw the schematic of a psychrometric chart
1237. Discuss the straight-line law and its usefulness in psychrometry
6. Explain the concepts of adiabatic saturation and thermodynamic wet bulb
temperature
1238. Differentiate between thermodynamic WBT and WBT as measured by a wet
bulb thermometer
1239. Estimate various psychrometric properties given any three independent
properties
1240. Describe a psychrometer

27.1. Introduction:
Atmospheric air makes up the environment in almost every type of air
conditioning system. Hence a thorough understanding of the properties of
atmospheric air and the ability to analyze various processes involving air is
fundamental to air conditioning design.
Psychrometry is the study of the properties of mixtures of air and water
vapour.
Atmospheric air is a mixture of many gases plus water vapour and a number
of pollutants (Fig.27.1). The amount of water vapour and pollutants vary from place
to place. The concentration of water vapour and pollutants decrease with altitude,
and above an altitude of about 10 km, atmospheric air consists of only dry air. The
pollutants have to be filtered out before processing the air. Hence, what we process
is essentially a mixture of various gases that constitute air and water vapour. This
mixture is known as moist air.
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 2

3
The moist air can be thought of as a mixture of dry air and moisture. For all
practical purposes, the composition of dry air can be considered as constant. In
1949, a standard composition of dry air was fixed by the International Joint
Committee on Psychrometric data. It is given in Table 27.1.
Constituent
Oxygen
Nitrogen
Argon
Carbon dioxide

Molecular weight
32.000
28.016
39.944
44.010

Mol fraction
0.2095
0.7809
0.0093
0.0003

Table 27.1: Composition of standard air

Based on the above composition the molecular weight of dry air is found to be
28.966 and the gas constant R is 287.035 J/kg.K.
As mentioned before the air to be processed in air conditioning systems is a
mixture of dry air and water vapour. While the composition of dry air is constant, the
amount of water vapour present in the air may vary from zero to a maximum
depending upon the temperature and pressure of the mixture (dry air + water
vapour).
At a given temperature and pressure the dry air can only hold a certain
maximum amount of moisture. When the moisture content is maximum, then the air
is known as saturated air, which is established by a neutral equilibrium between the
moist air and the liquid or solid phases of water.
For calculation purposes, the molecular weight of water vapour is taken as 18.015
and its gas constant is 461.52 J/kg.K.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

Afte
r

Mixture of
permanent
gases
(N2,O2,Ar,H2

Water vapour

Moist air fo

Fig.27.1:
Atmospheric a

27.2.
Meth
ods
for
esti
mati
ng
prop
ertie
s of
mois
t air:
I

n
order
to
perfor
m air
conditi
oning
calcul
ations,
it
is
essent
ial first
to
estima
te
variou
s
proper
ties of
air. It
is
difficul
t
to
estima
te the
exact
proper
ty
values
of
moist
air as
it is a
mixtur
e
of
sever
al
perma
nent
gases
and
water
vapou
r.
Howe
ver,
moist
air
upto 3
atm.
press
ure is
found
to
obey
perfec
t gas
law
with
accur
acy

suffici
ent for
engin
eering
calcul
ations.
For
higher
accur
acy
Goff
and
Gratc
h
tables
can
be
used
for
estima
ting
moist
air
proper
ties.
These
tables
are
obtain
ed
using
mixtur
e
model
s
based
on
funda
menta
l
princip
les of
statisti
cal
mech
anics
that
take
into
accou
nt the
real
gas
behavi
our of
dry air
and
water
vapou
r.
Howe

ver,
these
tables
are
valid
for a
barom
etric
press
ure of
1 atm.
only.
Even
thoug
h the
calcul
ation
proce
dure
is
quite
compl
ex,
using
the
mixtur
e
model
s it is
possib
le to
estima
te
moist
air
proper
ties at
Versio
n1
ME,
IIT
Khara
gpur
4

other pressures also. However, since in most cases the pressures involved are low,
one can apply the perfect gas model to estimate psychrometric properties.
27.2.1. Basic gas laws for moist air:
According to the Gibbs-Dalton law for a mixture of perfect gases, the total
pressure exerted by the mixture is equal to the sum of partial pressures of the
constituent gases. According to this law, for a homogeneous perfect gas mixture
occupying a volume V and at temperature T, each constituent gas behaves as
though the other gases are not present (i.e., there is no interaction between the
gases). Each gas obeys perfect gas equation. Hence, the partial pressures exerted
by each gas, p1,p2,p3 and the total pressure pt are given by:
n1RuT
n2RuT
n3RuT
p1 = V ; p2 = V ; p3 = V..........................
pt = p1 +p2 +p3 +.......

(27.1)

where n1,n2,n3, are the number of moles of gases 1,2,3,

Applying this equation to moist air.
p = pt =pa +pv

(27.2)

where p = pt = total barometric pressure pa = partial

pressure of dry air p v =
partial
pressure of water vapour
27.2.2. Important psychrometric properties:
Dry bulb temperature (DBT) is the temperature of the moist air as measured by a
standard thermometer or other temperature measuring instruments.
Saturated vapour pressure (psat) is the saturated partial pressure of water vapour at
the dry bulb temperature. This is readily available in thermodynamic tables and
charts. ASHRAE suggests the following regression equation for saturated vapour
pressure of water, which is valid for 0 to 100oC.
ln(psat) = 1 + c2 + c3T + c4T + c5T + c6 ln(T)

(27.3)

where psat = saturated vapor pressure of water in kiloPascals

T = temperature in K The regression
coefficients c1 to c6 are given by:
c1 = -5.80022006E+03, c2 = -5.516256E+00, c3 = -4.8640239E-02 c4 =
4.1764768E-05, c5 = -1.4452093E-08, c6 = 6.5459673E+00
Relative humidity () is defined as the ratio of the mole fraction of water vapour in
moist air to mole fraction of water vapour in saturated air at the same temperature
and pressure. Using perfect gas equation we can show that:

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 5

partial pressure of water vapour

saturation pressure of pure water vapour at same temperature

= pv
p sat
(27.4)

Relative humidity is normally expressed as a percentage. When is 100

percent, the air is saturated.
Humidity ratio (W): The humidity ratio (or specific humidity) W is the mass of water
associated with each kilogram of dry air1. Assuming both water vapour and dry air to
be perfect gases2, the humidity ratio is given by:
W

kg of water vapour pvV/RvT

=----------------------------=-----------kg of dry air
paV/RaT

pv /Rv
=------------------(pt-pv)/Ra

(27.5)

Substituting the values of gas constants of water vapour and air R v and Ra in
the above equation; the humidity ratio is given by:
W

= 0.622-----pt -pv

pv

(27.6)

For a given barometric pressure pt, given the DBT, we can find the saturated vapour
pressure psat from the thermodynamic property tables on steam. Then using the
above equation, we can find the humidity ratio at saturated conditions, Wsat.
It is to be noted that, W is a function of both total barometric pressure and
vapor pressure of water.
Dew-point temperature: If unsaturated moist air is cooled at constant pressure, then
the temperature at which the moisture in the air begins to condense is known as
dew-point temperature (DPT) of air. An approximate equation for dew-point
temperature is given by:
4030(DBT + 235)
DPT =----------------------------------235
(27.7)
4030 - (DBT + 235)ln
where is the relative humidity (in fraction). DBT & DPT are in oC. Of course, since
from its definition, the dew point temperature is the saturation temperature
corresponding to the vapour pressure of water vapour, it can be obtained from steam
tables or using Eqn.(27.3).

Properties such as humidity ratio, enthalpy and specific volume are based on 1 kg of dry
air. This is useful as the total mass of moist air in a process varies by the addition/removal of
water vapour, but the mass of dry air remains constant.
2
Dry air is assumed to be a perfect gas as its temperature is high relative to its saturation
temperature, and water vapour is assumed to be a perfect gas because its pressure is low
relative to its saturation pressure. These assumptions result in accuracies, that are, sufficient
for engineering calculations (less than 0.7 percent as shown by Threlkeld). However, more
accurate results can be obtained by using the data developed by Goff and Gratch in 1945.
1

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 6

7
Degree of saturation : The degree of saturation is the ratio of the humidity ratio W to the
humidity ratio of a saturated mixture Ws at the same temperature and pressure, i.e.,

W
Ws

(27.8)
t,P

Enthalpy: The enthalpy of moist air is the sum of the enthalpy of the dry air and the enthalpy
of the water vapour. Enthalpy values are always based on some reference value. For moist
air, the enthalpy of dry air is given a zero value at 0oC, and for water vapour the enthalpy of
saturated water is taken as zero at 0oC. The enthalpy of moist air is given by:
h=ha + Whg =cpt+W(hfg +cpwt)
cpw

t
W

fg
h

(27.9)

where cp
= specific heat of dry air at constant pressure, kJ/kg.K
= specific heat of water vapor, kJ/kg.K
= Dry-bulb temperature of air-vapor mixture, oC
= Humidity ratio, kg of water vapor/kg of dry air
ha
= enthalpy of dry air at temperature t, kJ/kg
h
= enthalpy of water vapor3 at temperature t, kJ/kg
= latent heat of vaporization at 0oC, kJ/kg

The unit of h is kJ/kg of dry air. Substituting the approximate values of cp and hg, we obtain:
h=1.005 t + W(2501+ 1.88t)
(27.10)
Humid specific heat: From the equation for enthalpy of moist air, the humid specific heat of
moist air can be written as:
cpm = cp + W.cpw
where cpm
cp
cpw
W

=
=
=
=

(27.11)

humid specific heat, kJ/kg.K

specific heat of dry air, kJ/kg.K
specific heat of water vapor, kJ/kg
humidity ratio, kg of water vapor/kg of dry air

Since the second term in the above equation (w.cpw) is very small compared to the
first term, for all practical purposes, the humid specific heat of moist air, c pm can be taken as
1.0216 kJ/kg dry air.K
Specific volume: The specific volume is defined as the number of cubic meters of moist air
per kilogram of dry air. From perfect gas equation since the volumes occupied by the
individual substances are the same, the specific volume is also equal to the number of cubic
meters of dry air per kilogram of dry air, i.e.,

Though the water vapor in moist air is likely to be superheated, no appreciable error results
if we assume it to be saturated. This is because of the fact that the constant temperature
lines in the superheated region on a Mollier chart (h vs s) are almost horizontal.
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 7

8
=
v=a3TR
R
m
(27.12)
/kg
aTdry air

pt

-pv 27.2.3. Psychrometric chart

A Psychrometric chart graphically represents the thermodynamic properties of moist
air. Standard psychrometric charts are bounded by the dry-bulb temperature line
(abscissa) and the vapour pressure or humidity ratio (ordinate). The Left Hand Side of the
psychrometric chart is bounded by the saturation line. Figure 27.2 shows the schematic of
a psychrometric chart. Psychrometric charts are readily available for standard barometric
pressure of 101.325 kPa at sea level and for normal temperatures (0-50 oC). ASHRAE has
also developed psychrometric charts for other temperatures and barometric pressures (for
low temperatures: -40 to 10oC, high temperatures 10 to 120oC and very high temperatures
100 to 120oC)
LinesW
of
^'constant
\
(kgw/kgda)
sp.volume

-^i
x

_^__^
\

\*"

\>C^ .

Saturation curve (RH

= 100%)^^
Lines of
constant
enthalpy

J1

^\

\
\

\\

\
w

\-

\S<

^^/ \
^^ \

c/'

'7

/ y

r-"^V

\ \

\\

\\

DBT, oC Fig.27.2: Schematic of a psychrometric

chart for a given barometric pressure

27.3. Measurement of psychrometric properties:

Based on Gibbs phase rule, the thermodynamic state of moist air is uniquely fixed
if the barometric pressure and two other independent properties are known. This means
that at a given barometric pressure, the state of moist air can be determined by measuring
any two independent properties. One of them could be the dry-bulb temperature (DBT), as
the measurement of this temperature is fairly simple and accurate. The accurate
measurement of other independent parameters such as humidity ratio is very difficult in
practice. Since measurement of temperatures is
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 8

9
easier, it would be convenient if the other independent parameter is also a
temperature. Of course, this could be the dew-point temperature (DPT), but it is
observed that accurate measurement of dew-point temperature is difficult. In this
context, a new independent temperature parameter called the wet-bulb temperature
(WBT) is defined. Compared to DPT, it is easier to measure the wet-bulb
temperature of moist air. Thus knowing the dry-bulb and wet-bulb temperatures from
measurements, it is possible to find the other properties of moist air.
To understand the concept of wet-bulb temperature, it is essential to
understand the process of combined heat and mass transfer.
27.3.1. Combined heat and mass transfer; the straight line law
The straight line law states that when air is transferring heat and mass
(water) to or from a wetted surface, the condition of air shown on a psychrometric
chart drives towards the saturation line at the temperature of the wetted surface.
For example, as shown in Fig.27.3, when warm air passes over a wetted
surface its temperature drops from 1 to 2. Also, since the vapor pressure of air at 1 is
greater than the saturated vapor pressure at t w, there will be moisture transfer from
air to water, i.e., the warm air in contact with cold wetted surface cools and
dehumidifies. According to the straight line law, the final condition of air (i.e., 2) lies
on a straight line joining 1 with t w on the saturation line. This is due to the value of
unity of the Lewis number, that was discussed in an earlier chapter on analogy
between heat and mass transfer.

^water
(Di at
tenperaiure
tw

-H dA |^- CD

enperatu

Fig.27.3: Principle of straight-line law for air-water mixtures

27.3.2. Adiabatic saturation and thermodynamic wet bulb temperature:

Adiabatic saturation temperature is defined as that temperature at which
water, by evaporating into air, can bring the air to saturation at the same temperature
adiabatically. An adiabatic saturator is a device using which one can measure
theoretically the adiabatic saturation temperature of air.
As shown in Fig.27.4, an adiabatic saturator is a device in which air flows
through an infinitely long duct containing water. As the air comes in contact with
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 9

10
water in the duct, there will be heat and mass transfer between water and air. If the
duct is infinitely long, then at the exit, there would exist perfect equilibrium between
air and water at steady state. Air at the exit would be fully saturated and its
temperature is equal to that of water temperature. The device is adiabatic as the
walls of the chamber are thermally insulated. In order to continue the process, makeup water has to be provided to compensate for the amount of water evaporated into
the air. The temperature of the make-up water is controlled so that it is the same as
that in the duct.
After the adiabatic saturator has achieved a steady-state condition, the
temperature indicated by the thermometer immersed in the water is the
thermodynamic wet-bulb temperature. The thermodynamic wet bulb temperature will
be less than the entering air DBT but greater than the dew point temperature.
Certain combinations of air conditions will result in a given sump temperature,
and this can be defined by writing the energy balance equation for the adiabatic
saturator. Based on a unit mass flow rate of dry air, this is given by:
h1 =h2 -(W2 - W1)hf

(27.13)

where hf is the enthalpy of saturated liquid at the sump or thermodynamic wet-bulb

temperature, h1 and h2 are the enthalpies of air at the inlet and exit of the adiabatic
saturator, and W1 and W2 are the humidity ratio of air at the inlet and exit of the
adiabatic saturator, respectively.
It is to be observed that the thermodynamic wet-bulb temperature is a
thermodynamic property, and is independent of the path taken by air. Assuming the
humid specific heat to be constant, from the enthalpy balance, the thermodynamic
wet-bulb temperature can be written as:
t2 = t 1 -

h
fg,2

(w2 - w1)

cpm

(27.14)

where hfg,2 is the latent heat of vaporization at the saturated condition 2. Thus
measuring the dry bulb (t1) and wet bulb temperature (t2) one can find the inlet
humidity ratio (W1) from the above expression as the outlet saturated humidity ratio
(W2) and latent heat heat of vaporizations are functions of t 2 alone (at fixed
barometric pressure).
On the psychrometric chart as shown in Fig.27.4, point 1 lies below the line of
constant enthalpy that passes through the saturation point 2. t 2 = f(t1,W1) is not a
unique function, in the sense that there can be several combinations of t 1 and W1
which can result in the same sump temperature in the adiabatic saturator. A line
passing through all these points is a constant wet bulb temperature line. Thus all
inlet conditions that result in the same sump temperature, for example point 1 have
the same wet bulb temperature. The line is a straight line according to the straightline law. The straight-line joining 1 and 2 represents the path of the air as it passes
through the adiabatic saturator.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 10

11
Normally lines of constant wet bulb temperature are shown on the
psychrometric chart. The difference between actual enthalpy and the enthalpy
obtained by following constant wet-bulb temperature is equal to (w2-w1)hf.

Perfect insulation

Moist air
t2,W2,p
Water at t2
Moist air
t1,W1,p
Make-up water (W2-W1) per kg da
Fig.27.4: The process of adiabatic saturation of air

W2

W1
t2 enperature

t1

Fig.27.5: Adiabatic saturation process 1-2 on psychrometric chart

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 11

12
27.3.3. Wet-Bulb Thermometer:
In practice, it is not convenient to measure the wet-bulb temperature using an
adiabatic saturator. In stead, a thermometer with a wetted wick is used to measure
the wet bulb temperature as shown in Fig.27.6. It can be observed that since the
area of the wet bulb is finite, the state of air at the exit of the wet bulb will not be
saturated, in stead it will be point 2 on the straight line joining 1 and i, provided the
temperature of water on the wet bulb is i. It has been shown by Carrier, that this is a
valid assumption for air-water mixtures. Hence for air-water mixtures, one can
assume that the temperature measured by the wet-bulb thermometer is equal to the
thermodynamic wet-bulb temperature 4. For other gas-vapor mixtures, there can be
appreciable difference between the thermodynamic and actual wet-bulb
temperatures.

Wet wick

W
DBT
Fig.27.6: Schematic of a wet-bulb thermometer and the process
on psychrometric chart

4 By performing energy balance across the wet-bulb, it can be shown that, the
temperature measured by the wet-bulb thermometer is:
t2 = t1 ~ (kw /hc)hfg(wi _ w); where kw is the mass transfer coefficient
for air-water mixtures, the ratio (hc/kwcpm) = Lewis number is 1, hence, the wick

temperature is approximately equal to the thermodynamic wet-bulb temperature. It

should be noted that, unlike thermodynamic WBT, the WBT of wet bulb
thermometer is not a thermodynamic property as it depends upon the rates of heat
and mass transfer between the wick and air.
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 12

27.4. Calculation of psychrometric properties from p, DBT and

WBT:
As mentioned before, to fix the thermodynamic state of moist air, we need to
know three independent properties. The properties that are relatively easier to
measure, are: the barometric pressure, dry-bulb temperature and wet-bulb
temperature. For a given barometric pressure, knowing the dry bulb and wet bulb
temperatures, all other properties can be easily calculated from the psychrometric
equations. The following are the empirical relations for the vapor pressure of water in
moist air:
i) Modified Apjohn equation.
(27.15)
1.8p(t -t,)
pv =pv-----------------2700
ii) Modified Ferrel equation:
1 8t

pv = pv -0.00066p(t-t , ) 1 +

(27.16)

iii) Carrier equation:

1.8(p-p,v)(t-t,)
pv = pv------------------------------2800-1.3(1.8t + 32)
where t
t
p
pv
pv

(27.17)

= dry bulb temperature, oC

= wet bulb temperature, oC
= barometric pressure
= vapor pressure
= saturation vapor pressure at wet-bulb temperature

The units of all the pressures in the above equations should be consistent.
Once the vapor pressure is calculated, then all other properties such as
relative humidity, humidity ratio, enthalpy, humid volume etc. can be calculated from
the psychrometric equations presented earlier.

27.5. Psychrometer:
Any instrument capable of measuring the psychrometric state of air is called a
psychrometer. As mentioned before, in order to measure the psychrometric state of
air, it is required to measure three independent parameters. Generally two of these
are the barometric pressure and air dry-bulb temperature as they can be measured
easily and with good accuracy.
Two types of psychrometers are commonly used. Each comprises of two
thermometers with the bulb of one covered by a moist wick. The two sensing bulbs
are separated and shaded from each other so that the radiation heat transfer
between them becomes negligible. Radiation shields may have to be used over the
bulbs if the surrounding temperatures are considerably different from the air
temperature.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 13

14
The sling psychrometer is widely used for measurements involving room air or
other applications where the air velocity inside the room is small. The sling
psychrometer consists of two thermometers mounted side by side and fitted in a
frame with a handle for whirling the device through air. The required air circulation (
3 to 5 m/s) over the sensing bulbs is obtained by whirling the psychrometer ( 300
RPM). Readings are taken when both the thermometers show steady-state readings.
In the aspirated psychrometer, the thermometers remain stationary, and a
small fan, blower or syringe moves the air across the thermometer bulbs.
The function of the wick on the wet-bulb thermometer is to provide a thin film
of water on the sensing bulb. To prevent errors, there should be a continuous film of
water on the wick. The wicks made of cotton or cloth should be replaced frequently,
and only distilled water should be used for wetting it. The wick should extend beyond
the bulb by 1 or 2 cms to minimize the heat conduction effects along the stem.
Other types of psychrometric instruments:
1241.
1242.
1243.

Dunmore Electric Hygrometer

DPT meter
Hygrometer (Using horses or human hair)

Questions and answers:

1. Which of the following statements are TRUE?
1244. The maximum amount of moisture air can hold depends upon its temperature
and barometric pressure
1245. Perfect gas model can be applied to air-water mixtures when the total
pressure is high
1246. The minimum number of independent properties to be specified for fixing the
state of moist air is two
1247. The minimum number of independent properties to be specified for fixing the
state of moist air is three
Ans.: a) and d)
2. Which of the following statements are TRUE?
1248.
1249.
1250.
1251.

Straight-line law is applicable to any fluid-air mixtures

Straight-line law is applicable to any water-air mixtures only
Straight-line holds good as long as the Prandtl number is close to unity
Straight-line holds good as long as the Lewis number is close to unity

Ans.: b) and d)
3. Which of the following statements are TRUE?
a) When the dry bulb temperature is equal to dew point temperature, the relative
humidity of air-water mixture is 1.0
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 14

15
1252. All specific psychrometric properties of moist air are based on unit mass of
water vapour
1253. All specific psychrometric properties of moist air are based on unit mass of dry
air
1254. All specific psychrometric properties of moist air are based on unit mass of
moist air
Ans.: a) and d)
4. Which of the following statements are TRUE?
1255. Thermodynamic WBT is a property of moist air, while WBT as measured by
wet bulb thermometer is not a property
1256. Both the thermodynamic WBT and WBT as measured by wet bulb
thermometer are properties of moist air
1257. Under no circumstances, dry bulb and wet bulb temperatures are equal
1258. Wet bulb temperature is always lower than dry bulb temperature, but higher
than dew point temperature
Ans.: a)
5. On a particular day the weather forecast states that the dry bulb temperature is
37oC, while the relative humidity is 50% and the barometric pressure is 101.325 kPa.
Find the humidity ratio, dew point temperature and enthalpy of moist air on this day.
Ans.:
At 37oC the saturation pressure (ps) of water vapour is obtained from steam tables as
6.2795 kPa.
Since the relative humidity is 50%, the vapour pressure of water in air (pv) is:
pv = 0.5 x ps = 0.5 x 6.2795 = 3.13975 kPa the
humidity ratio W is given by:
W = 0.622 x pv/(pt-pv) = 0.622 x 3.13975/(101.325-3.13975) = 0.01989 kgw/kgda
(Ans.)
The enthalpy of air (h) is given by the equation:
h = 1.005t+W(2501+1.88t) = 1.005 x 37+0.01989(2501+1.88 x 37) = 88.31 kJ/kgda
(Ans.)
6. Will the moisture in the above air condense when it comes in contact with a cold
surface whose surface temperature is 24oC?
Ans.: Moisture in condense when it is cooled below its dew point temperature.
The dew point temperature of the air at 37 oC and 50 % relative humidity is equal to
the saturation temperature of water at a vapour pressure of 3.13975 kPa.
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 15

16
From steam tables, the saturation temperature of water at 3.13975 Kpa is 24.8 oC,
hence moisture in air will condense when it comes in contact with the cold surface
whose temperature is lower than the dew point temperature.
(Ans.)
7. Moist air at 1 atm. pressure has a dry bulb temperature of 32 oC and a wet bulb
temperature of 26oC. Calculate a) the partial pressure of water vapour, b) humidity
ratio, c) relative humidity, d) dew point temperature, e) density of dry air in the
mixture, f) density of water vapour in the mixture and g) enthalpy of moist air using
perfect gas law model and psychrometric equations.
Ans.:
a) Using modified Apjohn equation and the values of DBT, WBT and barometric
pressure, the vapour pressure is found to be:
pv = 2.956 kPa

(Ans.)

b) The humidity ratio W is given by:

W = 0.622 x 2.956/(101.325-2.956) = 0.0187 kgw/kgda

(Ans.)

c) Relative humidity RH is given by:

RH = (pv/ps) x 100 = (pv/saturation pressure at 32oC) x 100
From steam tables, the saturation pressure of water at 32oC is 4.7552 kPa, hence,
RH = (2.956/4.7552) x 100 = 62.16%

(Ans.)

d)Dew point temperature is the saturation temperature of steam at 2.956 kPa.

Hence using steam tables we find that:
DPT = Tsat(2.956 kPa) = 23.8oC

(Ans.)

e)Density of dry air and water vapour

Applying perfect gas law to dry air:
Density of dry air a =(pa/RaT)=(pt-pv)/RaT = (101.325-2.956)/(287.035 x 305)x103
= 1.1236 kg/m3 of dry air

(Ans.)

f) Similarly the density of water vapour in air is obtained using perfect gas law as:
Density of water vapour v = (pv/RvT) = 2.956 x 103/(461.52 x 305) = 0.021 kg/m3
(Ans.)
g)Enthalpy of moist air is found from the equation:
h = 1.005 x t+W(2501+1.88 x t) = 1.005 x 32 + 0.0187(2501+1.88 X 32)
h= 80.05 kJ/kg of dry air
(Ans.)
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 16

Lesson
28
Psychrometric Processes
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

The specific objectives of this lecture are to:

1259. Introduction to psychrometric processes and their representation (Section 28.1)
1260. Important psychrometric processes namely, sensible cooling and heating,
cooling and dehumidification, cooling and humidification, heating and humidification,
chemical dehumidification and mixing of air streams (Section 28.2)
1261. Representation of the above processes on psychrometric chart and equations for
heat and mass transfer rates (Section 28.2)
4. Concept of Sensible Heat Factor, By-pass Factor and apparatus dew point
temperature of cooling coils (Section 28.2.)
1262. Principle of air washers and various psychrometric processes that can be
performed using air washers (Section 28.3)
1263. Concept of enthalpy potential and its use (Section 28.4)
At the end of the lecture, the student should be able to:
1264. Represent various psychrometric processes on psychrometric chart
1265. Perform calculations for various psychrometric processes using the
psychrometric charts and equations
1266. Define sensible heat factor, by-pass factor, contact factor and apparatus dew
point temperature
1267. Describe the principle of an air washer and its practical use
1268. Derive equation for total heat transfer rate in terms of enthalpy potential and
explain the use of enthalpy potential

28.1. Introduction:
In the design and analysis of air conditioning plants, the fundamental
requirement is to identify the various processes being performed on air. Once identified,
the processes can be analyzed by applying the laws of conservation of mass and
energy. All these processes can be plotted easily on a psychrometric chart. This is very
useful for quick visualization and also for identifying the changes taking place in
important properties such as temperature, humidity ratio, enthalpy etc. The important
processes that air undergoes in a typical air conditioning plant are discussed below.

28.2. Important psychrometric processes:

a) Sensible cooling:
During this process, the moisture content of air remains constant but its
temperature decreases as it flows over a cooling coil. For moisture content to remain

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

3
constant, the surface of the cooling coil should be dry and its surface temperature
should be greater than the dew point temperature of air. If the cooling coil is 100%
effective, then the exit temperature of air will be equal to the coil temperature. However,
in practice, the exit air temperature will be higher than the cooling coil temperature.
Figure 28.1 shows the sensible cooling process O-A on a psychrometric chart. The heat
transfer rate during this process is given by:
Qc =ma(hO -hA) = macpm(TO -TA)

(28.1)

W
DBT

Fig.28.1: Sensible cooling process O-A on psychrometric chart

b) Sensible heating (Process O-B):

During this process, the moisture content of air remains constant and its
temperature increases as it flows over a heating coil. The heat transfer rate during this
process is given by:
Qh =ma(hB -hO) = macpm(TB -TO)

(28.2)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 3

4
where cpm is the humid specific heat (1.0216 kJ/kg dry air) and ma is the mass flow rate
of dry air (kg/s). Figure 28.2 shows the sensible heating process on a psychrometric
chart.
!

DBT

* Fig.28.2: Sensible heating

process on psychrometric chart

c) Cooling and dehumidification (Process O-C):
When moist air is cooled below its dew-point by bringing it in contact with a cold
surface as shown in Fig.28.3, some of the water vapor in the air condenses and leaves
the air stream as liquid, as a result both the temperature and humidity ratio of air
decreases as shown. This is the process air undergoes in a typical air conditioning
system. Although the actual process path will vary depending upon the type of cold
surface, the surface temperature, and flow conditions, for simplicity the process line is
assumed to be a straight line. The heat and mass transfer rates can be expressed in
terms of the initial and final conditions by applying the conservation of mass and
conservation of energy equations as given below:
By applying mass balance for the water:
ma.wO = ma.wC+mw

(28.3)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 4

Qt
hO
Cooling
coil

TC

To

Ts
Wc

Fig.28.3: Cooling and dehumidification process (O-C)

By applying energy balance:

ma.hO =Qt + mw.hw +ma.hC

(28.4)

from the above two equations, the load on the cooling coil, Qt is given by:
Qt = ma(hO -hC)-ma(wO - wC)hw

(28.5)

the 2nd term on the RHS of the above equation is normally small compared to the other
terms, so it can be neglected. Hence,
Qt = ma(hO -hC)

(28.6)

It can be observed that the cooling and de-humidification process involves both latent
and sensible heat transfer processes, hence, the total, latent and sensible heat transfer
rates (Qt, Ql and Qs) can be written as:
Qt = Ql +Qs where Ql = ma(hO -hw ) = ma.hfg(wO - wC) Qs = ma(hw -hC) =
ma.cpm(TO -TC)

(28.7)

By separating the total heat transfer rate from the cooling coil into sensible and
latent heat transfer rates, a useful parameter called Sensible Heat Factor (SHF) is
defined. SHF is defined as the ratio of sensible to total heat transfer rate, i.e.,
SHF = Qs /Qt = Qs /(Qs + Ql )

(28.8)

From the above equation, one can deduce that a SHF of 1.0 corresponds to no
latent heat transfer and a SHF of 0 corresponds to no sensible heat transfer. A SHF of
0.75 to 0.80 is quite common in air conditioning systems in a normal dry-climate. A

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 5

6
lower value of SHF, say 0.6, implies a high latent heat load such as that occurs in a
humid climate.
From Fig.28.3, it can be seen that the slope of the process line O-C is given by:
Aw
tan c =-----(28.9)
AT
From the definition of SHF,
1-SHF Ql
mahfgAw
2501Aw
Aw
----------= =----------------=---------------= 2451------ (28.10)
SHF
Qs macpmAT 1.0216AT
AT
From the above equations, we can write the slope as:
tan c =

1
2451

1-SHF^ ^ SHF

(28.11)

Thus we can see that the slope of the cooling and de-humidification line is
purely a function of the sensible heat factor, SHF. Hence, we can draw the cooling
and de-humidification line on psychrometric chart if the initial state and the SHF are
known. In some standard psychrometric charts, a protractor with different values of
SHF is provided. The process line is drawn through the initial state point and in
parallel to the given SHF line from the protractor as shown in Fig.28.4.

L To-Tc J
Fig.28.4: A psychrometric chart with protractor for SHF lines
In Fig.28.3, the temperature Ts is the effective surface temperature of the
cooling coil, and is known as apparatus dew-point (ADP) temperature. In an ideal
situation, when all the air comes in perfect contact with the cooling coil surface, then
the exit temperature of air will be same as ADP of the coil. However, in actual case
the exit temperature of air will always be greater than the apparatus dew-point
temperature due to boundary layer development as air flows over the cooling coil
surface and also due to

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 6

7
temperature variation along the fins etc. Hence, we can define a by-pass factor (BPF)
as:
TC -TS
(28.12)
BPF =
TO -TS
It can be easily seen that, higher the by-pass factor larger will be the difference
between air outlet temperature and the cooling coil temperature. When BPF is 1.0, all
the air by-passes the coil and there will not be any cooling or de-humidification. In
practice, the by-pass factor can be increased by increasing the number of rows in a
cooling coil or by decreasing the air velocity or by reducing the fin pitch.
Alternatively, a contact factor(CF) can be defined which is given by:
CF = 1-BPF

(28.13)

d) Heating and Humidification (Process O-D):

During winter it is essential to heat and humidify the room air for comfort. As
shown in Fig.28.5., this is normally done by first sensibly heating the air and then
adding water vapour to the air stream through steam nozzles as shown in the figure.

hD

Qh
wD

Steam nozzles

wO
Heating coil
TO

TD

Fig.28.5: Heating and humidification process

Mass balance of water vapor for the control volume yields the rate at which steam has
to be added, i.e., mw:
mw = ma(wD - wO)

(28.14)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 7

where ma is the mass flow rate of dry air.

From energy balance:
Qh = ma(hD -hO)-mwhw

(28.15)

where Qh is the heat supplied through the heating coil and hw is the enthalpy of steam.
Since this process also involves simultaneous heat and mass transfer, we can define a
sensible heat factor for the process in a way similar to that of a coolind and dehumidification
process.
e) Cooling & humidification (Process O-E):
As the name implies, during this process, the air temperature drops and its humidity
increases. This process is shown in Fig.28.6. As shown in the figure, this can be achieved by
spraying cool water in the air stream. The temperature of water should be lower than the drybulb temperature of air but higher than its dew-point temperature to avoid condensation (TDPT <
Tw < TO).
TDPT
TE
TO
Fig.28.6: Cooling and humdification process

wE

Cold water spray or a

wetted surface

wO
I
t
c
a
n
b
e
s
e
e
n
t
h
a
t
d
u
r
i
n

g this process there is sensible heat transfer from air to water and latent heat transfer
from water to air. Hence, the total heat transfer depends upon the water temperature. If
the temperature of the water sprayed is equal to the wet-bulb temperature of air, then
the net transfer rate will be zero as the sensible heat transfer from air to water will be
equal to latent heat transfer from water to air. If the water temperature is greater than
WBT, then there will be a net heat transfer from water to air. If the water temperature is
less than WBT, then the net heat transfer will be from air to water. Under a special case
when the spray water is entirely recirculated and is neither heated nor cooled, the
system is perfectly insulated and the make-up water is supplied at WBT, then at steadystate, the air undergoes an adiabatic saturation process, during which its WBT remains
constant. This is the process of adiabatic saturation discussed in Chapter 27. The
process of cooling and humidification is encountered in a wide variety of devices such
as evaporative coolers, cooling towers etc.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 8

9
f) Heating and de-humidification (Process O-F):
This process can be achieved by using a hygroscopic material, which absorbs or
adsorbs the water vapor from the moisture. If this process is thermally isolated, then the
enthalpy of air remains constant, as a result the temperature of air increases as its
moisture content decreases as shown in Fig.28.7. This hygroscopic material can be a
solid or a liquid. In general, the absorption of water by the hygroscopic material is an
exothermic reaction, as a result heat is released during this process, which is
transferred to air and the enthalpy of air increases.
Hygroscopic
Waterial
O

WF

O
TO

TF

Fig.28.7. Chemical de-humidification process

g) Mixing of air streams:
Mixing of air streams at different states is commonly encountered in many
processes, including in air conditioning. Depending upon the state of the individual
streams, the mixing process can take place with or without condensation of moisture.
i) Without condensation: Figure 28.8 shows an adiabatic mixing of two moist air
streams during which no condensation of moisture takes place. As shown in the figure,
when two air streams at state points 1 and 2 mix, the resulting mixture condition 3 can
be obtained from mass and energy balance.
From the mass balance of dry air and water vapor:
ma,1w1 +ma,2w2 = ma,3w3 = (ma,1 +ma,2 )w3

(28.16)

From energy balance:

ma,1h1 +ma,2h2 = ma,3h3 = (ma,1 +ma,2 )h3

(28.17)

From the above equations, it can be observed that the final enthalpy and
humidity ratio of mixture are weighted averages of inlet enthalpies and humidity ratios.
A generally valid approximation is that the final temperature of the mixture is the
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 9

10
weighted average of the inlet temperatures. With this approximation, the point on the
psychrometric chart representing the mixture lies on a straight line connecting the two
inlet states. Hence, the ratio of distances on the line, i.e., (1-3)/(2-3) is equal to the ratio
of flow rates ma,2/ma,1. The resulting error (due to the assumption that the humid specific
heats being constant) is usually less than 1 percent.

Fig.28.8. Mixing of two air streams without condensation

ii) Mixing with condensation:
As shown in Fig.28.9, when very cold and dry air mixes with warm air at high
relative humidity, the resulting mixture condition may lie in the two-phase region, as a
result there will be condensation of water vapor and some amount of water will leave
the system as liquid water. Due to this, the humidity ratio of the resulting mixture (point
3) will be less than that at point 4. Corresponding to this will be an increase in
temperature of air due to the release of latent heat of condensation. This process rarely
occurs in an air conditioning system, but this is the phenomenon which results in the
formation of fog or frost (if the mixture temperature is below 0 oC). This happens in
winter when the cold air near the earth mixes with the humid and warm air, which
develops towards the evening or after rains.

Fig.28.9. Mixing of two air streams with condensation

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 10

11

28.3. Air Washers:

An air washer is a device for conditioning air. As shown in Fig.28.10, in an air
washer air comes in direct contact with a spray of water and there will be an exchange
of heat and mass (water vapour) between air and water. The outlet condition of air
depends upon the temperature of water sprayed in the air washer. Hence, by controlling
the water temperature externally, it is possible to control the outlet conditions of air,
which then can be used for air conditioning purposes.

Make-up
Air in
out
water

Eliminator Plates
Pump
Cooler/heater
Fig.28.10: Air washer
In the air washer, the mean temperature of water droplets in contact with air
decides the direction of heat and mass transfer. As a consequence of the 2 nd law, the
heat transfer between air and water droplets will be in the direction of decreasing
temperature gradient. Similarly, the mass transfer will be in the direction of decreasing
vapor pressure gradient. For example,
1269. Cooling and dehumidification: tw < tDPT. Since the exit enthalpy of air is less than
its inlet value, from energy balance it can be shown that there is a transfer of total
energy from air to water. Hence to continue the process, water has to be externally
cooled. Here both latent and sensible heat transfers are from air to water. This is shown
by Process O-A in Fig.28.11.
1270. Adiabatic saturation: tw = tWBT. Here the sensible heat transfer from air to water is
exactly equal to latent heat transfer from water to air. Hence, no external cooling or
heating of water is required. That is this is a case of pure water recirculation. This is

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 11

12
shown by Process O-B in Fig.28.11. This the process that takes place in a perfectly
insulated evaporative cooler.
1271. Cooling and humidification: tDPT < tw < tWBT. Here the sensible heat transfer is from air
to water and latent heat transfer is from water to air, but the total heat transfer is from
air to water, hence, water has to be cooled externally. This is shown by Process O-C in
Fig.28.11.
1272. Cooling and humidification: tWBT < tw < tDBT. Here the sensible heat transfer is from air
to water and latent heat transfer is from water to air, but the total heat transfer is from
water to air, hence, water has to be heated externally. This is shown by Process O-D in
Fig.28.11. This is the process that takes place in a cooling tower. The air stream
extracts heat from the hot water coming from the condenser, and the cooled water is
sent back to the condenser.
1273. Heating and humidification: tw > tDBT. Here both sensible and latent heat transfers
are from water to air, hence, water has to be heated externally. This is shown by
Process O-E in Fig.28.11.
Thus, it can be seen that an air washer works as a year-round air conditioning
system. Though air washer is a and extremely useful simple device, it is not commonly
used for comfort air conditioning applications due to concerns about health resulting
from bacterial or fungal growth on the wetted surfaces. However, it can be used in
industrial applications.

W
DBT

Fig.28.11: Various psychrometric processes that can take place in an air washer

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 12

28.4. Enthalpy potential:

As shown in case of an air washer, whenever water (or a wetted surface) and air contact
each other, there is possibility of heat and moisture transfer between them. The directions of
heat and moisture transfer depend upon the temperature and vapor pressure differences
between air and water. As a result, the direction of the total heat transfer rate, which is a sum of
sensible heat transfer and latent heat transfers also depends upon water and air conditions.
The concept of enthalpy potential is very useful in quantifying the total heat transfer in these
processes and its direction.
The sensible (QS) and latent (QL) heat transfer rates are given by:
QS = hCAS(ti -t a )
(28.18)

QL = mw .hfg = hD.AS(wi - wa).hfg

the total heat transfer QT is given by:

(28.19)
QT = QS +QL =hCAS(ti - t a ) + hD.AS(wi -wa).hfg
where ta

= dry-bulb temperature of air, oC

ti

= temperature of water/wetted surface, oC

wa

= humidity ratio of air, kg/kg

wi

= humidity ratio of saturated air at ti, kg/kg

hc

= convective heat transfer coefficient, W/m2.oC

hD

= convective mass transfer coefficient, kg/m2

hfg

= latent heat of vaporization, J/kg

Since the transport mechanism that controls the convective heat transfer between air
and water also controls the moisture transfer between air and water, there exists a relation
between heat and mass transfer coefficients, h c and hD as discussed in an earlier chapter. It
has been shown that for air-water vapor mixtures,
h
orDC
hc

= Lewis number 1.0

cpm

hD.cpm

(28.20)

where cpm is the humid specific heat 1.0216 kJ/kg.K. Hence the total
heat transfer is given by:
QT = QS +QL =

CS

[(ti - ta) + (wi - wa).hfg] cpm

(28.21)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 13

14
by manipulating the term in the parenthesis of RHS, it can be shown that:
QT = QS +QL = hCAS [(hi -ha)]

(28.22)

cpm

thus the total heat transfer and its direction depends upon the enthalpy difference (or
potential) between water and air (hi-ha).
if hi > ha; then the total heat transfer is from water to air and water gets cooled
if hi < ha; then the total heat transfer is from air to water and water gets heated
if hi = ha; then the net heat transfer is zero, i.e., the sensible heat transfer rate is equal
to but in the opposite direction of latent heat transfer. Temperature of water remains at
its wet bulb temperature value
The concept of enthalpy potential is very useful in psychrometric calculations
and is frequently used in the design and analysis of evaporative coolers, cooling
towers, air washers etc.

Questions and answers:

1. Which of the following statements are TRUE?
a) During sensible cooling of air, both dry bulb and wet bulb temperatures decrease
b) During sensible cooling of air, dry bulb temperature decreases but wet bulb
temperature remains constant
c) During sensible cooling of air, dry and wet bulb temperatures decrease but dew point
temperature remains constant
d) During sensible cooling of air, dry bulb, wet bulb and dew point temperatures
decrease
Ans.: a) and c)
2. Which of the following statements are TRUE?
1274. The sensible heat factor for a sensible heating process is 1.0
1275. The sensible heat factor for a sensible cooling process is 0.0
1276. Sensible heat factor always lies between 0.0 and 1.0
1277. Sensible heat factor is low for air conditioning plants operating in humid climates
Ans.: a) and d)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 14

15
3. Which of the following statements are TRUE?
1278. As the by-pass factor (BPF) of the cooling coil increases, temperature difference
between air at the outlet of the coil and coil ADP decreases
1279. The BPF of the coil increases as the velocity of air through the coil increases
1280. The BPF of the coil increases as the fin pitch increases
1281. The BPF of the coil decreases as the number of rows in the flow direction
increase
Ans.: b), c) and d)
4. Which of the following statements are TRUE?
1282. During cooling and humidification process, the enthalpy of air decreases
1283. During cooling and humidification process, the enthalpy of air increases
1284. During cooling and humidification process, the enthalpy of air remains constant
d) During cooling and humidification process, the enthalpy of air may increase,
decrease or remain constant depending upon the temperature of the wet surface
Ans.: d)
5. An air stream at a flow rate of 1 kg/s and a DBT of 30 oC mixes adiabatically with
another air stream flowing with a mass flow rate of 2 kg/s and at a DBT of 15 oC.
Assuming no condensation to take place, the temperature of the mixture is
approximately equal to:
1285. 20oC
1286. 22.5oC
1287. 25oC
1288. Cannot be found
Ans.: a)
6. Which of the following statements are TRUE?
1289. In an air washer, water has to be externally cooled if the temperature at which it
is sprayed is equal to the dry bulb temperature of air
1290. In an air washer, water has to be externally heated if the temperature at which it
is sprayed is equal to the dry bulb temperature of air
1291. In an air washer, if water is simply recirculated, then the enthalpy of air remains
nearly constant at steady state

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 15

d) In an air washer, if water is simply recirculated, then the moisture content of air
remains nearly constant at steady state
Ans.: b) and c)
7. Which of the following statements are TRUE?
1292. When the enthalpy of air is equal to the enthalpy of saturated air at the wetted
surface temperature, then there is no sensible heat transfer between air and the wetted
surface
1293. When the enthalpy of air is equal to the enthalpy of saturated air at the wetted
surface temperature, then there is no latent heat transfer between air and the wetted
surface
1294. When the enthalpy of air is equal to the enthalpy of saturated air at the wetted
surface temperature, then there is no net heat transfer between air and the wetted
surface
1295. When the enthalpy of air is equal to the enthalpy of saturated air at the wetted
surface temperature, then the wet bulb temperature of air remains constant
Ans.: c) and d)
8. What is the required wattage of an electrical heater that heats 0.1 m 3/s of air from
15oC and 80% RH to 55oC? The barometric pressure is 101.325 kPa.
Ans.: Air undergoes sensible heating as it flows through the electrical heater
From energy balance, the required heater wattage (W) is given by:
W = ma(he-hi) (Va/Va).cpm(Te-Ti)
Where Va is the volumetric flow rate of air in m3/s and va is the specific volume of dry
air. Te and Ti are the exit and inlet temperatures of air and cpm is the average specific
heat of moist air (1021.6 J/kg.K).
Using perfect gas model, the specific volume of dry air is found to be:
Va = (Ra.T/Pa) = (Ra.T/( Pt -Pv))
At 15oC and 80% RH, the vapour pressure p v is found to be 1.364 kPa using
psychrometric chart or equations.
Substituting the values of Ra, T, pt and pv in the equation for specific volume, we find
the value of specific volume to be 0.8274 m3/kg
.. Heater wattage, W (Va/va).cpm(Te-Ti)=(0.1/0.8274)x1021.6(55-15) = 4938.8 W
(ans.)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 16

9. 0.2 kg/s of moist air at 45oC (DBT) and 10% RH is mixed with 0.3 kg/s of moist air at
25oC and a humidity ratio of 0.018 kgw/kgda in an adiabatic mixing chamber. After
mixing, the mixed air is heated to a final temperature of 40oC using a heater. Find the
temperature and relative humidity of air after mixing. Find the heat transfer rate in the
heater and relative humidity of air at the exit of heater. Assume the barometric pressure
to be 1 atm.
Ans.: Given:
Stream 1: mass flow rate, m1 = 0.2 kg/s; T1 = 45oC and RH = 10%.
Using psychrometric equations or psychrometric chart, the humidity ratio and enthalpy
of stream 1 are found to be:
W1 = 0.006 kgw/kgda & h1 = 61.0 kJ/kgda
Stream 2: mass flow rate, m2 = 0.3 kg/s; T2 = 45oC and W2 = 0.018 kgw/kgda
Using psychrometric equations or psychrometric chart, enthalpy of stream 2 is found to
be:
h1 = 71.0 kJ/kgda
For the adiabatic mixing process, from mass balance:
m a,1 w 1 +m a,2 w 2 0.2x0.006 + 0.3x0.018
W3 =--------------------------=-------------------------------= 0.0132 kgw/kgda
ma,1+ma,2
0.2 + 0.3
From energy balance (assuming the specific heat of moist air to remain constant):
m a T + m a,2 T 2 0.2x45 + 0.3x25
o
T3 =--------------------=-----------------------= 33 C
ma,1+ma,2
0.2 + 0.3

(ans.)

From T3 and W3, the relative humidity of air after mixing is found to be:
RH3 = 41.8%

(ans.)

For the sensible heating process in the heater:

Qs = ma(he-hi) ma.cpm(Te-Ti) = 0.5x1.0216(40-33) = 3.5756 kW (ans.)
The relative humidity at the exit of heater is obtained from the values of DBT (40oC) and
humidity ratio (0.0132 kgw/kgda) using psychrometric chart/equations. This is found to
be:
RH at 40oC and 0.0132 kgw/kgda = 28.5 %

(ans.)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 17

18
10. A cooling tower is used for cooling the condenser water of a refrigeration system
having a heat rejection rate of 100 kW. In the cooling tower air enters at 35 oC (DBT)
and 24oC (WBT) and leaves the cooling tower at a DBT of 26 oC relative humidity of
95%. What is the required flow rate of air at the inlet to the cooling tower in m 3/s. What
is the amount of make-up water to be supplied? The temperature of make-up water is
at 30oC, at which its enthalpy (hw) may be taken as 125.4 kJ/kg. Assume the barometric
pressure to be 1 atm.
Ans.:
At the inlet to cooling tower: DBT = 35oC and WBT = 24oC
From psychrometric chart/equations the following values are obtained for the inlet:
Humidity ratio, Wi = 0.01426 kgw/kgda
Enthalpy, hi = 71.565 kJ/kgda
Sp. volume, i = 0.89284 m3/kgda
At the outlet to cooling tower: DBT = 26oC and RH = 95%
From psychrometric chart/equations the following values are obtained for the outlet:
Humidity ratio, Wo = 0.02025 kgw/kgda
Enthalpy, hi = 77.588 kJ/kgda
From mass and energy balance across the cooling tower:
Qc = ma{(ho-hi) - (Wo-Wi)hw} = 100 kW
Substituting the values of enthalpy and humidity ratio at the inlet and outlet of cooling
tower and enthalpy of make-up water in the above expression, we obtain:
ma = 18.97 kg/s,
hence, the volumetric flow rate, Vi = ma x i = 16.94 m3/s (ans.)
Amount of make-up water required mw is obtained from mass balance as:
mw = ma(Wo - Wi) = 18.97(0.02025 - 0.01426) = 0.1136 kg/s = 113.6 grams/s (ans.)
11. In an air conditioning system air at a flow rate of 2 kg/s enters the cooling coil at
25oC and 50% RH and leaves the cooling coil at 11oC and 90% RH. The apparatus dew
point of the cooling coil is 7 oC. Find a) The required cooling capacity of the coil, b)
Sensible Heat Factor for the process, and c) By-pass factor of the cooling coil. Assume
the barometric pressure to be 1 atm. Assume the condensate water to leave the coil at
ADP (hw = 29.26 kJ/kg)
Ans.: At the inlet to the cooling coil; Ti = 25oC and RH = 50%
From psychrometric chart; Wi = 0.00988 kgw/kgda and hi = 50.155 kJ/kgda
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 18

1
9 At the outlet of the cooling coil; To = 11oC and RH = 90% From psychrometric chart;
Wo = 0.00734 kgw/kgda and ho = 29.496 kJ/kgda
a) From mass balance across the cooling coil, the condesate rate, mw is:
mw = ma(Wi - Wo) = 2.0(0.00988 - 0.00734) = 0.00508 kg/s
From energy balance across the cooling tower, the required capacity of the cooling coil,
Qc is given by:;
Qc = ma(hi - ho) mw.hw = 2.0(50.155 - 29.496) - 0.00508 x 29.26 = 41.17 kW (ans.)
b) The sensible heat transfer rate, Qs is given by:
Qs = macpm(Ti - To) = 2.0 x 1.0216 x (25 - 11) = 28.605 kW The
latent heat transfer rate, Ql is given by:
Qs = mahfg(Wi - Wo) = 2.0 x 2501.0 x (0.00988 - 0.00734) = 12.705 kW1 The
Sensible Heat Factor (SHF) is given by:
SHF = Qs/(Qs + Ql) = 28.605/(28.605 + 12.705) = 0.692

(ans.)

c) From its definition, the by-pass factor of the coil, BPF is given by:
BPF = (To - ADP)/(Ti - ADP) = (11 - 7)/(25 - 7) = 0.222

(ans.)

The small difference between Qc and (Qs + Ql) is due to the use of average values for specific
heat, cpm and latent heat of vaporization, hfg.
1

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 19

Lesson
29
Inside And Outside
Design Conditions
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 1

The specific objectives of this lecture are to:

1296. Describe a typical air conditioning system and discuss the need for fixing
suitable indoor and outdoor design conditions (Section 29.1)
1297. Discuss the criteria used for selecting inside design conditions (Section
29.2)
1298. Define thermal comfort, metabolic rate and response of human beings to
variation in body temperature (Section 29.3)
4. Present heat balance equation, equations for convective, radiative and
evaporative losses from the skin, metabolic rates for various types of activities
and discuss the thermo-regulatory mechanism used by human body to fight
against heat and cold (Section 29.4)
1299. Discuss the factors affecting thermal comfort (Section 29.5)
1300. Discuss the various thermal indices used for evaluating indoor
environment and present ASHRAE comfort chart, recommended inside design
conditions and discuss the concept of Predicted Mean Vote (PMV) and Percent
of People Dissatisfied (PPD) (Section 29.6)
1301. Discuss the criteria used for selecting outside design conditions and
present typical summer design conditions for major Indian cities as suggested by
ASHRAE (Section 29.7)
At the end of the lecture, the student should be able to:
1302. Explain the need for selecting design inside and outside conditions with
respect to a typical air conditioning system
1303. Define thermal comfort, metabolism, metabolic rate and discuss the
effects of variation in body temperatures on human beings
1304. Write the heat balance and heat transfer equations from a human body
and using these equations, estimate various heat transfer rates
1305. List the factors affecting thermal comfort
1306. Define the various thermal indices used in evaluating indoor environment
1307. Draw the ASHRAE comfort chart and mark the comfort zones for summer
and winter conditions
1308. Select suitable indoor design conditions based on comfort criteria
1309. Define PMV and PPD and explain their significance
1310. Explain the method followed for selecting suitable outside design
conditions

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 2

29.1. Introduction:
Design and analysis of air conditioning systems involves selection of
suitable inside and outside design conditions, estimation of the required capacity
of cooling or heating equipment, selection of suitable cooling/heating system,
selecting supply conditions, design of air transmission and distribution systems
etc. Generally, the inputs are the building specifications and its usage pattern and
any other special requirements. Figure 29.1 shows the schematic of a basic
summer air conditioning system. As shown in the figure, under a typical summer
condition, the building gains sensible and latent heats from the surroundings and
also due to internal heat sources (RSH and RLH). The supply air to the building
extracts the building heat gains from the conditioned space. These heat gains
along with other heat gains due to ventilation, return ducts etc. have to be
extracted from the air stream by the cooling coil, so that air at required cold and
dry condition can be supplied to the building to complete the cycle. In general,
the sensible and latent heat transfer rates (GSH and GLH) on the cooling coil are
larger than the building heat gains due to the need for ventilation and return duct
losses. To estimate the required cooling capacity of the cooling coil (GTH), it is
essential to estimate the building and other heat gains. The building heat gains
depend on the type of the building, outside conditions and the required inside
conditions. Hence selection of suitable inside and outside design conditions is an
important step in the design and analysis of air conditioning systems.
A/C bldg

Return fan

ti, Wi, h

me= mo

Return duct losses

RTH=RSH+RLH

mrc

Cooling coil
Supply
m
fan
o
GTH=GSH+GLH

ms=mo+ mrc
Supply duct losses

By-pass Fig.29.1: Schematic of a basic summer air

conditioning system

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 3

29.2. Selection of inside design conditions:

The required inside design conditions depend on the intended use of the
building. Air conditioning is required either for providing suitable comfort
conditions for the occupants (e.g. comfort air conditioning), or for providing
suitable conditions for storage of perishable products (e.g. in cold storages) or
conditions for a process to take place or for products to be manufactured (e.g.
industrial air conditioning). The required inside conditions for cold storage and
industrial air conditioning applications vary widely depending on the specific
requirement. However, the required inside conditions for comfort air conditioning
systems remain practically same irrespective of the size, type, location, use of
the air conditioning building etc., as this is related to the thermal comfort of the
human beings.

29.3. Thermal comfort:

Thermal comfort is defined as that condition of mind which expresses
satisfaction with the thermal environment. This condition is also some times
called as neutral condition, though in a strict sense, they are not necessarily
same. A living human body may be likened to a heat engine in which the
chemical energy contained in the food it consumes is continuously converted into
work and heat. The process of conversion of chemical energy contained in food
into heat and work is called as metabolism. The rate at which the chemical
energy is converted into heat and work is called as metabolic rate. Knowledge
of metabolic rate of the occupants is required as this forms a part of the cooling
load of the air conditioned building. Similar to a heat engine, one can define
thermal efficiency of a human being as the ratio of useful work output to the
energy input. The thermal efficiency of a human being can vary from 0% to as
high as 15-20% for a short duration. By the manner in which the work is defined,
for most of the light activities the useful work output of human beings is zero,
indicating a thermal efficiency of 0%. Irrespective of the work output, a human
body continuously generates heat at a rate varying from about 100 W (e.g. for a
sedentary person) to as high as 2000 W (e.g. a person doing strenuous
exercise). Continuous heat generation is essential, as the temperature of the
human body has to be maintained within a narrow range of temperature,
irrespective of the external surroundings.
A human body is very sensitive to temperature. The body temperature
must be maintained within a narrow range to avoid discomfort, and within a
somewhat wider range, to avoid danger from heat or cold stress. Studies show
that at neutral condition, the temperatures should be:

Skin temperature, tskin 33.7oC

Core temperature, tcore 36.8oC

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 4

At other temperatures, the body will feel discomfort or it may even become
lethal. It is observed that when the core temperature is between 35 to 39 oC, the
body experiences only a mild discomfort. When the temperature is lower than
35oC or higher than 39 oC, then people suffer major loss in efficiency. It becomes
lethal when the temperature falls below 31oC or rises above 43oC. This is shown
in Fig. 29.2.
Major loss in efficiency

31oC

35oC

36.8oC

39oC

43oC

Neutral condition
Fig.29.2: Affect of the variation of core temperature on a human being

29.4: Heat balance equation for a human being:

The temperature of human body depends upon the energy balance
between itself and the surrounding thermal environment. Taking the human body
as the control volume, one can write the thermal energy (heat) balance equation
for the human body as:
Qgen =Qsk +Qres +Q

where Qgen
Qsk

(29.1)

st

= Rate at which heat is generated inside the body

= Total heat transfer rate from the skin
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 5

Qres = Heat transfer rate due to respiration, and Qst

Rate at which heat is stored inside the body

The heat generation rate Qgen is given by:

Qgen = M(1-)M

(29.2)

where M = Metabolic rate, and

= Thermal efficiency 0 for most of the activities
The metabolic rate depends on the activity. It is normally measured in the unit
met. A met is defined as the metabolic rate per unit area of a sedentary person and is
found to be equal to about 58.2 W/m2. This is also known as basal metabolic rate.
Table 29.1 shows typical metabolic rates for different activities:
Typical metabolic rates
Activity
Resting

Walking
Office activity
Driving
Domestic activities
Dancing
Teaching
Games and sports

Specifications
Sleeping
Reclining Seated,
quite
Standing, relaxed
0.89 m/s
1.79 m/s
Typing
Car
Heavy vehicles
Cooking
Washing dishes
House cleaning
Tennis, singles
Gymnastics
Basket ball
Wrestling

Metabolic rate
0.7 met
0.8 met
1.0 met
1.2 met
2.0 met
3.8 met
1.1 met
met 1.0 to 2.0
3.2 met
1.6 to 2.0 met
1.6 met
2.0 to 3.4 met
2.4 to 4.4 met
1.6 met
3.6 to 4.0 met
4.0 met
5.0 to 7.6 met
7.0 to 8.7 met

Studies show that the metabolic rate can be correlated to the rate of respiratory
oxygen consumption and carbon dioxide production. Based on this empirical equations
have been developed which relate metabolic rate to O 2 consumption and CO2
production.
Since the metabolic rate is specified per unit area of the human body (naked
body), it is essential to estimate this area to calculate the total metabolic rate. Even
though the metabolic rate and heat dissipation are not uniform throughout the body, for
calculation purposes they are assumed to be uniform.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 6

The human body is considered to be a cylinder with uniform heat

generation and dissipation. The surface area over which the heat dissipation
takes place is given by an empirical equation, called as Du Bois Equation. This
equation expresses the surface area as a function of the mass and height of the
human being. It is given by:
h
where ADu
m
h

0.425 0.725 ADu

= 0.202m

(29.3)
2

= Surface area of the naked body, m

= Mass of the human being, kg
= Height of the human being, m

Since the area given by Du Bois equation refers to a naked body, a

correction factor must be applied to take the clothing into account. This correction
factor, defined as the ratio of surface area with clothes to surface area without
clothes has been determined for different types of clothing. These values are
available in ASHRAE handbooks. Thus from the metabolic rate and the surface
area, one can calculate the amount of heat generation, Qgen.
The total heat transfer rate from the skin Qsk is given by:
Qsk = Qconv Qrad + Qevp

(29.4)

where Qconv = Heat transfer rate due to convection (sensible heat) Qrad
= Heat transfer rate due to radiation (sensible heat), and Qevp =
Heat transfer rate due to evaporation (latent heat)
The convective and radiative heat transfers can be positive or negative,
i.e., a body may lose or gain heat by convection and radiation, while the
evaporation heat transfer is always positive, i.e., a body always looses heat by
evaporation. Using the principles of heat and mass transfer, expressions have
been derived for estimating the convective, radiative and evaporative heat
transfer rates from a human body. As it can be expected, these heat transfer
rates depend on several factors that influence each of the heat transfer
mechanism.
According to Belding and Hatch, the convective, radiative and evaporative
heat transfer rates from the naked body of an average adult , Q c, Qr and Qe,
respectively, are given by:
Qc= 14.8V05 ( t b - t )
Qr = 11.603 (tb- t s )
Qe = 181.76V

(29.5)

(psb - p v )

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 7

In the above equation all the heat transfer rates are in watts, temperatures
are in oC and velocity is in m/s; ps,b and pv are the saturated pressure of water
vapour at surface temperature of the body and partial pressure of water vapour in
air, respectively, in kPa. From the above equations it is clear that the convective
heat transfer from the skin can be increased either by increasing the surrounding
air velocity (V) and/or by reducing the surrounding air DBT (t). The radiative heat
transfer rate can be increased by reducing the temperature of the surrounding
surfaces with which the body exchanges radiation. The evaporative heat transfer
rate can be increased by increasing the surrounding air velocity and/or by
reducing the moisture content of surrounding air.
The heat transfer rate due to respiration Qres is given by:
Qres = Cres +Eres

(29.5)

where Cres = Dry heat loss from respiration (sensible, positive or negative) Eres
= Evaporative heat loss from respiration (latent, always positive)
The air inspired by a human being is at ambient conditions, while air
expired is considered to be saturated and at a temperature equal to the core
temperature. Significant heat transfer can occur due to respiration. Correlations
have been obtained for dry and evaporative heat losses due to respiration in
terms of metabolic rate, ambient conditions etc.
For comfort, the rate of heat stored in the body Qst should be zero, i.e.,
Qst = 0 at neutral condition

(29.6)

However, it is observed that a human body is rarely at steady state, as a

result the rate of heat stored in the body is non-zero most of the time. Depending
upon the surroundings and factors such as activity level etc., the heat stored is
either positive or negative. However, the body cannot sustain long periods of
heat storage with a consequent change in body temperatures as discussed
before.
Since the body temperature depends on the heat balance, which in turn
depends on the conditions in the surroundings, it is important that the
surrounding conditions should be such that the body is able to maintain the
thermal equilibrium with minimum regulatory effort. All living beings have in-built
body regulatory processes against cold and heat, which to some extent
maintains the body temperatures when the external conditions are not favorable.
For example, human beings consist of a thermoregulatory system, which tries to
maintain the body temperature by initiating certain body regulatory processes
against cold and heat.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 8

When the environment is colder than the neutral zone, then body loses
more heat than is generated. Then the regulatory processes occur in the
following order.
1311. Zone of vaso-motor regulation against cold (vaso-constriction): Blood
vessels adjacent to the skin constrict, reducing flow of blood and transport of
heat to the immediate outer surface. The outer skin tissues act as insulators.
1312. Zone of metabolic regulation: If environmental temperature drops further,
then vaso-motor regulation does not provide enough protection. Hence, through
a spontaneous increase of activity and by shivering, body heat generation is
increased to take care of the increased heat losses.
3. Zone of inevitable body cooling: If the environmental temperature drops
further, then the body is not able to combat cooling of its tissues. Hence the body
temperature drops, which could prove to be disastrous. This is called as zone of
inevitable body cooling.
When the environment is hotter than the neutral zone, then body loses
less heat than is generated. Then the regulatory processes occur in the following
order.
1313. Zone of vaso-motor regulation against heat (vaso-dilation): Here the blood
vessels adjacent to the skin dilate, increasing the flow of blood and transport of
heat to the immediate outer surface. The outer skin temperature increases
providing a greater temperature for heat transfer by convection and radiation.
1314. Zone of evaporative regulation: If environmental temperature increases
further, the sweat glands become highly active drenching the body surface with
perspiration. If the surrounding air humidity and air velocity permit, then increase
in body temperature is prevented by increased evaporation from the skin.
1315. Zone of inevitable body heating: If the environmental temperature
increases further, then body temperature increases leading to the zone of
inevitable body heating. The internal body temperature increases leading several
ill effects such as heat exhaustion (with symptoms of fatigue, headache,
dizziness, irritability etc.), heat cramps (resulting in loss of body salts due to
increased perspiration) and finally heat stroke. Heat stroke could cause
permanent damage to the brain or could even be lethal if the body temperature
exceeds 43oC.
Thus it is seen that even though human body possesses a regulatory
mechanism, beyond certain conditions it becomes ineffective. Hence it is
essential to ensure that surrounding conditions are conducive for comfortable
and safe living. The purpose of a comfort air conditioning system is to provide
suitable conditions in the occupied space so that it is thermally comfortable to the
occupants.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 9

A sedentary person at neutral condition loses about 40 % of heat by

evaporation, about 30 % by convection and 30 % by radiation. However, this
proportion may change with other factors. For example, the heat loss by
evaporation increases when the DBT of the environment increases and/or the
activity level increases

29.5. Factors affecting thermal comfort:

Thermal comfort is affected by several factors. These are:
1316. Physiological factors such as age, activity, sex and health. These factors
influence the metabolic rate. It is observed that of these factors, the most
important is activity. Other factors are found to have negligible effect on thermal
comfort.
1317. Insulating factor due to clothing. The type of clothing has strong influence
on the rate of heat transfer from the human body. The unit for measuring the
resistance offered by clothes is called as clo. 1 clo is equal to a resistance of
about 0.155 m2.K/W. Typical clo values for different types of clothing have been
estimated and are available in the form of tables. For example, a typical business
suit has a clo value of 1.0, while a pair of shorts has a clo value of about 0.05.
1318. Environmental factors. Important factors are the dry bulb temperature,
relative humidity, air motion and surrounding surface temperature. Of these the
dry bulb temperature affects heat transfer by convection and evaporation, the
relative humidity affects heat loss by evaporation, air velocity influences both
convective and evaporative heat transfer and the surrounding surface
temperature affects the radiative heat transfer.
Apart from the above, other factors such as drafts, asymmetrical cooling
or heating, cold or hot floors etc. also affect the thermal comfort. The objective of
a comfort air conditioning system is to control the environmental factors so that
comfort conditions prevail in the occupied space. It has no control on the
physiological and insulating factors. However, wearing suitable clothing may help
in reducing the cost of the air conditioning system.

29.6. Indices for thermal comfort:

It is seen that important factors which affect thermal comfort are the
activity, clothing, air DBT, RH, air velocity and surrounding temperature. It should
be noted that since so many factors are involved, many combinations of the
above conditions provide comfort. Hence to evaluate the effectiveness of the
conditioned space, several comfort indices have been suggested. These indices
can be divided into direct and derived indices. The direct indices are the dry bulb
temperature, humidity ratio, air velocity and the mean radiant temperature (Tmrt).

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 10

The mean radiant temperature Tmrt affects the radiative heat transfer and is defined (in
K) as:
Tmrt = Tg + CV 1 2 (Tg - Ta)

(29.7)

where:
Tg = Globe temperature measured at steady state by a thermocouple placed at the
center of a black painted, hollow cylinder (6 dia) kept in the conditioned space, K. The
reading of thermocouple results from a balance of convective and radiative heat
exchanges between the surroundings and the globe
Ta =
V=
C=

Ambient DBT, K
Air velocity in m/s, and
A constant, 0.247 X 109

The derived indices combine two or more direct indices into a single factor.
Important derived indices are the effective temperature, operative temperature, heat
stress index, Predicted Mean Vote (PMV), Percent of People Dissatisfied (PPD) etc.
Effective temperature (ET): This factor combines the effects of dry bulb temperature
and air humidity into a single factor. It is defined as the temperature of the environment
at 50% RH which results in the same total loss from the skin as in the actual
environment. Since this value depends on other factors such as activity, clothing, air
velocity and Tmrt, a Standard Effective Temperature (SET) is defined for the following
conditions:
Clothing
Activity
Air velocity
Tmrt

=
=
=
=

0.6 clo
1.0 met
0.1 m/s
DBT (in K)

Operative temperature (Top): This factor is a weighted average of air DBT and
Tmrt into a single factor. It is given by:
-ihrTmrt +hcTamb Tmrt + Tamb
op =

hr +hc

(298)

where hr and hc are the radiative and convective heat transfer coefficients and Tamb is
the DBT of air.
ASHRAE has defined a comfort chart based on the effective and operative
temperatures. Figure 29.3 shows the ASHRAE comfort chart with comfort zones for
summer and winter conditions. It can be seen from the chart that the comfort zones are
bounded by effective temperature lines, a constant RH line of 60% and
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 11

dew point temperature of 2oC. The upper and lower limits of humidity (i.e. 60 %
RH and 2oC DPT, respectively) are based on the moisture content related
considerations of dry skin, eye irritation, respiratory health and microbial growth.
The comfort chart is based on statistical sampling of a large number of occupants
with activity levels less than 1.2 met. On the chart, the region where summer and
winter comfort zones overlap, people in winter clothing feel slightly warm and
people in summer clothing feel slightly cool. Based on the chart ASHARE makes
the following recommendations:
Inside design conditions for Winter:
Top between 20.0 to 23.5oC at a RH of 60%
Top between 20.5 to 24.5oC at a DPT of 2oC
Inside design conditions for Summer:
Top between 22.5 to 26.0oC at a RH of 60%
Top between 23.5 to 27.0oC at a DPT of 2oC
ET=26oC
RH
DPT=2oC
= 60%
ET=23.5oC

Winter zone Summer zone

ET=20oC
ET=22.5oC
Top

Fig.29.3: ASHRAE comfort chart for a sedentary person (activity 1.2 met)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 12

Table 29.2 shows the recommended comfort conditions for different

seasons and clothing suitable at 50 % RH, air velocity of 0.15 m/s and an activity
level of 1.2 met.
Season
Winter
Summer

Clothing

Icl

Top,opt

Heavy slacks, long

sleeve shirt and
sweater
Light slacks and
short sleeve shirt
Minimal (shorts)

0.9 clo

22oC

Top range for 90%

acceptance
20 to 23.5 oC

0.5 clo

24.5oC

23 to 26oC

0.05
clo

27oC

26 to 29 oC

Table 29.2: Optimum and recommended operative temperatures for comfort

The above values may be considered as recommended inside design
conditions for comfort air conditioning. It will be shown later that the cost of air
conditioning (initial plus running) increases as the required inside
temperature increases in case of winter and as the required inside
condition decreases in case of summer. Hence, air conditioning systems
should be operated at as low a temperature as acceptable in winter and as high
a temperature as acceptable in summer. Use of suitable clothing and maintaining
suitable air velocities in the conditioned space can lead to reduced cost of air
conditioning. For example, in summer the clothing should be minimal at a socially
acceptable level, so that the occupied space can be maintained at higher
temperatures. Similarly, by increasing air velocity without causing draft, one can
maintain the occupied space at a higher temperature in summer. Similarly, the
inside temperatures can be higher for places closer to the equator (1oC rise in ET
is allowed for each 5o reduction in latitude). Of course, the above
recommendations are for normal activities. The required conditions change if the
activity levels are different. For example, when the activity level is high (e.g. in
gymnasium), then the required indoor temperatures will be lower. These special
considerations must be kept in mind while fixing the inside design conditions.
Prof. P.O. Fanger of Denmark has carried out pioneering and detailed studies on
thermal comfort and suggested comfort conditions for a wide variety of situations.

29.6.1. Predicted Mean Vote (PMV) and Percent People

Dissatisfied (PPD):
Based on the studies of Fanger and subsequent sampling studies,
ASHRAE has defined a thermal sensation scale, which considers the air
temperature, humidity, sex of the occupants and length of exposure. The scale is
based on empirical equations relating the above comfort factors. The scale varies

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 13

from +3 (hot) to -3 (cold) with 0 being the neutral condition. Then a Predicted
Mean Vote (PMV) that predicts the mean response of a large number of
occupants is defined based on the thermal sensation scale.
The PMV is defined by Fanger as:
PMV=[0.303exp(-0.036M) + 0.028]L

(29.9)

where M is the metabolic rate and L is the thermal load on the body that is the
difference between the internal heat generation and heat loss to the actual
environment of a person experiencing thermal comfort. The thermal load has to
be obtained by solving the heat balance equation for the human body.
Fanger related the PMV to Percent of People Dissatisfied (PPD) by the
following equation:
PPD = 100-95 exp[-(0.03353 PMV +0.2179 PMV )]

(29.10)

where dissatisfied refers to anybody not voting for -1, 0 or +1. It can be seen
from the above equation that even when the PMV is zero (i.e., no thermal load on
body) 5 % of the people are dissatisfied! When PMV is within 0.5, then PPD is
less than 10 %.
Of late, several studies have been carried out on adaptive thermal
comfort. These studies show that human beings adapt to their natural
surroundings so as to feel thermally comfortable. The adaptation consists of
changing their clothing, activity level and schedule, dietary habits etc. according
to the surrounding conditions. Due to this human tendency, it is observed that
human beings feel comfortable that are higher or lower than those suggested by
the heat balance equation as outlined by Fanger. It is observed that there is
correlation between the outside temperatures and the required inside
temperatures at which human beings feel comfortable, or at least do not feel
uncomfortable. For example, a study by Humphrey on adaptive thermal comfort
in tropical countries suggests the following correlation for comfort temperature in
free-running (non-air conditioned) buildings:
Tc = 0.534To +12.9

(29.11)

Where To and Tc are the outdoor and indoor comfort temperature in oC,
respectively. According to the above correlation, higher the outdoor temperature,
higher can be the indoor temperature. This is very important from energy
conservation point-of-view as air conditioning systems are very energy intensive,
and the load on an air conditioning plant can be reduced by maintaining the
indoor temperatures at as high a value as is allowed from thermal comfort pointof-view.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 14

29.7. Selection of outside design conditions:

The ambient temperature and moisture content vary from hour-to-hour
and from day-to-day and from place-to-place. For example, in summer the
ambient temperature increases from sunrise, reaches a maximum in the
afternoon and again decreases towards the evening. On a given day, the relative
humidity also varies with temperature and generally reaches a minimum value
when the ambient temperature is maximum. For most of the major locations of
the world, meteorological data is available in the form of mean daily or monthly
maximum and minimum temperatures and corresponding relative humidity or wet
bulb temperature. As mentioned before, to estimate the required cooling capacity
of an air conditioning plant, it is essential to fix the outside design conditions in
addition to the inside conditions. It is obvious that the selected design conditions
may prevail only for a short a duration, and most of the time the actual outside
conditions will be different from the design values. As a result, for most of the
time the plant will be running at off-design conditions.
The design outside conditions also depend on the following factors:
1319.
Type of the structure, i.e., whether it is of heavy construction,
medium or light
1320.
Insulation characteristics of the building
1321.
Area of glass or other transparent surfaces
1322.
Type of usage
1323.
Nature of occupancy
1324.
Daily range (difference between maximum and minimum
temperatures in a given day)
29.7.1. Outdoor design conditions for summer:
Selection of maximum dry and wet bulb temperatures at a particular
location leads to excessively large cooling capacities as the maximum
temperature generally persists for only a few hours in a year. Hence it is
recommended that the outdoor design conditions for summer be chosen based
on the values of dry bulb and mean coincident wet bulb temperature that is
equaled or exceeded 0.4, 1.0 or 2.0 % of total hours in an year. These values for
major locations in the world are available in data books, such as AHRAE
handbooks. Whether to choose the 0.4 % value or 1.0 % value or 2.0 % value
depends on specific requirements. In the absence of any special requirements,
the 1.0% or 2% value may be considered for summer outdoor design conditions.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 15

29.7.2. Outdoor design conditions for winter:

Similar to summer, it is not economical to design a winter air conditioning
for the worst condition on record as this would give rise to very high heating
capacities. Hence it is recommended that the outdoor design conditions for
winter be chosen based on the values of dry bulb temperature that is equaled
or exceeded 99.6 or 99.0 % of total hours in an year. Similar to summer
design conditions, these values for major locations in the world are available in
data books, such as AHRAE handbooks. Generally the 99.0% value is adequate,
but if the building is made of light-weight materials, poorly insulated or has
considerable glass or space temperature is critical, then the 99.6% value is
recommended.
Table 29.3 shows the ASHRAE recommended summer design conditions
for major Indian cities. In the table DB stands for the design DBT and MWB
stands for mean coincident WBT.
City
Ahmadabad
Bangalore
Bombay
Calcutta
Hyderabad
Jaipur
Madras
Nagpur
New Delhi
Poona
Trivendrum

0.4% value
DB
MWB
o
42.2 C 23.3oC
34.4oC 19.4oC
35.0oC 22.8oC
37.2oC 25.6oC
40.6oC 21.7oC
42.2oC 20.6oC
38.3oC 25.0oC
43.3oC 21.7oC
41.7oC 22.2oC
37.8oC 19.4oC
33.3oC 25.6oC

1.0% value
DB
MWB
o
41.1 C 23.3oC
33.3oC 19.4oC
33.9oC 23.3oC
36.1oC 26.1oC
39.4oC 21.7oC
40.6oC 20.6oC
37.2oC 25.0oC
42.2oC 21.7oC
40.6oC 22.2oC
37.2oC 19.4oC
32.8oC 25.6oC

2.0% value
DB
MWB
o
39.4 C 23.9oC
32.8oC 19.4oC
33.3oC 23.9oC
35.0oC 26.1oC
39.4oC 21.7oC
39.4oC 20.6oC
36.1oC 25.0oC
41.1oC 21.7oC
39.4oC 22.8oC
36.1oC 19.4oC
32.2oC 25.6oC

Daily
range
12.7oC
10.7oC
5.2oC
10.0oC
10.5oC
12.4oC
8.1oC
12.7oC
12.0oC
16.1oC
6.5oC

Table 29.3: Design summer outside conditions for some Indian cities (ASHRAE)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 16

Questions and answers:

1. Which of the following statements are TRUE?
1325.
1326.
being
1327.
1328.

The metabolic rate depends mainly on age of the human being

The metabolic rate depends mainly on the activity level of the human
The metabolic rate depends mainly on the sex of the human being
All of the above

Ans.: b)
2. Which of the following statements are TRUE?
1329. To maintain thermal comfort, the DBT of air should be increased as its
moisture content increases
1330. To maintain thermal comfort, the DBT of air should be decreased as air
velocity increases
1331. To maintain thermal comfort, the DBT of air should be increased as the
temperature of the surrounding surfaces decrease
1332. All of the above
Ans.: c)
3. Which of the following statements are TRUE?
1333. Surrounding air velocity affects convective heat transfer from the body
only
1334. Surrounding air velocity affects evaporative heat transfer from the body
only
1335. Surrounding air velocity affects both convective and evaporative heat
transfers from the body
d) Moisture content of the air affects both convective and evaporative heat
transfers from the body
Ans.: c)
4. Which of the following statements are TRUE?
1336. As the amount of clothing increases, the surrounding DBT should be
increased to maintain thermal comfort
1337. As the amount of clothing increases, the surrounding DBT should be
decreased to maintain thermal comfort
1338. As the activity level increases, DBT of air should be increased to maintain
thermal comfort
1339. As the activity level increases, DBT of air should be decreased to maintain
thermal comfort
Ans.: b) and d)
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 17

5. Which of the following statements are TRUE?

1340. Effective temperature combines the affects of dry bulb temperature and air
velocity into a single index
1341. Effective temperature combines the affects of dry bulb temperature and
wet bulb temperature into a single index
1342. Mean radiant temperature combines the affects of dry bulb temperature
and surrounding surface temperature into a single index
1343. Operative temperature combines the affects of dry bulb temperature and
mean radiant temperature into a single index
Ans.: b) and d)
6. From ASHRAE comfort chart it is observed that:
1344. Lower dry bulb temperatures and higher moisture content are
recommended for winter
1345. Lower dry bulb temperatures and lower moisture content are
recommended for winter
1346. Lower dry bulb temperatures and higher moisture content are
recommended for summer
1347. Higher dry bulb temperatures and higher moisture content are
recommended for summer
Ans.: b) and d)
7. Which of the following statements are TRUE?
1348. For the same metabolic rate, as the thermal load on human body
increases, the PMV value increases
1349. For the same metabolic rate, as the thermal load on human body
increases, the PMV value decreases
1350. As the absolute value of PMV increases, the percent of people dissatisfied
(PPD) increases
1351. As the absolute value of PMV increases, the percent of people dissatisfied
(PPD) decreases
Ans.: a) and c)
8. Which of the following statements are TRUE?
1352. When a human body is at neutral equilibrium, the PMV value is 1.0
1353. When a human body is at neutral equilibrium, the PMV value is 0.0
1354. When a human body is at neutral equilibrium, the PPD value is 0.0
1355. When a human body is at neutral equilibrium, the PPD value is 5.0
Ans.: b) and d)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 18

9. Which of the following statements are TRUE?

1356. The air conditioning load on a building increases, if 0.4% design value is
used for outside conditions instead of 1.0% value for summer
1357. The air conditioning load on a building decreases, if 0.4% design value is
used for outside conditions instead of 1.0% value for summer
1358. For winter air conditioning, a conservative approach is to select 99.6%
value for the outside design conditions instead of 99% value
1359. For winter air conditioning, a conservative approach is to select 99% value
for the outside design conditions instead of 99.6% value
Ans.: a) and c)
10. A 1.8 meter tall human being with a body mass of 60 kg performs light work
(activity = 1.2 met) in an indoor environment. The indoor conditions are: DBT of
30oC, mean radiant temperature of 32oC, air velocity of 0.2 m/s. Assuming an
average surface temperature of 34oC for the surface of the human being and
light clothing, find the amount of evaporative heat transfer required so that the
human being is at neutral equilibrium.
Ans.: Using Du Bois equation, the surface area of the human being As is: ADu
= 0.202m0.425h0.725 = 0.202x600.425 x1.8 0 7 2 5 =1.7625 m2

Hence the total heat generation rate from the body, Qg is:
Qg = As x (Activity level in met) x 58.2 = 1.7625 x 1.2 x 58.2 = 123.1 W
Using Belding & Hatch equations, the convective and radiative heat losses from
the surface of the body are found as:
Qc = 14.8 V (tb -t) = 14.8x0.2 (34-30) = 26.48 W Q r =
11.603 (tb - t s ) = 11.603(34-32) = 23.2W
For neutral equilibrium,
Qg = Qc + Qr + Qe = Qe = Qg - (Qc + Qr)

Substituting the values of Qg, Qc and Qr in the above expression, we find that
the required amount of evaporative heat transfer Qe is equal to:
Qe = 123.1 - (26.48+23.2) = 73.42 W

(Ans.)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 19

Lesson
30
Psychrometry Of Air
Conditioning Systems
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 1

The specific objectives of this lecture are to:

1360. Purpose of psychrometric calculations (Section 30.1)
1361. Analysis of a simple, summer air conditioning system with 100% re-circulated
air (Section 30.2.1)
1362. Analysis of a summer air conditioning system with outdoor air for ventilation
and with zero by-pass factor (Section 30.2.2)
4. Analysis of a simple, summer air conditioning system with outdoor air for
ventilation and with non-zero by-pass factor (Section 30.2.2)
1363. Analysis of a summer air conditioning system with re-heat for high latent
cooling load applications (Section 30.2.3)
1364. Selection guidelines for supply air conditions (Section 30.3)
At the end of the lesson, the student should be able to:
1. Estimate the load on the cooling coil and fix the supply conditions for various
summer conditioning systems, namely:
1365.
1366.
1367.
1368.

Systems with 100% re-circulation

Systems with outdoor air for ventilation with zero by-pass factor
Systems with outdoor air for ventilation with non-zero by-pass factor
Systems with reheat for high latent cooling load applications

.
30.1. Introduction:
Generally from the building specifications, inside and outside design
conditions; the latent and sensible cooling or heating loads on a building can be
estimated. Normally, depending on the ventilation requirements of the building, the
required outdoor air (fresh air) is specified. The topic of load estimation will be
discussed in a later chapter. From known loads on the building and design inside
and outside conditions, psychrometric calculations are performed to find:
1369.

Supply air conditions (air flow rate, DBT, humidity ratio & enthalpy)

1370.

Coil specifications (Latent and sensible loads on coil, coil ADP & BPF)

In this chapter fixing of supply air conditions and coil specifications for
summer air conditioning systems are discussed. Since the procedure is similar for
winter air conditioning system, the winter air conditioning systems are not discussed
here.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 2

30.2. Summer air conditioning systems:

30.2.1. Simple system with 100 % re-circulated air:
In this simple system, there is no outside air and the same air is recirculated
as shown in Fig.30.1. Figure 30.2 also shows the process on a psychrometric chart.
It can be seen that cold and dry air is supplied to the room and the air that leaves the
condition space is assumed to be at the same conditions as that of the conditioned
space. The supply air condition should be such that as it flows through the
conditioned space it can counteract the sensible and latent heat transfers taking
place from the outside to the conditioned space, so that the space can be maintained
at required low temperature and humidity. Assuming no heat gains in the supply and
return ducts and no energy addition due to fans, and applying energy balance across
the room; the Room Sensible Cooling load (Q s,r), Room Latent Cooling Load (Q l,r)
and Room Total Cooling load (Qt,r) are given by:
Qs,r =msCpm(ti - ts)

(30.1)

Ql,r =mshfg(Wi - Ws )

(30.2)

Qt,r =Qs,r + Ql,r =ms (hi -hs )

(30.3)

From cooling load calculations, the sensible, latent and total cooling loads on
the room are obtained. Hence one can find the Room Sensible Heat Factor (RSHF)
from the equation:
RSHF=

QQ
s,r
Qs,r

+Ql,r

s,r

(30.4)

Q t,r

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 3

-si-&Return
RSHF
ti,Wi,hi
Suppl line

t
h
e

Fan
y Fan
Qs,c, Ql,c

ti,Wi,hi

Cooling
coil

ms
ts,Ws,hs
-e~-

Fig.3
0.1: A
simpl
e,
100%
recircul
ation
type
air
condit
ioning
syste
m

F
rom
the
RS
HF
valu
e
one
can
calc
ulat
e
the
slop
e of
the
pro
ces
s
und
erg
one
by

a
i
r
a
s
i
t
f
l
o
w
s
t
h
r
o
u
g
h
t
h
e
c
o
n
d
i
t
i
o
n
e
d
s
p
a
c
e
(
p

rocess s-i) as:

slope of
process
line s-i,
tan =

11
2
4
5
1

.5)
(

S
i
n
c
e
t
h
e
c
o
n
d
i
t
i
o
n
i
i
s
k
n
o
w
n
s
a
y
,
f
r
o
m
t
h
e
r
m
a
l
c
o

m
f
o
rt
c
ri
t
e
ri
a
,
k
n
o
w
i
n
g
t
h
e
s
l
o
p
e
,
o
n
e
c
a
n
d
r
a
w
t
h
e
p
r
o
c
e
s
s
li
n
e
s
-i
t

h
r
o
u
g
h
i
.
T
h
e
i
n
t
e
r
s
e
c
t
i
o
n
o
f
t
h
i
s
l
i
n
e
w
i
t
h
t
h
e
s
a
t
u

ration curve
gives
the
ADP of the
cooling coil
as shown in
Fig.30.1. It
should
be
noted
that
for the given
room
sensible and
latent
cooling
loads,
the
supply
condition
must
always lie
on this line
so that the
it
can
extract the
sensible
and latent
loads
on
the
conditioned
space
in
the
required
proportions
.
Since
case

the
being
considered
is one of
100 % recirculation,
the process
that the air
undergoes
as it flows
through the
cooling coil
(i.e. process
i-s) will be
exactly
opposite to
the process
undergone
by air as it

f
l
o
w
s
t
h
r
o
u
g
h
t
h
e
r
o
o
m
(
p
r
o
c
e
s
s
s
i
)
.
T
h
u
s
,
t
h
e
t
e
m
p
e

r
a
t
u
r
e
a
n
d
h
u
m
i
d
it
y
r
a
ti
o
o
f
a
ir
d
e
c
r
e
a
s
e
a
s
it
fl
o
w
s
t
h
r
o
u
g
h
t
h
e
c
o
o
li

n
g
c
o
i
l
a
n
d
t
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e
a
n
d
h
u
m
i
d
i
t
y
r
a
t
i
o
i
n
c
r
e
a
s
e
a

s air flows
through the
conditioned
space.
Assuming
no
heat
transfer due
to the ducts
and
fans,
the sensible
and
latent
heat transfer
rates at the
cooling coil
are exactly
equal to the
sensible and
latent heat
transfer
rates to the
conditioned
space; i.e.,
Q s,r =Q l
s,c & Ql,r
=Q

6)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

Fixing of supply condition:

The supply condition has to be fixed using Eqns.(30.1) to (30.3). However,
since there are 4 unknowns (ms, ts, Ws and hs) and 3 equations, (Eqns.(30.1) to
(30.3)), one parameter has to be fixed to find the other three unknown parameters
from the three equations.
If the by-pass factor (X) of the cooling coil is known, then, from room
conditions, coil ADP and by-pass factor, the supply air temperature t s is obtained
using the definition of by-pass factor as:
X=

s- - - -ADP ^>ts =tADP+X(ti-tADP)

l t i - t AD P J

(30.7)

Once the supply temperature ts is known, then the mass flow rate of supply air is
obtained from Eqn.(30.1) as:
Q s,r

Q s,r

ms =------------------=-----------------------------Cpm(ti-ts)

(30.8)

Cpm(ti - tADP)(1- X)

From the mass flow rate of air and condition i, the supply air humidity ratio and
enthalpy are obtained using Eqns.(30.2) and (30.3) as:
Ws = Wi -

Q l,r

(30.9)

mshfg

hs=hi--------ms

(30.10)

From Eqn.(30.8), it is clear that the required mass flow rate of supply air
decreases as the by-pass factor X decreases. In the limiting case when the by-pass
factor is zero, the minimum amount of supply air flow rate required is:
Cpm(ti-t
ms,min =

ADP ) Q s,r

(30.11)

Thus with 100 % re-circulated air, the room ADP is equal to coil ADP and the
load on the coil is equal to the load on the room.

30.2.2. System with outdoor air for ventilation:

In actual air conditioning systems, some amount of outdoor (fresh) air is
added to take care of the ventilation requirements. Normally, the required outdoor air
for ventilation purposes is known from the occupancy data and the type of the
building (e.g. operation theatres require 100% outdoor air). Normally either the
quantity of outdoor air required is specified in absolute values or it is specified as a
fraction of the re-circulated air.
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 5

Fixing of supply condition:

Case i) By-pass factor of the cooling coil is zero:
Figure 30.2 shows the schematic of the summer air conditioning system with
outdoor air and the corresponding process on psychrometric chart, when the by-pass
factor X is zero. Since the sensible and latent cooling loads on the conditioned space
are assumed to be known from cooling load calculations, similar to the earlier case,
one can draw the process line s-i, from the RSHF and state i. The intersection of this
line with the saturation curve gives the room ADP. As shown on the psychrometric
chart, when the by-pass factor is zero, the room ADP is equal to coil ADP, which in
turn is equal to the temperature of the supply air. Hence from the supply temperature
one can calculate the required supply air mass flow rate (which is the minimum
required as X is zero) using the equation:
Qs,r

ms =
Qs,r

(30.12)

Cpm(ti -ts) Cpm(ti -tADP)

From the supply mass flow rate, one can find the supply air humidity ratio and
enthalpy using Eqns.(30.9) and (30.10).
ti,Wi,hi

Cooling
ti tm to

Supply
Fan

ms=mo+mrc
ti,Wi,hi

ADP = ts
Qs,c, Ql,ccoil

Fig.30.2: A summer air conditioning system with outdoor air for ventilation and a
zero by-pass factor
From mass balance of air;
ms =mrc +mo

(30.13)

Where mrc is the re-circulated air flow rate and mo is the outdoor air flow rate.
Since either mo or the ratio mo : mrc are specified, one can calculate the amount of recirculated air from Eqn.(30.13).
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 6

Calculation of coil loads:

From energy balance across the cooling coil; the sensible, latent and total
heat transfer rates, Qs,c, Ql,c and Qt,c at the cooling coil are given by:
Qsc =msCpm(tm - t s )
Ql,c =mshfg(Wm -Ws)
Qt,c =Qs,c +Ql,c =ms(hm - h s )

(30.14)

Where m refers to the mixing condition which is a result of mixing of the recirculated
air with outdoor air. Applying mass and energy balance to the mixing process one
can obtain the state of the mixed air from the equation:
Ti

Wm-Wi hm-hi
tm-t
=------------ =---------
ms Wo-Wi ho-hi t o - t i
o

(30.15)

Since (mo/ms) > 0, from the above equation it is clear that W m > Wi, hm > hi
and tm > ti. This implies that ms(hm - hs) > ms(hi - hs), or the load on the cooling coil is
greater than the load on the conditioned space. This is of course due to the fact that
during mixing, some amount of hot and humid air is added and the same amount of
relative cool and dry air is exhausted (m o = me).
From Eqn.(30.1) to (30.3) and (30.14), the difference between the cooling
load on the coil and cooling load on the conditioned space can be shown to be equal
to:
Qs,c-Qs,r = m o C p m ( t o - t i )

Ql c-Ql r = mohfg(Wo - Wi)

Qt,c - Qt,r = mo (ho - hi)

(30.16)

From the above equation it is clear that the difference between cooling coil
and conditioned space increases as the amount of outdoor air (m o) increases and/or
the outdoor air becomes hotter and more humid.
The line joining the mixed condition m with the coil ADP is the process line
undergone by the air as it flows through the cooling coil. The slope of this line
depends on the Coil Sensible Heat Factor (CSHF) given by:
Q s,c
Q s, c
CSHF=----------------=
Qs,c +Ql,c

(30.17)

Qt,c

Case ii: Coil by-pass factor, X > 0:

For actual cooling coils, the by-pass factor will be greater than zero, as a
result the air temperature at the exit of the cooling coil will be higher than the coil
ADP. This is shown in Fig.30.3 along with the process on psychrometric chart. It can
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 7

be seen from the figure that when X > 0, the room ADP will be different from the coil
ADP. The system shown in Fig.30.3 is adequate when the RSHF is high ( > 0.75).

m
A/C
Room
s=m
o+ morc

Return duct losses

ti, Wi, hi

Qs,r, Ql,r

Qt,c=Qs,c+Ql,c

i
s

me= mo

mrc

Return fan
Supply fan

Cooling coil

Supply duct losses

By-pass
ti t m t o
ADP

ts

Fig.30.3: A summer air conditioning system with outdoor air for ventilation and a nonzero by-pass factor

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 8

Normally in actual systems, either the supply temperature (t s) or the

temperature rise of air as it flows through the conditioned space (t i-ts) will be
specified. Then the step-wise procedure for finding the supply air conditions and the
coil loads are as follows:
i. Since the supply temperature is specified one can calculate the required supply air
flow rate and supply conditions using Eqns. (30.8) to (30.10).
ii. Since conditions i, supply air temperature ts and RSHF are known, one can draw
the line i-s. The intersection of this line with the saturation curve gives the room ADP.
iii. Condition of air after mixing (point m) is obtained from known values of m s and
mo using Eqn.(30.15).
iv. Now joining points m and s gives the process line of air as it flows through the
cooling coil. The intersection of this line with the saturation curve gives the coil ADP.
It can be seen that the coil ADP is lower than the room ADP.
v. The capacity of the cooling coil is obtained from Eqn.(30.14).
vi. From points m, s and coil ADP, the by-pass factor of the cooling coil can be
calculated.
If the coil ADP and coil by-pass factor are given instead of the supply air
temperature, then a trial-and-error method has to be employed to obtain the supply
air condition.
30.2.3. High latent cooling load applications (low RSHF):
When the latent load on the building is high due either to high outside
humidity or due to large ventilation requirements (e.g. hospitals) or due to high
internal latent loads (e.g. presence of kitchen or laundry), then the simple system
discussed above leads to very low coil ADP. A low coil ADP indicates operation of the
refrigeration system at low evaporator temperatures. Operating the system at low
evaporator temperatures decreases the COP of the refrigeration system leading to
higher costs. Hence a reheat coil is sometimes used so that the cooling coil can be
operated at relatively high ADP, and at the same time the high latent load can also
be taken care of. Figure 30.4 shows an air conditioning system with reheat coil along
with the psychrometric representation of the process. As shown in the figure, in a
system with reheat coil, air is first cooled and dehumidified from point m to point c
in the cooling coil and is then reheated sensibly to the required supply temperature t s
using the reheat coil. If the supply temperature is specified, then the mass flow rate
and state of the supply air and condition of the air after mixing can be obtained using
equations given above. Since the heating process in the reheat coil is sensible, the
process line c-s will be horizontal. Thus if the coil ADP is known, then one can draw
the coil condition line and the intersection of this line with the horizontal line drawn
from supply state s gives the condition of the air at the exit of the cooling coil. From
this condition, one can calculate the load on the cooling coil using the supply mass
flow rate and state of air after mixing. The capacity of the reheat coil is then obtained
from energy balance across it, i.e.,
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 9

a-

a-

iiii

Cooling coil
Reheat coil

Fig.30
.4: A
summ
er air
conditi
oning
syste
m with
reheat
coil
for
high
latent
coolin
g

load applications

Versio
n1
ME,
IIT
Khara
gpur
10

Advantages and disadvantages of reheat coil:

1371. Refrigeration system can be operated at reasonably high evaporator
temperatures leading to high COP and low running cost.
1372. However, mass flow rate of supply air increases due to reduced temperature
rise (ti-ts) across the conditioned space
1373. Wasteful use of energy as air is first cooled to a lower temperature and then
heated. Energy is required for both cooling as well as reheat coils. However, this can
be partially offset by using waste heat such as heat rejected at the condenser for
reheating of air.
Thus the actual benefit of reheat coil depends may vary from system.

30.3. Guidelines for selection of supply state and cooling coil:

i. As much as possible the supply air quantity should be minimized so that smaller
ducts and fans can be used leading savings in cost of space, material and power.
However, the minimum amount should be sufficient to prevent the feeling of
stagnation. If the required air flow rate through the cooling coil is insufficient, then it
is possible to mix some amount of re-circulated air with this air so that amount of air
supplied to the conditioned space increases. This merely increases the supply air
flow rate, but does not affect sensible and cooling loads on the conditioned space.
Generally, the temperature rise (ti-ts) will be in the range of 8 to 15oC.
ii. The cooling coil should have 2 to 6 rows for moderate climate and 6 to 8 rows in
hot and humid climate. The by-pass factor of the coil varies from 0.05 to 0.2. The bypass factor decreases as the number of rows increases and vice versa. The fin pitch
and air velocity should be suitable.
iii. If chilled water is used for cooling and dehumidification, then the coil ADP will be
higher than about 4oC.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 11

Questions and answers:

1. State which of the following statements are TRUE?
1374.
1375.
1376.
1377.

The purpose of psychrometric calculations is to fix the supply air conditions

The purpose of psychrometric calculations is to find the load on the building
In a 100% re-circulation system, the coil ADP is equal to room ADP
In a 100% re-circulation system, the coil ADP is less than room ADP

Ans.: a) and c)
2. State which of the following statements are TRUE?
1378. In a 100% re-circulation system, the load on coil is equal to the load on
building
1379. In a system with outdoor air for ventilation, the load on building is greater than
the load on coil
1380. In a system with outdoor air for ventilation, the load on building is less than
the load on coil
1381. In a system with outdoor air for ventilation, the Coil ADP is less than room
ADP
Ans.: a), c) and d)
3. Which of the following statements are TRUE?
1382.
1383.
1384.
1385.

Systems with reheat are used when the Room Sensible Heat Factor is low
Systems with reheat are used when the Room Sensible Heat Factor is high
When reheat coils are used, the required coil ADP can be increased
When reheat coils are used, the required supply airflow rate increases

Ans.: a), c) and d)

4. A 100% outdoor summer air conditioning system has a room sensible heat load of
400 kW and a room latent heat load of 100 kW. The required inside conditions are
24oC and 50% RH, and the outdoor design conditions are 34 oC and 40% RH. The air
is supplied to the room at a dry bulb temperature of 14 oC. Find a) the required mass
flow rate of air b) moisture content of supply air, c) Sensible, latent heat loads on the
coil, and d) The required cooling capacity of the coil, Coil Sensible Heat Factor and
coil ADP if the by-pass factor of the coil is 0.2. Barometric pressure = 1 atm.
Comment on the results.
Ans.: The psychrometric process for this system is shown in Fig.30.5.
The psychrometric properties at inside and outside conditions are:
Inside conditions: ti =24oC(DBT) and RHi = 50%
From psychrometric chart or using psychrometric equations; the moisture content
and enthalpy of inside air are:
Wi = 0.0093 kgw/kgda, hi = 47.66 kJ/kgda
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 12

ADP

ts

t i to

Fig.30.5: A summer air conditioning system with 100% outdoor air

outside conditions: ti =34oC(DBT) and RHi = 40%
From psychrometric chart or using psychrometric equations; the moisture content
and enthalpy of inside air are:
Wo = 0.01335 kgw/kgda, h1 = 68.21 kJ/kgda
a) From sensible energy balance equation for the room, we find the required mass
flow rate of air as:
ms =
400

Qs,r
=

Cpm(ti - ts) 1.0216(24 - 14)

=39.154 kg/ s

(Ans.)

b) The moisture content of supply air is obtained from latent energy balance of the
room as:
Ql,r
W0.0093
100
=
(Ans.)
s =Wi -

=0.0083 kgw /kgda

mshfg
39.154x2501
c) From energy balance, the sensible and latent loads on the coil are obtained as:
Qs,c =msCpm(to - ts)=39.154x1.0216x(34 -14)=800 kW
Ql,c =mshfg(Wo - Ws)=39.154x2501x(0.01335 -0.0083) =494.5 kW

(Ans.)

d) The required cooling capacity of the coil is equal to the total load on the coil, Qt,c:
Qt,c = Qs,c + Ql,c = 800 + 494.5 = 1294.5 kW

(Ans.)

Coil Sensible Heat Factor, CSHF = Qs,c/Qt,c = 0.618

(Ans.)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 13

Coil ADP is obtained by using the definition of by-pass factor (X) as:
tADP(1 - X) = ts - X.to
tADP = (ts - X.to)/(1-X) = (14 - 0.2 x 34)/(1 - 0.2) = 9oC

(Ans.)

Comments:
1386.
It is seen that with 100% outdoor air, the load on the coil (or required
cooling capacity of the coil) is much higher compared to the cooling load on
the building (Required coil capacity = 1294.5 kW whereas the total load on the
room is 500 kW). Since 100% outdoor air is used, the relatively cold and dry
indoor air is exhausted without re-circulation and the hot and humid air is
conditioned using the coil coil. Thus the required cooling capacity is very high
as the cooling coil has to cool and dehumidify outdoor air.
1387.
It is observed that the CSHF (0.618) is much smaller compared to the
room SHF (0.8), hence, the coil ADP is much smaller than the room ADP.
5. A room is air conditioned by a system that maintains 25 oC dry bulb and 50 % RH
inside, when the outside conditions are 34 oC dry bulb and 40% RH. The room
sensible and latent heat gains are 60 kW and 12 kW respectively. As shown in the
figure below, The outside fresh air first flows over a first cooler coil and is reduced to
state 1 of 10oC dry bulb and a relative humidity of 85%. It is then mixed with recirculated air, the mixture (state 2) being handled by a fan, passed over a second
cooler coil and sensibly cooled to 12oC dry bulb (state 3). The air is then delivered to
the room. If the outside fresh air is used for dealing with the whole of the room latent
heat gain and if the effects of fan power and duct heat gains are ignored, find: a)
mass flow rates of outside fresh air and supply air; b) DBT and enthalpy of the air
handled by the fan (state 2); and c) required cooling capacity of first cooler coil and
second sensible cooler coil.
recirculated

Supply
air 12oC

exhaust air

1
2 Outdoor air 34oC
(DBT) 40% (RH)
Coil 1

Coil 2

Ans.: From psychrometric chart, the following properties are obtained: Inside
conditions: ti =24oC(DBT) and RHi = 50%
Wi = 0.0093 kgw/kgda, hi = 47.66 kJ/kgda
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 14

outside conditions: to =34oC(DBT) and RHo = 40%

Wo = 0.01335 kgw/kgda, hi = 68.21 kJ/kgda
At state 1: t1 = 10oC(DBT) and RH1 = 85%
W1 = 0.00647 kgw/kgda, h1 = 26.31 kJ/kgda
a) Since the air is supplied to the room at 12oC, the mass flow rate of supply air m3 is
obtained from sensible energy balance across the room, i.e.,
Q
m3 =

60
s,r

=
Cpm(ti - t3) 1.0216(24 - 12)

=4.894 kg/s

(Ans.)

The moisture content of supply air is obtained from latent energy balance
across the room as:
Ql,r
Ws =Wi -

12
=0.0093-

m3hfg

=0.0083 kgw/kgda
4.894x2501

Since the fresh air takes care of the entire latent load, the heat transfer across
coil 2 is only sensible heat transfer. This implies that:
W2 = W3 = 0.0083 kgw/kgda
Applying mass balance across the mixing of re-circulated and fresh air (1-2), we
obtain:
m1W1+(m2-m1)Wi = m2.W2
From the above equation, we get m1 as:
m1= m2(Wi W2)/(Wi W1) = 1.73 kg/s
Hence the mass flow rate of re-circulated air is:
mrc = m2 m1 = (4.894 - 1.73) = 3.164 kg/s
b) From energy balance across the mixing process 1-2, assuming the variation in
cpm to be negligible, the temperature of mixed air at 2 is given by:
t2 = (m1t1 + mrcti)/m2 = 19.05oC

(Ans.)

From total enthalpy balance for the mixing process, the enthalpy of mixed air at 2 is:
h2 = (m1h1 + mrchi)/m2 = 40.11 kJ/kgda

(Ans.)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 15

c) From energy balance, cooling capacity of 1st cooler coil is given by:
Qc,1 = m1(ho h1) = 1.73 x (68.21 26.31) = 72.49 kW

(Ans.)

From energy balance across the 2 nd cooler coil, the cooling capacity of the second
coil is given by:
Qc,2 = m2.cpm(t2 t3) = 4.894 x 1.0216 x (19.05 12.0) = 35.25 kW

(Ans.)

Comment: It can be seen that the combined cooling capacity (72.49 + 35.25 =
107.74 kW) is larger than the total cooling load on the building (60 + 12 = 72 kW).
The difference between these two quantities (107.74 72 = 35.74 kW) is equal to
the cooling capacity required to reduce the enthalpy of the fresh air from outdoor
conditions to the required indoor conditions. This is the penalty one has to pay for
providing fresh air to the conditioned space. Larger the fresh air requirement, larger
will be the required cooling capacity.
6) An air conditioned building has a sensible cooling load of 60 kW and latent load of
40 kW. The room is maintained at 24 oC (DBT) and 50% RH, while the outside design
conditions are: 34oC (DBT) and 40% RH. To satisfy the ventilation requirement,
outdoor air is mixed with re-circulated air in the ratio of 1:3 (by mass). Since the
latent load on the building is high, a reheat coil is used along with a cooling and
dehumidifying coil. Air is supplied to the conditioned space at 14 oC (DBT). If the bypass factor of the cooling coil is 0.15 and the barometric pressure is 101.325 kPa,
find: a) Mass flow rate of supply air, b) Required cooling capacity of the cooling coil
and heating capacity of the reheat coil
Ans.: From psychrometric chart, the following properties are obtained:
Inside conditions: ti =24oC(DBT) and RHi = 50%
Wi = 0.0093 kgw/kgda, hi = 47.66 kJ/kgda
outside conditions: to =34oC(DBT) and RHo = 40%
Wo = 0.01335 kgw/kgda, hi = 68.21 kJ/kgda
Since the air is supplied to the room at 12 oC, the mass flow rate of supply air m 3 is
obtained from sensible energy balance across the room, i.e.,
Qs,r

m3 =

60
=
Cpm(ti - ts) 1.0216(24 - 14)

=5.873kg/s

(Ans.)

The moisture content of supply air is obtained from latent energy balance
across the room as:
Ql,r
40
Ws =Wi =0.0093=0.0066 kgw/kgda
m3hfg
5.873x2501

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 16

Since 25% of the supply air is fresh air, the mass flow rates of fresh and re-circulated
air are:
mo = 0.25 x 5.873 = 1.468 kg/s and mrc = 0.75 x 5.873 = 4.405 kg/s

(Ans.)

b) From sensible energy balance for the mixing process of fresh air with re-circulated
air (Fig.30.4), we obtain the mixed air conditions as:
tm = (mo.to + mrc.ti)/(mo+mrc) = 26.5oC
Wm = (mo.Wo + mrc.Wi)/(mo+mrc) = 0.0103 kgw/kgda
hm = (mo.ho + mrc.hi)/(mo+mrc) = 52.75 kJ/kgda
Since heating in the reheat coil is a sensible heating process, the moisture
content of air remains constant during this process. Then from Fig.30.4., writing the
by-pass factor in terms of humidity ratios as:
X=

(Ws - WADP) (0.0066 - WADP)

=
(Wm - WADP) (0.0103 - WADP)

=0.15

From the above expression, the humidity ratio at coil ADP condition is found to be:
WADP=(Ws X.Wm)/(1X) = (0.0066 0.15x0.0103)/(1.00.15) = 0.00595 kgw/kgda
The Coil ADP is the saturation temperature corresponding to a humidity ratio
of WADP, hence, from psychrometric chart or using psychrometric equations, it is
found to be:
tADP = 6.38oC
Hence, the temperature of air at the exit of the cooling coil (t C in Fig.30.4) is obtained
from the by-pass factor as:
tc = tADP + X (tm tADP) = 9.4oC
From Wc (= Ws) and tc, the enthalpy of air at the exit of the cooling coil is found from
psychrometric chart as:
hc = 26.02 kJ/kgda
Hence, from energy balance across cooling coil and reheater:
Required capacity of cooling coil, Qc = ms(hm hc) = 157.0 kW

(Ans.)

Required capacity of reheat coil, Qrh = mscpm(tstc) = 27.6 kW

(Ans.)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 17

Lesson
31
Evaporative, Winter
And All Year Air
Conditioning Systems
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 1

The specific objectives of this lecture are to:

1388. Introduce evaporative cooling systems (Section 31.1)
1389. Classify evaporative cooling systems (Section 31.2)
1390. Discuss the characteristics of direct evaporative cooling systems
(Section 31.2.1)
1391. Discuss the characteristics of indirect evaporative cooling systems
(Section 31.2.2)
1392. Discuss the characteristics of multi-stage evaporative cooling systems
(Section 31.2.3)
1393. Discuss advantages and disadvantages of evaporative cooling systems
(Section 31.3)
1394. Discuss the applicability of evaporative cooling systems (Section 31.4)
1395. Describe winter air conditioning systems (Section 31.5)
1396. Describe all year air conditioning systems (Section 31.6)
At the end of the lecture, the student should be able to:
1397. Explain the working principle of direct, indirect and multi-stage
evaporative cooling systems
1398. Perform psychrometric calculations on evaporative cooling systems
1399. List the advantages and disadvantages of evaporative cooling systems
1400. Evaluate the applicability of evaporative cooling systems based on
climatic conditions
5. Describe winter air conditioning systems and perform psychrometric
calculations on these systems
6. Describe all year air conditioning systems

31.1. Introduction to evaporative air conditioning systems:

Summer air conditioning systems capable of maintaining exactly the
required conditions in the conditioned space are expensive to own and
operate. Sometimes, partially effective systems may yield the best results in
terms of comfort and cost. Evaporative air conditioning systems are
inexpensive and offer an attractive alternative to the conventional summer air
conditioning systems in places, which are hot and dry. Evaporative air
conditioning systems also find applications in hot industrial environments
where the use of conventional air conditioning systems becomes prohibitively
expensive.
Evaporative cooling has been in use for many centuries in countries
such as India for cooling water and for providing thermal comfort in hot and
dry regions. This system is based on the principle that when moist but
unsaturated air comes in contact with a wetted surface whose temperature is
higher than the dew point temperature of air, some water from the wetted
surface evaporates into air. The latent heat of evaporation is taken from
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 2

water, air or both of them. In this process, the air loses sensible heat but gains
latent heat due to transfer of water vapour. Thus the air gets cooled and
humidified. The cooled and humidified air can be used for providing thermal
comfort.

31.2. Classification of evaporative cooling systems:

The principle of evaporative cooling can be used in several ways.
Cooling can be provided by:
1401.

Direct evaporation process

1402.

Indirect evaporation process, or

1403.

A combination or multi-stage systems

31.2.1. Direct evaporative cooling systems:

In direct evaporative cooling, the process or conditioned air comes in
direct contact with the wetted surface, and gets cooled and humidified. Figure
31.1 shows the schematic of an elementary direct, evaporative cooling system
and the process on a psychrometric chart. As shown in the figure, hot and dry
outdoor air is first filtered and then is brought in contact with the wetted
surface or spray of water droplets in the air washer. The air gets cooled and
dehumidified due to simultaneous transfer of sensible and latent heats
between air and water (process o-s). The cooled and humidified air is
supplied to the conditioned space, where it extracts the sensible and latent
heat from the conditioned space (process s-i). Finally the air is exhausted at
state i. In an ideal case when the air washer is perfectly insulated and an
infinite amount of contact area is available between air and the wetted
surface, then the cooling and humidification process follows the constant wet
bulb temperature line and the temperature at the exit of the air washer is
equal to the wet bulb temperature of the entering air (to,wbt), i.e., the process
becomes an adiabatic saturation process. However, in an actual system the
temperature at the exit of the air washer will be higher than the inlet wet bulb
temperature due to heat leaks from the surroundings and also due to finite
contact area. One can define the saturation efficiency or effectiveness of the
evaporative cooling system as:
=

(to - ts) (to - to,wbt

)

(31.1)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 3

Qt =air(o)
Qs+Ql
Supply
OD
air (s)

Water spray or
wetted surface

Exhaust air(i)
W
at
er
pu
m
p

w
to,w
bt
ts
to

Fi
g.
3
1.
1:

A
dire
ct,
eva
por
ativ
e
cool
ing
syst
em

Version 1 ME,
IIT Kharagpur
4

Depending upon the design aspects of the evaporative cooling system, the
effectiveness may vary from 50% (for simple drip type) to about 90% (for
efficient spray pads or air washers).
.

The amount of supply air required ms can be obtained by writing

energy balance equation for the conditioned space, i.e.,
.

Qt

ms =

(31.2)

(hi -hs )
where Qt is the total heat transfer rate (sensible + latent) to the building, h i and
hs are the specific enthalpies of return air and supply air, respectively.
Compared to the conventional refrigeration based air conditioning
systems, the amount of airflow rate required for a given amount of cooling is
much larger in case of evaporative cooling systems. As shown by the above
equation and also from Fig.30.1, it is clear that for a given outdoor dry bulb
temperature, as the moisture content of outdoor air increases, the required
amount of supply air flow rate increases rapidly. And at a threshold moisture
content value, the evaporative coolers cannot provide comfort as the cooling
and humidification line lies above the conditioned space condition i. Thus
evaporative coolers are very useful essentially in dry climates, whereas the
conventional refrigeration based air conditioning systems can be used in any
type of climate.
31.2.2. Indirect evaporative cooling system:
Figure 30.2 shows the schematic of a basic, indirect evaporative
cooling system and the process on a psychrometric chart. As shown in the
figure, in an indirect evaporative cooling process, two streams of air - primary
and secondary are used. The primary air stream becomes cooled and
humidified by coming in direct contact with the wetted surface (o-o), while the
secondary stream which is used as supply air to the conditioned space,
decreases its temperature by exchanging only sensible heat with the cooled
and humidified air stream (o-s). Thus the moisture content of the supply air
remains constant in an indirect evaporative cooling system, while its
temperature drops. Obviously, everything else remaining constant, the
temperature drop obtained in a direct evaporative cooling system is larger
compared to that obtained in an indirect system, in addition the direct
evaporative cooling system is also simpler and hence, relatively inexpensive.
However, since the moisture content of supply air remains constant in an
indirect evaporation process, this may provide greater degree of comfort in
regions with higher humidity ratio. In modern day indirect evaporative coolers,
the conditioned air flows through tubes or plates made of non-corroding
plastic materials such as polystyrene (PS) or polyvinyl chloride (PVC). On the
outside of the plastic tubes or plates thin film of water is maintained. Water
from the liquid film on the outside of the tubes or plates evaporates into the air
blowing over it (primary air) and cools the conditioned air flowing through the
tubes or plates sensibly. Even though the plastic materials used in these
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 5

coolers have low thermal conductivity, the high external heat transfer
coefficient due to evaporation of water more than makes up for this. The
commercially available indirect evaporative coolers have saturation efficiency
as high as 80%.
Supply air
Water
to
pump
conditione
d space (s)
Fan
Exhaus
t
air(e)
"\ Air-to-air
heat -J
exchanger

Primar
y air
(o)
lili^

Secondary
air (o)

w
t

Fig.31.2: An indirect, evaporative cooling system

31.2.3: Multi-stage evaporative cooling systems:

Several modifications are possible which improve efficiency of the

evaporative cooling systems significantly. One simple improvement is to
sensibly cool the outdoor air before sending it to the evaporative cooler by
exchanging heat with the exhaust air from the conditioned space. This is
possible since the temperature of the outdoor air will be much higher than the
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 6

exhaust air. It is also possible to mix outdoor and return air in some proportion
so that the temperature at the inlet to the evaporative cooler can be reduced,
thereby improving the performance. Several other schemes of increasing
complexity have been suggested to get the maximum possible benefit from
the evaporative cooling systems. For example, one can use multistage
evaporative cooling systems and obtain supply air temperatures lower than
the wet bulb temperature of the outdoor air. Thus multistage systems can be
used even in locations where the humidity levels are high.
Figure 30.3 shows a typical two-stage evaporative cooling system and
the process on a psychrometric chart. As shown in the figure, in the first stage
the primary air cooled and humidified (o -o) due to direct contact with a wet
surface cools the secondary air sensibly (o -1) in a heat exchanger. In the
second stage, the secondary air stream is further cooled by a direct
evaporation process (1-2). Thus in an ideal case, the final exit temperature of
the supply air (t2) is several degrees lower than the wet bulb temperature of
the inlet air to the system (to).

31.3. Advantages and disadvantages of evaporative

cooling systems:
Compared to the conventional refrigeration based air conditioning
systems, the evaporative cooling systems offer the following advantages:
1404.
Lower equipment and installation costs
1405.
Substantially lower operating and power costs. Energy savings
can be as high as 75 %
1406.
Ease of fabrication and installation
1407.
Lower maintenance costs
1408.
Ensures a very good ventilation due to the large air flow rates
involved, hence, are very good especially in 100 % outdoor air
applications
1409.
Better air distribution in the conditioned space due to higher flow
rates
1410.
The fans/blowers create positive pressures in the conditioned
space, so that infiltration of outside air is prevented
1411.
Very environment friendly as no harmful chemicals are used
Compared to the conventional systems, the evaporative cooling systems
suffer from the following disadvantages:
1412.
The moisture level in the conditioned space could be higher,
hence, direct evaporative coolers are not good when low humidity
levels in the conditioned space is required. However, the indirect
evaporative cooler can be used without increasing humidity
1413.
Since the required air flow rates are much larger, this may
create draft and/or high noise levels in the conditioned space
1414.
Precise control of temperature and humidity in the conditioned
space is not possible
1415.
May lead to health problems due to micro-organisms if the water
used is not clean or the wetted surfaces are not maintained properly.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 7

Secondar
y air out
(2)

V
Primary air
out (e)

Secondary
air in (o)

Primary air in
(o)'
^'

T
F
i
g
.
3
1
.
3
:
A
t
w
o
st
a
g
e
e
v
a
p
o
r
a
ti
v
e
c
o
ol
in
g
s
y
st
e
m

31
.4.
A
pp
lic
ab
ilit
y
of
ev
ap
or

a
t
i
v
e
c
o
o
l
i
n
g
s
y
s
t
e
m
s
:
A
s
m
e
n
ti
o
n
e
d
b
e
f
o
r
e
,
e
v
a
p
o
r
a
ti
v
e
c

o
o
li
n
g
s
y
s
t
e
m
s
a
r
e
i
d
e
a
l
i
n
h
o
t
a
n
d
d
r
y
p
l
a
c
e
s
,
i.
e
.,
i
n
p
l
a
c
e
s
w
h
e
r
e
t
h
e
d
r

y
bul
b
te
mp
era
tur
e
is
hig
h
an
d
the
coi
nci
de
nt
we
t
bul
b
te
mp
era
tur
e
is
low
.
Ho
we
ver
,
the
re
are
no
cle
arcut
rul
es
as
to
wh
ere
the
se
sys
te
ms
ca
n
or
ca
nn
ot
be

u
s
e
d
.
E
v
a
p
o
r
a
ti
v
e
c
o
o
li
n
g
c
a
n
p
r
o
v
i
d
e
s
o
m
e
m
e
a
s
u
r
e
o
f
c
o
m
f
o
r
t
i
n
a
n
y
l
o
c

a
ti
o
n
.
H
o
w
e
v
e
r,
i
n
m
a
n
y
l
o
c
a
ti
o
n
s
w
h
e
r
e
t
h
e
h
u
m
i
d
it
y
l
e
v
e
l
s
a
r
e
v
e
r
y
h
i
g
h
,

sta
ndalo
ne
ev
ap
ora
tiv
e
co
oli
ng
sys
te
ms
ca
nn
ot
be
us
ed
for
pro
vidi
ng
the
rm
al
co
mf
ort
es
pe
cial
ly
in
res
ide
nc
es,
offi
ce
bui
ldi
ng
s
etc
.
On
e
of
the
old
er
rul
esofthu
mb

Version 1
ME, IIT
Kharagpur
8

specifies that evaporative cooling systems can be used wherever the average
noon relative humidity during July is less than 40%. However, experience
shows that evaporative coolers can be used even in locations where the
relative humidity is higher than 40%. A more recent guideline suggests that
evaporative cooling can be used in locations where the summer design wet
bulb temperatures are less than about 24 oC (75oF). It is generally observed
that evaporative coolers can compete with conventional systems when the
noon relative humidity during July is less than 40%, hence should definitely be
considered as a viable alternative, whereas these systems can be used in
places where the noon relative humidity is higher tha 40% but the design
WBT is lower than 24oC, with a greater sacrifice of comfort. It should be
mentioned that both these guidelines have been developed for direct
evaporative cooling systems. Indirect evaporative coolers can be used over a
slightly broader range. Evaporative air conditioning systems can also be used
over a broader range of outdoor conditions in factories, industries and
commercial buildings, where the comfort criteria is not so rigid (temperatures
as high as 30oC in the conditioned space are acceptable). Evaporative air
conditioning systems are highly suitable in applications requiring large
amounts of ventilation and/or high humidity in the conditioned space such as
textile mills, foundries, dry cleaning plants etc.
Evaporative cooling can be combined with a conventional refrigeration
based air conditioning systems leading to substantial savings in energy
consumption, if the outside conditions are favorable. Again, a number of
possibilities exist. For example, the outdoor air can be first cooled in an
evaporative cooler and then mixed with the re-circulating air from the
conditioned space and then cooled further in the conventional refrigerant or
chilled water coil.

31.5. Winter Air Conditioning Systems

In winter the outside conditions are cold and dry. As a result, there will
be a continuous transfer of sensible heat as well as moisture (latent heat)
from the buildings to the outside. Hence, in order to maintain required comfort
conditions in the occupied space an air conditioning system is required which
can offset the sensible and latent heat losses from the building. Air supplied to
the conditioned space is heated and humidified in the winter air conditioning
system to the required level of temperature and moisture content depending
upon the sensible and latent heat losses from the building. In winter the heat
losses from the conditioned space are partially offset by solar and internal
heat gains. Thus in a conservative design of winter A/C systems, the effects of
solar radiation and internal heat gain are not considered.
Heating and humidification of air can be achieved by different
schemes. Figure 31.4 shows one such scheme along with the cycle on
psychrometric chart. As shown in the figure, the mixed air (mixture of return
and outdoor air) is first pre-heated (m-1) in the pre-heater, then humidified
using a humidifier or an air washer (1-2) and then finally reheated in the reheater (2-s). The reheated air at state s is supplied to the conditioned space.
The flow rate of supply air should be such that when released into the
conditioned space at state s, it should be able to maintain the conditioned
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 9

space at state I and offset the sensible and latent heat losses (Q s and Ql).
Pre-heating of air is advantageous as it ensures that water in the humidifier/air
washer does not freeze. In addition, by controlling the heat supplied in the
pre-heater one can control the moisture content in the conditioned space.

Return air (i)

Qs,Ql
>

Exhaust air
Recirculated
air (i)

OD
air
(o)
Pre-heater

(m)

(1)

(2)

S Supply air (s)

Humidifier Re-heater
t Fig.31.4: A winter air conditioning system with a pre-heater

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 10

The humidification of air can be achieved in several ways, e.g. by bringing the
air in contact with a wetted surface, or with droplets of water as in an air
washer, by adding aerosol sized water droplets directly to air or by direct
addition of dry saturated or superheated steam. Humidification by direct
contact with a wetted surface or by using an air washer are not recommended
for comfort applications or for other applications where people are present in
the conditioned space due to potential health hazards by the presence of
micro-organisms in water. The most common method of humidifying air for
these applications is by direct addition of dry steam to air. When air is
humidified by contact with wetted surface as in an air washer, then
temperature of air decreases as its humidity increases due to simultaneous
transfer of sensible and latent heat. If the air washer functions as an adiabatic
saturator, then humidification proceeds along the constant wet bulb
temperature line. However, when air is humidified by directly adding dry,
saturated steam, then the humidification proceeds close to the constant dry
bulb temperature line. The final state of air is always obtained by applying
conservation of mass (water) and conservation of energy equations to the
humidification process.
By applying energy balance across the conditioned space, at steady
state, the sensible and latent heat losses from the building can be written as:
.

Qs =ms cpm(ts - ti)

.

Ql =ms hfg (ws - wi )

(31.3)

(31.4)

where ms is the mass flow rate of supply air, cpm is the specific heat of air, hfg
is the latent heat of vapourization of water, ws and wi are the supply and return
air humidity ratios and ts, ti are the supply and return temperatures of air. By
applying mass and/or energy balance equations across individual
components, the amount of sensible heat transfer rate to the pre-heater and
re-heater and the amount of moisture to be added in the humdifier can easily
be calculated.
Figure 31.5 shows another scheme that can also be used for heating
and humidification of air as required in a winter air conditioning system. As
shown in the figure, this system does not consist of a pre-heater. The mixed
air is directly humidified using an air washer (m-1) and is then reheated (1-s)
before supplying it to the conditioned space. Though this system is simpler
compared to the previous one, it suffers from disadvantages such as
possibility of water freezing in the air washer when large amount of cold
outdoor air is used and also from health hazards to the occupants if the water
used in the air washer is not clean. Hence this system is not recommended
for comfort conditioning but can be used in applications where the air
temperatures at the inlet to the air washer are above 0 oC and the conditioned
space is used for products or processes, but not for providing personnel
comfort.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 11

Return air

Qs,Ql

DDI
Exhaust air(i)

Conditioned
space

Recircu
lated
air(i) air

S
h

Air washer
Re-heater
w

t
F
i
g
.
3
1
.
5
:

w
i
n
t
e
r

i
r

n
g

s
y
s
t
e
m

w
i
t
h
o
u

Act
ual winter
air
conditioni
ng
systems,
in addition
to
the
basic
compone
nts shown
above,
consist of
fans
or
blowers
for
air
circulation
and filters
for
purifying
air.
The
fan
or
blower
introduce
s sensible
heat into
the
air

stream as all
the electrical
power input to
the
fan
is
finally
dissipated in
the form of
heat.

Version 1 ME,
IIT Kharagpur
12

31.6. All year (complete) air conditioning systems:

Figure 30.6 shows a complete air conditioning system that can be used
for providing air conditioning throughout the year, i.e., during summer as well
as winter. As shown in the figure, the system consists of a filter, a heating coil,
a cooling & dehumidifying coil, a re-heating coil, a humidifier and a blower. In
addition to these, actual systems consist of several other accessories such as
dampers for controlling flow rates of re-circulated and outdoor (OD) air, control
systems for controlling the space conditions, safety devices etc. Large air
conditioning systems use blowers in the return air stream also. Generally,
during summer the heating and humidifying coils remain inactive, while during
winter the cooling and dehumidifying coil remains inactive. However, in some
applications for precise control of conditions in the conditioned space all the
coils may have to be made active. The blowers will remain active throughout
the year, as air has to be circulated during summer as well as during winter.
When the outdoor conditions are favourable, it is possible to maintain comfort
conditions by using filtered outdoor air alone, in which case only the blowers
will be running and all the coils will be inactive leading to significant savings in
energy consumption. A control system is required which changes-over the
system from winter operation to summer operation or vice versa depending
upon the outdoor conditions.
Exhaust

Return air

Recirculated air

OD
B air

Cooling/
Heating
load

Conditioned
space
CC

RH

Hu

\ Supply air

F: Filter; H: Heating coil; CC: Cooling & dehumidifying coil

RH: Re-heating coil; Hu: Humidifier; B: Blower

Fig.31.6: An all year air conditioning system

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 13

Questions and answers:

1. Which of the following statements are TRUE?
1416.
1417.
1418.
1419.

Evaporative cooling systems are attractive for hot and humid climates
Evaporative cooling systems are attractive for hot and dry climates
Evaporative cooling systems are ideal for comfort applications
Evaporative cooling systems are ideal for several industrial applications

Ans.: b) and d)
2. Which of the following statements are TRUE?
1420. In a direct evaporative cooling system, the lowest possible temperature
is the wet bulb temperature corresponding to the outdoor air
1421. In a direct evaporative cooling system, the lowest possible temperature
is the dew point temperature corresponding to the outdoor air
1422. In a direct evaporative cooling system, cooled and humidified air is
supplied to the conditioned space
d) In a direct evaporative cooling system, cooled and dehumidified air is
supplied to the conditioned space
Ans.: a) and c)
3. Which of the following statements are TRUE?
1423. In an indirect evaporative cooling system, the air supplied to the
conditioned space is at a lower temperature, but higher humidity ratio
1424. In an indirect evaporative cooling system, the air supplied to the
conditioned space is at a lower temperature and at a humidity ratio
corresponding to the outdoor air
1425. Compared to direct evaporative cooling systems, it is possible to
achieve lower supply air temperatures in simple indirect evaporative coolers
1426. In multi-stage evaporative cooling systems, it is possible to cool the air
to a temperature lower than the entering air WBT
Ans.: b) and d)
4. Which of the following statements are TRUE?
1427.
1428.
1429.
1430.

Evaporative cooling systems are environment friendly

Evaporative cooling systems offer lower initial and lower running costs
Evaporative cooling systems are easier to maintain and fabricate
Evaporative systems provide better control on indoor climate

Ans.: a), b) and c)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 14

5. Which of the following statements are TRUE?

1431. Direct evaporative cooling systems are attractive in places where the
summer design WBT is greater than 24oC
1432. Direct evaporative cooling systems are attractive in places where the
summer design WBT is less than 24oC
c) Indirect evaporative cooling systems can be used over an extended range
of climatic conditions
d) A combination of evaporative cooling system with conventional air
conditioning system can offer better overall performance
Ans.: b), c) and d)
6. Which of the following statements are TRUE?
1433. In winter air conditioning systems, heated and dehumidified air is
supplied to the conditioned space
1434. In winter air conditioning systems, heated and humidified air is supplied
to the conditioned space
1435. A pre-heater is recommended in winter air conditioning systems to
improve overall efficiency of the system
1436. A pre-heater is recommended in winter air conditioning systems to
prevent freezing of water in the humidifier and for better control
Ans.: b) and d)
7. Which of the following statements are TRUE?
1437. When humidification is done using an air washer, the temperature of air
drops during humidification
1438. When humidification is done using an air washer, the temperature of air
rises during humidification
1439. When humidification is carried out by adding dry steam, the
temperature of air remains close to the WBT of entering air
1440. When humidification is carried out by adding dry steam, the
temperature of air remains close to the DBT of entering air
Ans.: a) and d)
8. Which of the following statements are TRUE?
1441. An all year air conditioning system can be used either as a summer air
conditioning system or as a winter air conditioning system
1442. When an all year air conditioning system is used during summer, the
heaters are always switched-off
1443. When an all year air conditioning system is used during winter, the
cooling and dehumidification coils are switched-off
1444. In an all year air conditioning systems, the blowers are always on
Ans.: a), c) and d)
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 15

9. A large warehouse located at an altitude of 1500 m has to be maintained at

a DBT of 27oC and a relative humidity of 50% using a direct evaporative
cooling system. The outdoor conditions are 33 oC (DBT) and 15oC (WBT). The
cooling load on the warehouse is 352 kW. A supply fan located in the
downstream of the evaporative cooler adds 15 kW of heat. Find the required
mass flow rate of air. Assume the process in evaporative cooler to follow a
constant WBT.
Ans.:
At 1500m, the barometric pressure is equal to 84.436 kPa.
Inlet conditions to the evaporative cooling system are the outdoor conditions:
to = 33oC, WBTo = 15oC
At these conditions and a barometric pressure of 84.436 kPa, the enthalpy of
outdoor air is obtained using psychrometric equations 1 as:
ho = 46.67 kJ/kgda
The above system is shown on psychrometric chart in Fig.31.6

w
t

Fig.31.7
Assuming the evaporative process to follow a constant WBT and hence nearly
a constant enthalpy line,

ho =ho = 46.67 kJ/kgda

Standard psychrometric chart cannot be used here as the barometric pressure is nit
1 atm.
1

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 16

Applying energy balance for the sensible heating process in the fan (process
o-s) and heating and humidification process through the conditioned space
(process s-i), we obtain:
ms(hs ho) = 15 = sensible heat added due to fan

(E.1)

ms(hi hs) = 352 = cooling load on the room

(E.2)

From psychrometric equations, for the inside condition of the warehouse

(DBT=27oC and RH = 50%), the enthalpy hi is found from psychrometric
equations as:
hi = 61.38 kJ/kgda
We have two unknowns (ms and hs) and two equations (E.1 and E.2), hence
solving the equations simultaneously yields:
ms = 24.94 kJ/kg and hs = 47.27 kJ/kgda

(Ans.)

10. A winter air conditioning system maintains a building at 21 oC and 40% RH.
The outdoor conditions are 0oC (DBT) and 100% RH. The sensible load load
on the building is 100 kW, while the latent heating load is 25 kW. In the air
conditioning system, 50% of the outdoor air (by mass) is mixed with 50% of
the room air. The mixed air is heated in a pre-heater to 25 oC and then
required amount of dry saturated steam at 1 atm. pressure is added to the
pre-heated air in a humidifier. The humidified air is then heated to supply
temperature of 45oC and is then supplied to the room. Find a) The required
mass flow rate of supply air, b) Required amount of steam to be added, and c)
Required heat input in pre-heater and re-heater. Barometric pressure = 1atm.
Ans.: From psychrometric chart the following properties are obtained:
Outdoor conditions: 0oC (DBT) and 100% RH
Wo = 0.00377 kgw/kgda, ho = 9.439 kJ/kgda
Indoor conditions: 21oC (DBT) and 40% RH
Wi = 0.00617 kgw/kgda, hi = 36.66 kJ/kgda
Since equal amounts of outdoor and indoor air are mixed:
tm = 10.5oC, Wm = 0.00497 kgw/kgda, hm = 23.05 kJ/kgda
From sensible energy balance across the room (Process s-i) in Fig.31.8:
a) Required mass flow rate of supply air is:
ms = Qs/{cpm(ts ti)} = 100/{1.0216(45 21)} = 4.08 kg/s

(Ans.)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 17

w
t
*
Fig.3
1.8
From
latent
energ
y
balanc
e for
proce
ss s-i,
the
humidi
ty
ratio
of
supply
air is
found
to be:
Ws
=
Wi
+
Ql/
(hf
g.m
s) =
0.0
061
7+
25/
(25
01
x
4.0
8) =
0.0
086
2
kg
w/k
gda
b)

Requi
red
amou
nt of
steam
to be
added
mw is
obtain
ed
from
mass
balan
ce
acros
s the
humid
ifier
(proce
ss r-h)
as:

s.)
c)

Heat
input
to the
preheater
(proce
ss mr) is

mw

obtain

ed as:

ms(

Qph

Ws -

Wm)

ms.c

pm(tr -

4.08

tm) =

60.44

(0.0

kW

086

(Ans.

2-

0.00

Heat

497)

input

to the

0.01

re-

49

heater

kg/s

(proce

(An

ss h-

this
assu
mptio
n
is
valid.

s) is
obtain
ed as:
Qrh =
ms.c
pm(ts
- tr) =
83.36
kW
(Ans.
)
In the
above
exam
ple, it
is
assu
med
that
during
additi
on of
steam
, the
dry
bulb
tempe
rature
of air
remai
ns
const
ant. A
simple
check
by
using
energ
y
balan
ce
acros
s the
humid
ifier
shows
that

Versio
n1
ME,
IIT
Khara
gpur
18

Lesson
32
Cooling And Heating
Load Calculations
- Estimation Of Solar
Radiation
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 1

The specific objectives of this lecture are to:

1445. Introduction to cooling and heating load calculations (Section 32.1)
1446. Solar radiation, solar constant and solar irradiation (Section 32.2)
1447. Solar geometry, latitude, declination, hour angles, local solar time and total
sunshine hours (Section 32.2.4)
1448. Derived solar angles (Section 32.2.5)
1449. Angle of incidence for horizontal, vertical and tilted surfaces (Section
32.2.6)
6. Calculation of direct, diffuse and reflected radiation using ASHRAE solar
radiation model (Section 32.3)
7. Effect of clouds (Section 32.4)
At the end of the lecture, the student should be able to:
1450. Explain the need for cooling and heating load calculations
1451. Explain the importance of solar radiation in air conditioning
1452. Define solar angles namely, latitude, declination and hour angles and
calculate the same and estimate the time of sunrise, sunset and total sunshine
hours at a given location on a given day
1453. Define derived solar angles and express them in terms of basic solar
angles
1454. Calculate the angle of incidence for surfaces of any orientation
6. Estimate direct, diffuse, reflected and total solar irradiation incident on
surfaces of any orientation using ASHRAE models
7. Explain the effects of clouds on incident solar radiation

32.1 Introduction:
The primary function of an air conditioning system is to maintain the
conditioned space at required temperature, moisture content with due attention
towards the air motion, air quality and noise. The required conditions are decided
by the end use of the conditioned space, e.g. for providing thermal comfort to the
occupants as in comfort air conditioning applications, for providing suitable
conditions for a process or for manufacturing a product as in industrial air
conditioning applications etc. The reason behind carrying out cooling and heating
load calculations is to ensure that the cooling and heating equipment
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 2

designed or selected serves the intended purpose of maintaining the required

conditions in the conditioned space. Design and/or selection of cooling and
heating systems involve decisions regarding the required capacity of the
equipment selected, type of the equipment etc. By carrying out cooling and
heating load calculations one can estimate the capacity that will be required for
various air conditioning equipment. For carrying out load calculations it is
essential to have knowledge of various energy transfers that take place across
the conditioned space, which will influence the required capacity of the air
conditioning equipment. Cooling and heating load calculations involve a
systematic step-wise procedure by following which one can estimate the various
individual energy flows and finally the total energy flow across an air conditioned
building.

32.2. Solar radiation:

In the study of air conditioning systems it is important to understand the
various aspects of solar radiation because:
1455.
A major part of building heat gain is due to solar radiation, hence an
estimate of the amount of solar radiation the building is subjected to is
essential for estimating the cooling and heating loads on the buildings.
1456.
By proper design and orientation of the building, selection of
suitable materials and landscaping it is possible to harness solar energy
beneficially. This can reduce the overall cost (initial and operating) of the
air conditioning system considerably by reducing the required capacity of
the cooling and heating equipment.
1457.
It is possible, at least in certain instances to build heating and
cooling systems that require only solar energy as the input. Since solar
energy is available and is renewable, use of solar energy for applications
such as cooling and heating is highly desirable.
For calculation purposes, the sun may be treated as a radiant energy source
with surface temperature that is approximately equal to that of a blackbody at
6000 K. The sprectum of wavelength of solar radiation stretches from 0.29 m to
about 4.75 m, with the peak occurring at about 0.45 m (the green portion of
visible spectrum). Table 32.1 shows spectral distribution of solar radiation with
percentage distribution of total energy in various bandwidths.

Type of radiation
Invisible ultra-violet (UV)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 3

Wavelength band (m)
% of total radiation
0.29 to 0.40

Visible radiation

0.40 to 0.70

39

Near Infrared (IR)

0.70 to 3.50

52

Far infrared (FIR)

4.00 to 4.75

Table 32.1. Spectral distribution of solar radiation

32.2.1. Solar constant:
This is the flux of solar radiation on a surface normal to the suns rays
beyond the earths atmosphere at the mean earth-sun distance. The currently
accepted value of solar constant is 1370 W/m 2. Since the earths orbit is slightly
elliptical, the extra-terrestrial radiant flux varies from a maximum of 1418 W/m 2
on January 3rd to a minimum of 1325 W/m2 on July 4th.
32.2.2. Depletion of solar radiation due to earths atmosphere:
In passing through the earths atmosphere, which consists of dust
particles, various gas molecules and water vapour, the solar radiation gets
depleted due to reflection, scattering and absorption. The extent of this
depletion at any given time depends on the atmospheric composition and
length of travel of suns rays through the atmosphere. The length of travel is
expressed in terms of air mass, m which is defined as the ratio of mass of
atmosphere in the actual sun-earth path to that which would exist if the sun
were directly overhead at sea level. As shown in Fig. 32.1, the air mass is
given by:
(32.1)

air mass,m=

sin 90o
1
=
=
length O'P sin sin

length OP

where is called as altitude angle, which depends on the location, time of the
day and day of the year. Thus smaller the altitude angle, larger will be the
depletion of radiation.
32.2.3. Total solar irradiation:
In order to calculate the building heat gain due to solar radiation, one has
to know the amount of solar radiation incident on various surfaces of the building.
The rate at which solar radiation is striking a surface per unit area of the surface
is called as the total solar irradiation on the surface. This is given by:
Ir I

=IDNcos + Id +I

(32.2)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

4

where Ii
IDN
Id
Ir

= Total solar irradiation of a surface, W/m2

= Direct radiation from sun, W/m2
= Diffuse radiation from sky, W/m2
= Short wave radiation reflected from other surfaces, W/m2
= Angle of incidence, degrees (Figure 32.2)

The first term on the RHS, i.e., I DN cos , is the contribution of direct normal
radiation to total irradiation. On a clear, cloudless day, it constitutes about 85 percent of
the total solar radiation incident on a surface. However, on cloudy days the percentage
of diffuse and reflected radiation components is higher. The objective of solar radiation
calculations is to estimate the direct, diffuse and reflected radiations incident on a given
surface. These radiations and the angle of incidence are affected by solar geometry.

O
level
P/
Fig.32.1: Depletion of solar radiation due to earths atmosphere

Normal to surface
Surface on earth Fig.32.2: Definition of angle of incidence
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 5

32.2.4. Solar geometry:

The angle of incidence 9 depends upon:
i.

Location on earth

ii.

Time of the day, and

iii.

Day of the year

The above three parameters are defined in terms of latitude, hour angle and
declination, respectively.
The planet earth makes one rotation about its axis every 24 hours and one
revolution about the sun in a period of about 365 "" "" days. The earths
Version 1 Position
Fig.32.3:
ME, IIT Kharagpur
of earth with6respect to sun for different seasons

equatorial plane is tilted at an angle of about 23.5o with respect to its orbital
plane. The earths rotation is responsible for day and night, while its tilt is
responsible for change of seasons. Figure 32.3 shows the position of the earth at
the start of each season as it revolves in its orbit around the sun. As shown in
Fig.32.4, during summer solstice (June 21st) the suns rays strike the northern
hemisphere more directly than they do the southern hemisphere. As a result, the
northern hemisphere experiences summer while the southern hemisphere
experiences winter during this time. The reverse happens during winter solstice
(December 21st).

Fig.32.4: Direction of suns rays during summer and winter solstice

Figure 32.5 shows the position of a point P on the northern hemisphere of
the earth, whose center is at point O. Since the distance between earth and sun
is very large, for all practical purposes it can be considered that the suns rays
are parallel to each other when they reach the earth.

^1

A
Suns rays O

Equatorial plane

A
Fig.32.5: Definition of latitude (l), declination (d) and hour angles (h)
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 7

With reference to Fig.32.5, the various solar angles are defined as follows:
Latitude, l: It is the angle between the lines joining O and P and the projection of
OP on the equatorial plane, i.e.,

latitude, l = angle ZPOA

Thus the latitude along with the longitude indicates the position of any
point on earth and it varies from 0o at equator to 90o at the poles.
Hour angle, h: It is the angle between the projection of OP on the equatorial
plane i.e., the line OA and the projection of the line joining the center of the earth
to the center of the sun, i.e., the line OB. Therefore,

hour angle,h = angleZAOB

The hour angle is a measure of the time of the day with respect to solar
noon. Solar noon occurs when the sun is at the highest point in the sky, and hour
angles are symmetrical with respect to solar noon. This implies that the hour
angles of sunrise and sunset on any given day are identical. The hour angle is 0o
at solar noon and varies from 0o to 360o in one rotation. Since it takes 24 clock
hours for one rotation, each clock hour of time is equal to 15o of hour angle. For
example, at 10 A.M. (solar time) the hour angle is 330o, while at 4 P.M. it is 60o.
Solar time: Solar radiation calculations such as the hour angle are based on
local solar time (LST). Since the earths orbital velocity varies throughout the
year, the local solar time as measured by a sundial varies slightly from the mean
time kept by a clock running at uniform rate. A civil day is exactly equal to 24
hours, whereas a solar day is approximately equal to 24 hours. This variation is
called as Equation of Time (EOT) and is available as average values for different
months of the year. The EOT may be considered as constant for a given day. An
approximate equation for calculating EOT given by Spencer (1971) is:
EOT =0.2292(0.075 + 1.868 cos N -32.077 sin N -4.615 cos 2N-40.89 sin 2N)
(32.3)
where N =(n-1)-------- ; n is the day of the year (counted from January 1 st )
y365J
At any location, the local solar time is given by:
LST = LStT + EOT + 4(LON-LSM)

(32.4)

in the above equation LStT is the local standard time, LSM is the local standard
time meridien and LON is the local longitude. In the above equation + sign is
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 8

used if LON is to the east of LSM and - sign should be used if LON is to the
west of LSM.
Declination, d: The declination is the angle between the line joining the center of
the earth and sun and its projection on the equatorial plane, the angle between
line OO and line OB;

declination,d = angle ZO'OB

For northern hemisphere, the declination varies from about +23.5o on
June 21st (summer solstice) to -23.5o on December 21st (December 21st). At
equinoxes, i.e., on March 21st and September 21st the declination is 0o for
northern hemisphere. The declination varies approximately in a sinusoidal form,
and on any particular day the declination can be calculated approximately using
the following equation:

360(284+ N)
declination,d = 23.47sin-----------------365

(32.5)

where N is the day of the year numbered from January 1 st. Thus on March 6th, N
is 65 (65th day of the year) and from the above equation, declination on March 6 th
is equal to -6.4o.
32.2.5. Derived solar angles:
In addition to the three basic solar angles, i.e., the latitude, hour angle and
declination, several other angles have been defined (in terms of the basic
angles), which are required in the solar radiation calculations. Figure 32.6 shows
a schematic of one apparent solar path and defines the altitude angle (B), zenith
angle (\\r) and solar azimuth angle (y). It can be shown by analytical geometry
that these angles are given by:
Altitude angle, B: It is the angle between the suns rays and the projection of
suns rays onto a horizontal plane as shown in Fig.32.6. The expression for
altitude angle is given by:

Altitude angle,p= sin_1(cos l.cos h.cos d+sin l.sin d) (32.6)

Zenith angle, v|/: It is the angle between suns rays and the surface normal to the
horizontal plane at the position of the observer. It can be seen from Fig.32.6 that:

Zenith angle, v|/ = p

2

(32 7)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 9

Normal to
Horizontal
Apparent
plane
sun
surface
pathat

E'

W/

S
N
F
i
g
.
3
2
.
6
:
D
e
f
i
n
i
t
i
o
n
o
f
a
l
t
i
t
u
d
e
a
n
g
l
e
,
z
e
n

i
t
h

a
n
g
l
e

i
s

a
n
d
s
o
l
a
r
a
z
i
m
u
t
h
a
n
g
l
e
T
h
e
a
l
t
i
t
u
d
e
a
n
g
l

,
h

i
s
0

m
a
x
i
m
u
m

a
t

a
t

s
o
l
a
r

s
o
l
a
r

n
o
o
n
,

n
o
o
n
.

t
h
e

S
i
n
c
e
t
h
e

m
a
x
i
m
u
m

h
o
u
r

a
l
t
i
t
u
d
e

a
n
g
l
e

a
n
g
l
e

a
x

(
s
o
l
a
r
n
o
o
n
)
o
n
a
n
y
p
a
r
t
i
c
u
l
a
r
d
a
y
f
o
r
a
n
y
p

wh
er
2
e

(ld)
is
th
e
ab
sol
ut
e
val
ue
of
(ld).
T
h
e
e
q
u
a
t
i
o
n
f
o
r
a
l
t
i
t
u
d
e
a
n
g
l
e

c
a
n
a
l
s
o
b
e
u
s
e
d
f
o
r
f
i
n
d
i
n
g
t
h
e
t
i
m
e
o
f
s
u
n
r
i
s
e
,

u
n
s
e
t
a
n
d
s
u
n
s
h
i
n
e
h
o
u
r
s
a
s
t
h
e
a
l
t
i
t
u
d
e
a
n
g
l
e
i
s
0

a
t
b
o
t
h
s
u
n
r
i
s
e
a
n
d
s
u
n
s
e
t
(
F
i
g
.
3
2
.
6
)
.
T
h
u
s
f
r
o
m
t
h

e
q
u
a
t
i
o
n

F
r
o
m

s
u
n
s
e
t

t
h
e

a
n
d

f
o
r

h
o
u
r

t
o
t
a
l

,
a
t
s
u
n
r
i
s
e
a
n
d
s
u
n
s
e
t

=
0
,
h
e
n
c
e

a
n
g
l
e
o
n
e
c
a
n
c
a
l
c
u
l
a
t
e
t
h
e
s
u
n
r
i
s
e
,

s
u
n
s
h
i
n
e
h
o
u
r
s
a
s
t
h
e
s
u
n
r
i
s
e
a
n
d
s
u

n
s
e
t
a
r
e
s
y
m
m
e
t
r
i
c
a
l
a
b
o
u
t
t
h
e
s
o
l
a
r
n
o
o
n
.
S
o
l
a
r
a
z
i
m

u
t
h
a
n
g
l
e
,

:
A
s
s
h
o
w
n
i
n
F
i
g
.
3
2
.
6
,
t
h
e
s
o
l
a
r
a
z
i
m
u
t
h

a
n
g
l
e
i
s
t
h
e
a
n
g
l
e
i
n
t
h
e
h
o
r
i
z
o
n
t
a
l
p
l
a
n
e
m
e
a
s
u
r
e
d

f
r
o
m
n
o
r
t
h

V
e
r
s
i
o
n
1

t
o

M
E
,

t
h
e

I
I
T

h
o
r
i
z
o
n
t
a
l

K
h
a
r
a
g
p
u
r

p
r
o
j
e
c
t
i
o
n
o
f
t
h
e
s
u
n

1
0

cos
h
y=co
s

cos l.sin d-cos d.cos

h.sin cos p

= sin

d.si ed for l
= d.

n
cos 32.2.6.
Inciden
p
t angle
(32. of
10) suns
rays, 6:
At
solar
T
noon he
when incident
the angle of
hour suns
angle rays 6,
is
is
the
zero, angle
the betwee
solar n suns
azimu rays
th
and the
angle normal
is
to the
equal surface
to
under
180o, conside
if the ration.
latitud The
e, l is angle of
great inciden
er
ce
than depend
declin s on the
ation, solar
d,
geomet
and it ry and
is
also the
equal orientati
to 0o on
of
if l < the
d.
surface.
The
solar For
azimu horizon
th
tal
angle surface
at
s: For
solar
horizont
noon
is not al
defin surface

s
(Fig.3
2.7)
the
angle
of
incide
nce
0hor
is
equal
to the
zenith
angle,
\\r,
i.e.,

2.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 11

Fig.32.7: Incident angle for a

horizontal surface
For vertical surfaces: Figure
32.8 shows an arbitrarily
orientated
vertical
surface
(shaded) that is exposed to
solar radiation. The angle of
incidence of solar radiation on
the vertical surface depends
upon the orientation of the wall,
i.e, east facing, west facing etc.
Additional angles have to be
defined to find the angle of
incidence on the vertical walls.

Sun

Horizontal
plane
Normal to
the wall

E
N
S
Fig.
32.8
:
Calc
ulati
on of
incid
ent
solar
angl
e for
verti
cal
surfa
ces
Referring to
Fig.32.8, the
following
additional angles
are defined:
Wall
solar
azimuth angle, a:
This is the angle
between normal
to the wall and the
projection of suns
rays on to a
horizontal plane.
Surface azimuth
angle, : This is
the
angle
between
the
normal to the wall
and south. Thus

wh
en
th
e
wa
ll
is
fac
ing
so
ut
h,
th
en
th
e
su
rfa
ce
azi
m
ut
h
an
gle
is
ze
ro
an
d
wh
en
it
fac
es
we
st,
th
en
th
e
su
rfa
ce
azi
m
ut
h
an
gle
is
90
o

and so on. The

angle is taken as
+ve if the normal
to the surface is
to the west of
south and -ve if it
is to the east of
south.
From Fig.32.8 it
can be seen that
the wall solar
azimuth angle, is
given by:
a = [7r-(Y +
^)jF
(32.12)
The factor F is -1
for forenoon and
+1 for afternoon.
Now it can be
shown that the
angle of incidence
on the vertical
surface, 0ver is
given by:

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

12

For an arbitrarily oriented surfaces: For any surface that is tilted at an angle Z
from the horizontal as shown in Fig.32.9, the incident angle 9 is given by:

0= cos 1(sin p.cos 2 + cos p.cos a.sin S)

(32.14)

This equation is a general equation and can be used for any arbitrarily oriented
surface. For example, for a horizontal surface, Z is 0o, hence 9hor is equal to (90P), as shown earlier. Similarly, for a vertical surface, Z is 90o, hence 9ver is equal to
cos-1 (cos p.cos a), as shown before.

Tilted surface S
N
Fig.32.9: An arbitrarily oriented surface with a tilt angle I

Horizontal
32.3. Calculation of direct, diffuse and reflected radiations:
32.3.1. Direct radiation from sun (IDN):
Several solar radiation models are available for calculation of direct
radiation from sun. One of the commonly used models for air conditioning
calculations is the one suggested by ASHRAE. According to this model, the
direct radiation IDN is given by:
DN

A.exp

B sin p

(W /m2)

(32.15)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 13

where A is the apparent solar irradiation which is taken as 1230 W/m 2 for
the months of December and January and 1080 W/m2 for mid-summer. Constant
B is called as atmospheric extinction coefficient, which takes a value of 0.14 in
winter and 0.21 in summer. The values of A and B for 21 st day of each month
have been computed are available either in the form of tables or empirical
equations.
32.3.2. Diffuse radiation from sky, Id:
According to the ASHRAE model, the diffuse radiation from a cloudless
sky is given by:
I d =C.I DN .F WS
(W/m 2 )
(32.16)
The value of C is assumed to be constant for a cloudless sky for an average day
of a month. Its average monthly values have been computed and are available in
tabular form. The value of C can be taken as 0.135 for mid-summer and as 0.058
for winter. The factor FWS is called as view factor or configuration factor and is
equal to the fraction of the diffuse radiation that is incident on the surface. For
diffuse radiation, FWS is a function of the orientation of the surface only. It can be
easily shown that this is equal to:

(1 + cos)

ws =-----------------

(32.17)

2
where is the tilt angle. Obviously for horizontal surfaces ( = 0o) the factor F WS
is equal to 1, whereas it is equal to 0.5 for a vertical surface ( = 90o). The above
model is strictly true for a cloudless sky only as it assumes that the diffuse
radiation from the sky falls uniformly on the surface. The diffuse radiation will not
be uniform when the sky is cloudy.
32.3.3. Reflected, short-wave (solar) radiation, Ir:
The amount of solar radiation reflected from the ground onto a surface is
given by:
Ir = (IDN + Id )gFWG
(32.18)
where g is the reflectivity of the ground or a horizontal surface from where the
solar radiation is reflected on to a given surface and FWG is view factor from
ground to the surface. The value of reflectivity obviously depends on the surface
property of the ground. The value of the angle factor FWG in terms of the tilt angle
is given by:

(1-cos)
=------------------

WG

(32.19)

2
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 14

Thus for horizontal surfaces (Z = 0o) the factor FWG is equal to 0, whereas it is
equal to 0.5 for a vertical surface (Z = 90o).
Though the ASHRAE clear sky model is widely used for solar radiation
calculations in air conditioning, more accurate, but more involved models have
also been proposed for various solar energy applications.
Example: Calculate the total solar radiation incident on a south facing, vertical
surface at solar noon on June 21st and December 21st using the data given
below:
Latitude
= 23o
Reflectivity of the ground = 0.6
Assume the sky to be cloudless
Ans.:
Given:

Latitude angle, l Hour

angle, h Declination,d
Tilt angle,
Wall azimuth angle,
Reflectivity, pg

= 23o
= 0o (solar noon)
= +23.5o (on June 21st)
= -23.5o (on December 21st)
= 90o (Vertical surface)
= 0o (south facing)
= 0.6

June 21st :

Altitude angle p at solar noon pmax = (l - d)| =89.53 o

2
At solar noon, solar azimuth angle, y = 0o as l < d
.-.wall solar azimuth angle, a = 180 -(y+^) = 180o
Incidence angle 9ver = cos_1(cos p.cos a)=89.53o
Direct radiation, IDN Cos (8):

= 1080.exp
0.21
-A
2
=
875.4
W/m
^ sin p
sin 89.3

IDN cos6= 875.4Xcos89.53 = 7.18W/m2

Diffuse radiation, Id:
View factor FWS =

(1 + cosE) 2

Diffuse radiation Id =C.IDN.FWS =0.135X875.4X0.5 = 59.1 W/m

= 0.5
2

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 15

(1-cosZ)
View factor FWG =---------------- Reflected radiation from ground (pg = 0.6), Id:
2
= 0.5
Reflected radiation,Ir:
Ir =(IDN +Id)PgFWG =(875.43 + 59.1) X 0.6 X 0.5 = 280.36 W /m2
..total incident radiation It =IDN cos0 + Id +I r =346.64 W/m2
Calculations similar to the can be carried out for December 21 st (declination is
-23.5o) . Table 35.2 shows a comparison between the solar radiation on the south
facing wall during summer (June 21st) and winter (December 21st):
Parameter

June 21st

Incident angle, 9
Direct radiation, IDN

December 21st
89.53o
43.53o
875.4 W/m2
1003.75 W/m2
7.18 W/m2
59.1 W/m2

727.7 W/m2
29.1 W/m2

Reflected radiation, Ir

280.36 W/m2

309.9 W/m2

Total incident radiation, It

346.64 W/m2

1066.7 W/m2

Direct radiation incident on the wall, IDNcos 9

Diffuse radiation, Id

The above table reveals an interesting fact. It is seen that in northern

hemisphere, a wall facing south receives much less radiation in summer
compared to winter. This is mainly due to the value of incident angle, which is
much larger in summer compared to winter for a south facing wall. This reduces
the contribution of the direct radiation significantly in summer compared to winter.
In fact if the ground has lower reflectivity than the value used in the example
(0.6), then the radiation incident on the vertical wall in summer will be almost
negligible, while it will be still very high in winter. This implies that from air
conditioning point of view, buildings in northern hemisphere should have windows
on the south facing wall so that the cooling load in summer and heating load in
winter reduces considerably.

32.4. Effect of clouds:

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 16

It is mentioned earlier that on a clear day, almost 85% of the incident

radiation is due to direct radiation and the contribution of diffuse radiation is much
smaller. However, when the sky is cloudy, the contribution of diffuse radiation
increases significantly. Though it is frequently assumed that the diffuse radiation
from the sky reaches the earth uniformly on clear days, studies show that this is
far from true. The diffuse radiation is even more non-uniform on cloudy days. Due
to the presence of the clouds (which is extremely difficult to predict), the available
solar radiation in an actual situation is highly variable. Clouds not only block the
short-wave radiation from the sun, but they also block the long-wave radiation
from earth. Thus it is very difficult to accurately account for the effect of clouds on
solar and terrestrial radiation. Sometimes, in solar energy calculations a
clearness index is used to take into account the effect of clouds. Arbitrarily a
value of 1.0 is assigned for clearness index for a perfectly clear and cloudless
sky. A clearness index value of less than 1.0 indicates the presence of clouds.
The calculations are carried out for a clear sky and the resulting direct radiation is
multiplied by the clearness index to calculate the contribution of direct radiation in
the presence of clouds. Data on the value of the clearness index are available for
a few select countries.

Questions and answers:

1. Calculate the local solar time and the corresponding hour angle at 9 A.M (local
standard time, L.St.T) on October 21st, for the Indian city of Kolkata located at
22o82N and 88o20E, the LSM for India is 82o30. the EOT for Kolkata on
October 21st is 15 minutes.
Ans.: Local solar time, LST is given by the expression,
LST = LStT+15 +4(88.33-82.5) = 9 hours 38.32 minutes A.M.
the corresponding hour angle is 324.6o

(Ans.)
(Ans.)

2. Find the maximum altitude angle for Kolkata (l = 22o82N) on June 21st.
Ans.: On June 21st, the declination angle,d is 23.5o.
The maximum altitude angle occurs at solar noon at which the hour angle is zero.
Hence, Maximum altitude angle, max is given by:
max = -1(l - d)! = 90 - (22.82 - 23.5) = 89.3 o
2

(Ans.)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 17

3. Find the sunrise, sunset and total sunshine hours at IIT Kharagpur (;22oN) on
September 9th.
Ans.: On September 9th, N = 252, hence the declination, d is equal to 4.62o.
The hour angle at sunrise and sunset is given by,

ho=cos_1(-tan 22.tan 4.62)=91.87o

Since each 15o is equal to 1 hour, 91.87o is equal to 6 hours and 8
minutes. Hence,
Sunrise takes place at (12.00 - 6.08) = 5.52 A.M (solar time)

(Ans.)

Sunset takes place at (12.00+6.08) = 6.08 P.M. (solar time)

Total sunshine hours are 2 X 6.08 = 12 hours and 16 minutes
4. What is the angle of incidence at 3 P.M. (solar time) of a north-facing roof that
is tilted at an angle of 15o with respect to the horizontal. Location: 22oN, and date
September 9th.
Ans.: Given: Latitude, l = 22o (N)
Solar time = 3 P.M. => hour angle, h = 45o
Date = September 9th => declination, d = 4.62o (from earlier example)
Altitude angle, p = sin-1 (cos l. cos d.cos h+sin l.sin d) = 43.13o
Since the roof is north facing, the surface azimuth angle E, is equal to 180o.
The solar azimuth angle y is given by:

d.sin h\
4.62sin45^
y=sin

/cos

cos d.sin h
J cos
4.62sin45 )
o
----------------- =sin-1 ---------------------- =74.96
^ cos p J
^ cos43.13 ,
1

The wall solar azimuth angle a = 180 - (y+) = 180 - (74.96-180) = 285o Hence
the angle of incidence is

0= cos_1(sin 43.13 cos 15-cos43.13.cos 285.sin 15)=52.3o

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 18

5. Find the direct normal radiation at Kolkata on June 21 st at solar noon?

Ans.: From the earlier example, on June 21st at solar noon, the altitude angle for
Kolkata is 89.3o. Hence the direct solar radiation is given by:

(
0.21
= 1080.exp------------2

= 875.4 W/m (Ans )

IDN=A B
sin
exp[~sin^J
v
89.3
6. Find the diffuse and total solar radiation incident on a horizontal surface
located at Kolkata on June 21st at solar noon?
Ans.: From the earlier example, on June 21 st at solar noon, the direct solar
radiation is equal to 875.4 W/m2. Since the surface is horizontal, the view factor
for diffuse radiation, FWS is equal to 1, whereas it is 0 for reflected radiation.
Hence, the diffuse solar radiation is given by:
I d =C.I DN .F WS =0.135X875.4=118.18 W/m 2

(Ans.)

Since the surface is horizontal, the reflected solar radiation is zero. The angle of
incidence, is given by:
6hor = (90 - Pnoon) = 90 - 89.3 = 0.7o

Hence the total incident solar radiation is given by:

It =IDN.cos (0) + Id = 875.4 x cos(0.7) + 118.18 = 993.5 W/m2

(Ans.)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 19

Lesson
33
Cooling And Heating
Load Calculations
-Solar Radiation
Through Fenestration
- Ventilation And
Infiltration
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 1

The specific objectives of this lesson are to discuss:

1458. Need for fenestration in buildings and effects of fenestration on air
conditioning systems (Section 33.1)
1459. Estimation of heat transfer rate into buildings through fenestration,
concepts of Solar Heat Gain Factor (SHGF) and Shading Coefficient (Section
33.2)
3. Effect of external shading, calculation of shaded area of fenestrations,
estimation of heat transfer rate through windows with overhangs (Section 33.3)
1460. Need for ventilation and recommended ventilation rates (Section 33.4)
1461. Infiltration and causes for infiltration (Section 33.5)
1462. Estimation of heat transfer rate due to infiltration and ventilation (Section
33.6)
At the end of the lecture, the student should be able to:
1463. Define fenestration and explain the need for fenestration and its effect on
air conditioning
1464. Calculate heat transfer rate due to fenestration using SHGF tables and
shading coefficients
1465. Calculate the dimensions of shadow cast on windows with overhangs and
estimate the heat transfer rate through shaded windows
1466. Explain the need for ventilation and select suitable ventilation rates
1467. Define infiltration and explain the causes for infiltration
1468. Calculate the heat transfer rates due to infiltration and ventilation

33.1. Solar radiation through fenestration:

Fenestration refers to any glazed (transparent) apertures in a building,
such as glass doors, windows, skylights etc. Fenestration is required in a building
as it provides:
1469.

Daylight, heat and outside air

1470.

Visual communication to the outside world

1471.

Aesthetics, and

1472.

Escape route in case of fires in low-rise buildings

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 2

Because of their transparency, fenestrations transmit solar radiation into

the building. Heat transfer through transparent surfaces is distinctly different from
heat transfer through opaque surfaces. When solar radiation is incident on an
opaque building wall, a part of it is absorbed while the remaining part is reflected
back. As will be shown later, only a fraction of the radiation absorbed by the
opaque surface is transferred to the interiors of the building. However, in case of
transparent surfaces, a major portion of the solar radiation is transmitted directly
to the interiors of the building, while the remaining small fraction is absorbed
and/or reflected back. Thus the fenestration or glazed surfaces contribute a
major part of cooling load of a building. The energy transfer due to fenestration
depends on the characteristics of the surface and its orientation, weather and
solar radiation conditions. A careful design of fenestration can reduce the building
energy consumption considerably.

33.2. Estimation of solar radiation through fenestration:

Figure 33.1 shows an unshaded window made of clear plastic glass. As
shown in the figure, the properties of this glass for solar radiation are:
transmittivity (x) = 0.80, reflectivity (p) = 0.08 and absorptivity (a) = 0.12. Thus out
of 100% of solar radiation incident on the glass, 80% is directly transmitted to the
indoors, 12% is absorbed by the glass (which increases the temperature of the
glass) and the remaining 8% is reflected back. Of the 12% absorbed by the glass
which leads to increase in its temperature, about 4% is transferred to the indoors
by convection heat transfer and the remaining 8% is lost to the outdoors by
convection and radiation. Thus out of 100% radiation, 84% is transmitted to the
interiors of the building. Of course, these figures are for a clear plate glass only.
For other types of glass, the values will be different.
Assuming the transmittivity and absorptivity of the surface same for direct,
diffuse and reflected components of solar radiation, the amount of solar radiation
passing through a transparent surface can be written as:
Q sg = A(x.It + N.a.It)

(33.1)

where:
A
It
T

= Area of the surface exposed to radiation

= Total radiation incident on the surface
= Transmittivity of glass for direct, diffuse and reflected radiations
= Absorptivity of glass for direct, diffuse and reflected radiations

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 3

= Fraction of absorbed radiation transferred to the indoors by conduction

and convection

Heat transferred
by convection

Indoors

Sun

Outdoors
Clear plate glass x =
0.80, a = 0.12, p = 0.08
Fig.33.1: Radiation properties of clear plate glass
In the above equation, the total incident radiation consists of direct, diffuse
and reflected radiation, and it is assumed that the values of transmittivity and
absorptivity are same for all the three types of radiation. Under steady state
conditions it can be shown that the fraction of absorbed radiation transferred to
the indoors, i.e., N is equal to:
U N = ho

(33.2)

where U is the overall heat transfer coefficient, which takes into account the
external heat transfer coefficient, the conduction resistance offered by the glass
and the internal heat transfer coefficient, and ho is the external heat transfer
coefficient.
From the above two equations, we can write:
T
oc Qsg=

------

(33.3)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 4

The term in square brackets for a single sheet, clear window glass (reference) is
called as Solar Heat Gain Factor (SHGF), i.e.,
tSHGF
U
+
ho
(33.4)
ss

Thus SHGF is the heat flux due to solar radiation through the reference
glass (SS). The maximum SHGF values for different latitudes, months and
orientations have been obtained and are available in the form of Tables in
ASHRAE handbooks. For example, Table 33.1 taken from ASHRAE
Fundamentals shows the maximum SHGF values in W/m 2 for 32o N latitude for
different months and orientations (direction a glass is facing).
Month

Orientation of the surface

N/shade

NE/NW

E/W

SE/SW

Horizontal

December

69

69

510

775

795

500

Jan, Nov

75

90

550

785

775

555

Feb, Oct

85

205

645

780

700

685

Mar, Sept

100

330

695

700

545

780

April, Aug

115

450

700

580

355

845

May, July

120

530

685

480

230

865

June

140

555

675

440

190

870

Table 33.1: Maximum SHGF factor for sunlit glass located at 32oN (W/m2)
The first column in the table gives the maximum SHGF values of a north
facing glass or a glass shaded from solar radiation and oriented in any direction.
Again it can be observed that, a glass facing south is desirable from cooling and
heating loads points of view as it allows maximum heat transfer in winter
(reduces required heating capacity) and minimum heat transfer in summer
(reduces required cooling capacity). Similar tables are available for other
latitudes also in ASHRAE Handbooks.
For fenestrations other than the reference SS glass, a Shading Coefficient
(SC) is defined such that the heat transfer due to solar radiation is given by:
Qsg = A.(SHGFmax ).(SC)

(33.5)

The shading coefficient depends upon the type of the glass and the type
of internal shading devices. Typical values of SC for different types of glass with
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 5

different types of internal shading devices have been measured and are
tabulated in ASHRAE Handbooks. Table 33.2 taken from ASHRAE Fundamentals
shows typical values of shading coefficients.
Shading Coefficient, SC
Type of glass

Thickness
mm

No
internal
shading

Medium

Light

Dark

Light

Venetian blinds

Roller shades

Single glass
Regular

1.00

0.64

0.55

0.59

0.25

Single glass
Plate

6-12

0.95

0.64

0.55

0.59

0.25

Single glass
Heat absorbing

0.70

0.57

0.53

0.40

0.30

Double glass
Regular

0.90

0.57

0.51

0.60

0.25

Double glass
Plate

0.83

0.57

0.51

0.60

0.25

Double glass
Reflective

0.2-0.4

0.2-0.33

Table 33.2: Shading coefficients for different types of glass and internal shading
It can be inferred from the above table that the heat transferred through
the glass due to solar radiation can be reduced considerably using suitable
internal shadings, however, this will also reduce the amount of sunlight entering
into the interior space. Values of SC for different types of curtains have also been
evaluated and are available in ASHRAE handbooks. Thus from the type of the
sunlit glass, its location and orientation and the type of internal shading one can
calculate the maximum heat transfer rate due to solar radiation.

33.3. Effect of external shading:

The solar radiation incident on a glazed window can be reduced
considerably by using external shadings. The external shading reduces the area
of the window exposed to solar radiation, and thereby reduces the heat
transmission into the building. A very common method of providing external
shading is to use overhangs. The principle of overhangs for solar heat gain
control is known for thousands of years. Fixed overhangs are among the
simplest, yet an effective method to control the solar heat gain into a building. By
proper design of the overhangs it is possible to block the solar radiation during
summer and allow it into the building during winter.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 6

Figure 33.2 shows an inset window of height H, width W and depth of the
inset d. Without overhang, the area exposed to solar radiation is H X W, however,
with overhang the area exposed is only x X y. The hatched portion in the figure
shows the area that is under shade, and hence is not experiencing any direct
solar radiation. Thus the solar radiation transmitted into the building with
overhang is given by:
max Q

sg

=Aunshaded .(SHGFmax ).(SC)=(x.y).(SHGF

).SC

(33.6)

Using solar geometry the area of the window that is not shaded at any location at a
particular instant can be calculated. It can be shown that x and y are given by:
x = W-d(tan )
(33.7)
tan
(33.8)
y = H-d
cos
where is the altitude angle and is the wall solar azimuth angle.

Window
Sun
H

Fig.33.2: Shadow cast by an inset window

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 7

It should be noted that the overhang provides shade against direct solar radiation
only and cannot prevent diffuse and reflected radiation. Thus for the shaded
portion, the SHGFmax values corresponding to the north facing window in Table
33.1 should be selected.
Using a separation between the top of the window and the overhang, it is
possible to completely shade the window in summer and completely unshade it
in winter. Complete shading of the window can be provided by selecting infinite
combinations of overhang width (Wo) and separation dimensions (S), as shown in
Fig.33.3. It should however be noticed that for complete shading as the
separation distance S increases, the width of the overhang W o should also
increase and vice versa. ASHRAE defines a Shade Line Factor (SLF) which is
the ratio of the distance a shadow falls below the edge of an overhang to the
width of the overhang. Thus from the knowledge of the SLF and the dimensions
of the window with overhang, one can calculate the unshaded area. The average
SLF values for 5 hours of maximum on August 21 st for different latitudes and
orientations of the window are presented in tabular form by ASHRAE.

G) Wo

Window

Fig.33.3: Variation of overhang width with separation for complete shading

Though overhangs, if properly designed can lead to significant reduction in
solar heat gain during summer, they do have certain limitations. These are:
a) An external overhang provides protection against direct solar radiation only.
It cannot reduce diffuse and reflection radiations. In fact, sometimes, the
external overhang may actually reflect the ground radiation onto the
window.
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 8

1473.
The reflectivity of the glazed surfaces increases and transmittivity
reduces with angle of incidence. Thus in summer when the angle of
incidence on a vertical surface is large, most of the solar radiation incident
on the glazed surface is reflected back and only about 40% of the incident
radiation is transmitted into the building. In such cases, the provision of
overhang can take care at the most only 40% of the incident radiation.
1474.
For practical purposes, overhangs are truly effective for windows
facing 3045o of south. During mornings and evenings when the sun is
striking the east and west walls and is so low in the sky that overhangs
can provide only minimum protection.
In spite of the above limitations, a fixed overhang is frequently used as in
addition to reducing the direct solar radiation, it also provides protection
against rain. The dimensions of the overhang have to be selected depending
upon whether passive solar heating in winter is more important or shading in
summer. It is also possible to use adjustable overhangs in place of fixed
overhangs. However, though the adjustable overhangs are more flexible, and
hence can provide greater benefit both in summer and winter, these are not
so frequently used due to the operational difficulties and design complexities.

33.4. Ventilation for Indoor Air Quality (IAQ):

The quality of air inside the conditioned space should be such that it
provides a healthy and comfortable indoor environment. Air inside the
conditioned space is polluted by both internal as well as external sources. The
pollutants consist of odours, various gases, volatile organic compounds (VOCs)
and particulate matter. The internal sources of pollution include the occupants
(who consume oxygen and release carbon dioxide and also emit odors),
furniture, appliances etc, while the external sources are due to impure outdoor
air. Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) can be controlled by the removal of the contaminants
in the air or by diluting the air. The purpose of ventilation is to dilute the air inside
the conditioned space. Ventilation may be defined as the supply of fresh air to
the conditioned space either by natural or by mechanical means for the purpose
of maintaining acceptable indoor air quality. Generally ventilation air consists of
fresh outdoor air plus any re-circulated air that has been treated. If the outdoor
air itself is not pure, then it also has to be treated before supplying it to the
conditioned space.
Though the minimum amount of air required for breathing purposes is
small (about 0.2 litres per second per person), the actual ventilation air required
is much larger as in addition to supplying oxygen to the occupants, the ventilation
air must:
1475.
level
1476.
1477.

Dilute the odours inside the occupied space to a socially acceptable

Maintain carbon dioxide concentration at a satisfactory level
Pressurizing the escape routes in the event of fire
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 9

33.4.1. Estimation of minimum outdoor air required for ventilation:

Ventilation is one of the major contributors to total cooling and heating
load on the system. From energy conservation point of view, it is important select
the ventilation requirements suitably. The amount of air required for ventilation
purposes depends on several factors such as: application, activity level, extent of
cigarette smoking, presence of combustion sources etc. After several studies
stretched over several years, standards for minimum ventilation requirements
have been formulated. For example, ASHRAE standard 62-1989 provides a
guideline for minimum ventilation requirements. Table 33.3 provides typical
outdoor (OD) air requirement for the purpose of ventilation:
Function

Occupancy per
100 m2 floor area

OD air requirement per person

(L/s)
Smoking
Non-smoking

Offices

10

2.5

Operation theatres

20

15

Lobbies

30

Class rooms

50

8.0

Meeting places

60

17.5

3.5

7.5

2.5

Table 33.3: Typical outdoor air requirements for ventilation

It can be observed from the above table that the ventilation requirement
increases with the occupancy. It can also be seen that the required amount of
OD air increases significantly if smoking is permitted in the conditioned space.

33.5. Infiltration:
Infiltration may be defined as the uncontrolled entry of untreated, outdoor
air directly into the conditioned space. Infiltration of outdoor air into the indoors
takes place due to wind and stack effects. The wind effect refers to the entry of
outdoor air due to the pressure difference developed across the building due to
winds blowing outside the building. The stack effect refers to the entry of
outdoor air due to buoyancy effects caused by temperature difference between
the indoor and outdoors. Though infiltration brings in outdoor air into the building
similar to ventilation, in many commercial buildings efforts are made to minimize
it, as it is uncontrolled and uncertain. Some of the means employed to control
infiltration include use of vestibules or revolving doors, use of air curtains,
building pressurization and sealing of windows and doors. It is very difficult to
estimate the exact amount of infiltration as it depends on several factors such as
the type and age of the building, indoor and outdoor conditions (wind velocity and

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 10

direction, outdoor temperature and humidity etc.). However, several methods

have been proposed to estimate the amount of infiltration air. Sometimes, based
on type of construction, buildings are classified into loose, average or tight, and
infiltration is specified in terms of number of air changes per hour (ACH). One
ACH is equal to the airflow rate equal to the internal volume of the occupied
space per hour. The ACH values are related to the outside wind velocity and the
temperature difference between the indoor and outdoors. Infiltration rates are
also obtained for different types of doors and windows and are available in the
form of tables in air conditioning handbooks.

33.6. Heating and cooling loads due to ventilation and

infiltration:
Due to ventilation and infiltration, buildings gain energy in summer and
loose energy in winter. The energy gained or lost consists of both sensible and
latent parts, as in general the temperature and moisture content of indoor and
outdoors are different both in winter and winter.
The sensible heat transfer rate due to ventilation and infiltration, Qs,vi is given by:
Qs,vi =mo cp,m(To -Ti) = Vo ocp,m(To - Ti )

(33.9)

The latent heat transfer rate due to ventilation and infiltration, Ql,vi is given by:
Ql,vi =mo hfg(Wo - Wi) = Vo ohfg(Wo - Wi)

(33.10)

In the above equations:

mo and Vo are the mass flow rate and volumetric flow rates of outdoor air due to
ventilation and infiltration, cpm is the average specific heat of moist air, hfg is the
latent heat of vaporization of water, To and T are the outdoor and indoor dry bulb
temperatures and Wo and Wi are the outdoor and indoor humidity ratios. Thus
from known indoor and outdoor conditions and computed or selected values of
ventilation and infiltration rates, one can calculate the cooling and heating loads
on the building. The sensible and latent heat transfer rates as given by the
equations above will be positive during summer (heat gains) and negative during
winter (heat losses).
Though the expressions for heat transfer rates are same for both
ventilation and infiltration, there is a difference as far as the location of these
loads are considered. While heat loss or gain due to infiltration adds directly to
the building cooling or heating load, heat loss or gain due to ventilation adds to
the equipment load. These aspects will be discussed in a later Chapter.
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 11

Questions & answers:

1. Which of the following statements are TRUE?
1478. Fenestration is important in buildings as it provides visual communication
to the outside world
1479. Heat transfer through fenestration generally forms a small part of the total
building load
1480. Heat transfer due to fenestration depends only on the properties of the
transparent material
1481. Fenestration is undesirable and hence should be minimized
Ans.: a)
2. Which of the following statements are TRUE?
1482. External shading of windows is taken care of by using a shading
coefficient
1483. Internal shading of windows is taken care of by using a shading coefficient
1484. The shading coefficient for the reference SS glass is 0.0
1485. The shading coefficient for the reference SS glass is 1.0
Ans.: b) and d)
3. Which of the following statements are TRUE for northern hemisphere?
1486. Providing fenestration on northern side of the building is beneficial from
summer cooling and winter heating points of view
1487. Providing fenestration on southern side of the building is beneficial from
summer cooling and winter heating points of view
1488. On an average, the heat transfer due to fenestration is maximum for east
and west facing windows
1489. On an average, the heat transfer rate due to fenestration is minimum for
north facing windows
Ans.: b), c) and d)
4. Which of the following statements are TRUE?
1490. Compared to external shadings, internal shadings are beneficial as they do
not allow the radiation into the buildings
1491. Compared to internal shadings, external shadings are beneficial as they
block the radiation outside the window itself
1492. The effectiveness of external shading at a particular varies from day to
day and from time to time
1493. External shadings are effective for east and west facing windows
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 12

Ans.: b) and c)
5. Which of the following statements are TRUE?
1494.
1495.
1496.
1497.

Ventilation is required for supply of oxygen for breathing only

Ventilation is uncontrolled, while infiltration is controlled
Ventilation requirement depends on occupancy and also on activity level
All of the above

Ans.: c)
6. Calculate the maximum heat transfer rate through a 1.5 m2 area, unshaded,
regular double glass facing south during the months of June and December
without internal shading and with internal shading consisting of light venetian
blinds. Location 32oN
Ans.: For the month of June the SHGFmax from Table 33.1 is 190 W/m2. Using the
values of shading coefficients from Table 33.2, the heat transfer rate is:
Without internal shading (SC = 0.9):
Qsg =A.(SHGFmax).(SC) = 1.5X190X0.9 = 256.5 W

(Ans.)

With internal shading (SC = 0.51):

Qsg =A.(SHGFmax).(SC) = 1.5X190X0.51 = 145.35 W

(Ans.)

These values for the month of December (SHGFmax = 795 W/m2) are:
Without internal shading:

Qsg = 1073.25 W

(Ans.)

With internal shading:

Qsg = 608.175 W

(Ans.)

7. Calculate energy transmitted into a building at 3 P.M on July 21 st due to solar

radiation through a south facing window made of regular single glass. The
dimensions of the window are height 2 m, width 1.5 m and the depth of inset 0.3
m. Find the energy transmitted if there is no overhang.
Ans.: From the above data the altitude angle and wall solar azimuth angle
are found to be:
= 48.23o, = 39.87o
Therefore area of the unshaded portion = x X y, where x and y are given by:
x = W - d (tan ) =1.5- 0.3(tan 39.87) = 1.249 m

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 13

y
H m
==1.562

tan p ^3 tan 48.23

cos a) ^cos39.87

.-.The heat transmission rate into the building through the unshaded portion Qus is given
by:
Qus = (x.y).(SHGFmax ).SC = (1.249X1.562) X 230 X 1.0 = 448.7 W
The heat transmission rate into the building through the unshaded portion Q ss is given
by:
Qss = (W.H-x.y).(SHGFmax,N ).SC = (1.049)X120X1.0 = 125.9W
Hence the total amount of radiation transmitted into the building, Qsg is given by:
Qsg = Qus + Qss = 574.6 W

(Ans.)

Without overhang the heat transmission rate is:

Qsg = (W X H)SHGFmax = 690 W

(Ans.)

Thus there is a reduction of 115.4 W (16.7%) due to external shading. Of course, these
values will be different for different periods.
8. A large air conditioned building with a total internal volume of 1,00,000 m 3 is
maintained at 25oC (DBT) and 50% RH, while the outside conditions are 35oC and 45%
RH. It has a design occupancy of 10,000 people, all non-smoking. The infiltration rate
through the building is equal to 1.0 ACH. Estimate the heat transfer rate due to
ventilation and infiltration. Assume the barometric pressure to be 1 atm.
Ans.: From psychrometric chart:
For inside conditions: 24oC (DBT) and 50% RH:
Wi = 0.0093 kgw/kgda, hi = 47.656 kJ/kgda
For outside conditions: 35oC (DBT) and 45% RH:
Wo = 0.01594 kgw/kgda, ho = 75.875 kJ/kgda and va = 0.89519 m3/kg
Heat transfer due to ventilation:
From Table 33.3, assume a ventilation requirement of 3.5 l/s/person. Hence the total
OD air required is:

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 14

Vo,v = 3.5 x 10,000 = 35000 l/s = 35 m3/s

Hence the mass flow rate of ventilated air is:
mo,v = 35 /0.89519 = 39.1 kg/s
Sensible heat transfer rate due to ventilation is given by:
Qs,v = mo,vcpm(to ti) = 39.1 x 1.0216 x (35 25) = 399.5 kW
Latent heat transfer rate due to ventilation is given by:
Ql,v = mo,vhfg(Wo Wi) = 39.1 x 2501 x (0.01594 0.0093) = 649.3 kW
Hence total heat transfer rate due to ventilation is:
Qt,v = Qs,v + Ql,v = 1048.8 kW

(Ans.)

Heat transfer rate due to infiltration: Infiltration rate, Vinf = 1

ACH = 1,00,000/3600 = 27.78 m3/s Hence mass flow rate of
infiltrated air is:
minf = Vinf/va = 27.78/0.89519 = 31 kg/s
Hence using expressions similar to ventilation, the sensible, latent and total heat
transfer rates due to infiltration are found to be:
Qs,inf = 316.7 kW

(Ans.)

Ql,inf = 514.8 kW

(Ans.)

Qt,inf = 831.5 kW

(Ans.)

It can be seen from the above example that the total load on the air conditioning
system is very high ( = 1880.3 kW = 534.6 TR).

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 15

Lesson
34
Cooling And Heating
Load Calculations
- Heat Transfer Through
Buildings - Fabric Heat
Gain/Loss

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 1

The specific objectives of this chapter are to:

1498. Discuss the general aspects of heat transfer through buildings (Section 34.1)
1499. Discuss one-dimensional, steady state heat transfer through homogeneous,
non-homogeneous walls, through air spaces and through composite walls of the
buildings (Section 34.2)
1500. Discuss unsteady heat transfer through opaque walls and roofs (Section 34.3)
1501. Discuss one-dimensional, unsteady heat transfer through opaque walls and
roofs with suitable initial and boundary conditions (Section 34.4)
1502. Describe the analytical method used to solve the 1-D, transient heat transfer
problem through building walls and roofs (Section 34.4.1)
1503. Briefly discuss the numerical methods used to solve the transient heat
transfer problem (Section 34.4.2)
1504. Discuss the semi-empirical methods based on Effective Temperature
Difference or Cooling Load Temperature Difference, discuss the physical significance
of decrement and time lag factors and present typical tables of CLTD for walls and
roof (Section 34.4.3)
At the end of the chapter, the student should be able to:
1. Calculate the steady heat transfer rates through homogeneous and nonhomogeneous walls, through composite walls consisting of a combination of
homogeneous and non-homogeneous walls and air spaces
1505. Explain the need for considering transient heat transfer through buildings
1506. Derive one-dimensional, transient heat conduction equation for building walls
and roof and indicate suitable initial and boundary conditions
1507. Discuss the general aspects of the analytical, numerical and semi-empirical
methods used to solve the transient building heat transfer problem
1508. Use the ETD/CLTD methods to estimate heat transfer rate through opaque
walls and roof of the buildings

34.1. Introduction:
Whenever there is a temperature difference between the conditioned indoor
space of a building and outdoor ambient, heat transfer takes place through the
building structure (walls, roof, floor etc.). This is known as fabric heat gain or loss,
depending upon whether heat transfer is to the building or from the building,
respectively. The fabric heat transfer includes sensible heat transfer through all the
structural elements of a building, but does not include radiation heat transfer through
fenestration. Exact analysis of heat transfer through building structures is very
complex, as it has to consider:
1509.

Geometrically complex structure of the walls, roofs etc. consisting of a

wide variety of materials with different thermo-physical properties.

1510.

Continuously varying outdoor conditions due to variation in solar

radiation, outdoor temperature, wind velocity and direction etc.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 2

c) Variable indoor conditions due to variations in indoor temperatures, load

patterns etc.
For cooling and heating load calculations, the indoor conditions are generally
assumed to be constant to simplify the analysis. However, the variation in outdoor
conditions due to solar radiation and ambient temperature has to be considered in
the analysis to arrive at realistic cooling loads during summer. In winter, the heating
load calculations are based on peak or near-peak conditions, which normally occur
early in the morning before sunrise, in addition, in cold countries, the ambient
temperature variation during the winter months is not significant. Hence, in
conventional heating load calculations, the effects of solar radiation and ambient
temperature variation are not considered and the heat transfer is assumed to be
steady. However by this steady state method, the calculated heating capacity will be
more than required. Thus for higher accuracy, it is essential to consider the transient
heat transfer effects during winter also. In the present lecture, first steady state heat
transfer through buildings will be discussed followed by the unsteady state heat
transfer.

34.2. One-dimensional, steady state heat transfer through

buildings:
Heat transfer through the building is assumed to be steady, if the indoor and
outdoor conditions do not vary with time. The heat transfer is assumed to be onedimensional if the thickness of the building wall is small compared to the other two
dimensions. In general, all building walls are multi-layered and non-homogeneous
and could be non-isotropic. To start with we consider a single layered, homogeneous
wall and then extend the discussion to multi-layered, non-homogenous walls.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 3

34.2.1. Homogeneous wall:

Figure 34.1(a) shows a homogeneous wall separating the conditioned indoor
space from the outdoors. As shown in the figure, the wall is subjected to radiation
qr,oqc,
(from Ts,o)
o
Outdoors

qin

(a)

Wall

W
W

Ts,i

q
1/hr,i

s,o

r,o

1/hr,o
T w,i

Ax/kw

vVWW

Ti
1/hci

qc,i

Ti(

V\AA
1/hi

WW

T w,o

qin

1/hco

(b)

w\wv
Ax/kw

c,o

1/ho

WW

To

qin
(c)
Fig.34.1: Steady state heat transfer through a building wall and the resistance
network
and convection heat transfer on both sides, while heat transfer through the wall is by
conduction.
If outside and inside conditions do not vary with time, then the heat transfer
through the wall is steady, and we can construct a heat transfer network considering
various heat transfer resistances as shown in Fig.34.1(b). The heat transfer rate per unit
area of the wall qin under steady state is given by:

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 4

qin = { c,o +qr,o } = { qc,i +qr,i } W/m2

(34.1)
where qc,o and qro are the convective and radiative heat transfers to the outer surface
of the wall from outside and qc,i and qr,i are the convective and radiative heat transfers
from the inner surface of the wall to the indoors, respectively. Writing the radiative
heat transfer in terms of a linearized radiative heat transfer coefficient, we can write
the heat transfer rate per unit area as:
qin =ho(To -Two)=hi(Tw,i -Ti)

W/m2

(34.2)

where Ti and To are the indoor and outdoor air temperatures, T w,i and Tw,o are the
inner and outer surface temperatures of the wall respectively. In the above equation,
hi and ho are the inner and outer surface heat transfer coefficients or surface
conductances, which take into account both convection and radiation heat transfers.
From the resistance network, it can easily be shown that the surface conductances hi
and ho are given by:
w,i

hi =hc,i +hr,i

-----

(34.3)

T w,i - Ti ;

ho=hco +hroT------------, I, To-Tw,o J

(34.4)

The convective heat transfer coefficient depends on whether heat transfer is

by natural convection or forced convection. Normally the air inside the conditioned
space is assumed to be still as the required air velocities in the conditioned space
are very small. Hence, the inside convective heat transfer coefficient h c,i can be
calculated using heat transfer correlations for natural convection. For example, for
still air hc,i can be estimated using the following simple correlation:
1

l AT

hc ,i =1.42

|4

W/m .K

(34.5)

where AT is the temperature difference between the inner surface of the wall and the
still air, and L is the length of the wall. Of course, the actual heat transfer coefficient
will be slightly higher due to the finite air motion inside the conditioned space.
Normally due to wind speed, the heat transfer from the outside air to the outer
surface of the wall is by forced convection. Hence to estimate the outer convective
heat transfer coefficient hc,o, suitable forced convective heat transfer correlations
should be used.
The linearized radiative heat transfer coefficient is calculated from the
equation:
(

SO

VT1 4

4\

hr= ----------- IT -T2 I W/m .K

(34.6)

where s is the emissivity of the surface, a is the Stefan-Boltzmanns constant (5.673

x 10-8 W/m2.K4), T1 and T2 are the hot and cold surface temperatures (in K)
respectively.
Table 34.1 shows typical surface conductance values, which can be used for
estimating inner and outer heat transfer coefficients (hi and h o). When the air is still
(i.e., for the inside heat transfer coefficient), the order-of-magnitude of convective
heat transfer is almost same as that of the radiative heat transfer coefficient, as a
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 5

result, the emissivity of the surface plays an important role and the surface
conductance increases with emissivity as shown in the table. On the other hand,
when the air is blowing at considerable speed (i.e., for external heat transfer
coefficient), the convection heat transfer coefficient is many times larger than the
radiative heat transfer coefficient, as a result, the effect of emissivity of the surface is
not important.
Orientation of
Surface

Air Velocity

Direction of heat Surface emissivity

flow
0.9
0.7
0.5

Horizontal

Still Air

Up

9.4

5.2

4.4

Horizontal

Still Air

Down

6.3

2.2

1.3

Vertical

Still Air

Horizontal

8.5

4.3

3.5

Any position

3.7 m/s

Any

23.3

Any position

6.4 m/s

Any

35

Table 34.1: Surface conductance values in W/m2.K for different orientations, air
velocities and surface emissivity (C.P. Arora)
Eliminating the surface temperatures of the wall (T w,i and Tw,o), the steady
state heat transfer rate per unit area of the wall can be written in terms of the indoor
and outdoor air temperatures and the overall heat transfer coefficient, i.e.,
qin =U(To -Ti)=

(To - Ti) R

W/m2

tot

(34.7)

where U is the overall heat transfer coefficient and R tot is the total resistance to heat
transfer. From the heat transfer network, the expression for overall heat transfer
coefficient is given by:
1
hoy

Ax

1 hi kw
tot

(W/m2.K)

(34.8)

where Ax and kw are the thickness and thermal conductivity of the wall, respectively.
If the wall consists of windows, doors etc., then the overall heat transfer Uo is
obtained using the individual U-values and their respective areas as:
Uo = (Uwall .Awall + Udoor .Adoor + Uwindow.A

window

...) / Atotal

(34.9)

where Uwall, Udoor, Uwindow etc. are the overall heat transfer coefficients for the wall, door,
window etc., which are obtained using Eqn.(34.8), and Awall, Adoor, Awindow are the
corresponding areas. Atotal is the total area of the wall that includes doors, windows
etc. The above equation for overall heat transfer coefficient (Eqn.(34.9)) is valid
when the temperature difference across the wall components are same and the heat
transfer paths through these elements are parallel.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 6

34.2.2. Non-homogeneous walls:

In general the building walls may consist of non-homogeneous materials such
as hollow bricks. Heat transfer through non-homogeneous materials such as hollow
bricks is quite complicated as it involves simultaneous heat transfer by convection,
conduction and radiation as shown in Fig.34.2. The heat transfer network consists of
series as well as parallel paths due to the simultaneous modes of heat transfer. In
practice, all these effects are lumped into a single parameter called thermal
conductance, C, and the heat flux through the hollow brick is given by:
q=C(Tw,o -Tw,i)

W/m2

(34.10)

The conductance values of common building materials have been measured

and are available in tabular form in ASHRAE and other handbooks. Table 34.2
shows thermo-physical properties of some commonly used building materials.

Tw,o

Tw,i

Fig.34.2: Heat transfer through a non-homogeneous wall

Material

Description

Specific
heat
kJ/kg.K

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 7

Conductance
Thermal
Density
C, W/m2.K
3
conductivity
kg/m
kw, W/m.K

Common
Face brick
Firebrick
Ply
Woods
Hard
Soft
Masonry Concrete Plaster,
Materials Cement
Hollow Clay tiles
a)
10 cm
b)
20 cm
c)
30 cm
Hollow Concrete
blocks
d)
10 cm
e)
20 cm
f)
30 cm
Foam concrete
(Pre-cast slabs for
roof)
Bricks

Window
Borosilicate
Insulating Mineral or glass wool
Materials Fiberglass board Cork
board Cork granulated
Thermocole (EPS)
Diatomaceous
Earth
Felt
Magnesia
Asbestos
Glass

0.84
0.84
0.96
-2.39
2.72
0.88
0.796
-----

0.84
0.67
0.7
1.884
1.88
--0.816

1600
2000
2000
544
720
512
1920
1885
----210-704

2700
2200
24-64
64-144
104-128
45-120
30
320 330
270 470570

0.77
1.32
1.04 1.09
0.1
0.158
0.1
1.73 8.65
----0.043-0.128

5.23
3.14
2.33
8.14
5.23
4.54

0.78
1.09
0.038
0.038
0.038
0.045
0.037
0.061
0.052
0.067
0.154

Table 34.2: Thermo-physical properties of some common building and insulating

materials (C.P. Arora)
34.2.3. Air spaces:
Buildings may consist of air spaces between walls. Since air is a bad
conductor of heat, the air space provides effective insulation against heat
transfer. Heat transfer through the air space takes place by a combined
mechanism of conduction, convection and radiation as shown in Fig. 34.3.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

8

Surface 1 at
temperature
T1

Surface 2 at
temperature
T2

F
i
g
.
3
4
.
3
:
H
e
a
t
tr
a
n
sf
e
r
t
h
r
o
u
g
h
a
n
ai
r
s
p
a
c
e
in
t
h
e
w
al
l
Thus
the
heat
transfer
rate
through the air
spaces
depends upon
its
width,
orientation and

surface
emissivities of
the
wall
surfaces and
the
temperature
difference
between
the
two surfaces.
Heat transfer
by conduction
is considerable
only when the
thickness
of
the air space
is very small.
Studies show
that beyond an
air
gap
of
about 2 cms,
the effect of
conduction
heat transfer is
negligible, and
heat transfer is
predominantly
by convection
and radiation.
Since
the
thickness
of
the air spaces
varies
normally from
5 cms to 55
cms (e.g. for
false ceilings),
the effect of
conduction
may
be
neglected. In
such a case,
the heat flux
through the air
space is given
by:
q
where C is the
conductance
of
the
air
space
that
includes
the
radiation
as
well
as
convection
effects.
Assuming the
heat transfer
coefficient hc
to be same for
both
the

surfaces (i.e.,
when air is
well-mixed in
the air space),
the
air
temperature to
be uniform and
the surfaces 1
and 2 to be
infinite parallel
planes, it can
be shown that
the
conductance C
is given by:
CW (
+ hr
c /
+
h m
r

.
K

4
.
1
2
)

The linearized
radiative heat
transfer
coefficient hr is
given by:
hF K
1
2
=P
r

3
4
.
1
3
)

where the view

factor F12 is
given by:
F

12

= 1
/

V
.

( 3

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

where s1 and 82 are the emissivities of surfaces 1 and 2, respectively. Table 34.3
shows the typical conductance values for the air spaces commonly encountered in
buildings.
Position & Mean
Temp. difference
Horizontal, 10oC

Direction of heat
flow
Up
Down

Vertical, 10oC

Width of air
space, cm
2.1
11.6
2.1
4.2
11.6

Conductance,
W/m2.K

2.1
11.6
2.1
11.6
2.1
4.2
11.6

5.8
5.8
7.7
7.2
7.0
6.2
5.8

2.1
11.6

7.0
6.9

Horizontal

Horizontal, 32oC
Up
Down
Vertical, 32oC

Horizontal

6.7
6.2
5.7
5.1
4.8

Table 34.3: Typical conductance values of air spaces (C.P. Arora)

34.2.4. Multi-layered, composite walls:
In general, a building wall may consist of several layers comprising of layers
of homogeneous and non-homogeneous wall materials made up of structural and
insulating materials and air spaces. For such a multi-layered wall, one can write the
heat transfer rate per unit area as:
qin=U(To -Ti)=

(To - Ti) R
tot

W/m2

(34.15)

where the overall heat transfer coefficient U is given as:

1

tot

lU

vhiy + N

1
j
w,i

j=1

jJ

vhoy

(34.16
)

Thus from the structure of the wall, various material properties and
conductance values of non-homogeneous materials and air spaces and inner and
outer surface temperatures and conductance, one can calculate the heat transfer
rate under steady state conditions. It should be kept in mind that the equations given
above are limited to plane walls. For non-planar walls (e.g. circular walls), the
contour of the walls must be taken into account while calculating heat transfer rates.

34.3. Unsteady heat transfer through opaque walls and roofs:

In general, heat transfer through building walls and roof is unsteady, this is
particularly so in summer due to solar radiation and varying ambient temperature. In
the calculation of unsteady heat transfer rates through buildings, it is essential to
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 10

consider the thermal capacity of the walls and roof. Due to the finite and often large
thermal capacity of the buildings, the heat transfer rate from outside to the outer
surface is not equal to the heat transfer rate from the inner surface to the indoor
space1. In addition, the thermal capacity of the buildings introduces a time lag. These
aspects have to be considered in realistic estimation of building cooling loads. This
makes the problem mathematically complex. Though the conduction through the
building walls and roof could be multi-dimensional, for the sake of simplicity a onedimensional heat transfer is normally considered. It is to be noted that when the heat
transfer is not steady, the concept of simple resistance network as discussed before
cannot be used for obtaining heat transfer rate through the wall.

34.4. One-dimensional, unsteady heat transfer through building

walls and roof:
For the sake of simplicity, it is assumed that the wall is made of a
homogeneous material. It is also assumed that the temperature of the conditioned
space is kept constant by using a suitable air conditioning system. Figure 34.4
shows a wall of thickness L subjected to unsteady heat transfer. As shown in the
figure the outer surface of the wall (x=L) is subjected to direct and diffuse radiations
from the sun (OCDID and oidId), reflected radiation from the outer wall to the
surrounding surfaces (R) and convective heat transfer from outdoor air to the outer
surface of the wall (ho(To-Tw,o)). Heat transfer from the inner surface to the
conditioned space takes place due to combined effects of convection and radiation
(hi(Tw,i-To)).

Applying energy balance equation to the outer surface of the wall (x = L) at

any instance of time 9, we can write:
^c/xy
dx qx=Le=-kw

= ho(To -Tx=L)+ocDID +ocdId -R

(34.17)

'x=L,9

Applying energy balance equation to the inner surface of the wall (x = 0), we
can write:
\xy

dx

qx=0e=-kw

f pr\

= hi(Tx=0 -Ti)

(34.18)

'x=0,e

If the thermal capacity of the wall is small (e.g. for a thin door), the heat transfer will still be
transient due to changing outdoor conditions. However, at any point of time the heat transfer
rate at the outer surface is equal to the heat transfer rate at the inner surface, i.e., qo,e = qi,e
due to negligible thermal storage effect
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 11

CX
h
OtdId
o(T
DID
o-Tw,o)

x Fig.34.4. Unsteady
heat transfer through a building wall

Outdoor air
at To

I
n
general
due to
the
finite
thermal
capacity
of the
walls; at
any
point of
time 9,
the heat
transfer
rate at
the
outer
surface
is
not
equal to
the heat
transfer
rate at
the
inner
surface,
i.e.,
q
x

(3

For cooling load calculations, we need to

know the heat transfer rate from the inner surface
of the wall to the conditioned space at a given time
9, i.e., qx=0,e. From Eq.(34.18), to calculate
qx=0,e, we need to know the temperature
distribution (dT/dx) inside the wall so that we can
calculate (ST/5x)x=0,e and qin from Eq.(34.18). To
find the temperature distribution inside the wall,
one has to solve the transient heat conduction
equation as the mode of heat transfer through
the solid wall is assumed to be by conduction
only. Assuming the variation in thermal properties
of the solid wall to be negligible, the onedimensional, transient heat conduction equation
through the plane wall is given by:
d2T
=
1fdT
8x 2
a ^50

(
3
4
.
2
0
)

In the above equation, a is the thermal diffusivity

(a = kw/pwcpw), x is the length coordinate and 9 is
the time coordinate. To solve the above partial
differential equation, an initial condition and two
boundary conditions are required to be specified.
The initial condition could be a known
temperature gradient at a particular time, 9 = 0,
i.e.,
Tx,e=
0=Ti(
x)

(
3
4
.
2
1
)

The two boundary conditions at x = L and x = 0 are

given by Eqs.(34.17) and (34.18). The boundary
condition at x = L, i.e., Eq.(34.17) can be written
as:

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 12

V^xy qx=Le=-kw T
dT

= ho(To-Tx=L)+aDID+adId-R = ho(Tsol -air-Tx=L)(34.22)

x=L,8

where Tsol-air is known as the sol-air temperature and is an equivalent or an effective

outdoor temperature that combines the effects of convection and radiation. From the
above equation the sol-air temperature is given by:
sol-air

a D I D +a d I d -R ho

(34.23)

It can be easily seen that in the absence of any radiation, the sol-air temperature is
simply equal to the outdoor air temperature. The difference between the sol-air
temperature and ambient air temperature increases as the amount of radiation
incident on the outer surface increases and/or the external heat transfer coefficient
decreases. Since on any given day, the outdoor air temperature and solar radiation
vary with time, the sol-air temperature also varies with time in a periodic manner.
In terms of the sol-air temperature the boundary condition at x=L is written as:
qx=L,e=-kwkT

= ho(Tsol-air-Tx=L)

(34.24)

\0x7x=L,6

Thus the one-dimensional unsteady heat transfer equation through the plane wall
given by Eq.(34.20) should be solved using the initial condition given by Eq.(34.21)
and the boundary conditions given by Eqs.(34.18) and (34.24). This problem can be
solved by an analytical method involving an infinite harmonic series or by using
numerical techniques such as finite difference or finite volume methods or by using
semi-empirical methods.
34.4.1. Analytical solution:
Analytical solutions to transient transfer through building walls and roof are
available for simple geometries. To simplify the problem further it is generally
assumed that the outdoor air temperature and solar radiation intensity vary in a
periodic manner. In addition, normally the indoor temperature and thermal properties
of the wall materials are assumed to be constant. Though the variation of ambient
temperature and solar radiation is highly erratic and hence non-periodic due mainly
to the presence of clouds and other climatic factors, the assumption of periodic
variation is justified if one assumes a clear sky. For example Fig.34.5, shows the
direct, diffuse and total radiation intensity on a horizontal roof under clear sky
conditions. It can be seen that the variation is periodic with the peak occurring at the
solar noon. Applying periodic boundary condition at the outer surface, the analytical
solution is obtained in terms of an infinite Fourier series consisting of various
harmonics.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 13

ITotal

IDirect

1200
1000
800
600
IDiffuse

400
200
0
0

10

12

14

16

18

20

22

24

Solar Time,h
Fig.34.5: Variation of direct, diffuse and total solar radiation on a horizontal surface with
time under clear sky conditions
The sol-air temperature at any instant 9 is given by (Threlkeld):
Tsol-air,e = Tsol-air,m + M1 cosTD^ + N1 sinti1G + M2 cosTD29 + N2 sinTO26 +........(34.25)
Where the mean sol-air temperature Tsol-air,m is obtained by averaging the
instantaneous sol-air temperature over a 24-hour period, i.e. by integrating T sol-air
using Eqn.(34.23) over a 24 hour period. Hence it is given by:
T sol-air,m

J Tsol-aird'-'
24 0

(34.26)

The coefficients Mn and Nn are given by:

sol-air 1
M = 1 I T 12 0

cos TOn0 d0

(34.27)

sol-air 1
Nn = 1 I T 12 0

sin tnn6 d6

(34.28)

In the above expressions, the value of n can be restricted to 2 or 3 as higher order

terms do not contribute significantly. In the above expressions, ro n is the angular
velocity, and 1 = 7t/12 radians per hour or 15o per hour and Qn = n1. The
coefficients M1, M2.. and N1, N2.. are obtained from Eqns.(34.27) and (34.28). All the
calculations are based on solar time, and 9 is taken as 0 hours at 12O clock

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 14

midnight. Thus using the above equations, the sol-air temperature at an instance can be
calculated for clear days at any location. Now using the above series expression for sol-air
temperature, the solution of the unsteady heat conduction equation yields expression for
wall temperature as a function of x and 9 as:
Tx 0 = A + Bx + ( Cn cos Pn.mx + Dn sin Pn.mx ) e'~m TOn '

(34.29)

n=1

where A,B, C and D are constants, and m = 4^1. The coefficients A, B, Cn and Dn can be
either real or complex. However, in the solution only the real parts are considered. Then it is
shown that the inner wall temperature (i.e, at x = 0) the temperature is given by:
hi Tx=0,0 _ Tx0,0 +

1 U(Te m Tx_0 ,0) + V1Te ,1 cos(TO10 v|/1 (|>1) +1

V2Te2 cos(TO29
-V2-+2)

(34.30)

where Te stands for the sol-air temperature (Tsol-air) and ;

1
U=

(34.31)
1
hi

1
kw

ho

hiho
Vn =-------------

(34.32)

ankwyYn +Zn
^nkw
2ocw

an =
n ; and aw =
Pwcp,w Thermal diffusivityof the wall

=
(34.33)

The constants Yn and Zn in Eqn.(34.34) are expressed in terms of hi, ho, on, L, kw. The term n
in Eqn.(34.30) is called as Time Lag factor and is given by:
n = tan

Zn

(34.34)

The rate of heat transfer from the inner surface is also shown to be in the form of an infinite
series as shown below:
qx=0,8 = U\lTe,m + ^1Te,1 cos(tn1y v|/1 cp1) + A,2Te2 cos(tn2o H^2 Y2)J Tx=0,0/

(34.35)
In the above expression the quantity X,n is called as decrement factor and as
mentioned before, n is the as time lag factor. The factor \j/ n takes into account the inner and
outer heat transfer coefficients, thickness and thermal properties of the wall etc. The
expressions for decrement factor Xn and factor v|/n are given by:

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 15

vMny Vn
-1f Nn ^
Xn = ; and \\tn = tan
34.4.2. Numerical methods:

U
(34.36)

The analytical method discussed above, though gives an almost exact

solution, becomes very complex for other geometries or boundary conditions. The
numerical techniques are very powerful and are very useful for solving the unsteady
conduction equations with a wide variety of boundary conditions, variable properties
and irregular shapes. However, the use of numerical methods requires a powerful
computer, and the solution obtained is not exact and is prone to errors if not applied
properly. Nevertheless, at present with the advent of computers, the numerical
method is the preferred method due to its versatility and flexibility. The commonly
used numerical methods are: finite difference method, finite element method, finite
volume method etc. In general, the principle of all numerical methods is to write the
continuous functions such as temperature in discrete forms by dividing the domain of
interest into a large number of grids or elements. Due to discretization, the governing
partial differential equations get converted into a set of algebraic equations, which
then are solved to get the parameters of interest in the domain. The reader should
refer to any book on Numerical Methods for further details on these techniques.
34.4.3. Semi-empirical methods:
The semi-empirical methods use the form suggested by the analytical method
along with experimental observations on standard walls. These semi-empirical
methods based on Equivalent Temperature Difference (ETD) or Cooling Load
Temperature Difference (CLTD), are widely used by air conditioning industry due to
their simplicity. However, the empirical data covers only standard walls and is
suitable for specific location, orientation and day. In the present lecture, this method
is used to estimate unsteady heat transfer through building walls and roofs. Before
presenting this method, one has to consider the physical significance of decrement
factor and time lag factor mentioned under analytical methods.
Decrement factor and Time Lag:
Based on the form suggested by analytical methods, the heat transfer rate to
the conditioned space at any time 9 can be written as:
Qx=0,e =UA(Tsol_airm -Ti) + UAX(Tsol_aireH) -Tsol_airm)

(34.37)

In the above expression, Tsol-air,m is the time averaged sol-air temperature, Tsolair,e-* is the sol-air temperature hours before 9, U and A are the overall heat transfer
coefficient and area of the wall, X is the decrement factor and is the time lag.
The decrement factor, X accounts for the fact that due to finite thermal
capacity, the heat transferred to the outer surface of the wall is partly stored and
partly transferred to the conditioned space. Due to the thermal energy storage, the
temperature of the wall increases, and if it exceeds the outdoor air temperature then
a part of the energy stored is transferred to outside and not to the conditioned space.
Thus finally the heat transferred to the conditioned space from the inner surface
(cooling load) is smaller than the heat transferred to the outer surface. This implies
that the finite thermal capacity of the wall introduces a decrement in heat transfer.
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 16

The decrement factor, that varies between 0 to 1, increases as the thermal capacity
of the wall increases. Thus thicker walls have lower decrement factor and thinner
walls have higher decrement factor.
The finite thermal capacity of the building walls and roof also introduces a
time lag, . The time lag is the difference between the time at which the outer
surface receives heat and the time at which the inner surface senses it. Due to the
effect of time lag, if the outdoor temperature is maximum at noon, the indoor
temperature of a non-air conditioned room reaches a maximum somewhere in the
afternoon.
As mentioned both decrement factor and time lag depend on the thermal
capacity (mass x specific heat) of the wall. Most of the commonly used building
structural materials have a specific heat of about 840 J/kg.K, then, the thermal
capacity of these walls depend mainly on the thickness and density of the wall
material. For these standard wall materials, the decrement factor decreases and the
time lag increases as the wall thickness and density increase as shown in Fig. 34.6.
Thus from the comfort point of view it is always advantageous to construct buildings
with thick walls as this will yield low decrement factor and large time lag. In the
limiting case, when the thermal capacity of the wall is very large, then the decrement
factor becomes zero, then the heat transferred to the conditioned will remain
constant throughout the day at the mean value as given by the Eqn.(34.37), i.e.,
Qx=0,e=UA(Tsol-airm-Ti)

when X = 0.0

(34.38)

On the other extreme, if the wall has negligible thermal capacity, then the
decrement factor will be 1.0 and the time lag will be 0, and the heat transfer rate to
the conditioned space at any point is equal to the heat transferred to the outer
surface of the wall at that instant, i.e.,
Qx=0e =UA(Tsol -aire-Ti)

when A, = 1.0 and = 0

(34.39)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 17

600

150
300
450
Wall thickness (mm)

Fi
g.3
4.6
:
Va
riat
ion
of
tim
e
lag
an
d
de
cre
me
nt
fac
tor
wit
h
wa
ll
thi
ck
ne
ss
an
d
density
I
n
gener
al the
decre
ment
factor

of building walls and roof lies

between 0 to 1 and the time lag
will be greater than 0 hours.
However, for windows and thin
doors etc, which are exposed to
outdoors, the decrement factor
may be taken as 1.0 and the time
lag factor as 0.0, as the thermal
storage
capacity
of
these
elements is very small. Figure
34.7 shows the variation of heat
transfer rate to the conditioned
space with solar time for walls of
different thickness. It can be seen
that for thin walls with small time
lag, the peak heat transfer occurs
sometime around 4 P.M, whereas
for thick walls with large time lags,
the peak occurs well after
midnight. Since the outside
temperatures will be much smaller
during the night the building can
reject heat to the
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 18

outside during night, thus for thicker walls due to the thermal storage effect a major
portion of the heat absorbed by the outer surface during the daytime can be rejected
to the outside, while a relatively small amount is transferred to the conditioned space
(small decrement factor). The net effect is a greatly reduced cooling load on the
building for thick walls. It can also be observed that due to large decrement factor the
peak heat transfer for thin walled structures is much higher compared to the thick
walled buildings. This implies the requirement of cooling system of much larger
capacity (hence high initial cost) for buildings with thin walls compared to thick walls.

Qin

8 A.M

4 P.M
8 P.M
Midnight 4 A.M
8
A.M

Noon

Solar time, h Fig.34.7: Variation of

heat transfer rate with time for thick and thin walled buildings
When the thermal capacity of the building is sufficiently large, then it is also
possible to maintain reasonably comfortable temperatures inside the building even
without an air conditioning system during both winter and summer. This is the
principle behind old temples and buildings, which are comfortable throughout the
year without any artificial air conditioning systems. However, the effect of the thermal
capacity becomes significant mainly in locations, which have large variation in diurnal
temperatures (i.e., Tmax-Tmin on a particular day is large). This is generally the case in
dry areas, where thick walled buildings are highly beneficial. In costal areas with
large humidity the diurnal temperature variation is not very large, as a result the
decrement factor will be high even with thick walled buildings as the building cannot
loose significant amount of heat to the outside even during the night due to the
relatively high night temperatures. Thus thick walled buildings are not as effective in
coastal areas as in dry areas.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 19

Empirical methods for cooling load estimation:

Equation (34.37) can be written as: Qx=0,e =UA(Tsol-airm -Ti) +
UAMTsol -air, - -Tsol -air,m) = UA.ATeff

(34.40)
w
h
e
r
e
A
T
e

f
f
,
c
a
l
l
e
d
a
s
E
q
u
i
v
a
l
e
n
t
T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e
D
i
f
f
e
r
e
n
c

e (ETD) or Cooling Load Temperature Difference (CLTD) is

given by:
^ T eff =( T sol-air,m - T i ) + ""( T sol-air,G-<|> - Tsol-air,m)

(34.41)

It can be seen from the above expression that ETD or CLTD

depends on:
i.
Decrement (X) and Time Lag () factors
ii.
Solar radiation and outside ambient temperature
(through sol-air
tem
perature),
and iii.
Inside
temperatu
re, T

a
d
d
it
i
o
n
t
o
t
h
e

o
t
h
e
r
p
a
r
a
m
Tables of ETD and CLTD have been prepared for fixed
e
values of inside and outside temperatures, for different
t
latitudes, orientations and different types of walls and roofs.
e
For example, a typical CLTD table for a roof without
r
suspended ceiling prepared and presented by ASHRAE is
s
shown in Table 34.4:
,
t
Roof Mass per
Heat
Solar Time, h
capacity,
h
type unit
2
07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 e
area,kg/m2 kJ/m .K
3

90

90

-2

11

150

120

250

230

365

330

Descr iption of
Roo

f types:

Type 3: 100 mm
thick, lightweight

18 25 31 36 39 40

o
8
13 18 24 29 33 r
i
11 15 18 22 25 28 e
8
10 12 15 18 20 n
t
a
ti
o
n

concrete Type 4: 150

mm thick, lightweight
concrete Type 5: 100
mm thick,

o
f
t
h
e

heavyweight concrete
Type 6: Roof
terrace systems
Table 34.4: CLTD values (in K) for flat roofs without suspended
ceilings (ASHRAE
Handbook) For vertical walls in

w
a
ll
a
f
f
e

cts the incident solar radiation and hence the CLTD values.
For example, Table 34.5 shows the CLTD values for a D-Type
(100-mm face brick with 200-mm concrete block and interior
finish or 100-mm face brick and 100-mm concrete brick with
interior finish) wall with solar time for different orientations:

wall
s
and
roof
s
with
insul
ation
,
wett
ed
roof
s
etc.

Version 1 ME,
IIT Kharagpur
20
Solar
Time,h
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
CLTDmax

N
3
3
3
3
4
4
5
6
6
7
8
9
10
11
11

NE
4
4
6
8
10
11
12
13
13
13
14
14
14
13
14

E
5
5
7
10
13
15
17
18
18
18
18
18
17
17
18

Orientation
SE
S
5
4
5
4
5
3
7
3
10
4
12
5
14
7
16
9
17
11
18
13
18
15
18
16
17
16
17
16
18
16

SW
6
5
5
4
4
5
6
7
9
12
15
18
20
21
21

Table 34.5: CLTD values (in K) for D-type walls

(ASHRAE Handbook) The above tables are valid for the
following conditions:
a) Inside temperature of 25oC, maximum outside temperature of
35oC
with
an
o
o
average value of 29 C and a daily range of 12 C. For inside and
average
outside
temperatures (Ti and Tav) other than the above, the following
adjustment
has
to
be
made to CLTD:
CLTDadj = CLTDTable + (25-Ti) + (Tav-29)
(34.42)
Where CLTDTable is the value obtained from the table.
b) Solar radiation typical of July 21 st at 40oN latitude, but in the
absence
of
more
accurate data, the tables can be used without significant error for
0oN
to
50oN
and
for
summer months.
Similar data are available for other types of walls and roofs
and for different latitudes. Adjustments are also suggested for

10
13
17
20
22
23

T
hus
kno
wing
the
valu
e of
the
over
all
heat
trans
fer
coeff
icien
t and
area
of
the
wall
from
the
build
ing
spec
ificat
ions,
local
desi
gn
outd
oor
temp
erat
ures
and
suita
ble
ETD
or
CLT
D
valu
es

from the tables, one can calculate the heat transfer rate to the
conditioned space through the opaque walls and roof of the
building using Eq.(34.40). It should be remembered that the use of
published ETD or CLTD cannot cover all possible walls and roofs
and other conditions. Hence, some error is always involved in
using these data. However, by developing individual heat transfer
models for the specific building and using the numerical methods,
one can estimate the heat transfer rate to the building more
accurately. However, since this is extremely time consuming,
practising engineers generally use the published data and provide
a safety factor to account for possible differences in the actual and
published values.

Version 1 ME,
IIT Kharagpur
21

Questions and answers:

1. Estimation of heat transfer rate through buildings is complex due to:
1511. Complex structure of the walls and roofs consisting of a wide variety of
materials
1512. Varying indoor and outdoor conditions
1513. Large size of the buildings
1514. All of the above
Ans.: a) and b)
2. Heat transfer through buildings can be considered as steady, if:
1515.
1516.
1517.
1518.

Variation in outdoor conditions with time are not significant

Variation in indoor conditions with time are not significant
Thermal capacity of the building is large
All of the above

Ans.: d)
3. Which of the following statements are TRUE?
1519. A wall is said to be homogeneous if its properties do not vary with temperature
1520. A wall is said to be homogeneous if its properties do not vary with location
1521. The heat transfer resistance of a homogeneous wall depends on its thickness
and density
1522. The heat transfer resistance of a homogeneous wall depends on its thickness
and thermal conductivity
Ans.: b) and d)
4. Which of the following statements are TRUE?
1523. Heat transfer can take place by more than one mode in a non-homogeneous
wall
1524. The heat transfer resistance of a non-homogeneous wall is indicated in terms
of its conductance
1525. In an air space, the conduction effect becomes dominant as the air gap
reduces
1526. In an air space, the conduction effect becomes dominant as the air gap
increases
Ans.: a), b) and c)
5. Which of the following statements are TRUE?
1527. Heat transfer through a building wall may be considered as steady if its
thermal capacity is very small
1528. When the thermal capacity of the wall is large, at any point of time the heat
transferred to the outer surface of the wall is larger than the heat transfer from the
inner surface
1529. When the thermal capacity of the wall is large, the heat transfer rate at the
outer surface of the wall can be smaller than the heat transfer rate from the inner
surface

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 22

d) Due to finite thermal capacity of the wall, the outer surface temperature is always
higher than the inner surface temperature
Ans.: c)
6. Which of the following statements are TRUE?
a) The sol-air temperature depends on indoor and outdoor temperatures
b) The sol-air temperature depends on outdoor temperature and incident solar
radiation
1530. The sol-air temperature depends on outdoor temperature, incident solar
radiation and surface properties of the wall
1531. The sol-air temperature depends on outdoor temperature, incident solar
radiation, surface properties of the wall and the external heat transfer coefficient
Ans.: d)
7. Which of the following statements are TRUE?
1532. In the analytical method, the outer boundary conditions are generally
assumed to be independent of time
1533. In the analytical method, the outer boundary conditions are generally
assumed to vary in a periodic manner with time
1534. In the analytical method, the indoor temperature is generally assumed to be
independent of time
1535. Analytical methods are amenable to simple geometries only
Ans.: b), c) and d)
8. Which of the following statements are TRUE?
1536. For walls with negligible thermal capacity, the decrement factor is 0.0 and time
lag is 1.0
1537. For walls with negligible thermal capacity, the decrement factor is 1.0 and time
lag is 0.0
1538. The required cooling capacity of the air conditioning plant increases as
decrement factor increases and time lag decreases
1539. The required cooling capacity of the air conditioning plant increases as
decrement factor decreases and time lag increases
Ans.: b) and c)
9. Which of the following statements are TRUE?
1540. From thermal comfort point of view, thick walled structures are beneficial in
hot and humid climates
1541. From thermal comfort point of view, thick walled structures are beneficial in
hot and dry climates
1542. On a given day, the CLTD value of east facing wall reaches a peak before a
west facing wall
1543. On a given day, the CLTD value of west facing wall reaches a peak before a
east facing wall
Ans.: b) and c)
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 23

10. Which of the following statements are TRUE?

1544. Adjustments to CLTD tables have to be made if the latitude is different
1545. Adjustments to CLTD tables have to be made if the indoor temperature is
different
1546. Adjustments to CLTD tables have to be made if the outdoor temperature is
different
1547. Adjustments to CLTD tables have to be made if the daily range is different
Ans.: b), c) and d)
11. A building has to be maintained at 21 oC(dry bulb) and 50% relative humidity
when the outside conditions are -30 oC(dry bulb) and 100% relative humidity. The
inner and outer surface heat transfer coefficients are 8.3 W/m 2.K and 34.4 W/m2.K,
respectively. A designer chooses an insulated wall that has a thermal resistance (R
value) of 0.3 m2.K/W. Find whether the wall insulation is sufficient to prevent
condensation of moisture on the surface. If the chosen R-value of the wall can lead
to condensation, what is the minimum thickness of additional insulation (thermal
conductivity 0.036 W/m.K) required to prevent condensation. Take the barometric
pressure as 101 kPa.
Ans.: From the psychrometric chart; for inside conditions of 21oC and 50% RH:
Dew Point Temperature, TDPT,i = 10oC
The overall heat transfer coefficient for the wall U is given by:
U = [Rwall + (1/hi) + (1/ho)]-1 = [0.3 + (1/8.3) + (1/34.4)]-1 = 2.224 W/m2.K
Assuming steady state, the heat transfer rate through the wall is given by:
qw = U(Ti To) = 2.224 x (21 (-30)) = 113.424 W/m2
The temperature of the inner surface of the wall, Ts,i is obtained using the equation:
qw = hi(Ti Ts,i) = 113.424 Ts,I = 7.33oC
Since Ts,i < TDPT,i
Condensation will take place on the inner surface of the wall

(Ans.)

To prevent condensation, the minimum allowable temperature of inner surface is the

DPT (10oC)
Under this condition, the maximum allowable heat transfer rate is given by:
qw,allowable = hi(Ti TDPT,i) = 8.3 x (21 10) = 91.3 W/m2
Hence the required Ureq value is:
Ureq = 91.3/(Ti To) = 91.3/(21 (-30)) = 1.79 W/m2.K
Hence the required resistance of the wall, Rw,req is given by:
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 24

Rw,req = (1/Ureq) (1/hi) (1/ho) = 0.4091 m2.K/W

Hence the amount of additional insulation to be added is:
Radd = (tadd/kadd) = 0.4091 Rwall = 0.4091 0.3 = 0.1091 m2.K/W Required
insulation thickness, tadd = 0.1091 x 0.036 = 3.928x10-3 m (Ans.)
12. A 4m x 5m wall consists of 3 glass windows of 1.5m x 1.0 m dimensions. The
wall has thickness of 0.125 m and a thermal conductivity of 0.5 W/m.K, while the
glass windows are 6 mm thick with a thermal conductivity of 1.24 W/m.K. The values
of internal and external surface conductance for the wall (including glass) are 8.3
W/m2.K and 34.4 W/m2.K, respectively. The internal and external temperatures are
21oC and 30oC, respectively. Calculate the total heat transfer rate through the wall.
What percentage of this heat transfer is through the windows?
Ans.: The total heat transfer rate through the wall is given by:
Qtotal

= UoAtotal(Ti To)

The value of UoAtotal is given by:

UoAtotal

= UwallAwall + UglassAglass

The U values for the wall and glass are obtained from their individual resistance
values as:
Uwall = [(0.125/0.5) + (1/8.3) + (1/34.4)]-1 = 2.503 W/m2.K
Uglass = [(0.006/1.24) + (1/8.3) + (1/34.4)]-1 = 6.48 W/m2.K
The area of glass, Aglass = 3 x 1.5 x 1.0 = 4.5 m2
The area of wall, Awall = 4 x 5 - 4.5 = 15.5 m2
Hence, UoAtotal = UwallAwall + UglassAglass = 2.503 x 15.5 + 6.48 x 4.5 = 67.96 W/K
Hence, Qtotal = UoAtotal (Ti To) = 67.96 (21+30) = 3465.96 W

(Ans.)

% of heat transfer rate through glass = {UglassAglass(Ti To)/Qtotal}x100 = 42.9%

(Ans.)
13. A multi-layered wall consists (from inside to outside) 6mm thick plywood, 125
mm thick common brick, 2.1 mm thick air space, 125 mm thick common brick and 6
mm thick cement plaster. The values of internal and external surface conductance
for the wall are 8.3 W/m 2.K and 34.4 W/m2.K, respectively. Find the overall heat
transfer coefficient of the wall. What is the value of U, if the air space is replaced by
20 mm thick EPS board? Assume the temperature difference across the air space to
be 10 K.
Ans.: For the composite wall, the overall heat transfer coefficient U is given by:
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 25

A
1
x v
Uy

tot

vhi + 1

i
w,
i ^
w,iy

M
j=1

1 +
Cj

vho
y
S
u
b
s
t
i
t
u
t
i
n
g
t
h
e
v
a
l
u
e
s
o
f
i
n
d
i
v
i
d
u
a
l
r
e
s
i
s
t
a
n
c
e
s
u
s
i
n
g
t

h
e
i
n
p
u
t
v
a
l
u
e
s
o
f
w
a
l
l
t
h
i
c
k
n
e
s
s
a
n
d
t
h
e
r
m
a
1
l
c
o
n
d
u
c
t
i
v
i
t
y

a
n
d
t
h
e
r
m
a
l
c
o
n
d
u
c
t
a
n
c
e
(
F
r
o
m
T
a
b
l
e
s
3
4
.
2
a
n
d
3
4
.
3
)
,
t
h
e
o
v
e

r
a
l
l
h
e
a
t
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
c
o
e
f
f
i
c
i
e
n
t
i
s
g
i
v
e
n
b
y
:

I
f
t
h
e
a
i
r
s
p
a
c
e
i
s
r
e
p
l
a
c
e
d
b
y
2
0
m
m
E
P
S

(
k
U
V0
V0
fv
8++
5+83=
0. =
. 1. .4
.
3286.00
1
y5y54..
7
^ y0
0
1 3
7
^ 37
m
W
/
K
m
/
.
W
K
)
=

14.
Det
erm
t
h ine
e the
n solair
tem
t
h per
e atur
e
n for
e a
w flat
roof
U if
the
v dire
a ct
radi
l
u atio
e n
nor
mal
i
s to
the
:
sun
U s
ray
s
Thu (IDN
s ) is
repl 893
acin W/
g m2
the and
air the
gap inte
with nsit
EP y of
S sca
lea tter
ds ed
to a radi
dec atio
rea n
se nor
in mal
the to
U- the
val roof
ue (Id)
by is
abo 112
ut W/
34 m2.
per Tak
cen e
t. the
abs
,

orpt
=o37 + _ To +
Tsol-air
h
------------------------------q
Ans
ivity
= 62.94
(Ans.)
(
altit
of
34.4
the .: ude
Sinc
roof
for For angl e Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 26
the
dire
ct a e time
lag
and
sca flat Tota is 0
and
tter
l
ed roof sola decr
eme
radi
r
atio , the irra nt
fact
n
diati
or is
as angl
on
1.0
0.9,
on
for
the e of
the
the
hea
flat
roof
t
inci roof
, the
tran
It is
heat
sfer
den give
tran
coe
n
sfer
ffici
by:
rate
ent ce 9
thro
of
the is It = ugh
IDN. the
out
sid give cos roof
(0) is
e
+ Id give
surf n
= n
ace
as by: 893 by:
x
34.
cos
4 0=
(10)
W/
2
m , (7t/ +
112
the
out 2) - =
991.
sid
e P = 43
W/
air
2
m
tem (7i/
per
atur 2) - Hen
ce
e
as 80 the
sol37o
air
C
= tem
and
the 10o per
atur
sol
e is
ar
whe give
altit
n
ude
re p by:
ang
le
as is
(XD
80o
0.9x991.43
. Ifthe
o

15. A building has its north, west facing walls and the roof exposed to sun. The
dimensions of the building are 12 m X 12 m X 5 m (WXLXH). The U-value of the
walls are 0.5 W/m2.K, while it is 0.4 W/m2.K for the roof. There are no windows on
north and west walls, and the other two walls are exposed to air conditioned spaces.
The outside design temperature is 41oC while the indoor is maintained at 25 oC, while
the average temperature for the design day is 31 oC. Calculate heat transfer rate to
the building at 5 P.M., 6 P.M and & P.M. Assume the walls are of D-Type and the roof
is of Type 5.
Ans.: Since the average outside temperature is different from 29oC, adjustments
have to be made to the values obtained from the CLTD tables.
CLTDadj = CLTDTable + (Tav 29) = CLTDTable + 2
a) Heat transfer rate through the roof:
From the Table of CLTD values for roof (Table 34.5), the CLTD values at 5 P.M., 6
P.M. and 7 P.M. are 29oC, 30oC and 29oC, respectively.
Qroof,5 P.M. = UroofAroofCLTDadj,5 P.M. = 0.4 x 144 x (29 + 2) = 1785.6 W
= UroofAroofCLTDadj,6 P.M. = 0.4 x 144 x 32 = 1843.2 W

Qroof, 6.P.M.

Qroof, 7 P.M. = Qroof, 5 P.M. = 1785.6 W (as the CLTD values are same)
b) Heat transfer rate through north facing wall:
Table 34.6 is used for obtaining CLTD values for the walls
Qnorth, 5 P.M.

UwallAwallCLTDadj, 5 P.M.

= 0.5 x 60 x 10 = 300 W

Qnorth, 6. P.M.

UwallAwallCLTDadj 6 P.M.

= 0.5 x 60 x 11 = 330 W

Qnorth,7 P.M.

= UwallAwallCLTDadj, 7 P.M. = 0.5 x 60 x 12 = 360 W

c) Heat transfer rate through the west facing wall:

Similar to the north facing wall, the heat transfer rates through the west facing walls
are found to be:
Qwest,5 P.M.

= 450 W

Qwest,6 P.M.

= 570 W

Qwest,7 P.M.

= 660 W

Total heat transfer through the building is:

Qtotal, 5 P.M. = 1785.6 + 300 + 450 = 2535.6 W

(Ans.)

Qtotal, 6 P.M. = 1843.2 + 330 + 570 = 2743.2 W

(Ans.)

Qtotal, 7 P.M. = 1785.6 + 360 + 660 = 2805.6 W

(Ans.)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 27

Comments:
1548. The difference in design dry bulb temperature between outdoor and indoor is
17oC, it is observed that the CLTD value ranges between 31 to 32 oC for the roof, 10
to 12oC for the north facing the wall and 15 to 22 oC for the west facing wall. The
difference between CLTD values and (To Ti)design is due to varying outdoor
temperatures, varying solar radiation and finally due to the thermal capacity of the
walls.
1549. It is seen that the maximum amount of heat transfer rate is through the roof,
hence, putting additional insulation on the roof will reduce the cooling load
1550. Due to the thermal lag effect of the building, the peak heat transfer takes place
not during sunshine, but after sunset.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 28

Lesson
35
Cooling And Heating
Load Calculations
- Estimation Of Required
Cooling/Heating
Capacity

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 1

The specific objectives of this chapter are to:

1. Introduction to load calculations (Section 35.1)
2. Differences between conventional cooling and heating load calculation
methodologies (Section 35.2)
1551. Methods of estimating cooling and heating loads on buildings such as rulesof-thumb, semi-empirical methods etc. (Section 35.3)
1552. Cooling load calculations using CLTD/CLF method (Section 35.4)
1553. Estimation of the cooling capacity of the system (Section 35.5)
1554. Heating load calculations (Section 35.6)
At the end of the lecture, the student should be able to:
1. Explain the differences between conventional cooling and heating load
calculations
1555. List commonly used methods for estimating cooling loads
1556. Estimate the internal and external cooling loads on a building by separating
sensible and latent parts using CLTD/CLF method from building specifications,
design indoor and outdoor conditions, occupancy etc.
1557. Estimate the required cooling capacity of the coil by taking into account the
bypass factor of the coil, ventilation requirements etc.
1558. Explain briefly the procedure for estimating heating loads

35.1. Introduction:
As mentioned in an earlier chapter, heating and cooling load calculations are
carried out to estimate the required capacity of heating and cooling systems, which
can maintain the required conditions in the conditioned space. To estimate the
required cooling or heating capacities, one has to have information regarding the
design indoor and outdoor conditions, specifications of the building, specifications of
the conditioned space (such as the occupancy, activity level, various appliances and
equipment used etc.) and any special requirements of the particular application. For
comfort applications, the required indoor conditions are fixed by the criterion of
thermal comfort, while for industrial or commercial applications the required indoor
conditions are fixed by the particular processes being performed or the products
being stored. As discussed in an earlier chapter, the design outdoor conditions are
chosen based on design dry bulb and coincident wet bulb temperatures for peak
summer or winter months for cooling and heating load calculations, respectively.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 2

35.2. Heating versus cooling load calculations:

As the name implies, heating load calculations are carried out to estimate the
heat loss from the building in winter so as to arrive at required heating capacities.
Normally during winter months the peak heating load occurs before sunrise and the
outdoor conditions do not vary significantly throughout the winter season. In addition,
internal heat sources such as occupants or appliances are beneficial as they
compensate some of the heat losses. As a result, normally, the heat load calculations
are carried out assuming steady state conditions (no solar radiation and steady
outdoor conditions) and neglecting internal heat sources. This is a simple but
conservative approach that leads to slight overestimation of the heating capacity. For
more accurate estimation of heating loads, one has to take into the thermal capacity
of the walls and internal heat sources, which makes the problem more complicated.
For estimating cooling loads, one has to consider the unsteady state
processes, as the peak cooling load occurs during the day time and the outside
conditions also vary significantly throughout the day due to solar radiation. In
addition, all internal sources add on to the cooling loads and neglecting them would
lead to underestimation of the required cooling capacity and the possibility of not
being able to maintain the required indoor conditions. Thus cooling load calculations
are inherently more complicated as it involves solving unsteady equations with
unsteady boundary conditions and internal heat sources.
For any building there exists a balance point at which the solar radiation
(Qsolar) and internal heat generation rate (Qint) exactly balance the heat losses from the
building. Thus from sensible heat balance equation, at balanced condition:
(Q solar + Qint )sensible =UA(Tin - Tout )

(35.1)

where UA is the product of overall heat transfer coefficient and heat transfer area of
the building, Tin is the required indoor temperature and T out is the outdoor
temperature.
From the above equation, the outside temperature at balanced condition
(Tout,bal) is given by:
(Q
Tout,bal =Tin -

solar

+Q)
int

sensible

(35.2)

UA
If the outdoor temperature is greater than the balanced outdoor temperature
given by the above equation, i.e., when Tout > Tout,bal, then there is a need for
cooling the building. On the other hand, when the outdoor temperature is less than
the balanced outdoor temperature, i.e., when Tout < Tout,bal, then there is a need for
heating the building. When the outdoor temperature exactly equals the balanced
outdoor temperature, i.e., when Tout = Tout,bal, then there is no need for either
cooling or heating the building

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 3

For residential buildings (with fewer internal heat sources), the balanced
outdoor temperature may vary from 10 to 18oC. As discussed before, this means that
if the balanced outdoor temperature is 18 oC, then a cooling system is required when
the outdoor temperature exceeds 18 oC. This implies that buildings need cooling not
only during summer but also during spring and fall as well. If the building is well
insulated (small UA) and/or internal loads are high, then from the energy balance
equation (35.2), the balanced outdoor temperature will reduce leading to extended
cooling season and shortened heating season. Thus a smaller balanced outdoor
temperature implies higher cooling requirements and smaller heating requirements,
and vice versa. For commercial buildings with large internal loads and relatively
smaller heat transfer areas, the balanced outdoor temperature can be as low as 2 oC,
implying a lengthy cooling season and a small heating season. If there are no
internal heat sources and if the solar radiation is negligible, then from the heat
balance equation, Tout,bal = Tin, this implies that if the outside temperature exceeds the
required inside temperature (say, 25 oC for comfort) then there is a need for cooling
otherwise there is a need for heating. Thus depending upon the specific conditions of
the building, the need for either cooling system or a heating system depends. This
also implies a need for optimizing the building insulation depending upon outdoor
conditions and building heat generation so that one can use during certain periods
free cooling provided by the environment without using any external cooling system.

35.3. Methods of estimating cooling and heating loads:

Generally, heating and cooling load calculations involve a systematic,
stepwise procedure, using which one can arrive at the required system capacity by
taking into account all the building energy flows. In practice, a variety of methods
ranging from simple rules-of-thumb to complex Transfer Function Methods are used
in practice to arrive at the building loads. For example, typical rules-of-thumb
methods for cooling loads specify the required cooling capacity based on the floor
area or occupancy. Table 35.1 shows typical data on required cooling capacities
based on the floor area or application. Such rules-of-thumb are useful in preliminary
estimation of the equipment size and cost. The main conceptual drawback of rulesof-thumb methods is the presumption that the building design will not make any
difference. Thus the rules for a badly designed building are typically the same as for
a good design.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 4

Sl.no

Application
Office buildings:
External zones

1.

Required cooling capacity (TR)

for 1000 ft2 of floor area
25% glass: 3.5 TR
50% glass: 4.5 TR
75% glass: 5.0 TR
2. Internal
zones
Computer
rooms
3.
H
o
t
e
4. l
s

2.8 TR
6.0 12.0 TR

5. B
e
d
r
o
o
m
s

per room 5.0

Single room:
0.6 TR per
room Double
room: 1.0 TR

- 9.0 TR
4
.
5

Restaurant
s
Departmen
t stores
Basement
& ground
floors
Upper
floors
Shops

5
.
0

T
R

5
5
7 Theatr
0.07
. es &
TR
T
Audito
per
riums
seat
R
: Required
5 cooling capacities for
4 . various applications
0 based on rules-of. T thumb (Croome and
Roberts, 1981)
R
5
More
accurate
6B
.

load
estimation
methods
involve
a
combination
of
analytical methods and
empirical
results
obtained from actual
data, for example the
use of Cooling Load
Temperature Difference
(CLTD) for estimating
fabric heat gain and the
use of Solar Heat Gain
Factor
(SHGF)
for
estimating heat transfer
through
fenestration.
These methods are
very widely used by air
conditioning engineers
as they yield reasonably
accurate results and
estimations can be
carried out manually in
a relatively short time.
Over the years, more
accurate methods that
require the use of
computers have been
developed
for
estimating
cooling
loads, e.g. the Transfer
Function
Method
(TFM). Since these
methods are expensive
and time consuming
they are generally used
for estimating cooling
loads
of
large
commercial
or
institutional
buildings.
ASHRAE
suggests
different methods for

estimating cooling and heating loads

based on applications, such as for
residences, for commercial buildings
etc.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 5

35.4. Cooling load calculations:

As mentioned before, load calculations involve a systematic and stepwise
procedure that takes into account all the relevant building energy flows. The cooling
load experienced by a building varies in magnitude from zero (no cooling required) to
a maximum value. The design cooling load is a load near the maximum magnitude,
but is not normally the maximum. Design cooling load takes into account all the
loads experienced by a building under a specific set of assumed conditions.
The assumptions behind design cooling load are as follows:
1. Design outside conditions are selected from a long-term statistical database. The
conditions will not necessarily represent any actual year, but are representative of
the location of the building. Design data for outside conditions for various locations
of the world have been collected and are available in tabular form in various
handbooks.
2. The load on the building due to solar radiation is estimated for clear sky
conditions.
3. The building occupancy is assumed to be at full design capacity.
4. All building equipment and appliances are considered to be operating at a
reasonably representative capacity.
The total building cooling load consists of heat transferred through the
building envelope (walls, roof, floor, windows, doors etc.) and heat generated by
occupants, equipment, and lights. The load due to heat transfer through the
envelope is called as external load, while all other loads are called as internal
loads. The percentage of external versus internal load varies with building type, site
climate, and building design. The total cooling load on any building consists of both
sensible as well as latent load components. The sensible load affects dry bulb
temperature, while the latent load affects the moisture content of the conditioned
space.
Buildings may be classified as externally loaded and internally loaded. In
externally loaded buildings the cooling load on the building is mainly due to heat
transfer between the surroundings and the internal conditioned space. Since the
surrounding conditions are highly variable in any given day, the cooling load of an
externally loaded building varies widely. In internally loaded buildings the cooling
load is mainly due to internal heat generating sources such as occupants or
appliances or processes. In general the heat generation due to internal heat sources
may remain fairly constant, and since the heat transfer from the variable
surroundings is much less compared to the internal heat sources, the cooling load of
an internally loaded building remains fairly constant. Obviously from energy
efficiency and economics points of view, the system design strategy for an externally
loaded building should be different from an internally loaded building. Hence, prior
knowledge of whether the building is externally loaded or internally loaded is
essential for effective system design.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 6

As mentioned before, the total cooling load on a building consists of external

as well as internal loads. The external loads consist of heat transfer by conduction
through the building walls, roof, floor, doors etc, heat transfer by radiation through
fenestration such as windows and skylights. All these are sensible heat transfers. In
addition to these the external load also consists of heat transfer due to infiltration,
which consists of both sensible as well as latent components. The heat transfer due
to ventilation is not a load on the building but a load on the system. The various
internal loads consist of sensible and latent heat transfer due to occupants, products,
processes and appliances, sensible heat transfer due to lighting and other
equipment. Figure 35.1 shows various components that constitute the cooling load
on a building.
Solar radiation
radiation
through opaq
fenestration
Heat transfer from ground

Fig.35.1: Various cooling load components

Estimation of cooling load involves estimation of each of the above
components from the given data. In the present chapter, the cooling load calculations
are carried out based on the CLTD/CLF method suggested by ASHRAE. For more
advanced methods such as TFM, the reader should refer to ASHRAE and other
handbooks.
35.4.1. Estimation of external loads:
a) Heat transfer through opaque surfaces: This is a sensible heat transfer process.
The heat transfer rate through opaque surfaces such as walls, roof, floor, doors etc.
is given by:
Q

opaque

=U.A.CLTD

(35.3)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 7

where U is the overall heat transfer coefficient and A is the heat transfer area of the
surface on the side of the conditioned space. CLTD is the cooling load temperature
difference.
For sunlit surfaces, CLTD has to be obtained from the CLTD tables as discussed in
the previous chapter. Adjustment to the values obtained from the table is needed if
actual conditions are different from those based on which the CLTD tables are
prepared.
For surfaces which are not sunlit or which have negligible thermal mass (such
as doors), the CLTD value is simply equal to the temperature difference across the
wall or roof. For example, for external doors the CLTD value is simply equal to the
difference between the design outdoor and indoor dry bulb temperatures, Tout-Tin.
For interior air conditioned rooms surrounded by non-air conditioned spaces,
the CLTD of the interior walls is equal to the temperature difference between the
surrounding non-air conditioned space and the conditioned space. Obviously, if an
air conditioned room is surrounded by other air conditioned rooms, with all of them at
the same temperature, the CLTD values of the walls of the interior room will be zero.
Estimation of CLTD values of floor and roof with false ceiling could be tricky.
For floors standing on ground, one has to use the temperature of the ground for
estimating CLTD. However, the ground temperature depends on the location and
varies with time. ASHRAE suggests suitable temperature difference values for
estimating heat transfer through ground. If the floor stands on a basement or on the
roof of another room, then the CLTD values for the floor are the temperature
difference across the floor (i.e., difference between the temperature of the basement
or room below and the conditioned space). This discussion also holds good for roofs
which have non-air conditioned rooms above them. For sunlit roofs with false ceiling,
the U value may be obtained by assuming the false ceiling to be an air space.
However, the CLTD values obtained from the tables may not exactly fit the specific
roof. Then one has to use his judgement and select suitable CLTD values.
b) Heat transfer through fenestration: Heat transfer through transparent surface such
as a window, includes heat transfer by conduction due to temperature difference
across the window and heat transfer due to solar radiation through the window. The
heat transfer through the window by convection is calculated using Eq.(35.3), with
CLTD being equal to the temperature difference across the window and A equal to
the total area of the window. The heat transfer due to solar radiation through the
window is given by:
Qtrans =Aunshaded.SHGFmax .SC.CLF

(35.4)

where Aunshaded is the area exposed to solar radiation, SHGFmax and SC are the
maximum Solar Heat Gain Factor and Shading Coefficient, respectively, and CLF is
the Cooling Load Factor. As discussed in a previous chapter, the unshaded area has
to be obtained from the dimensions of the external shade and solar geometry.
SHGFmax and SC are obtained from ASHRAE tables based on the orientation of the
window, location, month of the year and the type of glass and internal shading
device.
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 8

The Cooling Load Factor (CLF) accounts for the fact that all the radiant
energy that enters the conditioned space at a particular time does not become a part
of the cooling load1 instantly. As solar radiation enters the conditioned space, only a
negligible portion of it is absorbed by the air particles in the conditioned space
instantaneously leading to a minute change in its temperature. Most of the radiation
is first absorbed by the internal surfaces, which include ceiling, floor, internal walls,
furniture etc. Due to the large but finite thermal capacity of the roof, floor, walls etc.,
their temperature increases slowly due to absorption of solar radiation. As the
surface temperature increases, heat transfer takes place between these surfaces
and the air in the conditioned space. Depending upon the thermal capacity of the
wall and the outside temperature, some of the absorbed energy due to solar
radiation may be conducted to the outer surface and may be lost to the outdoors.
Only that fraction of the solar radiation that is transferred to the air in the conditioned
space becomes a load on the building, the heat transferred to the outside is not a
part of the cooling load. Thus it can be seen that the radiation heat transfer
introduces a time lag and also a decrement factor depending upon the dynamic
characteristics of the surfaces. Due to the time lag, the effect of radiation will be felt
even when the source of radiation, in this case the sun is removed. The CLF values
for various surfaces have been calculated as functions of solar time and orientation
and are available in the form of tables in ASHRAE Handbooks. Table 35.2 gives
typical CLF values for glass with interior shading.
Solar
Time, h
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18

N
0.73
0.66
0.65
0.73
0.80
0.86
0.89
0.89
0.86
0.82
0.75
0.78
0.91

NE
0.56
0.76
0.74
0.58
0.37
0.29
0.27
0.26
0.24
0.22
0.20
0.16
0.12

Direction the sunlit window is facing

E
SE
S
SW
W
0.47
0.30
0.09
0.07
0.06
0.72
0.57
0.16
0.11
0.09
0.80
0.74
0.23
0.14
0.11
0.76
0.81
0.38
0.16
0.13
0.62
0.79
0.58
0.19
0.15
0.41
0.68
0.75
0.22
0.16
0.27
0.49
0.83
0.38
0.17
0.26
0.33
0.80
0.59
0.31
0.24
0.28
0.68
0.75
0.53
0.22
0.25
0.50
0.83
0.72
0.20
0.22
0.35
0.81
0.82
0.16
0.18
0.27
0.69
0.81
0.12
0.13
0.19
0.45
0.61

NW
0.07
0.11
0.14
0.17
0.19
0.20
0.21
0.22
0.30
0.52
0.73
0.82
0.69

Horiz.
0.12
0.27
0.44
0.59
0.72
0.81
0.85
0.85
0.81
0.71
0.58
0.42
0.25

Table 35.2: Cooling Load Factor (CLF) for glass with interior shading and located in
north latitudes (ASHRAE)
c) Heat transfer due to infiltration: Heat transfer due to infiltration consists of both
sensible as well as latent components. The sensible heat transfer rate due to
infiltration is given by:

At any point of time, cooling load may be equated to the heat transfer rate to the air in the
conditioned space. If heat is transferred to the walls or other solid objects, then it does not become a
part of the cooling load at that instant

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 9

Qs,inf =mo cp,m(To -Ti) = Vo ocp,m(To - Ti)

(35.5)

where Vo is the infiltration rate ( in m3/s), o and cp,m are the density and specific heat
of the moist, infiltrated air, respectively. To and T are the outdoor and indoor dry bulb
temperatures.
The latent heat transfer rate due to infiltration is given by:
Qlinf =mo hfg(Wo - Wi) = Vo ohfg(Wo - Wi)

(35.6)

where hfg is the latent heat of vaporization of water, W o and Wi are the outdoor and
indoor humidity ratio, respectively.
As discussed in an earlier chapter, the infiltration rate depends upon several
factors such as the tightness of the building that includes the walls, windows, doors
etc and the prevailing wind speed and direction. As mentioned before, the infiltration
rate is obtained by using either the air change method or the crack method.
The infiltration rate by air change method is given by:
Vo =(ACH).V/3600

m3 /s

(35.7)

where ACH is the number of air changes per hour and V is the gross volume of
the conditioned space in m3. Normally the ACH value varies from 0.5 ACH for tight
and well-sealed buildings to about 2.0 for loose and poorly sealed buildings. For
modern buildings the ACH value may be as low as 0.2 ACH. Thus depending upon
the age and condition of the building an appropriate ACH value has to be chose,
using which the infiltration rate can be calculated.
The infiltration rate by the crack method is given by:
Vo =A.C.Pn

m3/s

(35.8)

where A is the effective leakage area of the cracks, C is a flow coefficient which
depends on the type of the crack and the nature of the flow in the crack, P is the
difference between outside and inside pressure (Po-Pi) and n is an exponent
whose value depends on the nature of the flow in the crack. The value of n varies
between 0.4 to 1.0, i.e., 0.4 n 1.0. The pressure difference P arises due to
pressure difference due to the wind (Pwind), pressure difference due to the stack
effect (Pstack) and pressure difference due to building pressurization (Pbld), i.e.,
P = Pwind + Pstack + Pbld

(35.9)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 10

Semi-empirical expressions have been obtained for evaluating pressure

difference due to wind and stack effects as functions of prevailing wind velocity and
direction, inside and outside temperatures, building dimensions and geometry etc.
Representative values of infiltration rate for different types of windows, doors
walls etc. have been measured and are available in tabular form in air conditioning
design handbooks.
d) Miscellaneous external loads: In addition to the above loads, if the cooling coil has
a positive by-pass factor (BPF > 0), then some amount of ventilation air directly
enters the conditioned space, in which case it becomes a part of the building cooling
load. The sensible and latent heat transfer rates due to the by-passed ventilation air
.

can be calculated using equations (35.5) and (35.6) by replacing

Vo with

..

V vent .BPF , where Vvent is the ventilation rate and BPF is the by-pass factor of the
cooling coil.
In addition to this, sensible and latent heat transfer to the building also occurs
due to heat transfer and air leakage in the supply ducts. A safety factor is usually
provided to account for this depending upon the specific details of the supply air
ducts.
If the supply duct consists of supply air fan with motor, then power input to the
fan becomes a part of the external sensible load on the building. If the duct consists
of the electric motor, which drives the fan, then the efficiency of the fan motor also
must be taken into account while calculating the cooling load. Most of the times, the
power input to the fan is not known a priori as the amount of supply air required is
not known at this stage. To take this factor into account, initially it is assumed that the
supply fan adds about 5% of the room sensible cooling load and cooling loads are
then estimated. Then this value is corrected in the end when the actual fan selection
is done.
35.4.2. Estimation of internal loads:
The internal loads consist of load due to occupants, due to lighting, due to
equipment and appliances and due to products stored or processes being performed
in the conditioned space.
a) Load due to occupants: The internal cooling load due to occupants consists of
both sensible and latent heat components. The rate at which the sensible and latent
heat transfer take place depends mainly on the population and activity level of the
occupants. Since a portion of the heat transferred by the occupants is in the form of
radiation, a Cooling Load Factor (CLF) should be used similar to that used for
radiation heat transfer through fenestration. Thus the sensible heat transfer to the
conditioned space due to the occupants is given by the equation:
Q

s, occupants

=(No.of people).(Sensible heat gain /person).CLF

(35.10)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 11

Table 35.3 shows typical values of total heat gain from the occupants and also
the sensible heat gain fraction as a function of activity in an air conditioned space.
However, it should be noted that the fraction of the total heat gain that is sensible
depends on the conditions of the indoor environment. If the conditioned space
temperature is higher, then the fraction of total heat gain that is sensible decreases
and the latent heat gain increases, and vice versa.
Activity

Total heat gain, W

Sensible heat gain fraction

Sleeping

70

0.75

Seated, quiet

100

0.60

Standing

150

0.50

Walking @ 3.5 kmph

305

0.35

Office work

150

0.55

Teaching

175

0.50

300 to 600

0.35

Industrial work

Table 35.3: Total heat gain, sensible heat gain fraction from occupants
The value of Cooling Load Factor (CLF) for occupants depends on the hours after
the entry of the occupants into the conditioned space, the total hours spent in the
conditioned space and type of the building. Values of CLF have been obtained for
different types of buildings and have been tabulated in ASHRAE handbooks.
Since the latent heat gain from the occupants is instantaneous the CLF for latent
heat gain is 1.0, thus the latent heat gain due to occupants is given by:
Ql,occupants =(No.of people).(Latent heat gain/person)

(35.11)

b) Load due to lighting: Lighting adds sensible heat to the conditioned space. Since
the heat transferred from the lighting system consists of both radiation and
convection, a Cooling Load Factor is used to account for the time lag. Thus the
cooling load due to lighting system is given by:
Qs,lighting =(Installed wattage)(Usage Factor)(Ballast factor)CLF(35.12)
The usage factor accounts for any lamps that are installed but are not switched on at
the time at which load calculations are performed. The ballast factor takes into
account the load imposed by ballasts used in fluorescent lights. A typical ballast
factor value of 1.25 is taken for fluorescent lights, while it is equal to 1.0 for
incandescent lamps. The values of CLF as a function of the number of hours after
the lights are turned on, type of lighting fixtures and the hours of operation of the
lights are available in the form of tables in ASHRAE handbooks.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 12

c) Internal loads due to equipment and appliances: The equipment and appliances
used in the conditioned space may add both sensible as well as latent loads to the
conditioned space. Again, the sensible load may be in the form of radiation and/or
convection. Thus the internal sensible load due to equipment and appliances is given
by:
Qs,appliances =(Installed wattage).(Usage Factor).CLF

(35.13)

The installed wattage and usage factor depend on the type of the appliance or
equipment. The CLF values are available in the form of tables in ASHARE
handbooks.
The latent load due to appliances is given by:
Ql,appliance =

(Installed wattage).(Latent heat fraction)

(35.11)

Table 35.4 shows typical load of various types of appliances.

Appliance
Coffee brewer, 0.5 gallons
Coffee warmer, 0.5 gallons
Toaster, 360 slices/h Food
warmer/m2 plate area

Sensible load, W
265
71
1500
1150

Latent load, W
65
27
382
1150

Total load, W
330
98
1882
2300

Table 35.4: Typical appliance load (C.P. Arora)

For other equipment such as computers, printers etc, the load is in the form of
sensible heat transfer and is estimated based on the rated power consumption. The
CLF value for these equipment may be taken as 1.0 as the radiative heat transfer
from these equipment is generally negligible due to smaller operating temperatures.
When the equipment are run by electric motors which are also kept inside the
conditioned space, then the efficiency of the electric motor must be taken into
account. Though the estimation of cooling load due to appliance and equipment
appears to be simple as given by the equations, a large amount of uncertainty is
introduced on account of the usage factor and the difference between rated
(nameplate) power consumption at full loads and actual power consumption at part
loads. Estimation using nameplate power input may lead to overestimation of the
loads, if the equipment operates at part load conditions most of the time.
If the conditioned space is used for storing products (e.g. cold storage) or for
carrying out certain processes, then the sensible and latent heat released by these
specific products and or the processes must be added to the internal cooling loads.
The sensible and latent heat release rate of a wide variety of live and dead products
commonly stored in cold storages are available in air conditioning and refrigeration
handbooks. Using these tables, one can estimate the required cooling capacity of
cold storages.
Thus using the above equations one can estimate the sensible (Qs,r), latent
(Ql,r) and total cooling load (Qt,r) on the buildings. Since the load due to sunlit
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 13

surfaces varies as a function of solar time, it is preferable to calculate the cooling

loads at different solar times and choose the maximum load for estimating the
system capacity. From the sensible and total cooling loads one can calculate the
Room Sensible Heat Factor (RSHF) for the building. As discussed in an earlier
chapter, from the RSHF value and the required indoor conditions one can draw the
RSHF line on the psychrometric chart and fix the condition of the supply air.

35.5. Estimation of the cooling capacity of the system:

In order to find the required cooling capacity of the system, one has to take
into account the sensible and latent loads due to ventilation, leakage losses in the
return air ducts and heat added due to return air fan (if any).
37.5.1. Load on the system due to ventilated air:
Figure 35.2 shows a schematic of an air conditioning system with the cooling
coil, supply and return ducts, ventilation and fans. The cooling coil has a by-pass
factor X. Then the cooling load on the coil due to sensible heat transfer of the
ventilated air is given by:
Qs,vent =mvent(1-X).cpm(To - Ti ) = Vvent o(1 - X).cp m(To - Ti )

(35.12)

where mvent and Vvent are the mass and volumetric flow rates of the ventilated air
and X is the by-pass factor of the coil.
The latent heat load on the coil due to ventilation is given by:
Ql,vent = mvent (1-X).hfg(Wo - Wi ) = Vvent o (1 - X).hfg (Wo - Wi )

(35.13)

where Wo and Wi are the humidity ratios of the ambient and conditioned air,
respectively and hfg is the latent heat of vapourization of water.
35.4.2. Load on the coil due to leakage in return air duct and due to return air
fan:
If there is leakage of air and heat from or to the return air duct, additional
capacity has to be provided by the cooling coil to take care of this. The sensible heat
transfer to the return duct due to heat transfer from the surroundings to the return
duct depends on the surface area of the duct that is exposed to outside air (A exposed),
amount of insulation (Uins) and temperature difference between outdoor air and
return air, i.e.,
Qs,duct =Uins.Aexposed(To -Ti)

(35.14)

The amount of sensible and latent heat transfer rates due to air leakage from
or to the system depends on the effectiveness of the sealing provided and the

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 14

condition of the outdoor air and return air. Since the load due to return air duct
including the return air fan (Q return duct) are not known a priori an initial value (e.g. as a
fraction of total building cooling load) is assumed and calculations are performed.
This value is modified at the end by taking into account the actual leakage losses

A/C Room

Return fan

ti, Wi, hi

me= mvent

Return duct losses

Qs,r, Ql,r

mrc
Cooling coil
Supply fan

mvent

ms

Qt,c=Qs,c+Ql,c

Supply duct losses

By-pass (X)
Fig.35.2: A typical summer air conditioning system with a cooling coil of non-zero
by-pass factor
and return fan power consumption.
Now the total sensible load on the coil (Qs,c) is obtained by summing up the
total sensible load on the building (Qs,r), sensible load due to ventilation (Qs,vent) and
sensible load due to return air duct and fan (Qs,retrun duct), that is:
Q s,c =Q s,r + Q

s,vent

+Q

(35.15)

s,return duct

Similarly the total latent load on the coil (Ql,c) is obtained by summing up the total
latent load on the building (Ql.r), latent load due to ventilation (Ql,vent) and latent load
due to return air duct and fan (Ql,retrun duct), that is:
Ql,c

=Ql,r +Ql,vent +Ql,return

(35.15)

duct

Finally the required cooling capacity of the system which is equal to the total load on
the coil is obtained from the equation:
Required cooling capacity,Qt,c =Qs,c + Ql,c

(35.16)

One can also calculate the sensible heat factor for the coil (CSHF) and draw
the process line on the psychrometric chart and find the required coil Apparatus Dew
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 15

Point Temperature (coil ADP) from the above data as discussed in an earlier chapter.
As mentioned, the method discussed above is based on CLTD/CLF as
suggested by ASHRAE. It can be seen that with the aid of suitable input data and
building specifications one can manually estimate the cooling load on the building
and the required cooling capacity of the system. A suitable safety factor is normally
used in the end to account for uncertainties in occupants, equipment, external
infiltration, external conditions etc. This relatively simple method offers reasonably
accurate results for most of the buildings. However, it should be noted that the data
available in ASHRAE handbooks (e.g. CLTD tables, SHGF tables) have been
obtained for a specific set of conditions. Hence, any variation from these conditions
introduces some amount of error. Though this is generally taken care by the safety
factor (i.e., by selecting a slightly oversized cooling system), for more accurate
results one has to resort actual building simulation taking into account on all relevant
factors that affect the cooling load. However, this could be highly complex
mathematically and hence time consuming and expensive. The additional cost and
effort may be justified for large buildings with large amount of cooling loads, but may
not be justified for small buildings. Thus depending upon the specific case one has to
select suitable load calculation method.

35.6 Heating load calculations:

As mentioned before, conventionally steady state conditions are assumed for
estimating the building heating loads and the internal heat sources are neglected.
Then the procedure for heating load calculations becomes fairly simple. One has to
estimate only the sensible and latent heat losses from the building walls, roof,
ground, windows, doors, due to infiltration and ventilation. Equations similar to those
used for cooling load calculations are used with the difference that the CLTD values
are simply replaced by the design temperature difference between the
conditioned space and outdoors. Since a steady state is assumed, the required
heating capacity of the system is equal to the total heat loss from the building. As
already mentioned, by this method, the calculated heating system capacity will
always be more than the actual required cooling capacity. However, the difference
may not be very high as long as the internal heat generation is not very large (i.e.,
when the building is not internally loaded). However, when the internal heat
generation rate is large and/or when the building has large thermal capacity with a
possibility of storing solar energy during day time, then using more rigorous unsteady
approach by taking the internal heat sources into account yields significantly small
heating small capacities and hence low initial costs. Hence, once again depending
on the specific case one has to select a suitable and economically justifiable method
for estimating heating loads.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 16

Questions and answers:

1. Which of the following statements are TRUE?
1559.
Steady state methods are justified in case of heating load calculations
as the outside temperatures during winter are normally very low
1560.
Steady state methods are justified in case of heating load calculations
as the peak load normally occurs before sunrise
1561.
Steady state methods are justified in case of heating load calculations
as the outside temperature variation is normally low during winter months
1562.
Neglecting internal heat sources while calculating heating loads
underestimates the required capacity
Ans.: b) and c)
2. Which of the following statements are TRUE?
1563.
An all year air conditioning system has to be switched from winter
mode to summer mode as the outdoor temperature exceeds the outdoor
temperature at balance point
1564.
An all year air conditioning system has to be switched from summer
mode to winter mode as the outdoor temperature exceeds the outdoor
temperature at balance point
1565.
The outdoor temperature at balance point increases as the amount of
insulation increases
1566.
The outdoor temperature at balance point decreases as the amount of
insulation increases
Ans.: a) and d)
3. Which of the following statements are TRUE?
1567.
Methods based on rules-of-thumb are not always useful as they are not
based on practical systems
1568.
Methods based on rules-of-thumb are not always useful as they do not
distinguish between a good building design and a bad building design
1569.
Methods based on Transfer Function Method are not always useful as
they do not yield accurate results
1570.
Methods based on Transfer Function Method are not always useful as
they are complex and time consuming
Ans.: b) and d)
4. Which of the following statements are TRUE?
1571.

An internally loaded building requires a system with variable cooling

capacity
1572.
An externally loaded building requires a system with variable cooling
capacity
1573.
An auditorium is a good example of an internally loaded building
1574.
A residence is a good example of an internally loaded building

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 17

Ans.: b) and d)
5. Which of the following statements are TRUE?
1575.
External loads consist of only sensible components, where as internal
loads consist of both sensible and latent components
1576.
Both external and internal loads consist of sensible as well as latent
components
1577.
Fabric heat gain consists of both sensible and latent components
1578.
Heat transfer due to occupancy consists of both sensible and
latent components
Ans.: b) and d)
6. Which of the following statements are TRUE?
1579.
Cooling Load Factor is used for radiative component only
1580.
Cooling Load Factor is used for both radiative as well as convective
components
1581.
The value of cooling load factor always lies between 0 and 1
1582.
The cooling load factor increases as the thermal capacity of the walls
increase
Ans.: a) and c)
7. Which of the following statements are TRUE?
1583.
Infiltration load is a part of the building load
1584.
Infiltration load is not a part of the building load
1585.
Infiltration rate increases as the pressure difference across the building
decreases
1586.
Infiltration rate is uncontrollable
Ans.: a)
8. Which of the following statements are TRUE?
1587.
Ventilation is to be considered while calculating load on the coil, not on
buildings
1588.
Ventilation is to be considered while calculating load on the coil, not on
buildings only when the by-pass factor of the cooling coil is zero
1589.
Ventilation is to be considered while calculating load on the coil, not on
buildings only when the by-pass factor of the cooling coil is non-zero
1590.
Losses in supply duct are a part of the building load, while losses in
return duct are a part of the coil load
Ans.: b) and d)
9. A building has a U-value of 0.5 W/m 2.K and a total exposed surface area of 384
m2. The building is subjected to an external load (only sensible) of 2 kW and an
internal load of 1.2 kW (sensible). If the required internal temperature is 25 oC, state
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 18

whether a cooling system is required or a heating system is required when the

external temperature is 3oC. How the results will change, if the U-value of the
building is reduced to 0.36 W/m.K?
Ans.: From energy balance,
(Qsolar + Qint )sensible
Tout,bal =Tin -

(2 + 1.2)x1000
=25-

=8.33 C

UA

0.5x384

Since the outdoor temperature at balance point is greater than the external
temperature (Text < Tout,bal);
the building requires heating

(Ans.)

When the U-value of the building is reduced to 0.36 W/m.K, the new balanced
outdoor temperature is given by:
(Qsolar + Qint )sensible
Tout,bal =Tin -

(2 + 1.2)x1000
=25-

UA

=1.85 C
0.36x384

Since now the outdoor temperature at balance point is smaller than the external
temperature (Text > Tout,bal);
the building now requires cooling

(Ans.)

The above example shows that adding more insulation to a building extends the
cooling season and reduces the heating season.
10. An air conditioned room that stands on a well ventilated basement measures 3 m
wide, 3 m high and 6 m deep. One of the two 3 m walls faces west and contains a
double glazed glass window of size 1.5 m by 1.5 m, mounted flush with the wall with
no external shading. There are no heat gains through the walls other than the one
facing west. Calculate the sensible, latent and total heat gains on the room, room
sensible heat factor from the following information. What is the required cooling
capacity?
25oC dry bulb, 50 percent RH Inside conditions
43oC dry bulb, 24oC wet bulb Outside conditions
1.78 W/m2.K 1.316 W/m2.K U-value for wall
1.2 W/m2.K
U-value for roof
U-value for floor
Effective Temp. Difference (ETD) for wall:
25oC
Effective Temp. Difference (ETD) for roof:
30oC
U-value for glass
;
3.12 W/m2.K
Solar Heat Gain (SHG) of glass
;
300 W/m2
Internal Shading Coefficient (SC) of glass:
0.86
Occupancy

Lighting load

4 (90 W sensible heat/person)

(40 W latent heat/person)
33 W/m2 of floor area
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 19

Appliance load
Infiltration
Barometric pressure

600 W (Sensible) + 300 W(latent) 0.5

Air Changes per Hour 101 kPa
Ans.: From psychrometric chart,

For the inside conditions of 25oC dry bulb, 50 percent RH:

Wi = 9,9167 x 10-3 kgw/kgda
For the outside conditions of 43oC dry bulb, 24oC wet bulb:
Wo = 0.0107 kgw/kgda, density of dry air = 1.095 kg/m3
External loads:
a) Heat transfer rate through the walls: Since only west wall measuring 3m x 3m with
a glass windows of 1.5m x 1.5m is exposed; the heat transfer rate through this wall is
given by:
Qwall = UwallAwallETDwall = 1.78 x (9-2.25) x 25 = 300.38 W (Sensible)
b) Heat transfer rate through roof:
Qroof = UroofAroofETDroof = 1.316 x 18 x 30 = 710.6 W (Sensible)
c) Heat transfer rate through floor: Since the room stands on a well-ventilated
basement, we can assume the conditions in the basement to be same as that of the
outside (i.e., 43oC dry bulb and 24oC wet bulb), since the floor is not exposed to solar
radiation, the driving temperature difference for the roof is the temperature difference
between the outdoor and indoor, hence:
Qfloor = UfloorAfloorETDfloor = 1.2 x 18 x 18 = 388.8 W (Sensible)
d) Heat transfer rate through glass: This consists of the radiative as well as
conductive components. Since no information is available on the value of CLF, it is
taken as 1.0. Hence the total heat transfer rate through the glass window is given by:
Qglass = Aglass [Uglass(To-Ti)+SHGFmaxSC] = 2.25[3.12 x 18 + 300 x 0.86] = 706.9 W
(Sensible)
e) Heat transfer due to infiltration: The infiltration rate is 0.5 ACH, converting this into
mass flow rate, the infiltration rate in kg/s is given by:
minf = density of air x (ACH x volume of the room)/3600 = 1.095 x (0.5 x 3x3x6)/3600
minf = 8.2125 x 10-3 kg/s

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 20

Sensible heat transfer rate due to infiltration,Qs,inf;

Qs,inf = minfcpm(To-Ti) = 8.2125 x 10-3 x 1021.6 x (43 25) = 151 W (Sensible)
Latent heat transfer rate due to infiltration, Ql,inf:
Ql,inf = minfhfg(Wo-Wi) = 8.8125x10-3 x 2501x103(0.0107-0.0099)=16.4 W (sensible)

Internal loads:
a) Load due to occupants: The sensible and latent load due to occupants are:
Qs,occ = no.of occupants x SHG = 4 x 90 = 360 W
Ql,occ = no.of occupants x LHG = 4 x 40 = 160 W
b) Load due to lighting: Assuming a CLF value of 1.0, the load due to lighting is:
Qlights = 33 x floor area = 33 x 18 = 594 W (Sensible)
c) Load due to appliance:
Qs,app = 600 W (Sensible)
Ql,app = 300 W (Latent)
Total sensible and latent loads are obtained by summing-up all the sensible and
latent load components (both external as well as internal) as:
Qs,total = 300.38+710.6+388.8+706.9+151+360+594+600 = 3811.68 W
Ql,total = 16.4+160+300 = 476.4 W

(Ans.)

(Ans.)

Total load on the building is:

Qtotal = Qs,total + Ql,total = 3811.68 + 476.4 = 4288.08 W

(Ans.)

Room Sensible Heat Factor (RSHF) is given by:

RSHF = Qs,total/Qtotal = 3811.68/4288.08 = 0.889

(Ans.)

To calculate the required cooling capacity, one has to know the losses in return air
ducts. Ventilation may be neglected as the infiltration can take care of the small
ventilation requirement. Hence using a safety factor of 1.25, the required cooling
capacity is:
Required cooling capacity = 4288.08 x 1.25 = 5360.1 W 1.5 TR

(Ans.)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 21

Lesson
36
Selection Of Air
Conditioning Systems
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 1

The specific objectives of this chapter are to:

1591. Introduction to thermal distribution systems and their functions (Section 36.1)
1592. Selection criteria for air conditioning systems (Section 36.1)
1593. Classification of air conditioning systems (Section 36.3)
1594. Working principle, advantages, disadvantages and applications of all air
systems, namely:
1595. Single duct, constant volume, single zone systems (Section 36.4.1)
1596. Single duct, constant volume, multiple zone systems (Section 36.4.2)
1597. Single duct, variable air volume (VAV) systems (Section 36.4.3)
1598. Dual duct, constant volume and variable volume systems (Section 36.4.4)
1599. Outdoor air control in all air systems (Section 36.4.5)
1600. Advantages of all air systems (Section 36.4.6)
1601. Disadvantages of all air systems (Section
36.4.7) h) Applications of all air systems (Section
36.4.8)
1602. Working principle, advantages, disadvantages and applications of all water
systems (Section 36.5)
1603. Working principle, advantages, disadvantages and applications of air- water
systems (Section 36.6)
1604. Working principle, advantages, disadvantages and applications of unitary
refrigerant based systems (Section 36.7)
At the end of this chapter, the student should be able to:
1605. Explain the function of a thermal distribution system
1606. Discuss the criteria used for selection of air conditioning systems
1607. Classify air conditioning systems
1608. Discuss the working principle with suitable diagrams, advantages,
disadvantages and applications of different types of all air systems, all water
systems, air-water systems and unitary refrigerant based systems.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 2

36.1. Introduction:
In order to maintain required conditions inside the conditioned space, energy
has to be either supplied or extracted from the conditioned space. The energy in the
form of sensible as well as latent heat has to be supplied to the space in winter and
extracted from the conditioned space in case of summer. An air conditioning system
consists of an air conditioning plant and a thermal distribution system as shown in
Fig. 36.1. As shown in the figure, the air conditioning (A/C) plant acts either as a heat
source (in case of winter systems) or as a heat sink (in case of summer systems).
Air, water or refrigerant are used as media for transferring energy from the air
conditioning plant to the conditioned space. A thermal distribution system is required
to circulate the media between the conditioned space and the A/C plant. Another
important function of the thermal distribution system is to introduce the required
amount of fresh air into the conditioned space so that the required Indoor Air Quality
(IAQ) can be maintained.
ii

Win I
i

Win I

Conditioned space

A/C plant

Thermal Distribution System

Qplant

Fig.36.1: Schematic of a summer air conditioning system with the

thermal distribution system

36.2. Selection criteria for air conditioning systems:

Selection of a suitable air conditioning system depends on:
1609. Capacity, performance and spatial requirements
1610. Initial and running costs
1611. Required system reliability and flexibility
1612. Maintainability
1613. Architectural constraints
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 3

The relative importance of the above factors varies from building owner to
owner and may vary from project to project. The typical space requirement for large
air conditioning systems may vary from about 4 percent to about 9 percent of the
gross building area, depending upon the type of the system. Normally based on the
selection criteria, the choice is narrowed down to 2 to 3 systems, out of which one
will be selected finally.

36.3. Classification of air conditioning systems:

Based on the fluid media used in the thermal distribution system, air
conditioning systems can be classified as:
1614.

All air systems

1615.

All water systems

1616.

Air- water systems

1617.

Unitary refrigerant based systems

36.4. All air systems:

As the name implies, in an all air system air is used as the media that
transports energy from the conditioned space to the A/C plant. In these systems air
is processed in the A/C plant and this processed air is then conveyed to the
conditioned space through insulated ducts using blowers and fans. This air extracts
(or supplies in case of winter) the required amount of sensible and latent heat from
the conditioned space. The return air from the conditioned space is conveyed back to
the plant, where it again undergoes the required processing thus completing the
cycle. No additional processing of air is required in the conditioned space. All air
systems can be further classified into:
1618.

Single duct systems, or

1619.

Dual duct systems

The single duct systems can provide either cooling or heating using the same
duct, but not both heating and cooling simultaneously. These systems can be
further classified into:
1620.

Constant volume, single zone systems

1621.

Constant volume, multiple zone systems

1622.

Variable volume systems

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 4

The dual duct systems can provide both cooling and heating simultaneously.
These systems can be further classified into:
1623.

Dual duct, constant volume systems

1624.

Dual duct variable volume systems

36.4.1. Single duct, constant volume, single zone systems:

Figure 36.2 shows the classic, single duct, single zone, constant volume
systems. As shown in the figure, outdoor air (OD air) for ventilation and recirculated
air (RC air) are mixed in the required proportions using the dampers and the mixed
air is made to flow through a cooling and dehumidifying coil, a heating coil and a
humidifier using a an insulated ducting and a supply fan. As the air flows through
these coils the temperature and moisture content of the air are brought to the
required values. Then this air is supplied to the conditioned space, where it meets
the building cooling or heating requirements. The return air leaves the conditioned
space, a part of it is recirculated and the remaining part is vented to the atmosphere.
A thermostat senses the temperature of air in the conditioned space and controls the
amount of cooling or heating provided in the coils so that the supply air temperature
can be controlled as per requirement. A humidistat measures the humidity ratio in the
conditioned space and controls the amount of water vapour added in the humidifier
and hence the supply air humidity ratio as per requirement.
Supply
OD
air duct
Humidifier
with
fan
Cooling coil Heating coil
air
^-----------------------------------^

Conditioned
Dampers
Exhaust
space

Return
air
duct with fan

IH

Fig.36.2. A constant volume, single zone system

This system is called as a single duct system as there is only one supply duct,
through which either hot air or cold air flows, but not both simultaneously. It is called
as a constant volume system as the volumetric flow rate of supply air is always
maintained constant. It is a single zone system as the control is based on
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 5

temperature and humidity ratio measured at a single point. Here a zone refers to a
space controlled by one thermostat. However, the single zone may consist of a
single room or one floor or whole of a building consisting of several rooms. The
cooling/ heating capacity in the single zone, constant volume systems is regulated by
regulating the supply air temperature and humidity ratio, while keeping the supply
airflow rate constant. A separate sub-system controls the amount of OD air supplied
by controlling the damper position.
Since a single zone system is controlled by a single thermostat and
humidistat, it is important to locate these sensors in a proper location, so that they
are indicative of zone conditions. The supply air conditions are controlled by either
coil control or face-and-bypass control.
In coil control, supply air temperature is controlled by varying the flow rate
of cold and hot water in the cooling and heating coils, respectively. As the cooling
season gradually changes to heating season, the cooling coil valve is gradually
closed and heating coil valve is opened. Though coil control is simpler, using this
type of control it is not possible to control the zone humidity precisely as the
dehumidification rate in the cooling coil decreases with cold water flow rate. Thus at
low cold water flow rates, the humidity ratio of the conditioned space is likely to be
higher than required.
In face-and-bypass control, the cold and hot water flow rates are maintained
constant, but the amount of air flowing over the coils are decreased or increased by
opening or closing the by-pass dampers, respectively. By this method it is possible to
control the zone humidity more precisely, however, this type of control occupies
more space physically and is also expensive compared to coil control.
Applications of single duct, single zone, constant volume systems:
1625.
Spaces with uniform loads, such as large open areas with small
external loads e.g. theatres, auditoria, departmental stores.
1626.

Spaces requiring precision control such as laboratories

The Multiple, single zone systems can be used in large buildings such as
factories, office buildings etc.
36.4.2. Single duct, constant volume, multiple zone systems:
For very large buildings with several zones of different cooling/heating
requirements, it is not economically feasible to provide separate single zone systems
for each zone. For such cases, multiple zone systems are suitable. Figure 36.3
shows a single duct, multiple zone system with terminal reheat coils. In these
systems all the air is cooled and dehumidified (for summer) or heated and humidified
(for winter) to a given minimum or maximum temperature and humidity ratio. A
constant volume of this air is supplied to the reheat coil of each zone. In the reheat
coil the supply air temperature is increased further to a required level depending
upon the load on that particular zone. This is achieved by a zone thermostat, which

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 6

controls the amount of reheat, and hence the supply air temperature. The reheat coil
may run on either electricity or hot water.

Reheat coils

Fig.36.3. Single duct, constant volume system with multiple zones and reheat
coils

Advantages of single duct, multiple zone, constant volume systems with

reheat coils:
1627.

Relatively small space requirement

1628.

Excellent temperature and humidity control over a wide range of zone loads

1629.

Proper ventilation and air quality in each zone is maintained as the supply

air amount is kept constant under all conditions

Disadvantages of single duct, multiple zone, constant volume systems with
reheat coils:
1630.
High energy consumption for cooling, as the air is first cooled to a very
low temperature and is then heated in the reheat coils. Thus energy is required first
for cooling and then for reheating. The energy consumption can partly be reduced by
increasing the supply air temperature, such that at least one reheat coil can be
switched-off all the time. The energy consumption can also be reduced by using
waste heat (such as heat rejected in the condensers) in the reheat coil.
1631.

Simultaneous cooling and heating is not possible.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 7

36.4.3. Single duct, variable air volume (VAV) systems:

Figure 36.4 shows a single duct, multiple zone, variable air volume system for
summer air conditioning applications. As shown, in these systems air is cooled and
dehumidified to a required level in the cooling and dehumidifying coil (CC). A

Zone dampers

Cooling coil

Fig.36.4: Single duct, multiple zone, variable air volume system

variable volume of this air is supplied to each zone. The amount of air supplied to
each zone is controlled by a zone damper, which in turn is controlled by that zone
thermostat as shown in the figure. Thus the temperature of supply air to each zone
remains constant, whereas its flow rate varies depending upon the load on that
particular zone.
Compared to constant volume systems, the variable air volume systems offer
advantages such as:
1632. Lower energy consumption in the cooling system as air is not cooled to very
low temperatures and then reheated as in constant volume systems.
1633. Lower energy consumption also results due to lower fan power input due to
lower flow rate, when the load is low. These systems lead to significantly lower
power consumption, especially in perimeter zones where variations in solar load and
outside temperature allows for reduced air flow rates.
However, since the flow rate is controlled, there could be problems with
ventilation, IAQ and room air distribution when the zone loads are very low. In
addition it is difficult to control humidity precisely using VAV systems. Balancing of
dampers could be difficult if the airflow rate varies widely. However, by combining

VAV systems with terminal reheat it is possible to maintain the air flow rate at a
minimum required level to ensure proper ventilation and room air distribution. Many

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 8

other variations of VAV systems are available to cater to a wide variety of

applications.
36.4.4. Dual duct, constant volume systems:
Figure 36.5 shows the schematic of a dual duct, constant volume system. As
shown in the figure, in a dual duct system the supply air fan splits the flow into two
streams. One stream flow through the cooling coil and gets cooled and dehumidified
to about 13oC, while the other stream flows the heating coil and is heated to about
3545oC. The cold and hot streams flow through separate ducts. Before each
conditioned space or zone, the cold and hot air streams are mixed in required
proportions using a mixing box arrangement, which is controlled by the zone
thermostat. The total volume of air supplied to each zone remains constant, however,
the supply air temperature varies depending upon load.
Warmair
Cold
air
CC

Return air

Mixing box
Fig.36.5: Dual duct, constant volume system

Advantages of dual duct systems:

1634.
Since total airflow rate to each zone is constant, it is possible to maintain
proper IAQ and room air distribution.
1635.
Cooling in some zones and heating in other zones can be achieved
simultaneously
1636.
System is very responsive to variations in the zone load, thus it is possible
to maintain required conditions precisely.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 9

Disadvantages of dual duct systems:

1637.
Occupies more space as both cold air and hot air ducts have to be
sized to handle all the air flow rate, if required.
1638.
Not very energy efficient due to the need for simultaneous cooling and
heating of the air streams. However, the energy efficiency can be improved by
completely shutting down the cooling coil when the outside temperature is low
and mixing supply air from fan with hot air in the mixing box. Similarly, when
the outside weather is hot, the heating coil can be completely shut down, and
the cold air from the cooling coil can be mixed with supply air from the fan in
the mixing box.
36.4.5. Dual duct, variable air volume systems:
These systems are similar to dual duct, constant volume systems with the
only difference that instead of maintaining constant flow rates to each zone, the
mixing boxes reduce the air flow rate as the load on the zone drops.
36.4.6. Outdoor air control in all air systems:
As mentioned in a previous lecture, outdoor air is required for ventilation
purposes. In all air systems, a sub-system controls the amount of outdoor air by
controlling the position of exhaust, re-circulated and outdoor air dampers. From
mass balance, since the outdoor airflow rate should normally be equal to the exhaust
airflow rate (unless building pressurization or de-pressurization is required), both the
exhaust and outdoor air dampers open or close in unison. Again from mass balance,
when the outdoor air damper opens the re-circulated air damper closes, and vice
versa. The control system maintains a minimum amount of outdoor air (about 10 to
20% of supply air flow rate as required for ventilation) when the outdoor is too cold
(-30oC) or too warm ( 24oC). For energy conservation, the amount of outdoor air
can be increased gradually as the outdoor air temperature increases from -30 oC to
about 13oC. A 100 percent outdoor air can be used when the outdoor air temperature
is between 13oC to about 24oC. By this method it is possible to reduce the annual
energy consumption of the air conditioning system significantly, while maintaining the
required conditions in the conditioned space.
36.4.7. Advantages of all air systems:
1639.
All air systems offer the greatest potential for energy conservation by
utilizing the outdoor air effectively.
1640.
By using high-quality controls it is possible to maintain the temperature
and relative humidity of the conditioned space within 0.15oC (DBT) and
0.5%, respectively.
1641.
Using dual duct systems, it is possible to provide simultaneous cooling
and heating. Changeover from summer to winter and vice versa is relatively
simple in all air systems.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 10

1642.
It is possible to provide good room air distribution and ventilation under
all conditions of load.
1643.

Building pressurization can be achieved easily.

1644.
The complete air conditioning plant including the supply and return air
fans can be located away from the conditioned space. Due to this it is
possible to use a wide variety of air filters and avoid noise in the conditioned
space.
36.4.8. Disadvantages of all air systems:
1645.
They occupy more space and thus reduce the available floor space in
the buildings. It could be difficult to provide air conditioning in high-rise
buildings with the plant on the ground floor or basement due to space
constraints.
1646.

Retrofitting may not always be possible due to the space requirement.

1647.
Balancing of air in large and particularly with variable air volume
systems could be difficult.
36.4.9. Applications of all air systems:
All air systems can be used in both comfort as well as industrial air
conditioning applications. They are especially suited to buildings that require
individual control of multiple zones, such as office buildings, classrooms,
laboratories, hospitals, hotels, ships etc. They are also used extensively in
applications that require very close control of the conditions in the conditioned space
such as clean rooms, computer rooms, operation theatres, research facilities
etc.

36.5. All water systems:

In all water systems the fluid used in the thermal distribution system is water,
i.e., water transports energy between the conditioned space and the air conditioning
plant. When cooling is required in the conditioned space then cold water is circulated
between the conditioned space and the plant, while hot water is circulated through
the distribution system when heating is required. Since only water is transported to
the conditioned space, provision must be there for supplying required amount of
treated, outdoor air to the conditioned space for ventilation purposes. Depending
upon the number of pipes used, the all water systems can be classified into a 2-pipe
system or a 4-pipe system.
A 2-pipe system is used for either cooling only or heating only application, but
cannot be used for simultaneous cooling and heating. Figure 36.6 shows the
schematic of a 2-pipe, all water system. As shown in the figure and as the name
implies, a 2-pipe system consists of two pipes one for supply of cold/hot water to
the conditioned space and the other for the return water. A cooling or heating coil
provides the required cold or hot water. As the supply water flows through the
conditioned space, required heat transfer between the water and conditioned space
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 11

takes place, and the return water flows back to the cooling or heating coil. A flow
control valve controls the flow rate of hot or cold water to the conditioned space and
thereby meets the required building heating or cooling load. The flow control valve is
controlled by the zone thermostat. As already mentioned, a separate arrangement
must be made for providing the required amount of ventilation air to the conditioned
space. A pressure relief valve (PRV) is installed in the water line for maintaining
balanced flow rate.
A 4-pipe system consists of two supply pipelines one for cold water and one
for hot water; and two return water pipelines. The cold and hot water are mixed in a
required proportion depending upon the zone load, and the mixed water is supplied
to the conditioned space. The return water is split into two streams, one stream flows
to the heating coil while the other flows to the cooling coil.
Heating/cooling coil
Flow control valves
Supply water line
Return water line Fig.36.6: A two-pipe, all water system
Heat transfer between the cold/hot water and the conditioned space takes
place either by convection, conduction or radiation or a combination of these. The
cold/hot water may flow through bare pipes located in the conditioned space or one
of the following equipment can be used for transferring heat:
1648. Fan coil units
1649. Convectors
1650. Radiators etc.
A fan coil unit is located inside the conditioned space and consists of a heating
and/or cooling coil, a fan, air filter, drain tray and controls. Figure 36.7 shows the
schematic of a fan coil unit used for cooling applications. As shown in the figure, the
basic components of a fan coil unit are: finned tube cooling coil, fan, air filter,
insulated drain tray with provision for draining condensate water and connections for
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 12

cold
water
Air
conditioned
filter
space
Connections
Finned
Warm
/Warm
tube
airlines.
air
from
for
from
IThe cold water circulates through the finned tube coil while the
blower
warm
air from the conditioned space and blows it over the cooling coil.
conditioned
/^/"conditioned
cooling
colddraws
water
coil spacexA
space
As the air flows through the cooling coil it is cooled and dehumidified. The cold and
dehumidified air is supplied to the conditioned space for providing required
conditions inside the conditioned space. The water condensed due to
dehumidification of room air has to be drained continuously. A cleanable or
replaceable filter is located in the upstream of the fan to prevent dust accumulation
on the cooling coil and also to protect the fan and motor from dust. Fan coil units for
domestic air conditioning are available in the airflow range of 100 to 600 l/s, with
multi-speed, high efficiency fans. In some designs, the fan coil unit also consists of a
heating coil, which could be in the form of an electric heater or steam or hot water
coil. Electric heater is used with 2-pipe systems, while the hot water/steam coils are
Cold air to

s^
2
e ^-------------L{

Cold air to
Fan

Condensate water
drain line

Fig.36.7: A
basic fan coil
unit for
cooling
purposes
used
with 4pipe
syste
ms.
The
fan
coil
units
are
either
floor
mount
ed,
windo
w
mount
ed or
ceiling
mount
ed.
The
capaci
ty of a
fan
coil
unit
can
be
contro

lled
either
by
controlling the cold
water flow rate or
by controlling air
flow rate or both.
The airflow rate
can be controlled
either by a damper
arrangement or by
varying the fan
speed. The control
may be manual or
automatic, in which
case,
a
room
thermostat controls
the capacity. Since
in the fan coil unit
there
is
no
provision
for
ventilation,
a
separate
arrangement must
be made to take
care of ventilation.
A fan coil unit with
a provision for
introducing treated
ventilation air to
the
conditioned
space is called as
unit ventilator.

Version 1 ME, IIT

Kharagpur 13

A convector consists of a finned tube coil through which hot or cold fluid flows.
Heat transfer between the coil and surrounding air takes place by natural convection
only, hence no fans are used for moving air. Convectors are very widely used for
heating applications, and very rarely are used for cooling applications.
In a radiator, the heat transfer between the coil and the surrounding air is
primarily by radiation. Some amount of heat is also transferred by natural convection.
Radiators are widely used for heating applications, however, in recent times they are
also being used for cooling applications.
36.5.1. Advantages of all water systems:
1651. The thermal distribution system requires very less space compared to all air
systems. Thus there is no penalty in terms of conditioned floor space. Also the plant
size will be small due to the absence of large supply air fans.
1652. Individual room control is possible, and at the same time the system offers all
the benefits of a large central system.
1653. Since the temperature of hot water required for space heating is small, it is
possible to use solar or waste heat for winter heating.
1654. It can be used for new as well existing buildings (retrofitting).
1655. Simultaneous cooling and heating is possible with 4-pipe systems.
36.5.2. Disadvantages of all water systems:
1656. Requires higher maintenance compared to all air systems, particularly in the
conditioned space.
1657. Draining of condensate water can be messy and may also create health
problems if water stagnates in the drain tray. This problem can be eliminated, if
dehumidification is provided by a central ventilation system, and the cooling coil is
used only for sensible cooling of room air.
1658. If ventilation is provided by opening windows or wall apertures, then, it is
difficult to ensure positive ventilation under all circumstances, as this depends on
wind and stack effects.
1659. Control of humidity, particularly during summer is difficult using chilled water
control valves.
36.5.3. Applications of all water systems:
All water systems using fan coil units are most suitable in buildings requiring
individual room control, such as hotels, apartment buildings and office buildings.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 14

36.6. Air-water systems:

In air-water systems both air and water are used for providing required
conditions in the conditioned space. The air and water are cooled or heated in a
central plant. The air supplied to the conditioned space from the central plant is
called as primary air, while the water supplied from the plant is called as secondary
water. The complete system consists of a central plant for cooling or heating of
water and air, ducting system with fans for conveying air, water pipelines and pumps
for conveying water and a room terminal. The room terminal may be in the form of a
fan coil unit, an induction unit or a radiation panel. Figure 36.8 shows the schematic
of a basic air-water system. Even though only one conditioned space is shown in the
schematic, in actual systems, the air-water systems can simultaneously serve
several conditioned spaces.

Central plant
for secondary
water

Central plant for primary air

Fig.36.8: A basic air-water system
Normally a constant volume of primary air is supplied to each zone depending
upon the ventilation requirement and the required sensible cooling capacity at
maximum building load. For summer air conditioning, the primary air is cooled and
dehumidified in the central plant, so that it can offset all the building latent load.
Chilled water is supplied to the conditioned space to partly offset the building
sensible cooling load only. Since the chilled water coil kept in the conditioned space
has to take care of only sensible load, condensation of room air inside the
conditioned space is avoided thereby avoiding the problems of condensate drainage
and related problems in the conditioned space. As mentioned, the primary takes care
of the ventilation requirement of the conditioned space, hence unlike in all water

systems, there is no need for separate ventilation systems. In winter, moisture can
be added to the primary air in the central plant and hot water is circulated through
the coil kept in the conditioned space. The secondary water lines can be of 2-pipe, 3pipe or 4-pipe type similar to all water systems.
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 15

As mentioned the room unit may be in the form of a fan coil unit, an induction
unit or in the form of a radiant panel. In an induction unit the cooling/heating coil is an
integral part of the primary air system. The primary air supplied at medium to high
pressure to the induction unit, induces flow of secondary air from the conditioned
space. The secondary air is sensibly cooled or heated as it flows through the
cooling/heating coil. The primary and secondary air are mixed and supplied to the
conditioned space. The fan coil units are similar to the ones used in all water
systems.
36.6.1. Advantages of air-water systems:
1. Individual zone control is possible in an economic manner using room
thermostats, which control either the secondary water flow rate or the secondary air
(in fan coil units) or both.
1660. It is possible to provide simultaneous cooling and heating using primary air
and secondary water.
1661. Space requirement is reduced, as the amount of primary supplied is less than
that of an all air systems.
1662. Positive ventilation can be ensured under all conditions.
1663. Since no latent heat transfer is required in the cooling coil kept in the
conditioned space, the coil operates dry and its life thereby increases and problems
related to odours or fungal growth in conditioned space is avoided.
1664. The conditioned space can sometimes be heated with the help of the heating
coil and secondary air, thus avoiding supply of primary air during winter.
1665. Service of indoor units is relatively simpler compared to all water systems.
36.6.2. Disadvantages of air-water systems:
1666. Operation and control are complicated due to the need for handling and
controlling both primary air and secondary water.
1667. In general these systems are limited to perimeter zones.
1668. The secondary water coils in the conditioned space can become dirty if the
quality of filters used in the room units is not good.
1669. Since a constant amount of primary air is supplied to conditioned space, and
room control is only through the control of room cooling/heating coils, shutting down
the supply of primary air to unoccupied spaces is not possible.
1670. If there is abnormally high latent load on the building, then condensation may
take place on the cooling coil of secondary water.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 16

6. Initial cost could be high compared to all air systems.

36.6.3. Applications of air-water systems:
These systems are mainly used in exterior buildings with large sensible
loads and where close control of humidity in the conditioned space is not required.
These systems are thus suitable for office buildings, hospitals, schools, hotels,
apartments etc.

36.7. Unitary refrigerant based systems:

Unitary refrigerant based systems consist of several separate air conditioning
units with individual refrigeration systems. These systems are factory assembled and
tested as per standard specifications, and are available in the form of package units
of varying capacity and type. Each package consists of refrigeration and/or heating
units with fans, filters, controls etc. Depending upon the requirement these are
available in the form of window air conditioners, split air conditioners, heat pumps,
ductable systems with air cooled or water cooled condensing units etc. The
capacities may range from fraction of TR to about 100 TR for cooling. Depending
upon the capacity, unitary refrigerant based systems are available as single units
which cater to a single conditioned space, or multiple units for several conditioned
spaces. Figure 36.9 shows the schematic of a typical window type, room air
conditioner, which is available in cooling capacities varying from about 0.3 TR to
about 3.0 TR. As the name implies, these units are normally mounted either in the
window sill or through the wall. As shown in the figure, this type of unit consists of
single package which includes the cooling and dehumidification coil, condenser coil,
a hermetic compressor, expansion device (capillary tube), condenser fan, evaporator
fan, room air filter and controls. A drain tray is provided at the bottom to take care of
the condensate water. Both evaporator and condensers are plate fin-and-tube,
forced convection type coils. For rooms that do not have external windows or walls, a
split type room air conditioner can be used. In these air conditioners, the condensing
unit comprising of the condenser, compressor and condenser fan with motor are
located outside, while the indoor unit consisting of the evaporator, evaporator fan
with motor, expansion valve and air filter is located inside the conditioned room. The
indoor and outdoor units are connected by refrigerant piping. In split type air
conditioners, the condensed water has to be taken away from the conditioned space
using separate drain pipes. In the room air conditioners (both window mounted and
split type), the cooling capacity is controlled by switching the compressor on-and-off.
Sometimes, in addition to the on-and-off, the fan speed can also be regulated to
have a modular control of capacity. It is also possible to switch off the refrigeration
system completely and run only the blower for air circulation.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 17

CONDENSERMOTOR and
COMPRESSOR
(ouldoorconditioning
coil)
CAPILLARY TUBE

CONDENSER FAN
EVAPORATOR
(indoorconditioning coil
CONTROL
BOX

EVAPORATOR
FAN

Fig.3
6.9. A
typica
l
windo
w
type
room
air
condit
ioner
Figure
36.10
shows a typical
package unit with a
remote condensing
unit. As shown, in a
typical
package
unit, the remote
condensing
unit
consists
of
the
compressor and a
condenser,
while
the
indoor
unit
consists of the plate
fin-and-tube
type,
evaporator,
a
blower, air filter,
drain tray and an
arrangement
for
connecting supply
air and return air
ducts. These units
are available in
capacities ranging
from about 5 TR to
upto about 100 TR.
The
condenser
used
in
these
systems could be
either air cooled or
water cooled. This

type
of the evaporator.
system
can
be
used for
providing
air
conditioni
ng in a
large
room or it
can cater
to several
small
rooms
with
suitable
supply
and return
ducts. It is
also
Version 1 ME, IIT
possible
Kharagpur 18
to house
the entire
refrigerati
on in a
single
package
with
connectio
ns
for
water
lines
to
the water
cooled
condenser
and
supply
and return
air ducts.
Larger
systems
are either
constant
air volume
type
or
variable
air volume
type. They
may also
include
heating
coils
along with

Condensing
unit
Return
Cold
airair
from
to
conditionedspace
onditioned
space

Indoor unit
Refrigerant lines
Fig.36.10: A typical package unit with remote condensing unit
Most of the unitary systems have a provision for supplying outdoor air for
ventilation purposes. The type of control depends generally on the capacity of the
unit. The control system could be as simple as a simple thermostat based on-off
control as in room air conditioners to sophisticated microprocessor based control
with multiple compressors or variable air volume control or a combination of both.
36.7.1. Advantages of unitary refrigerant based systems:
1671. Individual room control is simple and inexpensive.
1672. Each conditioned space has individual air distribution with simple adjustment
by the occupants.
1673. Performance of the system is guaranteed by the manufacturer.
1674. System installation is simple and takes very less time.
1675. Operation of the system is simple and there is no need for a trained operator.
1676. Initial cost is normally low compared to central systems.
1677. Retrofitting is easy as the required floor space is small.
36.7.2. Disadvantages of unitary refrigerant based systems:
1678. As the components are selected and matched by the manufacturer, the
system is less flexible in terms of air flow rate, condenser and evaporator sizes.
1679. Power consumption per TR could be higher compared to central systems.
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 19

1680. Close control of space humidity is generally difficult.

1681. Noise level in the conditioned space could be higher.
1682. Limited ventilation capabilities.
1683. Systems are generally designed to meet the appliance standards, rather than
the building standards.
1684. May not be appealing aesthetically.
1685. The space temperature may experience a swing if on-off control is used as in
room air conditioners.
1686. Limited options for controlling room air distribution.
10. Equipment life is relatively short.
36.7.3. Applications of unitary refrigerant based systems:
Unitary refrigerant based systems are used where stringent control of
conditioned space temperature and humidity is not required and where the initial cost
should be low with a small lead time. These systems can be used for air conditioning
individual rooms to large office buildings, classrooms, hotels, shopping
centers, nursing homes etc. These systems are especially suited for existing
building with a limitation on available floor space for air conditioning systems.

Questions and answers:

1. Which of the following statements are TRUE?
1687. The function of a thermal distribution system is to transfer sensible and latent
heat between the air conditioning plant and the conditioned space
1688. A thermal distribution system may also supply the required amount of fresh air
to the conditioned space
1689. Only air flows through a thermal distribution system
1690. Air, water, refrigerant or any other fluid can flow through a thermal distribution
system
Ans.: a), b) and d)
2. Selection of a suitable air conditioning system depends on:
1691.
1692.
1693.
1694.

Type of the building

Initial and running costs
Reliability and serviceability
All of the above

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 20

Ans.: d)
3. Which of the following statements are TRUE?
1695. A single zone, single duct, constant volume system can be used either for
cooling or for heating, but not for both cooling and heating simultaneously
1696. The cooling capacity of a single zone, single duct, constant volume system is
controlled by controlling the supply air temperature
1697. Single zone, single duct, constant volume systems are not suitable when the
space conditions have to be controlled precisely
1698. Single zone, single duct, constant volume systems can be used for large
single rooms only
Ans.: a) and b)
4. Which of the following statements are TRUE?
1699. Single duct, multiple zone, constant volume systems can be used
for simultaneous cooling and heating applications
1700. Single duct, multiple zone, constant volume systems can be used for large
buildings comprising of several offices
c) Single duct, multiple zone, constant volume systems are energy efficient
d) Single duct, multiple zone, constant volume systems always ensure proper
ventilation
Ans.: b) and d)

5. Which of the following statements are TRUE?

1701. In single duct, variable air volume systems, the temperature of the supply air
remains constant, but the supply air flow rate is varied depending upon the load
1702. Variable air volume systems generally consume less power compared to
constant volume systems
1703. Variable air volume systems occupy less space compared to constant volume
systems
1704. Variable air volume systems always ensure adequate ventilation and good
room air distribution
Ans.: a) and b)
6. Which of the following statements are TRUE?
1705.
1706.
1707.
1708.

Dual duct systems can provide simultaneous cooling and heating

Dual duct systems are constant air volume systems
Dual duct systems are energy efficient
Dual duct systems occupy more space compared to single duct systems

Ans.: a) and d)
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 21

7. Which of the following statements are TRUE?

1709. In all air systems, the outdoor and re-circulated airflow rates are controlled
independently
1710. In all air systems, it is sometimes possible to switch of the cooling coil and use
only outdoor air for air conditioning
1711. All air systems are highly suitable for retrofitting applications
1712. All air systems generally ensure precise control of conditioned space
Ans.: b) and d)
8. Which of the following statements are TRUE?
1713. A two-pipe all water system can be used for simultaneous cooling and heating
applications
1714. In all water systems, separate provision must be made for ventilation
1715. An all water system is easier to maintain compared to an all air system
1716. Precise control of room conditions is difficult using all water systems
Ans.: b) and d)
9. Which of the following statements are TRUE?
1717. All water systems are suitable in buildings requiring individual room control
1718. All water systems consume less space compared to all air systems
1719. All water systems offer lower initial and running costs
1720. All of the above
Ans.: a) and b)
10. Which of the following statements are TRUE?
1721. An air-water system uses both air and water in the thermal distribution system
1722. In an air-water system, all the latent load on the building is handled by the
primary air only
1723. In an air-water system, the cooling coil kept in the conditioned space operates
under dry conditions
1724. Compared to all water systems, an air-water system is difficult to maintain
Ans.: a), b) and c)
11. Which of the following statements are TRUE?
1725. Individual zone control is not possible in an air-water system
1726. Using an air-water system it is possible to ensure positive ventilation under all
conditions
1727. Compared to all air and all water systems, the control of an air-water system
is more complicated
1728. The initial cost of an air-water system could be higher compared to other
systems

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 22

Ans.: b), c) and d)

12. Which of the following statements are TRUE?
1729. A fan coil unit is used with all water systems only
1730. A fan coil unit can be used either with an all water system or with an air-water
system
1731. It is possible to control the cooling capacity by controlling either liquid flow rate
or air flow rate in a fan coil unit
1732. A fan coil unit used in an all water system requires a provision for draining the
condensed water
Ans.: b), c) and d)
13. Which of the following statements are TRUE?
1733.
1734.
1735.
1736.

In a convector, heat transfer takes place by forced convection

Convectors are commonly used for heating applications
In a radiator, heat transfer takes place by both radiation and convection
A unit ventilator is a fan coil unit with a provision for fresh air entry

Ans.: b), c) and d)

14. Which of the following statements are TRUE?
1737. Unitary refrigerant based systems are used for very small capacities only
1738. Unitary refrigerant based systems are available only for cooling applications
1739. Unitary systems are factory assembled with a performance guaranteed by the
manufacturer
1740. Unitary systems are also called as package units
Ans.: c) and d)
15. Which of the following statements are TRUE?
1741. Small unitary systems have air cooled condensers, while larger systems can
be either air cooled or water cooled
1742. A split type room air conditioner should be used when the room does not have
an exterior wall
1743. A split type air conditioner is more reliable compared to a window air
conditioner
1744. It is possible to provide fresh air in a window air conditioner, whereas this is
not possible in a split air conditioner
Ans.: a), b) and d)
16. Which of the following statements are TRUE?

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 23

1745. In room air conditioners, the cooling capacity is generally controlled by

switching the compressor on-and-off
1746. Compared to a central air conditioning system, the temperature swing
obtained using a room air conditioner is higher
1747. Using room air conditioners, it is possible to control the indoor conditions
precisely
1748. Large unitary systems can be used with limited ducting to serve several
rooms simultaneously
Ans.: a), b) and d)
17. Which of the following statements are TRUE?
1749. Compared to central systems, the initial cost of a unitary system is less
1750. Unitary systems can be installed quickly and their operation is relatively
simple
1751. Unitary systems consume less power compared to central systems of same
capacity
1752. Unitary systems are ideal for retrofitting applications
Ans.: a), b) and d)
18. Match the following:
a. All water systems
b. All air systems
c. Unitary systems
d. Air-water system

1753. A large indoor stadium

1754. Individual rooms of a large hotel
1755. An existing building with good ventilation requirement
1756. An existing, small office building

Ans.: 1-b, 2-a, 3-d, 4-c

19. Match the following:
a. Variable air volume system
b. Constant air volume system
c. Multiple zone, single duct system
d. Dual duct system

1757.

A large precision laboratory

1758.

Perimeter zone of a building

1759.

Simultaneous cooling and heating

1760.

A large building complex

Ans.: 1-b, 2-a, 3-d, 4-c

20. Match the following:

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 24

1761. Electronic chip manufacturing

a. Window air conditioner

unit

b. Package unit

1762. Interior room of an office

c. All air system

1763. A bedroom with a north facing

d. Split air conditioner

wall
1764. A medium sized restaurant

o
n
1
M

E, IIT
Khar
agpu
r 25

Lesson
37
Transmission Of Air In Air
Conditioning Ducts
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 1

The specific objectives of this chapter are to:

1765. Describe an Air Handling Unit (AHU) and its functions (Section 37.1)
1766. Discuss the need for studying transmission aspects of air in air conditioning
(Section 37.2)
1767. Discuss airflow through air conditioning ducts, Bernoulli and modified
Bernoulli equations, Static, dynamic, datum and total head, Fan Total Pressure (FTP)
and power input to fan (Section 37.3)
1768. Discuss estimation of pressure loss through air conditioning ducts (Section
37.4)
5. Estimation of frictional pressure drop of circular and rectangular ducts using
friction charts and equations (Section 37.4)
1769. Estimation of dynamic pressure drop in various types of fittings (Section 37.5)
1770. Static regain (Section 37.6)
At the end of the lecture, the student should be able to:
1771. Apply Bernoulli equation and modified Bernoulli equation to air conditioning
ducts and estimate various pressure heads, pressure loss, FTP and fan power input
1772. Estimate frictional pressure drops through circular and non-circular ducts
using friction charts and equations
1773. Estimate dynamic pressure drop through various fittings used in air
conditioning ducts using tables, charts and equations
1774. Define static regain and calculate static regain factor for various types of duct
enlargements

37.1. Introduction:
In air conditioning systems that use air as the fluid in the thermal distribution
system, it is essential to design the Air Handling Unit (AHU) properly. The primary
function of an AHU is to transmit processed air from the air conditioning plant to the
conditioned space and distribute it properly within the conditioned space. A typical
AHU consists of:
1775. A duct system that includes a supply air duct, return air duct, cooling and/or
heating coils, humidifiers/dehumidifiers, air filters and dampers
1776. An air distribution system comprising various types of outlets for supply air
and inlets for return air

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 2

3. Supply and return air fans which provide the necessary energy to move the air
throughout the system

37.2. Transmission of air:

In an AHU, air is transmitted through various ducts and other components
with the help of fans. Since the fan motor consumes a large amount of power, and
the duct system occupies considerable building space, the design of air transmission
system is an important step in the complete design of air conditioning systems. In the
end the success of any air conditioning system depends on the design of individual
components as well as a good matching between them under all conditions. In order
to design the system for transmission of air, it is important to understand the
fundamentals of fluid (air) flow through ducts. These aspects have been dealt with to
some extent in Chapter 6 on Fundamentals of Fluid Flow.

37.3. Flow of air through ducts:

As mentioned in Chapter 6, the fundamental equation to be used in the
analysis of air conditioning ducts is the Bernoullis equation. Bernoullis equation is
valid between any two points in the flow field when the flow is steady,
irrotational, inviscid and incompressible. The equation is valid along a
streamline for rotational, steady and incompressible flows. Between any two
points 1 and 2 in the flow field for irrotational flows, the Bernoullis equation is written
as:
V12

p2

V22

pT

p1 + +z1 =^ + +z2 = = total head

pg 2g
pg 2g
g

(37.1)

V2
p is the pressure head, is the velocity head and Z is the static head,
Pg
2g
respectively. Each of the heads has units of length as explained before. The above
equation can be written in terms of static, velocity, datum and total pressures as:

where

V12
V22
p1 ++gz1 =p2++gz2 =pT = total pressure

(37.2)

The above equation implies that for frictionless flow through a duct, the total
pressure remains constant along the duct. Since all real fluids have finite
viscosity, i.e. in all actual fluid flows, some energy will be lost in overcoming friction.
This is referred to as head loss, i.e. if the fluid were to rise in a vertical pipe it will
rise to a lower height than predicted by Bernoullis equation. The head loss will
cause the total pressure to decrease in the flow direction. If the head loss is denoted
by Hl, then
Bernoullis equation can be modified to:
p1 V12
p2
V
V1 p 2 V 2
+
+z1 =
+
+z2 +Hl
g 2g
g the
2g fluid friction and the resulting head, a fan is required in air
To overcome
conditioning systems. When a fan is introduced into the duct through which air is
flowing, then the static and total pressures at the section where the fan is located
+

+z1 =

+z2 +Hl

(37.3)
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 3

rise. This rise is called as Fan Total Pressure (FTP). Then the required power input
to the fan is given by:
Qair .FTP

Wfan=--------------

(37.4)

'lfan

The FTP should be such that it overcomes the pressure drop of air as it flows
through the duct and the air finally enters the conditioned space with sufficient
momentum so that a good air distribution can be obtained in the conditioned space.
Evaluation of FTP is important in the selection of a suitable fan for a given
application. It can be easily shown that when applied between any two sections 1
and 2 of the duct, in which the fan is located, the FTP is given by:
P(V22-V12)
FTP = (p2 -p1) +--------------2g

+ pg(z2 -z1) + pgHl

(37 5)

Thus to evaluate FTP, one needs to know the static pressures at sections 1
and 2 (p1, p2), air velocities at 1 and 2 (V1, V2), datum at 1 and 2 (Z1, Z2) and the
head loss Hl. Normally, compared to the other terms, the pressure change due to
datum pg(z2 -z1) is negligible. If the static pressures at the inlet and exit are equal,
say, to atmospheric pressure (p1= p2 = patm) and the duct has a uniform cross section
(v1=v2), then FTP is equal to the pressure loss due to friction. Thus to find FTP, one
has to estimate the total pressure loss as air flows through the duct from one section
to other.

37.4. Estimation of pressure loss in ducts:

As air flows through a duct its total pressure drops in the direction of flow. The
pressure drop is due to:
1777.

Fluid friction

1778.

Momentum change due to change of direction and/or velocity

The pressure drop due to friction is known as frictional pressure drop or

friction loss, Apf. The pressure drop due to momentum change is known as
momentum pressure drop or dynamic loss, Apd. Thus the total pressure drop Apt
is given by:
Apt=Apf+Apd

(37 6)

37.4.1. Evaluation of frictional pressure drop in ducts

The Darcy-Weisbach equation is one of the most commonly used equations
for estimating frictional pressure drops in internal flows. This equation is given by:
pV
Ap f =f
Dl 2

(37.7)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 4

where f is the dimensionless friction factor, L is the length of the duct and D is the
diameter in case of a circular duct and hydraulic diameter in case of a non-circular
and the
duct. The friction factor is a function of Reynolds number, ReD =VD
relative surface roughness of the pipe or duct surface in contact with the fluid.
For turbulent flow, the friction factor can be evaluated using the empirical
correlation suggested by Colebrook and White is used, the correlation is given by:
1

Vf

=-2log

10

ks
3.7D

2.51
(ReD)Vf

(37.8)

where ks is the average surface roughness of inner duct expressed in same units as
the diameter D. Evaluation of f from the above equation requires iteration since f
occurs on both the sides of it.
In general in air conditioning ducts, the fluid flow is turbulent. It is seen from
the above equation that when the flow is turbulent, the friction factor is a function of
Reynolds number, hydraulic diameter and inner surface roughness of the duct
material. Table 37.1 shows absolute roughness values of some of the materials
commonly used in air conditioning:
Material
Galvanized Iron (GI) sheet
Concrete Riveted steel
Cast Iron (CI) Commercial
steel

Absolute roughness , e (m) 0.00015

0.0003 to 0.003 0.0009 to
0.009
0.00026 0.00046

Table 37.1: Average surface roughness of commonly used duct materials

Of the different materials, the GI sheet material is very widely used for air
conditioning ducts. Taking GI as the reference material and properties of air at
20oC and 1 atm. pressure, the frictional pressure drop in a circular duct is given by:
. 0.022243Q
in N/m
Apf
(37.9)
= 2
1.852
L
4.973 D
. where Qair is the volumetric flow rate of air in m3/s, L is the length and D is
the inner
diameter of the duct in meters, respectively.
Using the above equation, friction charts have been created for estimation of
frictional pressure drop of standard air through circular ducts made of GI sheets.
Figure 37.1 shows the standard chart for estimating frictional pressure drop in
circular ducts made of GI sheets at standard air conditions.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 5

0.015
OS
D.6
O.OIO
0.5
0.008
0.4O 5
0.OO6
0.3
O3
0.2
CIS
O. 15

0.04
0.03
O 03
O 02

O.OIO

o.ooa
O 006

,.o'
>*

^f
\

Q.3Q.4

Q.6 OS 1

1.5 2

8 10

15 20

30 40

SO SO lOO

, sr

*ff
X
--cV

3 ss>T_;

< >T

^
^

/\

O.IO
O.IO
OS
0.06
0.05
Q 06
0.04
O 05

D.2

o.s

<;

J c ' l\

^v

(W

^Ift

-Ir-lJA-

^
n-b'

J-T \

.^

^"

;' V\
S V

<*

^
*c vkfN

^w^-S-

. &>

s
^

\r\
^f

O
4

z>*

^C-*

O.l

D.2

\
^

0.30.4

rJ

I_Z 1.5

0.6 O.B 1

1 ** S^
2

*
4

I
6

^"

s,^
SIO

s, \

N\<Jr\

YA-^W
\ K^l\ \

CP

15 20

30 40

60 80 100

Pressure loss, Pa/m Fig.37.1. Chart for

estimating frictional pressure drop in circular GI ducts
It can be seen from the chart that one can estimate frictional pressure drop
per unit length if any two parameters out of the three parameters, i.e., flow rate Qair,
diameter D and velocity V are known. Correction factors have to be applied to the
pressure drop values for ducts made of other materials and/or for air at other
conditions. For small changes in air density (p) and temperature (T in K), one can
use the following relation to obtain frictional pressure drop from the standard chart.
Apf,1
ZAp f,2

and
P2 j

Apf,1
ZApf 2

T2^ ^T1

0.857
(37.10)

The chart shown above is valid only for circular ducts. For other shapes, an
equivalent diameter has to be used to estimate the frictional pressure drop.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 6

37.4.2. Rectangular ducts:

Even though circular ducts require the least material for a given flow rate and
allowable pressure drop, rectangular ducts are generally preferred in practice as
they fit easily into the building construction thus occupying less space, and they are
also easy to fabricate. The ratio of the two sides a and b of the rectangle (a/b) is
called as aspect ratio of the duct. Since square ducts with aspect ratio 1.0 come
close in performance to a circular duct, it is preferable to use an aspect ratio as close
to unity as possible for best performance.
One can use equation (37.9) and friction chart for circular ducts for estimating
pressure drop through a rectangular duct by using an equivalent diameter. A
rectangular duct is said to be equivalent to a circular duct, if the volumetric
flow rate Qairand frictional pressure drop per unit length (Pf/L) are same for
both. Equating these two parameters for a rectangular duct and an equivalent
circular duct, it can be shown that the equivalent diameter is given by:
(ab) 0.625

Deq=

(a + b)0.25

(3711)

The above equation is found to be valid for aspect ratio less than or equal
to 1:8. Thus from the known values of the two sides of the duct a and b, one can
find the equivalent diameter Deq. From the equivalent diameter and the air flow rate,
one can estimate the frictional pressure drop per unit length by using either Eq.(37.9)
or the friction chart Fig. 37.1. However, when using equivalent diameter and flow rate
to find the frictional pressure drop from the chart, the velocity values shown on the
chart are not the actual velocities. The actual velocities have to be obtained from
the flow rate and the actual cross-sectional area of the rectangular duct. If a
rectangular duct has to be designed for a given flow rate and a given frictional
pressure drop, then one can first find the equivalent diameter from the friction chart
or from Eq.(37.9) and then find the required dimensions of the duct either by fixing
the aspect ratio or one of the sides.

37.5. Dynamic losses in ducts:

Dynamic pressure loss takes place whenever there is a change in either the
velocity or direction of airflow due to the use of a variety of bends and fittings in air
conditioning ducts. Some of the commonly used fittings are: enlargements,
contractions, elbows, branches, dampers etc. Since in general these fittings and
bends are rather short in length (< 1 m), the major pressure drop as air flows through
these fittings is not because of viscous drag (friction) but due to momentum change.
Pressure drop in bends and fittings could be considerable, and hence should be
evaluated properly. However, exact analytical evaluation of dynamic pressure drop
through actual bends and fittings is quite complex. Hence for almost all the cases,
the dynamic losses are determined from experimental data. In turbulent flows, the
dynamic loss is proportional to square of velocity. Hence these are expressed as:

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 7

pV2
Apd = K------2

(37.12)
where
K
is
the
dynam
ic
loss
coeffici
ent,
which
is
normal
ly
obtain
ed
from
experi
ments.
S
ometi
mes,
an
equiva
lent
length
Leq is
define
d
to
estima
te the
dynam
ic
pressu
re loss
throug
h
bends
and
fittings
. The
dynam
ic
pressu
re loss
is
obtain
ed
from
the
equiva
lent
length

and
the
frictional
pressure
drop
equation or
chart, i.e.,
A pf
p 2
d

=
where f is
the friction
factor and Leq
is the
equivalent
length.
37.5.1.
Evaluation
of dynamic
pressure
loss
through
various
fittings:
a) Turns,
bends or
elbows: The
most
common
type of
bends used
in air
conditioning
ducts are 90o
turns shown
in Fig.
37.2(a).
1
1

(b )
T

he
crosssectio
n
of
the
elbow
could
be
circula
r
or
rectan
gular.
Weisb
ach
propos
ed that
the
dynam
ic
pressu
re loss
in an
elbow
is due
to the
sudde
n
expan
sion
from
the
vena
contra
cta
region
(1) to
full
crosssectio
n 2 as
shown
in
Fig.37.
2(a).
The
dynam
ic
pressu
re
drop
due to

the elbow or
90o turn is
found to be a
function
of
the
aspect
ratio (W/H),
inner
and
outer radii of
the turn (R1
and R2) and
the velocity
pressure
pV2/2, i.e.,
Z_
\pd
b

=
Cb

2
p
Vf((
2

W/

2H),

R1,
R2)
[V

3 7.1 4

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 8

The value of dynamic loss coefficient C b as a function of aspect ratio (W/H),

inner and outer radii of the turn (R 1 and R2) is available in the form of tables and
graphs (Fig.37.2(b)). It can be seen from Fig. 37.2(b) that the pressure loss
increases as (R1/R2) decreases and/or the aspect ratio W/H decreases. As a result,
installing turning vanes in the bends reduces the dynamic pressure drop as it is
equivalent to increasing W/H, as shown in Fig. 37.2(c).

Turning vanes

Fig.37.2(c): Use of turning vanes in a 90o bend (elbow)

The equivalent lengths are available as function of geometry for other types of
turns and bends.
b) Branch take-offs: Branch take-offs (Fig. 37.3) are commonly used in air
conditioning ducts for splitting the airflow into a branch and a downstream duct. The
dynamic pressure drop from the upstream (u) to downstream (d), Apu-d is given by:
ZAp11 _d

2^ Pvd
2

0.4

Vu

(37.15)

where Vd and Vu are the air velocities in the downstream and upstream ducts,
respectively.
The dynamic pressure drop from the upstream (u) to branch (b), Apu-b is given by:
ZAp|| _Y\

u-b

Pvd
2

(37.16)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 9

Fig.37.3: A branch take-off

The
value
of
dynamic loss coefficient
Cu-b is available in the form
of tables and graphs as a
function of the angle p and
the ratio of branch-toupstream velocity, Vb/Vu.
Cu-b is found to increase
as p and Vb/Vu increase.
c) Branch entries: Branch
entries (Fig. 37.4) are
commonly used in return
air ducts. Similar to branch
take-offs, the values of
dynamic pressure loss
coefficients
from
upstream-to-downstream
(Cu-d) and from branch-todownstream (Cu-d) are
available in the form of
tables and graphs as
functions of upstream,
branch and downstream
velocities and the angle p.

Fig.37.4: A
branch
entry
d) Sudden enlargement:
The pressure loss due to
sudden enlargement,
shown in Fig. 37.5(a),

APd,e
nl is
given
by
Borda
Carno
t
equat
ion
as:
A
A
p
dA
,
e
n
l
_

2
V
1

V
J

)
where V1 is the velocity
before enlargement, and A1
and A2 are the areas
before
and
after
enlargement, respectively.
The above expression,
which
is
obtained
analytically using modified
Bernouilles equation and
momentum
balance
equation is found to
Version 1 ME, IIT
Kharagpur 10

over-predict the pressure loss when the air flow rates are high and under-predict
when the flow rate is low. Correction factors are available in the form of tables for
different enlargements.

^ 1-----------1
Vena contracta
2
2

Fig.37.5(a): Sudden enlargement

Fig.37.5(b): Sudden contraction

e) Sudden contraction: A sudden contraction is shown in Fig. 37.5(b). Similar to

sudden enlargement, the dynamic pressure loss due to sudden contraction APd,con
can be obtained analytically. This expression is also known as Borda-Carnot
equation. It is given by:
Apd,con -

A2

V 2 2Y 1
2 ICc

(37.18)

where V2 is the velocity in the downstream, and A1 and A2 are the areas at vena
contracta and after contraction, respectively. The coefficient C c is known as
contraction coefficient and is seen to be equal to area ratio A1/A2. The contraction
coefficient Cc is found to be a function of the area ratio A2/A1, and the values of Cc as
obtained by Weisbach are shown in Table 37.3.
A2/A1
0.1
0.5
0.8
1.0

Cc
0.624
0.681
0.813
1.000
Table 37.3: Values of contraction coefficient Cc for different area ratios

Comparing the expressions of pressure loss for sudden enlargement and

sudden contraction, it can be seen that for the same flow rates and area ratios, the

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 11

pressure drop due to sudden enlargement is higher than that due to sudden
contraction.
f) Miscellaneous fittings, openings etc.: The dynamic pressure loss coefficients
for other types of fittings, such as suction and discharge openings are also available
in the form of tables. These values depend on the design of the fitting/opening. For
abrupt suction opening the dynamic loss coefficient (K) is found to be about 0.85,
while it is about 0.03 for a formed entrance. For discharge openings where the
downstream pressure is atmospheric, all the kinetic energy of the air stream is
dissipated at the exit, hence, the dynamic loss coefficient is equal to 1.0 in this case.
Filters, cooling and heating coils, dampers etc.: The pressure drop across air
handling unit equipment, such as, air filters, dampers, cooling and heating coils
depend on several factors. Hence, normally these values have to be obtained from
the manufacturers data.

37.6. Static regain:

Whenever there is an enlargement in the cross-sectional area of the duct, the
velocity of air decreases, and the velocity pressure is converted into static pressure.
The increase in static pressure due to a decrease in velocity pressure is known as
static regain. In an ideal case, when there are no pressure losses, the increase in
static pressure (ps) is exactly equal to the decrease in velocity pressure (pv) and
the total pressure (pt) remains constant as shown in Fig.37.6(a). Thus for the ideal
case:
pv = pv,1 -pv,2 = ps =ps,2 -ps,1

(37.19)
pt,1 =pt,2

However, for sudden enlargements or for other non-ideal enlargements, the

decrease in velocity pressure will be greater than the increase in static pressure, and
the total pressure decreases in the direction flow due to pressure losses as shown in
Fig. 37.6(b). The pressure loss is due to separation of the boundary layer and the
formation of eddies as shown in Fig.37.6(b). Thus, for sudden or non-ideal
enlargement:
pv = pv,1 -pv,2 > ps =ps,2 -ps,1

(37.20)
pt,1 =pt,2 + ploss

The pressure loss due to enlargement ploss is expressed in terms of a Static

Regain Factor, R as:
ploss = (1-R) pv =(1-R)(pv,1 -pv,2)

(37.21)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 12

where the static regain factor R is given by:

RAps

(ps,2 _ps,1) ^pv

(pv,1 _ pv,2)

(37.21)
Thus
for
ideal
enlarg
ement
the
Static
Regai
n
Factor
R is
equal
to 1.0,
where
as it is
less
than
1.0 for
nonideal
enlarg
ement.

p
t

pT
L
Fig.37.6(a): Ideal
enlargement

1> ??

7 ?V

1
Fig.37.6(b):
Sudden
enlargement

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 13

Questions and answers:

1. State which of the following statements are TRUE?
1779.
1780.
1781.
1782.

An air handling unit conveys air between the conditioned space and the plant
An air handling unit consists of supply and return air fans
The fan used in an air conditioning system consumes large amount of power
All of the above

Ans.: d)
2. State which of the following statements are TRUE?
a) Under ideal conditions, the static pressure through an air conditioning duct
remains constant
1783. Under ideal conditions, the total pressure through an air conditioning duct
remains constant
1784. A fan is required in an air conditioning duct to overcome static pressure loss
1785. A fan is required in an air conditioning duct to overcome total pressure loss
Ans.: b) and d)
3. State which of the following statements are TRUE?
1786.
1787.
1788.
1789.

In a duct of uniform cross section, the static pressure remains constant

In a duct of uniform cross section, the static pressure decreases along length
In a duct of uniform cross section, the total pressure decreases along length
In a duct of uniform cross section, the dynamic pressure remains constant

Ans.: b), c) and d)

4. State which of the following statements are TRUE?
a) The pressure drop in an air conditioning duct is due to frictional effects
b) The pressure drop in an air conditioning duct is due to friction as well as
momentum change
1790. Frictional pressure drop increases with duct length
1791. Momentum pressure drop takes place over relatively short lengths
Ans.: b), c) and d)
5. Rectangular ducts are generally preferred over circular ducts in buildings as:
1792.
1793.
duct
1794.
1795.

For a given flow rate, the pressure drop is less compared to a circular duct
For a given pressure drop, it requires less material compared to a circular
Rectangular ducts are easier to fabricate
Rectangular ducts match better with building profile

Ans.: c) and d)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 14

6. State which of the following statements are TRUE?

1796. Dynamic pressure drop in an elbow of rectangular cross-section reduces as
the aspect ratio increases
1797. Use of turning vanes increase the aspect ratio
1798. Compared to sudden enlargement, the dynamic pressure drop in sudden
contraction is less
1799. Compared to sudden enlargement, the dynamic pressure drop in sudden
contraction is more
Ans.: a), b) and c)
7. State which of the following statements are TRUE?
1800. The static regain factor always lies between 0 and 1
1801. The static regain factor is 0 for an ideal enlargement
1802. The static regain factor is 1 for an ideal enlargement
1803. In an actual enlargement, reduction in dynamic pressure is always greater
than increase in static pressure
Ans.: a), c) and d)
8. 1 m3/s of air is conveyed through a straight, horizontal duct of uniform crosssection and a length of 40 m. If the velocity of air through the duct is 5 m/s, find the
required fan power input when a) A circular duct is used, and b) A rectangular duct of
aspect ratio 1:4 is used. Take the efficiency of the fan to be 0.7. If a GI sheet of 0.5
mm thick with a density of 8000 kg/m3 is used to construct the duct, how many
kilograms of sheet metal is required for circular and rectangular cross sections?
Assume standard conditions and the static pressure at the inlet and exit of the duct
to be same.
Ans.: From continuity equation; the required cross-sectional area of the duct is given
by:
Acs = (Flow rate, Q/Velocity, V) = (1.0/5.0) = 0.2 m2
a) Circular duct:
The required diameter of the duct, D = (4Acs/n:) = 0.50463 m
Then using the equation for frictional pressure drop;
0.022243 Qair
Apf =
D

0.022243(1.0)
=--------------4.973
(0.50463)

40
= 26.7 N/m

Since the duct is straight, the dynamic pressure drop is zero in the absence of any
fittings, hence:

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 15

Fan Total Pressure, FTP = APf = 26.7 N/m2

Hence the required fan power input, Wfan is:
Qair .FTP 1.0x26.7____
Wfan =---------------=-------------= 38.14 W

(Ans.)

The required mass of the duct is given by:

mcircular = (7tD)x(thickness)x(density) = 6.34 kg

(Ans.)

b) Rectangular duct: of aspect ratio (a:b) = (1:4)

As before, cross sectional area, Acs = 0.2 m2 = a x b = a x 4a
=> a = 0.22361 m and b = 4a = 0.89440 m
The equivalent diameter, Deq is given by:
( b) 0.625

Deq = 1.3

(0 2) 0.625

0.25

=1.3---------------------------(a + b)
(0.22361 + 0.8944)

= 0.46236 m

Using the friction equation, the frictional pressure drop is:

0.022243 Qair

Apf =

0.022243(1.0)
=

40

2
= 41.24 N/m

(0.46236)

Hence, the required fan power is:

Qair.FTP 1.0x41.24
Wfan =---------------=---------------= 58.91 W
ilfan

(Ans.)

0.7

The required mass of the rectangular duct is given by:

mrectangular = 2(a+b)x(thickness)x(density) = 8.94 kg

(Ans.)

Thus for the same flow rate and velocity, a rectangular duct consumes
54.5% higher fan power and weighs 41% compared to a circular duct.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 16

9. Air at a flow rate of 1.2 kg/s flows through a fitting with sudden enlargement. The
area before and after the enlargements are 0.1 m 2 and 1 m2, respectively. Find the
pressure drop due to sudden enlargement using Borda-Carnot Equation. What is the
pressure drop if the same amount of air flows through a sudden contraction with area
changing from 0.1 m2 and 1 m2.
Ans.: Assuming standard air conditions, the density of air is approximately equal to
1.2 kg/m3. Hence the volumetric flow rate of air, Q is given by:
Q = (mass flow rate/density) = (1.2/1.2) = 1.0 m3/s
Sudden enlargement:
From Borda-Carnot Equation; pressure drop due to sudden enlargement is given by:
V1 P

Apd,enl =

A1 A2,

Velocity V1 = Q/A1 = 1.0/0.1 = 10 m/s and A1/A2 = 0.1/1.0 = 0.1

Substituting the above values in the equation, we get:
Apd,enl =

pV1 2]1 A1^2 2

^ A 2y

1.2x10 2l 2

(1-0.1) = 48.6 N/m

(Ans.)

Sudden contraction:
Pressure drop due to sudden contraction is given by Borda-Carnot equation:
e

^pd,con =

r>\

PV2 2

A2

PV 2
2

1
VCc

C is From Table 37.3, for an area ratio (A2/A1) of 0.1, the contraction coefficient
0.624. The velocity after contraction (V2) is 10 m/s. Hence substituting these
values in the above equation:
^pd,con
=

V2
P2
2

1 Cc

1.2x1 2
0
2

1.0
^0.62
4

= 36.15
N/m

(Ans.)

It can be seen from the example that for the same area ratio and flow rate, the
pressure drop due to sudden enlargement is larger than that due to sudden
contraction by about 34.4%.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 17

10. Air at a flow rate of 1 m 3/s flows through a fitting whose cross-sectional area
increases gradually from 0.08 m 2 to 0.12 m2. If the static regain factor (R) of the
fitting is 0.8, what is the rise in static pressure (static regain) and total pressure loss
as air flows through the fitting?
Ans.: The velocity of air at the inlet and exit of the fitting are:
Vin = 1/Ain = 1/0.08 = 12.5 m/s and Vout = 1/Aout = 1/0.12 = 8.33 m/s
Taking a value of 1.2 kg/m 3 for the density of air, the velocity pressure at the inlet and
exit are given by:
Pv,in = (pVin2)/2 = (1.2 x 12.52)/2 = 93.75 N/m2
Pv,out = (pVout2)/2 = (1.2 x 8.332)/2 = 41.63 N/m2
Static pressure rise through the fitting (static regain) is given by:
(Ps,out - Ps,in) = R(Pv,in - Pv,out) = 0.7 x (93.75 - 41.63) = 36.484 N/m2

(Ans.)

The loss in total pressure is given by:

APt,loss = (1-R) (Pv,in - Pv,out) = 0.3 x (93.75 - 41.63) = 15.636 N/m2

(Ans.)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 18

Lesson
38
Design Of Air
Conditioning Ducts
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 1

The specific objectives of this chapter are to:

1804. Important requirements of an air conditioning duct (Section 38.1)
1805. General rules for duct design (Section 38.2)
1806. Classification of duct systems (Section 38.3)
1807. Commonly used duct design methods (Section 38.4)
1808. Principle of velocity method (Section 38.4.1)
1809. Principle of equal friction method (Section 38.4.2)
1810. Principle of static regain method (Section 38.4.3)
1811. Performance of duct systems (Section 38.5)
1812. System balancing and optimization (Section 38.6)
1813. Introduction to fans and fan laws (Section 38.7)
1814. Interaction between fan and duct system (Section 38.8)
At the end of the chapter, the student should be able to:
1815. State the important requirements of an air conditioning duct and the
general rules to be followed in the design of ducts
1816. Classify air conditioning ducts based on air velocity and static pressure
1817. Design air conditioning ducts using velocity method, equal friction method
or static regain method
1818. Explain typical performance characteristics of a duct system
1819. Explain the importance of system balancing and optimization
1820. State and explain the importance of fan laws, and use the performance of
fans under off-design conditions
1821. Describe interaction between fan and duct and the concept of balance
point

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 2

38.1. Introduction:
The chief requirements of an air conditioning duct system are:
1822.

It should convey specified rates of air flow to prescribed locations

1823.
It should be economical in combined initial cost, fan operating cost
and cost of building space
1824.

It should not transmit or generate objectionable noise

Generally at the time of designing an air conditioning duct system, the

required airflow rates are known from load calculations. The location of fans and
air outlets are fixed initially. The duct layout is then made taking into account the
space available and ease of construction. In principle, required amount of air can
be conveyed through the air conditioning ducts by a number of combinations.
However, for a given system, only one set results in the optimum design. Hence,
it is essential to identify the relevant design parameters and then optimize the
design.

38.2. General rules for duct design:

1825.
Air should be conveyed as directly as possible to save space,
power and material
1826.
Sudden changes in directions should be avoided. When not
possible to avoid sudden changes, turning vanes should be used to
reduce pressure loss
1827.

Diverging sections should be gradual. Angle of divergence 20o

1828.
Aspect ratio should be as close to 1.0 as possible. Normally, it
should not exceed 4
1829.
Air velocities should be within permissible limits to reduce noise
and vibration
1830.
losses

Duct material should be as smooth as possible to reduce frictional

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 3

38.3. Classification of duct systems:

Ducts are classified based on the load on duct due to air pressure and
turbulence. The classification varies from application to application, such as for
residences, commercial systems, industrial systems etc. For example, one such
classification is given below:
Low pressure systems: Velocity 10 m/s, static pressure 5 cm H2O (g) Medium
pressure systems: Velocity 10 m/s, static pressure 15 cm H2O (g)
High pressure systems: Velocity > 10 m/s, static pressure 15<ps 25 cm H2O (g)
High velocities in the ducts results in:
1831.

Smaller ducts and hence, lower initial cost and lower space

requirement
1832.

Higher pressure drop and hence larger fan power consumption

1833.

Increased noise and hence a need for noise attenuation

Recommended air velocities depend mainly on the application and the noise
criteria. Typical recommended velocities are:
Residences: 3 m/s to 5 m/s
Theatres:

4 to 6.5 m/s

Restaurants: 7.5 m/s to 10 m/s

If nothing is specified, then a velocity of 5 to 8 m/s is used for main ducts
and a velocity of 4 to 6 m/s is used for the branches. The allowable air velocities
can be as high as 30 m/s in ships and aircrafts to reduce the space requirement.

38.4. Commonly used duct design methods:

Figure 38.1 shows the schematic of a typical supply air duct layout. As
shown in the figure, supply air from the fan is distributed to five outlets (1 to 5),
which are located in five different conditioned zones. The letters A to I denote the
portions of the duct to different outlets. Thus A-B is the duct running from the
supply air fan to zone 1, A-B-C is the duct running from supply fan to conditioned
zone and so on. These are known as duct runs. The run with the highest
pressure drop is called as the index run. From load and psychrometric
calculations the required supply airflow rates to each conditioned space are
known. From the building layout and the location of the supply fan, the length of
each duct run is known. The purpose of the duct design is to select suitable
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 4

dimensions of duct for each run and then to select a fan, which can provide the
required supply airflow rate to each conditioned zone.
Due to the several issues involved, the design of an air conditioning duct
system in large buildings could be a sophisticated operation requiring the use of
Computer Aided Design (CAD) software. However, the following methods are
most commonly used for simpler lay-outs such as the one shown in Fig.38.1.
1834.

Velocity method

1835.

Equal Friction Method

1836.

Static Regain method

~^(4

>

A
C
FAN

>

>

>

V
F

Fig.38.1: Typical air conditioning duct lay-out

38.4.1. Velocity method:
The various steps involved in this method are:
i. Select suitable velocities in the main and branch ducts
ii. Find the diameters of main and branch ducts from airflow rates and velocities
for circular ducts. For rectangular ducts, find the cross-sectional area from flow
rate and velocity, and then by fixing the aspect ratio, find the two sides of the
rectangular duct
iii. From the velocities and duct dimensions obtained in the previous step, find the
frictional pressure drop for main and branch ducts using friction chart or equation.
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 5

iv. From the duct layout, dimensions and airflow rates, find the dynamic pressure
losses for all the bends and fittings
v. Select a fan that can provide sufficient FTP for the index run
vi. Balancing dampers have to be installed in each run. The damper in the index
run is left completely open, while the other dampers are throttled to reduce the
flow rate to the required design values.
The velocity method is one of the simplest ways of designing the duct
system for both supply and return air. However, the application of this method
requires selection of suitable velocities in different duct runs, which requires
experience. Wrong selection of velocities can lead to very large ducts, which,
occupy large building space and increases the cost, or very small ducts which
lead to large pressure drop and hence necessitates the selection of a large fan
leading to higher fan cost and running cost. In addition, the method is not very
efficient as it requires partial closing of all the dampers except the one in the
index run, so that the total pressure drop in each run will be same.
For example, let the duct run A-C-G-H be the index run and the total
pressure drop in the index run is 100 Pa. If the pressure drop in the shortest duct
run (say A-B) is 10 Pa, then the damper in this run has to be closed to provide an
additional pressure drop of 90 Pa, so that the required airflow rate to the
conditioned zone 1 can be maintained. Similarly the dampers in the other duct
runs also have to be closed partially, so that the total pressure drop with damper
partially closed in each run will be equal to the pressure drop in the index run
with its damper left open fully.
38.4.2. Equal friction method:
In this method the frictional pressure drop per unit length in the main and
branch ducts (pf/L) are kept same, i.e.,
p
L

f
A

pf
L
B

p
L

p
L

(38.1)

Then the stepwise procedure for designing the duct system is as follows:
i. Select a suitable frictional pressure drop per unit length (pf/L) so that the
combined initial and running costs are minimized.
ii. Then the equivalent diameter of the main duct (A) is obtained from the selected
value of (pf/L) and the airflow rate. As shown in Fig.38.1, airflow rate in

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 6

the main duct QA is equal to the sum total of airflow rates to all the conditioned
zones, i.e.,
N

(38.2)

Q A = Q 1 + Q 2 + Q 3 + Q 4 + Q5 = IQ

From the airflow rate and (Apf/L) the equivalent diameter of the main duct (Deq,A)
can be obtained either from the friction chart or using the frictional pressure drop
equation, i.e.,
V4.973/
Deq,A

0.022243QA
'Apf
V L /
L

1.852

(38.3)

iii. Since the frictional pressure drop per unit length is same for all the duct runs,
the equivalent diameters of the other duct runs, B to I are obtained from the
equation:
1.852
=
(38.4)
1.8524.973
e
A
q
D
Deq
B

1.852 .

Deq

4.973

iv. If the ducts are rectangular, then the two sides of the rectangular
duct of each run are obtained from the equivalent diameter of that run and by
fixing aspect ratio as explained earlier. Thus the dimensions of the all the duct
runs can be obtained. The velocity of air through each duct is obtained from the
volumetric flow rate and the cross-sectional area.
v. Next from the dimensions of the ducts in each run, the total frictional pressure
drop of that run is obtained by multiplying the frictional pressure drop per unit
length and the length, i.e.,
AP
f,A

Apf v
L j

.LA ; AP f,B

ApfN
L j

...

(38.5)

vi. Next the dynamic pressure losses in each duct run are obtained based on the
type of bends or fittings used in that run.
vii. Next the total pressure drop in each duct run is obtained by summing up the
frictional and dynamic losses of that run, i.e.,

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 7

PA =pf A + pd,A; PB =pf B + pd,B ...

(38.6)

viii. Next the fan is selected to suit the index run with the highest pressure loss.
Dampers are installed in all the duct runs to balance the total pressure loss.
Equal friction method is simple and is most widely used conventional
method. This method usually yields a better design than the velocity method as
most of the available pressure drop is dissipated as friction in the duct runs,
rather than in the balancing dampers. This method is generally suitable when the
ducts are not too long, and it can be used for both supply and return ducts.
However, similar to velocity method, the equal friction method also requires
partial closure of dampers in all but the index run, which may generate noise. If
the ducts are too long then the total pressure drop will be high and due to
dampering, ducts near the fan get over-pressurized.
38.4.3. Static Regain Method:
This method is commonly used for high velocity systems with long duct
runs, especially in large systems. In this method the static pressure is maintained
same before each terminal or branch. The procedure followed is as given below:
i. Velocity in the main duct leaving the fan is selected first.
ii. Velocities in each successive runs are reduced such that the gain in static
pressure due to reduction in velocity pressure equals the frictional pressure drop
in the next duct section. Thus the static pressure before each terminal or branch
is maintained constant. For example, Fig.38.2 shows a part of the duct run with
two sections 1 and 2 before two branch take-offs. The velocity at 1 is greater
than that at 2, such that the static pressure is same at 1 and 2. Then using the
static regain factor, one can write:
pf,2 + pd,2 = R(pv,1 - pv,2)

(38.7)

where pf,2 and pd,2 are the frictional and dynamic losses between 1 and 2, and
pv,1 and pv,2 are the velocity pressures at 1 and 2 respectively.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 8

ps
2 1=ps 2

Fig.38.2: Principle of static regain method

iii. If section 1 is the outlet of the fan, then its dimensions are known from the flow
rate and velocity (initially selected), however, since both the dimensions and
velocity at section 2 are not known, a trial-and-error method has to be followed to
solve the above equation, which gives required dimensions of the section at 2.
iv. The procedure is followed in the direction of airflow, and the dimensions of the
downstream ducts are obtained.
v. As before, the total pressure drop is obtained from the pressure drop in the
longest run and a fan is accordingly selected.
Static Regain method yields a more balanced system and does not call for
unnecessary dampering. However, as velocity reduces in the direction of airflow,
the duct size may increase in the airflow direction. Also the velocity at the exit of
the longer duct runs may become too small for proper air distribution in the
conditioned space.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 9

38.5. Performance of duct systems:

For the duct system with air in turbulent flow, the total pressure loss (Apt)
is proportional to the square of flow rate; i.e.,
total pressure drop,APt oc(Q)

(38.8)

or, total pressure drop,APt =C(Q)

(38.9)

where C is the resistance offered by the duct system. Once the duct system is
designed and installed, the value of C is supposed to remain constant. However,
if the air filters installed in the duct become dirty and/or if the damper position is
altered, then the value of C changes. Thus variation of total pressure drop with
airflow rate is parabolic in nature as shown in Fig. 38.3. In this figure, the curve A
refers to the performance of the duct at design conditions, while curve B refers to
the performance under the conditions of a dirty filter and/or a higher damper
closure and curve C refers to the performance when the damper is opened more.
From the duct characteristic curve for constant resistance, one can write
ptt ,1
p
,2

(Q1)2

=1)
(Q2)2

(38.10)

Thus knowing the total pressure drop and airflow rate at

design condition (say 1), one can obtain the total pressure drop at an off-design
condition 2, using the above equation.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 10

pt

QFig.38
.3:
Variati
on of
total
press
ure
drop
with
flow
rate
for a
given
duct
syste
m

38.6
.
Syst
em
bala
ncin
g
and
opti

miza
tion:
I
n
large
buildi
ngs,
after
the Air
Handli
ng
Unit is
install
ed, it
has to
be
balan
ced
for
satisfa
ctory
perfor
manc
e.
Syste
m
balan
cing
requir
es as
a first
step,
meas
ureme
nts of
actual
airflow
rates
at all
supply
air
outlet
s and
return
air
inlets.
Then
the
damp
ers
are

adjust
ed so
that
the
actual
meas
ured
flow
rate
corres
ponds
to the
specifi
ed
flow
rates.
Syste
m
balan
cing
may
also
requir
e
adjust
ing
the
fan
speed
to get
requir
ed
tempe
rature
drop
acros
s the
coolin
g or
heatin
g coils
and
requir
ed
airflow
rates
in the
conditi
oned
zone.
Balan
cing a
large

air
condit
ioning
syste
m can
be a
very
expen
sive
and
time
consu
ming
metho
d and
may
requir
e very
accur
ate
instru
ments
for
meas
uring
air
flow
rates
and
tempe
rature
s.
Howe
ver,
syste
m
balan
cing is
alway
s
recom
mend
ed to
get
the
full
benefi
t from
the
total
cost
incurr
ed on

air
conditi
oning
syste
m.
L
arge
air
condit
ioning
syste
ms
requir
e
optimi
zation
of the
duct
desig
n so
as to
minim
ize
the
total
cost,
which
includ
es the
initial
cost
of the
syste
m and
the
lifetim
e
operat
ing
cost.
At
prese
nt
very
sophi
sticat
ed
comm
ercial
comp
uter
softw

are
are
availa
ble for
optimi
zing
the
duct
desig
n.
One
such
metho
d
is
called
as TMetho
d. The
reade
r
shoul
d
refer
to
advan
ced
textbo
oks or
ASHR
AE
handb
ooks
for
detail
s on
duct
optimi
zation
metho
ds.

Versio
n1
ME,
IIT
Khara
gpur
11

38.7. Fans:
The fan is an essential and one of the most important components of
almost all air conditioning systems. Thus a basic understanding of fan
performance characteristics is essential in the design of air conditioning systems.
The centrifugal fan is most commonly used in air conditioning systems as it can
efficiently move large quantities of air over a large range of pressures. The
operating principle of a centrifugal fan is similar to that of a centrifugal
compressor discussed earlier. The centrifugal fan with forward-curved blades is
widely used in low-pressure air conditioning systems. The more efficient
backward-curved and airfoil type fans are used in large capacity, high-pressure
systems.
38.7.1. Fan laws:
The fan laws are a group of relations that are used to predict the effect of
change of operating parameters of the fan on its performance. The fan laws are
valid for fans, which are geometrically and dynamically similar. The fan laws
have great practical use, as it is not economically feasible to test fans of all sizes
under all possible conditions.
The important operating parameters of a fan of fixed diameter are:
1837.
1838.
1839.

Density of air (p) which depends on its temperature and pressure

Operating speed of the fan (co in rps), and
Size of the fan.

Here the fan laws related to the density of air and the rotative speed of the
fan are considered. The effect of the size of the fan is important at the time of
designing the fan. For a given air conditioning system with fixed dimensions,
fittings etc. it can be easily shown that:
airflow rate,Qoco
pV
static pressure rise, Ap s oc-------

2
V

2
fan power input, WOCQ(Aps)+Q

V2

(38.11)
(38.12)
(38.13)

From the expression for fan power input (Eqn.(38.13)), it can be seen that
the 1st term on the RHS accounts for power input required for increasing the
static pressure of air and the 2nd term on RHS accounts for the power input
required to impart kinetic energy to air as it flows through the fan. Using the
above relations, the following fan laws can be obtained.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 12

Law 1: Density of air p remains constant and the speed co varies:

Qocco; Apsocco

and WoeQ

(38.14)

Law 2: Airflow rate Q remains constant and the density p varies:

Q = constant; Apsocp and Wocp

(38.15)

Law 3: Static pressure rise Aps remains constant and density p varies:
(38.16)
co QC and WQC=

Qoc=; Aps =constant,

38.8. Interaction between fan and duct system:

Figure 38.4 shows the variation of FTP of a centrifugal fan (fan
performance curve) and variation of total pressure loss of a duct system
(duct performance curve) as functions of the airflow rate. As shown in the
figure, the point of intersection of the fan performance curve and the duct
performance curve yield the balance point for the combined performance
of fan and duct system. Point 1 gives a balance point between the fan and
duct system when the rotative speed of fan is 1. At this condition the
airflow rate is Q1 and the total
Duct
performance
Fan performance
curve
Curve at co1

pt, FTP
t,1

t,2

Q2

p
Q1

Fig.38.4: Fan and duct performance curves and balance points

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 13

pressure loss which is equal to the FTP is pt,1. Now if the flow rate is reduced to
Q2, then the total pressure loss reduces to p t,2. To match the reduced flow rate
and the reduced pressure loss, the speed of the fan has to be reduced to 2 or
the position of the inlet guide vanes of the centrifugal fan have to be adjusted to
reduce the flow rate. This will give rise to a new balance point at 2. Thus the fan
and duct system have to be matched when there is a change in the operating
conditions.

Questions and answers:

1. State which of the following statements are TRUE?
1840. The air conditioning duct should have high aspect ratio for good
performance
1841. If the air conditioning duct is diverging, then the angle of divergence
should be as small as possible to reduce pressure loss
1842. To minimize noise and vibration, air should flow with a low velocity
1843. All of the above
Ans.: b) and c)
2. State which of the following statements are TRUE?
1844. High air velocity in ducts results in lower initial costs but higher operating
costs
1845. Higher air velocities may result in acoustic problems
1846. Air velocities as high as 30 m/s are used in residential systems
1847. Low air velocities are recommended for recording studios
Ans.: a), b) and d)
3. State which of the following statements are TRUE?
1848.
1849.
1850.
1851.

In a duct layout, the total pressure drop is maximum in the index run
At balanced condition, the total pressure drop is equal for all duct runs
Dampers are required for balancing the flow in each duct run
All of the above

Ans.: d)
4. State which of the following statements are TRUE?
1852.
1853.
1854.
1855.

If not done properly, the velocity method gives rise to large sized ducts
In equal friction method, dampering is not required
In static regain method, dampering is required
All of the above

Ans.: c)
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 14

5. State which of the following statements are TRUE?

1856. In a given duct system, the total pressure drop varies linearly with flow
rate
1857. In a given duct system, the total pressure drop varies in a parabolic
manner with flow rate
1858. For a given flow rate, the total pressure drop of a duct increases as the
dampers are opened more
1859. For a given flow rate, the total pressure drop of a duct is less when the air
filters are new
Ans.: b) and d)
6. State which of the following statements are TRUE?
a) Compared to forward curved blades, backward curved blades are more
efficient
1860. Airfoil type blades are used in small capacity systems
1861. Fan laws are applicable to all types of fans
1862. Fan laws are applicable to fans that are geometrically and dynamically
similar
Ans.: a) and d)
7. State which of the following statements are TRUE?
1863. For a given fan operating at a constant temperature, the power input to fan
increases by 4 times when the fan speed becomes double
1864. For a given fan operating at a constant temperature, the power input to fan
increases by 8 times when the fan speed becomes double
1865. For a given fan operating at a constant flow rate, the power input
increases as the air temperature increases
1866. For a given fan operating at a constant static pressure rise, the flow rate
reduces as the air temperature increases
Ans.: b)
8. State which of the following statements are TRUE?
a) For a backward curved blade, the fan total pressure (FTP) increases as flow
rate increases
b) For a backward curved blade, the fan total pressure (FTP) reaches a
maximum at a particular flow rate
c) When the air filter in the air conditioning duct becomes dirty, the speed has to
be increased to maintain the balance between fan and duct systems
d) When the damper installed in the duct is opened more, to maintain the
balance, the speed of the fan should be increased
Ans.: b) and c)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 15

9. Find the dimensions of a rectangular duct of aspect ratio (1:2) when 0.2 m 3/s
of air flows through it. The allowable frictional pressure drop is 3 Pa/m.
Ans: For a flow rate of 0.2 m3/s and an allowable frictional pressure drop of 3
Pa/m, the equivalent diameter is found to be 0.2 m from friction chart or friction
equation.
Then taking an aspect ratio of 1:2, the dimensions of the rectangular duct are
found to be :
a 0.13 m and b 0.26 m.
(Ans.)
10. The following figure shows a typical duct layout. Design the duct system
using a) Velocity method, and b) Equal friction method. Take the velocity of air in

12 rn -

Fan

15 m

2 m3/s

1 m3/s

(2)

("3)

F
18 n-

6 rn

E
1 m3/s(1
the main duct (A) as 8 m/s for both the methods. Assume a dynamic loss
coefficient of 0.3 for upstream to downstream and 0.8 for upstream to branch and
for the elbow. The dynamic loss coefficients for the outlets may be taken as 1.0.
Find the FTP required for each case and the amount of dampering required.
Ans.:
a) Velocity method: Select a velocity of 5 m/s for the downstream and
branches. Then the dimensions of various duct runs are obtained as shown
below:
Segment A: Flow rate, QA = 4 m3/s and velocity, VA = 8 m/s
cross-sectional area AA = QA/VA = 4/8 = 0.5 m2 Deq,A = 0.798 m

(Ans.)

Segment B: Flow rate, QB = 1 m3/s and velocity, VB = 5 m/s

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 16

=> cross-sectional area AB = QB/VB = 1/5 = 0.2 m2 => Deq,B = 0.505 m

(Ans.)

Segment C: Flow rate, QC = 3 m3/s and velocity, VC = 5 m/s

=> cross-sectional area AC = QC/VC = 3/5 = 0.6 m2 => Deq,A = 0.874 m

(Ans.)

Segment D: Flow rate, QD = 2 m3/s and velocity, VD = 5 m/s

=> cross-sectional area AD = QD/VD = 2/5 = 0.4 m2 => Deq,D = 0.714 m

(Ans.)

Segments E&F: Flow rate, QE,F = 1 m3/s and velocity, VE,F = 5 m/s
=> cross-sectional area AE,F = QE,F/VE,F = 1/5 = 0.2 m2 => Deq,A = 0.505 m (Ans.)
Calculation of pressure drop:
Section A-B:
APA-B = APA,f + APb,f + APu-b + APexit
where APA,f and APB,f stand for frictional pressure drops in sections A and B,
respectively, APu-b is the dynamic pressure drop from upstream to branch and
APexit is the dynamic pressure loss at the exit 1.
The frictional pressure drop is calculated using the equation:
1.852
= 0.022243 Qair
4.973

L 0.022243x4
= 13 .35 Pa

x15

0.798
ApA,f
1852
1.852
= 3.99 Pa 0.022243 Qair
x6
L = 0.022243x1
4.973
0.5054.973
ApB,

The dynamic pressure drop from upstream to branch is given by:

d
Apu-b = Cu-b
p
2f
1.2x5
=
0.8
J
2
The dynamic pressure drop at the exit is given by:
V2

^pexit,1 =
exit

2 v. j2 PV1

= 1.0

= 12 Pa

1.2x52
2

= 15 Pa

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 17

Hence total pressure drop from the fan to the exit of 1 is given by:
APAB = APA,f + APb,f + APu-b + APexit = 13.35+3.99+12+15 = 44.34 Pa
In a similar manner, the pressure drop from fan to 2 is obtained as:
APA-C-D = APA,f + APC,f + APD,f + APu-b + APu-d + APexit
APA-C-D = 13.35+3.99+2.57+12+4.5+15 = 51.41 Pa
Pressure drop from fan to exit 3 is obtained as:
APA-C-E-F = APA,f+APC,f+APE,f+APF,f+APu-d,C+APu-d,E+APelbow+APexit

APAC-E-F = 13.35+3.99+11.97+3.99+4.5+4.5+12+15 = 69.3 Pa

Thus the run with maximum pressure drop is A-C-E-F is the index run. Hence the
FTP required is:
FTP = APA-C-E-F = 69.3 Pa

(Ans.)

Amount of dampering required at 1 = FTP - APA-B = 24.96 Pa

Amount of dampering required at 2 = FTP - APA-C-D = 17.89 Pa

(Ans.)
(Ans.) b)

Equal Friction Method:

The frictional pressure drop in segment A is given by:
Apf,A 0.022243 Qar .
0.022243x4
/_ >>
----- =----------i--------=-------------------------= 0.89 (Pa/m)
LA
D 4.973
0.798 4.973
The frictional pressure drops of B, C, D, E and F should be same as 0.89 Pa/m
for Equal Friction Method. Hence, as discussed before:
1.852
eq D
e
q =

1.852
4.973

1.852
eq

4.973

3D

4.97

From the above equation, we obtain:

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 18

Deq,B = D eq,A
A
Q1.852
=
^Q
0.4762
0.717m
= 0.6164
mm
E
1.852
4.973
4.973

QB
QA,

1.852
4.973

= 0.4762
m
QD
QA
Deq,C
=
eq,A

1.852^
4.973

Deq,D

= Deq,A

Deq,E =

Deq,F

=Deq,A

C
a
l
c
u
l
a
t
i
o
n

.
9

t
o

a
l

p
r

.
+

9
5

F
r

f
A

r
o
m

elbow+APexi

APAC-E-F

= 13.35 +

10.68 +

it

5.34 +

9.94 +

PA-

5.67 +

C-D

15.1 +

18.9 = 95

AP

Pa

A,f

As before,

it

the Index

AP

run is

C,f

from fan

APA-C-

AP

E -F

D,f

APA,f+

APC,f+

AP

APE,f+

FTP =

u-

APF,f+A

APAC-E-F

d,C

Pu-

d,C+AP

AP

u-

Amoun

u-b

d,E+AP

t of

16.02 +

to exit 3.
The
required
FTP is:

= 95 Pa
(Ans.)

dam

7.

perin

24

Pa

requi

(A

red

ns

at 1

.)

=
FTP APA- Versio
n1
ME,
B=
IIT
Khara
42.3
gpur
19
1 Pa
(Ans.
)
Amo
unt of
dam
perin
g
requi
red
at 2 =
FTP APAC-D

From the example, it is seen that the Velocity method results in larger duct
diameters due to the velocities selected in branch and downstream. However,
the required FTP is lower in case of velocity method due to larger ducts.
Equal Friction method results in smaller duct diameters, but larger FTP.
Compared to velocity method, the required dampering is more at outlet 1
and less at outlet 2 in case of equal friction method.
11. A fan is designed to operate at a rotative speed of 20 rps. At the design
conditions the airflow rate is 20 m3/s, the static pressure rise is 30 Pa and the air
temperature is 20oC. At these conditions the fan requires a power input of 1.5
kW. Keeping the speed constant at 20 rps, if the air temperature changes to
10oC, what will be the airflow rate, static pressure and power input?
Ans: At design condition 1,Rotative speed, co1
Air temperature, T1
Airflow rate,Q1
Static pressure rise, Aps,1
Power input, W1

= 20 rps
= 20oC = 293 K
= 20 m3/s
= 30 Pa
= 1.5 kW

At off-design condition 2, the rotative speed is same as 1, but temperature

changes to 10oC (283 K), which changes the density of air. To find the other
variables, the fan law 2 has to be applied as density varies; i.e.,
i) Airflow rate Q1 = Q2 = 20 m3/s
ii) Static pressure rise at 2,
Aps,2 = Aps,1 (P2/P1) = Aps,1 (T1/T2) = 30(293/283) = 31.06 Pa

(Ans.)

iii) Power input at 2,

W2 = W1(p2/p1) = W1(T1/T2) = 1.5(293/283) = 1.553 kW

(Ans.)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 20

Lesson
39
Space Air Distribution
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 1

The specific objectives of this chapter are to:

1867. Requirements of a proper air distribution system, definition of Air Distribution
Performance Index and Space Diffusion Effectiveness Factor (Section 39.1)
1868. Design of air distribution systems, buoyancy effects and deflection of air jets
(Section 39.2)
1869. Behaviour of free-stream jets, definitions of drop, throw, spread and
entrainment ratio (Section 39.3)
1870. Behaviour of circular jets (Section 39.4)
1871. Behaviour of rectangular jets (Section 39.5)
6. Characteristics of different types of air distribution devices, such as grilles,
registers, ceiling diffusers, slotted diffusers etc. (Section 39.6)
1872. Return air inlets (Section 39.7)
1873. Airflow pattern inside conditioned spaces using different types of air
distribution devices (Section 39.8)
1874. Stratified mixing flow (Section 39.9)
1875. Cold air distribution (Section 39.10)
1876. Displacement flow (Section 39.11)
1877. Spot cooling/heating (Section 39.12)
1878. Selection criteria for supply air inlets (Section 39.13)
At the end of the chapter, the student should be able to:
1879. Explain the importance of proper air distribution in conditioned space and
define ADPI and SDEF
1880. List the factors to be considered in the design of air distribution devices and
explain buoyancy effects and deflection of air jets
1881. Estimate throw, drop, spread and entrainment ratio of circular and rectangular,
isothermal free jets
1882. List different types of supply air outlet devices and their characteristics
1883. Draw the airflow patterns for ceiling, sidewall and slotted diffusers
1884. Explain stratified mixing flow, displacement flow, cold air distribution and spot
cooling and heating
1885. List the criteria for selection of supply air outlets.

39.1. Introduction
After the required amount of supply air is transmitted to the conditioned
space, it is essential to distribute the air properly within the conditioned space. Thus
it is important to design suitable air distribution system, which satisfies the following
requirements:
a) Create a proper combination of temperature, humidity and air motion in the
occupied zone. The occupied zone is defined as all the space in the conditioned
zone that is from the floor to a height of 1.8 m and about 30 cms from the walls. In
the occupied zone, the maximum variation in temperature should be less than 1 C
and the air velocity should be in the range of 0.15 m/s to 0.36 m/s.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 2

b) To avoid draft in the occupied zone. Draft is defined as the localized feeling of
cooling or warmth. Draft is measured above or below the controlled room condition
of 24.4 C and an air velocity of 0.15 m/s at the center of the room. The effective
draft temperature (EDT) for comfort is given by:
EDT = (DBT - 24.4) - 0.1276(V - 0.15)

(39.1)

where DBT is the local dry bulb temperature (in oC) and V is the local velocity (m/s).
For comfort, the EDT should be within -1.7oC to +1.1oC and the air velocity should
be less than 0.36 m/s.
39.1.1. Air Distribution Performance Index (ADPI)
The ADPI is defined as the percentage of measurements taken at many
locations in the occupied zone of space that meets EDT criteria of -1.7oC to +1.1 oC,
that is:
ADPI=

I NJ

x100

(39.2)

where N is the total number of locations at which observations have been made, and
Ne is the number of locations at which the effective draft temperature is within -1.7oC
to +1.1oC.
The objective of air distribution system design is to select and place the
supply air diffusers in such a way that the ADPI approaches 100 percent. The ADPI
provides a rational way of selecting air diffusers. Studies show that the value of ADPI
depends very much on space cooling load per unit area. A large value of space
cooling load per unit area tends to reduce the value of ADPI.
39.1.2. Space Diffusion Effectiveness Factor (SDEF)
The effectiveness of air distribution system is sometimes assessed using
Space Diffusion Effectiveness Factor (SDEF). It is defined as:
SDEF= Tex Ts
Tr -Ts

(39.3)

where Tex is the temperature of the exhaust air, Ts is the supply air temperature and Tr
is the temperature of the room air (at the measuring point). A SDEF value of < 1
implies that some amount of cold supply air has not mixed with the room air and is
leaving the conditioned space as exhaust. The space air distribution is considered to
be effective if SDEF > 1.0.
Table 39.1 shows the recommended supply air velocities for diffusers. Since
the air velocity at the supply air outlet is normally much higher than 0.36 m/s and its
temperature is much lower than 24.4oC, it has to mix properly with the room air
before it reaches the occupancy level. This depends on the effective design of the air
distribution system.

Criterion

Application

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 3

Supply velocity, m/s

Noise

Studios, operating theatres

Apartments, office spaces
Restaurants, libraries
Supermarkets
Factories, Gymnasium

3 to 3.5
4.0 to 5.0
5.0 to 6.0
6.0 to 7.5
7.5

Table 39.1: Recommended air velocities for supply air diffusers

39.2. Design of air distribution systems

The objective of air distribution system design is to choose the location and
type of supply air diffuser and the location and type of the return air grilles. The
parameters that affect air velocity and temperature at a given point in the
conditioned space are:
1886. Velocity of air at the inlet to the supply diffuser: Noise criteria to be observed
1887. Supply to room temperature difference (Ts-Tr)
1888. Geometry and Position of air supply outlet
1889. Position of return air inlet
1890. Room Geometry
1891. Room surface temperature: Lower the surface temperature (e.g. with glass)
stronger are the natural convection currents.
1892. Internal heat sources (e.g. people, appliances)
h) Room turbulence
The exact prediction of velocity and temperature profiles inside the
conditioned space requires simultaneous solution of mass, momentum and energy
equations for the conditioned space. However in general this task is extremely
complicated due to the several factors that affect airflow and heat transfer inside
the conditioned space. However, a basic understanding of room air distribution
requires the understanding of, buoyancy effects, deflection of air streams and
behaviour of free-stream jets. Normally the location and type of return air grilles do
not affect the air distribution significantly.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur

4

39.2.1. Buoyancy effects:

Due to the buoyancy effects, a supply air stream that is cooler than the room
air will drop and supply air that is warmer than room air rises. However, from thermal
comfort point-of-view, it is important that the supply air stream does not strike at
occupancy level. Figure 39.1(a) shows the drop of a supply air jet that is cooler than
the room air.

Il
Beam

/f
Room

Room
Fig.39.1(a): Drop of a cool air jet

Fig.39.1(b): Deflection of a cool air jet

It is understood that the buoyancy effects are due to temperature difference

prevailing between the supply air and the room air. It can be shown that the velocity
of an element at a height h due to buoyancy is given by:
Vt =
(39.4)
gh
where AT is the difference between the local temperature of the fluid (Tf)
element and the room air (Tr), Tr is the room air temperature in K, g is the
(39.5) acceleration due to gravity and h is the height. For equilibrium at a height H,
the velocity of the fluid element should be equal to the entrance velocity of
supply air (Vo), i.e.,
(39.6)
Vt = Vo at equilibrium
Then from Eqn.(39.1):
Vo =
gH

'ATdP
^ Tr J

where ATd is the difference between the temperature of air at supply outlet and the
room air.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 5

The Archimedes number, Ar is then defined as:

(39.7)
Td Tr

gH Ar
Vo2

In the above expression for Archimedes number, H may be the height of the room or
the hydraulic diameter, Dh of the room given by:
Dh =

4WH 2(W +H)

(39.8)

where W and H are the width and height of the room, respectively. Archimedes
number conveniently combines the supply air velocity at the outlet, supply to room
temperature difference and the principle dimensions of the room- important factors
that define the air distribution in a room. Several studies show that the airflow pattern
in a room is largely dependent on the Archimedes number. The Archimedes number
can also be viewed as a ratio of Grashof number to the square of Reynolds number
(Ar Gr/Re2), thus combining the effects of natural convection due to buoyancy and
forced convection due to supply air jet. Archimedes number also affects the heat
transfer between the air inside the conditioned space and the surrounding surfaces.
To avoid cold drafts in the occupied zone, the Archimedes number should not exceed
a maximum value, which depends on the room dimensions. Table 39.2 shows the
maximum Archimedes number values as a function of W/H ratio.
W/H
Armax

4.7

3.0

2.0

1.0

2000

3000

10000

11000

Table 39.2: Maximum recommended Archimedes number values to avoid draft

39.2.2. Deflection:
When an air stream strikes a solid surface such as a concrete beam or a wall,
it deflects. Again from comfort criteria, it is essential to ensure that due to deflection,
the supply air does not strike the occupants before it is diffused. Figure 39.1(b)
shows the deflection of a supply air jet as it strikes a solid beam.

39.3. Behaviour of free-stream jet:

The following aspects are important in understanding the behaviour of freestream jets:
Blow or throw:
It is the distance traveled by the air stream in horizontal direction on leaving
the supply air outlet and reaching a velocity of 0.25 m/s. The velocity should be
measured at a height of 1.8 m above the floor level. In air conditioning, the desirable
length of blow is upto 3/4th of the distance to the opposite side of the wall.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 6

Drop:
It is the vertical distance the air moves after leaving the supply outlet and
reaches the end of blow.
Figure 39.2 shows the meaning of drop and throw of free-stream jets.

1,8 m

Fig.39.2. Definition of drop and throw

Entrainment ratio:
As the high velocity jet (called as primary air) leaves the supply air outlet, it
entrains some amount of room air (called as secondary air). Entrainment gives rise
to motion of room air. The entrainment ratio at a distance x from the supply outlet is
defined as the ratio of volumetric flow rate of air at x to the volumetric flow rate of air
at the supply air outlet (x=0), i.e.,
Qx
(39.9)

Entrainment ratio at x,Rx =

Qx= 0

Spread:
It is the angle of divergence of the air stream after it leaves the supply air
outlet as shown in Fig.39.3. The spread can be both horizontal as well as vertical.
Vanes are normally used in the supply air outlets. These vanes can be straight,
converging or diverging. Figure 39.3 shows the outlet with diverging vanes, for which
the horizontal spread is 60o as shown in the figure. For straight vanes and
converging the spread is equal to 19o both in horizontal and vertical directions.
Converging vanes yield a blow that is about 15% longer than that of straight vanes,
whereas for diverging vanes it is about 50% less than that of horizontal vanes.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 7

Supply
Outle
air
t

Room
Fig.39
.3:
Sprea
d of
an air
jet
with
divergi
ng
vanes

39.4.
Circu
lar
jets:
A
n
unders
tandin
g
of
the
principl
e
of
the
simple
circular
jet can
be
used
to
unders
tand

the
charac
teristic
s
of
most
of the
comm
ercial
supply
air
diffuser
s and
grilles.
Figure
39.4
shows
the
airflow
pattern
in
a
circular
jet. As
shown
in the
figure,
supply
air
leaves
the
outlet
at
a
velocit
y
V o.
The
velocit
y
decays
as the
jet
enters
the
room
and
entrain
s the
room
air.
Figure
39.4
also
shows
the
velocit

y
profile.
It can
be
seen
that
the
velocit
y of air
varies
as
a
functio
n
of
distanc
e,
horizo
ntal x
from
the
openin
g
along
the
centerli
ne and
the
radial
distanc
e from
the
centerli
ne.
U
sing
the
mass
and
mome
ntum
balanc
e
equati
ons to
the
circular
jet, it
has
been
shown
by
Schlich
ting

that
the
velocit
y
profile
for the
circular
jet is
given
by:

r27/x22
V
(
x
,
r
)
=

39
where
Vo
is
the
velocit
y
at
the
outlet,
m/s;
V(x,r)
is the
velocit
y of air
in the
jet at x
and r,
and Ao
is the
crosssection
al area
of the
outlet.
From
the
above
equati
on it is
easy to
predict
that
the air
velocit
y in the
circular
jet
decrea
ses as
x and r
increas
e, and
as Ao
and Vo
decrea
se.
Thus a
jet
sustain
s
its
velocit
y
better

as the
velocit
y
at
the
supply
outlet
increas
es
and/or
the
area of
openin
g
increas
es.
One
can
also
deduc
e that
since
the
velocit
y
decrea
ses
with x
and r,
the jet
spread
s as it
flows,
so that
the
mass
of air is
always
conser
ved.
And
from
mome
ntum
conser
vation,
it can
be
deduc
ed that
entrain
ment
of
room

air
takes
place
as the
jet
moves
away
from
the
supply
air
outlet.

Versio
n1
ME, IIT
Kharag
pur 8

centreline
Fig.39.4:
Velocity
distribution
through a
circular jet
From Eqn.
(39.10), the
velocity of
air in the
circular jet
along the
centerline
(r=0) is
found to be:
V(
7.41
x,
r
=
0)
=

9. 1
From the
above
expression,
the
entrainment
ratio Rx for
the circular
jet can be
written as:

00

Qx=0

AoVo

V(x,r).
27tr.dr
= Qx
= r=0
=
0.405
x
(39.12)
^Ao

Larg
e
circular
openings
are
rarely
used
in
actual
air
distribution
systems as
they travel
long
distances
before
mixing with
room air. As
this
can
cause
discomfort
to
the
occupants,
normally
diffusers are
used
in
circular jets.
These
diffusers
provide
rapid
velocity
decay and
large
entrainment
.

39.5.
Rectang
ular jets:
Long
,
rectangular
grilles are
commonly
used
for
distributing
air
in
conditioned
space.
These
grilles can
be modeled
using
equations of
rectangular
jet. It has
been shown
that for a
rectangular
jet,
the
velocity
distribution
is given by:
2.4 1 7 (
0
VoV - .x 3
b
6 9
V
(x, t 7 .
y) =--------------------a
1
Vx
n
3
h
)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kha

where b is the width of the opening and y is the normal distance from the central
plane. A comparison between circular and rectangular jets shows that the centerline
velocity decreases more rapidly for a circular jet compared to a rectangular jet. The
rectangular jet entrains less air than a circular jet, as a result it decelerates more
slowly.

39.6. Types of air distribution devices:

Grilles and Registers: A grille is an outlet for supply air or an inlet for return air. A
register is a grille with a volume control damper. Figure 39.5 shows the front view of
a supply air grille with horizontal and vertical vanes. The vanes, either fixed or
adjustable are used for deflecting airflow. Grilles have a comparatively lower
entrainment ratio, greater drop, longer throw and higher air velocities in the occupied
zone compared to slot and ceiling diffusers. Manufacturers specify the performance
of the grill in terms of core size or core area, volumetric flow rate of air, effective air
velocity, total pressure drop, throw and noise levels. They can be mounted either on
the sidewalls or in the ceiling.

Vertical
Horizontal
vane
Core width (duct width)
z

1 11............................................................

_ -

-**

71

1 ,I

Duct
height

Frame
vane

Fig. 39.5. Front view of a supply air grille with horizontal and vertical vanes

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 10

Ceiling diffusers: A ceiling diffuser consists of concentric rings or inner cones made
up of vanes arranged in fixed directions. Ceiling diffusers can be round, square or
rectangular in shape. Figure 39.6 (a) shows square and rectangular ceiling diffuser,
and Fig. 39.6(b) shows a perforated diffuser. A square diffuser is widely used for
supply air. In the diffusers the supply air is discharged through the concentric air
passages in all directions. The air distribution pattern can be changed by adjusting
the adjustable inner cones or the deflecting vanes. Ceiling diffusers are normally
mounted at the center of the conditioned space. Ceiling diffusers provide large
entrainment ratio and shorter throw, hence are suitable for higher supply air
temperatures and for conditioned spaces with low head space. Ceiling diffusers can
deliver more air compared to grilles and slot diffusers.

Ceiling Fig.39.6(a): Schematic of a ceiling diff user

Neck

Adjustable vanes
"--.
v*E
in.
hole
Perforate
d panel

^m

SA^X

16

Perforated panel
Fig.39.6(b): Schematic of a perforated ceiling
diff user

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 11

Slot diffusers: A slot diffuser consists of a plenum box with single or multiple slots
and air deflecting vanes. These are mounted either on the side walls or in the ceiling.
Linear slot diffusers mounted on the sidewalls can be as long as 30 meters. These
are used for both supply air and return air. Linear slot diffusers are particularly
suitable for large open-spaces that require flexibility to suit changing occupant
distribution. Figures 39.7(a) and (b) show photograph of conditioned space with
linear slot diffusers mounted in the ceiling.
Slot
diffuser

Slot
diffuser

Fig.39.7(a) and (b): Photographs of conditioned space with linear slot

diffusers mounted in the ceiling
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 12

Light Troffer-Diffuser: A light troffer-diffuser combines a fluorescent light troffer and

a slot diffuser. The slot can be used either as supply air outlet or return air inlet. Light
troffer-diffusers offer the following advantages:
1893.
The luminous efficiency of fluorescent lamps can be increased by
maintaining lower air temperature in the light troffer
1894.
An integrated layout of light troffer, diffuser and return slots can be
formed on suspended ceilings
1895.

Improved aesthetics

1896.
A combination of light troffer and return slot reduces the space cooling
load as the return air absorbs a part of the heat emitted by the lights.
However, they should be designed such that the return air does not come in
direct contact with the tube so that deposition of dust on the fluorescent tube
is prevented
Figure 39.8 shows a light troffer-diffuser slot that combines the light troffer, supply air
diffuser and return air slot.

Fig.39.8: Light troffer-diffuser slot

In addition to the above air distribution devices, the floor mounted grilles
and diffusers, low-side wall diffusers, nozzle diffusers etc. are also used for
room air distribution.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 13

39.7. Return air inlets:

Different types of return air inlets are used to return the space air to the air
handling unit. Requirements of return air inlets are:
1897.

They should not lead to short-circuiting of supply air

1898.
Undesirable products such as tobacco smoke, odours etc. should be
able to move in their natural direction so that they do not stagnate in the
occupied space. To eliminate tobacco smoke, the return air inlets should be
placed high in the wall, whereas to remove dust particles etc. the return air
inlets should be placed in the floor so that these particles do not float in air.
Similar to supply air outlets, return air inlets can be classified as grilles, registers,
diffusers etc. In many commercial buildings the ceiling plenum is used as return air
plenum. In this case, return slots are used to draw the return air through the ceiling.
In return air inlets the air velocity decreases sharply as the distance from the inlet
increases. Based on noise criteria, the air velocity should be within 3 m/s if the return
air inlet is inside the occupied space and it should be less than 4 m/s if it is above the
occupied space.

39.8. Airflow patterns inside conditioned space:

In most of the air conditioned buildings air is supplied at a temperature
between 10 to 15.6oC and with a velocity in the range of 2 to 4 m/s. This air has to
mix thoroughly with the room air so that when it reaches the occupied zone its
temperature should be around 22.2 to 23.3oC and its velocity is less than 0.36 m/s to
avoid draft. The mixing airflow patterns should have the following characteristics:
1899.
Entrainment of room air to reduce the air temperature and velocity in
the occupied zone to acceptable levels
1900.
Reverse air stream in the occupied zone for an even velocity and
temperature distribution
1901.
Minimization of stagnant areas in the occupied space. A stagnant area
is zone in which the natural convective currents prevail and the velocity is less
than about 0.1 m/s. Reverse air stream reduces the stagnant areas in the
occupied zone
The airflow pattern in the conditioned space is influenced mainly by the type and
location of supply air outlets. The high side outlets, ceiling diffusers and slot diffusers
are most commonly used in air conditioned buildings.
Figure 39.9 shows the airflow pattern using high side outlets installed on a
high sidewall for cooling and heating applications. As the air is discharged from the
high side outlet, due to surface effect (Coanda effect) the air jet tends to stick to the
ceiling as shown in the figure. For cooling applications, the cold supply air entrains
the room air and deflects downwards when it strikes the opposite wall. The reverse
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 14

air stream formed due to entrainment fills the occupied space as shown. If the throw
is longer than the length of the room and height of the opposite wall, then the air jet
is deflected by the opposite wall and the floor and enters the occupied zone with high
velocity. On the other hand if the throw is too small, then the air jet drops directly into
the occupied zone before it strikes the opposite wall. Thus both these i.e, a very long
or very short throw can cause draft. For heating, a stagnant zone may form as
shown due to buoyancy effect. However, if the throw is long, the reverse flow can
minimize the stagnant area during heating. For high sidewall outlet, the most suitable
location for return air inlet is on the ceiling outside the air jet as shown in the figure.

Total air = Primary air + room air

Return
Vertical
air nlet
spread

Tota?
Reverse
airstream

CoJd
draft

"*, - >

tiT

t^

Primary air
envelope

"v
;

AAAAAAAAA f

Stagnant

Or
IT3

nj

Supply
outlet
Reverse
airstream

\T

Cooling End
view
Cooling
Plan view

Heating
Fig.39.9: Airflow pattern using high side outlets for cooling and heating
applications
Figure 39.10 shows the airflow pattern using ceiling diffusers for both cooling
and heating applications. It is seen that ceiling diffusers produce a shorter throw, a
lower and more even distribution of air velocity and a more even temperature in the
occupied zone when used for cooling. However, when used for heating it is seen that
a larger stagnant area is formed due to buoyancy effect. Ceiling diffusers are widely

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 15

used for conditioned spaces with limited ceiling height and are designed to have a
large entrainment ratio and are widely used in variable air volume systems.

Square ceiling
diffuser

Cooling
End view

Reverse
air stream

Cooling
Side view

Fig.39.10: Airflow pattern using ceiling diffusers for cooling and

heating applications
Figure 39.11 shows the airflow patters obtained using slot diffusers installed in
the ceiling in the perimeter and interior zones. The slot diffusers installed in the
perimeter zone discharge air vertically downwards and also in the horizontal
direction. Due to its better surface effect, the air jet remains in contact with the ceiling
for a longer period and the reverse air stream ensures uniformity of temperature and
velocity in the occupied zone. Due to their superior characteristics and better
aesthetics, slot diffusers are widely used in large office spaces with normal ceiling
heights and with VAV systems.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 16

Fig.39.11: Airflow pattern for cooling using slot diffusers

39.9: Stratified mixing flow:

In buildings with a high ceiling, it is more economical to stratify the conditioned
space into a stratified upper zone and a cooled lower zone. In such cases the supply
air outlet is located at the upper boundary of the cooled lower zone and the air jet is
projected horizontally. The cold air supply takes care of the cooling load in the lower
zone due to windows, walls, occupants and equipment. Radiant heat from the roof,
upper external walls and lights installed in the roof enter the occupied zone and are
converted into cooling load with a thermal lag.
Stratified mixing flow for summer cooling offers the following advantages:
1902.
Convective heat transfer from the hot roof is effectively blocked by the
higher temperature air in the stagnant upper zone thus reducing the building
cooling load
1903.
Location of the return air inlets affects the cooling load only when they
are located in the upper zone

39.10: Cold air distribution:

When chilled water is available at a lower temperature of about 1 to 2 oC (e.g.
using an ice storage system), the supply air temperature can be reduced to about
4.4 to 7.2oC, instead of the usual temperature of about 13oC. Such a system is called
a cold air distribution system. These systems offer the following advantaged when
compared with the conventional systems:
a) Due to the lower dew-point temperature, the space humidity can be maintained
between 35 to 45 %, as a result the occupied space can be maintained at a
slightly higher temperature without causing discomfort

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 17

1904.
Due to the lower supply temperature, the flow rate of supply air can be
reduced significantly leading to smaller ducts and hence smaller building
space requirement and associated benefits
1905.
Due to lower flow rates, fan power consumption can be reduced by as
much as 40 percent
1906.
Noise levels in the conditioned space can be reduced due to reduced
flow rates
However, due to considerably reduced airflow rates, the air distribution and IAQ
may get affected, especially when using with VAV systems. Better insulation and
sealing of the ducts may be required to reduce losses and prevent surface
condensation.

39.11: Displacement flow:

Displacement flow is a flow pattern in which cold supply air supplied at a
velocity that is almost equal to the velocity in the conditioned zone and a
temperature that is only slightly lower than the occupied zone, enters the occupied
zone and displaces the original space air with a piston like motion without mixing
with the room air. Displacement flow when designed properly, provides better Indoor
Air Quality (IAQ) with lower turbulent intensity and lower draft in the occupied zone.
Displacement flow can be classified into downward unidirectional flow and horizontal
unidirectional flow. Figures 39.12(a), (b) and (c) shows the schematic of a downward
unidirectional flow system, a horizontal unidirectional flow system and a
unidirectional flow system for work stations, respectively. As mentioned before, due
to the possibility of achieving superior IAQ, displacement flow systems are used
widely in clean rooms, in operation theatres etc. Previously, displacement flow was
known as laminar flow. However, in an air conditioned building with forced air
circulation, the air flow in the occupied zone is turbulent everywhere except in the
boundary layers near the walls (where the flow is laminar), even when the velocities
are very low (Reynolds number is usually greater than 10000).

39.12. Spot cooling/heating:

In these systems cold or warm air jet is projected directly into a part of the
occupied zone, often called as target zone, so that thermal environment can be
controlled locally. Spot cooling/heating offers several advantages such as:
1907.
Better control of temperature, air purity and movement in a localized
area, thus improving the thermal comfort of the occupants
1908.
Possibility of using greater outdoor air for ventilation
1909.
Highly localized loads can be handled very efficiently
1910.
Occupants have greater control of their own personalized environment
However spot cooling/heating have certain disadvantages such as: possibility
of draft, discomfort due to air jet pressure, limited area of environment control and a
complex air distribution system. Spot cooling systems can be classified into industrial
spot cooling systems and desktop task air conditioning systems. As the name
implies, industrial spot cooling systems are used in large industrial areas such as

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 18

large machine shops, steel plants etc. Desktop task air conditioning systems find
application in large office buildings.

Fig.39.12(a): Downward unidirectional flow

Fig.39.12(c): Unidirectional flow for work stations

Fig.39.12(b): Horizontal unidirectional flow

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 19

39.13. Selection of supply air outlets:

Selection depends on:
1911.
Requirement of indoor environment control: If the indoor
environment requires controlled air movement, then a high side outlet should
not be used
1912.
Shape, size and ceiling height of the building: Ceiling and slot
diffusers are ideal for buildings with limited ceiling height. For large buildings
with large ceiling heights, high side wall mounted outlets are recommended.
1913.
Volume flow rate per unit floor area: Sidewall outlets are limited to low
specific volume flow rates as they give rise to higher air velocities in the
occupied zone. Compared to slot diffusers, the ceiling diffusers can handle
efficiently a larger volumetric flow rates. Table 39.3 shows the specific volume
flow rate of different outlets
1914.
Volume flow rate per outlet: The volume flow rate per supply outlet
depends on the throw required to provide a satisfactory room air distribution.
For linear slot diffusers, the volume flow rate per unit length is important. Its
value normally lies between 23 to 62 L/s.m for linear slot diffusers. In a closed
office with a floor area of about 14 m2 and only one external wall, one ceiling
diffuser is normally sufficient
1915.
Throw: High side wall outlets have a longer throw than ceiling diffusers.
Square ceiling diffusers and circular ceiling diffusers have similar throw
1916.

Noise level

1917.
Total pressure drop: The total pressure loss of supply air as it flows
through a slot diffuser of 19 mm width is normally between 12 to 50 Pascals,
whereas it is between 5 to 50 Pascals for ceiling diffuser. Normally the
pressure loss across the supply outlet should not exceed 50 Pascals
1918.
Cost and Appearance: Finally the cost and appearance of the supply
air outlets also have to be considered depending upon the specific application
Performance of various types of supply air outlets are provided by the
manufacturers in the form of tables and charts, using which one can select a
suitable supply air outlet.
Type of outlet
Grilles
Slot diffuser
Perforated Panel
Ceiling diffuser

Specific volume flow rate

L/s/m2 of floor area
3.0 to 6.0
4.0 to 20.0
4.5 to 15.0
4.5 to 25.0

Max. ACH for 3-m

ceiling
7
12
18
30

Table 39.3: Specific volume flow rates of different outlet devices

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 20

Questions and answers:

1. State which of the following statements are TRUE?
1919. The purpose of an air distribution system is to maintain comfort conditions in
the entire conditioned space
1920. The purpose of an air distribution system is to maintain comfort conditions in
the occupied zone of the conditioned space
1921. The effective draft temperature depends on dry bulb temperature and relative
humidity of air
1922. The effective draft temperature depends on dry bulb temperature and velocity
of air
Ans.: b) and d)
2. State which of the following statements are TRUE?
1923. The effective draft temperature increases as dry bulb temperature and air
velocity increase
1924. The effective draft temperature increases as dry bulb temperature increases
and air velocity decreases
1925. A good air distribution system should yield high value of ADPI and a small
value of SDEF
1926. A good air distribution system should yield high values of both ADPI and
SDEF
Ans.: b) and d)
3. State which of the following statements are TRUE?
1927. Due to buoyancy effect a cold air stream rises and a hot air stream drops
1928. The buoyancy effects become stronger as the temperature difference between
the supply air and room air increases
1929. A high Archimedes number indicates a strong buoyancy effect
d) The design Archimedes number should increase as the height of the room
decreases
Ans.: b) and c)
4. State which of the following statements are TRUE?
1930. The centerline velocity of air from a circular jet increases as the distance from
the outlet increases
1931. The centerline velocity of air from a circular jet increases as the outlet area
decreases
1932. The centerline velocity of air from a circular jet increases as the supply air
velocity at the outlet increases
1933. All of the above
Ans.: c)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 21

5. State which of the following statements are TRUE?

1934. Compared to other outlet types, a grille has lower entrainment ratio and
greater drop
1935. Ceiling diffusers are recommended when the ceiling height is high
1936. Sidewall diffusers are generally used in large spaces
1937. All of the above
Ans.: a) and c)
6. State which of the following statements are TRUE?
1938. A light-troffer-diffuser-slot improves the efficiency of the fluorescent lights
1939. A light-troffer-diffuser-slot reduces the room sensible heat factor
1940. To eliminate tobacco smoke, return air inlets should be located at a lower
height on the wall
1941. Design of return air inlet is important from noise point-of-view
Ans.: a), b) and d)
7. State which of the following statements are TRUE?
1942.
1943.
1944.
1945.

Stratified mixing flows are recommended for buildings with high ceilings
Stratified mixing flow reduces the radiant heat load from the ceilings
Cold air distribution systems reduce the space requirement and fan power
Cold air distribution systems may lead to surface condensation

Ans.: a), c) and d)

8. State which of the following statements are TRUE?
1946. Displacement flows are recommended in operation theatres due to better IAQ
1947. In displacement flow system, supply air temperature is only slightly different
from comfort temperature
1948. In displacement flow system, supply air velocity is low
1949. All of the above
Ans.: d)
9. State which of the following statements are TRUE?
1950.
1951.
1952.
1953.

Spot cooling and heating systems are widely used in industrial applications
Spot cooling and heating systems provide better individual control
Spot cooling and heating systems reduce the total cooling load
All of the above

Ans.: d)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 22

10. The following table shows the measurements made at 9 points in the occupied
zone of an air conditioned building. Evaluate the design of the air distribution system.
Measuring point

DBT (oC)

Air velocity (m/s)

EDT (oC)

1.

21.1

0.30

-3.32

2.

21.7

0.25

-2.71

3.

22.5

0.20

-1.91

4.

23.5

0.21

-0.91

5.

24.1

0.10

-0.29

6.

24.7

0.08

+0.31

7.

23.7

0.11

-0.69

8.

22.8

0.19

-1.61

9.

22.0

0.24

-2.41

Ans.: From the DBT and air velocity (V) data, the Effective Draft Temperature (EDT)
for each point is calculated using the equation:
EDT = (DBT-24.4) - 0.1276(V - 0.15)
The calculated EDT values are shown in the table. It is seen from the table
that the EDT value varies widely from -3.31oC to +0.3oC, indicating improper
distribution.
For this space the Air Distribution Performance Index (ADPI) is calculated
using the equation:
ADPI

x100 =

v9v

x100 = 55.6

(Ans.)

where N is the number of locations at which the effective draft temperature is within
1.7oC to +1.1oC.
An ADPI value of 55.6 indicates the need for improving the design of the air
distribution system, as it indirectly indicates that only about 56% of the occupied
zone meets the comfort criteria, whereas the remaining space gives rise to drafts.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 23

11. The velocity of air issuing from a circular opening is given by the following
equation:
7.41VoA/Ao
V(x,r) =--------------------------^2 / x
1 + 57.5 / 2
Vr x
where Vo is the velocity at supply air outlet (x=0), Ao is the area of the opening, r is
the radial distance from the centerline and V(x,r) is the velocity at point (x,r). An
airflow rate of 0.12 m3/s is supplied through a circular opening at a velocity of 3 m/s.
Find the distance from the outlet at which the centerline velocity reduces to 1 m/s.
What is the total airflow rate (primary + secondary) at this point?
Ans.: The expression for centerline velocity (r=0,x) is given by:
7.41 Vo JAo
V(x,r = 0) =-----------------x
Area of the opening, Ao = Qo/Vo = 0.12/3 = 0.04 m2
Substituting the values of V(x,r=0) = 1 m/s, Vo = 3 m/s and Ao = 0.04 m2 in the
above expression, we find the value of x as:
7.41VoJAo
7.41x3x^0.04
x =------------------=----------------------= 4.446 m
V(x,r = 0)
1.0

(Ans.)

The total airflow rate at x = 4.446 m is obtained from the equation:

Qx = 4.446 m = Qx=0.Rx

Where Rx is the entrainment ratio, given by:

00

|V(x,r).27rr.dr
R = Qx=4.446 = r=0___________= 0.405 x = 0.405 x 4.446
Qx=0
AoVo
^Ao
V0.04
hence, Qx = 4.446 = Qx=0 x 9.0 = 0.12 x 9.0 = 1.08 m3/s

90

(Ans.)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 24

12. The velocity distribution of air from an air jet issued from a long, narrow slot is
given by the following equation:
2.4VoVb
x 7.67
V (x, y) =------^
1-tanh2

x
vx
where Vo is the velocity at supply air outlet (x=0), b is the width of the slot, y is the
normal distance from the central plane and V(x,y) is the velocity at point (x,y). Find
the ratio of velocity V(x,y) to V(x,y=0) at a plane x at which the spread angle is 19o.

V(x,y)

y
2

_x_

Supply air

Definition of spread angle (2)

Ans.: The spread angle is given by 2 as shown in the figure given above.
From the figure,
= tan-1(y/x) = (19/2) = 9.5o
at = 9.5o, (y/x) = tan(9.5) = 0.1673
From the expression for V(x,y);
V(x,y)
=
V(x,y = 0)

1-tanh2

7.67

= [1-tanh2(7.67x0.1673)]=0 265

(Ans.)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 25

Lesson
40
Ventilation For Cooling
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 1

The specific objectives of this chapter are to:

1. Discuss the use of ventilated air for cooling of buildings and cooling of occupants
(Section 40.1)
2. Make a comparison between natural ventilation and mechanical ventilation
(Section 40.2)
1954. Discuss characteristics of natural ventilation and estimation of airflow rate due
to wind and stack effects (Section 40.3)
1955. List the general guidelines for natural ventilation (Section 40.4)
1956. Discuss briefly forced ventilation using electric fans (Section 40.5)
1957. Discuss interior air movement using interior fans, unit ventilators, whole house
fans and solar chimneys (Section 40.6)
At the end of the lecture, the student should be able to:
1958. Discuss the effectiveness of ventilated air for cooling of buildings and
occupants
1959. Compare natural ventilation with mechanical ventilation
1960. Estimate airflow rates due to wind effect and stack effect and combined wind
and stack effects
1961. List the general guidelines for natural ventilation
1962. Discuss the benefits of mechanical ventilation using fans
1963. Discuss the benefits of interior air movement and ways and means of
achieving interior air movement such as the use of fans, ventilators, solar chimneys
etc.

40.1. Introduction:
In a previous chapter, ventilation has been defined as supply of fresh air to
the conditioned space either by natural or by mechanical means for the purpose of
maintaining acceptable indoor air quality. However, when outdoor conditions are
suitable, the ventilation can also be used for cooling of the buildings, for cooling of
the occupants or both.
40.1.1. Ventilation for cooling of buildings:
When the ambient dry bulb temperature is lower than the building
temperature, then the outdoor air can be used for cooling the building. Normally due
to solar and internal heat gains, buildings can become hotter than the ambient air.
This provides an opportunity for cooling the building at least partly, by using the
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 2

freely available outdoor air. This can significantly reduce the load on air conditioning
plants. Though the cooling of buildings during daytime may not be possible on all
days, in an year there are many days during which outdoor air can act as a heat sink
for the building. Greater opportunities exist for cooling the buildings especially during
the night, when the outdoor air is considerably cooler. This is especially effective for
hot and dry climates where the diurnal temperature variation is quite large.
40.1.2. Ventilation for cooling of occupants:
Under certain circumstances, outdoor air can also be used very effectively for
cooling the occupants of a building directly. By allowing the outdoor air to flow over
the body at a higher velocity, it is possible to enhance the heat and mass transfer
rates from the body, thus leading to a greater feeling of comfort. As a thumb rule,
studies show that each increase in air velocity by 0.15 m/s will allow the conditioned
space temperature to be increased by 1 oC. As mentioned before, maintaining the
conditioned space at a higher temperature can give rise to significant reduction in the
energy consumption of the air conditioning system. However, in general the air
velocity if it exceeds about 1.0 m/s may give rise to a feeling of draft or irritation to
the occupants.
The cooling effect provided by ventilated outdoor air is mainly sensible in
nature, even though, it may also extract latent heat from the occupants if it is cool
and dry. The sensible cooling rate provided by the outdoor air Qv is given by:
.

Qv =mv .cp (Tex -To )

(40.1)

where mv is the mass flow rate of ventilated air, To and Tex are the temperature of
the outdoor air and temperature of the exhaust air (after cooling), respectively.

40.2. Natural versus mechanical ventilation:

As the name implies, if ventilation is provided by natural means such as the
wind or stack effects (i.e. due to temperature difference), then it is called as natural
ventilation. If ventilation is provided by using mechanical means such as fans and
blowers, then it is called as mechanical ventilation.
Ideally, natural ventilation should be used whenever possible. It is considered
as the first line of defense against summer heat. However, relying only on natural
ventilation for cooling either buildings and/or occupants may not always be possible
or it may impose severe restrictions upon building design. This is due to the
uncertain nature of natural ventilation, which depends on outdoor conditions such as
the wind and ambient temperatures two highly variable parameters.
Mechanical ventilation though requires external power input, extends the
application of ventilation for cooling. It is also highly controllable and is available as
and when required (of course, subject to the availability of electricity) with a relatively
small expense of electrical energy. Thus a sensible building design must be such
that it makes use of both natural and mechanical ventilation in an optimum manner.
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 3

40.3. Natural ventilation:

The principle of natural ventilation is very well known and is widely studied.
Most of the older buildings before the advent of electricity relied on natural ventilation
for maintaining comfortable conditions. However, as mentioned before relying only
on natural ventilation imposes several restrictions on building design. For example,
windows on opposite walls have to be provided to all the rooms to meet natural
ventilation requirements. As a result, large buildings have to be designed in simple
T-, L- or H- shapes. The ceiling height has to be high to improve natural ventilation
etc. In addition to this, the amount of airflow due to natural ventilation is also
uncertain as it depends on:
1964.
1965.
1966.
1967.
1968.
1969.

Magnitude and direction of prevailing winds

Ambient air temperature
Landscaping and adjacent structures
Design of the building and position of windows, doors etc.
Location of furniture
Movement of the occupants, etc.

Due to its uncertain nature, natural ventilation is treated as a secondary

objective in the design of modern buildings. Natural ventilation, as discussed in an
earlier chapter depends on wind effect and stack effect.
40.3.1. Wind induced, natural ventilation:
When wind blows over a building, a static pressure difference is created over
the surface of the building. The pressure difference depends on the wind speed,
wind direction, surface orientation and surrounding structures. As shown in Fig.40.1,
in an undisturbed air stream, the pressure is positive on the windward direction and
negative on the leeward direction. The static pressure on the other surfaces depends
upon the angle of attack. This pressure is called as wind pressure. In general, the
magnitude of the wind pressure (P w) is proportional to the velocity pressure, and in
an ideal case it is given by:

Pw =Cp

Vw2
2

(40.2)

where Cp is surface pressure coefficient, is the air density and Vw is the wind
speed. The value of Cp depends on several factors such as the wind direction,
orientation of the building etc. Analytical evaluation of C p is quite complicated, even
though these values have been measured experimentally for simple structures.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 4

-ve+ve
Leeward
pressure
side

Windward
side
Fig.4
0.1:
Wind
press
ure
on a
buildi
ng
The pressure
difference
across
the building due to
wind
creates
a
potential for airflow
through
the
building, if openings
are available on the
building. The airflow
rates through the
buildings due to
wind effect can be
obtained
approximately using
the
equation
suggested
by
ASHRAE:
.

Qw =
C.R.A.Vw
(40.3)
.

Where Qw is the
airflow rate in m3/s,
A is the area of
opening (m2), C is
a constant that
takes the value of
0.55
for

perpendicular
winds and 0.30 for
oblique winds, and
R is a factor that is
function of inlet and
outlet areas (Ai and
Ao) of the openings.
The factor R varies
from 1.0 to about
1.38
depending
upon the ratio of
inlet and outlet
areas.
Estimation of
wind
speed
is
difficult,
however,
data provided by
the meteorological
departments can be
used for calculation
purposes. Since the
wind speed varies
with season, for
design calculations
50 percent of the
summer
wind
speed as provided
by
the
meteorological data
can be used.
Since
the
airflow rate due to
wind effect is a
strong function of
the
opening
or
window
area,
suitable
values
should be used for
design calculations.
The areas to be
used
in
the
calculations are the
net free area of the
openings, not the
total opening areas.
The distribution of
opening
areas
between inlet and
outlet
is
also
important.
It
is

shown that the flow

rate is maximum
when the inlet area
is equal to the
outlet area. When
inlet and outlet
areas
are
not
equal, an effective
area has to be used
in Eqn.(40.3). It is
given by:
( ) 0 . 5
Aeff =
(40.4)

Ao /Ai

(A
)
When outlet
area is greater than
the inlet area (Ao >
Ai), then greater
speeds
are
obtained at the inlet
compared to the
outlets and vice
versa.
Thus
manipulating

Version 1 ME, IIT

Kharagpur 5

+Ai2

the areas, for example by opening or closing some windows, it is possible to achieve
higher velocities in certain areas compared to others.
The shape of the window also plays role, if the wind is not perpendicular. For
oblique winds, short and wide windows provide better airflow compared to square or
narrow and tall windows. In general any window treatment such as curtains, blinds
etc. reduce the airflow rate due to wind effect. Architectural features such as
overhangs, balconies can be used beneficially to improve the airflow due to wind
effect.
40.3.2. Ventilation due to stack effect:
When there is a temperature difference between the indoor and outdoor,
airflow takes place due to buoyancy or stack effect. During winter, the indoor air is
generally warmer compared to outdoor air, as a result, if there are openings in the
building, then warm air inside the building rises due to buoyancy and leaves from the
openings provided at the top, while cold outdoor air enters into the building through
the openings near the base of the building. The reverse happens during summer,
when inside is cooler compared to outside, warm outdoor air enters the building from
the top openings and cold indoor air leaves the building from the bottom openings.
Generally, due to stack effect, in a building at a particular height, the internal and
external pressures become equal. This height is known as Neutral Pressure Level
(NPL). Obviously, if openings are provided at the NPL, then no airflow takes place
due to stack effect. Knowledge of NPL thus is useful in enhancing airflow due to
stack effect. However, estimation of NPL is extremely difficult as it depends on
several factors such as distribution of the openings, the resistance of the openings to
airflow, the resistance to vertical airflow within the building etc. In an ideal case,
when the openings are uniformly distributed and there is no internal resistance to
vertical airflow, the NPL is at a mid-height of the building. A large number of
theoretical and experimental studies have been carried out to estimate NPL for a
wide variety of buildings. In general these studies show that for tall buildings, the
NPL lies between 0.3 to 0.7 times the total building height.
ASHRAE suggests the following equation for estimating airflow rate due to
stack effect:
(

h.T/.
/

(40.5)

w)

In the above expression, h is the height difference between the inlet and exit in m, T w
is the warm air temperature in K, T is the temperature difference between warm
and cold air, A is the free area of the inlets or outlets in m 2 and C is a constant that
takes a value of 0.0707 when inlets and outlets are optimal (about 65% effective)
and 0.054 when inlets or outlets are obstructed (about 50% effective). From the
above equation, it can be seen that compared to the height h and temperature
difference T, the airflow rate due to stack effect depends more strongly on the area
of the openings.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 6

40.3.4: Natural ventilation due to combined wind and stack effects:

Complications arise when it is required to estimate the airflow rate due to the
combined effects of wind and stack effects. Generally, the total airflow rate has to be
obtained using the combined pressure difference due to wind and stack effect, and
not by adding up airflow rates due to stack effect and wind effect separately. This is
due to the non-linear dependence of flow rate on pressure difference across the
openings. In general, taller the building with small internal resistance, stronger will be
the stack effect, and higher the area of exposure of the building, stronger will be the
wind effect. Several models have been proposed to estimate the airflow rate due to
combined effects of wind and stack. For example, one such model uses the equation
given below for estimating the total airflow rate due to stack and wind effects.
Qtotal

Qw2+Qst2

(40.6)

40.4. Guidelines for natural ventilation:

As far as possible, the following guidelines should be followed for getting the
maximum benefit from natural ventilation for cooling of the building and occupants:
1970.
In hot and humid climates, maximize air velocities in the occupied zone
for body cooling, while, in hot and dry climates, maximize the airflow
throughout the building for structural cooling, especially during the nights.
1971.
The buildings should be shaped such that the maximum surface area is
exposed to the external winds.
1972.
Locate the windows suitably. Windows on opposite walls increase the
airflow rate, while windows on the adjacent walls provide airflow over a
greater area.
1973.
In buildings with only one external wall, higher airflow rates are
obtained by two widely spaced windows.
1974.
The windows should be placed as far as possible from the NPL to
maximize stack effect.
1975.
Wide and short windows are generally better than square or vertical
windows as they provide higher airflow over a wider range of wind directions.
1976.
Windows should be accessible to and operable by the occupants for
greater control of natural ventilation.

40.5. Forced ventilation using electric fans:

As mentioned before, compared to natural ventilation, the use of fans for
providing ventilation offers greater flexibility and control. Ventilation using electric
fans is less sensitive to outdoor conditions, and hence is more certain. In general,
depending upon the specific design, the fan-assisted ventilation can aid or oppose
the natural ventilation. Obviously if the aim is to use outdoor air for cooling, then the
design should be such that the mechanical and natural ventilations complement
each other, rather than oppose. In general, the fan power consumption is quiet small
and can be estimated using the equation:

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 7

fan

Qfan .P

Wfan Il

(40.7)

fan

where
Wfan is
the
power
consu
mption
of the
fan in
Watts,
Qfanis
the
airflow
rate
provid
ed by
the
fan in
m3/s,
APfan
is the
pressu
re rise
due to
fan in
Pascal
s and
r|fan is
the
efficie
ncy of
the
fan.
The
efficie
ncy of
the
fan
may
vary
from
about
0.35
for
small
shade
d
pole,
singlephase
motor

temperat
ure (in
fact they
may
slightly
increase
the
temperat
ure as
the work
input to
fan
is
dissipate
d
as
heat),
40.6. they
may
Interi certainly
or air provide
mov comfort
by
eme significa
ntly
nt:
enhanci
I ng the
nterior convecti
ve heat
fans
such and
as the mass
ceiling transfer
coefficie
or
pedest nts
al fans between
the air
can
remov and the
e heat body.
However
from
,
they
the
may
be
occup
ants, objectio
but not nable
sometim
from
es
as
the
buildin they
may
gs.
Thoug create
excessiv
h
air
interior e
velocity
fans
do not and/or
decrea noise.
se the
B
indoor
oth
air
(^1/6
HP) to
about
0.85
for
large,
threephase
motors
of
about
5 HP
capaci
ty.

ceiling
and
pedes
tal
type
fans
can
be
very
effecti
ve
and
can
even
substit
ute
the air
conditi
oning
syste
m, or
at
least
partly
offset
the air
conditi
oning
load.
In
gener
al,
larger
fans
provid
e
higher
airflow
rates
with
less
noise.
The
followi
ng
table
gives
an
exam
ple of
the
recom
mend
ed

blade
diamet
er of a
ceiling
fan for
area
served
:

a
m
e
t
e
r
b
a
s
Area served,ft
e
d
o
n
a
r
e
T
a
a
s
b
e
l
r
e
v
e
4
d
0
.
G
1
enerally
:
for best
perform
R
ance, a
e
ceiling
cfan
oshould
mbe
mplaced
esuch
nthat the
dblade
eheight is
dabout 7
to 8 feet
cfrom the
efloor and
i there
l should
i be
a
nminimu
gm gap of
1 to 2
f feet
abetween
nthe
ceiling
dand the
i blades.

S
tudies
show
that by
using
ceiling
fans in
combi
nation
with
air
conditi
oning
syste
ms,
the
therm
ostat
setting
can be
raised
from
about
25oC
to
about
29
-30oC.
It
is
report
ed
that
this
can
reduc
e the
energ
y
consu
mption
by as
much
as 30
to
45%.
This is
particu
larly
suitabl
e
in
areas
with
high
humidi

ty as ators
the
are
ceiling installed
fan
in attic
can
spaces.
enhan They
ce the draw the
dehum cold air
idificati from the
on
outside
rate. and
Thus simultan
an
eously
intellig exhaust
ent
the hot
combi and
nation humid
of air indoor
conditi air
oning collected
syste near the
ms
attic.
with
These
interior attic
fans
ventilato
can
rs
are
provid normally
e
actuated
substa by a
ntial
saving
Version
s.
1 ME,
I
IIT
n
Kharagp
additio
ur 8
n
to
fans, a
wide
variety
of
device
s are
used
in
practic
e
to
improv
e
interna
l
air
circula
tion.
Attic
ventil

thermostat, which turns the ventilator on when the attic air temperature exceeds a
cut-in point of say 40oC and turns off the ventilator when the attic temperature drops
to a cut-out temperature of say 9 oC. A whole-house fan simultaneously provides
outdoor air to the occupied zone and removes hot and humid air from the attic
space.
In some houses, solar chimneys are used to boost the ventilation due to
stack effect. A solar chimney is basically a passive solar air heater installed normally
on the roof, with its inlet connected to the interior of the house. Figure 40.2 shows
the schematic of a solar chimney. Due to solar heating, the air in the solar chimney
gets heated up and flows out to be replaced continuously by air from the interior.
This induces flow of outdoor air into the building. Thus a continuous air movement
can be obtained by using solar radiation. Though solar chimneys appear to be
simple, optimized design of solar chimney could be complicated due to the effect of
wind. The wind may assist the flow of air due to solar chimney or it could oppose the
flow. In a worst case, due to the wind effect, the flow direction could get reversed,
resulting in the entry of heated outdoor air into the building through the solar
chimney. Keeping the solar chimney on the leeward direction, can prevent the flow
reversal.
Solar radiation
Air outlet "
Solar chimney
Air inlet;

Outdoor air

Outdoor
-air

Fig.40.2: Schematic of a solar chimney

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 9

Questions and answers:

1. State which of the following statements are TRUE?
1977. Ventilated outdoor air can be used for cooling of the buildings throughout the
year in all locations
1978. Ventilated outdoor air can be used for cooling of the buildings during many
days of the year in most of the locations
1979. Ventilated air has greater potential for cooling of buildings in hot and humid
areas
1980. Ventilated air has greater potential for cooling of buildings in hot and dry areas
Ans.: b) and d)
2. State which of the following statements are TRUE?
a) Ventilated outdoor air can extract both sensible and latent heat from the
occupants
1981. Increased air motion due to ventilated air increases the convective heat and
mass transfer coefficients between the human body and surrounding air
1982. Ventilated outdoor air can also enhance radiant heat transfer from the body
1983. All of the above
Ans.: a) and b)
3. State which of the following statements are TRUE?
1984. Natural ventilation is preferable to mechanical ventilation as it is more
effective in the cooling of buildings and occupants
1985. Natural ventilation is preferable to mechanical ventilation as it does not rely on
external power input such as electricity
1986. Mechanical ventilation offers greater flexibility and control compared to natural
ventilation
1987. Natural ventilation is highly uncertain as it depends on external elements
which cannot be controlled
Ans.: b), c) and d)
4. State which of the following statements are TRUE?
1988. Due to wind effect, outdoor air enters the building from openings provided on
the windward direction and leaves from openings provided on the leeward direction
1989. Due to wind effect, outdoor air enters the building from openings provided on
the leeward direction and leaves from openings provided on the windward direction
1990. Wind effect is a strong function of air density and wind speed
1991. Wind effect is a strong function of area of openings and wind speed
Ans.: a) and d)

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 10

5. State which of the following statements are TRUE?

1992.
1993.
1994.
air
1995.

Stack effect takes place when outdoor air is warmer than indoor air
Stack effect takes place when outdoor air is cooler than indoor air
Stack effect depends on temperature difference between indoor and outdoor
Stack effect does not depend on building height

Ans.: c)
6. State which of the following statements are TRUE?
1996. Due to stack effect, in winter outdoor air enters from openings provided at the
base of the building and leaves from the openings provided at the top
1997. Due to stack effect, in winter, outdoor air enters from openings provided at the
top of the building and leaves from the openings provided at the bottom
1998. Due to stack effect, in summer, outdoor air enters from openings provided at
the base of the building and leaves from the openings provided at the top
b) Due to stack effect, in summer, outdoor air enters from openings provided at the
top of the building and leaves from the openings provided at the bottom
Ans.: a) and d)
7. State which of the following statements are TRUE?
1999. For effective utilization of outdoor air, both natural and mechanical ventilation
should be used in a building
2000. Design of windows and other openings in the buildings plays a major role in
natural ventilation
2001. For maximum airflow rate, the openings should be as close to the neutral
pressure level as possible
2002. All of the above
Ans.: a) and b)
8. State which of the following statements are TRUE?
2003. Ceiling fans provide greater comfort by reducing the temperature of air in the
buildings
2004. Ceiling fans provide greater comfort by increasing the temperature of air in the
buildings
2005. Ceiling fans provide greater comfort by increasing the heat and mass transfer
rates from the body to the surroundings
2006. Ceiling fans can be used for cooling of the buildings also
Ans.: c)
9. State which of the following statements are TRUE?
a) By improving the internal air movement, the energy consumption of the air
conditioning system can be reduced substantially
Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 11

2007. By increasing air movement, the thermostat of the air conditioning system can
be set at a lower temperature
2008. By increasing air movement, the thermostat of the air conditioning system can
be set at a higher temperature
2009. Solar chimneys are ideal under all conditions
Ans.: a) and c)
10. A building consists of a 1.5 m x 1.5 m window on the wall facing the wind and an
opening of 1.5m x 1.0 m on the opposite window. The center-to-centre distance
between the windows in the vertical direction is 2.5 m. The outdoor temperature is
313 K, while the indoor is maintained at 303 K. Calculate the airflow rate due to the
combined effect of wind and stack effects, if the wind blows at a speed of 25 kmph.
Ans.: a) Airflow rate due to wind effect: The expression to be used is:

Qw = C.R.A.Vw
Take the value of C as 0.55 for perpendicular wind and a value of 1.18 for R (based
on the ratio of areas of openings)
The effective area of openings is given by:
( Ao /Ai )
Aeff =
(Ao2 + Ai2)

(1.5x1.0/1.5x1.5)
=----------------------------------[(1.5x1.0)2 + (1.5x1.5)2 ]

= 0.2465 m

wind velocity Vw = 25 X 1000/3600 = 6.944 m/s

Substituting these values:
Qw =C.R.A.V = 0.55x1.18x0.2465x6.944=1.111 m 3/s
ww

b) Airflow rate due to stack effect: The expression to be used is:

.
st

Q =CAW)"
(

w)

Assuming optimal distribution of areas, take a value of 0.0707 for C and area of the
smaller opening for calculation of airflow rate. Substituting these values we obtain:
()0.5 h.ATTw
=0.0707x1.5x ( 2.5x10/313 ) 05 = 0.03 m3 /s
0.5
w totalQst
Q
=
w

Q +Q

= 1.111 2 + 0.03 2

1.1114 m 3 /s

(Ans.)

It can be seen that compared to wind effect, airflow rate due to stack effect is
negligible.
Hence the total airflow rate due to the combined effect is:

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 12

Reference books for this course

2010. Refrigeration and Air Conditioning by W.F. Stoecker & J.W. Jones, McGrawHill, 1982
2011. Principles of Refrigeration by R.J. Dossat, Pearson Education, Inc., 1997
2012. Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning by F.C. McQuiston, J.D. Parker &
J.D. Spitler, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 2001
2013. Refrigeration and Air Conditioning by C.P.Arora, Tata-McGraw-Hill, 2003
2014. Refrigeration and Air Conditioning by Manohar Prasad, New Age
International, 2002
2015. Principles of Refrigeration by W.B. Gosney, Cambridge University Press,
1982
2016. Low Energy Cooling by Donald W. Abrams, Van Nostrand Reinhold
Company, 1985
2017. Air Conditioning Engineering by W.P. Jones, Butterworth Heinemann, 2001.
2018. Thermal Environmental Engineering by James L. Threlkeld, Prentice-Hall,
Inc.
2019. Air conditioning and ventilation of buildings by D.J. Croome and B.M.
Roberts, Pergamon Press
2020. ASHRAE Handbooks (4 volumes)
2021. Handbook of Air conditioning and refrigeration by Shan K. Wang, McGrawHill, 2001.

Version 1 ME, IIT Kharagpur 13